X

Inspiring Ideas for Modern Home

The Hessaire Evaporative Cooler is my top choice as it uses water-soaked filters to cool a room by removing hot, dry air. Meanwhile, the LooQoo Portable Air Conditioner is affordable and comes with adjustable wind speeds for customized cooling. Portable air conditioners are efficient for individuals who want to avoid installing permanent cooling systems. This article will explore the top 10 products for efficient cooling without external vents.

I have shortlisted the 8 best ventless portable air conditioners that are equipped with remote controls, high-tech cooling systems, and large tanks for a smooth experience. You can even use many of these units in manual mode for greater convenience.

Listed below are the 5 best ventless portable air conditioners from our list:

  • Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler. The Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler shines with its large tank capacity, air swing distribution, and dense air flow, ensuring both indoor and outdoor applications remain cool while also offering ease of customization.
  • VIVOHOME Portable Evaporative Air Cooler. The VIVOHOME Portable Evaporative Air Cooler, ideal for dry climates, excels with its dual-layer water circulation mechanism, large tank capacity, mobility, variable speed settings, and quiet operation, ensuring maximum cooling efficiency and user comfort.
  • VAGKRI Portable Evaporative Air Cooler. The VAGKRI 3-in-1 Portable Evaporative Air Cooler provides three cooling methods, impressive airflow, and a large water tank; its electronic control panel, timer settings, and the inclusion of a remote ensure ease of use and convenience.
  • HESSAIRE Portable Evaporative Cooler. HESSAIRE's Portable Evaporative Cooler is an efficient choice for hot, dry climates, with its energy-efficient axial prop, increased air intake, and portability features; however, it may be too loud for some users.
  • Honeywell Indoor Portable Evaporative Air Cooler. Honeywell’s Indoor Portable Evaporative Air Cooler offers a cost-effective cooling solution with low power consumption and robust airflow, coupled with its carbon dust air filter, remote control, and adjustable humidification, making it ideal for hot, dry climates.

1. Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler - Best With An Air Swing Distribution System

The Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooling Fan is a powerful and efficient way to cool down your space without refrigerants, as it’s designed to pull hot, dry air through a water-soaked filter. This ventless air conditioner delivers up to 3,100 cubic feet per minute of excellent airflow. Moreover, the continuous fill options of the 10.3-gallon tank and garden hose adapter allow easy water filling, providing up to 3-4 hours of use.

Many people regard this as the best ventless air conditioner for regions with high temperatures and low humidity. It is an excellent choice for outdoor pursuits such as camping, tailgating, and cookouts or indoor environments like home offices, workshops, patios, and garages. 

The mechanical control panel has uncomplicated rotary controls, including a unique motor dial, a pump, and an air swing distribution system, which makes it effortless to customize the fan's cooling intensity to your preferences. And compared to other ventless air conditioners, this is a top-notch option for individuals searching for a competent and mobile cooling solution that is environment-friendly and economically efficient. 

Its mechanical manipulation panel, alternative choices for manual and continual fill, formidable air current, and compact structure make it ideal for indoor and outdoor use.

Floor Area: 750 square feet | Reservoir Capacity: 10.3 gallons | Number of Speeds: 3 | Airflow Capacity: 3,100 CFM

2. VIVOHOME Portable Evaporative Air Cooler - Best For Dual-Liquid Circulation System

The VIVOHOME Evaporative Air Cooler presents a highly advanced solution for hot and arid environments since it boasts a dual-layer liquid circulation system. In other words, users can adjust the air speed settings as needed, while the device runs almost silently, ensuring maximum user comfort. 

Equipped with several safety features, this portable air conditioner is a vertical fan and humidifier, making it an ideal addition to any home or workplace. 

The VIVOHOME Evaporative Air Cooler is ideal for hot and arid climates, thanks to its dual-layer water circulation mechanism and two high-density ice containers, offering efficient cooling. Moreover, it boasts a substantial water tank capacity of 7L, enabling prolonged operation without frequent refills. 

With the added convenience of four universal castors and a concealed handle, this ventless AC unit can be effortlessly moved as needed. Its wind speed and direction can be tailored to suit individual preferences in three modes, and it functions quietly while equipped with triple security protection. Furthermore, it includes a timer function and remote control, doubling as a tower fan or humidifier.

Floor Area: 0.92 square feet | Reservoir Capacity: 1.8 gallons | Number of Speeds: 3 | Airflow Capacity: 250 CFM

3. VAGKRI Portable Evaporative Air Cooler - Best 3-In-1 Air Cooler

The VAGKRI 3-in-1 Portable Evaporative Air Cooler is the ultimate solution to your cooling needs because it features three cooling methods (air, water, and ice) for a refreshing and comfortable experience. With 3-sided intake panels and powerful fan motors, it removes hot air and features an ice compartment for ultra-effective cooling. 

I enjoyed the 120° oscillation handles of this portable ventless air conditioner, suitable for spaces of up to 700 sq. ft., delivering 2,100 CFM. It has an 8-gallon water tank and you can manually add water from the top or attach a garden hose for uninterrupted cooling. 

Best of all is the electronic control panel that offers ease of use and long-term reliability, with a 1-24H timer setting and three fan speeds. There is also a full-function remote control for added convenience.

The VAGKRI 3-in-1 Portable Evaporative Air Cooler further boasts cutting-edge features and robust cooling capabilities, which makes it an indispensable inclusion in any residential or commercial setting. Moreover, the air conditioning unit is outfitted with a state-of-the-art evaporation system that is highly efficient in lowering the temperature of the surrounding atmosphere. And its user-friendly interface facilitates effortless operation and customization.

Floor Area: 700 square feet | Reservoir Capacity: 7.9 gallons | Number of Speeds: 3 | Airflow Capacity: 2,100 CFM

4. HESSAIRE Portable Evaporative Cooler - Best With Patented Axial Prop

Among the best portable air conditioners is the Hessaire 1,300 CFM Evaporative Cooler, a compact and aesthetically pleasing cooling solution for dry climates or open spaces. Its expanded air intake and high-density XeL50 rigid media allow it to outperform larger evaporative coolers, while its patented axial prop is energy efficient and throws cool air farther.

The ventless air cooler features three media panels instead of a single panel, which provides more air intake and powerful air delivery. One of the advantages of the Hessaire 1,300 CFM Evaporative Cooler is its efficiency in high temperature, low humidity, and well-ventilated spaces of up to 500 square feet.

It has a high airflow capacity of 1,300 CFM, allowing it to cool larger areas effectively. Furthermore, it comes with a set of 4 wheels and a handle for easy portability, which makes it easy to move from one location to another.

However, there are some potential drawbacks to this ventless portable air conditioner. Firstly, it is only effective in certain climates or environments, and unsuitable for outdoor use in extreme conditions.

Additionally, the cooler must be positioned in front of an open window or door, which may not be feasible for some users. It is also important to note that the cooler has a maximum noise level of 60 dB, which may be too loud for some people.

Floor Area: 500 square feet | Reservoir Capacity: 4.8 gallons | Number of Speeds: 2 | Airflow Capacity: 1,300 CFM

5. Honeywell Indoor Portable Evaporative Air Cooler - Best With Carbon Dust Air Filter

The Indoor Evaporative Air Cooler, also known as a Swamp Cooler, is an ideal solution for those living in the hot and dry climates of the Southwest and Midwest regions of the United States. This powerful and energy-efficient air cooling system is designed to provide maximum comfort to its users while using minimal electricity. 

With a power consumption of just 288W and an airflow of 806 CFM, this air cooler is perfect for spot cooling small to medium-sized spaces such as living rooms, bedrooms, dens, covered patios, and garages.

One of the most noteworthy features of this air cooler is its ability to reduce the temperature of the surrounding air through environmentally friendly water evaporation. Unlike traditional air conditioners, which rely on refrigeration technology, this air cooler uses water evaporation to create a cool and refreshing breeze. This makes it a more sustainable and cost-effective alternative to traditional air conditioning units.

The Indoor Evaporative Air Cooler has a range of features designed to enhance its functionality and convenience. For instance, it has a Carbon Dust Air Filter that helps to purify the air, ensuring that the air you breathe is clean and healthy. 

Additionally, it has a remote control that allows you to adjust the settings from the comfort of your seat. The low water alarm lets you know when to refill the tank, while the energy-saving timer ensures that the cooler runs only when needed.

The cooler can provide a moist, cool breeze that can help to soothe dry skin and reduce the risk of respiratory problems associated with dry air. Another unique feature of this air cooler is its adjustable humidification dial, which can regulate the humidity level of your indoor environment. This can be particularly helpful during winter when the air tends to be drier.

The Indoor Evaporative Air Cooler also has an ice compartment, which can further enhance its cooling capabilities. Fill the compartment with ice; the cooler will produce an even cooler and more refreshing breeze.

Maintenance of the Indoor Evaporative Air Cooler is easy, thanks to its detachable tank. You can remove and clean the tank quickly and easily, ensuring that your air cooler always operates at peak efficiency.

In conclusion, the Indoor Evaporative Air Cooler is an excellent choice for those looking for an energy-efficient and sustainable cooling solution for their homes or offices. With its low power consumption, powerful airflow, and convenient features, this air cooler provides a comfortable and refreshing indoor environment, even in the hottest and driest climates.

Floor Area: 320 square feet | Reservoir Capacity: 7.9 gallons | Number of Speeds: 3 | Airflow Capacity: 525 CFM

6. PARIS RHÔNE 3 in-1 Evaporative Air Cooler - Best For 80-degree Oscillation

The PARIS RHÔNE AMZPE-TF008W01 Tower Fan is a powerful 3-in-1 unit that combines an evaporative air cooler, fan, and humidifier to provide exceptional cooling power and improve air quality in any room. With many features and settings, this tower fan is perfect for keeping your home or office cool and comfortable during hot summer days.

At 40 inches tall, this tower fan is a sleek and stylish addition to any room. Its unique features include an 80° oscillation, a 45" cooling fan, and a 19" extra-long air outlet. Additionally, this fan comes with portable universal casters, making it easy to move from room to room.

One of the standout features of the PARIS RHÔNE AMZPE-TF008W01 Tower Fan is its large 1.59-gallon water tank, which allows for an extended cooling performance without frequent refilling. This unit also has two ice packs that can be added to the tank to boost the cooling power and provide immediate relief.

The fan offers four wind speeds and three wind modes, allowing you to customize the airflow to your preferences. With a velocity of 25 ft/s, this unit provides maximum coverage, ensuring that every corner of the room stays relaxed and comfortable.

The PARIS RHÔNE AMZPE-TF008W01 Tower Fan is also incredibly user-friendly. The control panel is on top of the unit, making it easy to adjust settings or set the 15-hour timer. Alternatively, you can use the included remote control to change the settings from the comfort of your couch or bed.

Floor Area: N/A | Reservoir Capacity: 1.59 gallons | Number of Speeds: 4 | Airflow Capacity: 2,943 CFM

7. Uthfy Evaporative Cooler - Best With High-Density Cooling Pads

Dispersed over a wide area, providing maximum coverage and comfort. The three fan speeds allow you to adjust the cooling level to your desired setting, while the up-and-down manual adjustment of the oscillation function provides additional customization options.

One of the standout features of this cooling fan is its efficiency and cost-effectiveness. The 3-side rigid high-density cooling pad increases the surface area for evaporation, producing colder air. The two complimentary ice boxes can also enhance the cooling effect and provide longer-lasting coolness. As a result, this cooling fan is more energy-efficient than traditional air conditioners, making it an excellent investment for your cooling needs.

The fan's sizeable 10.6-gallon water tank allows it to blow cold air for extended periods, providing continuous relief from the heat. The water level window helps you monitor the water level, ensuring you can add water on time. Moreover, the continuous fill option lets you attach a standard garden hose with the included water pipe joint, eliminating the need to watch and fill the water tank manually.

Cleaning and maintaining the fan is also a breeze. The drainage port at the bottom of the tank makes it easy to clean the residual water in the tank, ensuring that the fan continues to operate at peak performance. The sheet metal body with electrostatic powder coating is durable and easy to clean, ensuring that the fan lasts many years.

The fan is straightforward and user-friendly, with four independent round buttons controlling the fan speed, power, cooling, and oscillation. The louvers can be manually adjusted to change the airflow direction up and down, providing additional customization options.

The fan's portability is also worth noting. It is mounted on four heavy-duty 360-degree universal wheels, making it easy to move from room to room or location to location. Two wheels are equipped with brakes, ensuring stability and safety during operation.

In conclusion, the Powerful Cooling Fan is a well-made, efficient, cost-effective solution for keeping cool and comfortable. Its impressive cooling capabilities, user-friendly operation, and portability make it an excellent investment for your home, workshop, or commercial space.

Floor Area: 10 sq. ft. | Reservoir Capacity: 1.59 gallons | Number of Speeds: 3 | Airflow Capacity: 100 CFM

8. NewAir Evaporative Air Cooler - Best With Cyclone Circulation Technology

The Portable Evaporative Cooler is a device designed to provide relief from the heat while also reducing energy costs. The device has many features that make it convenient to use and maintain, including easy-glide casters and a removable water tank for mess-free refills.

One of the critical features of the Portable Evaporative Cooler is its CycloneCirculationTM technology. This technology keeps cold air moving continuously throughout the room, creating a wind chill effect that feels cooler on the skin than still air. This feature helps to lower the room's ambient temperature efficiently, providing relief from the heat without relying on expensive air conditioning units.

Thanks to its easy-roll casters, the device is also lightweight and easy to move. The removable, 1.45-gallon water tank makes drip-free refills a snap, ensuring the device is simple to maintain.

What sets the Portable Evaporative Cooler apart is its natural cooling process. As the powerful fan pulls hot, dry air across the fibrous pad surface, water quickly turns from liquid into gas, providing a refreshing breeze that helps lower the room's temperature naturally, without any chemical coolants. This makes the device a cost-effective and eco-friendly solution for hot, dry climates west of the Mississippi River.

The device's advanced cooling technology and its easy-to-use features make it an attractive option for anyone looking to beat the heat and cut energy costs. Its natural cooling process, efficient Cyclone Circulation technology, and easy maintenance make it a smart choice for anyone seeking relief from the heat without relying on expensive or harmful cooling methods.

Floor Area: 11.5 sq. ft. | Reservoir Capacity: 1.45 gallons | Number of Speeds: 3 | Airflow Capacity: 470 CFM

What is the Best Ventless Portable Air Conditioner for Your Home?

In the table provided below, we present a detailed comparison of the best Ventless Portable Air Conditioners. This comparison focuses on essential attributes including Floor Area, Reservoir Capacity, Number of Speeds, and Airflow Capacity. These factors are pivotal in determining the effectiveness and suitability of each unit for various environments.

Product Floor Area Reservoir Capacity Number of Speeds Airflow Capacity
Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler 750 sq. ft. 10.3 gallons 3 3,100 CFM
Vivohome Portable Evaporative Air Cooler 0.92 sq. ft. 1.8 gallons 3 250 CFM
Vagkri Portable Evaporative Air Cooler 700 sq. ft. 7.9 gallons 3 2,100 CFM
Hessaire Portable Evaporative Cooler 500 sq. ft. 4.8 gallons 2 1,300 CFM
Honeywell Portable Evaporative Air Cooler 320 sq. ft. 7.9 gallons 3 525 CFM
Paris RHÔNE 3 in-1 Evaporative Air Cooler N/A 1.59 gallons 4 2,943 CFM
MEPTY CFM Evaporative Cooler 1000 sq. ft. 10.6 gallons 3 11,000 CFM
Uthfy Evaporative Cooler 10 sq. ft. 1.59 gallons 3 100 CFM
NewAir Evaporative Air Cooler 11.5 sq. ft. 1.45 gallons 3 470 CFM

Buying Guide for the Best Ventless Portable Air Conditioner

Choosing the best ventless portable air conditioner is essential for your home. Here are some key considerations to keep in mind when selecting the best unit for your needs.

Material

Choose a durable construction, such as metal, aluminum, or steel, and look for a white paint and powder coating for added durability.

Airflow

Opt for units with an airflow value of around 200 CFM to balance efficient cooling and energy savings.

Installation

Select a unit that comes with an installation kit or has an easy-to-follow installation process.

Warranty

Choose a unit with a lifetime warranty or a longer warranty period for peace of mind and confidence in the product's quality.

Noise Level

Consider the noise level of the unit, especially if you plan to install it in a bedroom or study. Look for models with a low decibel rating to avoid any disturbance.

Are ventless portable air conditioners safe?

Ventless portable air conditioners are considered safe provided that they undergo appropriate maintenance. However, due to their propensity to elevate humidity levels, users in highly humid regions should be cautious of potential increases in mold or dust mites.

How much noise does a ventless portable air conditioner make?

The noise produced by ventless portable air conditioners varies between models but it generally falls within the range of a standard fan. Owing to their lack of compressors, these air conditioners tend to produce less noise compared to conventional air conditioning units.

Where is the best place to use a ventless portable air conditioner?

Ventless portable air conditioners exhibit optimal performance in hot, dry climates. They are particularly useful in spaces where traditional air conditioning is impractical, such as older homes or buildings without HVAC systems, or for providing temporary cooling in areas like workshops or garages.

Can a ventless portable air conditioner cool multiple rooms?

Ventless portable air conditioners are largely designed to cool a single open area at any given time. For multiple rooms or larger spaces, multiple units may be required or an alternative cooling solution might need to be considered.

What maintenance is required for a ventless portable air conditioner?

The standard maintenance for a ventless portable air conditioner includes tasks such as replenishing the water tank as needed, replacing cooling pads upon signs of degradation, and routine cleaning of the unit to curtail bacteria or mold accumulation.

What is the lifespan of a ventless portable air conditioner?

Decorating glass ornaments is an integral and exciting part of Christmas celebrations. What is the best paint for glass ornaments today?

From glass baubles to stars, crystal spheres to snowman figures, doves, and reindeer – glass ornaments are available in almost all shapes, sizes, and colors. The festive spirit of Christmas, the excitement of decorating the fir tree - grows if you make your glass ornaments or customize the basic ones you have purchased. 

Painting the ornaments using enamel paint is the simplest and most effective way of adding your personal touch to the Christmas tree. With a variety of enamel paints available today, how do you select the best option that will help you decorate your glass ornaments? 

We have compiled a list of the five best paints for glass ornaments that are available in the market today. Read on to find out what paint suits your requirements!

Listed below are the 5 best paints for glass ornaments from our list:

  • Testors 9146XT Promotional Enamel Paint Set. The Testors 9146XT set provides a comprehensive selection of more than 45 colors, allowing for a wide array of creativity on various surfaces, including glass; thinning brushes are included.
  • FolkArt ENAM8SET Enamel Paint Set. FolkArt ENAM8SET stands out for its ability to deliver beautiful, fade-resistant colors on surfaces from wood to glass; it dries quickly, is easy to clean, and offers excellent value for money.
  • Martha Stewart Crafts Gloss Opaque Glass Paint in Assorted Colors. Martha Stewart Crafts Gloss Opaque Glass Paint provides a clear gloss effect on glass, plastic, mirror, or ceramic surfaces; it's weather-resistant, so it's suitable for outdoor applications.
  • DecoArt 6 Piece 1mm Brights Glass Paint Marker Set. Ideal for personalizing glass ornaments, DecoArt's 1mm Glass Paint Markers can be baked for a durable, dishwasher-safe finish; the set includes six vibrant colors.
  • Sharpie Oil-Based Paint Markers, Medium Point, Assorted Classic Colors. Sharpie Oil-Based Paint Markers come in a variety of bright colors and four versatile tip styles enabling creativity on most surfaces including glass; they're resistant to abrasion, fading, and water damage.

Painting glass is a great way to express your creativity and create unique decorations for your home. Whether you're looking to create a special gift or spruce up your own decorations, painting glass ornaments is a rewarding DIY project. Here is the list of the 5 best paint for glass ornaments you can use to create beautiful art pieces:

  1. Testors 9146XT Promotional Enamel Paint Set - Best For Comprehensive Starter Kits

Enamel Paint sets from Testors come in more than 45 colors in conventional glass bottles. The ¼oz enamel paints are available in a variety of combinations ranging from 6-bottle sets to 12-bottle kits with accessories. The Testors paint sets serve as an excellent way to let out your creativity.

The 9146XT Promotional set weighs 13.8 ounces and measures 9.9 x 1 x 4.6 inches. The essential selling point of this set is that it includes more than just paint bottles. The thinner paintbrushes that are included in this set take away the additional work of buying them separately. The paint can be easily applied on various surfaces like wood, paper, plastic, and glass.

It is advisable that you invest in a larger thinner bottle and a brush cleaner to increase the usefulness of the setas in our tests the tinner provided was used way before we were half done with the paint the kit is offering. Before applying paint to the glass ornaments, you should clean the surface with alcohol to remove the natural oils and allow the enamel to adhere firmly.

Andrew has tested this set on miniature models and dioramas, on plexiglass and glass alike, and was extremely satisfied with the quality, with his only comment being that at times more coats were required than usual. In our tests also seemed a little off, requiring even more coasts of paint than usual, but considering we are painting on translucent surfaces, that is too expected with any paint.

Type: Enamel Paint | Colors: 9 | Volume: 0.25 oz per bottle | Suitable Surfaces: Wood, Metal, Fabric, Leather, Ceramic, Plastic, Paper, Glass

  1. FolkArt ENAM8SET Enamel Paint Set - Best Value-For-Money

FolkArt is a part of the Plaid family of brands. Plaid has been one of the global leaders in the art and craft industry since 1976. The Plaid FolkArt Enamel Beginner Paint set includes eight 2oz bottles in the following colors: Wicker White, Licorice, School Bus Yellow, Pure Orange, Engine Red, Perfect Purple, Cobalt, and Hauser Green Medium.

All FolkArt enamel paint sets are made in the USA. The ENAM8SET weighs 1.65 pounds and measures 2 x 6.1 x 11 inches. The USP of the FolkArt Enamel Paint set is that it can be used on a wide array of surfaces like wood, Styrofoam, plaster, terra cotta, tin, ceramics, and glass. The paint may need a couple of coats on glass surfaces to get the desired look.

The colors apply smoothly to the surface, dry rapidly, look beautiful, and do not fade away soon. The paint can be conveniently cleaned with soap and water and are safe for the top shelf of the dishwasher. The FolkArt paint set is one of the most reasonable sets that allows you to paint on ceramics and glass and hence offers excellent value for money. 

To test this out I painted glasses for my friend's party and I'm happy to report the nice assortments of paints did the job well but somehow I received a pack in which the red paint was just normal acrylic paint, not enamel paint like the rest. Now for these glasses, I didn't need that much red so it didn't ruin the experience for me, acrylic still works on glass, but this is something to keep in mind, and maybe inquire with the seller before purchasing if your project requires red enamel.

Type: Enamel Paint | Colors: 8 | Volume: 2 fl oz per bottle | Suitable Surfaces: Glass, Ceramic, Metal, Terra Cotta, Stone, Porcelain, and Resin

  1. Martha Stewart Crafts Gloss Opaque Glass Paint in Assorted Colors - Best For Fine Detailing

Martha Stewart Crafts is a part of the Plaid family of brands. Plaid has been one of the global leaders in the art and craft industry since 1976. The Martha Stewart Crafts Glass Paint set is made in the USA and has diverse uses ranging from painting, silk-screening, and outlining on glass surfaces.

The opaque glass paint from Martha Stewart Crafts allows you to create evident gloss effects on any glass, plastic, mirror, or ceramic surface. The fine tip allows quick and easy paint application. These paints from Martha Stewart Crafts are safe for the top shelf of the dishwasher. The color is water-based, non-toxic, and weather-resistant.

Allow the paint to air dry or bake, as per the surface and your requirements. It can be easily cleaned before it dries out with a damp cloth, allowing you to rectify mistakes and redo a coat if needed. Given its weather-resistant feature, this paint can be used in outdoor applications as well which gives it an edge over similar paints in this price range.

The Martha Stewart Crafts opaque paint set includes 2-ounce bottles in a variety of colors. The paint does not leave any significant scent or fume, making it easy to use.

I've painted two mason jars, with the glitter blue variant and lupsa color and the good part is that it stuck to the jars, while the bad part is the blue is not really a solid blue but clear. This means that light will pass through the glass and creates somehow an unfinished look that is not fit for all projects, however, with a base coat, primer coat, or a lot of layers, you can achieve a solid look too.

A base coat will show on the inside of the glass while a lot of layers might be odd as the nice sparkles do have a texture and thus, the layers will be rather thick.

Overall, I would recommend going for a different set if you need the solid look, if you need a translucent glittery finish, this is your pick.

Type: Glass Paint | Colors: 12 | Volume: 2 oz per bottle | Suitable Surfaces: Glass, Ceramic, Porcelain, Metal, Terra Cotta, Stone, and Resin

  1. DecoArt 6 Piece 1mm Brights Glass Paint Marker Set

DecoArt 6 pieces 1mm Glass Paint Markers is ideal for glass, glazed ceramic, porcelain, and metal surfaces. These paint markers can be used to personalize, draw, or outline on glass ornaments. You can even bake it in the oven for a dishwasher-safe and durable finish. It is recommended that the paint does not come in direct contact with any food items.

Each of the DecoArt Glass Paint Markers is water-based, non-toxic, and comes in a glossy, translucent finish. The paint markers have excellent adhesion and a sturdy fiber nib. The marker set includes six colors – Fuchsia, Citron, Yellow, Turquoise, Orange, and Violet. Other colors like white, red, green, blue, brown, black, silver, and gold can also be purchased individually.

To use the glass paint markers optimally, it is recommended that you shake the markers well before use and clean the surface with a glass cleaner. You need to press down gently on the tip to activate the marker and make the color appear on the surface. Ideally, you should allow the paint to air-cure for approximately eight hours. To get a dishwasher-safe finish, place the painted ornament in a cold oven and bake for 30 minutes at 325 degrees Fahrenheit.

I used these briefly in the office to create funny mugs and glasses with the nicknames of my colleagues, some of them were not amused and thus we erased them all at the end of the day. We didn't bake the mugs to get the dishwasher-safe finish but while drawing on mugs, the markers were exemplary, with really bright colors, great fine tips that allow you to create good details, and a solid marker set to paint on glasses and mugs.

Type: Paint Marker | Colors: 6 | Volume: 1mm tip | Suitable Surfaces: Glass, Porcelain, and Ceramic

  1. Sharpie Oil-Based Paint Markers, Medium Point, Assorted Classic Colors

Since 1964, Sharpie has been a well-known brand in the arts and crafts industry. Being the world’s first pen-style permanent marker, Sharpie is a pioneer of paint markers. Sharpie’s Oil-Based Paint Markers are available in various bright colors. The markers are non-toxic, and the oil-based ink resists abrasion, fading, and water damage.

The valve-action design of the Sharpie markers guarantees smooth application on most surfaces, including metal and glass. The pens come in four versatile tip styles – bold, medium, fine, and extra fine. The 34971PP set weighs 4 ounces and measures 7.5 x 5.2 x 0.8 inches. The set includes oil-based markers in black, white, blue, yellow, and red colors.

It is recommended that before putting the markers to use the first time, place the tip to face upright and push against your finger. Recap the pen and shake it, and then press the tip on the surface several times for the paint to appear. The markers are xylene-free and non-toxic, which makes them safe for use by children too.

Sharpes require no introduction, they do the trick and they do it well, the different tip styles allowed me to experiment with the design and mix up different lines, ranging from extra fine to bold. Sharpie’s Oil-Based Paint Markers are ideal for creating designs on glass ornaments that you want to use in the long run but they're a bit more expensive than the Deco Art markers and needless to say not all projects are permanent. For crafts with kids and I'd always go for the DecoArt markers while for a more permanent mug, glass, or wine bottle centerpiece that I'd like to keep for years, I would order the Sharpies.

Type: Paint Marker | Colors: 5 | Volume: 0.5 oz per marker | Suitable Surfaces: Glass, Plastic, Metal, Ceramic, and Wood

What is the Best Paint For Glass Ornament?

Presented below is a comparison table proficiently designed to illuminate pivotal traits of the foremost paints suited for glass ornaments. The table weighs up factors such as type, colors, volume, and suitable surfaces.

Product Type Colors Volume Suitable Surfaces
Testors 9146XT Promotional Enamel Paint Set Enamel Paint 9 0.25 oz per bottle Wood, Metal, Fabric, Leather, Ceramic, Plastic, Paper, Glass
FolkArt ENAM8SET Enamel Paint Set Enamel Paint 8 2 fl oz per bottle Glass, Ceramic, Metal, Terra Cotta, Stone, Porcelain, and Resin
Martha Stewart Crafts Gloss Opaque Glass Paint in Assorted Colors Glass Paint 12 2 oz per bottle Glass, Ceramic, Porcelain, Metal, Terra Cotta, Stone, and Resin
DecoArt 6 Piece 1mm Brights Glass Paint Marker Set Paint Marker 6 1mm tip Glass, Porcelain, and Ceramic
Sharpie Oil-Based Paint Markers, Medium Point, Assorted Classic Colors Paint Marker 5 0.5 oz per marker Glass, Plastic, Metal, Ceramic, and Wood

Tips for Painting Glass Ornaments

Painting glass ornaments can be a fun and rewarding way to personalize your holiday decorations. With a few simple tips, you can get professional-looking results from your painted glass ornaments.

Choose the right brush

When it comes to painting glass ornaments, the right brush choice is essential. Use a brush with a fine tip that will allow you to paint intricate details without leaving any brush strokes. A brush with natural bristles is ideal, as synthetic bristles may leave streaks and brush hairs behind.

Allow ample drying time

To ensure that your painted glass ornaments last, it is important to allow them to dry completely before you move on to the next layer of paint. Depending on the type of paint you use, drying time can range from a few hours to several days, oils dry out harder while acrylics dry faster, do read the label of the paint and note that on glass, in general, all paints dry out slower, due to the perfect glass finish and lack of porosity. To ensure that your ornaments are completely dry, allow at least 24 hours before proceeding to the next step.

Use a clear sealant

To protect your painted glass ornaments, use a clear sealant such as a clear acrylic spray. This will help to protect the paint from fading and peeling and will give your ornaments a glossy finish or matte finish.

Guide to Store Glass Ornaments

Once the festival is over, the ornaments are taken off and stored safely for the next year. Here is a summary of the best ways to store your favorite glass ornaments:

Dedicated Containers

You would have thrown the original packaging of the glass ornaments most likely and could use special ornament boxes to store them. A variety of ornament boxes are available in the market, made from different materials and featuring unique designs.

DIY Containers

For those of you who are highly creative, creating a storage bin or container with readily available materials like cardboard, plastic cups, bubble wrap, and glue is the best option.

Egg Carton

To store small glass ornaments safely, an egg carton can serve as an original and effective storage space. You need to place the fragile ornaments inside the egg carton, and you may add a layer of bubble wrap or tissue for additional safety.

How do you get paint to stick to glass ornaments?

Pour 1 tsp of rubbing alcohol into the glass ball ornament. Shake the ornament, covering the opening with your finger. This will help to clean the interior surface of the ball, ensuring the paint sticks to the desired area, rinse and repeat if necessary.

How Do I Seal Paint on Glass?

You can choose to seal your glass artwork in two ways: by applying a chemical glass paint sealer or by baking it in an oven. Both options will make your artwork more durable thanks to the hard-wearing, long-lasting finish that will keep your art as new for years to come.

Can you use acrylic paint on the glass?

Acrylic paint can be used to paint on glass objects such as mirrors, vases, wine glasses, and mason jars. This is a great way to personalize these pieces; however, acrylic paint may not always adhere to glass easily, so using a primer or a base layer might come in handy.

Can I paint both the inside and outside of a glass ornament?

You can paint the outside of glass Christmas ornaments with any design you choose that showcases your artistic abilities. For a marbled effect, swirl various colors of craft paint inside the ornament.

Different color combinations and swirling methods result in unique results every time so do experiment with all options with paints that can be easily erased before sealer, or baking to find your ideal design.

How to Seal Acrylic Paint on Glass

To seal acrylic paint on glass, purchase an acrylic sealant that is suitable for glass surfaces. Opt for a glass paint sealer with a glossy finish for best results as they’re a bit more hard-wearing and long-lasting. This sealant is available in spray-on or brush-on formulas.

Thank you so much for taking the time to read our article on the best paint for glass ornaments! We hope that it has been both informative and exciting, walking you through some of the most exceptional products available in the market.

Out of these 5 exceptional paint products for glass ornaments, here are the top three expert recommendations:

As you embark on your journey to create dazzling glass ornaments, we hope our top picks help you achieve beautiful results. Remember that a little creativity, patience, and the right tools make all the difference in crafting the perfect piece. We encourage you to let your imagination run wild and have fun creating glass ornaments that reflect your personality and style. Happy painting!

The Kreg name in the woodworking industry is associated with a high-quality jig pocket hole system. 

An extremely useful tool with one caveat: it can be expensive for many on a budget. So how can you get a jig pocket hole system that’s on par with a Kreg system at a lower price point? This guide will dive into this very issue and lay out what you need to be looking out for when choosing a suitable alternative. 

Cheaper price points come with their own compromises to lower the cost. What then are the necessary features you should have in a pocket hole jig system? 

Let us begin and find out!

Listed below are the 5 best alternatives for Kreg Jig Pocket Hole Screws:

  • Wolfcraft Pocket Hole Jig Kit. Made of durable nylon and glass, the Wolfcraft Pocket Hole Jig Kit provides a sturdy, lightweight jig pocket hole tool that comes with 40 screws of varying lengths, ready for creating pocket holes instantly.
  • General Tools Pocket Hole Jig. General Tools offers a cost-effective 850 model Pocket Hole Jig made from aluminum, which is a great performer and comes with 24 square drive self-tapping screws.
  • Armor Auto-Jig Pocket Hole System. Standing out for its unique features, Armor Auto-Jig Pocket Hole System offers a tool that creates invisible screws to join materials, automatically makes adjustments to the drill guide, and has screws that are easily identifiable due to a color-coded classification.
  • Silverline Pocket Hole Jig. Silverline offers a simple-to-use Pocket Hole Jig that provides three hole size options and screw pocket holes at a 15-degree angle, ideal for users who prefer simplicity and speed.
  • Big Horn Pock’It Jig. The Big Horn Pock’It Jig is a sturdy system made from solid metal that is great for moderate use and provides control over adjusting the hole depth and the angle of the drill.

Some screws can perform to their utmost potential if used in conjunction with an appropriate jig pocket hole tool. Matching a screw to the jig is a matter of considering the strengths of the jig and comparing it to the limitations of the screw. 

Depending on how easy the jig is to use, the application of the screw can be a challenging task. Adjustments to angle, size of the hole and screw, and overall convenience are important factors that set jig pocket hole systems apart. 

Furthermore, the flexibility of the jig tool itself can determine how effective it is in drilling into different thicknesses in materials. This flexibility refers to the versatility of adjustments that the jig can operate with. Everything from the hole type drilled to the angle and material thickness, a flexible jig can get the most performance out of a screw over a “rigid” model. 

By taking into account how the screw is designed and performs, the jig can either be a great asset or a hindrance. Either way, it is essential to consider how different jigs will affect the performance of a screw based on their unique designs and features. 

1. Wolfcraft Pocket Hole Jig Kit

A truly unique design choice by the Wolfcraft brand makes for a sturdy, lightweight jig pocket hole tool. It is an unbreakable, one-piece build made of nylon and mixed with glass. 

The pocket hole jig kit from Wolfcraft has any and every tool you could need to get started with making pocket holes. With a starting amount of 40 screws of varying lengths, as well as a ⅜” step drill, a ⅜” stop collar, and a ⅛” hex key, you will have everything you need to make pocket holes right away. 

All 40 screws included in the Wolfcraft kit is a square drive screw, similar to the Kreg screw. There are four sizes - 1”, 1 ½”, 1 ¼”, and 2 ½” screws; ten screws for every length type—a decent selection of sizes to begin making pocket holes for different material thicknesses. 

This pocket hole jig kit is ideal for those who do not require any bells and whistles and want a simple tool that gets the job done. The Wolfcraft jig kit has pre-determined depths to control how deeply the screw is affixed to the material—these range from half an inch to an inch and a half. 

Additionally, due to the compact size of the jig kit, it can be used in hard-to-reach spots as well. Weighing only 1.6 pounds, this jig pocket hole kit is portable while remaining functional with enough versatility to be helpful.

Material: Nylon Plastic | Thickness Settings: 1/2, 3/4, 1, and 1 1/2"

2. General Tools Pocket Hole Jig

General Tools offers an inexpensive jig pocket hole system in their 850 models. With a primarily aluminum build, these jigs are still great performers with acceptable quality output. What’s more, General Tools includes 24 square drive self-tapping screws in the kit, similar to the Kreg screw design. 

Using this jig system may not give you the best performance, but it is a good choice for those who are on a budget. Similarly, it can get you started by using screws that are similar to the Kreg design, a similar performance for a lower price. 

Material: Aluminum | Thickness Settings: 1/2 - 1 1/2"

3. Armor Auto-Jig Pocket Hole System

Truly one of the more impressive advancements of a jig pocket hole system, the Armor Auto brand has pushed the envelope in woodworking engineering. 

What makes the Armor Auto system shine is the ability to create invisible screws to join materials. Using a preset system that automatically makes adjustments to the drill guide, there will be no need for any manual input. Simply determine the thickness of the material to be joined, and the jig will do the rest. 

In terms of the screw system on the Armor Auto-jig pocket hole model, it is phenomenal. With a color-coded classification, the screws are easily identifiable for different purposes. Determining which screw is suitable in terms of thickness and depth of the pocket hole is a much easier task using this color-coded system. 

Beyond the convenience of selecting an appropriate screw, the color-coding of the screws increases the longevity of the screw. Corrosion and other elements are not able to have as strong of an effect due to the painted surface acting like a protective layer.

Other features that may be helpful in the Armor Auto-jig are the auto-changing clamp, flexible drill bit, and the number of dust collection ports. Having these extra features can go a long way when it comes to productivity and efficiency. 

Material: Steel | Thickness Settings: 1/4 - 3/4"

4. Silverline Pocket Hole Jig

Expensive models of jig pocket hole systems can be overwhelming in their large number of uses and features. If a simple system that does the bare minimum well is what you need, this system from Silverline is an excellent choice. 

Coming with three options for hole sizes, the Silverline system does not offer much besides getting the job done quickly and accurately. It provides a six mm, eight mm, or ten mm hole size in a small package. Additionally, the Silverline model screws pocket holes at a 15-degree angle. 

Overall the build is lightweight as it has one solid body construction. While it may be a simple system to use without any bells and whistles, it is still durable and can go a distance. The materials it is constructed from are heavy-duty aluminum, ensuring a long working life. 

Using any type of screw is not an issue as there are no prerequisites as to what screw is compatible or not. This opens up a world of experimentation to see which screw is the best-performing option for a project. 

Due to the ease of use and portability, this Silverline model is a great starting point for casual users or those less experienced in this tool. 

Material: Plastic | Thickness Settings: 6, 8 and 10 mm

5. Big Horn Pock’It Jig

Another alternative to the Kreg jig pocket hole system is the BigHorn Pock’It Jig. This model is great for those who get light to moderate use out of their jig pocket hole tool but need more control while using it. 

With a solid metal design, this is a sturdy system that does not have too many extra features. Rather, the Pock’It Jig gives control over adjusting the hole depth and the angle of the drill. A stop collar determines how deep the hole will be drilled, while an adjustable drill guide controls the angle of the drill. 

Included with this system are a square drive bit, a hex wrench, a ⅜” step drill, and a working clamp. Additionally, it also includes square drive pocket screws.

Material: Steel | Thickness Settings: N/A

6. MASSCA Pocket Hole Screw Jig Set

MASSCA is a fierce competitor when it comes to pocket hole systems. It is a popular choice for many woodworkers due to its budget-friendly price and highly efficient setup. Exceptional performance in areas such as safety, ease of use, speed, and efficiency, makes this system stand out from other alternatives.

It is recommended to use this jig with materials of thickness ranging from ½” to 1 ½”. A magnetic clamp will keep the board secure while also automatically gauging its thickness. The MASSCA system also has an adjustable drill depth setting which is intuitive and straightforward. 

Pairing this system with MASSCA’s own jig pocket hole screws will give an outstanding performance in repair or joint work. All the features of the pocket hole screw jig set, with the performance of the specially designed screws, work in harmony to create a seamless joint. 

Material: Steel | Thickness Settings: 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, and 1 1/2"

What is the Best Alternative for Kreg Jig Pocket Hole Screws?

Below is a comparison table, proficiently structured to elucidate the fundamental characteristics of the top alternatives for Kreg Jig pocket hole screws. Careful comparison of attributes like the material used and their suitability to various thickness settings has been undertaken.

Product Material Thickness Settings
Wolfcraft Pocket Hole Jig Kit Nylon Plastic 1/2, 3/4, 1, and 1 1/2"
General Tools Pocket Hole Jig Aluminum 1/2 - 1 1/2"
Armor Auto-Jig Pocket Hole System Steel 1/4 - 3/4"
Silverline Pocket Hole Jig Plastic 6, 8 and 10 mm
Big Horn Pock’It Jig Steel N/A
MASSCA Pocket Hole Screw Jig Set Steel 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, and 1 1/2"

Alternatives To Kreg Screws

There are a number of screws that can replace a Kreg model with enough shared characteristics to act in place of the Kreg screw adequately. These come at a number of price points and build qualities to save you from spending a fortune. 

If using a Kreg jig pocket hole is not in your plans, there is a workaround method you can try. This method is known as a mortise and tenon joint and does not require any screws at all. However, this method requires more practice to get down. 

The mortise and tenon joint takes time to complete as it is highly technical and can be challenging to master. As a result, it is not a widely used method by many woodworkers due to the convenience that a jig tool brings. On the other hand, this joint provides a stronger hold than pocket holes. 

Another excellent method to finding a suitable replacement screw is simple trial and error. Buying a few screws from different manufacturers and brands can help you decide what you like or what doesn’t work. However, this can be time-consuming and add up in cost if you don’t know what to look out for in an alternative screw.

If there is absolutely no way to avoid purchasing Kreg screws, compare different outlets as the pricing may range between them. Additionally, bulk buying the Kreg screws can save you money in the long run. 

However, if an alternative screw is what you are looking for, several options are available that can work well with the Kreg jig pocket hole tool. These alternatives have the necessary characteristics, along with some of their own, to match a Kreg jig pocket hole screw. 

  1. Customer Service Hardware (CSH) Pan-head Screws

These screws are likely the most recommended alternative to using a Kreg jig pocket hole screw. It shares almost every important characteristic required in the Kreg screw.  

The CSH Pan-head screw, as evident from its name, has a pan-head style head. This design is similar to the washer head style of the Kreg screw. The Pan-head design has a flat underside that will keep the screw securely fastened and keep it from sinking. 

Additionally, the CSH screw also has a crucial self-tapping design in the tip. This is one of the essential characteristics of the Kreg screw as it allows for a clean and smooth drilling process. 

Purchasing these screws can save you lots of money as they come at a fair price. They can be bought in packs of 500 or individually at about four cents a screw—a great alternative to the expensive Kreg screw for its similar functionality and price. 

  1. SNUG Pocket Hole Screw

A zinc-coated screw from SNUG, this screw has enough shared characteristics with a Kreg screw to be a candidate for a replacement. The zinc coating and slightly longer length set it apart from a Kreg screw. 

For the characteristics that are shared with a Kreg screw, the SNUG screw has a self-tapping head and a square head bit. The self-tapping tip keeps it from slipping too deep into the wood, and the square head bit affords extra torque when drilling. 

  1. MASSCA Pocket Hole Screws

If you are looking to replace not just the Kreg screws but the entire assembly as well, Massca may be a suitable choice for you. Massca has its own line of pocket hole screws that are priced lower, with their own pocket hole jigs to match. 

Selling their screws by 1,000 in a set, Massca gives a large volume as well as options for screws. The set comes with two types of screws for working on different projects and materials. These screws are either a finely threaded screw for hardwoods or a coarsely threaded screw for softwood. 

Finely threaded screws have the ability to have a much tighter grip on the wood as the space between threads bites into the surrounding recess better. On the other hand, coarsely threaded screws have more space between the threads. This spacing keeps the screw from splitting the fibers of the wood too much and causing damage or splitting. 

  1. Quick Screw Pocket Hole Screws

To get the most savings out of an alternative screw option, buying in bulk is a good idea. The Quick Screw line sells alternative jig pocket hole screws in large quantities for an affordable price. 

As for their compatibility with a Kreg jig pocket hole, they share the characteristics of the self-tapping and square-head bit, similar to the Kreg screw. Both of these characteristics are essential to achieve a similar quality work result than using the genuine Kreg screw. 

However, these screws are not zinc-coated, unlike the other alternative screws. This compromise means the Quick Screw alternative loses some resistance to corrosion and strength. 

These screws are ideal for those who are using a jig pocket hole tool extensively for a project. Quick Screw advertises their screws as being an alternative screw option that is compatible with any jig tool—as such, purchasing the Quick Screw bulk package is a great option to stock up on jig pocket hole screws for large projects. 

Strengths Of The Pocket Hole Jig System 

To establish an idea of what features a pocket hole jig needs, the basic understanding of what it does should be made clear. It is essentially the go-to tool for joining materials and creating high-quality joints. 

With the way the pocket hole jig system is designed, it is easy to access tight spaces where other joining techniques would fail. The drill bit is pushed through the holes on the pocket hole jig to create perfect, level joining points. These can then be used to connect the material to another surface having the corresponding recess to hold the screws.

It is a rigid, portable tool that can accurately produce the same result if used correctly. This consistency is what makes the pocket hole jig so great, especially for intricate projects that demand precision. 

The jig can be adjusted to achieve variations in angles or when working at different angles and tight spaces. A simple adjustment saves you the time and effort in calculating the angles of the hole. The jig will adjust according to the angle and width of the board. 

Additionally, when using a pocket hole jig system, the ability to make repairs or interchange pieces at the joints is easy. This is as compared to using traditional methods, which are more permanent once joined.

It is never a bad idea to have a pocket hole jig tool handy in your woodworking shop. 

Types Of Pocket Hole Jigs

Pocket hole jigs vary based on their price points and quality. The price tag of the jig is directly related to the quality of the performance of the pocket hole jig. Higher-priced tools are usually superior in quality with a better build and output. 

Among the pocket hole jigs available, the models from Kreg are widely used for their top-notch performance. However, as they are a top-of-the-line model, they are also priced accordingly. This can make it inaccessible to those who have a limited budget. 

On the other hand, purchasing a lower-priced model is by no means a complete loss. There is simply a lower-quality performance output that is still acceptable. 

Differences in the build quality of the jig itself are another different characteristic between an expensive and cheaper jig pocket hole model. Some may have a durable, metallic build, while others consist of some plastic components. 

Additionally, expensive jigs occasionally have unique features that can help boost the efficiency of the tool. Performance, as well as convenience, take a significant boost with these top-of-the-line models. 

If it is possible to purchase a high-quality jig pocket hole, then it is an excellent investment that will pay for itself in no time. 

Using A Kreg Jig Pocket Hole 

The advantage of using a high-quality jig pocket hole tool from Kreg is how well the screws are held in place. Rather than a straight insertion of the screw through the grain of the wood, the jig inserts the screws along the grain at an angle. 

In order to use the Kreg jig, simply use the clamp to secure the board to the jig. It will adjust the angle of the holes according to the width of the board. A helpful feature in the Kreg jig tool is the ability to use integrated slots in order to make them exactly sized recesses. 

Now, a common inconvenience faced by Kreg pocket hole jig owners is in the screws used for the tool. They have unique screws that their jigs are designed to accommodate. This means screws that are not similar to the Kreg screw model will not perform as well as using an original Kreg screw. 

As a result, finding a cheaper pocket hole screw model for the Kreg model can save a lot of money. But it will not be a suitable replacement option if there are not enough similar characteristics between the alternative screw model and the Kreg model. 

What Makes A Kreg Pocket Hole Screw Unique?

In order to find the best replacement screw possible, there are specific characteristics of the Kreg model that should be matched. If the screw has matching characteristics, then it is a suitable replacement for the Kreg model.

  1. Square Head Bit

Kreg screws have a unique recess for the pocket hole that is squared off. Also called a “Roberts” head screw, the shape of this recess increases the overall grip of the screw without stripping it. 

This square recess in the head is not a required characteristic of a replacement screw; however, it can help to secure it better. Using a replacement screw that has a traditional Phillips head or other types of recession can make drilling it difficult and cause slippage. 

  1. Self-Tapping Screw

An essential feature that a replacement screw should have is ‘self-tapping.’ A self-tapping screw means it can put threads into the recess to keep it securely fit. 

When drilling into a material, the drill makes a space that hides the head of the screw. The self-tapping screw will fill up this space with its threads that hold it in place. A small section at the head will dig into the space created by the drill to keep it in place. 

  1. Washer Head 

Kreg jig pocket hole screws have a washer head style, which is a fundamental characteristic to match on the replacement model. A washer head-style screw has what appears to be a washer attached underneath the head of the screw. 

What makes these washer head screws so unique and a necessary characteristic for the Kreg pocket hole jigs? When drilling the screw into the material, it is pushed deep into the surface. This is due to the design of the washer head, which will dig into the material to be flush against the surface. 

Other benefits of using a washer head screw come in the future-proofing of the screw itself. Having the head of the screw flush increases the strength of its grip on the material. Any necessary repairs are possible as the head is accessible; it has not sunk too deep into the hole. 

Another benefit of the washer head is the control that is afforded in how deeply it pierces the material. If it is drilled too deeply, it can be retrieved because the washer acts as an anchor. Additionally, the washer can protect the wood grain from being split and damaged. Controlling the screw’s depth can prevent it from going too far into the wood and damaging the fibers. 

Choosing An Alternative Jig Pocket Hole System

In order to choose an alternative to the expensive Kreg jig pocket hole system, keep in mind the different strengths and weaknesses of models. A screw’s grip is only as good as the system that embeds it in the first place. 

Different manufacturers have designed their systems to give a balance between quality and an affordable price. As such, different models have various combinations of strengths and weaknesses. 

Choosing the right jig pocket hole system is just a matter of prioritizing what you would like in a system. Keep in mind some points to select a suitable combination for you. 

  1. Build Quality

The jig pocket hole system should have a strong build for a better quality result. There is a correlation between the system’s build quality and the performance you’ll get. 

Having a system that can go the distance is highly preferred over one that will break down after only a few months of use. Looking into the materials that the system is made with can save you money in buying a replacement at a later date. 

For example, a full-metal body will be able to stand multiple uses for a longer time compared to one with a simple plastic body. If the jig pocket hole is a tool that you can see working with a lot in the future, invest in a sturdily built one now to save money in the future. 

  1. Experience

Using a jig pocket hole screw can be a different experience depending on how familiar you are with the tools. A novice, for example, may not be experienced enough to take full advantage of the features of a complicated system. On the other hand, a professional will be able to utilize the system to its full potential. 

Choosing a system that matches your experience with the range of tools involved is a good route to go. However, if you plan on using the tool extensively or need a system with advanced features, a complex system is a great choice. 

Additionally, in order to get the most out of a jig pocket hole, look for a model that has numerous adjustments to angles, material thicknesses, and different drilling hole types. This range of options can help you get a variety of work done, no matter the project. 

Many jig pocket hole models have an included guide or manual that details the various functions the tool has. Going through these instructions is a great idea to use the jig pocket hole to its utmost potential if you are unfamiliar with the features. 

  1. Maintenance

Simple systems are easier to maintain as the number of moving parts is less than complicated builds. Time spent cleaning the dust and debris as well as the jig pocket hole system varies on the level of maintenance required. 

On the other hand, more complex jig pocket hole models typically have a dust collection system built into them. This can save time in cleaning the system and the dust and debris around the workplace by keeping it in one, easily disposable bag. 

  1. Sizing

Depending on the size of the workshop, the real estate tools can be a valuable resource. Smaller-sized systems can give you a different quality result as compared to a larger model. 

Stability is not too much of an issue as the jig pocket hole can easily secure itself to the material. As such, this gives you the freedom to have a portable system if needed. Not many features will be compromised if you choose a smaller system over a larger one. 

If a permanent setup in your main workshop is what you are looking for, you can invest in a system with many helpful extra features. On the other hand, smaller systems can give you a satisfactory result while maintaining their portability and ease of use. 

Where can a pocket hole be placed with the best result?

Pocket holes act as invisible connections between two pieces of wood. As such, to keep the joint between two surfaces clean, it should be used on surfaces that are not immediately visible.

Utilizing a pocket hole on a surface with complete visibility can destroy the effect of a clean joint. This choice to keep the pocket hole hidden away is purely for aesthetic purposes. If having a pristine surface is not an issue for you, then it does not matter where the hole is placed.

Using plugs or painting over the pocket hole is a great way to maintain the illusion of a seamless connection. This can come in handy when it is difficult to hide the pocket hole or if it is in an awkward position to drill a pocket hole.

What is the most robust connection to join boards?

Woodworking has many different styles of joints that have their own level of strength and skill attached to them. What would be the best joint to use to have the most secure fit between boards?

Some common joints used are the pocket hole, dowel, or mortise and tenon joints. Dowel joints can vary in their strength depending on the number of dowels used in the joint. Using four dowels in place of two can increase the joint’s strength significantly.

A mortise and tenon joint is one of the strongest joints in woodworking. It is twice as strong as a pocket hole joint. Comparatively, a dowel joint is only 1.5 times stronger than a pocket hole joint. To achieve the same strength as a mortise and tenon joint, four dowels would be needed instead of the standard two.

That is not to say that the pocket hole is a weak joint by any means. It is still durable and sturdy enough to handle many loads. In fact, it is possible for the pocket hole joint to be stronger than a mortise and tenon joint.

In a study conducted, the pocket hole joint was able to withstand a trim load of 707 pounds. Meanwhile, the mortise and tenon joint only lasted 453 pounds before breaking. The strength of a joint is dependent on many factors, but using a pocket hole joint remains an excellent option for hidden joints.

What is the smallest board thickness that is compatible with a Kreg pocket hole jig?

Kreg jig pocket hole systems come with a guide specifically when working with smaller board thicknesses. The Micro-Pocket Drill Guide ensures the pocket hole won’t pierce through the entire board.

Additionally, applying a layer of instant glue to the hole after drilling is a helpful step to take. This instant glue, when dried, makes the rim of the hole harder. A more rigid rim will help keep the screw securely fastened.

A Kreg jig pocket hole is definitely a great tool to have for working in any woodworking shop, especially for projects with precise joints like furniture. However, the high pricing of the Kreg system makes looking for an alternative screw a necessary route to take if you want to save money. 

Selecting the right screw for your project is simply a matter of finding a suitable screw with enough similarities to a Kreg screw that meet your needs. Keep in mind these qualities to find the best replacement: self-tapping, square-drive screw with a washer head. 

Mixing and matching these characteristics with others in the replacement screw can help you get the most out of your Kreg system without breaking the bank. 

Drawing manga is one of the most challenging and rewarding experiences for an artist.

If you are not familiar with manga, it is the comic book version of Japanese anime. So why should you take up drawing manga?

The Japanese manga market is already worth billions of dollars today, while international markets are seeing a steady rise in the popularity of manga comics. Now is as good a time as ever for manga enthusiasts and beginners to take it up professionally. 

Having the right drawing books can help you overcome the somewhat steep learning curve of this art form.

We have shortlisted 21 books that will help you learn everything you need to know to get started with this exciting and immensely creative art form.

Without further ado, let’s get straight to our top recommendations for Manga drawing books today.

Listed below are the 5 best manga drawing books to help hone your skills and create stunning manga artwork:

  • The Master Guide to Drawing Anime. Authored by best-selling artist Christopher Hart, The Master Guide to Drawing Anime provides valuable insight into drawing six popular anime-type characters, offering detailed illustrations and exercises that allow readers of all ages and skill levels to create original characters.
  • Manga for the Beginner. Another gem from Christopher Hart, Manga for the Beginner is an ideal resource for novices who can hold a pencil and wish to start drawing manga, providing comprehensive information extending beyond the basics to cover special effects, perspective, dynamic action poses, light, and shading.
  • Mastering Manga with Mark Crilley. Crafted by popular YouTube art instructor and graphic novelist Mark Crilley, Mastering Manga with Mark Crilley is best-suited for individuals with a basic understanding of manga art, offering extensive content on drawing figures, faces, hands, eyes, and more, along with advanced lessons on inking and layout options.
  • How to Draw Manga: Mastering Manga Drawings. How to Draw Manga: Mastering Manga Drawings by Andrew Harnes is a comprehensive guide providing insights into the fundamentals of manga art starting from materials to use and character drawings from different angles, available at affordable prices and suited for drawing fantastic manga illustrations quickly.
  • Basic Anatomy for the Manga Artist. Christopher Hart's Basic Anatomy for the Manga Artist makes anatomical features of manga characters easy to understand, offering step-by-step illustrations, anatomical information, and before-after comparisons to grasp the unique aesthetics of Japanese characters in manga.

Here is the list of the 21 best manga drawing books to help you hone your skills and create stunning manga artwork.

1. The Master Guide to Drawing Anime - Best for Character Creation

Christopher Hart is a bestselling how-to-draw author who is well-known amongst Manga artists. It is only fair that the numero uno spot on our recommendations list should be one of his books. It is the first book in a series of three; you will find the other two books as well on this list.

This book gives you valuable insight into drawing six popular anime-type characters – schoolboys, schoolgirls, preteens, humorous personalities, fantasy figures, and vengeful bad guys. We especially like the thoughtful inclusion of templates along with a diverse range of options for head, body, accessories, and outfits for each of these six characters.

The detailed, step-by-step illustrations and exercises will ensure that you can create original characters by the time you finish this book. Irrespective of your age and manga skill level, you can learn something from this book. And did we mention that it has exceptional print quality too?

Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Drawing with Christopher Hart | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: July 7, 2015 | No. of Pages: 144 | Dimensions: 9" x 0.5" x 10" | Weight: 1.2lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

2. Manga for the Beginner - Best for Absolute Beginners

The next manga drawing book we want to recommend comes from Christopher Hart again. As the name suggests, it is a book that has been specially designed for beginners. If you can hold a pencil, you can start drawing manga with the help of this book.

The author uses his signature style involving step-by-step illustrations and instructions to explain how to draw the basic body, head, eyes, hair, and more. It is a comprehensive book consisting of 192 pages of everything you need to know to begin your manga journey.

Unlike other books for manga beginners, it goes a step further beyond the basics by covering special effects, perspective, dynamic action poses, light, and shading. You will get an overall understanding of what goes into creating excellent manga art. Moreover, you get to explore some popular types of manga characters, including anthros, animals, shoujo, and shounen.

It is available in paperback, library binding, and Kindle versions.

Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: First Edition | Publication Date: August 5, 2008 | No. of Pages: 192 | Dimensions: 8.5" x 0.52" x 10" | Weight: 1.56lbs | Other Format/s: Spiral-Bound, Kindle

3. Mastering Manga with Mark Crilley - Best for Intermediate Artists

Mark Crilley is one of YouTube’s most renowned art instructors and graphic novelists. This drawing book will work best for people who have a basic understanding of manga art. It can help you create original webcomics or graphic novels.

It contains 30 step-by-step illustrations and detailed instructions about drawing figures and faces for various ages and types of bodies. You will not run out of content anytime soon as it features a comprehensive gallery. It consists of 50 ways to draw hands, 101 eyes, 12 common expressions, 40 hairstyles, 30 classic poses, and so on.

If that wasn’t enough, you could even find some advanced lessons in this book dealing with inking, backgrounds, layout options, and sequencing. We especially liked the easy-to-follow tutorials for creating several realistic settings.

This book is available in paperback as well as Kindle versions. You can rest assured that your manga skills will improve significantly with it.

Format: Paperback | Author: Mark Crilley | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: March 8, 2012 | No. of Pages: 128 | Dimensions: 8.29" x 0.31" x 10.86" | Weight: 1.1lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

4. How to Draw Manga: Mastering Manga Drawings - Best for Fundamentals

Andrew Harnes has written this book as a comprehensive guide for all things manga! At 90 pages, it is one of the shortest books included in our recommendations list. It consists of over 90 colorful drawings and hand-held, step-by-step illustrations with instructions.

You should get this book if you want to understand the fundamentals of manga art, starting from the materials to use and going to the process of drawing characters from different angles. There are specific chapters that focus on various aspects like eyes, hair, nose, ears, and facial expressions. The author goes on to explain different character poses and actions.

With the help of the information in this book, you can learn to draw fantastic manga illustrations in a negligible time. It was published in 2015 and is available in paperback and Kindle versions at affordable prices.

Format: Kindle | Author: Andrew Harnes | Publisher: N/A | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: May 26, 2015 | No. of Pages: 91 (Print Length) | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Other Format/s: Paperback

5. Basic Anatomy for the Manga Artist - Best for Anatomical Understanding

We are down to our fifth recommendation, and it is another book from Christopher Hart (the third time’s a charm). If you have compared American comics to manga, you would have probably noticed that the faces of manga characters are quite different. But did you know that the bodies of those characters are also different?

As it turns out, they are. Who better than Christopher Hart to break it down for you? In this book, you get easy-to-follow, step-by-step illustrations and instructions, anatomical information and charts, and before-after comparisons. All this will help you understand the unique aesthetics of Japanese characters in the manga.

Perfecting the anatomical features of manga characters cannot happen overnight. This book does not have all the information you can find on anatomy but includes enough
content in its 160 pages to get you started. It is available in Kindle and paperback versions.

Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: June 21, 2011 | No. of Pages: 160 | Dimensions: 8.53" x 0.45" x 10.88" | Weight: 1.43lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

6. The Manga Artist’s Workbook

The Manga Artist’s Workbook is an easy-to-understand book for anybody interested in manga. It will help you perceive the fundamentals of manga characters, including the face, figure, eyes, hairstyles, and costumes. By the time you are done with this book, you will be able to create unique manga characters.

Unlike the majority of drawing books on this list, it is a complete workbook of 160 pages consisting of grid lines and tracing paper. The purpose of this book is to get you to practice and perfect each lesson. It comes with detailed instructions that ensure a sufficient learning experience for you.

We especially liked its small size, which makes it easy to carry and will allow you to draw on the go. It is available in paperback and spiral-bound versions. And did we mention that the supremely talented Christopher Hart has written this book?

Format: Spiral-Bound | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Potter Style | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: October 13, 2009 | No. of Pages: 160 | Dimensions: 7.78" x 0.6" x 6" | Weight: 0.68lbs | Other Format/s: N/A

7. Beginner’s Guide to Creating Manga Art

3DTotal offers some excellent books. It would be impossible to complete our list of recommended manga drawing books without including their Beginner’s Guide to Creating Manga Art. This book contains the work of various artists, including industry legends like Steven Cummings and Gonzalo Ordoñez.

As this book is written by various authors, each being an established artist, you get an exciting array of techniques, perspectives, and lessons. It is a comprehensive book containing 240 pages of tutorials covering anatomy, features, clothing, expressions, poses, and more. You can also learn how to color characters using traditional as well as digital tools.

We recommend this book to beginners and hobbyists who want to get an overview of all the different aspects of manga art. If you are an expert who is looking for a book that deals with one of the elements in detail, you should check out the other recommendations on this list.

Format: Paperback | Author: Steven Cummings, Gonzalo Ordoñez | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing | Edition: SLP Edition | Publication Date: April 2, 2013 | No. of Pages: 240 | Dimensions: 12" x 0.5" x 8.5" | Weight: 2.09lbs | Other Format/s: N/A

8. Drawing Manga Characters and Scenes from Start to Finish

Mina Petrovic is a famous YouTube artist, more commonly known as “Mistiqarts.” She has authored an excellent manga book for beginners titled “Manga Crash Course.” This book promises to teach you all you need to know to start drawing manga.

It contains over 25 step-by-step examples to help you create each body part of the characters. You will have adequate material with more than 130 lessons covering poses, accessories, clothing, facial anatomy, emotions, and hairstyles. This book is carefully designed to start with simple techniques and steadily progress to more challenging lessons.

We especially liked the included character invention game as it helps readers create unique manga stories and characters. This crash course for manga drawing consists of 128 pages. It was published in 2015 and is available in Kindle and paperback versions.

Format: Paperback | Author: Mina Petrovic | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: March 11, 2015 | No. of Pages: 128 | Dimensions: 8.3" x 0.3" x 10.8" | Weight: 1.05lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

9. Drawing Manga Characters and Scenes from Start to Finish

If you are looking for a practical guide to anime and manga-style art for beginners, you should get this excellent book written by Li Shen. It is a short book consisting of 60 pages only. You can choose to get it as a paperback or Kindle version, as per your convenience.

What sold this book to us are its easy-to-follow lessons. You can use this book even if you have zero experience in manga-style drawing. In fact, even if you have never tried drawing anything at all, you can still use this book. So it is a “Practical Guide for Beginners,” in every sense of the phrase.

You can learn to draw a handsome boy (Bishonen) or a lovely girl (Bishojo) with the help of illustrations and step-by-step instructions. It is a perfect starting guide for anybody interested in getting into drawing unusual, original manga characters.

Format: Kindle | Author: Li Shen | Publisher: N/A | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: March 3, 2016 | No. of Pages: N/A | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Other Format/s: Paperback

10. The Master Guide to Drawing Anime: Amazing Girls

As a follow-up to the book that bagged the first rank on our recommendations list, Christopher Hart’s “The Master Guide to Drawing Anime: Amazing Girls” was published in 2017. Unlike the first book in the Master Guide series, this one deals specifically with drawing female anime characters.

With this book, you will learn to draw manga heroines, fantasy characters, and schoolgirls. The book is thoughtfully divided into basic templates and tutorials. The templates will help you draw body proportions, head, clothing, hairstyle, and so on for your female characters. The tutorials will allow you to create entire scenes and master the art of manga.

This book has 144 pages of rich manga content for you to enjoy. It is available in a paperback version only. This book is better suited for people who have a basic understanding of manga art rather than absolute beginners.

Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Drawing with Christopher Hart | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: November 7, 2017 | No. of Pages: 144 | Dimensions: 9" x 0.5" x 10" | Weight: 1.15lbs | Other Format/s: N/A

11. The Master Guide to Drawing Anime: Tips & Tricks

It’s time for the third book in the Master Guide series by Christopher Hart. It was published in 2022 and is available in a paperback version only. Irrespective of whether you are a beginner or an established artist in the manga field, you can learn a lot from this book.

The author delves into each aspect of manga art, especially the specifics of drawing anime scenes and characters. You will learn the secrets of a complete picture with the help of some topics that are rarely covered by manga artists. We especially liked the new tutorials that deal with drawing feet and hands in several gestures.

Being the final book in the series, it seems like the perfect last stroke on a piece of art. Christopher Hart has discussed more than 100 essential techniques in 144 pages to help you hone your manga drawing skills.

Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Drawing with Christopher Hart | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: September 4, 2018 | No. of Pages: 144 | Dimensions: 9" x 0.55" x 10" | Weight: 1.15lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

12. Mastering Manga 2: Level Up with Mark Crilley

Mark Crilley’s “Mastering Manga” was such a resounding success with manga artists that its follow-up was inevitable. The second part of the Mastering Manga series not only lives up to but also exceeds the standard set by its predecessor.

Irrespective of your skill level, you can learn a lot from this book. It contains over 30 step-by-step illustrations to help you draw manga art like a pro in no time. This book has lessons covering various aspects of manga such as proportion, clothing, body language, environments, useful poses, and the anatomy of a manga panel.

We especially liked the thoughtful inclusion of lessons on perspective and background, which will help you create entire manga scenes. This book has 128 pages of top-notch, easy-to-follow lessons and instructions. It is available in Kindle and paperback versions.

Format: Paperback | Author: Mark Crilley | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: October 23, 2013 | No. of Pages: 128 | Dimensions: 8.29" x 0.35" x 10.83" | Weight: 1.04lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

13. Draw Manga Faces for Expressive Characters: Learn to Draw More Than 900 Faces

This next book is hands down the most comprehensive guide to learning how to draw manga faces. Author Hosoi Aya has included over 900 sample illustrations in this book to ensure that you gain a good understanding of the key elements to capture emotions and facial expressions.

This book is capable of making you a pro at drawing manga faces. And seeing how that is an area where new artists tend to struggle the most, we had to include it on this list. We especially liked the way this book deals with positive expressions and negative expressions separately in dedicated chapters.

You can use this book to draw basic as well as specific manga character faces with immense ease. It has 176 pages of fun content for you and is available in a paperback version only.

Format: Paperback | Author: Hosoi Aya | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: January 8, 2015 | No. of Pages: 176 | Dimensions: 8.3" x 0.5" x 10.9" | Weight: 1.5lbs | Other Format/s: N/A

14. The Go-To Guide for Drawing Stylish Outfits and Characters

If you want a book to help you improve specific skills for drawing characters and stylish outfits, go for Christopher Hart’s “The Manga Fashion Bible.” The author goes into full-on “manga chic” mode in this book to explain the unique fashion style of Japanese characters.

What sets this book apart is its dedicated troubleshooting guide dealing with grey areas that often confuse beginners. From drawing patterned fabrics to capturing folds and creases on clothing, this book simplifies it all. You get a glimpse of traditional outfits worn by classic manga characters as well as the newest fashion trends.

One hundred forty-four pages of exciting manga content are sure to keep you hooked. This book was published in 2016 and is available in a paperback version only. It does justice to its name - “Fashion Bible” – by covering fashion trends and styles for all kinds of characters and all seasons.

Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Drawing with Christopher Hart | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: November 1, 2016 | No. of Pages: 144 | Dimensions: 8.5" x 0.25" x 11" | Weight: 1.25lbs | Other Format/s: N/A

15. Manga Art: Inspiration and Techniques from an Expert Illustrator

After the Mastering Manga series, Mark Crilley got “Manga Art” in 2017. This book is a bit different from the others we have shortlisted today, in the sense that it is meant to inspire and motivate budding manga artists.

You will get access to more than one hundred never-before-seen, original pieces of artwork created by the author. Chapters include the artworks with a list of the materials used and a summary of the inspiration behind them. The author has used various materials to create these artworks, including colored pencils, pens, pencils, ink, and digital tools.

Mark Crilley wants the readers to understand that the possibilities are endless when it comes to manga. This exceptional book has 176 pages of stunning manga art. It is available in both paperback and Kindle versions.

Format: Paperback | Author: Mark Crilley | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: June 6, 2017 | No. of Pages: 176 | Dimensions: 8.7" x 0.6" x 10" | Weight: 1.6lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

16. Manga in Theory and Practice: The Craft of Creating Manga

The next recommendation we have is a bit different from the others, in the sense that it is not a hardcore drawing book. Hirohiko Araki, the author of fan-favorite “JoJo’s Bizarre Adventure,” has shared the craft of creating manga through this book.

If you haven’t heard of JoJo’s Bizarre Adventure, it is one of the most popular and longest-running manga yet. You are guaranteed to benefit from the concrete examples of his work included in this book. There can be no better way to learn manga than going through lessons penned down by one of the industry legends!

If you are a fan of Hirohiko’s work, you will get more than a glimpse of how he creates manga, including his famous “golden ratio” for drawing. It is a detailed guide consisting of 280 pages covering a plethora of manga-related information. You can buy this book in either Kindle or hardcover version.

Format: Hardcover | Author: Hirohiko Araki | Publisher: VIZ Media LLC | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: June 13, 2017 | No. of Pages: 280 | Dimensions: 5.75" x 1" x 8.25" | Weight: 0.91lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

17. How to Draw Manga Chibis & Cute Critters

Manga art should not be restricted only to adults. For all the tweenagers out there who are interested in manga, Samantha Whitten’s “How to Draw Manga Chibis & Cute Critters” is an excellent book. Manga chibis and critters attract people of all ages, thanks to their soft squishy cheeks and big sparkling eyes.

This book consists of thoughtfully designed, step-by-step projects that will teach you to draw a furry bunny, a panda cub, a chibi princess, and a ninja. You also get instructions about ways to add color with watercolors or markers. We especially liked the chapter that explains how to “chibify” any person or animal.

This book contains 128 pages that have handy templates and fun practice exercises. It was published in 2012 and is available in a paperback version only.

Format: Kindle | Author: Samantha Whitten | Publisher: Walter Foster Publishing | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: August 1, 2012 | No. of Pages: 128 (Print Length) | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Other Format/s: Paperback

18. Manga for the Beginner: Midnight Monsters

By now, you know that Christopher Hart is one of the best manga artists and the bestselling author of many manga drawing books. Here is another fabulous book that bears his name. “The Manga for the Beginner: Midnight Monsters” is the ideal book for people who are intrigued by the occult and want to draw dark manga characters.

This book is full of expert tips to help you draw vampires, zombies, Goths, werewolves, sorcerers, witches, and other dark, mischievous creatures. Unlike most of our other recommendations, this one caters to a specific part of manga art that may not appeal to everybody.

If you like spooky creatures and want to learn how to draw them in manga style, this book will not disappoint you. You can choose to get either the Kindle or the paperback version of this book. It consists of 176 pages of bone-chilling fun!

Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: September 3, 2013 | No. of Pages: 176 | Dimensions: 8.55" x 0.5" x 10" | Weight: 1.46lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

19. Pop Manga: How to Draw the Coolest, Cutest Characters, Animals, Mascots, and More

If you are a fan of shoujo manga (a wide-eyed, beautiful girl) and want to learn how to draw it, you should get the “Pop Manga.” It is a stunning book co-written by Camilla d’Errico and Stephen W. Martin. Camilla is an expert when it comes to shoujo manga, and she has revealed the techniques she uses for creating her characters, which have become fan favorites.

This book is written in a simple yet effective way to ensure that you learn in the best possible way. You will find easy-to-follow lessons on how to draw basic body features, capture the action, create animals, and much more.

It serves as a comprehensive guide for anybody interested in shoujo manga. It consists of 192 pages of fun content you do not want to miss. You can get it in Kindle and paperback versions.

Format: Paperback | Author: Camilla d'Errico, Stephen W. Martin | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: October 8, 2013 | No. of Pages: 192 | Dimensions: 8.54" x 0.5" x 10" | Weight: 1.59lbs | Other Format/s: Spiral-Bound, Kindle

20. Kids Draw Big Book of Everything Manga

The penultimate recommendation we have for you is yet another book from renowned artist Christopher Hart. It is one of the most comprehensive books on this list, having 256 pages of manga content. It was published in 2009 by Watson-Guptill as a collection of Hart’s four best-selling kids drawing books.

Manga is extremely popular with kids, and this book is meant for them. Young artists will have the time of their lives with this book. Clear steps and instructions are included for each character drawing, so kids will not face any problems following along.

Seeing how much content this book has, its affordable price makes it a must-buy for your kids. You can get its Kindle version for less than ten bucks, while the paperback version costs around 18 dollars.

Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: February 3, 2009 | No. of Pages: 256 | Dimensions: ‎8.52" x 0.74" x 11" | Weight: 2.28lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

21. Drawing Manga Animals, Chibis, and Other Adorable Creatures

The final book in this comprehensive list deals with some of the most loved aspects of manga. If you want to learn how to draw animals, chibis, and other cute creatures, this is the ideal choice for you. We recommend this book to anybody who wants to master chibi art.

It is probably the only book on this list that works well with kids as well as adults. It has 160 pages worth of fun lessons having step-by-step instructions that will guide you through the process of drawing eyes, faces, and entire animals and chibis.

As good as this book is, it does not cater to beginners looking for overall manga guidance. As it deals with chibi art specifically, only a niche audience will benefit from it.

Format: Kindle | Author: J.C. Amberlyn | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: Original Edition | Publication Date: February 20, 2013 | No. of Pages: 160 (Print Length) | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Other Format/s: Paperback

What is the Best Manga Drawing Book?

Laid out below is a comparison table expertly crafted to bring forth crucial elements of the reigning manga drawing books. The table analyzes details such as the format, author, publisher, edition, publication date, number of pages, dimensions, weight, and availability in other formats.

Book Format Author Publisher Edition Publication Date No. of Pages Dimensions Weight Other Format/s
The Master Guide to Drawing Anime Paperback Christopher Hart Drawing with Christopher Hart Illustrated Edition July 7, 2015 144 9" x 0.5" x 10" 1.2lbs Kindle
Manga for the Beginner Paperback Christopher Hart Watson-Guptill First Edition August 5, 2008 192 8.5" x 0.52" x 10" 1.56lbs Spiral-Bound, Kindle
Mastering Manga with Mark Crilley Paperback Mark Crilley IMPACT Books N/A March 8, 2012 128 8.29" x 0.31" x 10.86" 1.1lbs Kindle
How to Draw Manga: Mastering Manga Drawings Kindle Andrew Harnes N/A N/A May 26, 2015 91 (Print Length) N/A N/A Paperback
Basic Anatomy for the Manga Artist Paperback Christopher Hart Watson-Guptill N/A June 21, 2011 160 8.53" x 0.45" x 10.88" 1.43lbs Kindle
The Manga Artist’s Workbook Spiral-Bound Christopher Hart Potter Style Illustrated Edition October 13, 2009 160 7.78" x 0.6" x 6" 0.68lbs N/A
Beginner’s Guide to Creating Manga Art Paperback Steven Cummings, Gonzalo Ordoñez 3DTotal Publishing SLP Edition April 2, 2013 240 12" x 0.5" x 8.5" 2.09lbs N/A
Drawing Manga Characters and Scenes from Start to Finish Paperback Mina Petrovic IMPACT Books Illustrated Edition March 11, 2015 128 8.3" x 0.3" x 10.8" 1.05lbs Kindle
How to Draw Anime: Practical Guide for Beginners Kindle Li Shen N/A N/A March 3, 2016 N/A N/A N/A Paperback
The Master Guide to Drawing Anime: Amazing Girls Paperback Christopher Hart Drawing with Christopher Hart Illustrated Edition November 7, 2017 144 9" x 0.5" x 10" 1.15lbs N/A
The Master Guide to Drawing Anime: Tips & Tricks Paperback Christopher Hart Drawing with Christopher Hart Illustrated Edition September 4, 2018 144 9" x 0.55" x 10" 1.15lbs Kindle
Mastering Manga 2: Level Up with Mark Crilley Paperback Mark Crilley IMPACT Books N/A October 23, 2013 128 8.29" x 0.35" x 10.83" 1.04lbs Kindle
Draw Manga Faces for Expressive Characters: Learn to Draw More Than 900 Faces Paperback Hosoi Aya IMPACT Books N/A January 8, 2015 176 8.3" x 0.5" x 10.9" 1.5lbs N/A
The Go-To Guide for Drawing Stylish Outfits and Characters Paperback Christopher Hart Drawing with Christopher Hart Illustrated Edition November 1, 2016 144 8.5" x 0.25" x 11" 1.25lbs N/A
Manga Art: Inspiration and Techniques from an Expert Illustrator Paperback Mark Crilley Watson-Guptill Illustrated Edition June 6, 2017 176 8.7" x 0.6" x 10" 1.6lbs Kindle
Manga in Theory and Practice: The Craft of Creating Manga Hardcover Hirohiko Araki VIZ Media LLC Illustrated Edition June 13, 2017 280 5.75" x 1" x 8.25" 0.91lbs Kindle
How to Draw Manga Chibis & Cute Critters Kindle Samantha Whitten Walter Foster Publishing N/A August 1, 2012 128 (Print Length) N/A N/A Paperback
Manga for the Beginner: Midnight Monsters Paperback Christopher Hart Watson-Guptill N/A September 3, 2013 176 8.55" x 0.5" x 10" 1.46lbs Kindle
Pop Manga: How to Draw the Coolest, Cutest Characters, Animals, Mascots, and More Paperback Camilla d'Errico, Stephen W. Martin Watson-Guptill Illustrated Edition October 8, 2013 192 8.54" x 0.5" x 10" 1.59lbs Spiral-Bound, Kindle
Kids Draw Big Book of Everything Manga Paperback Christopher Hart Watson-Guptill N/A February 3, 2009 256 ‎8.52" x 0.74" x 11" 2.28lbs Kindle
Drawing Manga Animals, Chibis, and Other Adorable Creatures Kindle J.C. Amberlyn Watson-Guptill Original Edition February 20, 2013 160 (Print Length) N/A N/A Paperback

How helpful are the step-by-step examples and illustrations for learning to draw manga characters?

Step-by-step examples and illustrations in manga drawing books are designed to provide clear and precise explanations and guidance for learners. These examples make it easier for beginners to understand the process and replicate the illustrations, learning and improving their manga-drawing skills.

What is a good book for beginners to start drawing manga?

“Manga for the Beginner” by Christopher Hart is an excellent book for those who are stepping into the world of manga drawing. It offers step-by-step instructions and covers everything from the basic body, head, eyes, hair, special effects, perspective, action poses, light, and shading.

Can I learn manga techniques from different artists in one single book?

In “Beginner’s Guide to Creating Manga Art,” 3DTotal Publishing has compiled the work of various accomplished artists. It offers an exciting array of techniques, perspectives, and lessons, giving readers a broader view of manga art.

Which book can help me learn to draw female manga characters specifically?

“The Master Guide to Drawing Anime: Amazing Girls” by Christopher Hart is an excellent choice for those interested in drawing female manga characters. This follow-up book to “The Master Guide to Drawing Anime” focuses on drawing manga heroines, fantasy characters, and schoolgirls.

Which book will help me create original manga characters?

“The Master Guide to Drawing Anime” by Christopher Hart is a great option for learning to draw original manga characters. It includes extensive details about drawing different character archetypes, offering diverse and customizable heads, bodies, accessories, and outfits for each type.

After diving deep into the world of manga, we've seen a wealth of resources and techniques for artists of all skill levels to hone their craft. Choosing the best manga book might seem daunting, but with careful consideration for skill level, personal preferences, and dedication to practice, anyone can find the perfect fit for their artistic needs.

From the above 21 best manga books, here are the top three expert recommendations:

For those who want to create original, captivating characters, The Master Guide to Drawing Anime by Christopher Hart is an ideal option with its diverse range of templates, accessories, and outfits for various anime archetypes.

If you're a true novice in the world of manga art, Manga for the Beginner is a good option. Also written by Christopher Hart, this book covers everything from basic head and body proportions to special effects and perspective.

When looking to advance your skills further, Mastering Manga with Mark Crilley is the right choice, as it delves into more complex topics such as inking, backgrounds, and layout options.

With these expert recommendations in hand, there is no limit to the creativity and skill that can be achieved through practice and dedication to the art of manga. Dare to unleash your artistic potential and immerse yourself in the extraordinary universe of manga artistry.

We often use cardboard for DIY projects and other artistic endeavors, and we often need glue to stick it together. 

Children, especially, need to get crafty for school projects, and they need a good adhesive for that purpose. But how does one decide which is the best glue for cardboard? There are many adhesives available, but it is a tough job to decide which is the best one.

It is pretty frustrating to get glue that isn’t effective, and since cardboard is a little thicker than most materials, you need strong glue for it. This is why we have prepared this review of the best adhesive available for cardboard online, so read on to know more!

Listed below are the best glues for cardboard:

  • Adtech: The Adtech glue is highly efficient with a tensile strength of 377 PSI and cures in less than 30 seconds. Its safety is assured by being non-toxic but its strong odor could be overpowering compared to odorless variants.
  • Books By Hand: A polyvinyl acetate-based adhesive that is solvent-free, acid-free, and water-soluble, rendering it eco-friendly and non-hazardous. Weak bonding with metal and unclear water-thinning instructions are a drawback.
  • Aleene 17843: Aleene 17843 glue offers 50% faster binding in comparison to its rivals and maintains color stability. Its flexibility ensures no thickening around the joints and its non-toxic nature makes it suitable even for children. Difficulties in squeezing the glue through the tip might lead to wastage.
  • Lineco: This permanent PVA adhesive ensures a clear and transparent finish on drying and it remains flexible with excellent lay-flat properties. It's acid and solvent-free. Glue solidification is an issue.
  • Elmer E461: The Elmer E461 glue is designed primarily for school and light work. It offers a strong, wet tack suitable for porous and semi-porous surfaces. It dries clear and is easily cleaned up with water. Incompatibility with hard surfaces like metal limits its versatility compared to Adtech.

1. Adtech - Best for Fast-acting Bonding

Another highly-rated product, this glue works very well with cardboard and other light materials. This is perfect for any craft or DIY project where a strong bond and less curing time are required. It is locally manufactured in a quality-controlled environment and is perfect for a multitude of uses.

We like how this product comes in the form of a hot glue stick that can be used with pretty much any full-size glue gun. It is fast-acting and can form strong bonds in less than 30 seconds, which lets you get back to your work as soon as possible.

This glue can bond together wood, plastics, PVC, polycarbonate, and even aluminum. Another remarkable thing about this product is that it is crystal clear once applied. This means that you can read through it, and it won’t leave any color.

Moreover, it is essential for a glue that may be used by a younger age demographic to be non-hazardous. And the Adtech 220-115-5 is non-toxic and safe for people of all ages to use.

What’s more, it has a tensile strength of 377 PSI and is resistant to reasonably high temperatures, which makes it a winner in our book!

Though this product excels in terms of performance, we did notice some scope for improvement. It emits an unmissable, strong smell that can get a bit overpowering when using it. We believe that resolving this odor problem would improve the product even more.

Type: Hot Melt | Drying Time: 30 sec | pH level: N/A | Available Sizes (oz): 4, 10, 24 | Waterproof: No | Heat Resistance: Yes | Non-Toxic: Yes | Solvent-Free: Yes | Acid-Free: Yes

2. Books By Hand - Best for Eco-friendly Crafts

The following product on our list is the adhesive from Books By Hand, a quality product that can be used with various materials. Books by Hand is one of the best businesses in the field of crafts and other art supplies and makes art supplies that are intuitive to their customers’ needs.

One of our favorite features of this product is that it is soluble in water. This implies that it can be mixed with water to thin it out, extending its drying time. This, however, does not compromise on its efficiency, and its tensile strength remains unchanged.

Furthermore, the adhesive is solvent and acid-free and is made of polyvinyl acetate. This indicates that it is environmentally friendly, non-hazardous, and suitable for people of all ages to use.

Most glues tend to lose their strength over time and need constant re-application, but the Books By Hand BBHM217 doesn’t grow brittle with time. It is additionally fast-drying and clear and leaves no color once it dries. According to us, it also adheres to most porous surfaces and is a great choice.

Even though it is compatible with most materials, we noticed that it wasn’t as effective with metal. It wouldn’t stick properly and needed a lot of quantity to stick things together.

Additionally, thinning the glue can also be tricky because there isn’t any clarity on how much water will extend its binding time.

Type: PVA | Drying Time: 1-2 hours | pH level: 7 | Available Sizes (oz): 4, 8, 16 | Waterproof: No | Heat Resistance: No | Non-Toxic: Yes | Solvent-Free: Yes | Acid-Free: Yes

3. Aleene 17843 - Best for Quick Dry Projects

This adhesive from Aleene is ideal for people who use adhesive generously and need it to dry super fast. Hence, this glue is a hot-selling product and is well-known among artists who need fast-acting tacky glue for their work. Moreover, it is pretty affordable and measures 8 ounces.

One of the key highlights of this product is that it binds 50% faster than some of its competitors in the market, which is why it's always in high demand. Another reason for its soaring popularity is that it maintains its color even after a long passage of time and doesn’t yellow with age.

Another major point in its favor is its superior flexibility, which ensures that there’s no thickening around the joints. We also like how the adhesive is non-toxic and suitable for adults and children alike to use.

Efficient and multipurpose, this glue is great for use with crafts, art projects, and other DIY endeavors. It can bind materials like wood and plastic in addition to cardboard and takes only 30 seconds to dry.

We liked pretty much everything about this product, but we also felt that there were some things that the manufacturer could work upon. The tip of the container isn’t very conducive to squeezing the glue, which makes it hard to pour. This, unfortunately, leads to occasional wastage, and a brush is needed to bypass the issue.

Type: Tacky Glue | Drying Time: 30 min | pH level: 4 | Available Sizes (oz): 4, 8 | Waterproof: No | Heat Resistance: No | Non-Toxic: Yes | Solvent-Free: Yes | Acid-Free: Yes

4. Lineco

Lineco is a reputed company that is well-known for making multipurpose and efficient adhesives. You can use it for various purposes and a wide array of projects, including DIY art and craft and even office work and filing. Overall, the Lineco LIN-901-1008 has many features that make it a bestseller online.

This is a permanent PVA adhesive that doesn’t leave any color once it dries. We believe that a transparent finish is vital in an adhesive because an odd splotch of color on a piece of art looks out of place. In addition to this, it remains flexible even upon drying and has excellent lay-flat properties. 

The manufacturers have also buffered the adhesive to add an extra layer of protection. These features ensure that the adhesive works effectively and that artists maintain their aesthetic standards. 

Interestingly, the glue doesn’t wear out or becomes brittle with age. It remains just as strong after years and ensures that any project stands the test of time. We also like how the glue is acid and solvent-free and can be used with materials other than cardboard, for instance, wood.

Lineco is known for making quality products that are widely used and well-appreciated by artists. However, when we received the package, we saw that the glue inside was solidified and refused to come out from the nozzle. It’s unclear whether this was a one-off defect, but we do believe that the manufacturers should take note of this.

Type: PVA | Drying Time: 1-2 hours | pH level: 7 | Available Sizes (oz): 8, 16 | Waterproof: No | Heat Resistance: No | Non-Toxic: Yes | Solvent-Free: Yes | Acid-Free: Yes

5. Elmer E461

Next is the Elmer E461, a multipurpose glue packaged in an 8-ounce bottle that is ideal for home decor projects, holiday decorations, and handmade gifts. Elmer’s glue can be used for sticking together cardboard and other materials like light wood and paper.

This locally manufactured glue is an excellent product with a strong, wet tack and can be used for various projects. You can use it to stick photos into an album, and it is sure to last long and not weaken over time.

Another thing we like about it is that it is clear and transparent once it dries. This means that using it doesn’t ruin the look of your DIY project. In addition to that, it is convenient to use as it doesn't run, and is excellent for porous and semi-porous surfaces,

According to us, this glue is ideal for dry indoor use because it can be easily cleaned up with water. You can even use it with fabrics if you've got a blow-dryer with a cold setting on hand!

As we mentioned, this product is great for use with cardboard and paper. But it isn’t as versatile as some of the other options on the list and is incompatible with metal. 

Note that the product was designed keeping school and other light-duty work in mind, and thus it isn’t strong enough to bind metal.

Type: School Glue | Drying Time: 30 min | pH level: 7 | Available Sizes (oz): 4, 7.625, 128 | Waterproof: No | Heat Resistance: No | Non-Toxic: Yes | Solvent-Free: Yes | Acid-Free: Yes

6. Gorilla

Gorilla is a well-known adhesive brand, and it makes glue for a variety of projects. This Gorilla glue can bind not just cardboard but also paper, foam board, fabric, and some light plastic, making it ideal for school use. Since it is marketed toward young children, it does not contain any hazardous substances, and thus, is safe for use. 

The last entry on our list is the Gorilla 274201, which weighs 8 ounces and can bond with various materials. Paper, wood, cardstock, felt- you name it, and the glue can work with it. It can also be used to glue cardboard to sequins and glitter, which makes it ideal for craftwork.

One of the key highlights of this product is that it dries clear and doesn’t leave any color behind. This means that the transparent finish makes it easy to read words and see any designs on the surface.

We also like how the adhesive has a thick consistency, which doesn’t create a mess. Interestingly, the glue is easy to extract and can be done through a convenient anti-clog nozzle.

What’s more, it can even be used to make slime, which is a plus for people of a younger demographic.

Though the glue is perfect for cardboard and other basic materials, it dries slower than its competitors. This means that it takes longer to complete a project because not waiting long enough would lead to the materials not sticking properly.

Type: School Glue | Drying Time: 10-15 min | pH level: 7 | Available Sizes (oz): 4, 9 | Waterproof: Yes | Heat Resistance: No | Non-Toxic: Yes | Solvent-Free: Yes | Acid-Free: Yes

What is the Best Glue for Cardboard?

If you're in pursuit of the best glue for cardboard then the table below compares the type, drying time in hours/minutes/seconds, available sizes, waterproof properties, heat resistance, and whether they are non-toxic, solvent-free, and acid-free.

Product Type Drying Time pH level Available Sizes Waterproof Heat Resistance Non-Toxic Solvent-Free Acid-Free
AdTech Hot Glue Sticks Hot Melt 30 sec N/A 4, 10, 24 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Books by Hand pH Neutral PVA Adhesive PVA 1-2 hours 7 4, 8, 16 No No Yes Yes Yes
Aleene 17843 Tacky Glue 30 min 4 4, 8 No No Yes Yes Yes
Lineco Neutral pH Adhesive PVA 1-2 hours 7 8, 16 No No Yes Yes Yes
Elmer E461 School Glue 30 min 7 4, 7.625, 128 No No Yes Yes Yes
Gorilla Kids School Glue School Glue 10-15 min 7 4, 9 Yes No Yes Yes Yes

Buying Guide for the Best Glue for Cardboard 

We believe that two major points must be kept in mind while buying cardboard glue. These are:

1. Kind of Glue

There are different adhesive types, such as tacky glue, PVA, etc.  PVA glue is a water-based resin glue, and tacky glue is super-thick and sticks to surfaces easily. We also have spray adhesives that cover large areas and are usually not too precise for application. 

However, when it comes to cardboard, we believe that PVA is the best kind of adhesive, and thus, we recommend the Lineco LIN-901-1008.

2. Method of Application

The glue can be applied on the surface in a variety of ways. It can be sprayed using a spray top, applied using a hot glue gun, or simply squeezed out through a nozzle. However, a nozzle provides the most accurate application, and hence we recommend the Gorilla 2754201.

Can I use hot glue on cardboard?

Yes, generally you can use hot glue on cardboard, although its effectiveness may depend on the specific application. While hot glue provides quick bonding, it may not withstand moisture or high temperatures over time. For stronger and more durable results, consider alternative options such as PVA glue or a two-part epoxy.

What type of glue is best for cardboard boxes?

The best type of glue for cardboard boxes is white PVA glue (polyvinyl acetate). Its strong bonding capabilities and ability to dry clear make it highly suitable for securing cardboard flaps and creating solid, durable bonds. When applied correctly, this type of glue provides reliable adhesion for various cardboard applications.

Can I use wood glue on cardboard?

You can use wood glue on cardboard in certain applications, although it might not be the most suitable choice. PVA glue is generally a better option for bonding cardboard as it is easier to work with and dries clear.

How do I glue cardboard to paper?

To glue cardboard to paper, apply a thin layer of PVA glue or use a glue stick. Press the cardboard firmly onto the paper, ensuring there are no air bubbles or wrinkles. Let the glue dry completely before handling the project for best results.

Can I use super glue on cardboard?

Yes, you can use super glue on cardboard as it creates a strong bond and dries quickly. That being said, it may not be the best choice for all applications as it can become brittle over time and may not withstand stress. Alternatives like PVA glue or a two-part epoxy may offer more flexibility and durability for bonding cardboard.

Can I use a spray adhesive on cardboard?

Yes, you can use a spray adhesive on cardboard. It is a suitable option for larger projects requiring ample adhesive, thanks to its easy application and even coating. Keep in mind that for smaller or detailed projects, controlling spray adhesive may be challenging, making it less ideal in such cases.

From the list of 6 best glues for cardboard, here are the top three expert recommendations:

For a fast-acting glue, Adtech is the ideal choice. Its crystal-clear finish and versatility make it perfect for a range of crafting needs.

Meanwhile, if you're looking for an eco-friendly, non-hazardous glue that doesn't become brittle over time, consider Books By Hand. Its PVA formula is buffered for extra protection and adheres well to most porous surfaces.

Lastly, if you need an all-purpose glue that is safe for even the youngest crafters and ideal for basic materials, Gorilla Kids School Glue is a great option. With a thick consistency to minimize mess and a clean dry finish, it's perfect for school projects, crafts, and more.

Choose the glue that fits your needs and complete your project without worry.

Cattle herding and rearing is a challenge that tests even the best farmers. When looking from afar, cattle and livestock may present a very calm and obedient demeanor; however, the reality of the situation is different. 

Regardless of the benefits farm animals bring to their owners, handling them requires great patience and new techniques. The stubborn nature of the cattle animals and the fear of prowling predators need special attention. Ignoring these factors can put you in a very dicey situation—you, as a livestock owner, will have to negate both the threat of a strike and the aggressive attitude of your animals. 

Given the significance of cattle rearing and the sensitivity that is involved in it, it is imperative to take the aid of tools for controlling the livestock’s movement. Cattle prods prompt your stubborn herd to move so you can protect them and yourself from wild animals which makes the job a lot easier.  

However, of the various types of cattle prods available today, not all are designed for every kind of situation. This is why we have compiled a list of the five best cattle prods; to further assist you in forming an opinion, we will also highlight the best uses of each cattle prod. Before we begin an elaborate review, here is an overview of the five best cattle prods. 

Listed below are the 5 best cattle prods from our list:

  • Miller Hotshot DX36 - Best Cattle Prod. The Miller Hotshot DX36 is a superior quality cattle prod, boasting design expertise from a company with over 70 years of experience in the livestock industry, featuring high-end components, impressive protection, and a 36-inch fiberglass shaft.
  • Magrath Livestock Prod - Best Budget Cattle Prod. The Magrath Livestock Prod merges market familiarity and affordability to create the top-budget cattle prod, offering a 22-inch shaft, insulated handle, rubber trigger, and a potent 5.5kV shock.
  • West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod - Strongest Cattle Prod. The West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod, built with professionals in mind, is recognised for its robust shock strength, sealed handle, and motor, along with its sizeable 41-inch shaft made of fiberglass.
  • SHZICMY Animal Electric Prod Hot Shock. Notably designed with both the animal and user in mind, the SHZICMY Animal Electric Prod Hot Shock is acknowledged for its premium build, gentleness on animals, easy handling, and versatile application, including training guard dogs.
  • Parker McRory S29 Stock Prod. The Parker McRory S29, an economic choice for close-quarter use, stands out for its groundbreaking "Instant On Technology," fully enclosed circuitry for enhanced safety, impressive energy efficiency, and budget-friendly price point.

Here is the list of the 5 best cattle prods that you can use to safely and effectively herd your livestock.

1. Miller Hotshot DX36 - Best Cattle Prod

Of all the cattle prods available today, the Miller Hotshot/Duraprod DX36 stands out. The purposes for which this cattle prod is used may not match your requirements but the quality and the state-of-the-art design make the Miller Duraprod DX36 stand above the other cattle prods. 

With over 70 years of experience in the livestock industry, the Miller Manufacturing Company is well aware of the needs of the cattle industry today.  Having expertise in the industry has led to the company dominating to the point where it faces no or little competition today. 

Top Tier Components

One needs to understand that, in the cattle prod market, products are often sold as separate interchangeable pieces. Like all other industries, the big companies in the cattle prod industry are responsible for creating this trend, leaving other smaller businesses with no option other than to follow suit. 

Therefore, it is more likely that a Miller component is connected to a competitor’s product than the other way around. 

Protected

After assessing all the other products and the mechanics behind the production of cattle prods, we can safely say that using a handle as good as the one used in Miller Hot-Shot DX36 is very unlikely. 

The built-in safety switch and the rubber grip provide ideal insulation in addition to ensuring that you don't accidentally shock yourself when using the product. 

As livestock farmers, we all encounter an animal that is aggressive and difficult to deal with, a slight ping on the backside from a close distance may put them off, forcing them to react rather aggressively. The Duraprod DX36 covers this aspect with the presence of a 36-inch fiberglass shaft that provides you with enough length and stiffness; this makes the bad-tempered livestock think twice before pushing through. 

Shaft Material: Fiberglass | Shaft Length: 36" | Weight: 2.39 lbs

2. Magrath Livestock Prod - Best Budget Cattle Prod

Although not the oldest company on our list, Springer Magrath has focused on providing products exclusively for animal care since its inception. With an experience spanning over half a century, Springer Magrath pays special attention to commercial and agricultural markets. 

The exclusive nature of its products and the target market allowed the company to rise through the ranks. However, it is one of many companies acquired by Miller Mfg Co. 

The takeover has not led to a decline in the standard of the products as Miller has experience and expertise in the cattle and livestock industry which is second to none. Magrath products are now better than before due to their success in keeping production costs lower than ever. 

Although many ranchers may consider that the Magrath Prod is not worthy of being considered as one of the best cattle prods, the low price and the ideal specifications make it the best budget cattle prod. 

Care and Diligence

The Magrath cattle prod is ideal only for experienced users. A short and flexible shaft means that the user will have to get close to the animal. While this may unsettle an inexperienced user, a person using cattle prods for quite some time now will be unfazed when using the Magrath Livestock Prod.

Close Shaves

The particular model of the Magrath Livestock Prod is not rechargeable but the included handle does have an add-on accessory that is rechargeable. Its rubber trigger and insulted grip save you from accidental shocks and given the powerful shock the product possesses, these features become a must-have for the Magrath Livestock Prod.  

Additionally, given the short nature of the shaft, it is very likely that you’ll end up in close proximity of an irate animal. To ensure that the animal does not harm you if you wander off too close, the product makes up with having an electric shock as powerful as 5500 Kv.

Shaft Material: Plastic | Shaft Length: 22" | Weight: N/A

3. West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod - Strongest Cattle Prod

Next up is the West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod. The fact that professional ranchers were already pleased with the performance of this cattle prod only means that it is a top-tier tool to effectively herd livestock.

However, of all the products made by West Thorne Pro, this one stands out in particular as their best offering. The extra features that the product possesses, predominantly due to its rechargeable nature, make it one of the best.

Impressive

As the name suggests, the West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod is there to provide an incredibly powerful jolt to animals. It is the only cattle prod that commercial truckers and hog producers can use—such is the significance of the product. 

Made of stiff Fiberglass, the 41-inch shaft is the primary reason for the immense popularity the product has amongst users. In addition to ensuring that you are safe from the cattle prod itself, the large shaft also provides you a safe distance from the animal. 

Self Defense

Similar to all other cattle prods, the West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod also prioritizes your safety and security. A safety clip that sits over the Trigger prevents any accidental shocks. Additionally, the permanent sealing of both the motor and the handle prevents any debris from getting inside. 

The West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod also comes with a rechargeable battery pack, which ensures that you don't have to keep paying for batteries while using the product. 

Shaft Material: Fiberglass | Shaft Length: 41" | Weight: 3.7 lbs

4. SHZICMY Animal Electric Prod Hot Shock

The SHZICMY Animal Electric Prod Hot Shock is a product crafted with the intent to keep the animals' and users' needs in mind. Constructed with top-notch engineering plastic, this livestock prod provides an enduring and efficient solution for managing and training farm animals without causing any harm.

Premium Build & Gentle

Built from high-grade engineering plastic, the SHZICMY Animal Electric Prod Hot Shock possesses exceptional electrical insulation properties, rigidity, and strength. This material guarantees that the prod is suitable for diverse applications and provides long-lasting service.

One of the most distinguishing features of this livestock prod is its ability to be both gentle and effective. While being useful for guiding the animals, it ensures they are not hurt, placing their well-being at the forefront. This combination of efficiency and gentleness makes it particularly appealing to farmers and livestock handlers.

Versatile & Easy to Use

The SHZICMY prod is versatile, as it can be utilized on cattle, goats, sheep, pigs, and even for training guard dogs. This multipurpose implement can be employed for efficient herding, catching, and training, establishing itself as an indispensable instrument for those in charge of livestock.

The updated version comes with a non-slip grip, offering both a safer and more accessible user experience than previous models, and benefits from an extended lifespan. This enhancement ensures that the user's experience remains optimal while managing their animals.

Shaft Material: Plastic | Shaft Length: 22" | Weight: 2.09 lbs

5. Parker McRory S29 Stock Prod

For folks in the market for an economical cattle prod, one alternative presents itself quite prominently - the Parker McRory S29. This 29" cattle prod is designed for close-quarter use, particularly in chute-loading scenarios. Distinguished by its lack of moving parts and fully enclosed circuitry, the S29 combats unforeseen shocks and prevents water ingress quite commendably.

Cutting Edge

What stands out about the S29 is its groundbreaking "Instant On Technology." This feature ensures immediate electric discharges without requiring any sort of preparatory time. The Parker McRory cattle prod also boasts impressive energy efficiency, running seamlessly just off of 2 C batteries.

The relative lack of complexity in its design, coupled with a minimal number of parts, adds to the appeal of the S29. Its enclosed circuitry lends an additional layer of protection against accidental shocks and water damage.

Budget Friendliness

One cannot overlook the economic aspect of the S29. Its price point is nearly half of what other similar cattle prods in the market demand, validating its place as a stellar Budget Buy option.

Shaft Material: Plastic | Shaft Length: 29" | Weight: 1.1 lbs

What is the Best Cattle Prod?

Presented below is a comparison table aimed at illuminating the primary characteristics of the leading cattle prods available. It evaluates each product based on the material of the shaft, the length of the shaft, and its weight.

Product Shaft Material Shaft Length Weight
Miller Hotshot DX36 Fiberglass 36" ‎2.39 lbs
Magrath Livestock Prod Plastic 22" N/A
West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod Fiberglass 41" 3.7 lbs
SHZICMY Animal Prod Plastic 22" 2.09 lbs
Parker McCrory S29 29" Plastic 29" 1.1 lbs

Buying Guide For The Best Cattle Prod

Considering the fact that a single manufacturer is responsible for producing the majority of the cattle prods today, there is less diversity in the cattle prod industry. The lack of diversity makes the models more or less the same and the differences between the various models are generally less than other sectors. 

To help you figure out which cattle prod suits your needs, we have identified the materials that play a significant role. 

The following buyer’s guide provides you an insight into these materials and guides you on ways you can assess whether the cattle prods are meaningful for the purpose you need them for. 

Fiberglass

Made of an industrial-grade plastic base with glass fibers woven through them, fiberglass resembles plastic more than glass. The composition of plastic and fiberglass adds a much-needed stiffness to the product while not limiting its flexibility of the product in any way. 

For all ranchers, the flexibility of the cattle prod is a must but the non-durable nature of fiberglass, especially during the winter season, limits the amount of flexibility. 

Steel

Analyzing the modern cattle prod, it is fair to assume that steel, due to its conductive nature, is used either for the leads or as part of the frame. However, in reality, the steel is used to reinforce the shaft of flexible cattle prods. 

The molecular structure of steel makes it more flexible than glass, creating an ideal amount of durability and flexibility in the shaft. 

Rubber

This is another material that you expect in a cattle prod. Rubber serves as the insulator that protects the user from getting shocked accidentally. 

Additionally, rubber is also used in combination with steel threads to provide flexibility while being durable for sticking onto your livestock. 

However, the one thing that you need to be wary about rubbers is the organic nature of the product. This means that if you don’t protect the rubber and maintain it, there is a high chance that the rubber will start eroding. 

ABS

Probably one of the best and most durable forms of plastic, ABS is the same material used in Lego building blocks. It is also used by NASA for research. In addition to not being affected by whatever you throw at it, ABS is also incredibly durable. 

ABS is one of the significant components of cattle prods. In addition to the materials mentioned here, this plastic type is a regular feature in almost all cattle prods. The durable and resistant nature of ABS makes it an excellent cover for handles, saving them from accumulating all sorts of dirt and debris. 

Copper

Another material found in almost every brand, copper is easily the least-used material in a cattle prod. Being one of the most conductive metals in the world is the only reason to include copper in a cattle prod. 

Used primarily in the prod's contact base that transfers the charge, copper is alloyed with other metals in less reputable cattle prods. The mixture causes contact points to wear out quicker due to the flow of electric charge, resulting in a less effective cattle prod. 

Rod

Considered an essential component of a cattle prod, the rod gives the user the space for safely prompting stubborn livestock. The contact is what drives the herd but it is the distance that allows you the space for issuing a warning to the cattle. 

Many experienced ranchers claim that the use of electric current will annoy an already angry animal; this makes maintaining a safe distance from the animal even more important. There is also much discussion among ranchers about stiff rods, and flexible rods, and choosing one over the other. We feel that both the cattle prod types have their advantages and disadvantages but your use of the cattle prod type should depend on how aggressive your animals are. 

The Debate on Stiff vs. Flexible

The cattle prod type preferred by you is heavily dependent on the kind of animals you have. Although flexible shafts are less likely to break, they don't give you the option of training your animal since it does not present a mental impediment.

With the use of a stiff shaft, you can time the shock properly training your animal on the actions that lead to the shock. The fear of impending electric shock will cause the animals to avoid circumstances that lead to it, convincing them to move or stop when desired.

In addition to having low chances of breaking down, flexible shafts are also less expensive considering that they are generally made of rubber and not fiberglass which is used in stiffer shafts.  

Length

The length of the shaft is something that depends on your comfort level in dealing with an aggressive animal. If you are confident and have full faith in your abilities then a short shaft will also do the job for you. If you don't feel comfortable controlling an agitated animal from a close distance, then you need a rod with a considerable distance on it.

A person who is reasonably confident about their ability to control the livestock can do with a short shaft of around 2 inches. However, as a user, it is imperative to understand the limitations of using the product as well since there are not many short shafts that can support its weight.

The logic of shaft collapsing under its weight is true for rods over a length of 3 inches as shifts that are stiff or made of fiberglass run the risk of snapping and collapsing under their weight when used for long periods.

What are cattle prods used for?

Cattle prods are electric tools used to train and move cattle by delivering a shock or stimulating sensation. Cattle prods are usually composed of a metal shaft with a handle at one end and an electric current-emitting tip at the other.

The electric current is typically delivered in short, sharp pulses to get the animal’s attention, encouraging it to move in a desired direction, commonly to encourage animals to move through gates or onto trucks.

Can you use a cattle prod underwater?

Cattle prods are not designed to be used underwater because the electrical current could be dangerous to humans and animals in the water. Additionally, the electric shock generated by a cattle prod could be amplified and magnified due to its conductive properties in the water, resulting in a potentially greater shock to the cattle.

Do cattle prods make noise?

Yes, cattle prods typically make a buzzing or crackling noise when activated, the buzzing or crackling noise is meant to startle the animals and help direct them in the desired direction. The noise is usually loud enough to be heard by the person using the cattle prod and the cattle, after training the noise will be sufficient to encourage the movement of cattle.

How long is a cattle pod?

Cattle prods typically range from 18 to 24 inches in length. The length of the prod varies depending on the size and type of cattle being moved, with larger prods typically being used for larger animals.

Choosing the great cattle prod today is not an easy task. As mentioned before, the vast array of products available having little to no variety further complicates the problem. However, given the specific details discussed above, you can assess and choose the best cattle prod that suits your needs ideally.

Of all the products mentioned above, we have already nominated the clear favorite – Miller HOT-SHOT DX36. The flagship product of one of the premier manufacturers of cattle prods, HOT-SHOT DX36 has all the right features and components, providing users with the best handles and the best shafts in the industry. The delicate balance of price and service also adds in favor of the product, making it our best cattle prod.

However, if you are thinking of something different and need an option that has less impact on your pocket, then the Magrath Livestock Product is ideal. If you are someone who wants a distance from the livestock and is not afraid of spending more, then West Thorne Pro is what you are looking for.

This guide on the best cattle prods today and the significant components that play a critical role in making them the best will make your life easier for sure, don't you think?

We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!

The Midea Window Air Conditioner stands out due to its high efficiency and cooling capacity. Meanwhile, the hOmeLabs Window Air Conditioner is a close second and a functional alternative to the Midea AC unit with its noiseless operation and instant cooling. 

With summer fast approaching, everybody is on the lookout for a functional solution to stay cool. And the answer is window air conditioners, as they are a cost-effective way to cool your home efficiently. 

We’ve got you covered because mentioned below are 15 5,000 BTU window air conditioners that can make hot summer days more bearable. 

These are the five best 5,000 BTU Air Conditioners on our list:

  • Midea Window Air Conditioner. Midea Air Conditioner, with its 5,000 BTU cooling capacity, is an energy-efficient and compact option equipped with seven temperature controls and a mesh filter offering superior air quality.
  • hOmeLabs Window Air Conditioner. hOmeLabs Air Conditioner is designed for larger cooling requirements, providing quick temperature dispersion in a room and two-way air direction control for better flexibility.
  • GE Window Air Conditioner. GE Window Air Conditioner is built for instantaneous cooling of small rooms and features an easy-install kit, offering ten different temperature settings and two-way adjustable louvers for effective air direction control.
  • Frigidaire Window Air Conditioner. Known for its energy efficiency, Frigidaire Air Conditioner also provides a programmable timer for automation and comes with a washable filter to improve air quality and a remote control for easy operation.
  • Emerson Quiet Kool Window Air Conditioner. Emerson Quiet Kool Window Air Conditioner is ideal for those in need of quiet cooling solutions, offering four cooling modes, eight-way adjustability for better airflow control, and a 24-hour timer with sleep mode for quieter operation at night.

1. Best For Temperature Control - Midea Window Air Conditioner

Midea Window air conditioner is a great air conditioner available on the market. With a 5,000 BTU (British Thermal Units) cooling capacity, this best 5,000 BTU air conditioner can cool a 150 square feet room effortlessly. Hence, if you need to cool a small living room or office space, this device is ideal. 

Furthermore, the Midea air conditioner consists of 7 different temperature controls. So, depending on the weather or ambiance, you can personalize the temperature accordingly. The device also comprises 2 degrees of fan speed which is plenty to cool a room that is small. 

On a colder day, instead of using the cooling feature, you can use the fan on its own. This way, your room temperature stays regulated, and you can stay comfortable. The air conditioner also features a mesh filter that is specifically designed to capture particles in the air and minimize room odor. This filter also reduces the bacteria buildup within the air conditioner, thus improving the overall air quality in your home. Additionally, if you’re worried about the unit's filter becoming dirty with time, you can simply remove it from the device and clean it.

If you are someone who tries to be sustainable, this product falls right under that category. This is because the product has a CEER (Combined Energy Efficiency Rate) of 11.0. Apart from minimizing the chances of an expensive energy bill, the Midea air conditioner is also environmentally friendly. 

Installation is pretty easy and the product comes with all the needed mounting accessories. Typically, it fits a window sill that is 23-26 inches wide and 13 inches high, which is a standard measurement. 

Noise level: 57 dB | Energy Star Certified: Yes | SEER: 11 | Special Features: Dust filter, Instant cooling, 7 temperature settings

2. Best Two-Way Direction Control - hOmeLabs Window Air Conditioner

If you’re on the lookout for a more heavy-duty air conditioner, the hOmelabs window AC unit with 5,000 BTU is the one for you. It can cool a room that is 150 square feet in no time, be it a living room, dorm room, or office space. 

Conveniently, the device comes with additional items such as filters, leaf guards, window seal foam, non-drip installation, and support brackets. You also receive an extra long power cord that is 6 feet, which can be plugged into an electric outlet to power the device. Be sure not to plug the power cable into an extension cord to avoid safety hazards. 

Furthermore, the hOmeLabs air conditioner comes with 7 temperature controls that provide the user with immense cooling power and flexibility. To quicken the cooling process, two-way air direction control and adjustable fan speed settings are included. These features enable the AC unit to dissipate cool air across a room within 15 minutes or less. Though heavy-duty, the air conditioner is generally quiet and does not cause a lot of noise when used. 

The air filter in the device can be removed and cleaned using water and dish soap or a handheld vacuum cleaner. This helps prolong the life of the filter as well as the air conditioner in general and enables optimal cooling. 

Installation may take more than one person, but it is a fairly simple process. The air conditioner fits windows measuring 23-26 inches wide and a minimum of 13 inches high. 

Noise level: 60 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: 10 | Special Features: Energy-efficient, Washable filters, Quiet functioning

3. Best For Easy Installation - GE Window Air Conditioner

The GE 5,000 BTU air conditioner is the best window air conditioner that can instantly cool any room size of 150 square feet. To make the installation process easier, the product comes with an easy-install kit. So, you can enjoy the cooling power and effects right away. Much like other 5,000 BTU AC units, the GE window air conditioner is ideal for cooling smaller rooms as opposed to larger ones. And you don’t have to worry about the fit as it installs effortlessly on various double-hung windows. 

Furthermore, this air conditioner can be used at any time of the day thanks to its silent nature. This low-noise operation mechanism allows you to use the device at night without being disturbed by its sound. 

The air conditioner features two cooling modes and a fan speed, which is sufficient for cooling power in a small room. Additionally, the temperature can be personalized according to your needs and comes with ten different settings. To adjust the temperature, cooling modes, and fan speed, you can easily make use of the mechanical dial on the device. To further enhance the functionality, the device comprises two-way adjustable louvers which allow you to control the direction of cool air. 

The air filter can be removed from the air conditioner and cleaned. When the filter is cleaned every month, it prolongs the lifespan of the device and minimizes any chance of expensive repairs. As for the power cord, you will receive a standard three-prong plug that can be plugged into an electric outlet. 

Noise level: 56 dB | Energy Star Certified: Yes | SEER: 2.6 | Special Features: Easy installation, Slide-out washable filters, Noiseless functioning

4. Best Energy-efficient AC - Frigidaire Window Air Conditioner

The Frigidaire Window ACs are one of the most energy-efficient devices on the market. They use much less energy when compared to conventional air conditioners and ultimately lower your energy bills. The 5,000 BTU air conditioner is designed to fit any window effortlessly and the adjustable side panels further ensure that.

Additionally, you don’t have to depend on extension cords for connecting the device to an outlet. It comes with an extra-long power cable and a three-pronged plug that can be connected to a standard electric outlet.

A feature of the device that stands out is customizability. The air conditioner is equipped with a programmable timer that can be set for 24 hours. You can also automate it by setting increments, following which the device will automatically start cooling.

The Frigidaire air conditioners are designed to regulate the preset temperature of the room and enable you to stay comfortable always. Unlike its predecessor on this list, this air conditioner comes with a remote control that can be used to change the device settings, modes, and fan speed. This way, you can lay back and relax without having to get up and change the settings manually.

The 5,000 BTU air conditioner also comprises a washable air filter that can be detached from the machine to be cleaned. Since the filter captures all the dust from the air, cleaning it once a month can improve the quality of airflow. Additionally, proper maintenance can lengthen the lifespan of the product and save you from unnecessary repair costs.

Noise level: 52 dB | Energy Star Certified: Yes | SEER: 12 | Special Features: Washable filter, Remote control, Adjustable side panels

5. Best For Noiseless Functioning - Emerson Quiet Kool Window Air Conditioner

If you despise loud compressors on air conditioners, the Emerson 5,000 BTU air conditioner is the one for you. With only 52dB, this device is the quietest air conditioner on the market. Using the air conditioner on the lowest speed setting can further bring down the number to around 50 dB. Ideally, this device is designed to cool a small room that falls within the 150 square feet category. 

In terms of customization, the air conditioner offers four cooling modes (cool, dry, fan, and auto), which allow you to personalize the temperature in your home. Furthermore, the device entails two individual louvers along with an eight-way adjustability. This allows you to control and direct the airflow in whichever direction you want. It also features an excess moisture removal cup that can help eliminate around 1.3 pints of water each hour, thus keeping your home humidity-free. 

Additionally, the Emerson 5,000 BTU air conditioner comprises a 24-hour timer that can be set according to your preference. You can also make use of the sleep mode on the timer which will make the device quieter and still cool the room efficiently. The controls are user-friendly and can be found on the front of the device. If you do not want to use manual controls, the product comes with a remote control that can make it more convenient. 

The Emerson window air conditioners also come with detachable and washable filters which makes cleaning an easy task. When the filters are cleaned regularly, you can avoid having to use filter replacements that usually fall on the pricier side. 

Noise level: 50 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: 11 | Special Features: Quiet cooling, Washable filters, 8-way adjustability

6. Best For Airflow Control - AmazonBasics Window Air Conditioner

The AmazonBasics 5,000 BTU air conditioner is an energy-efficient device from Amazon that can easily cool smaller rooms sized 150 square feet. So, if you need better cooling output in any compact space such as a dorm room or RV, this product would be ideal.

The air conditioner offers several options for customization with seven temperature settings, various fan speeds, and dual cooling systems. Furthermore, the louvers on the air conditioner can be adjusted based on your preference. This allows you to control the direction of airflow and enhance comfort levels.

To ensure that the air in your home is purified, the device comprises air filters that collect any unwanted dust and other impurities from the air. These filters can then be detached from the air conditioner and cleaned using water and dish soap or a handheld vacuum. Maintaining the air filter regularly can help improve air quality as well as prolong the life of the air conditioner. It can also minimize any repair or maintenance costs that may arise in the future.

The installation process is fairly simple and the device comes with an easy window mounting kit. You also get adjustable side panels along with the kit that can be expanded to fit the size of your window. Typically, the device fits most standard window sills, that is 36 inches wide and at least 13 inches tall.

Noise level: 56 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: No | Special Features: Energy-efficient, 7 temperature controls, Washable filters

7. Best For Customized Airflow - TCL Window Air Conditioner

The TCL Window air conditioner is yet another functional 5,000 BTU air conditioner that can cool your living space efficiently. Additionally, it is also the most affordable option among other 5,000 BTU AC units on the market. 

In terms of energy efficiency, the TCL window unit uses around 450 watts of power to function at its maximum capacity, i.e. 5,000 BTU. This gives the devices an energy efficiency rating of 11.1, making them one of the more powerful air conditioners. 

Furthermore, you can customize the airflow based on how you need it with the AC's eight-way cooling system. It also entails a pair of four-way directional vents, which offer more flexibility in controlling the airflow. You can also control the two fan speeds it comes with using the mechanical rotary control on the device. 

TCL has designed this window air conditioner to be a low-noise operation device with noise levels as low as 50 dB. This way, you wouldn’t have to wake up to loud compressor noises or sleep with the device turned off. 

Additionally, the setup of the 5,000 BTU air conditioner is quite straightforward. You don’t need any expertise to install the system in your home. All you have to do is use the simple installation kit provided with the product and mount the device on your window. Make sure that your windows are approximately 36 inches wide and 14.5 inches tall. 

Mechanical designs usually don’t require many repairs or modifications. If at all you do face some issue, you can fix it yourself with the help of a screwdriver. Apart from that, cleaning the filters at regular intervals is all the maintenance you need to do. 

Noise level: 50 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: 11.1 | Special Features: Reusable, eight-way cooling

8. Best For Double-hung Windows - Haier Window Air Conditioner

The Haier 5,000 BTU window air conditioner is designed to cool smaller rooms, specifically ones up to 150 square feet. So, if you want to cool a studio, home office, dorm room, or bedroom, this device is ideal. For easy installation, the product comes with a simple installation kit, so you can start using your AC units right away. 

Since the window air conditioner is meant for smaller rooms, the noise factor has been taken into consideration by Haier. With noise levels as low as 50 dB, this 5,000 BTU window air conditioner can easily be used during the nighttime without any issues. 

The 5,000 BTU air conditioner also comes with two cooling modes as well as two fan speeds that allow the user to customize the temperature in the room. Furthermore, the device comes with ten different temperature controls that enhance the aspect of customization. This way, you can ensure that the room temperature is set ideally. 

The filters of this device can be removed and cleaned to ensure that the quality of airflow is optimal. Just slide it out of the air conditioner and clean it with some water and dish soap or a handheld vacuum. Be sure to clean the filters every thirty days or so, to avoid unnecessary repair costs. 

Additionally, the installation of the 5,000 BTU air conditioner is fairly simple. Since it has a fixed chassis, it can easily be mounted on any double-hung windows. Ensure that the windows are sized 21-36 inches wide and 13 inches tall. The product comes with an EZ Mount installation kit that comprises all the needed tools to mount the device effortlessly. 

Noise level: 50 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: No | Special Features: Removable filters, EZ Mount installation kit

9. Best Automatic Cooling - Keystone Air Conditioner

If you prefer operating your air conditioner remotely but don’t want to jump into Wi-Fi connectivity yet, then the Keystone 5,000 BTU AC units are ideal for you. The device comes equipped with a remote control that allows you to change temperature settings and cooling modes without getting out of your comfort zone. 

However, a favored feature of this product is the “follow me” function of the remote. When you activate this feature, the remote control turns into the thermostat instead of the air conditioner itself. This ultimately improves the performance and range of your window unit. Furthermore, when this feature is activated, the air conditioner will keep cooling the room until the temperature reaches that of the one set in the remote. This way you can minimize the chances of hotspots, which is a common occurrence with other types of air conditioners. 

Irrespective of the “follow me” feature, the device on its own can cool a room measuring about 150 square feet. Additionally, the 5,000 BTU air conditioner comes with a dehumidifier that can extract up to 1.3 pints of water from the air each hour. If you live in a humid region, this product can be beneficial for you. 

In terms of energy efficiency, this device is energy star certified, which means you won’t have to worry about expensive energy costs anymore. The installation process is also fairly simple and requires just one person. Along with the device, you get an extra-long power cord that measures up to 6.5 feet, which is longer than the standard power cord on the market.

Noise level: 55 dB | Energy Star Certified: Yes | SEER: 11.2 | Special Features: LED Display, 6.5 feet power cord, Automated cooling

10. Best Environment-friendly AC - Black+Decker Window Air Conditioner

The Black+Decker window air conditioner is yet another affordable alternative that can keep your house call even on the hottest summer day. It runs on two different cooling levels, low and high, so you can enjoy optimal cooling capacity at all times. 

Similar to other 5,000 BTU AC units, this device can cool smaller areas more efficiently as compared to larger ones. Ideally, rooms up to 150 square feet can be cooled quickly and easily. So, if you want to cool spaces like playrooms, cabins, RVs, studio apartments, etc, this device is ideal. 

Since it only weighs about 35 pounds, it can fit snugly in most standard windows. To make the installation process easier, the product comes with an easy installation kit and mounting hardware. 

In terms of energy efficiency, this 5,000 BTU air conditioner uses the R32 refrigerant which has little to no impact on the ozone layer or the atmosphere. This makes the device much more energy efficient and enhances the same by around 10%. Furthermore, R32 is more efficient than the usual R-410A, which means only the lowest amount of refrigerant is needed for the device to function properly. This also elongates the lifespan of the air conditioner. 

Cleaning this window air conditioner is perhaps the easiest part with its washable, removable nylon air filters. When the automatic filter check light on the device is on, simply slide the filter out and rinse it thoroughly under running water. Once the filter is fully dry, pop it back in, and you’re good to go. Cleaning the air filter regularly can also improve the quality of airflow in your home. 

Noise level: 56 dB | Energy Star Certified: Yes | SEER: 11 | Special Features: Energy-efficient, Washable filters, Easy installation

11. Best For Dehumidification - Whirlpool Window Air Conditioner

The Whirlpool 5,000 BTU air conditioner is a window-mounted device that can cool any smaller space with ease, specifically rooms up to 150 square feet. RVs, dorm rooms, studios, playrooms, etc can be cooled easily with this device. To power the air conditioner, you get a 6-foot power cord that can be plugged into any 115-volt electric outlet. The power cord also comprises a three-pronged plug that can be connected to the outlet. 

For better temperature control in the room, the device entails a 1.06 pints per hour dehumidification rate. This ensures that the overall atmosphere, from temperature to humidity levels, is always regulated. 

As for the controls, the mechanical rotary dials on the air conditioner offer simple yet effective control mechanisms. Just twist to either side to choose from the two temperature settings ( low and high)  the AC unit comes with. A second rotary dial situated below the initial one allows you to choose between various cooling modes, specifically four. This way, you can customize the temperature in the room according to your needs. 

If there is a power failure, the AC unit will automatically restart as soon as the power is restored. You would not have to go and turn the device on manually. The device is also designed to have a quiet operation, so you can stay cool as well as sleep well throughout the night. Additionally, the airflow capacity of this air conditioner is 135 CFM. 

Similar to other 5,000 BTU units, the air filters can be detached from the device and cleaned using some water or a handheld vacuum. Before you slide the filter back in, ensure that it is fully dry.

Noise level: 50 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: No | Special Features: 6 feet power cord, Mechanical Rotary controls, Automatic restart

12. Best With Rotary Dials - PerfectAire Window Air Conditioner

The PerfectAire window air conditioners are ideal for cooling smaller rooms measuring up to 150 square feet. So, if you’re on the lookout for window air conditioners that can cool your office space, RV, or dorm room, this AC unit will suit you well. 

The installation process of this 5,000 BTU air conditioner is fairly simple even though it is a mechanical AC. You get a window mounting kit along with the product that includes expandable accordion panels, hardware, top rail, and window seal foam. Additionally, the easy-read mounting manual that comes with the AC units makes the installation process all the easier. 

Typically, these window air conditioners fit windows measuring 36 inches wide and a minimum of 13 inches tall. Since these are the measurements of most standard house windows, you do not have to worry about fitting. 

In terms of controls, the AC unit comprises rotary dials that can be used to adjust the temperature according to your needs. Furthermore, the dual-way cold air direction and two different settings for both speeds and modes, make the system much more customizable.

The air filter in the air conditioner can be detached from the device, cleaned, and reattached. All you have to do is slide the filter out, wash it with some soap and water, dry it thoroughly, and pop it back in. This way, you can prolong the lifespan of the device as well as save money on unnecessary repair and maintenance costs. 

This air conditioner is also environment-friendly since it uses a premium R32 refrigerant, which is not only energy-efficient but also comparatively safe.

Before you use the air conditioner, ensure that you let the device stand in an upright position for a minimum of 24 hours. If it fails to do so, the AC unit can experience problems with compressor capabilities as well as the quality of airflow. 

Noise level: 55 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: No | Special Features: Washable Filter, Safe refrigerant, Dual-way air direction, Adjustable temperature settings

13. Best With Removable Air Filter - Amana Window Air Conditioner

The Amana 5,000 BTU air conditioner is one of the most reliable window air conditioners available on the market. It covers a room that is around 15” square feet and is one of the most efficient 12 x 12 room air conditioners. 

Similar to other highly energy-efficient 5,000 BTU units, it has a SEER rating of 11.1 and typically runs on 45 watts. Additionally, it comes with a 5.9-foot power cord that can be plugged into any 3-prong power outlet. The Amana 5,000 BTU air conditioner uses an R-410A refrigerant, which is generally not the safest but does not pose as much of a threat as other types. 

Coming to the noise levels of this air conditioner, it is by far the quietest 5,000 BTU device made by Amana. Equipped with a silent compressor, the air conditioner only makes around 50/55 dB of sound. 

The controls are simple and straightforward with two rotary controls that allow you to adjust the temperature speeds. You can turn the temperature up or down since the device only comprises two speeds. 

Furthermore, the air filter of the AC unit can be removed and washed to get rid of accumulated dirt and bacteria buildup. This not only prolongs the life of your air conditioning system but also reduces any potential repair or maintenance costs. 

Noise level: 55 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: 11.1 | Special Features: Washable Filter, Easy Controls, Long power cord, Energy-efficient

14. Best Wi-Fi Enabled AC - LG LW5016 Window Air Conditioner

The LG LW5016 Window Air Conditioner is one of the most popular products on the market for a variety of reasons. The initial reason is its low noise operation with a noise level of just 50 dB. Most air conditioners tend to fall under 55 or 56dB whereas the LG air conditioner falls below the average range. This makes it ideal to be installed in bedrooms and living spaces as it will cause little to no disruption. 

Secondly, the air conditioner is enabled with Wi-Fi. All you have to do is connect to the AC unit through your smartphone on the LG ThinQ app and you can easily switch between modes and settings remotely. Additionally, these smart features allow you to use the app to pair the air conditioner to any voice-activated home system such as Alexa or Google Home. This way, you can turn on, turn off, and control fan speeds or sleep mode using just voice control. 

Furthermore, there are two fan speeds and 9 different temperature settings that you can choose from. This gives you more control over the temperature in the room and offers much more personalization aspects. To enhance the personalization aspect, you also get a dual-way direction which can be used to control the direction of the air. 

Equipped with a  programmable 24-hour timer, you won’t have to worry about your energy consumption or power bills rising too high. The LG air conditioner is also Energy Star certified and keeps your carbon footprint minimal. Maintenance is also made to be easy with removable and washable filters. The LG app also sends a notification to your phone when the filters need to be cleaned. This way your device will stay clean and will last a longer period. 

Noise level: 55 dB | Energy Star Certified: Yes | SEER: 11 | Special Features: 2 cooling modes and fan speeds, Dual-way air direction, Adjustable thermostat, Washable air filter

15. Best For Smaller Spaces - KingHome Window Air Conditioner

The KingHome mechanical window air conditioner is a 5,000 BTU air conditioner that can efficiently cool a 150-square-foot space. So, if you need to cool spaces like a bedroom, studio, dorm, playroom, guest room etc, this device is ideal. Additionally, this air conditioner offers up to 1.6 pints of dehumidification. 

In terms of temperature range, there are three available options that can be accessed through the mechanical rotary dials. The variable temperature knob allows you to adjust the temperature based on your needs in a simple yet accurate manner. Furthermore, the rotary knob right before the temperature control can be used to access the different cooling modes such as low, high, medium, etc. 

As far as cleaning is concerned, the air conditioner has removable mesh filters that can be cleaned using water or a small vacuum. When the air filters are properly cleaned and maintained, it can not only improve the quality of cold air dissipated but also elongate the AC unit's lifespan. Before you reattach the filters after cleaning, ensure that they are fully dry so as to avoid any mold buildup. 

Installation is fairly simple with this device and it comes with a window mounting kit meant for double-pane windows. Ensure that your window is approximately 23-36 inches wide and 15 inches tall for the device to fit comfortably. However, you don’t have to worry about it too much since most standard windows are of said measurement. 

Noise level: 55 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: 11.2 | Special Features: Window-mounted unit, Washable filter, Easy controls, Dehumidifier

What is the Best 5000 BTU Air Conditioner?

Set out below is a detailed comparison chart, mainly designed to emphasize the noteworthy features of top-ranking 5000 BTU air conditioners. It discerningly evaluates aspects like noise level, Energy Star certification, and Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER), alongside any special features.

5000 BTU ACs Noise level Energy Star Certified SEER Special features
Midea Window Air Conditioners 57 dB Yes 11 Dust filter, Instant cooling, 7 temperature settings
hOmeLabs Window Air Conditioners 60 dB No 10 Energy-efficient, Washable filters, Quiet functioning
GE Window Air Conditioners 56 dB Yes 2.6 Easy installation, Slide-out washable filters, Noiseless functioning
Frigidaire Window Air Conditioners 52 dB Yes 12 Washable filter, Remote control, Adjustable side panels
Emerson Quiet Kool Window Air Conditioners 50 dB No 11 Quiet cooling, Washable filters, 8-way adjustability
AmazonBasics Window Air Conditioner 56 dB No No Energy-efficient, 7 temperature controls, Washable filters
TCL Window Air Conditioner 50 dB No 11.1 Reusable, eight-way cooling
Haier Window Air Conditioner 50 dB No No Removable filters, EZ Mount installation kit
Keystone Air Conditioner 55 dB Yes 11.2 LED Display, 6.5 feet power cord, Automated cooling
Black+Decker Window Air Conditioner 56 dB Yes 11 Energy-efficient, Washable filters, Easy installation
Whirlpool Window Air Conditioner 50 dB No No 6 feet power cord, Mechanical Rotary controls, Automatic restart
PerfectAire Window Air Conditioner 55 dB No No Washable Filter, Safe refrigerant, Dual-way air direction, Adjustable temperature settings
Amana Window Air Conditioner 55 dB No 11.1 Washable Filter, Easy Controls, Long power cord, Energy-efficient
LG LW5016 Window Air Conditioners 55 dB Yes 11 2 cooling modes and fan speeds, Dual-way air direction, Adjustable thermostat, Washable air filter
KingHome Window Air Conditioners 55 dB No 11.2 Window-mounted unit, Washable filter, Easy controls, Dehumidifier

Buying Guide for the Best 5000 BTU Air Conditioner

Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER)

The Energy Efficiency Ratio or EER is what will ultimately decide the ratio of the overall cooling output against the total power the system requires to run efficiently on an hourly basis. This is how most heating as well as cooling systems are measured. 

Naturally, one may assume that the lower the energy efficiency rating of a device is, the better its performance. In fact, it’s quite the contrary. Higher EER numbers correlate to better performance of an air conditioning unit. 

Specifically, there are two main reasons why the Energy Efficiency Ratio should be considered when choosing an air conditioner. 

The first and foremost reason is, as the name suggests, energy efficiency. Since most devices with a  higher energy efficiency rating consume significantly less energy than other air conditioners, it can reduce your overall energy consumption. This, in turn, reduces your power bill and keeps it in check. 

The second reason why the energy efficiency ratio matters is because it is more environmentally friendly than AC units with lower EER levels. 

ECO Mode

Speaking of energy efficiency, environmentally friendly AC units are much more reliable and are becoming increasingly common in most homes. Most window air conditioners have a function known as the Eco mode which allows the device to run at a slower rate and ultimately improves the EER rating. 

When the air conditioners run on Eco mode, they will use much less wattage per hour as compared to otherwise. Apart from reducing your carbon footprint, it also helps significantly reduce the total running cost of the device. 

Furthermore, when switched to the Eco mode, the air conditioners can have lower noise levels as compared to the normal mode. So, if you plan on using the air conditioners at night, using them in Eco mode would be the sustainable and effective option. 

Digital Controls

If you wish to switch through various cooling modes and adjust temperature settings as fast as possible, air conditioners with digital controls would be ideal. 

Unlike the standard mechanical rotary dials that are used in most window air conditioners, digital controls are much easier to use. They also provide a better level of accuracy for the settings and allow you to set it accordingly. 

Air conditioners that have a digital control panel also come with an LCD display that allows you to see the settings that you’ve used. This further increases the accuracy aspect and eliminates the guesswork needed to set the ideal temperature, which is usually the case with mechanical rotary controls. Typically, if an air conditioner comes with a digital control panel, there is a high chance that it would have more user-friendly features too. 

Wi-Fi Enabled

Since technology keeps advancing, people prefer having everything, including their air conditioners, linked to their smartphones for easy access. This is essentially what a Wi-Fi-enabled air conditioner does. To take things a step further, some air conditioners even allow you to pair it with your voice-activated home assistants such as Alexa or Google Home. So, you won’t have to get up to change the settings or then turn the device on anymore. Just ask your home assistant to do it for you. 

With most Wi-Fi-enabled AC units, you can do various things like set schedules, turn the air conditioner on or off, adjust temperature and cooling settings remotely, etc. All of this can be done even if you’re in the other room or not even inside the house. In other words, it makes life much more convenient.

The only drawback to Wi-Fi-enabled air conditioners is that they can be priced pretty high when compared to a standard window air conditioner. However, if you’re willing to spend a little extra for the added convenience and smart features, a Wi-Fi-enabled AC is definitely worth considering. 

Remote Control

If you’re not as tech-savvy or a Wi-Fi-enabled system is too expensive for you, then a handy remote control can be a great alternative. A remote control allows you to adjust the temperature, select cooling modes, and turn the device on or off without getting up from your comfort zone. 

Furthermore, remote control is not a feature that brings up the price of the air conditioner, so you don’t have to worry about it going outside the budget. 

Noise Level (dB)

Last but certainly not least, is the noise level of the air conditioner that you plan on getting. Generally, 5,000 BTU window AC units will be on the quieter side when being used but, like most things, they can differ from brand to brand. 

If you’re a light sleeper or even the slightest noise keeps you up, you might want to look for an air conditioner with noise levels that fall under 40-60 decibels. 40-60dB is the quietest noise level among traditional central air conditioners. This will also let you sleep comfortably or go about your day without being disturbed by loud air conditioning noises. 

Looking at the noise levels is even more important if the primary reason you’re getting an air conditioner is to cool your bedroom. Sleeping on a hot summer day without proper cooling is frustrating as is. The last thing you’d want is to turn the air conditioning on to cool down the room and stay awake due to the loud and annoying noise it makes. 

How much power does a 5,000 BTU air conditioner use?

The amount of energy a 5,000 BTU air conditioner uses depends on the size of the bedroom. Such units require only 450 watts of energy to cool a small room, which is much less than other air conditioners.

How much area can a 5,000 BTU air conditioner cool?

A 5,000 BTU AC cools around 150 square feet of space, which makes them ideal as budget investments.

What size room is perfect for a 5,000 BTU air conditioner?

Since a 5,000 BTU air conditioner is the smallest AC unit, it can cool a room smaller than 250 square feet. I recommend installing such units in rooms that aren’t bigger than 150-200 square feet, so the basic room dimensions should be 14×14 feet, 12×12 feet, or 10×10 feet.

How long can you run a 5,000 BTU air conditioner?

If you are new to using a 5,000 BTU air conditioner, it would be best to opt for a model having –

  • 600 watts of tiltable solar power
  • 2,000-watt pure sine wave inverter
  • A 40 amp MPPT charge controller
  • 800 amp hours of lead acid/400 amp hours of Li-ion batteries

When a unit has all these components it can run for 8 hours.

How to calculate BTU for cooling?

To determine what BTU air conditioner you need, multiply the length of the room by the width or area that must be cooled. Then multiply the result by 25 to find how much BTU is needed to deliver ample cooling on a moist, rainy, sunny, hot, or humid day.

Is higher BTU good for an AC?

The power of an air conditioner is expressed through the BTU rating, which is the energy required to remove heat from a room. If an air conditioner has more BTUs, it can cool a larger space quickly and efficiently.

Why is it important to choose BTU depending on the room?

If you use a unit with a higher BTU for a room, it will cool the space quickly but also make it more humid. On the other hand, a low-BTU model will struggle to deliver ample cooling and run continuously.

If you’re looking for a functional air conditioner that can cool your room instantly, the Midea window air conditioner is an ideal choice. The air filter in the air conditioner can be removed and cleaned, which ultimately reduces room odor and minimizes dust particles.

An impressive alternative to the Midea air conditioner is the GE window air conditioning system. With rapid cooling technology, this device can cool rooms that are 150 square feet within a matter of seconds.

If you are still confused, make sure to go over the buyer’s guide and reviews again to make the right call!

Painting is a fantastic hobby that I have pursued in my leisure for years now. It is a productive way to vent my emotions and creativity. 

I started painting on canvases about 4 years ago. Now, I have given up my sketchbooks just because of the experience I get on a canvas. 

But paint behaves very differently on canvases and to many these mediums may be new as well. 

Therefore, it’s extremely important to get the right paint for the job. You may already know that acrylic paint and oil paint work on canvas. But it can be confusing to choose the right medium for yourself. 

So, here are some paints that I have fallen in love with over the years, the best paints for canvas are here! 

Listed below are the 5 best Paints for Canvas from our list:

  • Liquitex BASICS Paints for Canvases: Distinguished for providing a budget-friendly painting option for beginners with impressive color stickiness and mixability.

  • Winsor & Newton Acrylic Set for Canvas Painting: Stands out for its consistent performance on canvas, bright colors, and excellent color retention, rendering it perfect for multilayered painting.

  • Golden Open Acrylics: Recognized for its slower drying time akin to oil paints, making it an excellent choice for detailed works and touch-ups that require more time.

  • Old Holland Classic Oil: Esteemed for its historical brand value, these paints provide the best experience with high-quality pigments, impressive lightfastness, and long-lasting nature, making it a favorite among professionals.

  • Holbein Duo Aqua Water-Soluble Oils: Celebrated for their high industry standards and water-soluble nature, these oil paints provide vivid colors and a healthier painting experience by eliminating harmful chemicals associated with most oil paints.

From traditional oil paints to modern acrylics, we have got you covered. So, without further ado, here's the list of the 5 best paints for canvas.

  1. Liquitex BASICS Paints for Canvases - Best For Beginners

If you are getting started with painting and want to keep the budget on down low this is your best bet.

I used this acrylic paint set for quite some time when I started and still use it from time to time for my side projects. The reason is that this budget variant doesn’t make too many compromises in quality to achieve the price tag.

The color sticks well to the canvas and is viscous. What I love the most about it is that it also mixes well with other colors and mediums which gives me the modularity to get specific colors while painting.

But keep in mind that you’ll have to experiment quite a bit for it because the pigments don’t mix as expected all the time.

Unlike other cheap variants, this acrylic paint works incredibly well in layers and even when it’s thinned out with water, it sticks to the canvas well.

Due to its consistency, it sticks excellently with brushes. I use white horsehair flat brushes for most of the painting and I am amazed at how well it all works out. It functioned well with nylon paintbrushes as well.

For a beginner, I don’t think there is any better option in the acrylic paint market. It sticks well to canvas, works fabulously in layers, and sticks well to brushes. All you have to get used to is mixing colors on palettes. That’s more of a problem for veterans than for newcomers in my humble opinion. But even as an experienced individual, I have no complaints about this paint.

Type of Paint: Acrylic | Quantity: 48 tubes | Finish: Matte | Drying Time: 15-30 min | Lightfastness: Poor to Good

  1. Winsor & Newton Acrylic Set for Canvas Painting - Best For Professionals On A Budget

This paint satisfies everyone’s needs even though it’s harder on the wallet than the previous entry.

Winsor & Newton has been a part of my acrylic paint set for a long time because I love how consistently it performs on canvas. The colors are strong and bright and work fantastically when mixed as well.

The color retains incredibly well on canvas which is great for multilayered painting. The pigments are of great quality and I am astounded that it’s as good as some of my oil colors. It totally justifies its price.

Even though it’s meant for more experienced and serious artists because of its price and quality, I’d recommend it to beginners as well because it reduces the steepness of the learning curve of painting - especially, on canvas.

The colors are very clean, behave truly on canvas, and it has a certain satin texture. That may not work with some art styles but artists around the world admire the finish of acrylic paints. Even I do.

It comes with 10 colors and it’s enough to create most other colors, especially because the color mixes so well and accurately. One gripe I do have is that this paint is softer than my liking. If it grinds your gears as well, I’ll advise getting some texture paste for medium. In my experience, it’s the most straightforward solution to the problem.

Even though this set is meant for students, I think this is well suited for professional use as well. The consistency and the grip leave no room for asking for more. I see this set as a budget option for professionals. It can very well be used for any side or personal project.

Type of Paint: Acrylic | Quantity: 10 tubes | Finish: Matte | Drying Time: 20-30 min | Lightfastness: Good to High

  1. Golden Open Acrylics - Best For Detailed Works

This paint set is great for working on shades. It works great for softening, blending, and shading as it’s clean and bright. I use this for detailed works that most people call a “touch-up”.

Golden Open Acrylics dries more like oil paint - slower and giving you more time to work on it. It is a welcomed attribute because I use this paint for working on dried layers of paint when I need more time to work out the details. That's why I think that adding this paint is so necessary for your arsenal to be complete.

There are eight colors in the set which is enough for creating most colors. The colors blend very well and you can work it to make translucent spreads very easily. The pigments are of great quality as well, providing strong and consistent colors.

Most of the “touch-up” work needs a lot of mixing of colors to make it consistent with your primary application. I found these colors to be excellent for that job as the pigments are of top-notch quality and leave no room for complaint.

I recommend this acrylic paint set for working secondary and tertiary layers only. Mostly for shading, blending, and glazing. The properties these colors have are perfect for that. Now as a beginner, you may skip it. There are way many things to work on before you start perfecting “touch-ups”.

But if you have already been in the game for a while now and are serious about making your artwork more vibrant, then I can’t recommend Golden Open Acrylics more. Especially it works so much like oil paints. It has no comparison.

Type of Paint: Acrylic | Quantity: 8 tubes | Finish: Matte | Drying Time: 20-30 min | Lightfastness: Good to High

  1. Old Holland Classic Oil

Now we are moving to oil paints. Oil paint is the best way to put your ideas on a canvas. And it’s just not me, many artists and professionals agree as well.

It’s just the way the oil paint blends and behaves on canvas that makes it the perfect experience with the best results.

Old Holland is one of the oldest brands of paint. It was established in the 17th century and has been used by several famous artists, like Van Gogh.

Of course, these colors don’t mess around. Starting from the pigments to the viscosity and consistency, there’s nothing that tops Old Holland in quality and experience.

There are no cheap fillers in this color, all you’ll get is the best pigments for the most accurate colors and consistent spread and behavior. Not only this, these colors don’t lose color and texture over time. In the community, it’s called lightfastness.

Except for Cremnitz White and Madder Lakes, every color is completely lightfast and even these two are almost lightfast as well.

May it be landscapes, still lifes, or figures, there’s nothing you can’t do with these paints as they offer transparent as well as opaque paints with excellent pigments.

These paints also last a lot longer than others as the medium has fantastic tinting strength and although it’s expensive, at least it’ll be quite some time before these run out.

The oil paint stretches quite a lot which not only saves paint but also is easy to paint with and looks more natural and pleasing. As expected, the spread and mixing are fantastic as well, although I’d recommend getting natural hair brushes for the best results. Old Holland deserves the best anyway.

Type of Paint: Oil | Quantity: 10 tubes | Finish: Gloss | Drying Time: 2-12 days | Lightfastness: Excellent

  1. Holbein Duo Aqua Water-Soluble Oils

This is the modern-day standard for oil paints. Holbein Duo Aqua Water-Soluble Oils are meant for professional use through and through, and they scream quality in every way possible.

Unlike most oil paints which use linseed oils for spread and turpentine for the wash, these oils are crafted so that it can be used with water as well, as the name suggests.

These colors meet industry standards on every term and undergo rigorous testing procedures, like thermal stability, adhesion, and color tone. It even undergoes bacterial testing.

It even eliminates all the harmful chemicals and toxins that are associated with most oil paints and gives a healthy experience for the modern-day user.

If all of this sounds too scientific and less artistic to you, don’t worry. The paint performs excellently and is worth every penny of its high price tag. The paint is thick and has a beautiful consistency that feels mesmerizing on the first touch of a paintbrush.

The colors are more vivid and expressive than some of the other brands but I don’t see that as a negative trait. In my experience, it brings more life to my creation. It mixes accurately as well and it comes in a variety of colors, so you can go as close as you can get to your imagination.

The color even blends well within different layers and it comes with a dryer solution which, if added, makes the paint dry faster. Perfect for people who don’t want to wait for the oils to dry up. But I, for one, love the wait because in my opinion the color seems more vibrant and blends better when I let it dry naturally.

Type of Paint: Watercolor | Quantity: 20 tubes | Finish: Matte | Drying Time: 20-30 min | Lightfastness: Good to High

What is the Best Paint For Canvas?

Outlined below is a comparison table, diligently constructed to highlight the essential qualities of top-tier paints designed for canvas. The table examines each option in terms of paint type, quantity, finish, drying time, and lightfastness, a measure of color durability under light exposure.

Product Type of Paint Quantity Finish Drying Time Lightfastness
Liquitex BASICS Paints for Canvases Acrylic 48 tubes Matte 15-30 min Poor to Good
Winsor & Newton Acrylic Set for Canvas Painting Acrylic 10 tubes Matte 20-30 min Good to High
Golden Open Acrylics Acrylic 8 tubes Matte 20-30 min Good to High
Old Holland Classic Oil Oil 10 tubes Gloss 2-12 days Excellent
Holbein Duo Aqua Water-Soluble Oils Watercolor 20 tubes Matte 20-30 min Good to High

Buying Guide for the Best Paints For Canvas

Choosing the right paint for your canvas is crucial for achieving the effect and result you desire in your artwork. To help you make an informed decision, we have compiled a comprehensive buying guide that covers all the important factors you need to consider when purchasing the best paint for your canvas.

1. Type of Paint

There are three main types of paint that work well on canvas: acrylic, oil, and watercolor.

a. Acrylic Paint

Acrylic paints are versatile, quick-drying, and have vibrant colors. They are suitable for various painting techniques and can be used on different surfaces. They are also easier to clean up due to their water-soluble nature.

b. Oil Paint

Oil paints are classically favored by many professional artists. They provide rich, deep colors and allow the painter a longer working time to create details, blend colors, and achieve a specific texture.

c. Watercolor Paint

Watercolors are well-suited for beginners, offering translucency and ease of use. They dry quickly and can be reactivated with water, allowing for corrections and modifications.

2. Quality: Student vs. Artist Grade

Consider the quality of the paints you choose. Student-grade paints are more affordable but may lack pigment concentration, resulting in less vibrant colors. Artist-grade paints are typically more expensive, but they have higher pigment concentrations, better color quality, and improved lightfastness.

3. Pigment Concentration

Higher pigment concentration gives better color coverage and vibrancy. However, it also adds to the price of the paint. Determine the right balance based on your needs and budget.

4. Lightfastness

Lightfastness refers to how well a paint retains its color when exposed to light. Higher lightfastness ratings mean the paint is more resistant to fading and discoloration over time. Ensure you choose paints that have a good lightfastness rating.

5. Drying Time

Drying times vary among different types of paints. Acrylic paint dries the fastest, followed by watercolor, and then oil. Choose the paint type that suits your working style and preferred drying time.

6. Brand Reputation and Reliability

Choose a paint brand that has a good reputation for quality, consistency, and customer support. Some reputable brands include Winsor & Newton, Golden, Liquitex, Gamblin, and Daler-Rowney.

7. Safety and Toxicity

Many paints can be harmful if ingested or inhaled. Be sure to choose paints that comply with safety standards and are labeled as non-toxic. This is especially important if children or pets may come into contact with the materials.

8. Budget

Lastly, consider your budget when purchasing paint for canvas. While it is essential to invest in quality materials, it is also important to be mindful of your spending.

Important Tip: Remember that experimentation is essential in the world of art. Consider trying different paints and brands to find the one that suits your painting style and technique the best. It may take time, but discovering the best paint for canvas will ultimately lead to more fulfilling and enjoyable artistic experiences.

What is the difference between student and artist-grade paints?

Student-grade paints are less expensive and have a lower pigment concentration compared to artist-grade paints. Artist-grade paints are more expensive but have a higher pigment concentration and are of higher quality, making them ideal for professional artists.

How many coats of paint should I apply to a canvas?

The number of coats of paint required on a canvas depends on the opacity and thickness of the paint. It is recommended to apply at least two coats of paint for even coverage and to allow for a more durable finish.

Can I mix different brands of paint on canvas?

Yes, different brands of paint can be mixed on a canvas. However, it is recommended to use the same type of paint (oil or acrylic) to ensure compatibility.

Can I use spray paint on canvas?

Yes, spray paint can be used on canvas, but it is recommended to use a primer to prepare the surface before painting to ensure good adhesion and prevent the paint from soaking through the canvas.

Can I paint on a canvas without stretching it first?

Yes, you can paint on an unstretched canvas, but it is recommended to stretch the canvas first to prevent it from warping or buckling over time.

How long does it take for paint to dry on a canvas?

The drying time of paint on a canvas depends on the type and thickness of the paint, as well as the humidity and temperature of the environment. Acrylic paint dries faster than oil paint and typically takes about 30 minutes to an hour to dry, while oil paint can take up to several days to fully dry.

Thank you for taking the time to read our article on the best paints for canvas! We appreciate your interest and hope the information provided has been helpful and insightful. Now that we have looked at all aspects of the available paint options, it's time for the moment you've been waiting for – our top three expert recommendations.

Out of these 5 best paints for canvas, here are the top three expert recommendations:

  1. Best for beginners: Liquitex BASICS Acrylic Paint Set is an ideal option. With budget-friendly pricing and decent quality that doesn't compromise too much on color vibrancy, this set is perfect for those starting their artistic journey or working on side projects.

  2. Best for professionals on a budget: Winsor & Newton Acrylic Set is a good option. A trusted brand offering consistent performance, strong and bright colors, and excellent blending abilities make this acrylic set suitable for serious artists, whether they're students or professionals.

  3. Best for detailed works: Golden Open Acrylics is the right choice. These paints behave more like oil paints, drying slower and providing more working time, making them excellent for secondary and tertiary shading, blending, and glazing layers.

As you continue to explore the world of canvas painting, remember that practice and exploration are key to finding your unique style and preferences. With these expert recommendations, you should now have a solid starting point to choose the best paints for your needs. Happy painting, and let your creativity flow!

Isn’t it relaxing to hit the shower after a tiring day? But why take a boring bath when you can really take it up a notch?

A well-designed shower system can not only elevate your showering experience but also give a new, sophisticated look to your bathroom. So, if you're thinking along those lines and don't know where to start, you've arrived at the right place.

Finding the right shower system may not be the most complicated treasure hunt, but it's important that you buy something compatible with the existing plumbing. So, take a look at our list of the 5 best shower systems with body jets and refer to the buyers' guide below for more relevant information.

Without further ado, let's get down to business.

Listed below are the 5 best shower systems with body jets from our list:

  • Blue Ocean 52" Stainless Steel SPV878392H Shower Panel: Its unique design, inclusive of a stainless steel frame and a blue tempered glass surface, offers a luxurious and highly functional experience featuring 8 adjustable body nozzles for maximum customization.
  • JiaYouJia Rainfall Shower System: Offering safety and comfort with its 6 body jets and a rain showerhead, it includes a thermostatic shower valve for scald prevention and stands out for its durable, corrosion-resistant brass construction.
  • PULSE ShowerSpas 1049B-BN Rio ShowerSpa Panel: Known for its attractive, minimalistic design, this shower system features 6 single-function silk body spray jets and a 10" low-profile rain showerhead, providing consistent water temperature with its Tru Temp pressure balance valve.
  • ELLO&ALLO Stainless Steel Shower Panel Tower System: Durable and performance-oriented, this shower system enables a wide range of water effects with its multi-outlet switch system and LED overhead shower, making its digital temperature display a highlight feature.
  • ROVOGO 304 Stainless Steel Shower Panel Tower: Well-constructed and designed for a comprehensive shower experience, this system, with its 100pcs non-clogging nozzle rainfall shower and two adjustable jet massages, is celebrated for its 3-function hand shower and easily switchable spray pattern.

Here is the list of the 5 best shower systems with body jets that you can use to relax and soothe your muscles, invigorate your skin, and bring next-level luxury to your shower experience.

1. Blue Ocean 52" Stainless Steel SPV878392H Shower Panel - Best for Luxury Spa Experience

The Blue Ocean 52" Stainless Steel SPV878392H has been creating quite a stir lately, and we decided to find out if it's worth the hype. After testing, we have to say that this shower system is one of a kind and deserves attention. So, if you're looking for something luxurious and highly functional, go for our topmost recommendation.

First and foremost, we're very impressed with the unique design of this system, combining a stainless steel frame and a blue tempered glass surface. Engineered for flat wall installation, the controls on the unit are intuitively arranged for convenient access.

It includes a temperature display and 8 adjustable body nozzles, allowing maximum customization to the users. Other than that, it features a multi-functional hand-held showerhead, a tub spout, and a rainfall showerhead for a thoroughly enjoyable experience. Also, it includes two controls for water flow and temperature so you can adjust them to your liking. 

The best part about this unit is that all functions work independently to ensure adequate water pressure. Therefore, using one setting will not interfere with another set.

We're delighted about the design and features of this model and recommend installing it, especially if you plan on an upgrade. However, our only gripe is that it's quite noisy and makes squeaking and gurgling sounds when the water starts moving around. Nevertheless, the noise is not indicative of any plumbing issues.

Dimensions: 52" x 10" x 3.5” | Weight: 32.2lbs | Material: Stainless Steel, Brass | Finish Type: N/A | Mounting Type: Wall Mount | Number of Jets: 8 | Number of Handles: 1 | Warranty: N/A

2. JiaYouJia Rainfall Shower System - Best for Safety & Comfort

Now that we've reached the end of our list, we would like to finish with another stellar option - the JiaYouJia Rainfall Shower System. It is unlike any conventional shower system, both in terms of design and function. However, uniqueness does not guarantee functionality, but in this case, our 5th item is an exception.

First off, we love that it comes with 6 body jets that can be angled in any way desired to wash every inch of your skin for indulgent hydrotherapy. Furthermore, it includes a rain showerhead, which provides a wide radius of soft rain spray from above for an utterly relaxing sensation.

Apart from that, it also features a hand shower for targeted cleansing and washing. What we liked most is that it comes with a thermostatic shower valve that maintains the pre-set temperature, keeping things safe and reliable. Hence you can turn on the shower without worrying about getting scalded. 

Lastly, since it's constructed from solid brass, this high-quality shower system is designed to last, thanks to its corrosion-resistant, oil-rubbed finish. Therefore, if you're looking to get your money's worth, this item is a great choice.

Well, there's no point sugarcoating here, but this Rainfall Shower System is not suitable for low-water-pressure plumbing. So if you choose to buy this, make sure that your plumbing can support this setup. Nevertheless, it's still a great purchase and offers superior comfort and convenience to the users.

Dimensions: 14.6" x 13.9" x 11" | Weight: 17.76lbs | Material: Brass | Finish Type: Matte Black | Mounting Type: Wall Mount | Number of Jets: 6 | Number of Handles: 3 | Warranty: 10 Years

3. PULSE ShowerSpas 1049B-BN Rio ShowerSpa Panel - Best for Modern Minimalistic Design

For our 3rd spot, we've picked the PULSE ShowerSpas 1049B-BN Rio ShowerSpa Panel, designed for comfort and convenience. That said, it is one of those rare shower systems that look and play the part, allowing users to enjoy hassle-free and personalized baths with mere changes in controls. So if you are looking for that sort of experience, get this stat.

First off, we love the black tempered glass and bronze stainless steel combination, as it'll look great regardless of the bathroom decor. Moreover, the brushed-Nickel fixtures add to the attractive, minimalistic appearance, keeping it simple yet neat.

Function-wise, we're super excited about the 6 single-function silk body spray jets with a soothing mist spray. Honestly, this feature alone will turn your shower area into a standing spa. Apart from that, this system includes a 10" low-profile rain showerhead with rub-clean soft tips to unclog mineral buildup for uninterrupted sessions. 

Meanwhile, the Tru Temp pressure balance valve ensures zero changes in water temperature when switching between features or combining functions. Lastly, we like that it comes completely pre-plumbed and thus easily connects to the existing hot/cold stub-outs.

We are more than satisfied with the design and performance of this model as it does exceedingly well in both departments. However, if we had to find one flaw, it would be the lack of thread seal on the metal fittings, which seems like an unintended manufacturing defect.

Dimensions: 16" x 10" x 5" | Weight: 40lbs | Material: Brass | Finish Type: Brushed | Mounting Type: Surface Mount | Number of Jets: 6 | Number of Handles: 2 | Warranty: 3 Years

4. ELLO&ALLO Stainless Steel Shower Panel Tower System

The ELLO&ALLO Stainless Steel Shower Panel Tower System PS12-S2 incorporates superior design and functionality to deliver an indulgent shower experience. With a multitude of features and high-quality construction, this product introduces a polished, spa-like atmosphere into your bathroom.

Coming from the reputable brand ELLO&ALLO, this shower panel tower system does an excellent job in terms of durability and performance. The integration of SUS304 stainless steel and ABS materials ensures longevity, while the brushed stainless steel finish enhances the aesthetic of your bathroom.

Control is in your hands with the dual-functionality enabled PS12-S2: it hosts a 3-setting handheld shower, 4 adjustable jet nozzles for powerful mist massage, and an LED overhead shower. This means your preferences are always catered to.

You'll also find multi-outlet switches designed for multiple water effect combinations, further adding to the personalized experience. To cap it off, the digital temperature display allows temperature selection, making sure normal shower sessions turn into luxurious spa experiences.

Despite its impressive features, the ELLO&ALLO PS12-S2 falls short when it comes to installation. It isn't user-friendly and often requires professional help. The provided instruction manual is not adequately informative, particularly concerning the measurement of the wall mounting brackets and pipes, leading to additional hassle.

Dimensions: 18.1" x 7.87" x 48" | Weight: 19.41lbs | Material: Stainless Steel, ABS, PVC | Finish Type: Brushed | Mounting Type: Wall Mount | Number of Jets: 4 | Number of Handles: 3 | Warranty: 2 Years

5. ROVOGO 304 Stainless Steel Shower Panel Tower

The Rovogo Multifunction Shower System, a product from America's renowned sanitary brand, Rovogo, is a comprehensive solution to all your bathroom needs. Established in 2012, Rovogo is showcasing its commitment to quality sanitary ware production through products like this meticulously designed shower panel system that includes faucets, jets, handheld showers, and more. With a 3-year quality warranty, this offering from Rovogo guarantees reliability and longevity.

Rovogo’s Multifunction Shower System shines in both quality and utility. Known for its strong commitment to after-sales service, the brand backs this shower panel system with a 3-year quality warranty assuring long-term performance. Constructed with exact precision from 304 high-grade stainless steel, this system exhibits heightened durability and excellent resistance to rust.

One of its distinguished features is the 100pcs non-clogging nozzle rainfall shower, designed to cover your whole body completely, mimicking the refreshing sensation of natural rainfall. Further complementing this unique shower experience are the two jet massages; their adjustable nature allows you to revel in stress-free indulgence.

A standout attribute of the unit is the 3-function hand shower that comes with a long, extra-flexible hose, providing ease of access to those hard-to-reach areas. Additionally, the spray pattern switch, activated by simply pushing it, adds significantly to user convenience.

Despite its unmatched quality and functionality, users may encounter issues while installing the Rovogo Multifunction Shower Panel due to unclear instructions provided. You may need to engage professionals for the installation process, sticking by the adage - better safe than sorry!

Dimensions: 52.9" x 10.2" x 8.6" | Weight: 18.31lbs | Material: 304 Stainless Steel, Brass | Finish Type: Brushed | Mounting Type: Wall Mount | Number of Jets: 2 | Number of Handles: 2 | Warranty: 3 Years

What is the Best Shower System With Body Jets?

Outlined below is a comparison table that effectively distills the features of the top-notch shower systems with body jets currently available. The table probes into crucial aspects like dimensions, weight, material used, finish type, mounting style, number of jets, the count of handles, and warranty.

Product Dimensions Weight Material Finish Type Mounting Type Number of Jets Number of Handles Warranty
Blue Ocean SPV878392H 52" x 10" x 3.5” 32.2lbs Stainless Steel, Brass N/A Wall Mount 8 1 N/A
JiaYouJia Rainfall Shower System 14.6" x 13.9" x 11" 17.76lbs Brass Matte Black Wall Mount 6 3 10 Years
PULSE ShowerSpas 1049B-BN Rio 16" x 10" x 5" 40lbs Brass Brushed Surface Mount 6 2 3 Years
ELLO&ALLO Shower Panel Tower System 18.1" x 7.87" x 48" 19.41lbs Stainless Steel, ABS, PVC Brushed Wall Mount 4 3 2 Years
ROVOGO Shower Panel Tower 52.9" x 10.2" x 8.6" 18.31lbs 304 Stainless Steel, Brass Brushed Wall Mount 2 2 3 Years

Buying Guide for the Best Shower Systems With Body Jets

Knowing all about the 5 best shower systems with body jets is not enough. You still need to figure out which of these options will work perfectly in your bathroom. That's why we put together this brief and informative buyer's guide to help you make an informed choice.

We have listed the key factors that you should consider before purchasing a unit. Take a look now.

Compatibility

This may seem like a no-brainer, but the first thing you must check before getting a new shower system is whether it will work with your existing plumbing system.

Usually, showers are designed to be controlled with one or two valves. Simply put, if you have two handles on the shower panel, you'd want a dual-handle shower system. Likewise, those with one valve need a single-handle shower body spray.

Water Pressure

The 2nd important thing to remember is the level of water pressure as a lot depends on this particular parameter. If you are not sure about your home's water pressure, you may need to get a water pressure gauge or get it checked by a plumber before deciding on a system.

Energy Efficiency

Another thing that you should pay attention to is how a particular system uses water and the gas that heats the water. Essentially, the idea here is to find a shower that works best in your bathroom.

Therefore, make sure that the model you pick efficiently uses water and energy, so you don't have to face any problems moving forward. However, getting a shower system may not be the best idea if you are worried about higher utility bills.

Adjustability and Number of Jets

A hand-held shower is almost always included in any high-end shower panel with body jets. Besides, it should also have multiple jets that can easily be adjusted to suit your preferred angles. Also, if you're looking for higher customization, make sure that all the functions can be individually controlled and combined.

Showerheads and Jet Features

A premium-quality body shower jet will also have different features, which you can experiment with. These will allow you to change the pattern and flow of water. If you want the best possible experience, make sure that there are multiple settings to shuffle through while you are taking a shower.

Do shower systems with body jets consume a lot of water?

Shower systems with body jets tend to use more water than traditional showerheads. The exact consumption depends on the number of body jets and the rate of water flow. However, some systems come with water-saving features to manage water use effectively.

Are shower systems with body jets suitable for all ages?

Yes, shower systems with body jets can be enjoyed by all ages. However, each system should be configured appropriately. For instance, the jets can be adjusted to milder settings for children and elderly users.

How many body jets do I need in my shower system?

The number of body jets needed depends on personal preference. However, a typical shower system with body jets includes 2-6 jets. For a thorough full-body massage experience, at least four jets are usually recommended: two for the upper body and two for the lower.

How easy is it to install a shower system with body jets?

The complexity of installing such a system depends on the existing plumbing and the specifics of the new system. While some shower systems might be simple retrofits, others may require extensive changes to existing plumbing. It’s generally recommended to hire a professional to ensure proper installation.

Can a shower system with body jets be installed in an existing shower?

Yes, a system can be installed in an existing shower, although it may require substantial changes. The actual feasibility and cost entirely depend on the existing plumbing and the desired shower system.

How do I clean shower systems with body jets?

Cleaning these systems involves flushing the system to clear the buildup in the jets and wiping down the fixture’s surfaces with appropriate cleaning products. Avoid using abrasive materials to prevent scratches or damage to the finish.

How long do shower systems with body jets last?

The lifespan of these systems varies based on materials, usage, maintenance, and water quality. High-quality systems well-maintained can last many years.

As we wrap up our comprehensive review of the best shower systems with body jets, it becomes evident that a perfect shower system is more than just an appliance. It is an emblem of design, comfort, and luxury that can transform your first moments of the day from a daily routine to an immersive privileged experience.

From the above five best shower systems with body jets, here are the top three expert recommendations:

For an unforgettable spa-like experience, the Blue Ocean 52″ Stainless Steel SPV878392H Shower Panel is an ideal option. It boasts a unique design, combines stainless steel and blue tempered glass, and promises maximum customization with eight adjustable body nozzles and a multi-functional hand-held showerhead. However, it comes with a slight drawback of being a bit noisy during use.

If safety and comfort are your top priorities, then the JaiYouJia Rainfall Shower System could be a good choice for you. It features six body jets, a panoramic rain showerhead, and a hand shower. Besides, it incorporates a thermostatic shower valve that maintains a pre-set temperature, reducing the chances of scalding. Nonetheless, it may not be suitable for low-water-pressure plumbing.

On the other hand, the PULSE ShowerSpas 1049B-BN Rio ShowerSpa Panel is the right choice for someone who appreciates a blend of modern minimalistic design and functionality. While the black tempered glass and bronze stainless steel body contribute to its sleek appearance, features such as the six single-function silk body spray jets, a 10" low-profile rain showerhead, and the Tru Temp pressure balance valve ensure a comfortable bath experience.

Whether you prioritize a stylish design, convenient features, or the highest safety standards, any of these top-notch shower systems will undoubtedly upgrade your daily shower ritual. Whichever choice you end up making, we hope it turns your bathroom into a haven of relaxation and rejuvenation. Enjoy your new shower experience!

The subject of perspective in art is extremely vast and requires a lot of dedicated studying and even more drawing practice to get a firm grasp on it.

Artists often spend years studying the subject before it fully clicks, and even more on applying the concepts in their artworks. It is not something you learn in a day, but something that you need to study thoroughly and then put your ideas into practice over time. 

If you're a beginner in the world of art, you most likely do not possess a lot of knowledge on this subject. However, it is one of the fundamentals that you absolutely need to learn as an artist. 

Perspective is what defines how your artwork looks from different points of view. It applies to everything that you create in your art, be it a character or an environment. 

While the subject is exceptionally detailed, there are plenty of books out there that can help you get a decent grasp on the subject in a fairly short amount of time. 

Mastery will take time, but these books will definitely help you get started!

Listed below are the 5 best perspective books from our list:

Perspective Made Easy: Especially suitable for beginners, this book simplifies perspective's complexity and is celebrated for its affordability and easy-to-understand material.

How to Draw: Designed for intermediate artists seeking an in-depth understanding of perspective, it covers basic to advanced concepts, making it an ideal choice for artists past the beginner phase.

The Art of Perspective: The Ultimate Guide for Artists in Every Medium: This comprehensive guide offers a nifty blend of simple and complex techniques useful for artists at any skill level, creating a thorough analysis of perspective drawing.

Perspective Drawing Handbook: With a concise structure, this handbook provides an efficient shortcut toward mastering perspective drawing and is suitable for both beginners and experienced artists.

Perspective! For Comic Book Artists: This book focuses on perspective drawing specifically for comic artists, offering strategies for landscapes, characters, and animals, making it the go-to resource for comic book artists looking to enhance their perspective work.

Here is the list of the 10 best perspective books to help you hone your skills and perfect the technique of perspective drawing.

1. Perspective Made Easy - Best for Absolute Beginners

When it comes to understanding perspective in art, Norling's Perspective Made Easy is one of the best books for beginners to get started with! 

At present, it is widely regarded as the best introductory text for beginners who wish to master this complicated subject. There are very few books out there on this subject that explain perspective in such a simple and straightforward manner as Ernest R. Norling has managed to do in this book. 

Apart from being an extremely easy read, this book is also highly affordable. So if you're someone who has no idea where to get started on this topic, I highly recommend you get your hands on this. 

Perspective Made Easy is one of the first books out there that was entirely devoted to clarifying the laws that govern perspective. The book begins with clear and concise discussions on topics such as vanishing points, horizons, and the relationship between eye levels to perspective drawings. 

Irrespective of how much experience or pure talent you possess, you'll almost certainly be able to apply the techniques taught in this book instinctively once you're done studying it! 

Author: Ernest R. Norling | Publisher: Dover Publications | Edition: Republication Edition | Publishing Date: January 19, 1999 | Number of Pages: 224 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 5.39" x 0.47" x 8.46" | Weight: 0.65lbs | Other Format/s: Hardcover, Audiobook, Kindle

2. How to Draw - Best for Intermediate Artists

How to Draw by Scott Robertson is a book that I keep on recommending to artists who are looking to get in-depth with the different concepts of perspective. It is a practical guide to constructing and seeing different objects in perspective and is primarily aimed at teaching how to draw from your imagination while inventing perspective. 

Robertson, who currently teaches at Pasadena's renowned ArtCentre, is one of my favorite authors when it comes to Concept Art. His teaching style is one of the most unique that I've come across, and the vastness of his knowledge becomes evident as soon as you go through a few chapters of this book. 

In this book, you'll learn all the basics of perspective, such as 1-point, 2-point, and 3-point perspective, apart from a lot of advanced concepts that require a lot of dedicated study. Every chapter follows the previous one with each of them building on top of one another. 

While this book is one of the best on this subject, it's not exactly something that I'd recommend to complete newbies. If you have no prior experience in perspective drawing, you'll find it quite hard to go past the first few lessons. But if you've gone past the beginner phase, this is one of the best books to go for! 

Author: Scott Robertson, Thomas Bertling | Publisher: Design Studio Press | Edition: 1st Edition | Publishing Date: December 15, 2013 | Number of Pages: 208 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 9.1" x 0.8" x 11.03" | Weight: 2.5lbs | Other Format/s: Hardcover

3. The Art of Perspective: The Ultimate Guide for Artists in Every Medium - Best Comprehensive Guide

The Art of Perspective by Phil Metzger takes a very different route on teaching perspective, making it a must-have for all those of you who want to get a detailed analysis of the subject.

This is a relatively new book on perspective drawing, and also one of the most simple and straightforward ones I've come across in a long time. In this book, you'll be guided through a series of exercises and mini-lessons that will help you grasp the different notions associated with perspective. 

The author has taken a brilliant approach towards demystifying perspective. The book offers simple but effective techniques that will help you achieve a convincing illusion of distance and depth, irrespective of whether it's only a few inches or miles. 

You'll start with simple, intuitive techniques and atmospheric perspectives and then slowly make your way towards more sophisticated challenges such as curves, stairways, and reflections. It is one of the most effective texts for all those artists who are getting started with perspective drawing. 

Author: Phil Metzger | Publisher: North Light Books | Edition: N/A | Publishing Date: June 12, 2007 | Number of Pages: 208 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 8.53" x 0.55" x 11" | Weight: 1.81lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

4. Perspective Drawing Handbook - Best Concise Handbook

This is one of the most concise books on perspective drawing that you'll find out there with only 96 pages worth of information. But don't let the tiny size fool you, this is one of the most effective resources to have by your side when you're doing perspective drawings! 

This short and sweet guide on perspective drawing provides tons of insights and shortcuts to efficiently sketching perspectives. It's also an extremely versatile text that both beginners and experienced users can learn from. 

The early chapters of this book by Joseph D'Amelio cover concepts such as foreshortening, diminution, convergence, and shading. As you gradually make your way deeper into the text, you'll come across discussions on more advanced techniques, and how you can master them quickly. 

Apart from the written discussions, there are more than 150 illustrations throughout the book that explain every single feature in great detail. So irrespective of whether you are an experienced artist or just starting out, this is a book that you should get your hands on. 

Author: Joseph D’Amelio | Publisher: Dover Publications | Edition: Republication Edition | Publishing Date: May 17, 2004 | Number of Pages: 96 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 8.2" x 0.3" x 10.7" | Weight: 0.6lbs | Other Format/s: Hardcover, Kindle

5. Perspective! For Comic Book Artists - Best for Comic Artists

As the title suggests, this book by David Chelsea is primarily dedicated to comic artists who wish to learn perspective drawing and apply different techniques in their work. It is one of the few books out there that teach perspective with a particular focus on Comic Artists. 

The book was first published in 1997 and is widely considered one of the best texts for learning the fundamentals of perspective art and its subsequent application in comic strips. It teaches various core concepts such as landscapes, characters, animals, and the different techniques you can adopt to draw almost everything from a realistic perspective. 

With this book, you'll learn how to draw the spectacular landscapes and fantastic interiors that you find in comic books. It's one of the best books for comic artists to step up their game and improve their artwork significantly. 

However, I do not recommend this book to total beginners that are just getting started. This is for those of you who have a decent bit of experience with perspective drawing and wish to start doing comic strips. 

Author: David Chelsea | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: N/A | Publishing Date: October 1, 1997 | Number of Pages: 176 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 7.05" x 0.48" x 9.98" | Weight: 0.98lbs | Other Format/s: N/A

6. Perspective for Artists

For all those of you who are looking to learn drawing and concept art on a budget, Dover Art Instructions has some of the best resources for you to choose from. Perspective for Artists is among a few of the publisher's best books on perspective drawing with over 400 diagrams and illustrations spread throughout the book.

Rex Vicat Cole has managed to make the process of learning perspective a highly fascinating and enjoyable experience through this book. The book comes with concise instruction, clear and straightforward language, and tons of illustrations to make learning a lot of fun.

You'll come across over 80 illustrations of drawings by old masters, as well as the author himself that demonstrate how perspective is utilized practically. The illustration problems are so well depicted that you'd not even need to depend on the text references to solve them at all.

However, since the book was written over a hundred years ago, some of the illustrations and the language may feel outdated. Apart from that, this is one of the best books out there for beginners to get started with.

Author: Rex Vicat Cole | Publisher: Dover Publications | Edition: Republication Edition | Publishing Date: June 1, 1976 | Number of Pages: 288 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 5.38" x 0.56" x 8.58" | Weight: 0.65lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

7. Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators

Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators by Ernest W. Watson is one of the more advanced books in this list that is targeted mainly towards more experienced artists. This is not a text that you'll be able to grasp without a strong knowledge of the fundamentals of Perspective drawing.  

You might have noticed how most illustrators, animators, and cartoonists exaggerate perspective in their artworks. With this book, you know how you can master this art while still abiding by the rules of perspective drawing. 

The author, Ernest W. Watson, is a master on the subject having taught at Pratt for over 20 years. His style of writing is very clear, and he knows how exactly to reach his students through this text. 

In this book, he teaches some of the more complicated techniques that can be used to manipulate perspective while still being consistent throughout your art. It is full of diagrams and illustrations by real artists to help you get a firm understanding of the complexities of perspective. 

Author: Ernest W. Watson | Publisher: Dover Publications | Edition: Republication Edition | Publishing Date: January 14, 1993 | Number of Pages: 160 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 8.35" x 0.39" x 10.94" | Weight: 0.76lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

8. Perspective Without Pain

Perspective without Pain is one of Phil Metzger's best works, and also one of the simplest books on perspective drawing that you'll find in the market. This is one of the author's older works and is recommended for beginners looking for an introductory text on perspective drawing.

As the title suggests, 'Perspective without Pain' attempts to teach new artists how to create perspective without complicated equations, mechanical terms, and T-Squares. The book adopts a hands-on approach with simple instructions to teach students how to create depth and perspective in their drawings and paintings.

The earlier chapters cover different techniques that will help you impart a sense of depth to your paintings by gradually decreasing the distances between similar objects and then decreasing their sizes. You'll learn how to manipulate color and value and draw from any viewpoint.

It covers pretty much everything that you'd need to learn as a beginner, and a lot more!

Author: Phil Metzger | Publisher: North Light Books | Edition: Reprint Edition | Publishing Date: March 15, 1992 | Number of Pages: 144 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 8.5" x 0.47" x 11" | Weight: 1.25lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

9. Basic Perspective Drawing: A Visual Approach

Basic Perspective Drawing by John Montague is one of the most comprehensive guides on perspective drawing that you can find. It is incredibly detailed and covers a vast array of techniques, concepts, and theories that artists of all skill levels can make use of. 

If you're looking forward to learning perspective drawing right from the basics to some fairly advanced concepts, this is one of the best books to go for. There are loads of illustrations, apart from tons of links that lead you to video tutorials to supplement the theories written in the book. 

The thing that makes this book so effective at teaching perspective is the step-by-step approach adopted by the author. The book progresses gradually from simple concepts to distinct tools and methods, illustrating how to create perspective one step at a time. 

Apart from the written theories and illustrations, there are also plenty of exercises wherein the readers can shade and highlight sections to reinforce their understanding of the book's contents. 

Author: John Montague | Publisher: Wiley | Edition: 6th Edition | Publishing Date: January 29, 2013 | Number of Pages: 288 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 8.4" x 0.8" x 10.8" | Weight: 1.7lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

10. Theory and Practice of Perspective

This book by G.A. Storey is considered to be one of the best books on perspective drawing, covering almost everything that an artist should know regarding the subject. This comprehensive guide on perspective drawing will help you understand and examine the theories of perspective from all angles.

G.A. Storey has designed the scores of chapters in this book in a highly concise format, thus covering a wide range of topics on the subject. There are discussions on theories that are both scientific as well as informal, apart from over 300 diagrams and illustrations. 

Once you're done with the text, you'll master how to reproduce distance, shape, shade, proportion, shadows, reflections, and other effects that enhance two-dimensional works with realistic and lifelike qualities. 

Author: G.A. Storey | Publisher: Dover Publications | Edition: N/A | Publishing Date: February 10, 2006 | Number of Pages: 288 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 5.25" x 0.75" x 8.25" | Weight: 0.85lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle

What is the Best Book for Perspective?

Subsequent is a comparison table, meticulously organized to highlight the salient features of the finest books that impart perspective. The table dissects factors including the author, publisher, edition, date of publication, number of pages, format, dimensions, weight, and the presence of other formats.

Book Author Publisher Edition Publishing Date Number of Pages Format Dimensions Weight Other Format/s
Perspective Made Easy Ernest R. Norling Dover Publications Republication Edition January 19, 1999 224 Paperback 5.39" x 0.47" x 8.46" 0.65lbs Hardcover, Audiobook, Kindle
How to Draw Scott Robertson, Thomas Bertling Design Studio Press 1st Edition December 15, 2013 208 Paperback 9.1" x 0.8" x 11.03" 2.5lbs Hardcover
The Art of Perspective: The Ultimate Guide for Artists in Every Medium Phil Metzger North Light Books N/A June 12, 2007 208 Paperback 8.53" x 0.55" x 11" 1.81lbs Kindle
Perspective Drawing Handbook Joseph D’Amelio Dover Publications Republication Edition May 17, 2004 96 Paperback 8.2" x 0.3" x 10.7" 0.6lbs Hardcover, Kindle
Perspective! For Comic Book Artists David Chelsea Watson-Guptill N/A October 1, 1997 176 Paperback 7.05" x 0.48" x 9.98" 0.98lbs N/A
Perspective for Artists Rex Vicat Cole Dover Publications Republication Edition June 1, 1976 288 Paperback 5.38" x 0.56" x 8.58" 0.65lbs Kindle
Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators Ernest W. Watson Dover Publications Republication Edition January 14, 1993 160 Paperback 8.35" x 0.39" x 10.94" 0.76lbs Kindle
Perspective Without Pain Phil Metzger North Light Books Reprint Edition March 15, 1992 144 Paperback 8.5" x 0.47" x 11" 1.25lbs Kindle
Basic Perspective Drawing: A Visual Approach John Montague Wiley 6th Edition January 29, 2013 288 Paperback 8.4" x 0.8" x 10.8" 1.7lbs Kindle
Theory and Practice of Perspective G.A. Storey Dover Publications N/A February 10, 2006 288 Paperback 5.25" x 0.75" x 8.25" 0.85lbs Kindle

Can I use these perspective books alongside other art courses?

Yes, you can use these perspective books alongside other art courses. In fact, combining the knowledge gained from these books with additional courses can help reinforce your understanding of the concepts and techniques, allowing you to develop a well-rounded skill set.

It is essential, however, to ensure that the courses you choose complement the books and provide consistent information so that the combined learning experience is effective and meaningful.

How can these perspective books improve my overall drawing skills?

These perspective books can improve your overall drawing skills by providing detailed explanations, step-by-step instructions, and exercises to teach you the techniques and principles of perspective drawing. By learning and mastering these concepts, you will be able to create a realistic sense of depth, distance, and dimension in your artwork, enhancing the overall quality and appeal of your drawings.

These books cater to various skill levels and artistic styles, so you can find one that suits your needs and helps you improve your perspective drawing abilities effectively.

Are there any books on the subject of perspective drawing specifically for comic book artists?

“Perspective! For Comic Book Artists” by David Chelsea is a book dedicated to comic artists who wish to learn perspective drawing and apply various techniques in their work. This book covers the fundamentals of perspective drawing and its application to comic strips, making it a great resource for artists in this specific field.

Are there any books that focus on teaching perspective drawing without complicated equations and technical terms?

“Perspective Without Pain” by Phil Metzger is a book that aims to teach new artists how to create perspective without complicated equations, mechanical terms, or T-squares. The book adopts a hands-on approach with simple instructions, making it an enjoyable way to learn perspective drawing.

Is it necessary to have prior knowledge of perspective drawing techniques before using advanced books like "Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators"?

Having a strong understanding of the fundamentals of perspective drawing is recommended before delving into more advanced books like “Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators.” These advanced books often discuss complex techniques and concepts that might be challenging for beginners without a solid foundation in the subject.

 

As we reach the end of our journey through the top perspective books for artists, it becomes clear that the ideal book depends on your skill level, focus, and preference. Each book has its unique strengths, catering to different needs and expertise levels.

From the above 10 best perspective books, here are the top three expert recommendations:

The book Perspective Made Easy is an ideal option for absolute beginners. Ernest R. Norling's simple and straightforward approach makes understanding and mastering perspective achievable for newcomers to the subject.

How to Draw by Scott Robertson is a good option for intermediate artists, focusing on in-depth concepts and teaching how to draw from your imagination while inventing perspective. This book will help you elevate your skills and polish your techniques.

Lastly, The Art of Perspective: The Ultimate Guide for Artists in Every Medium is the right choice for artists seeking a comprehensive guide. Phil Metzger's book offers an effective combination of easy-to-follow instructions and challenging exercises, accommodating artists of all levels in their journey toward mastery.

No matter the stage of your artistic growth, the perfect perspective book awaits you, ready to help unlock your full potential and spur your creativity to new heights. Happy drawing!

Are you fond of finishing Lego projects but hate when the blocks come apart? Don't worry, we have a solution for you. 

Most of us have played with Lego blocks as kids and have good memories attached to them. There must have been times when we really liked a project but couldn't keep it together as the blocks got loose over time. 

Luckily, the adhesives industry has advanced since then, and now we have a number of glue options that can bond Lego bricks easily. Having said that, the numerous options can make it challenging to pick the perfect product, especially for newbies. 

Therefore, we thought of creating a list with some of the best glue for Legos available on the market to help you out. We have even included a handy buying guide so that you can narrow down your options with ease. 

So, without further ado, let's get started. 

Listed below are the 5 best glues for Legos from our list:

  • Gorilla® Super Glue: This glue stands out for its no-mess application due to its thick gel consistency and anti-clog cap, which prolongs its usability. It's fast-drying and the compact bottle design is comfortable to handle, however, using too much can result in visible gaps between Lego blocks.
  • Loctite® Super Glue: This brand is known for its versatile and durable formula that includes features such as precise application and fast drying. A standout feature is its rubber-toughened glue that remains flexible yet resistant to heavy impact and vibration, though the applicator needs frequent cleaning to prevent clogging.
  • GLUEMASTERS® Professional-Grade Adhesive: Noted for its industrial-grade formula that works well for various projects including Lego construction. The precise applicator and different viscosity levels make it versatile and highly effective. Use in well-ventilated spaces is recommended due to its strong formulation.
  • Rhino Glue®: Its fast drying time and clear result make it a great choice for Lego constructions. The extra-strong formulation creates a shock-resistant bond that ensures longevity, yet its strong smell might be off-putting to some users.
  • Krazy Glue® All-purpose glue: This glue offers a strong bond that remains effective over a long period. The precision applicator allows for a smooth application process, and the stay-fresh container ensures multiple uses. Product quantity in individual packs might be less for bigger projects.

To help keep your Lego masterpieces intact, there are various types of glue available in the market that are specifically designed for use with Legos. But with so many options out there, it can be tough to determine which one to use. That's why we've put together a list of the 7 best glues for Legos, to help you choose the right one for your needs.

1. Gorilla - Best for Precision

Let's start with a brand that most people know — Gorilla, a manufacturer that has consistently produced the best quality adhesives. And if you want glue for permanent Lego constructions, then this product is bound to be a good choice. 

There are several things to like about this Gorilla super glue. But, first, we would like to divert your attention toward its consistency. Unlike any other liquid glue, this formula comes in a thick gel, making it easy to apply on vertical and horizontal Lego pieces. That said, the no-mess Gorilla glue makes the application process easy as the glue won't get everywhere. 

Another key feature of this glue is its packaging. You can now hold the cleverly designed compact plastic bottle in your hand for long hours while working on an intricate project. 

However, what probably stands out the most is the anti-clog cap, which keeps the Gorilla glue from drying out, thus allowing multiple uses with each bottle. 

Furthermore, the Gorilla super glue gel takes between ten to forty-five seconds to set, based on the amount of glue used. And, as it gets fully cured in 24 hours, you wouldn't need to wait for days before handling the Lego construction. 

Overall, this is one of the best permanent glues for Lego blocks. But, our only concern is that laying down a thick layer of Gorilla glue may leave a visible gap between the blocks. So, you need to be a bit more careful while using the glue and only apply a few drops. 

Adhesive Type: Cyanoacrylate | Cure Time: 10-30 sec. | Bond Strength: High | Heat Resistance: No | Gap Filling: No | Viscosity: Gel | Waterproof: No

2. Loctite - Best for Flexibility

For the last 50 years, Loctite has remained a leading brand of permanent glues available on the market. The best thing about this product is its innovative formula that promises versatility and durability. And, as it's widely available from different retailers, you won't have a hard time searching for this super glue. 

To begin with, what pulled us towards this product was the packaging. We really liked the bottle design, which is equipped with squeezable sides to make the application process easier. What's more, the sides have grooves to help you maintain a better grip on the bottle. Not to mention how the precise nozzle lets you apply drops of glue even on the tiniest of Lego bricks. 

However, the property that truly makes this permanent adhesive a worthy product is its unique formulation. That said, it is a rubber-toughened glue that allows bonds to be flexible while also giving it the ability to resist heavy impact and vibration.

Moreover, this glue dries clear, so you wouldn't need to worry about any traces showing through the Legos, especially between darker-colored pieces. On that note, the transparency provides a seamless look to the blocks when the right amount of glue is applied. 

One of our only concerns with this glue is that the product may build up on the applicator if it isn't cleaned after every use. So, you should always remember to wipe off the applicator with a paper towel to prevent it from clogging. Also, refrain from keeping the bottle uncapped for long periods.

Adhesive Type: Epoxy | Cure Time: 5 Minutes | Bond Strength: High | Heat Resistance: Yes (up to 300°F) | Gap Filling: Yes | Viscosity: Thick | Waterproof: Yes

3. GLUEMASTERS - Best for Industrial Use

Are you in search of a permanent glue that won't lose its bond even after years? If yes, you can try this adhesive from GLUEMASTERS, which boasts an industrial-grade formula. This makes the glue excellent for all kinds of projects, from Lego construction to fixing heavy-duty machines. So, let's check out its features.

If you are a hobbyist who likes to indulge in different projects, it's a must to have this GLUEMASTERS professional-grade adhesive. It comes in various viscosity levels to choose from, but we recommend the thick variant for Legos as it works well for vertical surfaces. Nevertheless, this glue is available in different quantities, including an 80 oz bottle. 

However, the best feature of this glue has to be its precise applicator. The nozzle allows you to place the smallest drop of adhesive on the Lego blocks before attaching the plastic pieces. Additionally, the bottles are only filled to two-thirds of the total capacity to give you more control while applying the glue. 

Besides its function as a glue for Legos, this professional-grade glue is quite versatile. You can use it to bond materials like rubber, ceramic, wood, metal, and other plastic objects. Needless to say, it's a helpful glue to have in your toolbox.

Although not a dealbreaker, its industrial formulation is only suitable for use in a well-ventilated space. The manufacturer also suggests using protective gear, like gloves and goggles, to keep yourself safe from coming in contact with the glue. Apart from this, we don't have any complaints about this permanent glue. 

Adhesive Type: Cyanoacrylate | Cure Time: 5-15 sec. | Bond Strength: High | Heat Resistance: No | Gap Filling: No | Viscosity: Thin | Waterproof: No

4. Rhino Glue

Have you been looking for cyanoacrylate-based hobby glues for permanently bonding your Lego construction? If so, this heavy-duty Rhino glue can be an excellent choice to finish the task as fast as possible without the Lego set falling apart. This glue is also part of the Pro series by Rhino, guaranteeing top-notch quality. 

Right off the bat, what we liked about this glue was its fast drying time. Notably, the drying time is exceedingly swift compared to other permanent glues. Rhino categorizes this product as a tough-instant glue, and it does live up to the claims. So, while using this product, you won't need to wait for hours as the glue cures within 20 minutes. 

Moreover, the Rhino glue dries completely clear. Hence, there's no need to worry about needing to paint over the adhesive to match the color of the Legos. And, as applying a few drops does the job, your Lego bricks won't have a thick layer of glue between them. 

Furthermore, one of the critical features of this glue has to be the unique formula that makes it stronger than other glues. Because it's a maximum-strength adhesive, your Lego bricks will remain glued together permanently. Plus, the glue has been toughened to make it shock-resistant and maintain a strong bond under pressure. 

When it comes to this glue, the only drawback we found was its strong smell. It can be a bit overwhelming for people who may be averse to the smell of adhesives. So, we recommend wearing a proper mask while using this glue to keep yourself from inhaling it. 

Adhesive Type: Cyanoacrylate | Cure Time: 10-30 sec. | Bond Strength: High | Heat Resistance: No | Gap Filling: Yes | Viscosity: Thin | Waterproof: Yes

5. Krazy Glue

If you didn't know already, Krazy Glue comes from the house of Elmer's, so we were really thrilled about trying this product. And, this super glue didn't fail our expectations when it came to gluing together Lego bricks, as it does the job quite smoothly. So, let's learn a bit about its features. 

Are you tired of using superglues that seem to lose their bond over time? Don't worry, as Krazy Glue has got you covered. The strong all-purpose bond of this glue helps to keep the blocks attached even after a long time has passed. So, your Lego piece won't suddenly crumble apart after a few weeks after you accomplish the whole building process. 

Having said that, for us, the best feature of the Krazy Glue was the applicator which is perfect for attaching Legos, particularly the tiny pieces. The precision tip places a small dab that's enough to give a strong bond. And, as the tube is compact, the application process is pretty smooth.

On top of that, the glue comes in a stay-fresh container, so it remains viable for multiple uses. However, do make sure to cap it properly after every use. 

To be honest, this is one of the best glues for Legos that we have tried out. However, our only complaint is that the individual packs have very little product. So, you'll certainly need to buy more than one tube of the Krazy Glue for a bigger Lego art piece. 

Adhesive Type: Cyanoacrylate | Cure Time: 10-30 sec. | Bond Strength: High | Heat Resistance: No | Gap Filling: No | Viscosity: Thin | Waterproof: No

6. Le-Glue Temporary Glue 

Did you know that a kid made the Le-Glue non-permanent glue? Yes, this product was designed by Tripp Phillips when he was in the third grade. Unlike the other Lego glues mentioned by us, this one can be safely used by kids to create their own fun Lego projects. So, let's check it out. 

First of all, let's focus on the use of the Le-Glue temporary glue. As you can understand, this glue is meant to bond the Legos temporarily. But, that doesn't mean your blocks will fall apart, as this glue from Le-Glue has a hold that's twelve times stronger than other temporary glues. 

Moreover, it works for all kinds of building blocks, including Lego, Nano Blocks, and Mega Blocks. You just need to apply a small dab of this temporary glue on one block and press the other block on it for some time to get a reliable bond. 

Furthermore, Le-Glue temporary glue comes in a non-toxic and solvent-free formula. And, it's made from all-natural ingredients. So, your kids can safely play with it for as long as they want without facing any health issues. 

Plus, it's pretty easy to break the bond of the Le-Glue temporary glue as all you need to do is soak the blocks or project in warm water. 

One of the only problems with this product is that the application can quickly get messy, especially for kids. As this glue comes in plastic packaging, you need to pour it into a container before starting your project. However, the good thing is that it's easy to get rid of this glue from your clothes or skin, and it doesn't leave any residue. 

Adhesive Type: Temporary | Cure Time: N/A | Bond Strength: Low | Heat Resistance: No | Gap Filling: No | Viscosity: Thick | Waterproof: No

7. BrickShield

Have you been looking for a semi-permanent glue that's easy to apply? If so, then check out this non-toxic and kid's safe glue from BrickShield that has been designed specifically for Legos. It comes in a handy spray bottle that lets you apply the glue directly on the bricks without needing any applicator. 

Straight away, what we liked about this product was the packaging which makes applying the glue pretty easy. Do follow the directions specified by the brand, and you'll be able to glue Legos with precision. A nice thing about the bottle is that the kids face no problems in spraying, and it doesn't hurt their hands. 

Moreover, this glue has been specially designed for plastic blocks of all kinds, including Lego. And, it drastically reduces the time needed to glue Legos for elaborate projects because of its fast application. 

Another one of the key features of this temporary brick glue is its non-toxic and kid-safe formula. This is rarely seen in aerosol products made for kids, so we were pretty impressed with this adhesive. 

Plus, the brand provides a 100% satisfaction guarantee with this spray glue. So, if, for some reason, you're not happy with this product, there's an option to contact customer care to receive a refund. 

We would like you to know that this isn't really a drawback that's exclusive to this glue as it's common in all spray glue products. When you spray to apply the glue from a distance, there's bound to be some wastage. This means that it's always better to keep a backup of this glue to avoid running out of it. 

Adhesive Type: Silicone | Cure Time: 24 Hours | Bond Strength: Medium | Heat Resistance: Yes (up to 500°F) | Gap Filling: Yes | Viscosity: Thick | Waterproof: Yes

What is the Best Glue For Legos?

This section provides a straightforward comparison of leading glues for Legos. The table below outlines key Lego adhesive specifications, including type, cure time, bond strength, heat resistance, gap-filling capability, viscosity, and waterproofing.

Product Type Cure Time Bond Strength Heat Resistance Gap Filling Viscosity Waterproof
Gorilla Cyanoacrylate 10-30 sec. High No No Gel No
Loctite Epoxy 5 Minutes High Yes (up to 300°F) Yes Thick Yes
GLUEMASTERS Cyanoacrylate 5-15 sec. High No No Thin No
Rhino Glue Cyanoacrylate 10-30 sec. High No Yes Thin Yes
Krazy Glue Cyanoacrylate 10-30 sec. High No No Thin No
Le-Glue Temporary Glue Temporary N/A Low No No Thick No
BrickShield Silicone 24 Hours Medium Yes (up to 500°F) Yes Thick Yes

Buying Guide for the Best Glue for Legos

When choosing the best glue for Legos, you need to know some essential points that'll help to make the right decision. As gluing the Legos is often based on specific projects, skipping any points may leave you with completely unusable glue. So, let's check out these key points. 

1. Viscosity

One of the most important features to look for in glue is its viscosity. A thin consistency may prove to be challenging while gluing Legos as it may cause the blocks to slide around. Hence, it's better to opt for glue with thick viscosity or a gel texture for attaching the Legos easily. 

Moreover, thicker glues are easier to apply on vertical surfaces. As Lego projects can have a mix of vertical and horizontal planes, opting for glues with thick viscosity proves to be an excellent choice. And it makes the process less messy. 

2. Permanence 

Would you like the Lego set to have a permanent bond? If so, it's best to choose a glue that comes with the capacity to bond the surfaces permanently. While choosing a permanent glue, make sure to handle your Lego construction properly before it cures properly. 

However, while researching the glue for Legos, we found out that some people prefer semi-permanent or non-permanent glue. These options are better to display the completed project for a certain period. It also leaves you with the choice to dismantle the Lego structure whenever needed. 

On that note, while choosing a non-permanent or temporary adhesive, don't forget to check the process of breaking the bonds. Typically, the glues are water-soluble and dissolve in warm water, but some may require the application of certain chemicals to come off the Legos entirely. 

3. Curing Time 

Another point to check while looking for the best glue for Legos is the curing time. As you may know, there's a wait time for most glues when it comes to handling the pieces after attaching them. In the case of Legos, we want it to be as fast as possible to avoid detaching the pieces. 

Now, the cure time or the total time taken for the glue to dry is usually between 24-48 hours, depending on the brand and consistency of the adhesives. Superglues take the least time, while white glue takes the longest. So, make sure not to forget about the curing time while ordering your Lego glue. 

4. Ease Of Application 

On searching for how to glue Legos, a common suggestion you'll notice tells you to look for a suitable glue. And, that's why it's important to choose a Lego glue that comes with ease of application. 

You don't want it to be too messy, as it can make working with small blocks frustrating. At the same time, try to find a product with a precise applicator to avoid using too much glue. 

Having said that, the application technique does vary depending on the project, so try to find a product that fits your demands from the adhesive.

Can glue be used on all types of Legos?

Most Lego types, such as regular and Duplo Legos, can be bonded with glue. Nevertheless, ascertain that the glue implemented is compatible with the plastic material constituting your Legos for seamless application.

How do I remove glue from Legos?

The process of glue removal from Legos can prove problematic, with the potential for damage to the plastic. Usage of a solvent like acetone or nail polish remover is a common approach, but caution is advised as these substances could render the plastic brittle.

Can I take apart Legos after using glue?

Taking apart glued Legos is typically not feasible, as the glue tends to create a permanent bond. Thus, you’re advised to think carefully before deciding whether to permanently adhere your Legos together using glue.

Is glue safe to use on Legos?

Applying glue to Legos is perfectly safe, however, it’s crucial to use glue explicitly designed for Lego use. This ensures the adhesive won't inflict damage to the plastic, maintaining its structural integrity.

Tower air conditioners often deliver better airflow when compared to regular air conditioners due to their narrow, tower-like design. They are usually placed on a round base that enables them to circulate air uniformly at 90 degrees.

With summers getting hotter and longer due to global warming, it’s becoming increasingly difficult to bear the summer heat. And what's worse than an exhausting summer day? Lack of a functional HVAC system. 

To help you out, I have compiled a list of the nine best tower air conditioners to keep your room cool and save you from high power bills.

Listed below are the 5 best tower air conditioners from our list:

  • Air Choice Swamp Cooler: This product stands out for its double water tanks and bladeless fans, making it not only efficient in cooling larger rooms but also child-safe and easy to clean; moreover, its built-in timer and energy-efficient feature contribute to cost-saving.
  • VAGKRI Portable Air Conditioner: This air conditioner shines because of its instant cooling feature and in-built temperature sensors, making it the best choice for quick and efficient cooling; additionally, it comes with an LED control panel and an energy-saving eco-mode, enhancing user experience and energy efficiency.
  • Dreo Evaporative Air Cooler: Ideal for spacious areas, this air cooler excels with its multi-layer cooling mechanism and 80-degree oscillating fan blades, providing extensive and efficient cooling; its easy-to-clean design and adaptive humidifier feature amplifies its desirability.
  • TRUSTECH Evaporative Cooler: This cooler distinguishes itself for its energy efficiency, wide-angle cooling, and quiet function; its safe design, multi-functional oscillating fan, and timer add to the overall user comfort, making it the top choice for reducing power consumption without compromising on performance.
  • Paris Rhône Evaporative Cooler: As a multi-functional product, this cooler provides effective cooling with its 3-in-1 function, large water tank, and variety of fan speeds; accompanied by a 15-hour programmable timer and user-friendly settings, it offers exceptional operational convenience.

Here's the list of the 9 best tower air conditioners, designed to deliver better airflow and combat the scorching summer heat while keeping your energy costs in check.

1. Air Choice Swamp Cooler - Best For Greater Coverage

Air Choice designed the Swamp cooler with double water tanks to cater to a wide variety of people. This feature makes the product the best tower air conditioner for pregnant women and senior citizens, enabling them to enjoy the cool breeze.

You don't have to worry about those extra hot days. Add two ice boxes to each of the tanks, and the cooler will cool the warm air in no time. The air conditioning unit is a 43-inch tall cooler with 20-inch air outlets to handle larger wind coverage.

This portable AC also features oscillation, which further enables it to cool larger living rooms with ease. And if you wish to use it at night, you can set a timer on the cooler, after which it will turn off automatically. The shortest timer is an hour, and the longest is 12 hours, giving you sufficient time to cool the room without using it all night.

But if you're worried about catching a cold from prolonged use, the cooler does not filter cool air consistently, so this possibility is minimal. It is also energy efficient so that you can say goodbye to expensive power bills.

What makes this product one of the best portable air conditioners is its versatility, and it is also safe to use around kids. The fans do not comprise any blades, and you don't have to worry about your child getting injured. This also makes the fan much easier to clean and maintain, thus prolonging its lifespan.

Item weight: 16.17 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 60 watts | Special Features: Oscillating and bladeless

2. VAGKRI Portable Air Conditioner - Best For Instant Cooling

The VAGKRI portable air conditioner is multi-functional with a maximum airflow of 350 m/hour. This makes it easier for the portable AC to cool down hot air in large rooms in an instant. Its cooling features make this one of the best portable air conditioners for harsh summer days since it cools the room faster. 

This portable air conditioner has three different settings: cool, dehumidifier, and fan mode, all of which provide dehumidification and ventilation. The product also features in-built temperature sensors that keep the overall temperature in check to cool a room accordingly. 

Additionally, it comes with a Smart Eco mode and Auto mode that prove handy when the portable air conditioner is switched on for prolonged periods. This also minimizes your energy consumption and reduces the overall power bill. 

The fan comprises three-speed settings along with auto-swing fan blades that cool a room in all directions. It also has an impressive 80-degree wide-angle airflow that can be adjusted to ensure air is flowing evenly throughout the room. Moreover, the LED panels are designed to be readable, even in dark rooms and from a distance. 

When you don't want to get out of your bed or couch to turn the cooler on or off, you can use the remote that comes with the air conditioner. The remote control allows you to set a timer, with the maximum time being 24 hours, for a comfortable experience. 

Plus, these portable AC units can be transported from your living room to your bedroom with the help of 4 universal wheels on it. 

Item weight: 63.1 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 1,200 watts | Special Features: Auto-mode, 3-in-1 mode, and LED touch control

3. Dreo Evaporative Air Cooler - Best Oscillating AC

The Dreo portable air conditioner can cool any corner of the floor space, irrespective of how far away it is. Delivering 1,300 RPM, this air cooler is a powerful machine to keep your home cool during hot days. The British Thermal Units (BTU) stands at 12000 

It also comprises 80-degree oscillating fan blades that blow cool air in all directions, complemented by its multi-layer cooling mechanism. With an optimized impeller wheel and a cooling pad, the portable AC allows more airflow, which can be beneficial for extra humid and hot rooms. Generally, the airflow volume ranges up to 13,000 cubic feet per hour. 

Cleaning a tower air conditioner can be a challenging task, but with the Dreo cooler, this process is much easier. The cooler's water tank is detachable and can be removed from the portable AC for cleaning. 

Additionally, you can remove the cooling and rear grille to ensure that it is dust and debris-free. This keeps the air coming out clean and safe while prolonging the product's life due to regular maintenance. 

In terms of comfort, this is the best portable air conditioner and passes the dry, warm air through the damp cooling pad, which ultimately absorbs the heat. As a result, the air that is circulated back into the room is much cooler and lowers the humidity levels. 

You can also use the fan-only mode during the night since it is designed to be extremely quiet.

Item weight: 13.2 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 50 watts | Special Features: Remote controlled, bladeless, oscillating, timer

4. TRUSTECH Evaporative Cooler - Best Energy-Efficient Cooler

The TRUSTECH is the best portable air conditioner with an all-in-1 system that can be used as is or like an evaporative air cooler. It comprises a water curtain system that contains tanks with a capacity of 2 liters, along with two ice boxes. This allows the product to deliver efficient cooling and air circulation in a room size of up to 120 square footage. 

Moreover, it absorbs the humidity in the air and helps achieve a comfortable temperature. The multi-functional oscillating fan also has 70 degrees of oscillation and can cool down large areas with high ceilings in no time. For better cooling, the air conditioners come with three different cooling modes(normal, natural, and sleep) as well as three different speeds (low, medium, and high).

If you plan on using the portable AC when you go to bed, you can set a timer for up to 8 hours. And you don't have to worry about any noises from the cooler as it is designed to be ultra-quiet. In terms of energy efficiency,  TRUSTECH portable air conditioners are an affordable way to cool your room since they use less energy to function. 

It is much more environment-friendly and can further reduce your power bills if placed near a window. It even reduces overall power consumption by 50% and ensures your home can stay cool without burning your pocket. 

The product is lightweight and portable, so you can move your cooler from one place to another without any trouble. It is also bladeless and you won't have any safety concerns, especially when children operate it. 

Item weight: 11.97 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 65 watts | Special Features: Oscillation, bladeless, energy-efficient

5. Paris Rhône Evaporative Cooler - Best Multi-functional Cooler

The Paris Rhône Portable air conditioner is a device that has all 3, fan, humidifier, and cooler, in one product. This 3-in-1 function along with the oscillating fans, keeps your room extremely cool and comfortable even in dry climates. It also regulates the humidity in the air, maximizes airflow, and lets out a cool, calming breeze, all with the help of a single portable AC. 

To access the cool mode, all you have to do is use the ice packs that are provided or add cold water to the tank. This, in turn, enhances the cooler's cooling power and allows it to produce quick and large quantities of cool air that lowers the room temperature and provides relief. 

The fan blades have an oscillation of 80 degrees and comprise 19-inch extra-long air outlets that can blow air across the room with a velocity of 25 square feet. This not only ensures maximum coverage but also allows you to stay cool even if you're seated at the opposite corner of the room. 

The 6-liter water tank capacity makes this device a great portable air conditioner for prolonged use without needing refilling at frequent intervals. Additionally, you can adjust the fan speeds up to 4 different degrees and use any of the three wind modes included. If you wish to use the air cooler when you go to bed, you can set a timer for up to 15 hours. 

These additional features can be accessed through the user-friendly control panel situated at the top of the device. And if you're a little too comfortable in your bed or couch to do that, simply use the provided remote to change the settings. 

Item weight: 30 pounds | Number of speeds: 4 | Wattage: 65 watts | Special Features: 3-in-1 cooler, 80-degree oscillation, four wind speeds, 19-inch air outlet

6. Balko Portable Evaporative Cooler - Best Allergy-Friendly Cooler

An energy-efficient cooling system that can dehumidify the room is a mandatory requirement in every house. This is where Blako, one of the best portable air conditioners, comes into play. All you need to do is pour some water into the device's water tank, and you're good to go. For more intense cooling, you can add a couple of frozen ice boxes, which enhances the cooling effect. 

This portable AC is beneficial if you have larger living rooms since it is a windowless air conditioner. Additionally, its 70-degree vertical and horizontal oscillation further ensures your better-moving air and that your room can stay cool no matter how large it is. The cooler comes with two different modes (natural and cooling) and three (low, medium, and high) fan speeds. However, what makes this product different is its six wind effects that you can control according to your needs. 

The Balko cooler is by far the lightest cooler compared to other models, and its exterior linear design adds to its lightweight nature. Unlike other portable ACs, these portable air conditioners comprise an A4-sized body, which takes up little to no space in your room. 

To add to the portability factor, the portable ACs have 360-degree wheels on all four ends, which makes moving around much easier. If you require functional portable ACs that can not only cool your home efficiently but also look good with your furniture, this is the product for you. 

The cooler also consists of a thick cartridge that purifies and allows you to breathe fresh air. Additionally, these cartridges are removable and can be washed to ensure safety. This feature, particularly, can be pretty helpful for people with allergies pertaining to dust and certain bacteria. 

Item weight: 10.36 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 60 watts | Special Features: Adjustable speed, Auto shut-off

7. Costway Portable Evaporative Cooler - Best For Low-Noise Operation

With a 7-degree oscillating function, the Costway portable air conditioner provides even and effective airflow control throughout the room. For further enhanced cooling, you can use the evaporative cooler along with an HVAC system or central air conditioner, which can not only save energy but also increase the effect of cooling. The device comprises three wind modes as well as three fan speeds to choose from. 

The modes range from natural, normal, and sleep, whereas the speed settings range from low, medium, and high. This way, you can personalize the cooler to your preferred settings and enjoy efficient cooling effects. To access the cooling system, all you have to do is add some water to the tank and press the "cooling" button. This will let out a stream of cool air along with regulated humidity that can make you feel comfortable. 

Though this is a powerful air conditioning unit, it runs pretty slow and quiet, with a noise level of less than 45 DB, close to white noise. This ensures you get a good night's rest without being woken up by sweat or loud compressor noises. Additionally, to further improve your sleep, you can set a timer for the cooler to turn off. This cools the room in such a way that you can go to bed in a thoroughly cooled room. The maximum timer setting is, however, 9 hours. 

Costway is one of the best portable air conditioners since they are relatively user-friendly, with smart touch panels, an LED display, and a remote control. And if you're worried about using the cooler near your kids or pets, you can do so without worry thanks to its bladeless design. To improve safety, the air conditioning unit comprises a stable round base that prevents any tumbling over. 

Item weight: 11 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 45 watts | Special Features: Portable units, lightweight, bladeless, oscillating

8. HIFRESH Evaporative Air Cooler - Best Personalized Cooling Effects

An economical solution to cooling your living space is needed, and the HIFRESH evaporative cooler provides just that. This 80W portable air conditioner allows your room to cool in less than 3 seconds so that you can say goodbye to those extra hot, sweaty days. It can also be used alongside a central air conditioner for optimal cooling. Additionally, it does not require any exhaust hoses or windows to be installed.

This mode enables you to get sound, comfortable sleep without waking up from loud, cooler noises. To further ensure sound sleep, you can set a timer up to 12 hours before bed and wake up feeling comfortable and refreshed. 

These portable ACs feature an upgraded motor that blows gentle air into your room and regulates humidity as well as airflow. And don't worry about getting out of bed or the couch to change the settings. You can simply use the remote control that is equipped with the cooler. This remote has a sensitive response and ultra-long sensing distance so you can be comfortable in every aspect. 

However, what makes this product different is its personalized cooling effects. With modes such as normal, nature, sleep, and cool, you can personalize the cooling effect in any way you want. Additionally, the fan comprises three speeds, which further increases the personalization aspect. Be it for a casual day, a powerful breeze, an after-workout break, or hot summer days, you can customize the cooling effects accordingly. 

Item weight: 12.82 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 80 watts | Special Features: Dual control, 12-hour timer, oscillation, 1-Gallon water tank

9. TRUSTECH Portable Air Cooler - Best For Easy Storage

The TRUSTECH is a 3-in-1 portable air conditioner that is bladeless and comes with the latest cooling technology. So, you can bid adieu to those hot summer days and warm air. These portable air conditioners can be used either as a fan or for humidification purposes, which can cool down and humidify the air in just 5 seconds. They can also be used alongside a central air conditioner for better cooling.

Apart from the impressive cooling power, this product is extremely safe to use and child/pet friendly. Since these portable ACs are bladeless, you won't have to worry about your toddler or pet getting hurt accidentally, especially when you're not around. Furthermore, it is designed to not blow dust into the environment, thus making it a more environmentally sustainable alternative compared to other models of air conditioning. 

The fan covers a large portion of your room and dissipates cool air to each and every corner, even if it has high ceilings. This is made possible by its swing function, which directs air in various directions. In terms of customization, this portable air conditioner offers three-speed settings that you can choose based on your needs. 

The timer on the fan can be set to a maximum of 8 hours, which results in a significant reduction in your overall energy consumption and power bill. This timer feature also lets you get a good night's rest without having to wake up in the middle to turn the fan off. It can also be cleaned relatively quickly with the help of a soft cloth. 

However, what makes it stand out is its compact form. This smaller unit is easier to store away when not in use and move around if and when needed. 

Item weight: 14.77 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 65 watts | Special Features: Portable, Bladeless, Compact

What is the Best Tower Air Conditioner?

This section presents a comparison of leading tower air conditioners. The table below outlines essential product specifications, including item weight, number of speeds, wattage, and special features

Tower Air Conditioners Item Weight Number of Speeds Wattage Special Features
Air Choice Swamp Cooler 16.17 pounds 3 60 watts Oscillating and bladeless
VAGKRI Portable Air Conditioner 63.1 pounds 3 1,200 watts Auto-mode, 3-in-1 mode, and LED touch control
Dreo Evaporative Air Cooler 13.2 pounds 3 50 watts Remote-controlled, bladeless, oscillating, timer
R.W. Flame Portable Air Cooler 15 pounds 3 70 watts Bladeless, three cooling modes, In-built ionizer
TRUSTECH Evaporative Cooler 11.97 pounds 3 65 watts Oscillation, bladeless, energy-efficient
Paris Rhône Evaporative Cooler 30 pounds 4 65 watts 3-in-1 cooler, 80-degree oscillation, four wind speeds, 19-inch air outlet
Balko Portable Evaporative Cooler 10.36 pounds 3 60 watts Adjustable speed, Auto shut-off
Costway Portable Evaporative Cooler 11 pounds 3 45 watts Portable units, lightweight, bladeless, oscillating
HIFRESH Evaporative Air Cooler 12.82 pounds 3 80 watts Dual control, 12-hour timer, oscillation, 1-gallon water tank
Laluztop Portable Air Conditioner 11.73 pounds 3 70 watts 3-in-1 cooling system, Oscillation, Eco-friendly
TRUSTECH Portable Air Cooler 14.77 pounds 3 65 watts Portable, Bladeless, Compact

Buying Guide For The Best Tower Air Conditioner

Before you get a tower air conditioning unit, there are some factors you have to consider to ensure you get a product based on your needs. These factors include: 

Blades vs. Bladeless

Though tower air conditioners look much more complicated than a regular fan with a circular head, both these portable air conditioners rely on blades. Even the most popular bladeless fan, like the Dyson Tower fan, still has blades. 

The only reason you cannot see them is that they are covered in a casement. However, these blades aren't as prominent as regular blades, which means they do not need constant cleaning. And even if you do clean, it can be done so easily unlike regular fans where it can be cumbersome to reach each individual blade. 

Apart from the occasional, slight noise levels from the fan, you may hear squealing noises, especially when the air conditioning unit is switched on. This is a sign that your device is in need of repair or further maintenance to function smoothly. 

Sound Output

This is an especially important factor to consider when you're using a tower air conditioner for your bedroom. You can pay attention to the decibel rating of the unit since it corresponds to noise levels that the device omits. Generally, people opt for coolers and fans with a maximum decibel rate of 50 and 60 decibels. This noise level is quite similar to that of a normal conversation or white noise. If the air conditioning system is any louder than this, it can be too distracting. 

CFM Rating

CFM or cubic feet meter is what determines how well a fan can maneuver air in the room. When the CFM ratings are higher, it generally means they do a better job at moving the air. However, do remember to take into consideration the oscillation of the fan. Fan blades oscillate, which further help the portable AC units dissipate air evenly throughout the room instead of in a single direction. 

Oscillation

Oscillation determines how the airflow is distributed throughout the room. CFM generally measures the strength of the airflow, whereas oscillation ensures that the air is dissipated in more than just a particular direction. Though most fans come preoccupied with oscillation, consider the supported oscillation angle, the overall length of the tower's fan portion, and the number of grates provided. 

Additional Features

To make the air conditioning more intuitive, tower fans come equipped with several additional features. The most common ones are two fan speeds or more, oscillating, swing, and static positioning modes, as well as added air purifiers and dehumidifiers.

If you plan on using the air conditioning generally during night-time, you'll need a timer and remote control options. Additionally, you would also need a fan that has a night mode and does not have bright LED displays that cannot be turned off. 

Are tower air conditioner units considered portable?

Tower air conditioners are differentiated from portable air conditioners as they consist of two units, one situated inside and the other outside. The external unit is devised to disperse warm air outward and is linked to the internal unit via a conduit. The mobility of a tower air conditioner is consequently limited by the length of the connecting hose.

Do tower air conditioners outperform air coolers?

Indeed, tower air conditioners generally outshine air coolers due to their design resembling a tower and their high structure fostering improved airflow. Moreover, their placement on a revolving base enables them to disseminate air throughout a room at a 90-degree angle. In addition to that, they exhibit an attractive and stylish outlook, adding a pleasing touch to indoor decoration.

How do tower air conditioners operate?

Tower air conditioners incorporate cooling towers, which employ evaporative cooling to diminish the temperature of a continuous water stream. Cooling towers are devised in a large box-like structure to maximize evaporation, attributed to the presence of materials such as PVC plastic sheets internally. These sheets amplify the surface area, boosting evaporation and thereby enhancing cooling.

What are the various types of cooling towers used in air conditioners?

Three principal types of cooling towers utilized in air conditioners, categorized based on their passage of water or air, include crossflow, counterflow, and hyperbolic towers. Furthermore, two additional types of cooling towers are delineated according to the airflow: passive draft and induced draft.

Which cooling tower is deemed the most efficient?

Among cooling towers, counterflow systems are considered the most effective as they utilize induced draft technology. Contrarily, crossflow systems employ forced draft towers to distribute water at 90-degree angles to the airflow, whereas counterflow systems disseminate water in direct correspondence to the airflow.

Cracks in concrete tend to develop for several reasons: wear and tear, extreme weather, rough usage, etc. 

Such cracks not only spoil the surface of the concrete but also lead to further deterioration and damage. Hence, it is critical to repair these cracks in time. Although, now it's possible to repair cracks if you don't know exactly how to repair cracks in concrete. There are several products available to help fill up such cracks quickly and restore the cement surfaces to their former condition, without any prior experience. 

However, selecting the best concrete crack repair product from the thousands of products that are available on the market requires both time and effort. To help get around this problem, we bring you this review and buying guide with all the essential products worth considering after conducting experiments in our yard with concrete crack fillers.

We spent a considerable amount of time researching and testing out these concrete crack sealer products and comparing them with the competition. This review lists the advantages and disadvantages of every product mentioned to help you make an informed decision.

So, without further ado, let's get started! 

Listed below are the 5 best concrete crack fillers from our list:

  • DAP Liquid Cement Crack Filler: Distinguishes itself with a speedy cure time, ease of use, and the ability to seamlessly blend with surrounding concrete, although its open shelf-life is short.
  • Red Devil Concrete Patch Filler: This provides an ideal solution for paintable surfaces and an easier cleaning process, but it may need multiple applications for wider cracks.
  • Sashco Concrete Filler: Noted for its versatility, it works great on both horizontal and vertical surfaces with strong temperature resistance, although it takes longer to set.
  • Bluestar Flexible Concrete Filler: This DIY-friendly filler stands out with high resistance to temperature changes and is an effective solution for high-traffic areas, however, the quantity might seem less considering the price.
  • DAP Concrete Patch Interior and Exterior Filler: Specialises in filling wide and deep cracks with a durable finish, but it may not blend well with surrounding concrete material.

So whether you're a homeowner looking to spruce up your driveway or a contractor in need of a reliable product for your next job, here's the list of the 11 best concrete crack fillers to help you get started.

  1. DAP Liquid Cement Crack Filler - Best Quick Cure Time

The DAP 37584 Liquid Cement Crack Filler is one of the highest-rated products in its category. This crack filler is an easy-to-use product that helps permanently seal cracks in concrete and is suitable for both indoor and outdoor usage based on our firsthand experience, we used this in our garage and outside too, in an area in which the car brings salt and chemical compounds throughout winter, a rather harsh environment.

The DAP 37584 is an excellent product that is simple enough to use even for first-time users. It is a ready-made filler that comes in a bottle, so you don't need to mix or blend anything. This makes the crack filler very easy to use and helps save both time and effort. 

One of the most significant advantages of this concrete crack filler over others is that it works very quickly, and doesn’t take a long time to set or cure the concrete. Your concrete floor will be as good as new within 30 to 45 minutes, or at the max under an hour according to literature while in our tests, it dried in 33 minutes.

You can use the DAP 37854 on both interior and exterior surfaces, and it self-levels to match the gray of your concrete. It even helps to blend the repaired section with the surrounding areas of the surface it’s used on. 

The quick-acting feature of this product is one of its most significant advantages. However, this also results in the solution drying up quickly once the filler bottle is opened. This means that you won't be able to store the product for long periods after opening it. The best way is to use the cement filler entirely after opening the bottle. 

Size: 1 quart | Drying Time: 24 hours | Coverage: Up to 1/4 inch | Color: Gray

  1. Red Devil Concrete Patch Filler - Best for Paintable Surfaces

For those who don't know, Red Devil is one of the biggest names in the American sealant industry. It specializes in the manufacture of high-quality caulks, sealants, adhesives, etc. The 0644 is one of the best products from the company for sealing up small cracks, gaps, and large patches in concrete. 

Through our trial and error, we discovered that if you are looking for a “set it and forget it” crack-filling experience, the Red Devil 0644 is the most obvious choice. The premixed filler formula is suitable for cracks as well as patches and makes repairs easy and quick, seamlessly, as our tests showed. 

One of the most significant advantages of this crack filler is that it is paintable, a great feature for indoor surfaces, you can use it to repair areas and then easily paint over them, we used this in our garage. The formula of the sealant does not react with the paint and remains stable; this is a feature that many products on the market do not offer. 

Most concrete fillers make it highly difficult to clean the surface. However, with this concrete crack repair, cleaning the surface where you apply this product is also a straightforward process; just use soap and water. This makes the product ideal for use even in areas that tend to get dirty quickly.

While this concrete patch filler is ideal for filling cracks and patches, larger patches require you to use the product several times as a one-time application does not provide accurate results. However, you get a superb finish after multiple applications on wide concrete cracks.

Size: 1 quart | Drying Time: 24-48 hours | Coverage: Up to 3/8 inch | Color: Gray

  1. Sashco Concrete Filler - Best for Versatility

Next up is a product from Sashco, a leading brand offering a wide range of home solutions. The Sashco 16210 is a highly effective product for dealing with cracks in concrete surfaces. This concrete repair product comes with a complete repair kit that makes the process of application simple for all users.

We have found the Sashco 16210 to be an excellent product for a wide variety of applications. It is perfect for use on sidewalks, garages, driveways, patios, and more. Again, we used it in front of the garage with great results. Besides being a multipurpose product, this crack repair sealant also offers long-lasting durability, preventing cracks from developing again, the manufacturer says.

The Sashco sealant is a highly versatile product perfectly suitable for use on horizontal and vertical cement surfaces. Therefore, you can also use it for repairing cracks in chimneys, pillars, etc., besides the regular flat surfaces such as roads and sidewalks.

This water-based sealant has high flexibility and is pretty resistant to strong temperature changes. You can use this crack filler on surfaces that are exposed to extreme temperatures without worrying about cracks, as the formula remains stable under excessive heat as well as cold.

In comparison to other products on this list, this concrete crack sealant takes time to set. This might become an issue if you use it in areas that receive regular traffic. However, once the filler sets, the area is entirely indistinguishable from non-damaged regions and provides a solid, sturdy surface.

Size: 14.8 ounces | Drying Time: 24-48 hours | Coverage: Up to 1 inch | Color: Gray

  1. Bluestar Flexible Concrete Filler - Best for High-Traffic Areas

One of the highest-rated concrete crack-filling products online, the Bluestar Flexible Concrete Filler is an excellent product. It helps seal up cracks and crevices effectively, ensuring a smooth surface and preventing further damage to it. And you can easily apply it yourself, making it perfect for DIY uses.

Most products available on the market for filling cracks in concrete are available in a single shade of gray. However, this crack filler is available in two different shades. This makes it easier to select the shade that matches the concrete surface where you need to apply the sealant, if you are happy enough to match your cement or concrete at home, you won't need to paint over anymore, after trialing this at home, in both shades, we failed to match the old concrete but both shades came close though.

What’s more, the filler comes in a bottle with a nozzle that makes the application a simple and easy process. This makes it ideal for those who prefer the DIY route, as applying the filler just requires using the nozzle to pour the contents into any crack in your cement.

Another added advantage is that the product is resistant to extreme temperature changes. You can use it on surfaces that receive intense heat or cold, and the sealant will not get damaged. 

This sealant is an excellent product that fills up cracks in concrete very effectively. The only drawback it suffers from is getting a minimal amount of adhesive for the price. Most competing brands offer a higher quantity at similar price points.

Size: 16 ounces | Drying Time: 24 hours | Coverage: Up to 1 inch | Color: Gray

  1. DAP Concrete Patch Interior and Exterior Filler - Best for Wide and Deep Cracks

DAP offers some excellent products for repairing and fixing cracks in concrete. The DAP 31084 Concrete Patch Interior and Exterior is another superb product that helps you permanently seal up cracks in concrete without much effort or expense.

We were impressed by the effectiveness with which this cement filler works after trying out this concrete filler. It perfectly fills up holes and cracks in concrete without leaving any gaps for air or moisture to enter. This ensures you get a watertight seal that holds the surface and prevents further deterioration.

The concrete gap filler arrives in a well-packaged box that protects it from damage or exposure. Also,  the ready-made formula simply requires application on the surface, and you can easily store the crack filler to apply later as well.

This sealant works like a charm to fill any cracks and gaps in the concrete. The crack sealer expands to fill up the cavities and dries up to offer a hard surface suitable for traffic. It even has a perfect consistency and sticks readily to all concrete surfaces, providing fast results. 

The DAP 31084 is an excellent product, but you should keep in mind that the sealant does not blend very well with surrounding areas. As a result, it is easy to make out the repaired area from the rest of the concrete surface.

Size: 1 quart | Drying Time: 24 hours | Coverage: Up to 1/4 inch | Color: Gray

  1. RadonSeal Concrete Foundation Crack Repair Kit

Among concrete crack sealants, the RadonSeal Concrete Foundation Crack Repair Kit is a must-recommend product. This concrete crack filler is one of the most effective products and utilizes innovative technology combined with scientific principles to get the job done.

For people who don't want to spend a considerable amount on getting a contractor to fix cracks in their cement, the RadonSeal Concrete Foundation Crack Repair Kit is a good contender as the kit includes all the tools and accessories you require to fix cracks in concrete and apply the filler.

Unlike most other products on the market, the manufacturer also provides a complete set of instructions for using the product, which is beneficial, especially for first-time users who require guidance on using the product to fix cracks and crevices properly.

What makes this crack filler even more impressive is that it offers unmatched protection against moisture. Areas that tend to develop leaks due to condensation get completely fixed and dry up over time with this concrete filler.

Compared to similar products, it is costly, which might put some people off from trying it out. First-time users can consider spending on a more affordable alternative, but this product is still cost-effective when compared to the cost of hiring a contractor, our research indicates.

Size: n/a | Drying Time: 24-48 hours | Coverage: Up to 1/16 inch | Color: Gray

  1. PC Cement Crack Filler Products

PC Products is a brand that has been offering quality home repair solutions for over 55 years, and the 72561 PC-Concrete is a perfect example of how good their products are. It not only helps repair cracks in concrete but also provides anchoring and support.

The PC Products 72561 is a multifunctional crack repair product that is sure to exceed your expectations, thanks to its dual epoxy adhesive paste not only helps repair cracks in concrete but is also perfect for anchoring threading rods, bolts, and more into concrete.

The concrete crack filler offers the added benefit of being applicable to dry and wet surfaces, making it ideal for damp environments. Additionally, it does well when used on vertical surfaces or cracks, making it suitable for walls, chimneys, etc.

One of the features that set it apart from most sealants is that the filler does not leave behind a mess, just leave it to set after filling in the required cracks, and the filler won't leave behind any residue. You can easily use it without worrying about cleaning up afterward.

While this product provides excellent results without a doubt, it requires some effort for proper application. Getting the sealant out of the tube requires the right tools, and applying it to concrete surfaces requires some prior knowledge and expertise.

Size: Varies | Drying Time: 24-48 hours | Coverage: Varies | Color: Gray or white

  1. Rust-Oleum Epoxy Shield Concrete Patch and Repair Kit

Rust-Oleum 301012 is an exceptional product for sealing and repairing cracks in concrete. It is a two-part industrial-strength epoxy that bonds with the concrete permanently. This makes it one of the best choices for a highly effective and permanent solution to fill concrete cracks.

Based on our firsthand experience the Rust-Oleum 301012 turned out to be one of the most effective products in the market. It not only repairs cracks in concrete but also creates a surface that is harder than regular concrete, this concrete filler provides durability and prevents further damage.

Apart from this, the crack filler is easy to use. You simply need to mix both epoxy parts in the quantity desired and apply them to the cracks in the concrete. The sealant will quickly adhere to the surface and fill the gaps, even entering hard-to-reach crevices quickly. 

As it sets fast, you do not need to worry about not using the surface for an extended period. Additionally, the repaired surface will look better than those with vinyl concrete patch compounds.

Like most products on this list, this sealant can withstand a reasonable variation in temperature. However, in extreme heat or frost, cracks tend to develop over time on the concrete. As such, should apply this product in areas that are not susceptible to extreme temperatures.

Size: 24 ounces | Drying Time: 4-6 hours (foot traffic after 24 hours) | Coverage: Up to 1/2 inch | Color: Gray

  1. Damtite Concrete Crack Filler

The Damtite 04072 comes from one of the leading manufacturers of repair and restoration products. It is the ideal solution for repairing cracks in concrete surfaces such as driveways, sidewalks, etc., while also providing a permanent waterproof finish.

You will be very impressed by the quality of the Damtite 04072 Concrete Super Patch Repair. It comes as a 6 lb powder and 1-pint bonding liquid that you need to mix for applying to the concrete. The liquid and powder blend to create a solid and durable surface.

The waterproof mortar is suitable for patching, repairing, or resurfacing. It works well on concrete, masonry, stucco, and brick, and sticks to glass, steel, aluminum, and wood, enabling you to use it for several different purposes.

We also liked the fact that it sets fast and looks great after setting. The fast curing property allows it to be used on concrete surfaces that receive heavy traffic, and the repaired concrete surface will become usable within a day once you leave it to set.

While this product works well and quickly, you may face some inconvenience if you store the filler and try to use it later. It has a short shelf life and becomes unusable within a short period after being opened. So, you need to use it quickly before that happens.

Size: 1 gallon | Drying Time: 24 hours | Coverage: Up to 1/4 inch | Color: Gray

  1. Dalton Enterprises Crack Repair

If you are looking for an effective concrete crack filler, you must check out the Dalton Enterprises 36099. It is a contractor-grade thermo-plastic waterproof rubber that is ideal for concrete or asphalt cracks and works well to seal up cracks in concrete without requiring too much effort.

We maintain a constant effort to find products that are easy to use even for first-time users. To that end, we have mentioned several products that either come ready-made or are simple to mix. The Dalton Enterprises 36099 is one of the most accessible products despite falling into neither of the above categories.

The application process requires melting the product using a propane torch and pouring it into the cracks necessary. It fills up these cracks to create a watertight seal, leaving behind a solid surface. You can undertake the application process on your own without requiring extra help.

While similar products tend to damage the surface if over-applied, this sealant has no such drawbacks. You can apply it again on the same spot to improve the smoothness or finish of the surface; multiple applications do not reduce its quality or finish.

The Dalton Enterprises 36099 is overall an excellent product that fills up cracks in concrete very effectively. However, it does not leave behind a professional-looking surface and is only suitable for areas that do not require a clean look.  

Size: n/a | Drying Time: 24-48 hours | Coverage: Up to 1/4 inch | Color: Gray

  1. GetSet2Save Hairline Crack Sealer

This list would be incomplete without mentioning the GetSet2Save Hairline Crack Sealer. As the name suggests, this product specifically helps fix hairline cracks and leaks without requiring a lot of effort. It is suitable for use on several surfaces, including sidewalks, stairs, floors, walls, etc.

This crack filler is a super-thin formula that works by capillary action to reach the source of the crack. You just need to apply the sealant at the point of damage and it will seal up hairline cracks perfectly. It’s also resistant to sunlight and provides long-lasting results on large concrete cracks.

One of the best qualities of this product is that it can enter into even the tiniest crevices, where other sealants may not reach. It is what makes it suitable for such cracks that are barely visible to the naked eye.

Besides concrete, you can also use it on other surfaces, including porcelain, window sills, asphalt, etc. No other product offers results that are close to what you get from this sealant when it comes to fixing hairline cracks.

This product works like a charm for small cracks and crevices, sealing them up permanently. Where it fails to work are areas that have larger cracks or gaps. The thin formula is unsuitable for large patches or cracks and tends to seep through them.

Size: 1 quart | Drying Time: 24 hours | Coverage: Up to 1/2 inch | Color: Gray

What is the Best Concrete Crack Filler?

This section provides a clear comparison of leading concrete crack fillers. The table below outlines key specifications for each product, including size, drying time, coverage, and color.

Product Size Drying Time Coverage Color
DAP Liquid Cement Crack Filler 1 quart 24 hours Up to 1/4 inch Gray
Red Devil Concrete Patch Filler 1 quart 24-48 hours Up to 3/8 inch Gray
Sashco Concrete Filler 14.8 ounces 24-48 hours Up to 1 inch Gray
Bluestar Flexible Concrete Filler 16 ounces 24 hours Up to 1 inch Gray
DAP Concrete Patch Interior and Exterior Filler 1 quart 24 hours Up to 1/4 inch Gray
RadonSeal Concrete Foundation Crack Repair Kit n/a 24-48 hours Up to 1/16 inch Gray
PC Cement Crack Filler Products Varies 24-48 hours Varies Gray or white
Rust-Oleum Epoxy Shield Concrete Patch and Repair Kit 24 ounces 4-6 hours (foot traffic after 24 hours) Up to 1/2 inch Gray
Damtite Concrete Crack Filler 1 gallon 24 hours Up to 1/4 inch Gray
Dalton Enterprises Crack Repair n/a 24-48 hours Up to 1/4 inch Gray
GetSet2Save Hairline Crack Sealer 4 ounces 24-48 hours Up to 1/16 inch Clear

Buying Guide for the Best Concrete Crack Filler

Our list of the best concrete crack fillers is meant to help you find the right product that meets your requirements. 

However, selecting the product that is perfect for you from among several choices is a challenging task. Several factors need to be considered in this regard, such as durability, effectiveness, price, etc.

Hence, we’ve compiled this comprehensive buyer's guide to help simplify selecting the ideal concrete crack filler. It covers all the crucial aspects that should be taken into account while making a purchase. 

Read on to learn more about crack repair products.

  1. Crack Filler Ease of Use

The foremost factor to consider while selecting a concrete crack filler is how easy it is to use. For most cracks that develop in your home, an ideal product should not require too much effort or assistance from other parties. It should involve a simple process to apply the filler and you should be able to apply it on your own. 

This factor is relevant if you want to perform the repair work without needing to hire a contractor for the same. If expert assistance is an option, then simply select the most effective sealant available.

  1. Sealant Durability

Another prominent factor that needs to be considered is how long the product lasts. In general, most crack fillers last several years, and some even last a lifetime. While selecting a crack filler, you should check the reviews to find out whether the product would require frequent re-application or not. 

Durability is also affected by the location and use of the surface. For instance, surfaces such as driveways witness more heavy traffic than sidewalks and need to be more durable. 

  1. Crack Filler Versatility

Several manufacturers offer products that are suitable for a variety of surfaces and materials. Depending on your requirements, you can choose a multipurpose product that works well on a single surface, like concrete. 

Multipurpose sealants can also be used on wood, asphalt, porcelain, glass, marble, etc. Generally, it is better to select a multipurpose sealant as it allows a wider scope of applications. 

  1. Time Required for Repair and Curing

Different concrete fillers require different amounts of time to set correctly. It is better to select products that are set fast for areas that frequently see heavy traffic. On the other hand, relatively traffic-free areas do well with products that have a longer curing time.

The amount of time that the product takes to cure also affects the amount of time available for manipulating and adjusting the surface. A longer curing time provides a longer period for adjustment and vice-versa. 

  1. Sealant Temperature and Weather Resistance

You need to consider the effect of the weather and temperature on the surface that requires fixing. Several concrete crack fillers are highly resistant to strong changes in temperature and are also waterproof. These are suitable for areas that are exposed to such elements. 

On the other hand, you can easily use crack fillers that are not waterproof or weather-resistant in areas that are not exposed. Since these areas are sheltered from heat, moisture, frost, etc., the sealant will provide excellent results.

Can sand be used to fill concrete cracks?

While it is possible to use sand or emulsified sand as fillers for the lower depths of concrete cracks, it is often not the best choice. Sand tends to wash out easily, lacks durability, and does not adhere well to the concrete. Additionally, sand alone cannot effectively address the root cause of the damage, which is often due to water seeping into the cracks, freezing, and expanding the rupture. Consequently, using sand on the upper layers of cracks is not advisable as it could result in joint failure.

How can I repair crumbling cracks on the sides of a cement driveway?

The edges of driveways are particularly susceptible to damage due to heavy vehicular traffic. To repair these cracks, start by thoroughly cleaning the cracks, and then applying a suitable concrete crack filler. In some cases, you might need to use two products together, such as quick-setting cement along with an acrylic fortifier, to effectively mend the damage.

What is the process to apply concrete crack filler in deep cracks?

To effectively fill deep concrete cracks that are approximately 1/2 inch deep and about 1/8 inch wide, caulking may be sufficient. For even deeper cracks, merely using high-quality caulk won't be adequate. Instead, line the deep cracks with a foam backer rod, using a putty knife to push the backer into the crack until it sits at least 1/4 inch below the crack's surface. Once this is done, proceed by applying caulk on top to prevent the filler from sinking once it dries.

When should I be concerned about cracks in concrete?

Concrete floors are prone to cracking. However, if the cracks change configuration and become vertical, it's a good indication to start showing concern. As a rule, a handful of cracks in concrete are not unusual, nor are they indicative of significant structural damage, as they can be caused by factors such as climatic conditions or the rate of evaporation during the drying process.

What are the different types of structural and non-structural foundation cracks in concrete?

Structural foundation cracks in concrete typically result from poor soil bearing, overloading, or substandard construction sites. Examples of such cracks include stair-stepping cracks, vertical cracks that are wider at either the top or bottom and cracks on foundation beams and slabs. Meanwhile, non-structural foundation cracks occur due to climatic influences, moisture, hydrostatic pressure, and aging. They do not compromise the structural integrity of your property and commonly manifest as narrow, vertical, or diagonal cracks, as well as cracks on plaster.

 

CR123A batteries have become a primary power source for wireless devices and various home devices such as alarm systems. Since CR123A batteries are extremely compact and powerful, they fit easily in all types of alarm systems.

Nowadays, many alarm manufacturers are making alarm sensors and systems that run on CR123A batteries. 

Notably, alarm systems that use standalone batteries don’t require any wired connection. As such, you can easily place them wherever you want without any hassle. Besides, CR123A batteries can be used by many appliances, such as web cameras, smart doorbells, and others. 

So, in this guide, we have listed some of the best CR123A batteries for alarm systems on the market. So, let’s begin! 

Listed below are the 5 best CR123A batteries from our list:

  • Duracell CR123A 3V Lithium Battery: This lithium battery stands out with a 10-year shelf life and compatibility with a variety of wireless devices, besides being offered by a trusted brand.
  • Panasonic Lithium 3V Batteries: These affordable, efficient batteries by Panasonic feature a 10-year shelf life and are versatile enough to support most household appliances.
  • Voniko CR123A Lithium Batteries: Known for their robust safety measures and leak-free design, these batteries also offer operation in extreme temperatures and are environmentally friendly.
  • Rapthor CR123A 3V Lithium Batteries: These high-capacity batteries provide more power than regular batteries; they feature overheat and overcurrent protection, carry a 10-year shelf life, and come with a one-year free replacement guarantee.
  • AHJ Cr123A 3V Lithium Battery: Providing a stable output for high-current appliances, these batteries outperform regular alkaline batteries by lasting three to five times longer and come with multiple layers of protection.

1. Duracell CR123A 3V Lithium Battery

Duracell is one of the most trusted brands on the list since it designs some of the best batteries in the industry. The Duracell CR123A 3V lithium battery is designed to be compatible with a wide range of wireless devices, such as lighting equipment, wireless sensors, alarm sensors, security systems, photography devices, etc.

In addition, it has a shelf life of 10 years, which is rare to find in modern batteries. As such, you can easily store extra units for a long period without having to worry about them getting spoiled. 

Another thing worth noting is that the batteries come in packages of 1, 2, 4, 6, and 12. Thus, you can stock up as much as you want for emergencies. Also, the battery comes in a standard battery size which makes it a universal power source.    

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1550 | Voltage: 3

2. Panasonic Lithium 3V Batteries

If you are looking for something affordable and efficient, then you should try the Panasonic BAT002 3V lithium batteries. Apart from making batteries, Panasonic also designs various household appliances such as TVs, air conditioners, music systems, and many more. The ultimate goal of the brand is to bring a smile to every customer’s face through innovative and high-performance products. 

The Panasonic BAT002 3V Lithium batteries have an average shell life of 10 years, so you can store them for future use. Moreover, each battery is capable of delivering 3.0 volts and has a size of 0.67” Dia X 1.36” H, making it compatible with most household appliances. The brand also offers a reliable after-sales service if you face any problems while using the batteries. 

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1400 | Voltage: 3

3. Voniko CR123A Lithium Batteries

The Voniko CR123A lithium batteries come in a pack of 6, with each battery weighing around 3.84 ounces. One of the things we liked about these batteries is the RoHS certification. As such, each battery has PTC protection, circuit overcurrent protection, and an intelligent voltage surge safeguard to prevent accidents. This also protects your home appliances from getting destroyed. 

Another handy feature of these batteries is the leak-free design. Therefore, you can store them anywhere without having to worry about them leaking in the future. Besides, the batteries can operate in extreme temperatures ranging from -40℉ to 140℉. Plus, the battery is environmentally friendly since it lasts longer and doesn’t cause any environmental hazards.

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1500 | Voltage: 3

4. Rapthor CR123A 3V Lithium Batteries

Next on our list is Rapthor, a brand that specializes in producing high-capacity batteries. Each CR123A 3V lithium battery has a high capacity of 1650mAh, which is more than a regular battery can offer. As such, it can deliver 10% more power than a normal battery. Apart from that, the batteries have an in-built PTC protection design which prevents the batteries from getting damaged by overheating and overcurrent. 

The batteries also have a low discharge rate which gives them a shelf life of 10 years. Thus, you can easily store extra units for future use. However, you must ensure to store them in the right temperature condition given by the brand.

Unlike most brands that don’t offer a warranty for the battery, Rapthor offers a one-year free replacement if the batteries show any defect. You can also ask for a refund if you are unsatisfied with the product.  

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1650 | Voltage: 3

5. AHJ Cr123A 3V Lithium Battery

AHJ CR123A batteries have one of the most steady voltage curves when it comes to delivering stable power for high-current home appliances and devices. As such, the batteries last three to five times longer than regular alkaline batteries. Besides, they are compatible with a wide range of appliances such as medical equipment, toys, smoke detectors, alarm systems, digital cameras, and more. 

Each battery comes with multiple layers of protection which protects them from overheating, overpressure, and over-voltage. They also offer protection against corrosion, leakage, and explosion, making them safe for long-term use. 

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1600 | Voltage: 3

6. Enegitech CR123A Non-Rechargeable Batteries

Enegitech is an eco-friendly brand that produces reliable power sources that don’t cause any harm to the environment. Each battery has a capacity of 1600mAh, which is more than a standard battery can offer. The low self-discharge feature ensures that the cell doesn’t discharge quickly while storing them. This further ensures that the batteries last longer without losing any power. 

Apart from that, the battery has a smart protection chip that provides advanced protection against power surges and overheating. The brand also offers a small family comic on the packaging, which provides interesting facts about the batteries through funny images and jokes. 

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1600 | Voltage: 3

7. EEMB CR123A Batteries

EEMB is a well-known battery manufacturer that has provided some of the best battery and power solutions since 1995. It designs a wide range of products ranging from lithium batteries to rechargeable batteries. In fact, EEMB is one of the best battery manufacturers on the global market. 

The batteries have a reliable shelf life of 10 years without having a memory effect. This ensures that batteries don’t lose much power while staying ideal. Besides, each battery has received a UL certification, making them safe for household use. Additionally, the batteries have a high energy density core which allows them to deliver three to five times more power than regular alkaline batteries. 

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1700 | Voltage: 3

8. Bevigor CR123A 3V Lithium Batteries

Bevigor CR123A 3V lithium batteries have a capacity of 1500 mAh, which makes them ideal for various power-intensive home appliances such as security systems, flashlights, and many more. In fact, these batteries can last five times longer than normal alkaline batteries. Apart from that, the batteries have a self-discharge rate of less than 2% per year.  

As such, the batteries will have plenty of power to spare even if you use them after a couple of years or so. Similarly, the new winding structure ensures that the batteries are protected against corrosion and leaking. 

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1500 | Voltage: 3

What is the Best CR123A Battery for Alarm Systems?

This section presents a comprehensive comparison of the top-performing CR123A batteries tailored for alarm systems. The ensuing table gives you each product specification such as battery type, milliampere-hour (mAh) rating, and voltage specifications.

Product Type mAh Voltage
Duracell CR123A 3V Lithium Battery Lithium Ion 1550 mAh 3 volts
Panasonic Lithium 3V Batteries Lithium Ion 1400 mAh 3 volts
Voniko CR123A Lithium Batteries Lithium Ion 1500 mAh 3 volts
Rapthor CR123A 3V Lithium Batteries Lithium Ion 1650 mAh 3 volts
AHJ Cr123A 3V Lithium Battery Lithium Ion 1600 mAh 3 volts
Enegitech CR123A Non-Rechargeable Batteries Lithium Ion 1600 mAh 3 volts
EEMB CR123A Batteries Lithium Ion 1700 mAh 3 volts
Bevigor CR123A 3V Lithium Batteries Lithium Ion 1500 mAh 3 volts
Streamlight CR123A Lithium Batteries Lithium Ion 1500 mAh 3 volts
Westinghouse CR123A Industrial Lithium Batteries Lithium Ion 1300 mAh 3 volts

CR123A Batteries For Alarm Systems Buying Guide

Nowadays, most household electronic products and modern gadgets are dependent on CR123A batteries since they are a portable power source. Some devices that require CR123A batteries are music players, cameras, high-density flashlights, and home security systems. Moreover, these batteries are extremely efficient and capable of delivering high performance while being small and compact. 

However, each battery type delivers a different performance, which makes it tough to choose the right one for the alarm system. As such, we have listed a few factors that can help you find the best batteries according to your requirements. 

1. Battery Life

While choosing CR123A batteries for the alarm system, you should always ensure that they are durable and have long battery life. Most brands provide all the necessary information related to the battery life on the packaging. As such, you should always check the packaging to see which brand offers a longer battery life. 

A longer-lasting battery is not only durable but also great value for money since you don’t have to replace it frequently. One of the best ways to check a battery life is to see the power rating score on the packaging. Batteries with high power rating scores can serve a longer lifespan without causing any hazard or harm to your home appliance.

In fact, some devices mention which power rating score batteries they require to run efficiently. For example, high power rating CR123A batteries are ideal for Arlo cameras. Thus, you should always choose the one that is compatible with your device. 

2. Affordability

Apart from being durable and long-lasting, you should ensure that the batteries are affordable. If the brand sets a high price for the batteries, you might not be able to purchase multiple batteries for your home appliances and electronic products. Nevertheless, you should never compromise by purchasing a cheaper battery with a poor power rating or short battery life. 

But, if a brand offers more units for a slightly lower capacity, you take the deal since you can power more devices through one set of batteries. The excess batteries that are left out can be stored and used later on when old batteries run out. Such sets are actually more affordable since you can purchase a bunch of batteries at an affordable price. 

3. Shelf Life

Another important factor to consider is the shelf life of the battery. This is especially important if you are planning to store excess batteries for a longer period. In general, CR123A batteries are well known for having a long shelf life since they don’t go out easily. As such, the backup supplies can stay ideal on the shelf for about 10 years or so. 

In addition, high-capacity batteries are capable of lasting for a decade without having any drops in performance. On that note, it is advisable to check the shelf life of the batteries if you are planning to stock them for a long time. Some brands even offer rechargeable batteries, but they tend to be a bit more expensive than regular CR123A batteries. 

Just ensure that the excess units are stored in a cool and dry area since excess heat and humidity can damage the cells within the battery. 

4. Eco-Friendly Design

Lastly, you should always consider purchasing an eco-friendly product that doesn’t harm or cause any harmful pollution. Most brands prefer to design eco-friendly batteries since they cause less pollution and help to bring down e-waste significantly. Instead of purchasing use-and-throw batteries, you can always opt for rechargeable batteries that can last for a long time. 

Normally, a regular dead battery contains harmful chemicals such as lead, lithium, cadmium, and more, which can be hazardous to your health as well as the environment. Fortunately, a lot of brands are now shifting to more sustainable and eco-friendly alternatives.

What is a CR123A battery?

A CR123A battery is a type of lithium primary battery commonly used in photographic equipment, flashlights, and home security systems due to its high energy output and long shelf life.

What appliances use CR123A batteries?

CR123A batteries are commonly used in a variety of devices such as cameras, flashlights, smoke detectors, alarm systems, and various medical equipment.

How long does a CR123A battery last?

The lifespan of a CR123A battery can vary depending on usage, but on average, it tends to have a shelf life of 10 years.

Are CR123A batteries rechargeable?

Typical CR123A batteries are not rechargeable. However, there is a rechargeable version of this battery known as an RCR123A or a 16340 battery. Always ensure the device can accommodate rechargeable versions before use to avoid damage.

What is the voltage output of a CR123A battery?

A standard CR123A battery outputs 3 volts.

Can different brand CR123A batteries be mixed in a device?

It is generally not recommended to mix batteries of different brands, types, or levels of charge in a device, as this might lead to leakage or damage.

What makes a battery like the Rapthor CR123A stand out?

The Rapthor CR123A stands out due to its high capacity of 1650mAh, which delivers more power than a standard battery, and its built-in protection design against overheating and overcurrent.

What are the safety measures for using CR123A batteries?

When using CR123A batteries, one should avoid short-circuiting, disassembling, or disposing of them in fire to prevent potential hazards. Also, brands like Voniko and AHJ CR123A batteries provide additional safety features like protection against overheating, overpressure, and over-voltage.

One classic way to make your living space more elegant is by hanging up some photos on the wall.

It may be family photos or some paintings by a local artist. In any case, what you want is to put the frames in the correct manner. You want the frames to be leveled correctly and evenly.

Now the task at hand may be trickier than you’d imagine. And when you are renovating your entire living place, and have dozens of photos to put up around the house, it can quickly escalate to a cumbersome job.

What makes this job a little more convenient are laser levels. These devices make level checking an extremely straightforward job. You won’t ever need to walk back after putting up a frame, tilt your head, and judge if it’s put the right way. Laser levels will make sure that the job is done perfectly every time.

But laser levels come in several varieties and it can be a difficult job to get the right one. Don’t sweat it though because we’ve come up with some of the best laser levels in the market for you!

Let’s get started, shall we?

Listed below are the 5 best best laser levels from our list:

  • Bosch GLL 1P Laser Level: Renowned for its user-friendliness and bright, accurate projections, this device can be affixed easily due to its versatile mounting accessories and serves as a spirit level too, making it suitable for level and alignment tasks, yet its working range and suitability for outdoor use could be improved.
  • Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level: Exceptionally compact and robust, this laser level features triple-positioned leveling bubbles along with a measuring tape and ruler, providing versatile usability and excellent operation, though the dimness of the laser light restricts its application to indoor use.
  • Bosch GLL40-20G: Noted for its enhanced visibility and Visimax technology allowing up to 40 feet of line laser visibility, the GLL40-20G Self-Leveling Cross-Line Laser projects horizontal, vertical, and cross lines, equipping it for various indoor tasks, yet struggles with visibility in sunny outdoor conditions.
  • Johnson Level & Tool 40-6603: Designed to simplify leveling tasks like fixture installations and picture hanging, this laser level offers compatibility with common tripods and delivers impressive accuracy, despite lacking a comprehensive instruction manual and not being suited for outdoor use.
  • BLACK+DECKER BDL190S: This laser level, appreciated for its lightweight structure, comes with a hanging pin and a stud sensor, making it easily usable without a tripod and suitable for detecting studs, metal, and live A/C wires, despite lacking a vertical laser feature.

Whether you're a professional contractor or a DIY enthusiast, here's the list of the best laser levels that will help you hang pictures perfectly straight and level every time.

1. Bosch GLL 1P Laser Level - Best Overall

The Bosch GLL 1P is a laser level designed and manufactured by the well-known company Bosch, which is renowned for delivering high-quality tools and equipment to homeowners and professionals alike. In this comprehensive review, we'll discuss what makes this laser level stand out from the competition and what could be improved, all to help you make an informed decision.

What we found endearing about the Bosch GLL 1P was its simplicity, making it very user-friendly. This laser level comes with versatile mounting accessories that facilitate an easy setup. Its mounting thread enables compatibility with most universal tripods, and it also includes a magnetic mounting base for added versatility.

The projected light of the Bosch GLL 1P is bright and sharp, ensuring accuracy and precision as you work. It also excels in ease of use, as changing batteries and general handling of the tool are incredibly convenient.

Notably, this laser level also doubles as a spirit level with the inclusion of two vial bubbles. This feature makes it a valuable asset, even for projects unrelated to hanging picture frames or other leveling tasks.

Despite having many commendable features, the Bosch GLL 1P could benefit from a longer working range and suitability for outdoor use.

Type: Point | Accuracy: +/- 1/8 in at 33 ft | Laser Color: Red | Laser Class: 2 | Self-leveling: No | Battery Life: 15 hours

2. Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level - Best Multipurpose Option

The Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level is a versatile device designed for a range of projects. It offers multiple features such as triple-positioned leveling bubbles, a fine-tuned measuring tape, and a sideways ruler for quick measurements. This review will cover our experience with this laser level, discussing the aspects we liked and the areas that could be improved.

We appreciated the Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level for several reasons. Its compact and durable design meant that handling this tool was a breeze, contributing to its overall ease of use. Its straightforward operation also makes it a favorite, with only a simple on and off switch required.

The triple-bubble spirit level works excellently, making it suitable for any DIY project in your home as well as professional endeavors, such as carpentry or construction.

In our experience, this laser level performs well across multiple services. The included 8-foot measuring tape proves to be a handy addition, although it might require an extra hand for uneven surfaces.

The main downside of the Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level is the dimness of the laser light, making this device only suitable for indoor use.

Type: Line | Accuracy: +/- 1/8 in at 30 ft | Laser Color: Red | Laser Class: 2 | Self-leveling: Yes | Battery Life: 12 hours

3. Bosch GLL40-20G - Best for Enhanced Visibility

Bosch is recognized as one of the top laser-level brands due to its durable and task-specific designs. The Bosch GLL40-20G laser level can help you complete various tasks at home quickly and efficiently.

The GLL40-20G Self-Leveling Cross-Line Laser is equipped with Bosch's Visimax technology, providing up to 40 feet of line laser visibility in standard working conditions. With simple laser setup modes, it can project horizontal, vertical, and cross lines to help with tasks like hanging pictures, installing curtain rods, aligning cabinet doors, and other interior decorations. It has a Smart Pendulum Self-Leveling System, making it an easy-to-use tool with better accuracy than traditional spirit levels.

Although the Bosch GLL40-20G works well for indoor tasks, it struggles outdoors on sunny days as the laser line becomes less visible.

Type: Cross-line | Accuracy: +/- 5/16 in at 30 ft | Laser Color: Green | Laser Class: 2 | Self-leveling: Yes | Battery Life: 15 hours

4. Johnson Level & Tool 40-6603

The Johnson Level & Tool 40-6603 Self-Leveling Cross-Line Laser Level provides an easy and efficient way to hang pictures and align-items horizontally and vertically, making it perfect for various indoor leveling tasks.

This laser level is designed for a range of indoor leveling projects, such as fixture installations, wall picture hanging, and cabinetry. Its compatibility with most common tripods thanks to a 1/4"-20 thread makes it even more versatile. This tool was invaluable during a bathroom renovation, helping complete work that would have been time-consuming using a bubble level.

The Johnson 40-6603 doesn't come with an instruction manual, which means relying on online tutorials to get started. Also, it's not suitable for outdoor use.

Type: Cross-line | Accuracy: +/- 1/8 in at 30 ft | Laser Color: Red | Laser Class: 2 | Self-leveling: Yes | Battery Life: 12 hours

5. BLACK+DECKER BDL190S

The BLACK+DECKER BDL190S BullsEye Auto-Leveling Interior Line Laser/Stud is designed to be lightweight and sturdy, perfect for various indoor leveling tasks.

The BDL190S is equipped with a hanging pin, allowing for easy use without a tripod. It features a horizontal laser line mode and a stud sensor feature, making it suitable for hanging pictures and detecting metal, live A/C wires, wood, and studs during interior decor projects. The LCD digital screen makes the process even quicker and simpler.

The lack of a vertical laser may be a deal-breaker for some DIYers or interior remodelers, but the stud sensor feature makes the BDL190S suitable for basic indoor leveling and alignment tasks.

Type: Line | Accuracy: +/- 3/16 in at 20 ft | Laser Color: Red | Laser Class: 2 | Self-leveling: Yes | Battery Life: 6 hours

What is the Best Laser Level for Hanging Pictures?

This section provides a detailed comparison of laser levels tailored for precision picture hanging. The following table meticulously scrutinizes critical attributes including type, accuracy, laser color, laser class, self-leveling capability, and battery life.

Product Type Accuracy Laser Color Laser Class Self-leveling Battery Life
Bosch GLL 1P Laser Level Point +/- 1/8 in at 33 ft Red 2 No 15 hours
Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level Line +/- 1/8 in at 30 ft Red 2 Yes 12 hours
Bosch GLL40-20G Cross-line +/- 5/16 in at 30 ft Green 2 Yes 15 hours
Johnson Level & Tool 40-6603 Cross-line +/- 1/8 in at 30 ft Red 2 Yes 12 hours
BLACK+DECKER BDL190S Line +/- 3/16 in at 20 ft Red 2 Yes 6 hours

Buying Guide for the Best Laser Levels for Hanging Pictures

A laser level is an indispensable tool for hanging pictures with precision, ensuring your pictures are aligned correctly on your walls, creating a neat and clutter-free appearance. To help you pick the best tool for your needs, we've put together this comprehensive buying guide, outlining the essential factors to consider when purchasing a laser level for hanging pictures.

1. Type of Laser Level

There are primarily three types of laser levels available:

  • Dot Lasers: Emit a single point or multiple points in different directions. These are best suited for basic leveling tasks.
  • Line Lasers: Project a straight line across a surface. Perfect for tasks such as hanging pictures, installing shelves, and aligning tiles.
  • Rotary Lasers: Emit a 360-degree horizontal or vertical line. While they offer more versatility, they may be overkill when it comes to hanging pictures.

For most picture-hanging tasks, a line laser level is an ideal choice.

2. Accuracy

Accuracy is crucial when using a laser level. Look for models that offer an accuracy of ±1/8 inch or better at a range of 30 feet. A more accurate laser level ensures your pictures will hang straight and level.

3. Range

Check the maximum distance at which the laser level can project a visible line. While hanging pictures inside your home may not require a vast range, it's wise to select a laser level with at least a 30-foot range to account for larger rooms or future projects.

4. Battery Life

Consider how long the laser level can operate on a single battery charge. Most laser levels utilize AA or AAA batteries or come with rechargeable lithium-ion batteries. Longer battery life means less frequent replacement or charging, ensuring your projects won't be interrupted.

5. Mounting Options

A secure and stable mounting option is crucial. Most laser levels offer a mounting thread compatible with a standard camera tripod. Others include built-in wall mounts or come with a separate mounting bracket. Some even have magnetized mounts or clamps, allowing easy attachment to metallic surfaces.

6. Indoor vs. Outdoor Visibility

If you plan on using your laser level outdoors, consider one that's visible in sunlight or comes with a detector to assist in locating the projected lines. However, for hanging pictures indoors, a regular indoor laser level should suffice.

7. Durability & Warranty

Choose a laser level made from high-quality materials, such as a durable plastic or aluminum body. A good warranty period, typically ranging from one to three years, is also an indicator of the manufacturer's confidence in their product.

Important Tip

When using a laser level, it's best to calibrate it before use. This can be done by placing the laser level on a flat, level surface and checking the alignment of the projected lines against a carpenter's level or bubble level. A well-calibrated laser level will ensure that your pictures are hung straight, level, and look great on your walls.

How to Use Laser Levels

Usually, you just need to press two buttons to use a laser level.

First, level your laser level correctly. Some laser levels have an auto-leveling system and you can set those up pretty easily. While others require you to check the included spirit level. Once it’s leveled, all you need to do is project the light on the surface you want to work on. Use this laser light to align whatever you need to align like picture frames or wallpapers.

Voila! The job is done.

Safety Tips While Using a Laser Level

Laser levels are highly specialized devices that should be used with utmost care. Like most hardware tools, laser levels can hurt the user as well if not handled responsibly. Lasers are harmful to the eyes and sometimes, even the skin.

Here are some safety tips to keep in mind while using a laser level.

  1. Be cautious about your eyes

Eyes are extremely vulnerable to laser beams and can get heavily damaged under direct exposure. So it's advisable to wear safety glasses that are meant for protection from laser beams.

  1. Serious hazard to children

Be sure to keep laser levels from the reach of small children. Playing around with a tool like this can cause serious injuries to their eyes.

  1. Flame inducing

Make sure that you don’t leave the laser level active and unattended. If it focuses for too long on any inflammable object, it can induce fire quickly.

Are there different types of laser levels for hanging pictures?

Yes, there are various types of laser levels, including line lasers and point lasers. For hanging pictures, a line laser is typically used as it provides a straight horizontal or vertical reference line.

How do I choose the right laser level for hanging pictures?

Consider factors like the size of the pictures, the distance at which you'll be working, and any additional features you may need (such as self-leveling or multiple laser lines). It's also important to choose a laser level with adequate accuracy.

Do I need a self-leveling laser level for hanging pictures?

While a self-leveling laser level is convenient, it's not strictly necessary for hanging pictures. A manual leveling laser can also be used effectively, but it requires more precision in setup.

How do I ensure that the laser level is accurate?

It's important to set up the laser level on a stable surface and ensure it is calibrated according to the manufacturer's instructions. Additionally, avoid placing the laser level on surfaces that may vibrate or shift during use.

Can a laser level be used for hanging pictures on uneven walls?

Yes, a laser level can still provide a straight reference line on uneven walls. However, it's important to adjust for any irregularities by using shims or adjusting the placement of hanging hardware.

Can I use a laser level outdoors for hanging pictures on an exterior wall?

Yes, there are laser levels designed for outdoor use. Look for models with higher laser power output and features like a pulse mode for visibility in bright light conditions.

Staining your walls with lovely colors and reinforcing them with a polyurethane finish has become so much easier. Just take a roller, dip it in paint, and apply. 

But before we get deep into discussing rollers, let’s know what polyurethane is. It is a wooden finish that can add to the beauty of your kitchen walls, deck flooring, tabletops, cabinets, and other wooden surfaces. 

Not only does it add a stunning look to it, but it also protects the surface against uneven moisture and seals even scratched surfaces. Rather than using a paintbrush, you can use a roller for its easy application. 

You will find a whopping collection of these rollers both offline and online. But does each product deliver a perfectly even and smooth polyurethane finish to your surface? 

We know it will be difficult for you to select a suitable roller for your painting job. But don’t worry, as we have prepared a list of the best rollers for polyurethane application. So, without further ado, let’s dig in!

Listed below are the 5 best rollers for polyurethane from our list:

  • FOAM PRO 184: A compact yet versatile foam roller known for its durability and reusable quality, it excels at giving a smooth, spray-like finish and covers a commendable area with a single dip, ensuring a durable, even coating, especially when applying polyurethane, even though initial grip familiarity takes a bit of time.
  • FoamPRO 164: Esteemed for its detailed coverage given to small projects or hard-to-reach areas, this roller pairs well with oil-based finishes and offers a sturdy grip that ensures a consistent, lint-free finish, though its usability is somewhat limited to smaller workspaces and its lint needs regular replacement.
  • Katzco: A top-tier paint roller offering professional working experience and lint-free finishing, its foam cover provides an even finish with each stroke while the free-spin movement reduces paint splatter, earning brownie points for working in compact spaces, even though it's less compatible with thicker paints.
  • Bates: Providing a comprehensive painting package, this Bates Choice model comes with a lightweight roller and handle brush that holds more paint, thus offering extensive coverage and using synthetic filaments for a fine finish, even though those fibers can wear off over time.
  • Pro Grade Paint Roller Set: The Pro-Grade set is a thorough 10-piece kit designed for interior and exterior painting needs, known for the effortless application of paint and the ability to cover large areas swiftly for a smooth finish. However, it tends to leave behind brush strokes which can necessitate additional coats.

1. ‎FOAM PRO 184

Foam Pro 184 mini roller is a multi-functional polyurethane foam roller. Besides its small size and functionality, its durability and repeated usability make it one of the best available models to complete your painting jobs effortlessly and effectively. Without wasting much time, let’s dive into the features of this unit. 

When it comes to painting, this mini roller works like a pro and gives a smooth and gleaming finish to your walls. In fact, people might get deceived by the finish, which is equivalent to spray works. 

In terms of functionality, the roller does everything from varnishing to painting. The foam applier absorbs an adequate amount of paint giving it a lint-free and consistent finish. Besides, foam can retain its finish for a longer time. As the roller absorbs more paint, it will be possible to cover more space with a single dip. 

It can be considered the best foam roller on the market to apply polyurethane. The rounded sleeve edge leaves a thick and spotless coating that ensures greater durability of the finish, making the roller a perfect finishing tool for wooden surfaces. In hindsight, the combination of this roller and polyurethane can prolong the life of your wood floors, furniture, or other wooden surfaces.

Lastly, it has a washable build, and you can use it more than once. Moreover, you get two refill sleeves free on purchasing this unit. 

Although the roller secures a firm grip, you might need some time to get used to the application process. Other than that, we have not found any major disadvantage of the product, as it can surely deliver the expected high-quality finish to your walls.  

Size: 4" | Weight: 4 Oz | Material: N/A | Tray: No

2. FoamPRO 164

FoamPro has always committed to making it easy for people to complete their painting jobs in less time and achieve better results. And they have taken the FoamPro 164 to the next level in terms of functionality and ease of use. It provides a smooth, even, and glossy finish to your wooden furniture and other surfaces. Plus, you can have an effortless and exceptional painting experience by covering a large area with a single dip.  

This unit by FoamPro goes perfectly with any oil-based finish and works wonders with varnish, paint, stain, and polyurethane. It provides an even and smooth finish with detailed coverage. Hence, it becomes a suitable choice for smaller projects, which require more attention to detail.

Being small-sized, it can cover hard-to-reach places and give users greater control over the painting. But that doesn’t mean it lacks speed. The greater soaking capacity of the foam allows you to have sufficient liquid in a single dip, thereby allowing you to work without interruptions. Also, the sleeve can easily be cleaned and dried out for subsequent uses. 

Using this foam roller, you won’t have to worry about the grip and it glides smoothly with hand movements, thereby leaving a spotless finish with each swipe. A tight grip also means it doesn’t release a nap during application and a thick coating ensures greater durability. Moreover, you wouldn’t have to worry much about lint in the finish. 

Despite being a quality high-density roller, it certainly has some downsides. The roller has limited usability and is more suitable for detailed works in small spaces. Also, you might need to change the lint regularly to make the most out of it.  

Size: 4" | Weight: 2.08 Oz | Material: N/A | Tray: No

3. Katzco

Katzco, a household products manufacturing company, has been delivering innovative solutions to its customers. And this paint roller is no different. It provides a professional painting experience to users and ensures quality results without the need for too many coats. You can have a lint-free finish using this unit. 

If you want a professional and quick painting experience, then the Katzco 743841487844 is tailor-made for you. Its design is such that the foam cover is secured with a 5-wire cage frame. 

Moreover, this unit can fit in any cover due to its small size and interlocking pattern, which enables better absorption and release of paint. As a result, a user achieves an even finish with each stroke and can ensure that the paint is applied quickly.

Added to it, the free-spin movement of the roller minimizes splatter during painting, which ensures quicker application and cleanly. You can rest assured about obtaining a smooth and glossy finish every time. 

Last but not least, it is suitable for any tight areas due to its small size and free-spin movement. Also, it can cover a large area with a single dip, which means you need not invest more in buying paints. 

Despite providing impeccable performance in terms of finish and application, it is only suitable for small-area applications. Apart from that, the roller might not be suitable for extra thick paints. However, if you are looking for rollers to paint a smaller area and a clean finish, then this one will definitely fit the bill. 

Size: 9" | Weight: 12 Oz | Material: Acrylic | Tray: Yes

4. Bates

Bates Choice has always been passionate about manufacturing and producing high-quality paint equipment like paint sprayers, paint brushes, rollers, and others at prices that won't break the bank. Its Le23 roller is one such high-quality polyurethane roller that delivers faster and long-lasting painting results.  

his comprehensive package by Bates Choice is a true luxury for DIY workers. It includes everything you will need to paint your house and make it shine. The professional-quality foam paint roller is meant to deliver guaranteed satisfaction due to its high-quality, durable, and superior finish. What else would one want from a roller?  

Both the roller and the wooden handle brush are lightweight and easy to maneuver, ensuring that you can carry on with those prolonged and tedious paint jobs with ease. Moreover, the paintbrush made of synthetic filaments is designed to hold more paint at a time. 

Its top-quality ½-inch nap is perfect for painting a house and is durable and long-lasting. This means it saves time and gets the finish you are looking for. Long story short, it saves your money and is easy to use, meaning you do not have to be a professional to use it.   

Although this paint roller is bound to deliver a durable, smooth, and long-lasting finish, there might be some issues if you use it for a longer time. The synthetic filaments of the roller might come off readily, thereby making it messy and time-consuming. In that case, you will need to change it after a few uses. 

Size: 9", 4", & 2" | Weight: 3.52 Oz | Material: Micro-Fiber | Tray: Yes

5. Pro Grade Paint Roller Set

This 10-piece all-in-one painting set by Pro-Grade is best for achieving professional quality painting results for anyone. This is just the perfect set if you are struggling with your staining projects. Just guide the rollers and brush to get excellent results every single time. 

This complete painting set makes your work look professional and provides you with an easy application experience. You can use it to decorate the house with the colors of your choice. 

The Pro-Grade set is designed to serve all of your interior and exterior painting needs, from walls, and ceilings to fences. Its applicators are made of high-quality materials and glide smoothly with your hand movements. Hence, you can carry out your tedious painting jobs with ease and ensure a smooth paint application. 

Apart from that, these paint rollers are extra-durable, washable & made for repeated use. You can easily wash these rollers and use them again and again. Moreover, its no-shed covers ensure a lint-free finish or perfect paint for stunning results. 

Last but not least, the roller leaves thick layers in a single coating and covers large areas in a short time. You no longer have to apply a final coat and save the liquid. These roller sleeves also retain more polyurethane for delivering a smooth and spotless finish in each stroke. 

The toolset can be very convenient for DIYers, but it isn’t perfect. Its rollers leave brush strokes behind it, making walls look messy and dull. You might need to apply further paint coats of polyurethane to cover the brush marks, making it a costly affair. 

Size: 9", 4", & 2" | Weight: 1.82 lbs | Material: Micro-Fiber | Tray: Yes

6. ROLLINGDOG 3” paint roller

Rollingdog focuses on providing a range of quality and affordable paint applicators to its customers worldwide. Super-micro rollers of the company can be an excellent choice for a painter who will use them more than once. This durable, reusable, and washable paint roller provides you with a professional painting experience and gives your surface a satin finish.  

An all-around paint roller by Rolling Dog is a pocket-friendly choice for anyone who provides professional painting services or who does a single-term painting project. It does not leave brush marks or lines on your surface and gives a clean and smooth polyurethane finish. 

The unit is easy to hold, which makes it glide smoothly over rough or flat surfaces according to your needs, and provides the right balance and control for perfect application. Additionally, its high paint retention ability gives a thick and beautiful solid coating that enhances the durability of hardwood floors, walls, furniture, and other surfaces.  

This unit can be regarded as the best polyurethane roller for arts and craftworks. Moreover, it serves as an optimal choice for people owing to its easy application and ability to deliver a satisfying experience. 

Although the rolling hand roller provides an easy and smooth painting experience and a durable frame, many customers have complained about the poor quality of the main part. They claimed that small roller pieces start falling off and stick to the surface after a few uses. You need to pick up the pieces yourself, which can be a hassle. 

Size: 3" | Weight: 6.4 Oz | Material: Micro-Fiber | Tray: Yes

7. Microfiber Nap Rollers

Microfiber Roller Kits are specially designed for professional painters, woodworkers, carpenters, and epoxy artists who always expect the best results. This multi-functional roller is capable of doing a wide number of tasks from painting to varnishing. 

A countertop paint kit is everything one needs to complete a painting job quickly and with a superior polyurethane finish. The microfibers of the foam cover don't allow the solvent to stick in and are perfect for applying finish in tight areas. 

The ergonomic and comfortable handle of the unit is designed for easy usability and therefore ensures a smooth finish even in tough-to-reach areas. Along with that, its durable arm lasts through a number of painting jobs while providing an even and solid finish. Its multi-functionality and durability allow users to perform a wide range of jobs using a single roller. 

Furthermore, the high-density roller ensures retaining more paint for a longer period and avoids any dripping, thereby minimal or no wastage of paint. The light, small but durable roller covers rough and flat surfaces in one coat, without any bubbling or stippling. 

Apart from its exciting features, it might present a number of disadvantages to a user. The major one is that it leaves many odd dot traces after finishing and bits of lint. Other than that, it might not be suitable for all epoxy resin and people might find it easy to use. However, as stated above, this product is mainly suitable for professional painters and workers. 

Size: 6.5" | Weight: 8.1 Oz | Material: Micro-Fiber | Tray: No

What is the Best Roller for Polyurethane?

This section presents a comprehensive comparison of top-rated rollers designed for polyurethane applications. The table below meticulously outlines critical attributes, encompassing size, weight, material composition, and tray specifications.

Product Size Weight Material Tray
FOAM PRO 184 4" 4 Oz N/A No
FoamPRO 164 4" 2.08 Oz N/A No
Katzco 9" 12 Oz Acrylic Yes
Bates 9", 4", & 2" 3.52 Oz Micro-Fiber Yes
Pro Grade Paint Roller Set 9", 4", & 2" 1.82 lbs Micro-Fiber Yes
ROLLINGDOG 3” paint roller 3" 6.4 Oz Micro-Fiber Yes
Microfiber Nap Rollers 6.5" 8.1 Oz Micro-Fiber No

Roller for Polyurethane Buying Guide

Now that you have gone through our comprehensive list of the best polyurethane rollers on the market, it might help you make an informed choice of purchasing one according to the task at hand. However, prior to purchasing a roller that gives a lustrous shine to your surface, you need to look at the same thing from various angles. So what are these angles?

Not all rollers are suitable for applying polyurethane and using any traditional roller, you will see a lot of brush marks or lines on your surface no matter how well it is being prepared. In order to get a smooth finish, you need to look into factors including roller frame, length, cover material, and others. Let's get into the details. 

  1. Roller Frame

The material of the roller determines its durability and how long you can use it for polyurethane painting projects. Besides, a good and sturdy design will ensure a tight hold over the sleeve and prevent it from wobbling during the application of paint. It ensures a better workflow with minimum splatters and that your hands do not get strained from holding it for a long time. 

Best polyurethane rollers are made of heavy-duty steel which keeps the rollers intact and ensures better paintwork. Also, these frames are easy to wash off compared to wooden ones. 

  1. Length

A mini roller is suitable for applying polyurethane paint in small areas and ensures a smooth application. Also, it is suitable for staining corners and edges. On the other hand, long stick rollers are best suited for long area applications, like walls or a hardwood floor. 

  1. Cover Material

Roller covers come in different fabrics and sizes. Besides, the sleeve edge impacts the quality of the finish as well. 

Wool cover absorbs and releases a better paint finish during application and can cover a greater area in a shorter time despite its small size. Wool roller sleeves are perfect for polyurethane paints and provide more gloss to your surface. 

The foam cover holds a lot of paint at a time and delivers an impenetrable coating with each stroke. In terms of absorbing liquid better and getting an even finish, foam rollers tend to be a better choice. 

On the other hand, a fiber paint roller works well with all kinds of paints respect rather than specializing in one. These covers deliver a smooth and shiny finish with all kinds of urethane. Besides, they are more long-lasting and easy to wash. Additionally, these rollers prevent lint or dust from mixing with the finished surface. 

  1. Nap Size

The nap size of a roller determines the uniformity of the finish. In this case, a thin one can deliver a lint-free and even finish compared to a thick one.  

  1. Resistance Capability

Synthetic and wool covers come in double-layer sleeves and their core is composed of highly resistant fabric. It prevents any waterborne urethane and solvents from sipping in. This in turn enhances the texture and durability of covers. As a result, using these covers will enable you to save money and cleaning time. 

  1. Clean Finish

In the end, the quality and texture of the finish matter. A polyurethane roller that delivers a spotless polyurethane finish without shedding on the surface will be most suitable. Therefore, it will be viable to look for a roller that gives a lint-free and bubble-free finish during polyurethane application. 

How are polyurethane rollers made?

Polyurethane rollers are typically made through a process called casting or molding. Liquid polyurethane is poured or injected into molds and allowed to cure. The resulting material is then machined to achieve the desired specifications.

Can polyurethane rollers be customized to specific applications?

Yes, polyurethane rollers can be customized in terms of size, shape, hardness, and other properties to suit specific applications. Customization may be necessary for specialized machinery or unique operating conditions.

How long do polyurethane rollers typically last?

The lifespan of a polyurethane roller depends on factors like the application, load, and environmental conditions. Generally, they have a longer lifespan compared to rollers made from other materials due to their wear resistance.

How do I choose the right hardness for a polyurethane roller?

The hardness of a polyurethane roller is measured in durometers. Softer durometers provide better traction and are suitable for applications with delicate surfaces. Harder durometers are used for heavy-duty applications. Consider factors like load, speed, and environment when choosing.

Do you have problems driving a fence post? Well, you won’t anymore with gas-powered post drivers.

There are pneumatic post drivers as well, but the gas-powered version causes much less stress, ensuring that you can enjoy your weekends. It provides quick installation and saves you the trouble of driving posts using manual labor.

With the help of vibrations, much like in a jackhammer, you will get precision in your work. And due to the vibration dampening system, long working hours won't be an issue. Plus, the fact that they are lightweight makes them portable and easily maneuverable.

Now, how do you choose from the plethora of options that are lining the market? We have formulated a list of the 12 best gas-powered post-drivers today to give you in-depth coverage of the world of post-drivers.

Listed below are the 5 best Gas Powered Post Drivers from our list:

  • REDI Driver Boss: An exceptionally durable gas driver, famed for precision and high-quality components, offers versatility through optional reducer sleeves and handle extensions and includes a storage case, albeit at a higher cost. It shines for its robust 4-Stroke Honda GX35 engine and high Beats Per Minute (BPM) at 1820.
  • Rhino GPD40 Fence Pro Honda 4-stroke Gas Powered Post Driver: Notable for its combined power and versatility energized by a Honda GX35 4-stroke gas engine, this model accommodates both T-posts and smaller round posts with an ergonomically designed handle for comfort, alongside chuck adapters for wide application, though it is slightly pricey.
  • Titan PGD3200X: Recognized for managing heavy-duty tasks, the model's added weight delivers a powerful performance with 1850 BPM and can drive metal posts up to 3-1/8 inches. It also comes with a storage case and is attractively priced, but lacks handle extensions and additional accessories.
  • Rhino Multi Pro: Renowned for commercial contracts, this model offers 35% more driving force due to its substantial weight and includes different-sized Chuck-Lok adapters for driving a variety of posts. Despite its weight and the lack of a storage case, its versatility and reliability make it a compelling choice.
  • Titan PGD3875 4" Barrel Post Driver: Hailed for its large capacity, this 50lb model can drive posts as large as 3.5" quickly and offers three different adapter sleeves for flexible use. It also affords a quicker setup time and comes with a serviceable tool kit, although the positioning of the anvil might pose challenges in getting the post started.

Here is the list of the 12 best gas-powered post drivers that can help you to drive posts into the ground quickly and effectively.

1. REDI Driver Boss - Best for Precision & Durability

The first product here is the best tested, the REDI Driver Boss, an absolute failproof gas driver that will post in seconds, with a legendary engine and extremely high-quality components, a driver built to last. The driver provides unparalleled performance, and you can get a precise output in most of your tasks.  

You get improved versatility with the model, thanks to the 3-1/8-inch guide tube, which is more significant than on some of the other units. Now, because the machine is more substantial, it adds a little to the weight bringing it around to 35 lbs. But it is not something to worry about, and you will still get great portability.

You can choose to use optional reducer sleeves, which are available in four sizes – 13/16-inch, 1-3/4-inch, 2-1/4-inch, and 2-1/2-inch. Likewise, you can choose to use the optional handle extensions that speed up your work and come in handy when driving taller posts. 

Moving on, you have the option of a storage case that keeps it safe from damage and offers a long lifespan. Finally, you can use it for precision work due to the inclusion of an integrated throttle and a polymer piston that delivers a complete performance.

It is more expensive than the other units in the market, and while we think one can’t put a price on quality, you may beg to differ. So, if a budget restricts you, you will have to choose some other option. Also, there are no spring cushioned grips that may affect comfort.

Dimensions: 25" x 15" x 12" | Weight: 35lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke Honda GX35 | Horsepower: 1.6HP | Barrel Size: 3.12" | Barrel Capacity: N/A | Beats Per Minute: 1820BPM

2. Rhino GPD40 Fence Pro Honda 4-stroke Gas Powered Post Driver - Best for Versatility & Power

The runner-up is the Rhino GPD40 Fence Pro Honda 4-stroke Gas Powered Post Driver which offers a lot of power. Plus, the latest design makes sure that you get unmatched performance, but the most significant upgrade is the versatility.  

It is another lightweight model owing to its weight of 38 lbs even though it has a large body. The hammer and the anvil are substantially sized as well, along with the overall design. All the components then come together to produce 30% more hitting power.

Hence, it has a considerable edge over other models and further complements the powerful functions is the Honda GX35 4-stroke gas engine designed for industrial use. The 4-stroke engine is invaluable in generating the necessary power for completing most tasks. Moving on, it comes with a 2'chuck sleeve. 

It offers you the desired versatility allowing you to use it with both T-posts and smaller round posts. Meanwhile, for maximum comfort, there is an ergonomically designed handle and an integrated throttle to make long working hours possible. Finally, it has 1-¾” and 1" chuck adapters that ensure you can use it for erosion control, agriculture, and other tasks.

It is slightly pricey compared to the other units in the market, but most users have reported that it is money well spent. But in case you have a tight budget you should consider some other options. Also, the sturdiness may decline over time, but that is true of any product.

Dimensions: 11" x 14" x 24" | Weight: 38lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke Honda GX35 | Horsepower: N/A | Barrel Size: N/A | Barrel Capacity: Up to 2.12" | Beats Per Minute: Approx. 1720BPM

3. Titan PGD3200X - Best for Heavy-Duty Tasks

The Titan PGD3200 is another powerful model that comes with many features you may find to your liking. The designers have been smart to use the weight to make it robust and amplify the performance.  

It is slightly heavy, given that it weighs 45 lbs, but that allows it to generate a lot of power. As a result, you can get 1850 beats per minute, which can considerably reduce the amount of time you need to spend on one job.

Likewise, you can drive metal posts measuring 3-1/8 inches without much effort. Furthermore, it comes with a 2-inch adapter sleeve, which is useful for driving pipes, jobs, and rebars, measuring 1 to 2 inches in diameter. Plus, you have the added advantage of getting a storage case. 

Therefore, you can keep your tool safe, including enabling you to use it for a long time. Meanwhile, you will be able to enjoy all the functions at a reasonable price. Hence, you do not have to burn a hole in your pockets to get the much-needed reliability.

There are no handle extensions with this unit, so you may have to compromise on comfort while sweating it out in the field. Thus, it may not pose an attractive option for people. Besides, there are no additional accessories, so you will have to spend extra depending on the type of work.

Dimensions: N/A | Weight: ‎45lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke Honda GX35 | Horsepower: 1.3HP | Barrel Size: 3.25" | Barrel Capacity: Up to 3.12" | Beats Per Minute: 1850BPM

4. Rhino Multi Pro - Best for Commercial Contracts

The Rhino Multi Pro can deliver unmatched power to help you get through numerous tasks with ease. So, it is quite a favorite among the masses.

It is one of the more massive models on the market due to its weight of 44 lbs, but there is a reason for making it slightly heavy. It generates a lot of power, and for that, it has to be well-built. So, you will see that it has a large body to support the hammer and anvil.

As a result, it can produce 35% more driving force, invaluable in taking care of heavy-duty projects. Furthermore, it includes Chuck-Lok adapters available in three sizes – the 1-inch, 1-3/4-inch, and the 2-inch. You can then use them for driving in round posts that measure 2-3/8 inches.  

Meanwhile, you can use the power to perform several tasks which makes it extremely versatile. Therefore, you can drive both T posts and Terminal posts for commercial contracts. Likewise, you can use U-channel and Square Anchor Posts for installing municipal signs. Plus, optional adapters and chucks are also available.

It is heavier than some of the models on our list, so you could be tempted to opt for a lighter option. Many people do not like their units to be heavy, which could affect maneuverability. Also, there is no storage case meaning that you will have to spend extra.

Dimensions: ‎30" x 18" x 15" | Weight: ‎44lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke Honda GX35 | Horsepower: N/A | Barrel Size: N/A | Barrel Capacity: N/A | Beats Per Minute: Approx. 1720BPM

5. Titan PGD3875 4" Barrel Post Driver - Best for Large Capacity

The has the Titan PGD3875 4" Barrel Post Driver that is armed with some great functions nonetheless, you will find the features to your liking.

It weighs in at 50 lbs and therefore offers an excellent hammering effect, but that does not compromise portability. While it uses weight to produce a strong performance, you can rest assured that it will still be easy to lift and carry around. Moreover, in comparison to other models, you will get a much smoother installation.

It reduces the time required to set it up by almost half, which means you can use it without delay. And what is sure to grab your attention is the large capacity that enables it to drive posts as large as 3.5" quickly.

Moreover, it comes equipped with three different adapter sleeves – the 1", 2", and 3" – that permit you to use it with various types of posts. Plus, you can also use it with rebar and rods that measure less than 3". Lastly, you get a serviceable tool kit with the unit.

We have seen that the anvil is situated close to the bottom of the tube. Thus, there is a chance that it could be challenging to get the post started. This leads to the other issue where the tube may fail to keep it aligned, thereby causing it to wobble.

Dimensions: N/A | Weight: ‎50lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke | Horsepower: 1.3HP | Barrel Size: 4" | Barrel Capacity: Up to 3" | Beats Per Minute: 700 to 1350BPM

6. Skildril G2XD

The Skildril G2XD, which comes armed with several new functions that have earned it a lot of praise from users, has ticked most of the right boxes, and you get variations to choose from depending on the type of work. The air cushion dampening system gives it the edge.

You can use it with 4-inch posts because a 4-stroke engine from Honda powers it. The GX35 engine is also available in the 2-stroke variation, but in either case, you get a lot of energy. Therefore, it can produce 1100 to 1800 beats per minute, which reduces your work time to a great extent.

Meanwhile, it weighs all of 42 lbs, which is slightly heavy but not a lot to cause maneuverability issues. However, the significant upgrade is the natural oil sight glass that offers sufficient lubrication of the hammer assembly. Thus, you can generate a smooth performance as well as a lot of driving force. 

Besides, it is easy to use, and you will enjoy the simple on-off function that makes sure you can continue with your work uninterrupted. Another great feature is the multi-collet option air cushion dampening that ensures there is hardly any recoil even on tough jobs.

It does tend to leak oil, which is seen in a lot of other models as well. While it is not a severe issue, it could lead to problems in the long run. On top of that, there are no cushioned handles, which might cause you some difficulty during prolonged hours in the field.

Dimensions: 29" x 11.5" x 13" | Weight: ‎42lbs | Engine: 2-Cycle/4-Cycle OHV | Horsepower: ‎1.8HP (2 Stroke)/1.4HP (4 Stroke) | Barrel Size: N/A | Barrel Capacity: Up to 4" | Beats Per Minute: 1100 to 1800BPM

7. Titan PGD2875 Gas Powered Post Driver

We have several top-notch products to go through, so without wasting any more time, we kick things off with the Titan PGD2875 Gas Powered Post Driver. It has secured the top spot on our list due to its ability to blend power and design to produce a strong performance.

It is incredibly lightweight as it weighs only 30 lbs, which makes it one of the lighter models in the market. As a result, it is easy to use and highly portable. Moreover, you get a high degree of maneuverability that ensures you can acquire the desired finish on most tasks.

The design is well complemented by the powerful 4-stroke engine that can deliver 1.3 Horsepower. Thus, it can generate a speed of 1500 to 2000 beats per minute quite quickly. Thanks to all that power, your work time is cut down significantly, and you can drive in posts that have a diameter of up to 3". 

The excellent output is due to the 3.25" barrel that gets the job done by cutting down the time required to half as compared to a manual driver. On top of that, it comes with 1” as well as 2” adapter sleeves suitable for driving in posts, rods, or rebars.

You have to be careful while using it lest you burn yourself because the housing gets hot quickly. You may need to cover it with a shroud to avoid accidents. Plus, as per the instructions, you cannot start working with it right away and have to wait for at least five minutes.

Dimensions: 13" x 12" x 26.5" | Weight: 30lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke | Horsepower: 1.3HP | Barrel Size: 3.25" | Barrel Capacity: Up to 3" | Beats Per Minute: 1500 to 2000BPM

8. Skidril 2-stroke Gas Powered Post Driver

Next up, we have the Skidril 2-stroke Gas Powered Post Driver that has secured the runners-up spot as it has several similarities with our topmost recommendation. The good thing about it is that it is straightforward to use, which will allow you to use the power it generates as per your requirements.

You will find it to your liking because of the 2-stroke engine that generates 1.8 Horsepower. Therefore, it is easy to use, and you can start it without any trouble. Further adding to the comfort is the ergonomic design that is well complemented by the device's lightness.

Likewise, the Cyclone gasoline engine has very few moving parts that ensure you will not need any hoses to make it compatible. Thus, it is also easy to maintain, which is sure to please most customers. 

Meanwhile, you can drive posts as large as 4” in diameter, thanks to the multi-chuck system and the air cushioning feature. Both functions work together to reduce the recoil effect which goes a long way in providing much-needed longevity. Lastly, you can enjoy all these features for a reasonable price which has made it a highly desirable option.

It is a slightly heavy model but that should not be too much of an inconvenience. However, after a long day in the field, you may have trouble getting through the final few posts. Besides, it does tend to leak oil but not too much; therefore, you should be on the lookout.

Dimensions: 26x10x11” | Weight: 38lbs | Engine: 2-Cycle/4-Cycle OHV | Horsepower: ‎1.8HP (2 Stroke)/1.4HP (4 Stroke) | Barrel Size: N/A | Barrel Capacity: Up to 4" | Beats Per Minute: 1100 to 1800BPM

9. Titan PGD2875H

Next up, we have the Titan PGD2875H which has paid a great deal of attention to comfort. It is for this reason that buyers are interested in the model which is why it has generated a lot of positive feedback.

You can use it comfortably throughout the day, thanks to the easy-grip handles and the vibration-dampening springs. Thus, not only will your fatigue be reduced, but it will also help prevent back strain. Therefore, the designers have focused on making it as user-friendly as possible.

Further adding to the ease of use is its weight of 28 lbs, making it ideal for transportation. You will be able to lift and carry it down the fence line without much difficulty. Likewise, it comes with a trigger throttle that allows you to start it easily. Moreover, it has an integrated stop button for added safety.

Meanwhile, the 4-stroke gas-powered engine from Honda produces 1.3 Horsepower that is effective in generating 1500 to 2000 beats per minute. Therefore, you can use it for commercial purposes or simple tasks around the house. Lastly, it has a 3.25-inch barrel along with adapters.

The designers have included plastic sleeves, which do not make it very durable. So, there is a chance that it could break after regular use. Plus, installing T posts could produce a lot of noise, which is not an ideal work environment in which to find yourself.

Dimensions: N/A | Weight: ‎28lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke Honda GX35 | Horsepower: 1.3HP | Barrel Size: 3.25" | Barrel Capacity: Up to 3" | Beats Per Minute: 1500 to 2000BPM

10. Yescom 32.7cc 2-stroke

The Yescom 32.7cc 2-stroke is quite similar to the earlier tool, so it is no surprise to see that some of the functions may overlap. But some fascinating additions have driven its popularity among buyers. Therefore, it has received mostly positive reviews.

The significant upgrade that is noticeable with the model is the inclusion of the spring-isolated handles. It absorbs the vibrations that pass through the hand even when you are working in the field, and you will not have to use any additional tools. It is made available with a vertical shaft engine that is ideal for working on T posts.

Likewise, there is an adapter that makes it suitable for posts measuring 2-3/16-inch and 2-3/4-inch. And the tool kit, fuel mixing tank, and optional adapters deliver an excellent performance. Moving on, we see that the designers have added muscle to it by including a substantial-sized hammer and anvil. 

Hence, you can use it for agriculture, construction, or geophysical exploration. Besides, because it weighs 34.2 lbs, it is easy to lift, and you can take it from one post to the next without any difficulty. Finally, you get secure handling as well for precise results.

It does not come with extended handles like some of the other tools, so you may not get the same degree of comfort for extended work hours. Besides, there is no storage case, and you will have to be mindful of minor bumps or scratches from impacting your unit.

Dimensions: ‎24" x 13.4" x 9.8" | Weight: ‎34.2lbs | Engine: 2-Stroke | Horsepower: 1.2HP | Barrel Size: N/A | Barrel Capacity: N/A | Beats Per Minute: 1700 to 2230BPM

11. Field Tuff FTF-33GPD Gas Post Driver

The Field Tuff FTF-33GPD Gas Post Driver features an exquisite design that allows you to work several jobs, making it very versatile. Apart from that, the powerful engine is well complemented by the many components that come with it to ensure that you don’t have to incur any additional cost.

When you have to install a new fence, you will like that it is lightweight, which will offer you more excellent maneuverability. But you can also use it for various structures, farm fences, orchard fences, and barriers. Hence, you get great versatility so that you can work on many projects.

Furthermore, it has a 2-cycle gas-powered engine that produces 1.2 Horsepower, which is enough to generate 7500 rotations per minute. Likewise, you will be able to use it to drive 2.67” in diameter stakes at a time, which will help you quickly complete your work. 

The numerous components that it comes with, such as the storage stand, blow mold case, and fuel tank, make it fully compatible. You won’t require any hose or external power source, which makes it very convenient to work with and lowers the operation cost. Finally, there is a vibration-dampening system for more comfort.

It is an expensive model, and so most customers might opt out of buying it given the numerous units they can choose from. Plus, the housing does tend to get hot, which raises safety concerns, so you may have to use a shroud to avoid accidentally getting burnt.

Dimensions: N/A | Weight: ‎40lbs | Engine: 2-Cycle | Horsepower: 1.2HP | Barrel Size: N/A | Barrel Capacity: Up to 2.67" | Beats Per Minute: 1700 to 2230BPM

12. Titan PDG2000

The Titan PDG2000 because it offers a high degree of reliability, which is in short supply. So, most customers have marked it down as one of the models on their wish list. Plus, due to the powerful engine, you get a stable performance and the components to back it up.

It derives power from the GX35 4-stroke engine from Honda, one of the best gas-powered drivers in the market. As a result, it can generate 1750 beats per minute which can take care of most projects. But you do not need to worry because the internal dampening springs will help you effectively control it.

Thus, you will be able to drive ¾-inch rods along with T posts without any problem. Besides, you get two types of sleeves measuring ½-inch and ¾-inch respectively for use with rods or rebars. Moving on, the handles have been designed in a way to provide you with maximum comfort. 

Therefore, extended work hours will no longer be an issue, and you can carry on without succumbing to fatigue. Moreover, it comes with a storage case that helps to extend its lifespan and makes sure that you can use it under various circumstances without having to worry.

The issue with the unit is that it faces problems when driving posts into compacted dirt. Users have reported that if the surface is hard, there is a chance you could have performance issues. Besides, there is no extended handle option for amplifying comfort, so long work hours may be a problem in some instances.

Dimensions: N/A | Weight: 35lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke Honda GX35 | Horsepower: 1.3HP | Barrel Size: 2" | Barrel Capacity: 1" to 1.87" | Beats Per Minute: 1750BPM

What is the Best Gas-Powered Post Driver?

This section provides a thorough comparison of the top gas-powered post drivers available. The table below outlines key attributes, including dimensions, weight, engine specifications, horsepower, barrel size, barrel capacity, and beats per minute.

Product Dimensions Weight Engine Horsepower Barrel Size Barrel Capacity Beats Per Minute
REDI Driver Boss 25" x 15" x 12" 35lbs 4-Stroke Honda GX35 1.6HP 3.12" N/A 1820BPM
Rhino GPD40 11" x 14" x 24" 38lbs 4-Stroke Honda GX35 N/A N/A Up to 2.12" Approx. 1720BPM
Titan PGD3200X N/A ‎45lbs 4-Stroke Honda GX35 1.3HP 3.25" Up to 3.12" 1850BPM
Rhino Multi Pro ‎30" x 18" x 15" ‎44lbs 4-Stroke Honda GX35 N/A N/A N/A Approx. 1720BPM
Titan PGD3875 N/A ‎50lbs 4-Stroke 1.3HP 4" Up to 3" 700 to 1350BPM
Skildril G2XD 29" x 11.5" x 13" ‎42lbs 2-Cycle/4-Cycle OHV ‎1.8HP (2 Stroke)/1.4HP (4 Stroke) N/A Up to 4" 1100 to 1800BPM
Titan PGD2875 13" x 12" x 26.5" 30lbs 4-Stroke 1.3HP 3.25" Up to 3" 1500 to 2000BPM
Skidril Post Driver ‎24" x 13.4" x 9.8" ‎34.2lbs 2-Stroke 1.2HP N/A N/A 1700 to 2230BPM
Titan PGD2875H N/A ‎28lbs 4-Stroke Honda GX35 1.3HP 3.25" Up to 3" 1500 to 2000BPM
Yescom Post Driver ‎24" x 13.4" x 9.8" ‎34.2lbs 2-Cycle/4-Cycle OHV ‎1.8HP (2 Stroke)/1.4HP (4 Stroke) N/A Up to 4" 1100 to 1800BPM
Field Tuff FTF-33GPD N/A ‎40lbs 2-Cycle 1.2HP N/A Up to 2.67" 1700 to 2230BPM
Titan PDG2000 N/A 35lbs 4-Stroke Honda GX35 1.3HP 2" 1" to 1.87" 1750BPM

Buying Guide for the Best Gas-Powered Post Driver

Before you venture into the market, we would like to raise your attention to a couple of points. Based on these aspects, we have formulated our list, and you will see why they form an indispensable part of post-drivers.

By keeping these points in mind, you can distinguish between great products and merely good ones. Thus, you can make an informed choice and understand the intricacies of the products you are willing to buy.

  1. Durability

Your unit must be durable to survive the daily wear and tear of working in the field. There is no point in purchasing it if it breaks down after a while. There can be numerous problems from oil leaks to the handles breaking. The designers must, therefore, use only quality materials for the construction.

Buying a post-driver is a one-time investment, and you cannot afford to pitch in for a new one quite often. It is not only about the central unit but for the components as well because they must be sturdy enough to handle the job.

  1. Ease of Use

It must be easy to use. The primary purpose of any tool is to make your life easier and in that regard; there can be no compromises. All the functions must be easily understandable, along with the installation process. You won’t want to waste time on a cumbersome installation procedure.

You will want to get your device up and running quickly time. Plus, the components that come with it should be easy to gauge for you, and you should know almost at a glance what each part does. You should be able to operate it with minimum fuss to get the best performance.

  1. Power

Finally, it should have enough energy because installing poles is a tough job. You will have to come across lots of different surfaces, and your model should be capable of penetrating most surfaces for a complete performance.

The power drives all the other functions in the unit. Every component revolves around the availability of power, but you must remember that too much power could make it hard to control.

It must have vibration absorption features that will allow you to control it better to get precise results. You must be able to manage the power according to the demands of different jobs.

Do gas-powered post drivers require any additional tools or accessories?

Gas-powered post drivers often come with some standard accessories, but it’s essential to check the included items before purchasing. Specific adapters or collars may be required to accommodate different post sizes and materials.

Is a gas-powered post driver easy to operate?

Yes, gas-powered post drivers are designed to be user-friendly and easy to operate. With minimal training, most users can quickly familiarize themselves with the tool, and its easy start-up features help eliminate common operational issues.

What safety measures should I take when using a gas-powered post driver?

To ensure optimal safety, you should wear appropriate personal protective equipment, such as gloves, safety goggles, and hearing protection. Always consult the product manual for specific safety guidelines and recommendations.

Are gas-powered post drivers suitable for all-weather conditions?

Gas-powered post drivers are designed to be resilient and can be used in various weather conditions. However, wet or muddy soil can make post-installation more difficult. Always use caution and follow the manufacturer’s guidelines when operating in adverse weather.

What types of posts can I use with a gas-powered post driver?

Gas-powered post drivers can be used with a variety of post materials, such as wood, steel, and vinyl. Be sure to consult the manufacturer’s recommendations for specific post types and sizes.

How deep can a gas-powered post driver drive a post?

The depth to which a gas-powered post driver can drive a post will depend on the model and the soil conditions. However, most gas-powered post drivers can firmly set a post several feet into the ground.

Can I use a gas-powered post driver for other applications besides fencing?

While primarily designed for driving fences and signposts, some gas-powered post drivers can be used for other applications, such as anchoring posts for decks, mailboxes, footings, and more. Be sure to consult the owner’s manual for additional compatible applications.

How do I maintain my gas-powered post driver?

To maintain your gas-powered post driver, regularly check and replace engine oil, air filters, and spark plugs. Keep the tool clean and properly store it when not in use. Consult your owner’s manual for detailed maintenance instructions specific to your model.

A wood-burning stove has its advantages, but it can be dangerous, not to mention smelly. 

Wood pellet stoves are a brilliant alternative to them, thanks to the hardwood pellets used to produce heat as opposed to wood. They are cleaner and generate more heat as opposed to a regular wood stove or a fireplace. 

So, all in all, there is absolutely no downside to getting one. You will not only be paying less, but you’ll also breathe cleaner air since pellet stoves cause minimal pollution. 

However, we understand that it can get challenging to select a good wood pellet stove out of the plethora of options available in the market. This is why we’ve reviewed 7 of the best small pellet stoves to help you make up your mind. 

Without further ado, let’s get started! 

Listed below are the 5 best small pellet stoves from our list:

  • Comfortbilt HP-22 Pellet Stove: Boasts wide coverage due to its impressive heating range of 50,000 BTU, easily accommodating large spaces, but initially had control panel issues.
  • Castle Serenity Pellet Stove: Uniquely features a timer and calendar for efficient heating and is optimal for smaller spaces yet efficient due to its thermal efficiency rate of 69.8%, despite its noise level.
  • U.S. Stove Company GW1949 Pellet Stove: Showcases an attractive design with a zigzag front vent and an efficient heat output of 40,000 BTU, suitable for bigger areas, though it requires more frequent cleaning.
  • Comfortbilt HP-22N Pellet Stove: This small yet powerful stove can comfortably heat larger rooms thanks to its 50,000 BTU capacity and has a large hopper, notwithstanding its longer-than-expected shipping time.
  • Cleveland Iron Works PS20W-CIW Pellet Stove: Ideal for heating small areas, this stove includes a fresh air supply kit and Wi-Fi connectivity for wireless regulation, though its instruction manual is found to be complicated.

Here is the list of the 7 best small pellet stoves that will fit your small space and provide you with the most efficient heating:

1. Comfortbilt HP-22 Pellet Stove- Best for Wide Coverage

The Comfortbilt HP22 isn’t just great to look at, but it’s also an energy-efficient and compact pellet stove. It is made of alloy steel and makes for an excellent purchase, thanks to its roster of features and Comfortbilt’s market reputation. The brand also offers a 1-year manufacturer warranty. 

For starters, the stove has a gigantic heating range of 50,000 BTU, which is one of the best in its class. It can easily heat up around 2800 sq. feet, which means that you can use it to heat up the average apartment or workshop. 

Fret not, though, if your apartment is on the lower end of the size spectrum since you can always lower the heater to a lesser value using the thermostat. 

Moving on, we liked how despite its power-packed heating capacity, it comes in a portable size that can fit inside any cramped area. The unit also comes with a large hopper that can be used to store a decent quantity of pellets. 

We also really liked how the glass door is transparent enough to allow one to check on the functioning of the stove. Plus, it can stay cloudless for a whopping 12 hours.  

The control panel wasn’t working when we received the product. However, we got in touch with Comfortbilt, and they swiftly rectified the issue. They sent us another model, and that one worked like a charm. 

Heat Output: 50,000 BTU | Heating Area: 2800 sq. feet | Hopper Capacity: 55 lbs | Dimensions: 25"D x 12"W x 32.5"H

2. Castle Serenity Pellet Stove- Best for Timer and Calendar Features

If you’re searching for something that will efficiently heat up a small place in your house, look no further than the Castle Serenity 12327. It can heat an area up to 1500 sq ft yet is portable and easy to move around. What’s more, it has a thermal efficiency rate of 69.8%. 

To begin with, this stove’s controller is admirable. You can manually manipulate the temperature as well as set it to a regular value and let the stove run. In addition to this, the stove has a timer and a calendar, which help to run the stove efficiently. 

Using the stove is a breeze from start to finish because it is easy to set up and clean. 

The installation process will last for a bunch of hours at the most, and there’s no need to install any additional chimney since the unit can be vented straightaway. And while cleaning the stove, you only need to clean out the firepot and the ashpan, apart from sweeping the exhaust pipe. 

Lastly, if you’re a mobile homeowner, be assured that this product is safe for use due to its ETL and EPL certifications.  

We can’t find any fault with the effectiveness of this stove. It was functional, easy to use, and affordable. However, it was a little too noisy, and we could hear it from an adjacent room too. 

Heat Output: 31,960 BTU | Heating Area: 1500 sq. feet | Hopper Capacity: 40 lbs | Dimensions: 23.75"D x 18.25"W x 34"H

3. U.S. Stove Company GW1949 Pellet Stove- Best for Attractive Design

The US GW1949 is a quality product by US Stove Pellet and is small yet efficient. It measures 15 x 52 x 24 inches and can heat spaces up to 2000 sq. feet at once. It works silently and will heat up your living space to give it just the right level of warmth. 

We liked the design and make of this stove, which was both beautiful and functional. The stove features a zigzag vent right at the front, which significantly enhances the working of the heater. It helps maintain a balanced distribution of heat and also amplifies its output. 

Moreover, the stove is able to generate up to 40,000 BTUs of heat, which though ideal for bigger areas, can be tweaked to fit smaller spaces as well. Its hopper has a capacity of about 60 lbs., which means that you won’t need to keep refilling it since it will burn for almost 30 hours. 

We were also impressed by the natural gravity feed system of this model because it was very low maintenance. Lastly, we must mention that the unit is EPL and ETL-certified, making it absolutely safe to use in indoor spaces.  

We were a little disappointed at the amount of work it took us to clean this unit. When the ash gets collected, it travels right up to the vent, and there’s a risk of it contaminating the surroundings in such a case. 

Thus, it needs to be regularly vacuumed, which is an absolute pain to do since the different parts of this product aren’t easy to access. 

Heat Output: 40,000 BTU | Heating Area: 2000 sq. feet | Hopper Capacity: 60 lbs | Dimensions: 24"D x 15"W x 52"H

4. Comfortbilt HP-22N Pellet Stove

Another fantastic Comfortbilt stove is the HP-22N, which is a great fit for medium-sized or smaller rooms. However, despite its diminutiveness, the stove can warm up bigger rooms, too, thanks to the capacity of its hopper and its appealing bay design. 

Getting a unit that is both compact and powerful can be challenging. But the Comfortbilt HP-22N incorporates the best of both worlds, and its 50,000 BTU of energy can heat up spaces up to 2800 sq feet effectively. So, don’t let its diminutive size throw you off, because irrespective of that, it is perfect for use in larger places and rooms. 

Another feature that we liked about this model was its hefty copper capacity. The copper can store a weight of up to 80 lbs., which means that the fuel in there can last you for days. The powerful engineering of this unit means that a great quantity of heat is released by it. 

The stove also comes with a bay window that allows you to watch the wood pellets and monitor their performance. Lastly, the unit is backed by a 1-year manufacturer warranty, which is further embellished by Comfortbilt’s responsive customer service.  

The package took ages to arrive. And when we say ages, we mean more than a month! We were slightly disappointed by the excessive shipping time taken by Comfortbilt; however, the product lived up to our expectations and performed well. 

Heat Output: 50,000 BTU | Heating Area: 2800 sq. feet | Hopper Capacity: 80 lbs | Dimensions: 26"D x 24"W x 40"H

5. Cleveland Iron Works PS20W-CIW Pellet Stove

Are you on the lookout for an excellent pellet stove that can heat up small areas effectively? Look no further than the PS20W, which measures 20.27 x 34.25 x 22.04 inches. One of the coolest things about this product is that a fresh air supply kit is included with the package! 

This stove from Cleveland Iron Works is medium-sized and comes with a hopper that has a storage capacity of 60 lbs. Since it is a small pellet stove, it can effectively heat up the average-sized room, as well as any other kind of space up to 800 sq. feet. 

One thing we really appreciated about this model was its electronic control panel, which makes operating the machine as easy as pie. By pressing a single button, you can power up the machine! What’s more, you’ll barely register its presence as it functions, thanks to its ultra-quiet blower. 

We were also pretty awed by the fact that the stove has Wi-Fi connectivity and can be regulated wirelessly using an app that is compatible with Android and iOS. And finally, the manufacturers offer an extended 1-year warranty and helpfully send replacement parts along with the stove as well.  

We found two major issues with this stove. Firstly, the instruction manual that comes with it is extremely complicated and beyond our capacity. Secondly, there’s a small manufacturing error with this device that forces you to unplug and replug the unit before starting it up since it won’t start without it. 

Heat Output: 34,000 BTU | Heating Area: 800 sq. feet | Hopper Capacity: 60 lbs | Dimensions: 20"D x 18.25"W x 28.5"H

6. Cleveland Iron Works PS60W-CIW Pellet Stove

The penultimate entry on our list is this small pellet stove from Cleveland Iron Works, which measures 25.59 x 23.62 x 38.98 inches and can heat up to 1200 sq ft. It has been made using solid steel and cast iron construction and will last you for years on end, thanks to its tough exterior. 

Since smart home technology has joined forces with pellet stoves, they’ve become a force to reckon with. This is partly why the PS60W is so well-reviewed and well-received. It is compatible with the Amazon Echo, and you can also control the device via your phone. 

Coming to its performance, it is able to produce 34,000 BTUs worth of heat, which is just enough to heat up a large room or a mid-sized apartment. It can also be used to supplement any already-existing heat producer in a big house. And you get a remote control with it, which makes the unit easy to operate. 

The device also comes along with a fresh air intake kit. This is useful because it lets one install the stove in places that have minimal airflow, for instance, basements. Lastly, despite the advanced features offered by this model, its price tag is affordable.  

Though the stove has a host of advanced features, there is one major drawback with respect to them. They are too complicated to use, and the instruction manual is also not clear on how to go about setting up voice commands via home devices. 

Heat Output: 34,000 BTU | Heating Area: 1200 sq. feet | Hopper Capacity: 60 lbs | Dimensions: 25.59"D x 23.62"W x 38.98"H

7. US Stove Company 5040 Pellet Stove

The final entry on our list is yet another product by the US Stove Company, the 5040, which measures 24.5 x 21.5 x 28.5 inches and can burn up to 40 hours. It has a classic, pedestal-style design and is infused with US Stove Company’s industry experience, as well as innovation. 

If you don’t have a lot of room, then the US Stove Company 5040 is ideal for you. Despite being manufactured for smaller spaces, the stove comes equipped with a gigantic hopper, which ensures that it runs for at least 40 hours. What’s more, the stove has all the necessary approvals required for use in mobile homes. 

Moving on, the manufacturers give the buyer an option to include a fresh air kit along with the main product. A fresh air kit is good for people who have poorly ventilated spaces, such as a basement or an attic with no windows. However, getting the kit is entirely optional. 

We also liked how the exterior of the stove is pretty appealing and fits in well with all kinds of interior décor. It also comes with a digitized control board that is super easy to operate and allows one to adjust heat settings with just one button press.  

We liked the performance of this product, and it worked pretty well in our basement. However, installation materials such as a chimney connector, a floor protector, and a radiation shield weren’t included. We had to spend a fair amount of additional money on buying these supplies 

Heat Output: 34,000 BTU | Heating Area: 1,800 sq. feet | Hopper Capacity: 40 lbs | Dimensions: 24.5"D x 21.5"W x 28.5"H

What is the Best Small Pellet Stoves?

In this section, we present a table featuring the best small pellet stoves. This comprehensive comparison outlines essential attributes, including heat output, heating area, hopper capacity, and dimensions.

Product Heat Output Heating Area Hopper Capacity Dimensions
Comfortbilt HP-22 Pellet Stove 50,000 BTU 2800 sq. feet 55 lbs ‎25"D x 12"W x 32.5"H
Castle Serenity Pellet Stove 31,960 BTU 1500 sq. feet 40 lbs 23.75"D x 18.25"W x 34"H
U.S. Stove Company GW1949 Pellet Stove 40,000 BTU 2000 sq. feet 60 lbs 24"D x 15"W x 52"H
Comfortbilt HP-22N Pellet Stove 50,000 BTU 2800 sq. feet 80 lbs 26"D x 24"W x 40"H
Cleveland Iron Works PS20W-CIW Pellet Stove 34,000 BTU 800 sq. feet 60 lbs 20"D x 18.25"W x 28.5"H
Cleveland Iron Works PS60W-CIW Pellet Stove 34,000 BTU 1200 sq. feet 60 lbs 25.59"D x 23.62"W x 38.98"H
US Stove Company 5040 Pellet Stove 34,000 BTU 1,800 sq. feet 40 lbs 24.5"D x 21.5"W x 28.5"H

Buying Guide for the Best Small Pellet Stove

BTU Rating

The amount of heat given out by a pellet stove is quantified by a unit known as BTU or British Thermal Unit. Standard pellet stoves dispense anything between 20,000 BTUs to 48,000 BTUs, which is ample for heating up to 2400 sq. feet.

Pellet Type and Hopper Capacity

Pellet stoves work by burning hardwood pellets that one feeds into the firebox of the stove with the help of a hopper. The capacity of the hopper is what determines how long the stove works before requiring it to be restocked. 

From our experience, most hoppers hold between 30 to 50 pounds worth of pellets, and these usually last for a good 30 hours at least. If you get a stove with a gigantic hopper capacity, then it may be days before you run out of fuel. This is because such hoppers can hold up to 100 pounds of pellets. 

Moving on, pellets are of two grades. The first kind is the premium grade, which has ash content below 1%. The other is standard grade, which has an ash content between 1 and 3%. Premium-grade pellets are of better quality and burn longer without producing more ash. 

Energy Efficiency

If a pellet stove has been certified by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), then it usually has an energy efficiency of 70-83%. This percentage indicates the amount of heat produced by the stove for warming the room up versus the heat it loses through the stovepipe. For instance, if a stove has an energy efficiency of 70%, it loses 30% of heat as it works.

Easy to Clean

Even though pellet stoves don’t produce half as much ash as wooden fireplace does, they still need cleaning. A pellet stove is easy to clean if its ash pans and firepots can be extracted to dump the waste out. In addition to this, some premium-grade pellet stoves come with air wash systems that help keep the glass free of gas and smoke.

Why do people use pellet stoves?

As compared to fuel heating, using a pellet stove is cheaper and safer. You get more heat at the same price! Apart from this, wood pellets can be stored for a really long period of time, and if you get premium-grade ones, then they’ll burn longer too.

Since the heat produced by a pellet stove circulates, its fumes aren’t as harmful as those produced by regular fireplaces.

How does a pellet stove work?

Think of pellet stoves as a cross between a heater and a fireplace. They use both circulations of air and fire to heat up a room. Once you put the pellets into the hopper, they begin to burn and produce heat. This heat is then circulated using powered fans.

Pellet stoves with manual ignition will require you to start up the fire, whereas those with auto ignition can kickstart the heating process with a single button.

Are pellet stoves safe?

Pellet stoves are way safer than a fireplace, and the reason is quite evident. The fire produced by a fireplace can easily catch on to something flammable, but this problem does not crop up with a small pellet stove.

Additionally, pellet fumes produce fewer noxious gasses than fireplaces do since the air gets circulated due to their powerful fans. This is why in recent times, people have increasingly begun preferring pellet stoves since they are not only safer but also more environmentally friendly.

Are pellet stoves safe to use around children?

Yes, because many pellet models come with lockable viewing doors. Parents can seal the viewing area after lighting a fire, and children and pets won’t come in contact with it.

Plus, due to the construction of a pellet stove, there is no contact between people and the fire, and the fire poses no risk to safety. However, for added security, ensure that children aren’t around the stove when it is being cleaned, filled, or lit up.

Do pellet stoves produce noise?

Pellet stoves produce some noise, but it’s usually not a lot. Good quality pellet stoves are fitted with features that make them ultra-quiet, and as such, you shouldn’t be able to hear the whirring of the motor in the next room.

However, buy pellet stoves judiciously since cheap/imitation brands make faulty products, that make a very distinguishable sound when turned on. Don’t worry, though, since all the stoves on our list are quiet and make a minimal sound!

Cosplay is one of the most interesting and characterful hobbies you can have. However, cosplay does take a lot of effort - and a significant part of the effort you put goes into painting. 

Paints are the final link between living the character and simply dressing up as one; hence, you should get to work with paints as frequently as you can and put in as much effort as possible! 

To make your life a little bit easier, we now put together a list of some of the best paints and brands that are on offer today.

They all offer the same economical yet vibrant painting experience, though they are all unique in the value that they provide. Without saying more, let’s jump right into the reviews. 

Listed below are the 5 best body paints for cosplay from our list:

  • Mehron Face & Body Paint: Offers vibrant, high-quality pigments and shades using safe and soft materials, but comes with a high price tag, which may limit its appeal to those on a budget.
  • Snazaroo: Known for its long-lasting wear, this brand provides a great variety of paint shades at affordable prices, catering to a broader audience but may lack the pigment concentration found in some other brands.
  • Graftobian ProPaint Kit: This is a standout option for sensitive skin due to its high-quality and safe ingredients, providing great value despite its premium price.
  • TAG Face Paint: This reasonably priced set offers vibrant and punchy shades that can be used both for face and body painting, making it a versatile choice for cosplayers.
  • Mosaiz Face Paint: As a unique offering of easy-to-apply, hypoallergenic, and non-toxic paint sticks, this product is cost-effective and travel-friendly but may not be sufficient for a full cosplay look.

These body paints have been carefully selected based on their quality, durability, and ease of use. So, whether you're a seasoned cosplayer or a newbie, here's the list of the 6 best body paints for cosplay that will help you create the perfect look for your next event.

  1. Mehron Face & Body Paint - Best for Vibrant Colors

If you’re looking for the best in the business - a manufacturer who has known the product long enough that they are a reason for the popularity of face paints today, you’re in the right place. With over 90 years of experience, they’re bastions of the body paint industry.  Their pigments and shades are highly punchy and bright, and the raw materials are par excellence as well. 

Experience

Mehron has been behind countless circus shows, Broadway shows, and theater performances - you name it, Mehron has been a part of it. Their credibility is beyond reproach, and their products still follow the winning formula they’ve been using for decades. This formula uses wonderful, extremely safe, and soft raw materials that can last for hours on the skin easily. 

Coupled with a few sprays of a setting spray, it lasts for hours easily. The only thing that will pinch is the price. These are among the most expensive products on the market, but these will never fail you whether it comes to quality, the softness of paint on your skin, or the safety of paint. 

If you do not consider the price and focus solely on the quality of the product, these are about the best cosplay paints money can buy. 

Type: Cake Paint | Palette Size: 8 Colors | Water-Resistant: Yes | Vegan: Yes

  1. Snazaroo - Best for Long-Lasting Wear

Snazaroo has consistently been placed among the topmost brands when it comes to cosplay and body paints in general. Their face paints have been rated as some of the best on the market today. The reason behind almost universal praise is not belonging to the professional side of the market entirely - they make something for everyone and that too at affordable prices! 

Experience

Snazaroo’s entire range of products is rated as being extremely safe, whether you see if it’s safe for sensitive skin or being approved by the FDA on all major parameters. This, coupled with the value that they bring by getting you around 36 varieties of paint, gets you a fantastic overall experience that is simply unbeatable for the price. 

Whether it’s Overwatch characters, your favorite Anime protagonist, or the superhero you’re cosplaying - these colors are available in a variety of shades, so you have nothing to worry about. The only compromise that comes, is in the form of a little bit less pigment concentration than we generally like to see in face paints - but it’s sufficient for any cosplay convention! 

All in all, Snazaroo has been around on the market long enough to establish itself as a reliable, safe, and reasonably priced body paint brand. 

Type: Water-Based | Palette Size: 32 Colors | Water-Resistant: Yes | Vegan: Yes

  1. Graftobian ProPaint Kit - Best for Sensitive Skin

If you’re looking for a competitor to the Mehron face painting kit, this is an equally wonderful offering from Graftobian. The pigment quantity and quality are second to none, while the paints last incredibly long compared to most other paints on the market. 

With a wide variety in paint shades and superb quality of paints, the Graftobian is a contender for the top spot among cosplay paints! 

Experience

The quality of the paints on offer is beyond reproach. Besides Mehron, no one else delivers such high-quality ingredients in their paints. They are also FDA-compliant, so you can be sure that your skin will not bear the brunt of poor-quality body paints. You get 12 shades in this set, which can be easily mixed to create new shades as per your specifications. 

These paints are water-based, making them easier to apply and remove from the skin. The paints are manufactured on-site in the USA, so you can forget about lax safety standards. Interestingly, the president of Graftobian provides their phone number on each box - we’ve never seen such commitment to consumer satisfaction in this segment before! 

This kit requires that you can digest the premium it asks for over many others. At the same time, do bear in mind that you’re getting the best experience from a very premium cosplay paint brand. 

Type: Cake Paint | Palette Size: 12 Colors | Water-Resistant: Yes | Vegan: Yes

  1. TAG Face Paint

While not branded as a “body” paint, you can easily apply these TAG face paints while cosplaying all over your body if you wish. These almost escaped our radar, since these paints are not advertised as cosplay paints. However, a number of cosplayers have reported strong results, and the quantity is also sufficient for at least a full body paint of each color. 

Experience

This paint set delivers in terms of safety, quality, and value. This set comes in at around a fifth of the price of Mehron’s individual paints if you consider the per-paint price, though it will last half as much too. The quality of these paints is solid, so you will not face any issues relating to longevity or safety.

Another point that plays out in the favor of the TAG Face Paints is the compactness of these paints - the box measures 10” x 4”, which can easily fit inside any bag, handbag or purse. You can easily carry these around to conventions directly!

Out of the 12 shades that you get, 9 are basic and three are special paint shades that you’re unlikely to find elsewhere. Thus, as an unconventional but ultimately economical choice, TAG Face Paints delivers well.

Type: Water-Based | Palette Size: 6 Colors | Water-Resistant: Yes | Vegan: Yes

  1. Mosaiz Face Paint

Having covered a number of water-based liquid cosplay paints, we now come to paint sticks, a.k.a crayons. These body painting crayons are rated safe, are much easier to apply and remove compared to liquid cosplay plants - and are cheaper too! The only caveat is that finer details are much harder to pull off with paint sticks - all in all, a wonderful combination. 

Experience

These cosplay paints are very useful for getting the details right or providing rudimentary outlines or accents to your cosplay attire. These are incredibly safe and reliable when it comes to paint quality, and are likely to last you multiple cosplaying sessions and events. These paints also come with two metallic shades, which gives them an edge over the others reviewed. 

When it comes to safety, these are hypoallergenic, non-toxic, FDA-approved, and food-grade permitted - which makes this set ideal for those with sensitive skin. These are all around 3” long, which makes them perfect for traveling around with. While these may not be enough for a full cosplaying experience, it’s a must-have in any case. 

Type: Water-Based | Palette Size: 12 Colors | Water-Resistant: Yes | Vegan: Yes

  1. Ben Nye Magicolor Liquid Paints and Glitters

Ben Nye is perhaps the most popular cosplay supplies brand and for good reasons. These paints easily deliver one of the most well-rounded painting experiences, whether you consider the quality, safety, reliability, long-lasting nature of the paint or the overall value delivered by the paint. 

Experience

Unlike most other brands listed here, Ben Nye products are generally available individually. The paint bottles are available in a number of sizes, and the one-ounce bottle can easily last between 20 to 70 painting sessions depending on your use. With the paint, you can also get their highly-rated range of glitters, which are also every bit as safe and as vibrant. 

Ben Nye makes a number of products that are considered the de facto standard. You can easily get hair paints, face paints, body paints as well as glitters. However, the face and body paints which are available in a huge variety of shades are in a different league entirely. 

Type: Cream Paint | Palette Size: 4 Colors | Water-Resistant: Yes | Vegan: No

With this, we come to the end of our discussion on the top 6 brands and paint kits for cosplaying. However, we now move to an equally important part of cosplay painting which often gets ignored - the extras you need in order to cosplay like a pro. Paints themselves aren’t enough to last you through conventions without nature playing spoilsport. 

What is the Best Body Paint for Cosplay?

This section is dedicated to evaluating and identifying the top-quality body paints specifically tailored for cosplay enthusiasts. The ensuing table meticulously examines crucial attributes including type, palette size, water-resistance, and vegan-friendliness.

Product Type Palette Size Water-Resistant Vegan
Mehron Face & Body Paint Cake Paint 8 Colors Yes Yes
Snazaroo Water-Based 32 Colors Yes Yes
Graftobian ProPaint Kit Cake Paint 12 Colors Yes Yes
TAG Face Paint Water-Based 6 Colors Yes Yes
Mosaiz Face Paint Water-Based 12 Colors Yes Yes
Ben Nye Magicolor Liquid Paints and Glitters Cream Paint 4 Colors Yes No

Buying Guide for the Best Body Paints For Cosplay

Cosplaying, a beautiful art form where enthusiasts recreate their favorite characters or create entirely new ones, is a craft that requires skill, creativity, and attention to detail. One of the most important aspects of cosplay is body paint, as it adds an extra dimension to the character. In order to make your cosplay truly stand out, it's crucial to choose the right body paint. This buying guide will provide you with the most important factors to consider when purchasing body paint for cosplay.

1. Type of Body Paint

There are several types of body paint available in the market, and it's essential to select the best one for your needs:

  • Water-based Paints: These paints are easy to apply, non-toxic, and straightforward to remove. They are best for sensitive skin and provide a matte finish. However, they can be less durable as they may smudge or wear off with sweat.
  • Alcohol-based Paints: These paints offer excellent durability, smudge and sweat-proof coverage, and a smooth finish. However, they can be tough to remove and may not suit sensitive skin.
  • Cream-based Paints: These provide excellent coverage, blend easily, and have a long-lasting effect. They can sometimes feel heavy and may require touch-ups throughout the day.
  • Hybrid Paints: These are a mix of water-based and alcohol-based paints. They offer the advantages of both types with better durability than water-based paints and a more skin-friendly approach than alcohol-based paints.

2. Pigmentation and Coverage

High-quality body paint should provide rich pigmentation and even coverage. Coverage should be consistent and not streak, crack, or fade easily. Always look for reviews and test the product before purchasing to ensure that it provides the desired level of pigmentation.

3. Application Method

Body paint can be applied using different methods such as brushes, sponges, airbrushing, or fingers. Consider the complexity of your character's design and which application method would work best for you.

4. Skin Type and Safety

Consider your skin type when choosing body paint. Alcohol-based paints can be drying, while cream-based paints may clog pores. Additionally, ensure that the paint is non-toxic, hypoallergenic, and FDA-approved. A patch test is recommended for those with sensitive skin to check for any adverse reactions.

5. Ease of Removal

While some paints are designed to last all day, they should still be easy to remove after your event. Water-based paints are easiest to remove, while alcohol-based paints may require special removers.

6. Budget

Body paint prices can vary widely, so it's essential to set a budget and strike a balance between quality and affordability. Often, mid-range products provide good quality without breaking the bank.

7. Availability

Make sure that the body paint is widely available, either in-store or online, and factor in shipping time if necessary.

Important Tip

Always perform a patch test with any new body paint to check for possible allergic reactions. Apply a small amount to your skin, let it dry, and wait for at least 24 hours to see if any irritation occurs.

By considering these factors and adhering to the tips provided, you'll be well-equipped to find the perfect body paint for your next cosplay event.

Essential Extras for Cosplay Painting

  1. Setting Spray

The Setting Spray is used both before and after the application of paints. It acts just like a second skin, where it protects the paint from chipping and breaking off your own skin. It is generally made using a combination of alcohol and water and is crucial in making the paints stick to all parts of the skin - especially when it comes to the face which is more oily.

A coat of setting spray applied before the paint brings out the best properties of the paint - pigmentation, vibrance, punchiness, etc. If you intend to take lots of pictures and make the paint last as long as possible, you have to get setting spray as well.

You won’t notice its presence so it’s hard to miss - but only until a few hours pass, by when you will really want to have applied a layer before.

  1. High-Density Sponge

For the most uniform painting experience, you should also have sponges at hand always. For maintaining evenness and to ensure the paint does not streak, the sponge is the best tool on the market. A word of advice: apply only thin layers as far as possible. This will help your paint stick around for longer times without chipping. Paint around your joints will last much longer this way!

  1. Brushes [kabuki/artist-grade paints]

You should be very particular when it comes to brushes. You will need a larger brush (e.g. a kabuki brush) to get the larger details just right - however, you will also need thinner brushes for the finest of details. For this, synthetic artist-grade brushes are the de facto standard. You want to have a number of stroke varieties as well as brush styles at hand for a unique look.

  1. Remover [for oil-based paints]

Finally, we come to a particular chemical solution for the oil-paint removal problem. Oil-based paints can be notoriously difficult to remove, and that’s why you must always have a remover at hand (especially for the times when the artist goofs up). The remover can be any of a heavy-duty bar of soap, a waterproof make-up remover, or a strong facewash.

You might notice that we’ve only reviewed water-based products. This is simply because of our personal preference for water-based paints, which are much easier to apply and remove compared to oil paints.

8. Budget

Another important consideration while getting cosplay paints is the budget. If you’re not a professional cosplay artist yet, you’re not expected to have perfectly painted cosplay attires as well - and hence, you should get a set that doesn’t break the bank. Go for the best if you’re a professional - nothing else would suffice.

9. Colors

This can be a deciding factor if you’re confused among equivalent sets of cosplay paint kits. Some kits come only with generic paint shades, while others offer you just the right shade you need to make your character look as realistic as possible. Hence, think about the color first and then the budget.

Remember, an expensive shade which is an approximation is worse than an accurate but cheaper paint shade.

What type of body paint is best for cosplay?

The best type of body paint for cosplay depends on your specific needs and the character you are portraying. Some popular options include water-based face and body paints, alcohol-activated paints, and silicone-based paints.

How do I apply body paint for cosplay?

The application process for body paint can vary depending on your paint type. Generally, starting with clean, dry skin and applying a base layer of paint before adding any details or designs is recommended. You can use brushes, sponges, or airbrushes to apply the paint and seal it with a setting spray or powder.

How do I remove body paint after cosplay?

The best way to remove body paint is to use a gentle cleanser or makeup remover that is safe for use on the skin. You can also use baby oil or coconut oil to help dissolve the paint before washing it with soap and water.

Can body paint cause skin irritation or allergies?

Yes, some people may experience skin irritation or allergies when using body paint. It’s important to test the paint on a small area of skin before applying it to larger areas and to look for hypoallergenic options if you have sensitive skin.

How long does body paint last on the skin?

The longevity of body paint can vary depending on the type of paint used, the application method, and other factors such as sweating or rubbing. Generally, water-based paints may last for several hours while alcohol-activated or silicone-based paints can last for up to 24 hours or longer.

Can I swim or shower while wearing body paint?

Swimming or showering while wearing body paint is not recommended, as water can cause the paint to break down and smear. If you need to remove the paint, it’s best to do so before getting wet.

 

Colored pencils are simple mediums that can produce extraordinary artwork.  Unlike regular lead pencils, these are very fragile and soft. This is because of their core composition. 

Most good-quality colored pencils contain wax or oil in their composition that can help make their pigments vibrant. They are also much more expensive than graphite pencils. Therefore, it’s important to take good care when using colored pencils. And one of the best ways to care for them is by using a good sharpener. 

Using a good sharpener can go a long way than just keeping your pencils sharp. 

Listed below are the top 5 recommendations for the best sharpeners for colored pencils:

  • Staedtler Metal Sharpeners: Featuring dual sharpening holes (8.2 mm and 10.2 mm) and durable all-metal construction, this sharpener offers versatility for artists. Lacking child safety measures and a small size requiring frequent disposal of shavings may impact user experience.
  • Staedtler Pencil Sharpener: Known for sharp blades, affordability, and a child-friendly design, this sharpener is favored. Yet, the single chamber limits tip size options, potentially affecting its appeal to advanced artists.
  • Bostitch Electric Pencil Sharpener: Recognized for removable blades, a soundproof design, and six chambers accommodating diverse pencil shapes, this electric sharpener caters to varied user needs. A comparatively higher price point and electric operation may influence user preferences.
  • Maped Shaker 2 Hole Pencil Sharpener: Standing out for its economical pricing, durable metal build, and versatility with various coloring mediums, this sharpener is not recommended for children due to sharp blades. It offers fewer features compared to higher-priced alternatives.
  • The Duet Manual and Battery Pencil Sharpener: Offering adjustable tip sizes at an affordable rate, this sharpener serves both studio and outdoor use. User reports indicate occasional lagging in battery mode, and manual tuning demands attention during use.

Here is the list of the 10 best sharpeners for colored pencils that you can use to achieve a sharp, precise point for your artwork.

1. Staedtler Metal Sharpeners - Best for Dual Sharpening Holes

Staedtler is a German company that has been around for almost 200 years now. It is one of the most respected brands when it comes to stationery supplies. 

And we have metal sharpeners, each with dual sharpening holes to serve two purposes. If you want a pointy tip on your colored pencil, use the 8.2 mm hole, while if you’re planning to draw wider lines, then the 10.2 mm hole will be perfect. 

Experience

The sharpener is ideal for working with a piece where you can use your pencil for many different textures since it offers two sizes for the tip.

We love that there are two high-quality pieces within the pack, so we can take one out for plein air projects and keep one as a backup or for use at home. They can also sharpen soft oil-based pencils without breaking them in the process. 

For their use and durability, we think the price is very reasonable. It’s worth investing in a sharpener that won’t malfunction as soon as regular ones do after a certain period of usage.

However, the sharpener is not designed to be safe for children as it is fully constructed from metal and there are no outer plastic covers to prevent possible cuts. It is also very small so we don’t suggest giving it to younger kids. 

And since the pencils don’t come with a shell, you must have a trash can by your side all the time to prevent creating a mess. 

Nonetheless, the sharpener is great for those who are in search of quality and reliability since it has already withstood the test of time. 

Dimensions: 4" x 3" x 0.5" | Weight: 0.11 lb | Material: Metal | Operation: Hand-Operated

2. STAEDTLER Pencil Sharpener - Best for Kids & Portability

Here is another sharpener from Staedtler. This one comes in a very simple, yet attractive design which also happens to be child-friendly and portable. 

It’s also one of the cheapest sharpeners on the list, but that doesn’t compromise its functionality. 

Experience

Those who are starting out with colored pencils as a coloring medium will find this sharpener very handy and suitable to carry around. 

We personally love that a high-quality sharpener from a renowned name such as this comes at a very reasonable price. Its sharp blades allow for clean and pointy tips. 

You can use it for both graphite and colored pencils. But the reason we included it on this list is that it takes good care of your colored pencils by keeping them fine and pointy at all times.

While the quality is good, the only limitation is it does not have dual holes for sharpening. For advanced artists, this might not be preferable when working with more than one tip size. 

However, it’s a perfect sharpener to carry around for outdoor drawings since it has a secured plastic cover to hold the shavings inside. It’s also a good pick for kids since the cover hides away the sharp blade.

So, if you want a good, reasonably-priced sharpener for kids, give this one a try. It also comes in different colors! 

Dimensions: 1.5" x 1.5" x 2" | Weight: 0.04 lb | Material: Metal | Operation: Hand-Operated

3. Bostitch Electric Pencil Sharpener - Best Multi-Functional Sharpener

Bostitch is a name that has won the Teachers Choice Award of 2023. 

The sharpener is made to meet both classroom and industrial requirements. It can be used for graphite pencils, but it works excellently with colored pencils too. 

It has a blade that can easily be removed while using in case the oil/wax binder gets stuck inside and prevents the pencil from sharpening. 

Experience

Many artists love this sharpener for many reasons. First of all, unlike other sharpeners, the blade on this electric sharpener can be removed for easy cleaning if the wax ever gets clogged inside while sharpening colored pencils. 

On top of that, the blade is very sharp and is always able to produce pointy tips in every single use without damaging the outer wood casing as cheap sharpeners do.

We love the design as it is sturdy and compact. It adds to the overall high-quality performance. Moreover, it is also soundproof which even makes it more desirable. Unlike sharpeners from older days, this one creates very little sound which eliminates distractions. 

Besides its removable blades, the sharpener has 6 chambers meant for different pencil shapes and tip sizes. So if you’re using round or triangular-shaped pencils, this is the perfect pick.

And if you are looking for a more reliable or long-lasting option, this one would be a pretty good investment.

Although the price of this sharpener is much higher than that of other more popular sharpeners from the same brand, we are very satisfied with the quality and multiple features it offers.

All in all, we recommend investing in this sharpener as it lasts long and you can buy separate replacement blades. Moreover, it can be used by both adults and children.

Dimensions: 10.63" x 6.13" x 9" | Weight: 4.03 lbs | Material: Metal | Operation: Electrically-Operated

4. Maped Shaker 2 Hole Pencil Sharpener - Best Budget Option

There are a lot of reasons to love this sharpener from Maped. 

One of the main reasons is because of its very low price for only $1.79 for a double chamber and $0.79 for a single chamber. 

We included this one on our list solely because it comes at an inexpensive price, but still performs as other high-end sharpeners do. 

Experience

If you’re planning to buy a sharpener that will last for a very long time, we recommend the Maped Hand-Held Sharpener. Not only is it cheap but it is also highly durable.

This metal sharpener is suitable for professionals and it has a rating of 4.8 on the Blick art supplies website. All of this is a reason for its multiple features. 

It has a perfect grip on both of its sides for precise pencil sharpening. The double-chambered unit has one large hole which can be used for graphite pencils, colored pencils, and even pastels or charcoal. And it works incredibly well with all of them. 

Because it accepts more than one coloring medium, artists find this sharpener to be more convenient than other ridiculously priced high-end units out there that only serve one purpose. Rather than buying multiple sharpeners to meet different requirements, this one already serves 4 coloring mediums. 

We can say that the only setback is that it is not suitable for kids even though it comes at a very cheap price. Because it also has sharp blades, you’ll also want to store it in a place where kids won’t find it. 

But other than that, this sharpener is one of the cheapest options that comes with amazing features you’ll find in the market.

Dimensions: 10.63" x 6.13" x 9" | Weight: 4.03 lbs | Material: Metal | Operation: Electrically-Operated

5. The Duet Manual and Battery Pencil Sharpener - Best for Adjustable Tip Size

We have here another electric pencil sharpener. Duet has come up with this electric pencil sharpener which operates on two batteries and has manual settings. 

The innovative idea by Duet for this sharpener allows users to have control over the size of the pencil tip by tuning it. 

Experience

We love how colored pencils can be sharpened effortlessly. The only time you need to pay undivided attention to it is when you have to choose a tip size for your pencil, right before the sharpening is complete.

It also falls under the inexpensive sharpeners on this list which is around $7 and may be highly favored by users on a tight budget. It has most of the features one would look for in an electric pencil sharpener. Moreover, it is perfect to take along for outdoor projects. So, investing in it will be a pretty good idea. 

However, some users reported that when keeping it on battery mode, it has a tendency to lag or stop. Other than that, the manual option works pretty well. 

For what it’s worth, this will be a good pick for those who are looking forward to having control over the pencil tip.

Dimensions: 3" x 3" x 3" | Weight: 0.23 lb | Material: Plastic, Metal | Operation: Hand & Battery-Operated

6. Prismacolor Premier Pencil Sharpener, 2-pack

Prismacolor is a brand name that is respected for its high-quality pencils that come at affordable prices. For this reason, they came up with a sharpener that works well with their colored pencils, but we don’t doubt it is excellent for other colored pencils too. 

Experience

If you have been around the world of colored pencils for some time, you’ll know Prismacolor is a very trusted brand. So, when they introduced the colored pencil sharpener, we knew it was going to be nothing short of a good-quality product. 

And as we expected, their sharpener performs very much like the other high-end ones. It has a large casing which allows us to store the shavings when working outdoors. There are also two chambers - one for a wider tip and another for a finer tip. 

One thing to keep in mind is that this sharpener is only meant for colored pencils. Although it might work well for graphite pencils too, we recommend sticking only to the intended purpose as the blade is not replaceable. 

As we have seen from many online reviews, users said the sharpener is more than enough for those who daily work with colored pencils. They found that the price is worth its performance.

If you always use Prismacolor colored pencils, this would be the perfect sharpener for all your projects. But we also urge you to try it for other colored pencils as well since it has everything you might be expecting from a colored pencil sharpener.

Dimensions: 3" x 6.1" x 0.2" | Weight: 0.2 lb | Material: Stainless Steel | Operation: Battery-Operated

7. X-ACTO Electric Sharpener

X-ACTO is a brand known for producing some of the sharpest knives and razors universally. And now, they introduced this electric sharpener for multipurpose uses. 

It can be used for colored and graphite pencils. The blade is incredibly sharp which allows users to cut pencils easily. 

Experience

We love that this sharpener keeps our pencils pointy all the time until they become too short to use. Besides graphite and colored pencils, it can also be used for either soft or hard leads and triangular pencils. Therefore, this increases its versatility. 

Like most of the options we mentioned before, this one is suitable for children and adults to use, as well as for taking outdoors. 

However, what sets it apart from the rest is that it comes with a warranty of 10 years. This hints that the sharpener is of very high quality. We take this as an opportunity to get the most performance from the sharpener. Rest assured, it is incredibly durable.

Another feature we must include is that the blades can be removed for cleaning. In case we lose them, there are replacement blades that are available online. 

Expect to find the blades dull after a long while of use which means there is a need to change them.  

Besides artists, professionals who are looking for a heavy-duty sharpener to carry to their work site found this sharpener very handy. 

Dimensions: 7" x 3.13" x 4.5" | Weight: 0.87 lb | Material: Plastic, Metal | Operation: Electrically-Operated

8. Mobius & Ruppert Brass Round Double Hole Sharpener

In our review of the Alvin Brass Bullet Pencil Sharpener, we mentioned that the blade it utilizes is from this particular brand. 

Mobius & Ruppert is a company making stationery that has been around for more than a hundred years now. All of the products are known for their premium quality, and that’s the same case with this sharpener. 

Experience

As the name suggests, the Brass Round Double Hole Sharpener has double chambers - for wide and fine sharpening. It comes at a very affordable price, so students as well as artists with a restricted budget can use it. 

The round body is made entirely of brass. It is one of the smallest sharpeners on our list. Although its shape is round, we can still get a good grip for smooth sharpening, all thanks to the side grooves.

The blades on this sharpener can be removed as well as replaced with new ones which you can find on any online stationery-selling platform.

Many artists who have used this sharpener for a while now said that it is durable and still functions pretty well.

Since it is an open-blade sharpener, it means that it is not designed to have a casing. Therefore, its usage is restricted only to adults, and not children. 

Dimensions: 3.9" x 2.7" x 0.7" | Weight: N/A | Material: Brass | Operation: Hand-Operated

9. Dahle 155 Professional Pencil Sharpener

The Dahle Professional Pencil Sharpener is used for sharpening a variety of coloring mediums such as watercolor pencils, pastels, colored pencils, and charcoal. 

One important feature about it is that it has the looks of a crank sharpener but functions as a modern one. 

Experience

This sharpener is one of the best that we have reviewed. 

What we truly love about it is that it allows us to choose the right tip size simply by tuning the adjustment lever. Moreover, it contains a chamber opening that is large enough for any pencil size to fit inside. It has a small casing to save unwanted shavings. 

The benefit you’ll get from manually tuning the tip is if the art piece requires patches and lines of different sizes, which the sharpener can easily provide. You will also have more control over the outcome of the piece. 

We also like that it is inexpensive so that everybody can have access to it. We can use it both in the studio or outdoors too. 

One drawback is that, unlike automatic or even hand-held sharpeners, you need to actually turn the handle for sharpening, and this requires more time and effort. 

But apart from that, this would be a good pick for your studio or if you want an accurate tip size.

Dimensions: 3.9" x 2.7" x 0.7" | Weight: N/A | Material: Brass | Operation: Hand-Operated

10. Derwent Super Point Manual Helical Pencil Sharpener

Another manually operated crank sharpener is the Derwent Super Point Manual Helical Pencil sharpener. It can be used for pencils of different sizes. 

Its features include having helical blades to ensure long-point sharpening and many more. 

Experience

We love this sharpener because of the multiple features it includes. It is ideal for pencils with a size that reaches up to 8mm.  

First of all, the secured metal casing is one feature that assures us that the sharpener will last for a long time.

Although you have to turn the lever, it automatically stops when the cutting process is done. The sharpener will slack and that’s when you know it’s ready. There is no need to hold the sharpener with your hand since it comes with a clamp that can be attached to a desk or work table.

The blades are easily reachable for cleaning since all you have to do is pull out the reservoir tray.

This is a professional-grade sharpener, hence, it falls under the expensive options on this list. It may not be suitable if you’re either on a tight budget or just looking to sharpen your colored pencils with a cheaper alternative. 

Overall, the sharpener produces amazing extra long and extra pointy pencils. 

Dimensions: 5.31" x 2.95" x 4.92" | Weight: 1.1 lbs | Material: Metal | Operation: Hand-Operated

What Is the Best Sharpener for Colored Pencils?

This table offers a concise overview of essential attributes for various pencil sharpeners, detailing dimensions (in inches), weight (in pounds), number of chambers, operation mode, and material composition.

Product Dimensions Weight No. of Chambers Operation Material
Staedtler Metal Sharpeners 4" x 3" x 0.5" 0.11 lb 2 Hand-Operated Metal
STAEDTLER Pencil Sharpener 1.5" x 1.5" x 2" 0.04 lb 1 Hand-Operated Metal
Bostitch Pencil Sharpener ‎10.63" x 6.13" x 9" ‎4.03 lbs 6 Electrically-Operated Metal
Maped Shaker Pencil Sharpener ‎1.02" x 4.92" x 4.92" 0.05 lb 2 or 1 Hand-Operated Plastic, Metal
The Duet Pencil Sharpener ‎3" x 3" x 3" 0.23 lb 1 Hand & Battery-Operated Plastic, Metal
Prismacolor Pencil Sharpener ‎3" x 6.1" x 0.2" 0.2 lb 2 Battery-Operated Stainless Steel
X-ACTO Electric Sharpener ‎7" x 3.13" x 4.5" 0.87 lb 1 Electrically-Operated Plastic, Metal
Mobius & Ruppert Sharpener 3.9" x 2.7" x 0.7" N/A 2 Hand-Operated Brass
Dahle 155 Pencil Sharpener 2.25" x 3.5 "x 3.75" 0.55 lb 1 Hand-Operated Stainless Steel, Plastic
Derwent Pencil Sharpener ‎5.31" x 2.95" x 4.92" ‎1.1 lbs 1 Hand-Operated Metal

Can I use a regular pencil sharpener for colored pencils?

Although it is possible to use a regular sharpener, it is preferable to use a sharpener designed for colored pencils. Colored pencil leads are generally softer than graphite, and a specialized sharpener will provide better results and prevent breakage.

What types of sharpeners are best suited for colored pencils?

The best sharpeners for colored pencils include manual, electric, and battery-powered options. Look for sharpeners with high-quality blades and sharpness adjustment features to better protect the delicate leads of the colored pencils.

How do I choose the right sharpener for my colored pencils?

To choose the right sharpener for your colored pencils, consider the sharpener’s compatibility with the pencil diameter, the quality of the blades, and adjustable sharpness. It can also be helpful to read product reviews and consult fellow artists for tips and recommendations.

Do I need a separate sharpener for each color?

No, it’s not necessary to have a separate sharpener for each color. You can use the same sharpener for multiple colors; just make sure to clean it periodically to avoid mixing colors.

How often should I sharpen my colored pencils?

The frequency of sharpening depends on your usage and desired level of precision. Frequent sharpening helps maintain a fine tip, but over-sharpening can waste the colored lead. It’s essential to find a balance between performance and pencil life.

How do I prevent lead breakage while using a sharpener?

To prevent breakage, use a gentle grip, rotate the pencil slowly, and avoid excessive pressure. Make sure the sharpener is clean and free of debris. High-quality sharpeners with adjustable sharpness also help to prevent lead breakage.

How do I clean and maintain my colored pencil sharpener?

Regularly clean your sharpener to remove debris and prevent lead/color mixing. Use a small brush, toothpick, or pipe cleaner to remove lead remnants. Always handle the sharpener carefully, and replace the blades when they become dull.

As we've explored various sharpeners for colored pencils, it's apparent that the right sharpener can make a significant difference in the quality and precision of your artwork.

Having analyzed the top 10 best sharpeners on the market, we've narrowed down our expert recommendations to the following top three options:

For those who appreciate quality and durability, the Staedtler Metal Sharpeners with their dual sharpening holes are an ideal option. Providing two different tip sizes and withstanding the test of time, it's a reliable investment for artists who want a versatile, long-lasting sharpener.

The STAEDTLER Pencil Sharpener, on the other hand, is a good option for kids and artists on the go. With its child-friendly design, sharp blade performance, and reasonable price, this might be just the sharpener you're looking for.

Lastly, the Bostitch Electric Pencil Sharpener is the right choice for artists seeking a multi-functional sharpener. Its removable blades, ability to accommodate various pencil shapes and tip sizes, and wide range of use make it an excellent investment.

No matter which one you choose, you'll be equipping yourself with the right tool for creating exceptional artwork with vivid, precise colors. Happy coloring!

We'd like to take you through the best utility sinks of 2023 to help make the right selection for your daily chores at home.  Utility sinks are usually located in a specific area to ease your tasks and increase your efficiency. You can put a nice-looking tub in the laundry room to wash clothes, or in the garden to clean tools. 

You can improvise and choose a utility sink with cabinets that can accommodate all your items and accessories. Utility sinks can be equally helpful in washing and storing any household equipment. 

Moreover, there are various types of utility sinks that come completely assembled to suit your needs. What’s more, they can be customized to help improve washing and cleaning.

Depending on what you are looking for, we have put together a list of top-quality utility sinks to help you choose the best of the lot available today.

Listed below are the top 5 recommendations for the best utility sinks and laundry sinks:

  • Black Utility Sink Laundry Tub: I was impressed by this sink's classic style and durable features, including its rust-proof and stain-resistant attributes. One thing to consider is that certain components are made from low-grade plastic, which might impact its overall longevity.
  • Vetta ‎040 JS6507GRY Utility Sink: This sink stands out with its high-quality stain resistance and high arc pull-down faucet. For enhanced stability, it might need additional support from wall or floor mounting.
  • JS Jackson Supplies 040 JS6502BLK Utility Sink: I admired the customizable high arc faucet in this sink. The slope design has the potential to create challenges with drainage.
  • TRINITY THA-0307 Utility Sink: The easy installation process of the swiveling faucet and adjustable legs are major highlights of this sink. One thing to keep in mind is the large size, which might not be suitable for smaller spaces.
  • Kraus KHU24L Utility Sink: While the sleek design and noise-minimizing technology are great features, the angle of the base might prove difficult with drainage.

What Is a Utility Sink?

A utility sink is a type of sink used for various utility tasks as the name suggests. It is usually larger than a standard bathroom sink and can be made from different materials such as ceramic, porcelain, marble, stainless steel, and even cast iron. They are usually installed as drop-in sinks which means they are placed in an opening cut into the countertop or cabinet.

This allows for easy installation and great flexibility around the cabinet or counter in which they are placed. Utility sinks are commonly used in laundry rooms for washing clothes, cleaning large items such as pots and pans, pet bathing and grooming, and general cleaning. For these uses, stainless steel sinks are often chosen as they are highly durable and resistant to scratches while also being easy to clean.

Are you looking for the best utility sink? From stainless steel to cast iron, you'll find the perfect sink for your laundry room, basement, garage, or outdoor workspace. Here is the list of the 10 Best Utility Sinks to help you keep your household clean and clutter-free!

1. Black Utility Sink Laundry Tub - Best for Classic Styling

This sleek utility tub comes with a chrome faucet that fits easily into your workshop, laundry room, washroom, or garage area. The laundry tub has a classic look and is also black in color, which adds style to the look of the room where it is installed.

The best part about this utility sink is that it is both rust-proof and stain-resistant. That helps take care of complex and cumbersome jobs that could otherwise cause damage to the sink. This laundry sink is quite rugged and can help with almost all cleaning requirements at home.

Also, the drain of the sink is molded into the tub for easy drainage. The sink has a standalone base that can be fixed to the floor using pre-cut holes. You will find these holes just beneath the leg-levelers.

The best part is, that it is easy to install this sink in the house all by yourself. There is a step-by-step manual available, which is easy to follow. The levelers can be adjusted to sit the whole tub perfectly on rough or uneven surfaces and provide stability.

The tubs are freestanding stations that help in washing and cleaning efficiently.

Some parts of the tub are made of plastic. For example, the legs seem too thin for the entire apparatus to seem sturdy. Even though the sink has many valuable features for your home, this one problem might keep you from buying the sink immediately.

Dimensions (inches): 23.3 x 22.88 x 41.75 | Material: Plastic, Metal | Color: Black | Faucet Included: Yes | Weight (lbs): 20

2. Vetta ‎040 JS6507GRY Utility Sink - Best for Stain Resistance

The advantage of having this sink is that it has a faucet with a high arc. That gives you the option of washing large things in the tub. The faucet can also be pulled down for spraying water to remove stubborn dirt. Along with that, drainage equipment and supply lines accompany the set for complete installation.

The washbasin is large and can accommodate a lot of items. The faucet not only gives more room for cleaning oversized things, but it also helps in making the washing process easy and comfortable. 

Apart from the high arc, the faucet in this utility sink has both stream and spray functions. It can also be pulled down to blast a stream of water on stubborn dirt and stains. The pull-down function gives the flexibility to maneuver the faucet as you want. 

Moreover, the entire set comes with all the accessories required to fix the sink in place at home. There is an instruction guide and customer support is also available for you to reach out to if there is a problem with the installation.

The best part is, that you would not have to buy any accessories apart from the set with this Vetta utility sink providing everything for a clean home!

The sink is sturdy and can also stand alone. But without fixing it to the floor, or the room's wall, it tends to flex. Some flex is perhaps alright in a sink; the trouble is, this product seems to flex a lot without the necessary stability of a floor or wall mount.

Dimensions (inches): 23 x 22.88 x 49.75 | Material: Acrylic | Color: Gray | Faucet Included: Yes | Weight (lbs): 20

3. JS Jackson Supplies 040 JS6502BLK Utility Sink - Best for High Arc Faucet

The sink is perfect for washing and cleaning all oversized and bulky items at home. The metal legs are sturdy and have a smooth black finish. The legs keep the tub stable even when it is full of water. The utility sink is available in 4 attractive colors.

If you are enthusiastic about customizing a utility sink, this JS Jackson is perfect for you. The tub comes with plenty of holes and a slop sink without an attached faucet. These holes can be used to customize the sink's abilities according to the kind of utility room that has to be set up.

So, add a soap dispenser, a side spray, and many other accessories to the sink you like most for the utility room. The tub has several preformed holes that can accommodate any faucet you choose in order to customize the utility sink.

To install the faucet, all you have to do is punch out a 1" hole in diameter. There are seven preformed holes available in this set. Any 4" or 8" faucet can fit into these preformed holes. In case you have a larger or more widespread faucet, just drill holes into the existing options.

The tub is large and spacious, but the slope of the design is such that it could cause water retention. The pitch of the sink is something to watch out for. You could get this fixed by a professional if the problem occurs while washing and cleaning.

Dimensions (inches): 23.5 x 22.87 x 33.75 | Material: Plastic | Color: Black | Faucet Included: No | Weight (lbs): 31

4. TRINITY THA-0307 Utility Sink - Best for Customization

This sink has a stainless steel tub with a large basin. It has a single-handle chrome faucet that includes hoses. The drain is simple without any inner basket. The entire design is sleek and enhances the room's look - be it a mudroom, laundry, or garage.

The quality of the stainless steel used for the body of this utility sink is high-grade. That ensures that the sink lasts long at home, as the wear and tear are quite slow due to the high-grade material.

Also, the sink is easy to clean and maintain. The body is sturdy and looks good in any room of your house. In fact, it looks as professional as any of the sinks usually found in a cafeteria or a restaurant.

The installation is fairly simple as well. You can do it all by yourself, or get expert help to fix the sink properly in any room. It also offers complete value for money as it combines the functions of a utility sink with great design. The features and look of this sink make it one of the best utility gadgets for a home!

The utility sink is bigger than the usual utility sink. The disadvantage is that it can occupy a large part of the room which might make your home feel congested and uncomfortable. This product has to suit the dimensions of your room to be worth your while.

Dimensions (inches): 24 x 21.53 x 49.2 | Material: Stainless Steel | Color: Stainless | Faucet Included: Yes | Weight (lbs): 40.9

5. Kraus KHU24L Utility Sink - Best for Sleek Design

The KHU24L is one of the largest kitchen sinks that can be found in the utility sink range. It is excellent for washing oversized objects and is built to support all kinds of washing and cleaning. 

So, put it in a greenhouse, or workshop today to wash up all the big items!

It is a unique home utility sink that has been inspired by professional sinks used in restaurant kitchens. The designs are made to suit the modern home, so you will surely be happy when you notice those square-shaped designs.

The body of the sink is resistant to denting, as it is made of T304 stainless steel. It also has an 18-gauge thickness. These features aid both the strength and longevity of the utility sink. It has NoiseDefend soundproofing technology that lets you enjoy a quiet time while washing and cleaning.

Also, the utility sink is long-lasting with corrosion and rust-resistant features. The resilience of the sink makes it a handy tool to clean and wash those oversized items at home that could be difficult to wash otherwise. 

Lastly, the sink's finish is satin smooth; it can easily fit into your home and match the interiors flawlessly. 

You might notice that water does not go entirely down the drain while washing utensils, clothes, etc. The water may not flush down 100% after cleaning because of the angle of the base of the sink. You could get a professional to fix the problem if this occurs.

Dimensions (inches): 18.5 x 24 x 12.25 | Material: Stainless Steel | Color: Stainless | Faucet Included: No | Weight (lbs): 17.71

6. Mustee 14CP Utility Sink

The tub is made of polypropylene and can stand on its own. In other words, it is a freestanding tub that can be mounted on the floor. The 14CP also has a great look and sturdy body that complements your house both in terms of style and stability.

A simple utility sink can be very handy for washing and cleaning which is a daily requirement in all households. The 14CP utility sink is excellent for light and everyday jobs at home.

What's more, the sink can be put outside in the yard and used for multiple functions. For example, clothes can be washed just near the clothesline on a bright, sunny day. The small yard tools can be cleaned up right after use. All the more, the installation in the yard can be done quite quickly without any trouble. 

So, for the yard installation, all you need to do is buy a simple adapter that would attach the hose to the utility tub. Let the drain run out into a tree hole or a large plant, and you are ready to wash the dirt off all your tools, utensils, and equipment!

The leg levers are an essential part of the sink that stabilizes it in the utility room. However, be cautious about the leg levelers that come with this setup. They do not support the weight of the entire sink for long-term use sometimes. Check the levelers before choosing this sink. 

Dimensions (inches): 23.5 x 25.5 x 15.5 | Material: Polypropylene | Color: White | Faucet Included: Yes | Weight (lbs): 15.8

7. Simpli Home, Ltd. AXCLDYHEN-SS Utility Sink

The utility sink is constructed with strong materials such as stainless steel and PB MDF. It has a high-arc faucet that can swivel easily. There is also a cabinet beneath the sink with two Shaker-style doors. The cabinet gives plenty of room for storing things in the utility room.

The cabinet and the Shaker-style doors are sturdy and have a simple yet unique design. The sink can look good in any utility room at home. Just place it where your washing and cleaning jobs need to be done.

Also, the storage area of the cabinets is quite big; it can accommodate a lot of things related to the chores that you do at home. For example, the white cabinet can store laundry, washed clothes, soaps, cleaning agents, detergents, etc., all in one place for your convenience.

Moreover, the cabinet is useful and decorative, as it can tuck away the small things you need while enhancing the house's overall look. The good news is that the cabinet and the sink combo are pretty easy to install by yourself.

Lastly, the faucet has a toggle switch that can help turn either stream or spray functions on as per your need.

The sink is prone to denting if a heavy object is put in it or accidentally dropped in, without you meaning to do so. Otherwise, you can freely wash any lightweight thing that needs cleaning and store it away later in the cabinet. Maintain proper precautions while using this gadget. 

Dimensions (inches): 19.7 x 23.6 x 52 | Material: Stainless Steel | Color: White | Faucet Included: Yes | Weight (lbs): 60.5

8. Transolid TC-2420-WC Utility Sink

The sink and cabinet combo have a faucet with a flexible neck. The cabinet is pre-assembled which helps save time during installation. It is made of brushed nickel and Shaker-style doors that enhance its look. It is good for everyday use and decor with ample storage space and an excellent finish.

The sink is made of 19 gauge stainless steel and serves as a powerful agent in cleaning and washing at home. It is handmade and features an integral backsplash as well. The sink also has a center drain location and a pre-drilled faucet hole. There is a matching strainer for your convenience at all times.

Also, the sink bowl is large and spacious, with a 13-gallon water capacity. Fix it in the laundry room or the garage and find the perfect utility for this new Transolid sink. The faucet has a flexible neck covered with white silicone, which looks good with the entire product.

You would love the garden hose adapter that comes with the faucet. The dual-function spray head with a 1.8 GPM flow rate and the ceramic disc cartridge are impressive additions. All these parts and features make this faucet superior in quality and design.

The utility sink is excellent if you have lightweight things to wash. The features and functions of the sink make it a good value for money. However, make sure your requirements at home are not heavier than the sink’s weight limit. Do be careful and attentive about its weight-bearing capacity.

Dimensions (inches): 19.7 x 23.6 x 34.6 | Material: Stainless Steel | Color: White | Faucet Included: Yes | Weight (lbs): 79

9. JS Jackson Supplies 040 JS6503SS Utility Sink

The 040 JS6503SS from Jackson Supplies is a rectangular-shaped tub made of metal, plastic, and ABS. It has a freestanding mode of installation. The faucet of the utility sink has metal shanks and handles and is constructed of metal overall for a sturdy and solid performance over a long duration.

Both the tub and the faucet are made of resilient and good-quality materials. That gives the tub and the faucet durability and an excellent finish. You definitely have a good buy in hand when it comes to the longevity and look of this tub.

The convenience of having this sink is that it solves all your washing and cleaning problems in one go. The high-end faucet adds far more functions and style than the good old kitchen faucet to your specific utility room!

Also, the faucet has a high arc and leaves lots of room for washing and cleaning bulky clothes and other items. The arc also helps avoid the need to maneuver the faucet to wash things, making it easier for you to focus on getting them cleaned quickly.

Finally, the sprayer can be pulled down to wash those corners and edges that are difficult to reach while washing.

The sprayer is of great utility as it washes off stubborn dirt from clothes and other items. But the sink tends to flex when the spray hits the back of the basin. That could make you uncomfortable as the product might seem fragile and make you hesitant about its durability.

Dimensions (inches): 23.5 x 22.88 x 49.75 | Material: Stainless Steel | Color: White | Faucet Included: Yes | Weight (lbs): 21.4

10. Ruvati USA RVU6100 Utility Sink

The RVU6100 is a 16-gauge premium utility sink built with stainless steel that has a modern look. The sink is perfect for mudrooms, laundry rooms, and other utility rooms. In fact, the stainless steel construction is best suited for the mudroom, but can easily adapt to different kinds of rooms.

The bowl in the utility sink is big and can accommodate large items for washing and cleaning. At 12", it can fit any big bucket, so you can even wash your boots in the sink! The rinse grid of the sink is made of stainless steel that allows water to flow freely.

Moreover, the material protects the sink bottom from getting scratched by heavy or long hours of washing. The brushed finish of the sink helps hide scratches. The body is built and finished to match standard appliances in the kitchen.

What’s more, the grooves in the drain are designed to perfection. There are four grooves in the drain at the bottom of the sink channel water that bends towards the drain. That helps in keeping the sink dry and clean.

Finally, the sink is covered in heavy SoundGUARD padding that minimizes noise while it is in use.

The stainless steel material is A-grade and can last quite a long. But the sink, unfortunately, has to be handled with care. The corners and the body are prone to bending and denting and cannot be used roughly. That means an accident might leave unwanted bumps and scratches in the body.

Dimensions (inches): 18 x 23 x 12 | Material: Stainless Steel | Color: Stainless | Faucet Included: No | Weight (lbs): 20

What Is the Best Utility Sink?

This table provides a detailed comparison of leading utility sinks, evaluating key attributes such as dimensions (in inches), material, color, faucet, and weight (in lbs).

Product Dimensions (inches) Material Color Faucet Included Weight (lbs)
Black Utility Sink Laundry Tub 23.3 x 22.88 x 41.75 Plastic, Metal Black Yes 20
Vetta ‎040 JS6507GRY Utility Sink 23 x 22.88 x 49.75 Acrylic Gray Yes 20
JS Jackson Supplies 040 JS6502BLK Utility Sink 23.5 x 22.87 x 33.75 Plastic Black No 31
TRINITY THA-0307 Utility Sink 24 x 21.53 x 49.2 Stainless Steel Stainless Yes 40.9
Kraus KHU24L Utility Sink 18.5 x 24 x 12.25 Stainless Steel Stainless No 17.71
Mustee 14CP Utility Sink 23.5 x 25.5 x 15.5 Polypropylene White Yes 15.8
Simpli Home, Ltd. AXCLDYHEN-SS Utility Sink 19.7 x 23.6 x 52 Stainless Steel White Yes 60.5
Transolid TC-2420-WC Utility Sink 19.7 x 23.6 x 34.6 Stainless Steel White Yes 79
JS Jackson Supplies 040 JS6503SS Utility Sink 23.5 x 22.88 x 49.75 Stainless Steel White Yes 21.4
Ruvati USA RVU6100 Utility Sink 18 x 23 x 12 Stainless Steel Stainless No 20

Benefits of a Utility Sink

Utility sinks are a great addition to any home, offering the perfect place to clean up after projects, a safe place to wash your pets, or more commonly: a place to take care of laundry.

These versatile sink ideas can be installed in a base cabinet, mounted on the wall, or even as a floor-mount sink, they come in all materials, shapes, and sizes. A stainless steel laundry sink is the most common sink, and the most common mounting type would be under-mount sinks, this sink setup is ideal for those who want a utility sink that looks stylish and modern.

Utility sinks are also incredibly durable and easy to maintain, making them an excellent choice for busy households. With so many benefits to choosing a utility sink, it's easy to see why they remain popular today.

It is worth noting that your home deserves to look great and a utility sink can help in that regard as well as it keeps the less-desirable day-to-day washing activities off the main sink, thus allowing you to splurge on the main bathroom sink or kitchen sink without worrying about damaging it.

It goes without saying that a dedicated space for a laundry room, a mudroom, or a wet room can also increase the value of your home overall, a feat to which utility sinks come in as well.

Buying Guide for the Best Utility Sink

It is alright to feel overwhelmed even after reading our comprehensive reviews to choose the best utility sinks for your home. Just follow the buyer's guide that we have added to this review. We realize you need important insights to pick the perfect sink that can help ease tasks at home.

A utility sink is an appliance that can last for a long time. You must always look for an option that you can use for many years, like a refrigerator or a cooking range. Luckily, many utility sinks offer not only longevity but performance, versatility, as well a finish to match home décor.

You will not even need to change the look of your home when you decide to buy a sink for the chores that are frequently performed at home. These latest sinks in our review will help you in quick and easy decision-making to set up a utility room.

Also, we have factored in the latest technology and features of the best utility sink in the market. Just consider the following characteristics before homing in on the sink you want to buy.

  1. Durability

Always check for durable material in the main parts of the utility sink to ensure you are getting the best deal. For example, in a sink that offers a tub, adjustable feet, legs, cabinets, a faucet, etc., each part should guarantee the quality of the materials that are used.

So, if the base materials of the utility sink are durable, you stand a better chance of investing in a superior sink that can last you for a long time, utility sinks are made in all materials, and cast iron utility sinks can be as durable as plastic ones if the use case is correct, a plastic sink is a great option for temporary spaces or places in which only light use cases are carried out, such as washing light textiles.

That should keep you on top of your buying options.

  1. Look and Finish

There are many utility sinks or laundry sinks that are popular for their design and finish. Sellers and manufacturers alike usually share the shapes of the sinks, or the color, for you to be able to match a sink to the décor of your home.

In fact, there are quite a few sellers who assure that the look and finish of their product blend in with the style of your home. Look out for words like 'modern,' 'sleek,' 'stylish,' and 'high-end' to add to the list of advantages of the utility sink you are planning to buy.

Once that is done, you are ready to go!

  1. Performance

Evaluate the faucet functions, the sink, drainage, etc., to see how they compare to other utility sinks in the reviews. Some utility sinks may have faucets with multiple functions that are useful for your utility room.

Or, a drain might be designed to soak in water and dirt better than others. It might be a good idea to assess what you require most for the utility room and then come to your decision.

What are the positives of owning a utility sink?

Owning a utility sink brings numerous benefits such as added convenience and versatility, facilitating a gamut of tasks like hand–washing, laundry, and diverse cleaning activities.

How is a laundry sink distinct from a utility sink?

Distinctness between a laundry and utility sink originates from size and function. Laundry sinks tend to be smaller and cater to laundry-specific chores like hand-washing sensitive garments or soaking items.

Do laundry rooms necessitate the inclusion of a utility sink?

Laundry rooms don't necessarily mandate a utility sink, but having one can augment the functionality for specific, often messy, tasks.

Which sink type stands out as an optimal choice for a utility room?

For a utility room, the ideal sink type would be one that guarantees longevity and ease of maintenance. Stainless steel or porcelain sinks are commonly chosen for their resilience and easy-to-clean nature.

What dimensions would be apt for a laundry room sink?

Typical laundry room sinks measure between 18 to 24 inches in width, with a minimum depth of around 8.5 inches to ensure efficient water drainage.

Can one build a cabinet surrounding a floor-mounted sink?

Absolutely, constructing a cabinet around a floor-mounted sink is entirely feasible.

What styles are on offer when choosing a utility sink?

Utility sinks are available in a variety of styles encompassing drop-in, under-mount, wall-mounted, and pedestal designs.

Oil pastels are one of the easiest mediums to work with since they don’t require extra work to get started. 

If we think about paint mediums that are great for a number of surfaces, oil pastels are one of them. With good preparation on a fine platform, these mediums can give any surface a colorful and rich appealing look regardless you are using canvas or other heavy-weight papers. And in the case of paper surfaces, oil pastels give out exceptional results even though it depends on the type and quality of the paper. 

Finding the best paper surface for oil pastels artwork can be tricky especially when you’re a beginner and not certain which one will best meet your expectations. There are many good brands out there that offer a wide range of papers for oil paints. Speaking of which, we have a list of 9 paper surfaces that we personally find to be the best in the market. 

Listed below are the best papers for oil pastels:

  • Strathmore Assorted Pastel Paper Pad: The Strathmore pastel paper has an 80 lb paper weight, acid-free composition, and different size options. Its light surface texture is less capable of enabling thick layers of oil pastels compared to Faber-Castell's smoother texture.
  • Faber-Castell Black Oil Paper Pad: A paper that shines with a unique black canvas that boasts a 74 lb paper weight and a smooth texture, excellent for bringing out bright colors. The tooth is very shallow, unlike the Canson Mi-Tientes, limiting the creation of effects and textures.
  • U.S. Art Supply's Premium Pastel Paper Pad: The U.S. Art Supply pastel paper pad has a paper weight of 80 lb and offers a medium texture. Its requirement for fixatives for long-term paint preservation is a weak point compared to other options.
  • Canson Mi-Teintes Pad for Pastels: The Canson Mi-Tientes is a pastel paper with a 98 lb weight that excels in versatility, catering to both dry and wet medium artists. It's more expensive than most other options.
  • Hahnemuhle Bugra Oil Pastel Paper: Hahnemuhle Bugra oil pastel paper is crafted in Germany. With an 88 lb weight, it's notable for its high lightfastness and acid-free features. It needs fixatives like the U.S. Art Supply pastel paper for paint durability, which is a drawback.

1. Strathmore Assorted Pastel Paper Pad - Best for Budget-friendly Versatility

Strathmore is a brand that has been around for 100 years and above and is very popular among students. It would be a rare case if any dedicated art student has not heard of the brand before. Their products are available in most art stores. 

The reason they are widely used by students and art schools is the price of their products - and it’s no exception with the Assorted Pastel Paper Pad as well. 

Experience

One might think that because the price is reduced, the quality is also compromised. No doubt, it would drop by a certain extent since the price is meant to be affordable for students. But the fact stands that these pastels still produce amazing pieces. 

We find the availability of these pastel pads in almost every local art store very convenient. 

First of all, it saves the artist a lot of time from hunting for decent papers all over, especially if it’s someone with a tight schedule. 

Secondly, we don’t personally prefer to buy art supplies online because then we get to inspect the products firsthand before purchasing unless, of course, the items are not available anywhere else besides online. 

This is because sometimes the products you expect are nowhere near the real ones. So, we find the Strathmore pastel pads to be very useful for artists with similar preferences. 

Besides the availability, these pads are also wallet-friendly and great for artists who like to try out papers with other colors for their artwork. The colors of the papers inside this pad are medium brown, green, blue, pink, cream, and white. 

The feature we love most about paper pads is their versatility. Although they work wonders with oil pastels, they are also great for other mediums such as soft pastels, chalk pastels, and even crayons. 

Besides that, they can take some liquid paints too except for heavy watercolor projects since these papers are more on the lightweight side. 

They are also available in three different sizes, which leaves us with more options to choose from. 

But given these are light paper pads, we find there is only a little amount of tooth. Nonetheless, there are many artists who prefer light teeth when working with a few layers of oil pastels. 

All in all, the Strathmore 400 Series pastel papers are great for archival purposes because they are acid-free. 

Paper Weight: 80 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches, 11 x 14 inches, 18 x 24 inches

2. Faber-Castell Black Oil Paper Pad - Best for Highlighting Bright Colors

In the world of art, any form of creativity is always welcomed. And today we have the Faber-Castell Black Paper Pad which as the name suggests, is black in color. 

This may not seem like the traditional paper one would look for but with the thought of getting totally different results, you might just love the idea of having this in your collection of oil pastel surfaces. 

Experience

First off, this is perfect for all those bright colors we’ve always kept aside for a long time. The black background just enhances those shades which would normally go unnoticed on regular white paper. 

Although it totally depends on your preferred techniques, this truly brings out the unique appeal which you don’t get with bright-colored papers. 

We also noticed that this paper is quite versatile with other mediums besides pastels because of its thickness and color itself. Media such as crayons, gel sticks, and metallic pencils can be used on this surface. Even when it comes to papers for crafts, this also makes a great pick for fancy DIY projects. 

We would recommend keeping liquid mediums away from them as much as possible. Since they are meant for oil pastels, it is not expected that they can’t take any kind of liquid paint. However, through research and experiments, we found these papers can take acrylic paints given that they are not too watery. 

But overall, we like that the papers are not that expensive which means they are great for students and artists who are on a budget. Not only that, but they are also ideal for young artists and children to practice on. 

Since it is a black paper pad, it is already obvious that it will not highlight dark colors as it does with bright colors. However, we can say that the only setback we found with this paper is that it has a very shallow tooth which is not ideal when working on effects and textures. 

But keeping that aside, the paper’s quality is amazing for archival purposes. 

Paper Weight: 74 lb | Texture: Smooth | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches

3. U. S. Art Supply Premium Oil Pastel Paper Pad - Best for Mixed Media Enthusiasts

Similar to Strathmore, U. S. Art Supply is a brand that is easily available mostly everywhere. From its great quality and high-performance products to its affordable prices, the brand has become very popular among students and learning artists. 

Their Premium Pastel Paper Pad in Natural Tone Colors is great for both professionals and beginners because it is easy to use and delivers good-quality artwork. 

Experience

We will first look into the natural tones of the papers. They include light beige, cream white, beige grey, and eggshell white.

We find every single color perfect for doing beautiful landscape pieces. All these colored papers make great backgrounds for such portraits. Apart from that, they also work well with other preferred concepts.

The quality of these papers is smooth, yet still, has enough thickness in terms of mixing paint mediums. They can actually accept mixed mediums in case the artist wants to try out different effects.

You can tell from the touch of the sheet how much moisture it can accept because if the paint is too runny, it can cripple and damage the paper. We would suggest having a separate page for testing the consistency if you are unsure while using mixed mediums. 

Keep in mind that liquid mediums such as acrylic paints can be used while watercolors can pose a risk to the paper. 

As we have mentioned earlier, the paper has a perfect combination of texture/tooth and smoothness which makes it easy and pleasurable to use throughout the painting.

But the papers require the use of fixatives if we plan to keep the pieces in the long run.

Overall, the sheets are very affordable and great for self-taught beginners and art students.  

Paper Weight: 80 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches

4. Canson Mi-Teintes Pad for Pastels

Being one of the popular brands that produce quality art supplies, Canson is a name that we’re sure everyone in the art world knows. 

Because they have been focusing on this line for about 450 years now, you can be sure the pastel sketchpad too is of the best quality. 

It not only serves oil pastels but markers, soft pastels, colored pencils, charcoal, and crayons as well. 

Experience

We can’t help but appreciate the versatile feature of this paper. Unlike other oil pastel papers, with this one, we can actually venture into using a wider range of mediums. Because it is made from cotton with just the right level of thickness, it also receives liquid paints such as oils and watercolors.

This helps save the artist a few bucks to purchase surfaces for each and every media they own. In fact, they can use this with almost any kind of paint medium.

Furthermore, what sets this sketchpad apart from the rest is the papers that come in delicate colors such as moonstone, buff, champagne, eggshell white, light blue, and steel gray.

In addition to its wide versatility, we can also use these colored papers for our DIY crafts which saves us time looking for some. 

From a lot of reviews and research, this paper earns a gold standard in quality and performance when working with oil pastels. 

We hardly need to rely on the paints because this paper is truly magnificent in highlighting and enhancing even the most average mediums.

With a more than enough deep tooth, the artist can manipulate the effects as much as they want with no unnecessary concerns about the pigments wearing off too soon or the binder popping up to the surface.

Working with oil pastels, we always tend to focus on layering bit by bit. And with a tooth like this, there is no problem adding multiple layers to our piece.

Coming to a very similar feature, the paper excels in providing texture as well. On one side of the sheet, we have a rough texture while on the other, a fine one.

This is an aspect that most of the other papers don’t offer. If you want to work on different surfaces every now and then, this would be a great choice since this and many other features are included.

They are also available in two different sizes which gives us a choice to pick out one that best suits our requirements. Besides, we can always cut them into our preferred sizes.

And the best part of this pad is that it contains sheets with 50 different tones so you can choose the one that is best for the artwork every time.

Finally, the papers are available for purchase both in a pad and individually. This way, if you ever run out of your favorite tone, there is no need to buy the whole pad anymore instead, you pay only for the desired one.

It would be no surprise if the price of this sketchpad costs more than most of the other pads out there given its variety of great features. However, we would recommend this if you are looking for a worthy investment.

Paper Weight: 98 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches, 12 x 16 inches, 16 x 20 inches

5. Hahnemuhle Bugra Oil Pastel Paper

Here is a paper that is crafted in Germany. 

The Hahnemuhle Bugra Pastel Paper is dual-sided and is entirely made up of alpha-cellulose. Similar to the Mi-Teintes Pad, this sheet also has one side with a rough texture and a fine one on the other. 

Although it is made of color charcoal and pastels, it also works pretty well with graphite, pencils, and other dry mediums. 

Experience

We like that these sheets are highly lightfast because most of the time, papers with poor composition face degradation as years pass by.

The good news is these papers contain pigments that resist UV light for a long period of time. Therefore, our paintings remain good as new for years to come.

Along with that, we can say these papers aim to last for a very long time because they are acid-free as well. There is no need to worry about discoloration or brittles as long as the papers are assured to have a normal pH balance.

We also find the size to be pretty much convenient for normal-sized artwork with just the right thickness to use oil pastels.

The amount of tooth and fine binder makes the process of creating effects very simple and easy. Other artists find that they have more control over the texture.

One downside would be that the surface is not able to hold the paints for long without the help of both workable and final fixatives.

All in all, we would highly recommend this for oil pastels if you’re searching for long-lasting papers.

Paper Weight: 88 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 33 x 41 inches

6. Sennelier Oil Pastel Card Pads

Sennelier is a French-based high-end brand that produces one of the best art supplies. From research, we found that many famous artists like Picasso and Van Gogh used art products by Sennelier. 

And coming to pastel papers, we know exactly the kind of quality we expect from them. 

The Sennelier Oil Pastel Card Pads is a perfect substitute for the Canson Mi-Teintes except that it’s more expensive. 

Experience

We can list down many reasons why this paper is favored by artists all over.

First of all, the sheets come in 4 different sizes to meet the normal requirements of the artist. This already provides us with more options than most papers would.

Before we move further, the pad only contains 12 sheets in white color which are too less compared to the price tag.

But keeping those aside, there are more advantages to these sheets. For instance, the pad is not glued but spiral bound which is good to preserve for future use.

With glue, there is always a chance of the chemicals or acids interfering with the quality of the paper in the long run, but that is not the case with spiral binding. Another advantage of this particular binding is that they are relatively strong.

But the best part about the pad is the glassine paper. If you have not heard of it before, it is a glossy and smooth paper sheet that is used by laying it on the artwork to prevent pigments from transferring to the immediate sheet while the work is paused.

Glassine also acts as an alternative protection layer to fixatives whose price is much higher.

To sum it up, all the paper’s features - from the spiral binding to the glassine - are made to serve the artist who loves to work and travel. Also, the papers are thick enough to resist wear and tear while hitting the road.

Paper Weight: 160 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 11.75 x 15 inches

7. Art Spectrum Colourfix Coated Pastel Paper

Art Spectrum is an Australian brand whose product quality is very similar to that of UArt, which we shall review in a minute. 

This is a sanded paper which is good for both beginners and intermediates since the price of each sheet is only $2.69. Along with that, they also provide discounts for purchasing in bulk. 

Experience

With their inexpensive price tag and high-quality sheets, we would absolutely recommend these for any artist who is looking for a steal deal.

There are 20 sheets in total, each with a different tone. Although the colors seem less than other papers we reviewed, we find that they complement any kind of desired artwork with the right application of oil pastels. And the results this pad delivers are excellent and stunning.

Since Art Spectrum uses high-quality binders, the papers have a strong grip over the oil pastels, as well as they are acid-free. We love this aspect because it is perfect for archival purposes, allowing the piece to stay fresh for years to come without any yellowing issues.

One of the most preferable features of these papers is that they are sanded in medium-coarse grit type. This is the reason why oil pastels can stay on paper for a long time without cracking.

These are available in two sizes: 9” x 12” and 5” x 27.5”. For normal pieces, these two will work out perfectly, otherwise, we would suggest looking at other brands for larger sizes.

We find that the tooth is fine and deep enough to allow the artist to manipulate the outcome as much as possible. While layering can be tough with other inferior-quality binders, these papers make the process seem simple and easy.

Most importantly, both intermediate artists and beginners love using these papers because they meet all the requirements one has while learning the art of oil pastel work. But rather than buying one sheet after another, it is better to get them in bulk quantities since the price would be lesser.

Paper Weight: 140 lb | Texture: Coarse | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches

8. UArt Premium Sanded Paper Drawing Pad

Within the period of time spent searching for the best oil pastel surfaces, we found that UArt is one of the most highly-rated companies that produce art supplies. 

Among many of their endless list of products is the Premium Sanded Paper. 

Experience

This is another sanded paper that we find perfect for oil pastel artworks because of its ability to cover all the requirements that we look for in our oil pastel surface.

But the first thing worth mentioning is that out of all the other papers we have seen, UArt offers its papers in 6 different sizes. That is more than enough options to match our basic intentions.

On top of this, every paper has unique grit options which make these papers even better when it comes to versatility. If our artworks call for a moderate or a fine grit size, we can choose any one of these papers without any hassle.

However, the only setback is that the papers come only in two colors: dark and natural. Although the natural tone will undoubtedly go with any art concept, it still won’t serve artists who like to explore other creative ideas for their pieces.

On the other hand, the dark-tone paper will be perfect when working with bright oil pastels since it serves as a perfect background.

But what most artists usually would look for in an oil paper surface is its texture or tooth. With this paper, we are not even a tad worried about the tooth since it is deep enough to let the artist work smoothly and has full control over the effects.

Therefore, if you are looking for a fine tooth that can grab the paints tightly without having to worry about them flaking or peeling off, we would recommend going for this option and not getting disappointed.

Paper Weight: 400 lb | Texture: Coarse | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches

9. Arches Watercolor 140 lb Hot Press Papers

So far, we only discussed surfaces that are made for oil pastels purposes.

But like the Arches Watercolor 140 lb Hot Press Paper, there are many surfaces out there that are not meant for this sole purpose but surprisingly fill the position very well. 

Hence, we find this paper to be highly versatile and we are sure you will too. 

Experience

As the name suggests, these are originally made for watercolor projects but we cannot deny that it works magic when it comes to oil pastels as well.

In case you’re wondering about its versatility, this paper can be used for printmaking, calligraphy, and digital printing as well. It is a multipurpose paper and it saves us from spending money.

The reason we find this perfect for oil pastels is because of so many reasons. Firstly, besides the multipurpose aspect, the papers come with the most amount of surfaces, grits, and textures on this list.

If you do not like the idea of having to look for other brands frequently in order to find the right paper size or texture, then this is the best pick we found.

Secondly, knowing that they are also acid-free ensures that our artworks will stay safe and fresh for a very long time, and not worry about the improper aging process.

Since this is not an oil pastel paper surface, we’re not surprised if it does not include all the features of oil pastels. One of them being the paper is only available in the color ‘Natural White’ which limits the artist to work with only suitable projects.

But if you want to save a decent sum of money and look for an inexpensive oil pastel as well as a multipurpose paper, we would suggest giving the Arches Watercolor 300lb Hot-Press Paper a try.

Paper Weight: 140 lb | Texture: Smooth | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches

What is the Best Paper for Oil Pastels?

If you're looking for the best papers for oil pastels, listed below is a table that compares paper weight in pounds, texture, whether it's acid-free, and available size options measured in inches.

Product Paper Weight Texture Acid-free Size Options
Strathmore Assorted Pastel Paper Pad 80 lb Medium Yes 9 x 12 inches, 11 x 14 inches, 18 x 24 inches
Faber-Castell Black Oil Paper Pad 74 lb Smooth Yes 9 x 12 inches
U. S. Art Supply Premium Oil Pastel Paper Pad 80 lb Medium Yes 9 x 12 inches
CANSON Mi-Teintes Pad for Pastels 98 lb Medium Yes 9 x 12 inches, 12 x 16 inches, 16 x 20 inches
Hahnemuhle Bugra Oil Pastel Paper 88 lb Medium Yes 33 x 41 inches
Sennelier Oil Pastel Card Pads 160 lb Medium Yes 11.75 x 15 inches
Art Spectrum Colourfix Coated Pastel Paper 140 lb Coarse Yes 9 x 12 inches
UArt Premium Sanded Paper Drawing Pad 400 lb Coarse Yes 9 x 12 inches
Arches Watercolor 300lb Hot-Press Papers 140 lb Smooth Yes 9 x 12 inches

Buying Guide for the Best Paper for Oil Pastels

Before getting oil pastel paper surfaces, there are a few things that require some considerations to ensure the surface is right for you and your artwork. 

Tones

The tone is nothing different from the wash you create with liquid paints - it highlights the painting. So, always make sure the tone you get will go along well with any concept, or find one that is perfect for your piece. 

Type of Paper Surfaces

For oil pastels, papers are available in the form of pads, sheets, or sanded. 

Because papers can come either as an individual or a pad, you would want to purchase them in bulk quantity so that you can get a lot of discount with it. 

Sanded paper, on the other hand, is harder and stronger than the two. A single unit will also cost higher. But we still recommend buying them in bulk for a pretty good discount. 

Texture and Tooth

As we have stated, the top features most artists would first look for is the tooth or texture of the paper. The final look of the piece depends on how much control the artist has over it. 

Also keep in mind that with a fine or deep tooth, the paint will stay firmly onto it, preventing them from cracking. But most importantly, artists get to create different effects and textures with a good tooth. 

Versatility

If you’re on a tight budget, finding versatile papers can really help. Although it does not have to be as versatile as the Arches Hot-Pressed paper (unless you own a printing studio as well), one that works for other mediums is more than enough. 

Interestingly, we find that the thickness or weight of a paper is pretty responsible for making it versatile. For example, if the paper is too thin, it will not work with wet mediums. So, we advise looking for one that is about 160 gsm. 

Can I use regular paper for oil pastels?

While you can use regular paper for oil pastels, it's not typically recommended because regular paper lacks the necessary tooth or grain for the pastels to adhere properly, and it may not hold up well to the oil content in the pastels. Specialized pastel paper or canvas, which has a textured surface for better pigment grip and is more durable, is generally a better choice for oil pastel artwork.

What is the difference between sanded paper and pastel paper?

The difference between sanded paper and pastel paper lies primarily in their texture and durability. Sanded paper has a gritty surface that holds more layers of pastel and can withstand erasing or heavy application of pastels without getting damaged. Pastel paper, on the other hand, has less grain and a lighter texture, which might not hold as many layers of pastel but provides a delicate touch for lighter pastel works.

Can I use watercolor paper for oil pastels?

Yes, you can use watercolor paper for oil pastels. Watercolor paper, particularly rough or cold-pressed variants, have a textured surface that can hold the oil pastel quite well. Due to the oil content of pastels, some artists prefer to use a barrier such as a pastel ground or gesso to prevent the oil from seeping into the paper over time.

How do I choose the right paper for oil pastels?

Choosing the right paper for oil pastels involves considering the paper's texture and its weight. Paper with a texture or 'tooth' will allow the pastels to adhere better, leading to richer color application. Heavier weight paper (like cardstock) or specially designed pastel paper is preferable as oil pastels can be heavy and regular paper might tear. The choice may also depend on your personal style and the intended effects of your artwork.

Can I use acrylic paint on oil pastel paper?

Yes, you can use acrylic paint on oil pastel paper. Oil pastel paper typically has a texture that can hold paint well, and its heavier weight can withstand the water in acrylics without warping. That being said, you should still consider using a primer, such as gesso, to seal the paper and stop the paint from soaking in and causing the paper to degrade over time.

How do I prevent oil pastels from smudging on paper?

To prevent oil pastels from smudging on paper, artists often use a fixative spray. This substance is lightly sprayed onto the completed artwork and forms a protective layer that helps keep the pastel pigments in place, reducing smudging. Another method is to place a piece of glassine paper, a smooth, inert paper, over the artwork to protect it from being disturbed.

Thank you for taking the time to explore our comprehensive article on some of the best papers for oil pastels. We are confident that you found the information valuable, and now have a better understanding of what to look for when purchasing oil pastel papers. Now that you're equipped with this valuable knowledge, you're ready to create beautiful masterpieces with your favorite oil pastels.

Out of these 9 best papers for oil pastel, here are our top three recommendations:

  1. Strathmore Assorted Pastel Paper Pad is an ideal option for artists on a budget in search of a versatile and easily available paper. It works well with different mediums, offering convenience and variety.
  2. Faber-Castell Black Oil Paper Pad is a good option for artists looking to highlight bright colors and experiment with unconventional backgrounds. This affordable paper works best with dry mediums and can be effectively used for fancy DIY projects.
  3. U. S. Art Supply Premium Oil Pastel Paper Pad is the right choice for those who appreciate a perfect balance of smoothness and tooth in their pastel paper. It works well with mixed media and is suitable for students and beginners.

With these recommendations, we trust that you will have an exciting and exhilarating time creating vibrant and unique artwork on your chosen oil pastel papers. So, go ahead, unleash your creativity, and let your imagination soar with every stroke of oil pastel on these incredible papers. Happy painting!

Even the smallest cracks on your driveway can become a grave problem in a few months, but they can be fixed easily with the best concrete crack filler. 

Homeowners can use these asphalt crack fillers to fill in cracks on their pavement and driveway to prevent further damage. As they are affordable, many people have been gravitating toward them rather than calling for professional help, which can be expensive. 

This has led to several brands developing their own formula of asphalt crack filler, so choosing a single product is pretty challenging for a new homeowner. That's why we are here to tell you about the top 10 asphalt crack fillers available on the market. 

Listed below are the best asphalt crack fillers:

  • Red Devil Acrylic Asphalt Crack Filler: The Red Devil asphalt crack filler adheres to damp surfaces and creates a tight seal over cracks, providing superior performance compared to Henry. Its smaller quantity may not be sufficient for larger cracks.
  • Henry Driveway Elastomeric Emulsion Crack Filler: This crack filler by Henry is excellent for filling wide cracks and can withstand high temperatures. The application can be messy compared to more controlled options like the Red Devil.
  • Bluestar Flexible Asphalt Crack Filler: Bluestar asphalt crack filler excels in its ability to withstand extreme temperatures. It's made to fill larger cracks up to an inch. Its higher price may be a deterrent when compared to more budget-friendly options.
  • Aquaphalt Permanent Asphalt Repair: The Aquaphalt crack filler scores high on the environmental front because it's free of harmful chemicals. It dries well even in freezing temperatures, which makes it more durable than Bluestar. The application might be less beginner-friendly.
  • EWT Asphalt Crack Sealer Hot-filler Tape: An asphalt filler that stands out for its unique tape adhesive form, excellent for sealing wider cracks. Unlike the Aquaphalt, it can't be set in wet conditions, limiting its use to sunny days only.

1. Red Devil Acrylic Asphalt Crack Filler - Best for Easy Application

This polymer-based crack filler is especially recommended for those who lack prior experience working on asphalt surfaces. The Red Devil Acrylic Asphalt Crack Filler is a favorite for many people due to its easy application, so let's check out its other features. 

If you're looking for an easy-to-apply asphalt driveway crack filler, look no more as the Red Devil acrylic filler will deliver optimum performance, thanks to its polymer and rubber formula. It comes in a caulking tube, so all you need to do is install it in a caulking gun, snip the tip, and apply the filler into the cracks. 

What's best is that this filler can adhere to damp surfaces and you won't need to worry about cleaning the driveway. The polymer-based formula also makes it quite flexible, as the filler can withstand the regular contraction and expansion of asphalt without cracking or splitting. 

Plus, it forms an extra tight seal over cracks, ensuring that no moisture can seep inside to prevent further damage to the asphalt.

No doubt, this Red Devil crack filler is one of the best asphalt crack fillers that are currently available. However, we felt that the brand could have included a bit more filler for the price, which would have helped fill larger cracks. 

Color: Black | Quantity: 1 Tube | Resistance: Resists Water, Weather, Cracking

2. Henry Driveway Elastomeric Emulsion Crack Filler - Best for Large Cracks

Want to fill all the cracks on your driveway in one go? If yes, check out this driveway elastomeric emulsion from Henry that comes in a gallon jug. This affordable filler can be used to fill minor and deep cracks on your asphalt driveway without much hassle or help from a professional. 

The Henry driveway elastomeric emulsion crack filler is an elastomer-modified asphalt-based formula that's blended with rubber polymer for high flexibility. Thus, the filler is able to withstand extreme pressure and temperature changes without cracking or peeling, making it suitable for use in high-traffic areas. 

Added to it are adhesion-promoting polymers for forming a stretchable and flexible seal after drying to resist weathering for a long time. We also like that this filler can be directly poured from the bottle, so you won't need to worry about any additional prep work. 

It's able to fix cracks up to half inches wide, just make sure to fill wide cracks with sand before pouring the filler for a tighter seal. 

Overall, this is a really good product for filling cracks on an asphalt driveway but the application can be a bit messy. The product tends to seep out of the cracks if you lose control and apply too much filler. 

Color: Black | Quantity: 1 Bottle | Resistance: Resists Water & Weather, Withstands High Temperatures

3. Bluestar Flexible Asphalt Crack Filler - Best for Extreme Temperatures

Is your cracked driveway or pavement exposed to extreme temperatures? If yes, you will definitely like the Bluestar Flexible Asphalt Crack Filler that can withstand hot and cold temperatures. Plus, the asphalt finish makes the filler seamlessly blend with the surface you're looking to repair. 

One of the problems faced by homeowners is that most asphalt crack fillers are meant for cracks up to half inches wide. There's no need to worry, as Bluestar has formulated this product to fill cracks of up to an inch. During application, the filler may feel a bit thin but be assured that the product gets thick on drying to prevent further damage. 

We really like how easy it is to apply this filler, thanks to the narrow nozzle, which lets you fill cracks of all widths. You'll need no extra tools for application, and with no rain for 24 hours, the filler will dry within a day.

This filler can also be applied in layers, which is excellent for fixing large cracks without worrying about peeling or cracking. 

To be honest, there’s nothing to complain about this asphalt crack filler as it's an excellent product. However, we found it to be a bit expensive compared to other options, which isn’t a major issue per se. You will just need to buy a couple of bottles extra to fill wider and deeper cracks, so plan your expenses accordingly. 

Color: Black | Quantity: 1 Bottle | Resistance: Withstands Hot & Cold Temperatures

4. Aquaphalt Permanent Asphalt Repair - Best for Eco-friendly Use

Aquaphalt is an innovative crack filler that's preferred by both residential and commercial users. Unlike other products, it can be used with just water, and you can fill the cracks or potholes almost immediately. This one-time fix is said to last longer than petroleum-based cold patches available on the market. 

What impressed us the most was that this asphalt filler can be used for filling potholes, driveways, and roads. And you can use it anytime, irrespective of the weather conditions. Unlike other asphalt-based products, this product manages to dry without any trouble, even in below-freezing temperatures. 

We especially appreciate the environment-friendly formula that is free from harmful chemicals and VOCs. You can safely work with it without needing to worry about inhaling toxic fumes. 

Furthermore, the brand provides detailed instructions on fixing damaged roads or driveways to make the application process hassle-free. You only need to use water to activate this patching material and tamp it into place. This makes the process economical compared to other options without needing any special tools or additives for application. 

The Aquaphalt permanent asphalt crack filler is definitely a user-friendly product, but we won't recommend it to absolute beginners. You will need to have some experience in fixing similar surfaces to properly apply the filler and achieve a smooth finish. 

Color: Black | Quantity: 1 Bucket | Resistance: Withstands Freezing Temperatures

5. EWT Asphalt Crack Sealer Hot-filler Tape - Best for Wide Cracks

The EWT asphalt filler tape is a unique product that is much more pliable than the usual rope fillers available on the market. With a width of two inches, this tape is suitable for fixing wide cracks to prevent further damage to your asphalt or concrete driveway, so let's check it out!

Most people complain about the mess created by liquid asphalt crack fillers. So, EWT has introduced these self-adhering asphalt crack repair tapes as an alternative for providing an easy and mess-free driveway repair experience. 

All you need to do is take off its backing, lay the tape on the crack, and heat it with a large heat gun. This will melt the filler and help create a permanent bond with the asphalt. 

Moreover, the rubberized formulation of this tape ensures that it forms a tight waterproof seal to protect the underlying layers of asphalt from moisture damage. And it doesn't crack or peel on coming in contact with other sealants, so you can safely seal coat your driveway. 

As you might have figured out, these asphalt crack-filling strips need to be set in place using a propane gun. That means you will need to wait for a sunny day to seal your driveway cracks with this product but it can resist water once it’s set.

Color: Black | Quantity: 1 Roll | Resistance: Waterproof

6. EcoClean Asphalt Patch & Pothole Filler

Do you have problems sealing cracks as you live in a cold area? Don't worry, as this asphalt patch from EcoClean has got you covered. The product is formulated to work at temperatures above 15°F, and you won't need to bother much even if it's freezing outside. 

If your driveway gets a lot of traffic, you need a strong filler to fix the cracks and withstand the constant pressure. The resilient ingredients like screened aggregate, tar, and asphalt binders present in this patch come with the promise of not wearing out for years. And on application, the product sets within an hour, making it suitable for fixing road cracks without any difficulty. 

Another thing that we really liked about this all-in-one filler is its versatility since apart from asphalt, you can use it for stone, concrete, and brick surfaces. Moreover, you can reuse it several times from the tub, as the substance remains pliable for a long time even after it's opened. 

You won’t need any primer or mixer for application, and it can also be applied in wet weather conditions.

Note that this petroleum-based asphalt patch isn't free from VOCs and other chemicals, and you need to be careful while handling the substance. Remember not to get too close to the cracks while the filler is drying, as it might still be emitting toxic fumes. 

Color: Black | Quantity: 1 Bucket | Resistance: Traffic-resistant

7. Henry ‎Driveway Asphalt Filler

Are you looking for a product that can fix tiny or hairline cracks in your driveway? This E-Z Stir solution from Henry can help fix and improve the health of your driveway within hours. It also easily adheres to driveways with different grades of roughness without much trouble. 

Tired of crack sealers that need special preparation? That won't be a problem with this product as it comes in a stir-and-apply formula. You just need to stir the solution inside the pail and spread it over the desired area. 

We also like that this product can be used both as a filler and a sealer for asphalt driveways or pavements. Henry has even reinforced it with four times more rubber polymers compared to other brands to provide enhanced durability. And when used as a sealant, it can significantly improve the traction of your driveway while keeping it crack-free for a long time. 

Moreover, the five-gallon pail can cover an area of 250-500 square feet, which is close to the average driveway size of most US homes. 

This asphalt crack sealer only works on cracks with a width of up to 1/8 inches, so we won't recommend it for repairing driveways with wider or deeper cracks. But you can use this product as a sealant after filling the cracks to prolong the lifespan of your driveway.  

Color: Black | Quantity: 1 Bucket | Resistance: N/A

8. Latex-Ite Asphalt & Concrete Crack Filler

Want a contractor-quality crack filler at an affordable price? Look no more, as Latex-Ite has made this possible with its PLI-STIX Asphalt And Concrete Crack Filler. This product is perfect for filling cracks of up to half inches wide, and you can melt it into place within seconds using a propane gun. 

First of all, let's talk about the composition of this asphalt crack filler. Latex-Ite has formulated this crack-filling rope with contractor-grade thermoplastic rubber, which makes it extremely durable, particularly in areas that experience frequent weather fluctuations. And unlike other fillers available on the market, this is meant to be a permanent solution for repairing your driveway. 

We also like the self-leveling quality of this filler, and you won't require any special equipment to smoothen it out for an even look. Plus, on melting, this product forms a watertight seal to prevent any moisture from getting into the cracks, which may cause damage to the underlying layers of asphalt. 

You will find that it doesn't react with other sealants, and you can use it to fill small cracks before seal coating a driveway. 

This asphalt crack filler requires you to have access to a propane gun but you must be extra careful during application to avoid accidents. We also found that the PLI-STIX works best when melted with a high-heat outdoor torch for which you will need practice to get the best results. 

Color: Black | Quantity: 2 Packs | Resistance: Resists Water, Weather

9. Jetcoat Premium Driveway Sealer

This sealant from JetCoat comes with a long-lasting polymer rubber-based formulation that guarantees five-year protection. You can use this product to seal your entire driveway or fill in individual cracks. Even for its premium product, JetCoat has kept the price affordable to let you have a crack-free asphalt driveway. 

One of the troubles faced when using the most commonly available crack fillers is their low durability. To solve this issue, JetCoat has reinforced this sealant with five times more polymer which helps it to last a long time. It's even fortified with sand to provide much-needed slip resistance. 

What's more, this product can be used to solve multiple driveway-related problems, like filling cracks, holes, gaps, and openings of various sizes. This is made possible by the uniform consistency of this sealer which isn't too thick or thin. Plus, the application is pretty easy as all you need to do is stir it in the pail, pour it, and spread it evenly using a rubber squeegee. 

But remember to apply a second coat over the first one for added strength and smoothness. 

Like many other asphalt fillers available on the market, this product contains VOCs, even though their quantity is pretty low at 50 grams per gallon, as stated by the brand. Still, if you want a product that's free from any toxic substances, it's best to look for other options. 

Color: Black | Quantity: 1 Tube | Resistance: Traffic-resistant, Withstands Low & High Temperatures

10. Crack-Stix Blacktop Crack Filler

Many homeowners swear by this filler material for driveway asphalt crack repair. This crack filler rope from Crack-Stix has made fixing cracks easier without creating a mess, thanks to its thermoplastic technology. We have seen that it creates a permanent bond, so you can safely use the driveway for years to come. 

One of the reasons we liked this product was due to the easy application and you can conveniently place this 125-foot long, ½-inch wide rope into the cracks. The filler melts evenly at 200°F without cracking or creating a mess on your driveway, which is much better than the finish achieved with liquid asphalt fillers. 

Another feature to note is the thermoplastic technology that lets it form a permanent bond with the asphalt. Crack-Stix has added elastomeric compounds and modified polymers in this filler to make it super resilient to all kinds of pressure. And this durable sealant is flexible which helps it adjust while the driveway contracts and expands to prevent cracking, even when the surface is exposed to low temperatures.  

If you live in a cold region, be aware that this asphalt filler rope may become stiff and less pliable during winter. But, there's no need to worry, as it will work just fine in maintaining a strong seal when properly melted with a propane gun. 

Color: Black | Quantity: 1 Bucket | Resistance: N/A

What is the Best Asphalt Crack Filler?

If you're searching for the best asphalt crack filler, listed below is a table detailing color, quantity per package in units, and resistance capabilities.

Product Color Quantity Resistance
Red Devil Acrylic Asphalt Crack Filler Black 1 Tube Resists Water, Weather, Cracking
Henry Driveway Crack Filler Black 1 Bottle Resists Water & Weather, Withstands High Temperatures
Bluestar Flexible Asphalt Crack Filler Black 1 Bottle Withstands Hot & Cold Temperatures
Aquaphalt Permanent Asphalt Repair Black 1 Bucket Withstands Freezing Temperatures
EWT Asphalt Crack Sealer Hot-Filler Tape Black 1 Roll Waterproof
EcoClean Asphalt Patch & Pothole Filler Black 1 Bucket Traffic-resistant
Henry ‎Driveway Asphalt Filler Black 1 Bucket N/A
Latex-Ite Asphalt & Concrete Crack Filler Black 2 Packs Resists Water, Weather
Jetcoat Premium Driveway Sealer Black 1 Tube Traffic-resistant, Withstands Low & High Temperatures
Crack-Stix Blacktop Crack Filler Black 1 Bucket N/A

Buying Guide for the Best Asphalt Crack Filler

To be honest, the sheer number of options available on the market can make it challenging to find the best asphalt crack filler. That's why we have highlighted some essential points to help you find the right product for your needs. Check them while getting an asphalt driveway crack repair product, and you won't be disappointed. 

Types of Asphalt Crack Fillers

One of the first things to check is the formula or type of asphalt crack filler that you’re buying. The most popular options right now are the epoxy and acrylic crack fillers, as they provide UV protection and stain resistance from oil or gas while lasting a long time. 

Other options include the coal tar-based crack fillers that are usually used as a sealer for the driveway. Due to affordable pricing, this asphalt driveway crack filler used to be the primary choice for many. But as it's known to emit volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that can harm your body, the use of such fillers has decreased. 

Another common option available on the market is asphalt-based crack fillers which are much safer for the environment. However, note that these fillers are susceptible to UV damage and staining over time. 

Crack Size

How much asphalt filler you need depends on the size of the driveway asphalt crack, while in some cases, you may need to fill multiple cracks at a time. Based on the formulation of a crack filler, it might be able to tackle everything from hairline cracks to deeper cracks. Typically, most formulas work for cracks ranging in size from quarter-inch to half-inch. 

Crack Sealing Ease of Application

A key reason most people opt for asphalt crack fillers is the ease of application. That's why you need to know more about how a product is supposed to be used before making the purchase. 

Other features to check in a filler should be the drying time and weather conditions in which it can be applied. The average time taken by most fillers to fully cure is around 24-48 hours. Make sure not to walk or drive on the repaired surface before it's dry, or you may end up peeling the filler. 

Read up on how to repair cracks in concrete and asphalt before working on your driveway or pavement for the best results. 

Do asphalt crack fillers work?

Yes, asphalt crack fillers do work and are commonly used in road repair, driveway maintenance, and other asphalt-related restoration. They create a flexible and durable seal over cracks which helps prevent water seepage, further damage caused by freeze-thaw cycles, and the growth of vegetation.

Keep in mind that the effectiveness of crack fillers largely depends on the correct application and the quality of the product used.

What are asphalt filler ropes?

Asphalt filler ropes, also known as pliable fillers or fibrated fillers, are a type of crack filler used for repairing asphalt surfaces. They are ropes made of a flexible and heat-resistant material that is packed into the crack before being heated, usually with a torch, causing the filler to melt and seal the crack. This type of filler is typically used for wider cracks or joints in asphalt surfaces.

What is the difference between sealants and fillers?

The primary difference between sealants and fillers lies in their use and material properties. Sealants are usually more flexible and are used to prevent elements like water or air from passing through material surfaces, often including a range of materials such as concrete, wood, or metal.

On the other hand, fillers are more rigid and are employed to fill gaps or cracks in surfaces, restoring structural integrity or aesthetics. Their effective application depends on the specific requirements of the task.

We hope our suggestions will help you find the best asphalt crack filler that fixes cracks quickly and keeps any surface in good condition. 

Among our recommendations, we will suggest the Red Devil Acrylic Asphalt Crack Filler to those looking for a product with excellent flexibility that resists damage during temperature fluctuations. On the other hand, the Henry Driveway Elastomeric Emulsion Crack Filler is excellent for someone who needs to fix several driveway cracks at once. 

Remember to read the instructions carefully before application and you should have a smooth driveway or pavement in no time. Until next time, goodbye, and take care! 

Scale modeling, an enduring pastime since the 1950s, has its roots reaching back to humanity's earliest days. Realistic scale models serve as the culminating phase in the evolution of a design, providing a tangible manifestation of a concept. They are invaluable for their precise depiction of scale and volume, offering an immediate visualization that closely mirrors reality and provides an accurate sense of dimension.

Contemporary history has witnessed the transformation of realistic scale models from purely functional prototypes to forms of art. While retaining their foundational purpose, these models have acquired an aesthetic dimension, transcending their role as mere technical tools.

Below are dioramas that defy verbal description, their beauty transcending language.

When integrated into the planning phase, realistic scale models engage viewers interactively, much like toys captivate children, allowing for an intuitive grasp of the object’s true form and scale. This characteristic is not only pivotal in the design phase of an object but also vital for our imaginative faculties, enabling the sharing of a vision where the object is realized, operational, and fully functional. The unique attribute of realistic scale models is their ability to depict anything in a static or mobile form.

Static models offer a snapshot, portraying objects as if time has stood still. They provide a fixed view that, unlike mobile models, does not grapple with replicating motion—a task that can sometimes lead to a loss of immersive experience due to scale-related discrepancies. While mobile models may be better suited for digital animations where real-world physics can be challenging to replicate, static models have recently reached an extraordinary fidelity in detail, approaching miniature replicas of reality. They cover an array of themes, from the quotidian to the fantastical, requiring diverse techniques to authentically recreate the desired atmosphere.

homestheticsscalemodels (1)

Realistic scale models come in various scale ratios—1/48 and 1/32 for aircraft, and 1/35 for vehicles being the standard. Larger scales such as 1/16 or 1/24 are often reserved for cars and some aircraft, but the universal scale for all types is 1/72. These scales cater to the true dimensions of the models, as different objects have different real-life sizes. For example, a military vehicle's gun may measure between 5.25 to 5.75 meters, which equates to a manageable 15 to 16 centimeters on 1/35 scale—a size conducive to desktop display. The choice of scale typically aligns with ease of manufacturing and the ability to produce well-proportioned models that comfortably fit in a display case or on a shelf. The thematic range is vast, spanning from the Napoleonic era to the Cold War for figures, with military vehicles and cars predominantly featuring designs post-1920s, with a particular prevalence of World War II and Cold War-era military models, and automotive models from the 1940s to the 1980s.

The following examples delve into various dioramas, particularly those representing military vehicles and aircraft. They illustrate the art of capturing life in miniature, highlighting the skill of rendering scenes from reality with convincing authenticity.

homestheticsscalemodels (2)

homestheticsscalemodels (3) homestheticsscalemodels (4) homestheticsscalemodels (5) homestheticsscalemodels (6) homestheticsscalemodels (7) homestheticsscalemodels (8) homestheticsscalemodels (9) homestheticsscalemodels (10) homestheticsscalemodels (13) homestheticsscalemodels (14) homestheticsscalemodels (15) homestheticsscalemodels (16) homestheticsscalemodels (17) homestheticsscalemodels (18) homestheticsscalemodels (19) homestheticsscalemodels (20) homestheticsscalemodels (21) homestheticsscalemodels (22) homestheticsscalemodels (23) homestheticsscalemodels (24) homestheticsscalemodels (25)

homestheticsscalemodels (26) homestheticsscalemodels (27) homestheticsscalemodels (28) homestheticsscalemodels (29) homestheticsscalemodels (30) homestheticsscalemodels (31) homestheticsscalemodels (32) homestheticsscalemodels (33) homestheticsscalemodels (34)
homestheticsscalemodels (35)
homestheticsscalemodels (36) homestheticsscalemodels (37) homestheticsscalemodels (38) homestheticsscalemodels (39) homestheticsscalemodels (40) homestheticsscalemodels (41) homestheticsscalemodels (42) homestheticsscalemodels (43) homestheticsscalemodels (44) homestheticsscalemodels (45) homestheticsscalemodels (46) homestheticsscalemodels (47) homestheticsscalemodels (48) homestheticsscalemodels (49) homestheticsscalemodels (51) homestheticsscalemodels (53) homestheticsscalemodels (54) homestheticsscalemodels (55) homestheticsscalemodels (56) homestheticsscalemodels (57) homestheticsscalemodels (58) homestheticsscalemodels (59) homestheticsscalemodels (60) homestheticsscalemodels (61) homestheticsscalemodels (62) homestheticsscalemodels (63) homestheticsscalemodels (66) homestheticsscalemodels (67) homestheticsscalemodels (68) homestheticsscalemodels (69) homestheticsscalemodels (70) homestheticsscalemodels (71) homestheticsscalemodels (72) homestheticsscalemodels (73)

homestheticsscalemodels (74) homestheticsscalemodels (75) homestheticsscalemodels (76) homestheticsscalemodels (77) homestheticsscalemodels (78) homestheticsscalemodels (79) homestheticsscalemodels (80) homestheticsscalemodels (81) homestheticsscalemodels (82) homestheticsscalemodels (83) homestheticsscalemodels (84) homestheticsscalemodels (85) homestheticsscalemodels (86) homestheticsscalemodels (87) homestheticsscalemodels (88) homestheticsscalemodels (89) homestheticsscalemodels (90) homestheticsscalemodels (91) homestheticsscalemodels (92) homestheticsscalemodels (93) homestheticsscalemodels (94) homestheticsscalemodels (95) homestheticsscalemodels (96)

 

Shoe storage ideas are a hot commodity online, especially DIY shoe storage that is clever, quick, and inexpensive considering that the average person owns 12 pairs of shoes. Getting creative with DIY shoe storage solutions is a great way to neatly organize your footwear and reclaim space in your home. Read on for 19 genius DIY shoe storage ideas you can implement to keep your shoe collection tidy and impress your guests.

Metal Sticks Behind The Wardrobe Door

Keep shoes hidden but easily accessible by installing metal sticks on the back of a closet door. Hang shoes by their heels for an organized display.

Metal Sticks Behind The Wardrobe Door

Cardboard Shoe Storage

Get creative with cardboard boxes to DIY customized shoe cubbies on a budget. This modular storage solution can be scaled to your space and replaced as needed.

Cardboard Shoe Storage

Pallet Shoe Shelves

Repurpose wooden pallets into shelving units for an easy shoe organization project. Stack and arrange pallets to fit your space.

Pallet Shoe Shelves

Shoe Box Storage

Store shoes in their original boxes and label them with photos for a neat, personalized storage system.

Shoe Box Storage

Wall-Mounted Coat Hooks

Install wall hooks designed for coats to hold shoes and free up floor space in small rooms.

Wall-Mounted Coat Hooks

Ladder Bookcase Shoe Storage

Upcycle a wooden ladder into a leaning bookcase. Add shelves to store shoes creatively.

Ladder Bookcase Shoe Storage

Crate Shoe Storage

Stack vintage crates or buy new collapsible ones to hold shoes in a rustic cubby storage unit. Arrange crates vertically or horizontally.

Crate Shoe Storage

Cardboard Pipe Shoe Storage

Get crafty with cardboard tubes or PVC pipes cut to size. Lean tubes against a wall or stack them to create DIY cubbies.

Cardboard Pipe Shoe Storage

Metal Grid For Heels

Install a metal pegboard and use hooks to neatly store heels and keep them in view.

Metal Grid For Heels

Corner Wall Shelves

Optimize wasted space by installing corner shelves. Use them to neatly store shoes vertically.

Corner Wall Shelves

Display Shoes On Shelves

Show off your favorite pair by dedicating a shelf to artfully arrange shoes. Add lights for dramatic effect.

Display Shoes On Shelves

Build A Walk-In Shoe Closet

For the ultimate shoe storage, construct a customized walk-in closet with plenty of shelves and cubbies. Add a window for natural light.

Build A Walk-In Shoe Closet

Dedicate Dresser Drawers To Shoes

Make use of furniture you already own by storing shoes in empty dresser drawers. Line drawers with fabric for a tidy presentation.

Dedicate Dresser Drawers To Shoes

Shoe Display Shelves

Build or buy shelving units specifically to showcase your most prized shoes. Add lighting for extra flair.

Shoe Display Shelves

Shoe Wall Decor

Get creative by arranging shoes into wall art patterns and designs. Paint or stain shoes to complement your décor.

Shoe Wall Decor

Laundry Room Shoe Storage

Install shelves or cubbies in your laundry room to store shoes near the entryway. Keep shoes off the floor to avoid tracking in dirt.

Laundry Room Shoe Storage

Rotating Shoe Display

Get the most out of your walk-in closet by installing a rotating shoe rack. Spin to view all your pairs with ease.

Rotating Shoe Display

Garage Shoe Storage

Keep garage floors clear by mounting panels or shelving to hold shoes. Add hooks for hanging bulky shoes.

Garage Shoe Storage

Repurposed Furniture Shoe Storage

Give old furniture new life by refinishing and using it to hold shoes. An old dresser or cabinet works great.

Repurposed Furniture Shoe Storage

Open Shelving Units

An open storage design allows you to easily view all shoes. Keep shelves near the entryway for convenience.

Open Shelving Units

Hallway Built-In Shelves

Maximize hallway space with built-in shelving that spans the length of the wall. Store shoes of every height.

Hallway Built-In Shelves

Luxury Walk-In Closet

Go all out with a professionally designed walk-in closet complete with plentiful shoe storage. Consider glass doors to admire your collection.

Luxury Walk-In Closet

Custom Pull-Out Drawers

Make use of wasted cabinet space by installing custom pull-out shelves just for shoes. Keep shoes hidden but easily accessible.

Custom Pull-Out Drawers

Organized Shoe Closet

Invest in a closet system with plenty of shelves, cubbies, and drawers to neatly accommodate all your footwear.

Organized Shoe Closet

Repurposed Furniture Shoe Storage

Upcycle old wooden pallets or metal file cabinets into DIY shoe racks. Stack and arrange them to fit your space.

Repurposed Furniture Shoe Storage

Minimalist Shoe Shelves

Adopt a minimalist style by dedicating a small shelving unit near the entryway to neatly store shoes out of the way.

Minimalist Shoe Shelves

Bathroom Shoe Storage

Make use of vertical space in your bathroom by mounting shelving on the wall to attractively display shoes.

Bathroom Shoe Storage
With some creativity and elbow grease, you can implement any of these storage solutions to keep your shoe collection neat. Find a method that fits your space and style. Your feet (and guests) will thank you

A backyard or garden is one of the best assets of your property. The added open space gives you a private place to lounge and soak up the sun or have fun with your family. However, when the sun starts getting too hot in the summer, the outside doesn’t seem as appealing anymore.

Pergolas is the right solution for this dilemma. They add a lot of shade and privacy, adding value to your outdoor space. You can enjoy the sun and sit in the open or have your kids play safely, away from direct sunlight. Like any other outdoor furniture and accessory, there are various materials pergolas are available in. Here, we focus mainly on metal pergolas as there are many reasons why they are better suited to your needs than any other material.

One of the main factors that give metal pergolas an edge is that they last much longer. Also, they are better managed and maintained over time. They can withstand various weather and hot summers without losing any sturdiness. And surprisingly, metal pergola kits are relatively lighter than wooden ones. So, if a lightweight yet durable and long-lasting pergola kit is what you need, then a metal one is probably your right match.

Listed below are the best metal pergola kits:

  • Sojag Messina Hard Top Sun Shelter: A luxury pergola perfect for large outdoor gatherings with a hardtop roof and sturdy aluminum frame. It carries a heftier price tag compared to the Sunjoy and requires professional assembly.
  • Sunjoy 10’ x 12’ Chatham Steel Hardtop: The Sunjoy gazebo is distinguished for its all-weather protection with a hardtop canopy and solid steel frame. It might fade under intense sunlight, unlike the Sojag.
  • Vita Venetian Vinyl Pergola: The Vita pergola captures a classic garden design with a white, trellis-like vinyl roof. It lacks a canopy unlike the Sunjoy and is relatively pricey.
  • Kozyard Rosana 10' x 12' Hardtop Aluminum: Kozyard Rosana is a gazebo that excels in durability with a rust-proof aluminum frame and galvanized steel roof. It's more rugged than the Vita pergola, but the roof may create noise when it rains.
  • Great Deal Furniture Sonoma Outdoor Fabric/Steel Canopy: The Great Deal Furniture canopy is compact and stylish, with a reliable steel frame and polyester canopy. Assembly may be more challenging compared to the easier-to-set-up Kozyard gazebo.

1. Sojag Messina Hard Top Sun Shelter - Best for Large Outdoor Spaces

  • Large size
  • Hardtop roof and sturdy frame made of steel and aluminum
  • Replacement parts are available

The first pergola on our list is the largest and most luxurious one. 12’ by 16’ in size, this is the pergola for people who have large families or love to host outdoor gatherings.

The hardtop roof means you won’t have to take it down once the snow starts falling or when the monsoon arrives in all its glory. The pergola will stand strong and withstand the climate well.  

The frame supporting the galvanized hardtop roof is made of rustproof aluminum. The charcoal color of the frame and ceiling gives a nice contrast to an otherwise green and luscious backyard. It easily becomes the focal point once it’s installed.

You can relax under the shade by the pool or just lounge around while your little ones play on the grass. It has space for a ceiling fan and lights so you can still enjoy your backyard when there is no breeze.

The kit comes with PVC-coated polyester mesh mosquito netting. It’s just as durable as the frame and also blocks sun exposure. Although it needs to be installed by a professional, it will protect you from environmental elements for years to come.

Size: 12' by 16' | Frame Material: Steel and Aluminum | Roof Type: Hardtop | Netting: Yes

2. Sunjoy 10’ x 12’ Chatham Steel Hardtop - Best for All-weather Protection

  • Hardtop canopy
  • Vented roof
  • Provides good ventilation

Hardtop canopies are perfect for those looking for a permanent gazebo. It keeps the sin away and gives you and your kids a comfortable place to enjoy the outdoors all year long. This Sunjoy gazebo is large and fits well in backyards where there is enough room.

The frame for this gazebo is very solid and heavy-duty. Made from high-quality powder-coated steel, it’s meant to last a long time and in multiple weather conditions all year long. The hardtop roof is made with the same material and can take heavy snowfall pretty well.

The double-tiered roof allows air to flow through the gazebo much more freely, providing good ventilation when it’s needed the most. The kit comes with mosquito netting so you can enjoy the outdoors even when there are bugs flying around.

You do have to get the pergola professionally installed as it is quite heavy. But once it’s assembled, it will immediately become the place for you and your family to hang out.

Size: 10' by 12' | Frame Material: Powder-coated Steel | Roof Type: Hardtop | Netting: Yes

3. Vita Venetian Vinyl Pergola - Best for Classic Garden Design

  • Traditional Venetian design
  • White color
  • Dimensions: 10’ by 10’ frame with 5” x 5” posts

If you’ve ever come across Venetian themes in movies, the soft romantic textures, light colors, and minimal architectural details all look incredible. Your most notable piece from that time is the classic pergola design. This version is based on the traditional design, with some modern touches.

The white, trellis-like roof of the pergola is the perfect foundation for flowering vines. Set in a lush garden, with white wicker furniture and flowers all around, this pergola will become the focal point in your backyard.

The framework is made of vinyl, which is easy to clean and maintain. Whether you install it on grass, concrete patio, or wooden deck, it takes only people and a few tools to install the pergola. In a few hours, you can enjoy the pergola.

Be noted that the kit doesn’t come with a netting or canopy cover. You may have to purchase it separately if you need it.

Size: 10' by 10' | Frame Material: Vinyl | Roof Type: Trellis-like | Netting: No

4. Kozyard Rosana 10' x 12' Hardtop Aluminum

  • Heavy-duty aluminum and steel material
  • Comes with netting and waterproof sidewalls
  • Dimensions: 10’ by 12’

If you need a waterproof, heavy-duty pergola, this Kozyard hardtop gazebo in Rosana is perfect. Unlike soft-top gazebos, this particular one is suitable for homes in places where winters have snow. Also, this gazebo is suitable for homeowners who have no opposition to having a permanent gazebo.

The frame is made from rust-proof aluminum. It is very sturdy and strong, built to last a long time. The dark brown color of the frame matches the hardtop roof. The metal top is made from galvanized steel roof.

It gives the gazebo more sturdiness. Also, it weatherproofs the pergola. You can leave it up in the winter as it can withstand heavy snow and harsh winds. The kit also comes with anchoring stands with pre-drilled holes for installation.

Lastly, this gazebo can be used anytime during the year. The netting keeps the bugs away while the waterproof sidewalls keep water out.

Size: 10' by 12' | Frame Material: Aluminum and Steel | Roof Type: Galvanized | Netting: Yes

5. Great Deal Furniture Sonoma Outdoor Fabric/Steel Canopy

  • The canopy is waterproof
  • Comes with two types of netting for different needs
  • Can be installed on a deck, balcony, backyard, and more

While it’s not the smallest gazebo, area-wise, it is better suited for homes that have limited outdoor space. This pergola can be made the focal point of the outdoor space without it taking up all the room.

This Sonoma gazebo is not only the right size and stylish, but it is also durable and provides protection from environmental elements including harsh UV rays. 

The pergola kit comes with a 10’ by 10’ metal frame made of solid steel that can withstand harsh winds and the summer sun. The polyester canopy on top is large enough to provide sufficient shade and waterproofing.

You can place patio furniture underneath the gazebo and enjoy the outside when the sun is shining bright. If bugs are a problem, you can open the netting. There are two layers of netting to suit your needs. Interestingly, the netting also has a zipper door, which can make you feel like you’re inside a giant tent on a camping trip.

Size: 10' by 10' | Frame Material: Solid Steel | Roof Type: Polyester Canopy | Netting: Yes

What is the Best Metal Pergola Kit for Your Backyard?

If you're searching for the best metal pergola kit for your backyard, the table below provides a comparison of size measured in feet, frame material, roof type, and whether netting is included.

Product Size Frame Material Roof Type Netting
Sojag Messina Sun Shelter 12' by 16' Steel and Aluminum Hardtop Yes
Sunjoy Canopy 10' by 12' Powder-coated Steel Hardtop Yes
Vita Venetian Vinyl Pergola 10' by 10' Vinyl Trellis-like No
Kozyard Rosana Gazebo 10' by 12' Aluminum and Steel Galvanized Yes
Great Deal Furniture Sonoma Canopy 10' by 10' Solid Steel Polyester Canopy Yes

Buying Guide for the Best Metal Pergola Kit

Whether made of metal or other materials, pergolas can serve a number of various purposes. They provide shade for an outdoor dining space or by the pool. Or it can create a covered space for your kids to play without being under the hot sun.

The creativity is really up to you. However, having some idea about how you will be using the pergola will help you choose the right one. This brief buyer’s guide can help you further.

Material

We’ve already explained why we prefer metal over wood for pergolas. It is low-maintenance and long-lasting. You don’t need to varnish it or worry about it aging and fading under the sun or how it will stand up to water damage and other weather elements. You can just use it straight out of the box.

Deciding to buy a metal pergola is just step one. You need to go further and decide what kind of metal you want. The most common options available include steel, vinyl, and aluminum. Each metal, while sturdy, has its pros and cons.

You can decide which one suits your needs better. Vinyl, for instance, is easier to clean compared to the other two and is more aesthetically pleasing. Steel, on the other hand, is much sturdier and will stand the test of time better than vinyl.

And lastly, aluminum is a much better option for those who live in wet climates because the metal is waterproof.

For people who do want the wooden pergola kit in their backyards, cedar anchors well in the ground. However, metal pergolas are lighter and work well on porches and decks where the weight can cause damage.

Size

Along with the material, the size of the pergola kit is the most important consideration. No matter the features and durability of a pergola, it won’t work if it’s too big or too small.

The size you need depends on where you want to install the kit and how you want to use it. Pergola kits come in various shapes and sizes to fit different spaces. They can range from the smallest at 6’ by 6’ to 122’ by 20’.

You need to consider the length and height of the pergola and the surface area of the location you are going to place it. Also, if your backyard has trees, take the height and width of nearby foliage.

Along with the exterior dimensions of the pergola, measurements for the inside are also important. You want to make sure that it is spacious enough to fit furniture and the tallest friend or family member that frequents your home.

Price

Prices on pergolas can vary from $300 to upwards of $3000. As one would expect, metal pergola kits on the smaller side cost less than the larger and more elaborate ones.

The price for metal pergolas is dependent on the size of the frame and whether the canopy is included or not in the kit. Most metal kits start at around $400 to $500. The price goes up when other features are added.

Style

The consideration for the style of the pergola is mostly for aesthetic purposes. You can pick between round, rectangular, and square gazebos. But that’s not the limit. There are many other unique shapes to look at as well.

The right gazebo would be the one that complements your home’s architecture. Instead of looking out of place, it should blend well with the design.

But don’t forego practicality when looking at the style. Don’t give in to your liking for the design and choose an attractive pergola that doesn’t quite fit the space right.

What is a metal pergola kit?

A metal pergola kit is a set of pre-fabricated pieces designed for assembling a pergola, which is an outdoor structure that provides shade over a patio or pathway. The kit typically includes all necessary metallic components, such as posts, rafters, and crossbeams, often made of materials like steel or aluminum for durability. Detailed assembly instructions and necessary fittings are usually provided, allowing for easier installation.

What is the difference between a hardtop and a soft-top metal pergola?

The key difference between a hardtop and a soft-top metal pergola lies in the type of covering used. A hardtop pergola features a rigid, often metal, roof that provides solid shade and protection from the elements. Conversely, a soft-top pergola typically has a canvas, cloth, or other fabric covering that can offer shade but might not provide the same level of weather resistance as a hardtop.

Each has its own aesthetic appeal and functional advantages, depending on the specific needs and preferences of the user.

How do I choose the right size metal pergola kit for my outdoor space?

Choosing the right size metal pergola kit for your outdoor space involves several considerations. Start by measuring the available area where the pergola would be installed, taking into account both width and depth.

Consider the primary purpose of the pergola (such as shading a patio or defining an outdoor living area) and scale it accordingly. Also, consider the human scale - a pergola should provide enough headroom and space for movement.

Finally, the pergola's size relative to your home or any adjacent structures should look proportionate. Always refer to the manufacturer's guidelines when choosing a size.

Can I readily customize a metal pergola kit to suit my outdoor space and preferences?

Customizing a metal pergola kit to suit your outdoor space and preferences may be possible, but it is advised to consult the product details or contact the manufacturer beforehand to determine the level of customization available.

Can a metal pergola be attached to an existing structure, such as a house or deck?

Yes, a metal pergola can be attached to an existing structure like a house or deck. These are known as attached pergolas. When attached to a house, they are typically anchored to the exterior wall or the roof structure. When attached to a deck, they must be securely fastened to the deck's structure to ensure stability.

It's essential to consider load-bearing capabilities, proper sealing to prevent water penetration, and local building codes when attaching a pergola to an existing structure. Professional consultation is often advisable.

Do I need a permit to install a metal pergola?

Whether you need a permit to install a metal pergola often depends on local regulations. Some jurisdictions may require a permit for constructing permanent outdoor structures, while others may not. The size of the pergola might also factor into permit requirements.

It's crucial to check with your local building department or similar authority to understand the specific rules in your area prior to installation. Zoning regulations, homeowner association rules, and similar considerations may also apply.

How difficult is it to assemble a metal pergola kit?

The difficulty of assembling a metal pergola kit can depend on various factors such as the complexity of the design, the individual's DIY skills, and the number of people involved in the assembly process. Generally, these kits are designed for self-assembly and come with detailed instructions. Basic tools, such as a screwdriver and level, are often required.

For larger or more complex structures, professional installation may be advisable. Users should always follow the manufacturer's assembly instructions to ensure safe and successful installation.

How do I maintain my metal pergola?

Maintaining a metal pergola typically involves regular cleaning and periodic checks for damage. Clean the pergola with a mild detergent and water to remove dirt and debris, using a soft brush or cloth to avoid scratching the surface.

Inspect the metal for signs of rust or damage, especially after extreme weather events. If rust is detected, it might need treatment with a rust remover or prevention product, and potentially a fresh coat of appropriate paint. If a part is significantly damaged, it may need to be replaced. Always consult the pergola's care manual for specific maintenance recommendations.

If you have a large enough backyard, deck, or patio, a pergola will complete your outdoor aesthetics. Even though they are not cheap, they are investment pieces and add value to your home, especially permanent ones.

We understand the importance of creating an inviting and functional outdoor space, and having the right pergola can make a significant difference in enhancing your backyard experience. We have gone through several excellent products, and out of all these options, here are the top three expert recommendations:

When it comes to large gatherings and making a statement, the Sojag Messina Hard Top Sun Shelter is an ideal option. Its spacious 12' x 16' size, hardtop roof, and durable aluminum and steel frame make it perfect for hosting outdoor parties and events.

For those who prefer a more permanent structure, the Sunjoy 10' x 12' Chatham Steel Hardtop is a good choice. It boasts a hardtop canopy, a vented roof for better airflow, and a robust, powder-coated steel frame.

If you appreciate a classic and elegant design, the New England Arbors Vinyl Pergola is the right choice. Based on a traditional Venetian design, this 10' x 10' pergola features a white vinyl framework, which is easy to clean and maintain.

You just have to make sure you know what you’re looking for and check the dimensions of the kit to get one that will serve you well for a long time. We hope that the buyer’s guide and the recommendations give you some options and guidance in choosing the one that suits your needs.

There comes a point in many homes when a vinyl repair must be done. 

These repair projects or renovations can be costly, but with a bit of glue and some hard work, this concern can be solved. After all, vinyl has incredibly versatile uses in both the home and industry. However, as with all materials, the test of time will eventually wear it down. To keep your vinyl looking its best, repairs are an inevitable necessity. 

It makes sense that the adhesive can cope with the flexible working conditions that the material undergoes, all while maintaining a solid bond. And finding a suitable glue for the job can make all the difference in the quality of repairs done. This article will help narrow your search down and get you started with what you should look for in a suitable vinyl glue. So, without further ado, let us begin!

Listed below are the best glues for vinyl:

  • RH Adhesives HH-66: The RH Adhesives vinyl cement stands out due to its resistance to weather extremes, oil, fuel, and grease. It sets in just 2 to 5 minutes, although for larger projects this might be too quick, compared to others like Gorilla adhesive.
  • Gorilla Construction Adhesive: Gorilla adhesive is ideal for indoor and outdoor projects. Its strength lies in its quick set time (20 to 30 seconds) and flexibility, making it the most versatile adhesive compared to RH Adhesives HH-66. The necessary cutting of the nozzle may hinder storage.
  • Henry 356-030: A vinyl adhesive ideal for floor coverings, Henry 356-030 touts an easy application and solid grip. It surpasses others like Gorilla in grip strength but requires the adhesive to dry out before use, unlike Rhino glue.
  • Rhino Glue: Rhino glue is a sturdy adhesive with a versatile 1.4 fl oz volume formula. Its durability and strength surpass others like Henry 356-030. It might discolor vinyl, a downside absent in J-B Weld 8237.
  • J-B Weld 8237 PlasticWeld: J-B Wel PlasticWeld is a unique two-part epoxy putty stick rated for plastics. It stands out from Rhino glue due to its malleable shape before setting but it doesn't handle moisture as well as RH Adhesives HH-66.

1. RH Adhesives HH-66 - Best for Vinyl Repair

The HH-66 adhesive is an incredibly strong adhesive designed to handle vinyl material as well as vinyl-laminated fabrics. It forms a barrier against extreme temperatures and has the ideal size for general maintenance use. This adhesive is highly resistant to any oil, fuel, grease, and other chemicals.

RH Adhesive’s HH-66 adhesive is the perfect choice for any vinyl material in different conditions. A great convenience is the option to apply it using a wet or dry application method - the sealant will hold steadily either way. 

With the wet application possibility, the glue has a weatherproof nature. Applying it under harsh weather conditions yields the same outcome as an application in average weather. This makes it ideal for even submerged repair work; it can hold its own despite being exposed to water. 

Additionally, the application process itself is relatively easy and quick. The drying time was extremely fast; within minutes, the bond had been made. 

An already easy application process is made easier by the clear color of the glue. Seeing where it is being applied is a great help in having a clean application.

Drying times on the HH-66 vary depending on the temperature and climatic conditions. Under high temperatures, the glue will stick quickly, sometimes within seconds. But for those working with a large surface area, it may be a nuisance to have to reapply every few inches repeatedly. 

Quantity: 1 Can | Volume: 8 fl oz | Set Time: N/A | Cure Time: 2 to 5 Minutes | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Waterproof, Withstands Weather Extremes, Oil, Fuel, Grease, & More

2. Gorilla Construction Adhesive - Best for Indoor/Outdoor Projects

From a respected brand in the adhesive market, Gorilla offers a fantastic construction adhesive product. It has a strong bond with weather resistance and is ideal for both indoor and outdoor projects. It is versatile in the different surfaces it can be applied.

Not to be confused with Gorilla’s iconic super glue, this construction glue is a durable, heavy-duty product. It is straightforward to apply and use with its versatility. What’s more, the fast dry time brings even more usability for easy application. 

It flexes and is fully waterproof when dried off so using it on outdoor projects brings no risks from natural elements of water or impact. Additionally, it can be sanded down and painted to give a flush look with the material when dried. 

The flexible nature of this adhesive makes it a suitable choice when filling up gaps or for surfaces that have spaces between them or are porous. Uneven surfaces were no problem in the application or filling in the recesses.

One caveat about using this heavy-duty adhesive is the design of the bottle. To have the adhesive be applied, the tip of the nozzle must be cut. However, there is no indication of where to cut, and if cut wrong, the cap can be impossible to replace and store away.

Quantity: 1 Cartridge | Volume: 9 fl oz | Set Time: 20 to 30 Seconds | Cure Time: ‎24 Hours | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Weather-resistant, Waterproof

3. Henry 356-030 - Best for Floor Coverings

A highly recommended and used adhesive for floor covering adhesives is this multi-purpose adhesive from Henry. Whether it is a professional or a small home project, this can serve its purpose well in easy application and versatility. It has an incredible grip, so once applied, there is no chance for it to be removed easily.

Overall the design of the container makes the adhesive easily accessible with a top open lid. Scooping the adhesive out and applying it at your discretion is excellent for any sized project or task you have. 

When it comes to the bonding power that the Henry adhesive has, it remains solid in performance. Following the instructions during application is vital to have the best results; that means letting it dry a bit to a sticky consistency.

Once the glue has been laid down, it is easy to clean up so long as it is before it has been set. This makes for a clean and controlled application overall with the best quality results. A damp towel is enough to tidy up the edges of the application or clean up any excess glue.

One advantage to this adhesive is the easy cleanup with a damp towel. It remains wet until it comes into contact with air. This can be a nuisance but should be considered nonetheless. It can also be considered a drawback as the glue will be ineffective if it is dampened even a bit.

Quantity: 1 Container | Volume: 31.98 fl oz | Set Time: N/A | Cure Time: More than 24 Hours | Dry Color: Yellow | Resistance: N/A

4. Rhino Glue Heavy Duty

The Heavy Duty glue variant from Rhino Glue has a rugged and extremely versatile formula. It can work on a range of materials with different densities and textures. It is a solid and capable adhesive with a fast-drying time and durability that can withstand many obstacles.

When working with adhesives, the application is the most crucial part. Applying Rhino heavy-duty adhesive to material and allowing it to bond is an easy experience. With the short bond time, there was no fumbling with clamps or repositioning necessary. 

Additionally, the actual strength of the glue is incredible. Only a small amount of adhesive is required to create a lasting bond between the two surfaces. While this is an incredible feat with such a small amount of glue, it also means a regular container lasts a long time. 

What’s more impressive is the durability alongside the strength of the adhesive. Rated to withstand heat and moisture as well as impacts, the Rhino adhesive can secure any surfaces together for a lasting bond. 

Making mistakes is bound to happen at times while making repairs or working on a project. With the Rhino glue, there is a strong grip formed almost instantly. As such, if used on vinyl, there is a possibility that the adhesive will bond and discolor the material, leaving little room for error. 

Quantity: 1 Bottle | Volume: 1.4 fl oz | Set Time: 60 Seconds | Cure Time: 20 Minutes, Overnight | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Withstands Heat, Moisture, Impact, Vibrations, Shock

5. J-B Weld 8237 PlasticWeld

Truly a unique option from J-B Weld is this two-part epoxy putty stick. Once mixed together, it creates a polymer that can be manipulated to adhere and fill up gaps in the material's surface. It has been rated to work with plastics and similar materials.

One of the most remarkable features of this adhesive is the NSF certification. This guarantee opens up the range of possibilities and use-case scenarios for repairs and projects involving potable water.

Drying out the glue is an easy 20-25 minutes, with a complete cure setting in within two to three hours. Once cured, the glue has an off-white color to it. Additionally, the modifications that can be done after curing to have a cleaner result are great features to have. 

As for the strength of the adhesive, it has a strength of 600 PSI, which is by no means a light performance. When being kneaded to fit into a gap or recess, the glue may be weak, but it won’t be going anywhere once it has been allowed to settle. 

Waterproofing does not seem to be a strong suit for the J-B Weld adhesive. It has been noticed that when using this glue in projects exposed to moisture, the epoxy takes a hit. When used on pipes or outdoor projects, the adhesive would not be able to maintain the bond. 

Quantity: 1 Stick | Volume: 2 fl oz | Set Time: 20 to 25 Minutes | Cure Time: 3 Hours | Dry Color: Off-white | Resistance: Withstands 250°F to 300°F

6. Loctite Vinyl, Fabric, & Plastic Adhesive

Coming out of Canada, this adhesive by Loctite is a great tool for vinyl repairs as well as plastics and fabric. It has a long-lasting repair that remains clean in its finish even after extended amounts of time. With waterproofing and a flexible consistency even when dry, it is capable of indoor and outdoor use.

Having an adhesive that is flexible enough to maintain its bond even after drying is extremely useful when working with plastics. The Loctite adhesive performed well in keeping its adhesion and also had a clean finish to it. 

As it dries clearly, there is no need to compromise a repair for a messy appearance. The clear finish will make it seem as if there is no glue necessary in the first place. This clear finish is maintained over time with no yellowing or becoming brittle, which gives the repair that much more longevity.

Of course, when it comes to vinyl and plastic adhesives, waterproofing is an important feature to have. The waterproofing in the Loctite glue is up to par and effectively keeps moisture out well. Indoor and outdoor repair jobs are no issue for this adhesive. 

Loctite has specifically designed this adhesive to work with plastics and similar materials like vinyl. Join these materials to different material types and densities can cause the glue to underperform. Special care must be made to ensure the material falls under the use cases of this adhesive.

Quantity: 1 Tube | Volume: 1 fl oz | Set Time: 10 Minutes | Cure Time: ‎24 Hours | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Waterproof, Withstands Bending & Torsion

7. Henry Vinyl Tile Repair (VCT) Adhesive

A straightforward adhesive, this vinyl tile repair adhesive from Henry does what it says and does it well. Applying this glue to vinyl tiles will have them set securely with little evidence of a repair ever being done. Indeed a valuable tool to have, be it for a complete renovation or a touch-up of your vinyl tiles.

If working on vinyl tiles, it is a no-brainer to have a bottle of Henry Vinyl Tile Repair adhesive handy. It is quite literally designed to adhere to vinyl tiles specifically, so it has all the qualities you might need in a vinyl adhesive. 

Having flexibility in the glue’s consistency before hardening was great for filling in uneven surfaces before placing the tile. Additionally, working with flexible plastics becomes more manageable when using adhesives of similar viscosity. 

Once the glue has been set and hardened, it forms an almost permanent bond between the base flooring and the vinyl tile. Only a small quantity is necessary to create this strong adhesion.

Once the glue hardens a bit to a tacky consistency, it can be easily applied to the surface and worked with for a clean result. The finished product blends in with the rest of the tiling and is almost imperceptible.

While the Henry vinyl tile adhesive may be designed for repairing and placing tiles, it is not the one-stop solution to every vinyl tile-related problem. When dealing with repairs where only a portion of the tile has become loose, it is lacking. It is evident that it performs best when the full tile is replaced.

Quantity: 1 Bottle | Volume: 6 fl oz | Set Time: N/A | Cure Time: N/A | Dry Color: ‎Yellow | Resistance: N/A

What is the Best Glue for Vinyl?

If you are looking to identify the best glue for vinyl, a table is provided below for a comparison of details such as quantity per package in units, volume measured in fluid ounces, set time in minutes and seconds, cure time in hours and minutes, dry color, and resistance characteristics.

Product Quantity Volume Set Time Cure Time Dry Color Resistance
RH Adhesives HH-66 1 Can 8 fl oz N/A 2 to 5 Minutes Clear Waterproof, Withstands Weather Extremes, Oil, Fuel, Grease, & More
Gorilla Construction Adhesive 1 Cartridge 9 fl oz 20 to 30 Seconds ‎24 Hours Clear Weather-resistant, Waterproof
Henry 356-030 1 Container 31.98 fl oz N/A More than 24 Hours Yellow N/A
Rhino Glue 1 Bottle 1.4 fl oz 60 Seconds 20 Minutes, Overnight Clear Withstands Heat, Moisture, Impact, Vibrations, Shock
J-B Weld 8237 1 Stick 2 fl oz 20 to 25 Minutes 3 Hours Off-white Withstands 250°F to 300°F
Loctite Adhesive 1 Tube 1 fl oz 10 Minutes ‎24 Hours Clear Waterproof, Withstands Bending & Torsion
Henry Vinyl Adhesive 1 Bottle 6 fl oz N/A N/A ‎Yellow N/A

Buying Guide for the Best Vinyl Glue

Investing in an adhesive to touch up vinyl is a smart choice not just for the durability of the vinyl but also for environmental care. Vinyl does not break down naturally, so to keep it out of the dumps, you should repair your vinyl as much as possible. 

Maintaining vinyl requires specific qualities in the adhesive; otherwise, there is a chance of it not working. Here are things you should keep in mind when looking for a suitable glue for you. 

Types of Vinyl Glues

Vinyl glue has four types that differ in their strengths and use cases. They are cyanoacrylates, epoxies, polyurethane, and silicone glue. Each one is suited to a specific kind of vinyl and performs differently. 

Cyanoacrylates are also known as superglue and have a fast setting time. They use air to harden and create a solid mesh-like bond to the surface of the material. 

Epoxies are traditionally a mixture of two formulas to create a strong adhesive. These glue types are great with rigid types of vinyl as they can hold shape as well as fill any recesses. 

Polyurethane glue is versatile in the materials it can adhere to. Thin and flexible vinyl fall under these material types. It requires preparation of the surface in order to create abrasions for the glue to grip. 

Silicone is suitable for vinyl and has a definite shape. The strength of the bond is determined by the amount of contamination on the material's surface. Therefore, keeping it dust and debris-free is of utmost importance when gluing. 

Unique Features

With variations in formula across manufacturers and brands, there are certain features in the glue that set it apart from the others. Whether it is in compatibility with vinyl or other areas, every adhesive is unique. 

Taking note of what sizes the glue bottles are available in is important. Not having enough adhesive to complete a repair can mess up the entire process; leaving areas incomplete just means another necessary repair in the near future. 

There are a variety of sizes for glue bottles, some even coming in multiple packs. Determine how much glue is suitable for your project and buy accordingly. 

On the package of the bottle or product description is a list of compatible surfaces the glue was designed for. Match the material you are working with to an adhesive that is able to form a bond on it. Using the wrong glue with the wrong material can result in a weak or nonexistent bond. 

The application of the adhesive is one of the most critical steps in the repair process. A proper application can ensure the repair lasts longer and also has a more clean result; the repair will be flush with the material. 

Additionally, there are situations where the surface to be glued is in a small, hard-to-reach area. To help increase accessibility and ensure a clean application, the nozzle and tube shape of the bottle should be taken into account. 

Depending on the extraction method of the glue, it can determine how steady the glue is removed. For example, a squeeze bottle allows you to control how quickly the glue is removed for slow, precise work or faster and larger applications. Furthermore, the nozzle design can affect how finely the glue can be applied. 

Surface Preparation

Vinyl is a smooth surface that picks up dirt and oils easily. To ensure the bond made is durable, the surface should be prepped before applying the adhesive. 

Cleaning the surface to remove any contaminants is the first step to preparing the surface. Next, sand or rough up the surface to create a texture that the adhesive can grip and create the bond. These small measures will go a long way in keeping the strength of the adhesion at its most efficient and stand the test of time. 

What types of glues are suitable for bonding vinyl materials?

Several types of glue are suitable for bonding vinyl materials. Contact cement and cyanoacrylate can be effective, as can specific vinyl adhesives, which have been formulated for optimal bonding with vinyl. When choosing a glue, it's crucial to ensure it is suitable for vinyl to avoid potential damage or weak bonds.

Is it necessary to prepare the vinyl surface before applying glue?

Yes, it is generally necessary to prepare the vinyl surface before applying glue to ensure a strong bond. This usually involves cleaning the area to remove any dust, dirt, or oils that could interfere with the adhesive. The method of preparation can depend on the specific type of glue and the manufacturer's instructions should always be followed for the best results.

Can I use glues for vinyl on other materials?

While it's technically possible to use glues for vinyl on other materials, their effectiveness can vary depending on the specific material. Vinyl adhesives are formulated specifically to bond with the plasticizers in vinyl, and may not adhere as effectively to other materials. For the best results, it's recommended to use an adhesive that is specifically designed for the material in question.

How to remove glue residue from vinyl surfaces?

To remove glue residue from vinyl surfaces, a gentle yet effective method is often to apply a small amount of rubbing alcohol or adhesive remover to a soft, lint-free cloth and then rub the residue gently until it comes off. It's crucial to avoid abrasive tools or harsh cleansers that could damage the vinyl's finish. Always perform a spot test in an inconspicuous area first to ensure the cleaning agent won't harm the material.

Can I paint over glued vinyl surfaces?

Yes, you can paint over glued vinyl surfaces, but proper preparation is crucial for good results. This preparation might include cleaning the surface thoroughly, sanding it lightly to help the paint adhere better, and applying a suitable primer. It's important to note that vinyl-specific paint or a paint that is suitable for plastics should be used for best adhesion and durability.

After a comprehensive analysis of the best glues for vinyl, it's essential to highlight the top three expert recommendations. These exceptional selections were determined based on their performance, durability, versatility, and user reviews. Each stands out for a particular purpose, ready to fulfill your specific vinyl adhesive needs.

Amongst the seven best glues discussed, RH Adhesives HH-66 proves to be the best for vinyl repair. It offers an incredibly strong bond, designed to handle vinyl material as well as vinyl-laminated fabrics. Additionally, this adhesive demonstrates exceptional resistance to extreme temperatures and various chemicals making it an ideal option.

For indoor and outdoor projects, the Gorilla Construction Adhesive is a good option. Not only does it ensure versatility in the surfaces it adheres to, but it also provides a strong bond that is both weather-resistant and waterproof. Equally important, it can be sanded down and painted to give a seamless look with the material when dried.

When it comes to floor coverings, the Henry 356-030 is the right choice. This multi-purpose adhesive is favored for its easy application, versatility, and exceptional gripping power. Its accessible containers make it suitable for projects of any size, and the cleanup process is straightforward with a damp towel.

In conclusion, our top three recommendations serve as a dependable guide for choosing the perfect glue for your vinyl project. Regardless of the situation at hand, be it repair work, indoor and outdoor projects, or floor coverings, these expert recommendations will make your decision process smoother and deliver outstanding results. So, gear up for your next vinyl project, knowing you have the ideal adhesive for the job.

Do you think gluing plexiglass is difficult? Well, it isn't if you have the correct glue and know the right method. 

Plexiglass is often used as an alternative to glass in various projects because it is transparent and, unlike glass, it can tolerate high pressure easily. Needless to say, this flexible and durable material might find multiple uses in and around the home. 

Unfortunately, many people are still not sure how to glue it. 

Actually, Plexiglass does not glue in the regular sense at all. It requires a chemical weld that allows two surfaces to melt and can fuse into each other. This creates an irreversible bond that you cannot separate, no matter how hard you try. So, today we've created a list of the best glues for acrylic Plexiglass to help you find the perfect choice for your project.

Listed below are the best glues for acrylic plexiglass:

  • J-B Weld: J-B Weld sealant and adhesive is renowned for its robust adhesion and forms a tough, weather-resistant seal. It takes 4-6 hours to dry, longer than other options like Loctite and Gorilla and has delicate packaging which may cause some glue to squirt out.
  • Loctite: Loctite is a cyanoacrylate superglue that is recognized for its high-temperature resistance. It has a fast-setting, moisture and chemical-resistant formula. The smaller packaging limits its use in larger projects.
  • Gorilla: The Gorilla super glue gel sets within 1 minute and requires no clamping. Its high viscosity makes it easy to apply without making a mess, compared to thinner solutions like Starbond. Not entirely transparent when dry.
  • Starbond: The Starbond glue offers low-viscosity instant adhesive properties. It has a quick drying time and a clog-free stopper for smooth application. Due to its thin consistency, it's more prone to spills and messes, unlike Gorilla.
  • Super Glue: Super Glue is an economical epoxy adhesive that sets in about 10 minutes and cures fully in 24 hours, allowing for a longer working time. It appears slightly yellowish upon drying.

1. J-B Weld - Best Overall

Who could skip out on the world's strongest bond available in a conveniently sized tube? This 100% silicone sealant by J-B Weld is as strong as commercial glues get. They come in compact packaging weighing 90 ml and in several colors.

J-B Weld is one of the more popular brands we included on our review list. With over 40 years of experience and hundreds of great reviews of this product online, we decided to test it on Plexiglass to see what we get. 

One of the first things we noted was that this glue is an RTV (Room Temperature Vulcanized) silicone sealant, which sets at room temperature.

Apart from that, it is almost effortless to use. Also, we found that the silicone forms a tough, waterproof, weather-resistant seal on almost all surfaces, especially Plexiglass. After a few days of using it, we saw no sign of shrinkage or cracks, and the glue was strong enough to hold larger pieces. 

Moreover, we found that it worked well on automotive products, ceramic, cloth, carpet, rubber, windows, door frames, and so on. That said, this product is versatile enough for diverse projects around the house and beyond. 

And finally, this product sets clear within an hour and is resistant to mold and mildew.

We decided to include this product on our list after testing its versatile uses, beyond its adhesive properties on Plexiglass. And it certainly did not disappoint. However, we wish the seams were sealed more tightly. 

That said, some amount of glue squirted out when we squeezed it. So, buyers should ensure that they handle the product delicately.

Bond Type: Epoxy | Drying Time: 4-6 hours | Viscosity: Thick/high viscosity | Volume: 3 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -40°C to 200°C | Water Resistance: Yes | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to fuels, oils, and other chemicals

2. Loctite - Best for High Temperatures

This adhesive might sound familiar to those who often work with home improvement products. That said, the 1365882 model is a professional-grade liquid superglue by the well-known brand Loctite. As the name suggests, this superglue is incredibly strong and quick, making it one of the most reliable options we found.

Many people have superglue lying around the house, but can it be used to glue Plexiglass? Yes, absolutely. Therefore, we couldn't skip this versatile superglue by Loctite as we set out to find the best glues for Plexiglass. 

Although you can use this glue for DIY projects at home, the ingredients are professional-grade and ideal for heavy-duty repairs. 

Often an issue DIYers face while using glue is the drying up of the adhesive at the nozzle. To prevent such problems, this glue comes in compact packaging with a pinpoint nozzle for precise and drip-free application. 

Another positive aspect of the bottle design is that the screw-on cap sits perfectly in place and seals the nozzle to prevent clogging.

Moreover, it has a fast-setting formula that is resistant to moisture and chemicals, so you can use this adhesive on Plexiglass projects using water. Speaking of which, an essential aspect of Plexiglass is the clarity after drying. And, this product offers just that- transparency after drying, without any clamping required.

Overall, this product checked all the boxes of a high-quality adhesive. However, we wanted a little bit more of it. 

So, if there were one thing that needed improvement, it would be the lack of size options. That said, we wish the product were available in a larger bottle for bigger projects. 

Bond Type: Cyanoacrylate | Drying Time: < 30 seconds | Viscosity: Thin/low viscosity | Volume: 0.7 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -55°C to 120°C | Water Resistance: Yes | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to mild acids and alkalis

3. Gorilla - Best Dry Time

Next, we have another popular favorite - the 7700104 glue by Gorilla. This glue comes in a tiny bottle containing 0.71 ounces of the product. But the quantity may be sufficient for most jobs because one drop is enough for about one square inch of most surfaces. So, if you are looking for a quick-drying glue that requires no clamping, consider this option.

First off, the glue began solidifying within 30 seconds of application and did not need any clamps to hold it in place. While this feature comes in handy for DIY projects, you need to be quick while working with it because it dries in under a minute.

Also, the superior Gorilla formula does not run if the tube is held vertically, giving you ultimate control over the amount to apply.

Furthermore, a lesser-known fact about this product is that it contains tiny rubber particles, which improve its bond with materials. So, after using it for your Plexiglass project, you can use the same adhesive for various other purposes. 

That said, this versatile formula works equally well on plastic, metal, rubber, ceramic, fabric, and paper. 

For best results, use this product after shaking the bottle first and then tapping the bottom to bring the contents near the nozzle. Next, apply one drop of glue for one sq. inch of material and lightly press the object for 30 seconds. Rest assured, this is enough to form strong and long-lasting bonds.

While we had no major qualms with this product, there was a slight difference that we noticed over the course of testing it. 

Although the glue sets pretty fast, the dried and finished result is not clear like other adhesives. Still, this is not a big deal and can be overlooked.

Bond Type: Cyanoacrylate | Drying Time: < 10 seconds | Viscosity: Thick/high viscosity | Volume: 0.7 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -45°C to 90°C | Water Resistance: Yes | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to water and most chemicals

4. Starbond

Are you wondering which glue type is superior - superglue or CA glue? In fact, the two are more or less the same substance, but with different names. 

That said, this CA glue has instant adhesive properties with medium viscosity, just like super glue. At the same time, this glue flows like oil from the tube, allowing for a smooth application on various materials.

Right off the bat, what's different about this product is its viscosity. While other glues are thicker with a consistency similar to honey or even more viscous, this one is much thinner. In fact, it has a viscosity measurement of 150 cPs, similar to the consistency of motor oil. However, the fluidity of this option has its pros and cons. 

So, while it flows easily and is better to apply, it is also more prone to spills and messes. But the positive aspect is that it dries in a short amount of time, relieving you of the work required to clamp it. And since the product is made of cyanoacrylate, it has the brilliant ability to form bonds quickly.

Moreover, one of its additional features involves the inclusion of two cap applicators of different types. You can also switch to the other in case one gets clogged up. Not to mention how it also comes with a clog-free stopper and a bunch of micro tips for precise application.

As we mentioned earlier, the motor oil-like consistency is a double-edged sword. On the one hand, it allows the product to flow through a very fine micro tip for smooth application. On the other hand, it has a higher chance of clogging up.

Bond Type: Cyanoacrylate | Drying Time: < 10 seconds | Viscosity: Thin/low viscosity | Volume: 2 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -51°C to 80°C | Water Resistance: Yes | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to water and most chemicals

5. Super Glue

Next, we have a fast-setting plastic fusion glue that sets in a mere ten minutes. As the name suggests, the Super Glue Plastic Fusion Epoxy Adhesive works well on plastics. At the same time, it works equally well on Plexiglass. However, the USP of this product is the unique syringe feature that helps it release glue in a controlled manner.

First of all, it is easy to be fooled by the low cost of this product. But the results of this adhesive are far from average, and we say this from our first-hand experience.

If you know a thing or two about glues, you might've heard about epoxy adhesives too. Epoxies are one of the strongest and most reliable glues, and this product is no different. 

That said, the 15277-12 model has 4000 PSI strength holding power, which is more than enough for bonding materials. Once you apply the glue, it starts bonding within the first eight minutes of application, and the curing process takes about 24 hours to complete.

Another feature we wanted to highlight is the unique bottle the contents come in. Upon a closer look, the dispenser is designed like a syringe with two different compartments carrying different materials. Once you press the syringe, one part releases the resin while the other removes the hardener. Both of them combine to form a super solid glue for Plexiglass and other materials.

One of the things we liked about this glue is the long working time it provides. But if you are in a hurry to fix repairs within a time limit, this option might not be the best one. So, choose wisely if you have such a project in mind. Also, the glue isn't completely clear; instead, it appears slightly yellowish upon drying.

Bond Type: Epoxy | Drying Time: 30 minutes | Viscosity: Thick/high viscosity | Volume: 1 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -40°C to 100°C | Water Resistance: Yes | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to most chemicals

6. WELD-ON

What do you look for when you need glue exclusively for Plexiglass? You need glue that fuses the materials together as if they have been welded. This is precisely what you get with this model by Weld-on. Simply put, it is a clear formula that bonds materials with a cement-like strength.

One of the things we wondered about while reviewing these glues for acrylics was how specific these adhesives could get. It's one thing to say that glue is multipurpose and can be used on various surfaces. And, it's another to claim that the adhesive is specifically designed to form irreversibly strong bonds with Plexiglass.

This got us intrigued enough to give Weld-on a shot. For starters, consider how multipurpose glues are excellent at holding two pieces together, but they do not actually fuse the surfaces.

On the other hand, Weld-on changes the molecular structure of the acrylic and softens its surface when applied. After joining two pieces of Plexiglass, these two parts harden again as if they have been welded into each other.  

The product itself is thin, like a liquid, with a consistency similar to water, so you may even pour it into the dispenser. But it dries up pretty quickly, giving you only one minute of working time and three minutes before it sets.

Upon testing, we found that this glue dries and sets pretty fast, along with being an excellent choice for Plexiglass. Yet, there was one issue that we could not overlook. That said, the glue is so thin that it is prone to spillage, and thus it's possible to mess up the work area if you're not careful.

Bond Type: Solvent-based | Drying Time: 10-20 minutes | Viscosity: Medium viscosity | Volume: 4 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -30°C to 80°C | Water Resistance: No | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to most chemicals

7. SCIGRIP

Now that you have seen a few types of glue, it's time to check out a slightly different bonding agent - acrylic cement. This is one of the easiest solutions to work with because it is pretty thick and easy to apply. Not to mention how this is one of the best options for beginners.

One of the first aspects we noticed was the thickness of the product, which is medium-bodied compared to others that are much thinner. Due to this consistency, it becomes easy for newbies to use this glue on Plexiglass. 

Also, this product is a high-strength solvent that does not need much time to set. Merely five minutes after the application, you have a dry surface that is transparent without a yellowish tinge. The good thing about this product is that it achieves 80% of its strength within 24 hours of application. But, the drying begins within minutes, eliminating the need to use clamps.

Furthermore, the adhesive is a low-VOC product which indicates a significantly lower release of harmful chemicals in the air. And while we liked this aspect, what impressed us even more, was its ability to securely bond objects apart from Plexiglass. Indeed, this adhesive works well on PVC, butyrate, polycarbonate, ABS, and styrene.

Overall, this product did not have any flaws worth pointing out, so it is safe to say that we were pretty pleased with its results. However, we can think of something that might be bothersome for some people. Despite its thickness, it is pretty messy to work with because of its container.

Bond Type: Solvent-based | Drying Time: 10-20 minutes | Viscosity: Medium viscosity | Volume: 1.5 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -30°C to 80°C | Water Resistance: No | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to most chemicals

8. Aron Alpha

We decided to include another quality adhesive on our list. This glue is the AA490 model by the brand Aron Alpha. The product comes in simple packaging, which users need to squeeze for careful application. Also, the glue dries clear so that you can apply it in visible areas for decoration.

If you are someone who is engaged in frequent art projects or uses glues regularly, then this option might be worth considering. When we received this glue, the first thing we wanted to do was test it directly on Plexiglass. The results were pretty good, and we found that the glue set quite fast.

After that, we tried testing it on various other materials to find if it was compatible with different types of surfaces. When it came to paper and plastics, this glue could bond those surfaces reasonably quickly. 

But when it came to metal, the story was slightly different. After applying the glue, the metal pieces didn't show any sign of bonding, and it was only after an hour or so that the glue dried out. Apart from this, the glue bottle was easy to use and glide over surfaces.

Although this option performs decently across the board, it isn't as durable as others on this list. While other glues are resistant to heat and impact, this one does not provide any such benefit. In fact, the glue bottle clearly states that it must be stored away from heat.

Bond Type: Cyanoacrylate | Drying Time: < 10 seconds | Viscosity: Thin/low viscosity | Volume: 0.7 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -50°C to 80°C | Water Resistance: Yes | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to most chemicals

What is the Best Glue for Acrylic Plexiglass

If you're in the market for the best glue for acrylic plexiglass, the table below provides a side-by-side comparison of bond type, drying time (in hours, minutes, and seconds), viscosity, volume measured in fluid ounces, temperature resistance range in Celsius, water resistance, and chemical resistance.

Product Bond Type Drying Time Viscosity Volume Temperature Resistance Water Resistance Chemical Resistance
J-B Weld Epoxy 4-6 hours Thick/high viscosity 3 fl oz -40°C to 200°C Yes Resistant to fuels, oils, and other chemicals
Loctite Cyanoacrylate < 30 seconds Thin/low viscosity 0.7 fl oz -55°C to 120°C Yes Resistant to mild acids and alkalis
Gorilla Cyanoacrylate < 10 seconds Thick/high viscosity 0.7 fl oz -45°C to 90°C Yes Resistant to water and most chemicals
STARBOND Cyanoacrylate < 10 seconds Thin/low viscosity 2 fl oz -51°C to 80°C Yes Resistant to water and most chemicals
Super Glue Epoxy 30 minutes Thick/high viscosity 1 fl oz -40°C to 100°C Yes Resistant to most chemicals
WELD-ON Solvent-based 10-20 minutes Medium viscosity 4 fl oz -30°C to 80°C No Resistant to most chemicals
SCIGRIP Solvent-based 10-20 minutes Medium viscosity 1.5 fl oz -30°C to 80°C No Resistant to most chemicals
Aron Alpha Cyanoacrylate < 10 seconds Thin/low viscosity 0.7 fl oz -50°C to 80°C Yes Resistant to most chemicals

Buying Guide for the Best Glue for Acrylic Plexiglass

Here are a few things to consider before buying glue for bonding Plexiglass:

  1. Glue Type

The most crucial step is to read and check the label to find out the glue type before purchasing. While some glues can bond to almost any object, some are only specific to one or two materials. 

You'll need to figure out if the glue you pick can indeed bond something as tricky as Plexiglass. Sometimes, people pick up a glue type that is the strongest at joining two surfaces, but it would still not be enough to hold Plexiglass.

As we mentioned before, two acrylic surfaces need to fuse together instead of simply joining. So, which type of glue would be the best for Plexiglass?

Here are a few options:

    • Cyanoacrylates or Superglue

The most common types are called CAs or cyanoacrylates and are also known as superglue. These glues are compatible with Plexiglass and are very quick to dry. They do not require any curing or setting time. But they might be difficult for beginners to use because they do not allow much time to work with the surface.

    • Epoxy Glues

Another type of glue that is often used is epoxy glue, which comes in two parts. There are epoxies that come as one component, but they are not adequate for gluing Plexiglass, so you must avoid those. 

On the other hand, two-component epoxies consisting of resin and hardener are very effective when it comes to bonding acrylics. 

  1. Drying and Curing Time

Drying time can vary vastly depending on the type of glue. Super Glue bonds are pretty much instant, and only a few minutes should be enough to fuse Plexiglass together. On the other hand, epoxy glues take hours to dry and a minimum of 24 hours to cure completely. 

If you need a stronger bond, a longer cure time will definitely help. Generally, epoxy bonds are much stronger than superglues, so make your selection wisely. 

Also, some glues may require additional pressure to encourage bond formation. This additional time is known as clamp time. It is essentially the time needed to hold the two surfaces together. 

Details about the drying, curing, and clamping time should be mentioned on the back of the glue bottle. If you are purchasing it online, make sure to read the description before finalizing your decision.

  1. Surface Residue

If you need to glue decorative pieces, the color of the glue should not ruin the look of the item. Thus, it is best to go for an adhesive that turns transparent after drying. Since Plexiglass is clear anyway, a yellow or grey residue film from the glue would not be aesthetically pleasing.

Can I use superglue on acrylic Plexiglass?

Yes, you can use superglue on acrylic Plexiglass. It's important to note that superglue can sometimes cause a noticeable fogging effect around the joint, which might not be desirable in some uses. For cleaner bonds, consider using acrylic cement, which is specially designed for bonding acrylic materials.

Can I use epoxy on acrylic Plexiglass?

Yes, you can use epoxy on acrylic Plexiglass and can create a strong bond. Keep in mind that since epoxy is not as clear as some other adhesives, it can be visible when cured. For applications requiring a clear, nearly invisible bond, a specialized acrylic adhesive may be a better choice.

Can I use silicone on acrylic Plexiglass?

Yes, you can use silicone on acrylic Plexiglass, particularly for sealing purposes. For bonding or gluing acrylic plexiglass, silicone is not usually the adhesive of choice due to its flexibility and lower bonding strength. In such cases, a solvent-based adhesive designed for acrylics, such as acrylic cement, would be recommended.

How do I remove glue from acrylic Plexiglass?

To remove glue from acrylic Plexiglass, use specialized adhesive removers or a mild solution of soap and water. It's important to avoid using abrasive tools or harsh chemicals that can scratch or damage the acrylic surface. Always test the cleaning method on a small inconspicuous area first to ensure it does not harm the Plexiglass.

Is it possible to glue acrylic to wood?

Yes, it is possible to glue acrylic to wood. Epoxy or a specialized plastic-to-wood adhesive is commonly used for this purpose because of its strength and versatility. Ensure both surfaces are properly prepared and clean for the best adhesive performance.

So that was our list of the best glues for Plexiglass available on the market. We hope this review-based guide helps you find the correct adhesive for your next project. 

And while all the products we listed performed well - both in quality and functionality, we had a couple of favorites that we'd like to mention. 

Our first pick has to be the 31310 glue by J-B Weld. This option was the overall best and also worked on most surfaces. What’s more, it is incredibly strong, long-lasting, and versatile enough to replace all your other glues. 

Another one of our top favorites would be the 1365882 model by Loctite. The highlight of this fantastic product was its pinpoint nozzle for delicate applications and its resistance to high temperatures.

And that’s it for today, see you next time!

Venturing into the world of glues for plastic eyeglass frames may seem challenging. The J-B Weld Plastic Bonder excels in bonding strength, while the versatile and quick-drying Gorilla Super Glue is another standout. Skim through our precise reviews for a well-informed selection.

The best possible solution during this time is to either fix them yourself or get hold of someone who can do the job for you. And in case you are planning to do it all by yourself, it is best to select a glue that can fix the eyeglass in no time. Sometimes fixing them is the only option as completely replacing the glass might not be a choice. 

But when you go to the market, you will surely get perplexed by the number of options out there. So, to bail you out of the situation, we have designed this guide with the top 5 products worth trying. You will also find a buyer’s guide towards the end so that you don’t miss out on any important details. 

Listed below are the best glues for plastic eyeglass frames:

  • J-B Weld Plastic Bonder: J-B Weld Plastic Bonder is a glue that stands out for its exceptional bond strength of 3770 PSI. It sometimes struggles with inconsistent adhesive distribution.
  • Gorilla: Gorilla super glue offers 10 to 45 seconds of drying time which is one of the fastest among the options, making it superior in cases that demand quick fixes, with a maximum cure time of 24 hours. The quantity is smaller than the J-B Weld.
  • Aleene's: Aileene's glue has wide surface compatibility, from porous to semi-porous materials. The super-strong nature can result in unwanted adhesion if not carefully applied.
  • E6000: The E600 adhesive has a unique resistance to high temperatures and the ability to alter its color post-drying, it stands out for its versatility. The lack of an applicator can make the application process challenging.
  • Starbond EM-150: The Starbond EM-150 is a lab-tested glue that is accompanied by additional micro applicators, ensuring precision in small crack repairs, a feature not commonly available in the list. Its weak packaging can potentially lead to damage during delivery.

1. J-B Weld Plastic Bonder - Best for Quick-setting Repairs

One of the first recommendations that we have for you is the J-B Weld 50139 Plastic Bonder which is best known for its quick-setting formula. You can rest assured that once you repair the eyeglass frames with this solution, they will last for a long time. Within no time, it will get cured to form a robust and permanent bond. 

What we liked the best about this product is that not only does it fix your glasses, but it also fills the gap. Hence, you can have your glasses fixed in no time. If you do not want to go to the shop to fix your glass and engage in DIY plastic repairs, this is one of the best options. And the best part is that it comes with a sealable cap, which prevents the glue from drying out when not in use.

On top of that, the strength of this plastic bonder is noteworthy. With a strength of 3770 PSI, you can rest assured that this glue works as an excellent adhesive. Once you fix your eyeglasses with this glue, they will stay that way for a long time. 

Moreover, it is pretty simple to work with this item. Once you apply it, all you have to do is wait for about 15 minutes for the glue to set in. Long story short, it reduces your work time considerably. 

Some users find the application process of J-B Weld 50139 Plastic Bonder challenging due to the dispenser's unequal adhesive distribution, despite its straightforward working process and quick setting time.

Quantity: 1 Double Syringe | Volume: 0.85 fl oz | Cure Time: 30 Minutes | Dry Color: Black | Resistance: Resists Shock, Vibrations, Shrinkage, Expansion

2. Gorilla - Best for Precision & Versatility

The Gorilla ‎7805001 super Glue is one of the best adhesives that you can get your hands on for fixing plastic eyeglass frames. Because it includes a variety of tips in its package, you can use it for a range of applications, and that too completely mess-free. It does not matter how small the surface is; you can apply it anywhere you need to with utmost precision. 

Once this glue dries up, you won’t even understand that it had been applied in the first place. It offers a seamless application and a discreet appearance. So, be it plastic sunglasses or eyeglasses, you can fix all kinds of eyewear with it. 

Even better, the glue hardly takes any time to dry up. You can expect it to dry up within a span of 10 to 45 seconds and get cured entirely within 24 hours. So, you will be ready to wear your fixed eyeglass in under a day’s time. 

Other than that, we were really impressed with how this glue can be used to fix a range of materials and not only plastic. We could not help but appreciate how versatile this item is, as we could use it on rubber, leather, ceramics, or wood. Irrespective of where you apply it, the bond will be quite strong.

Despite showing brilliant performance, we were not really happy with the quantity delivered. The tube is pretty small and is good to fix eyeglasses only. But in case you are planning to use it on bigger surfaces, you might need more than one bottle. Otherwise, you may run out of glue sooner than later. 

Quantity: 1 Bottle | Volume: 0.53 oz | Cure Time: 24 Hours | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Resists Impact

3. Aleene's - Best for DIY Jewelry Makers

Next up on the list, we have Aleene's 94830 29131 jewelry & metal glue. This super glue is best if you are looking for an adhesive that provides a good hold and a strong bond. This is best for DIY jewelry makers and is an excellent option for fixing your eyewear too. With this, you can fix your broken eyeglass in a matter of a few minutes. 

What is really noteworthy about this item is that it can work on a range of surfaces. Be it semi-porous or porous materials; this item can perform its wonders anywhere. So, you do not have to restrict yourself to using it just on eyeglasses. If you are feeling experimental, feel free to try it on glass beads, rubber, stones, and even beads. 

Moving on to the appearance, we would score it a perfect 10. Once the glue dries up, the finish is excellent and is undetectable. As it becomes completely clear when it dries up, it does not look blotchy and won’t feel like the eyeglass has been repaired. And even if you apply it on any other surface other than plastic, the finish will be the same. 

Also, the quantity provided in the package is pretty good. You can use it for all your DIY projects with much ease. And you do not need to buy multiple packs to wrap up the project as you get not 1 but 3 tubes in the pack. 

There’s only one downside to this item. It is super sticky, and you should be a little careful with the application process. We had applied it on Swarovski and because the glue was so strong that some parts of the crystal came off. We suggest that you check the strength of the glue before applying it. 

Quantity: 3 Tubes | Volume: 0.10 fl oz Each | Cure Time: N/A | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Waterproof

4. E6000

If you are on the lookout for an adhesive that is popular for its toughness and durability, the E6000 230010 craft adhesive is the best bet. Irrespective of the kind of substrate that you apply it on, this item will indeed work its magic. This provides a perfect bond, and you will be able to fix everything with it. 

While the tubes might look tiny, the adhesive is pretty powerful. This unique formula is well-suited to deliver top-notch performance and is preferred by users for both industrial-level and craft projects. So, you can understand how efficiently it can fix your plastic eyewear. 

Moreover, you can turn it into any color that you want once the glue dries up. So, it gets easy to make it match the color of the substance that you put it on. This makes it convenient for you to put it on any surface of your choice, as you can make it in any color.

Furthermore, this item is entirely non-inflammable when it gets cured. Once it gets cured, you can rest assured that it can handle a wide range of temperatures. To be honest, it is entirely temperature-resistant. So, if you use it for any DIY project that involves using high heat, it will handle it well.

There's no doubt that the product scores perfectly when it comes to performance. However, keep in mind that the application might seem a little difficult. The tube does not come with an applicator, and unless you apply it carefully, it might get blotchy.

Quantity: 1 Tube | Volume: 3.7 fl oz | Cure Time: At Least 24 Hours | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Waterproof, Temperature-resistant

5. Starbond EM-150

For a high gloss finish that provides a clear and hard coat, you should give the Starbond EM-150 ‎CECOMINOD040312 a try. This is a great opinion for fixing your plastic eyewear and also for filling wood cracks and the like. You can rest assured that this premium glue will provide nothing but outstanding output.

The best part about this item is that the manufacturer did not compromise on the quality at all. In fact, special attention has been paid to ensuring that the quality of this adhesive is top-notch. This industrial-grade adhesive undergoes proper tests in the lab before it gets packaged. So, there's no doubt that you can handle challenging projects with this item. 

On top of that, the application process of this product makes it very impressive. You will find additional applicators, stoppers, and a collection of tips for precise application, all included in the package. As a result, you do not have to visit the local supermarket for additional supplies. You can easily fix the tiniest of the cracks with micro-applicators. 

Moreover, this glue comes with a good shelf life. So, even if you do not end up using the entire file in one go, you can keep it saved for future use. It won't disappoint you as it will remain in the exact same condition for years if you store it well.

Despite scoring well on performance, we were not really impressed with the way this item was packaged. The box in which it arrived was a little torn, and we were worried that it got damaged. In case you face a similar problem, you can contact their customer support team to ask for a replacement. 

Quantity: 1 Bottle | Volume: 2 oz | Cure Time: N/A | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Waterproof

What is the Best Glue for Plastic Eyeglass Frames?

If you're looking for the best glue for plastic eyeglass frames, the table below provides a comparison of the quantity per package in units, volume measured in fluid ounces, cure time in hours and minutes, dry color, and resistance properties.

Product Quantity Volume Cure Time Dry Color Resistance
J-B Weld Plastic Bonder 1 Double Syringe 0.85 fl oz 30 Minutes Black Resists Shock, Vibrations, Shrinkage, Expansion
Gorilla 1 Bottle 0.53 oz 24 Hours Clear Resists Impact
Aleene’s 3 Tubes 0.10 fl oz Each N/A Clear Waterproof
E6000 1 Tube 3.7 fl oz At Least 24 Hours Clear Waterproof, Temperature-resistant
Starbond EM-150 1 Bottle 2 oz N/A Clear Waterproof

Buying Guide for the Best Glue for Plastic Eyeglass Frames

Before you can decide which item to go for, we would like to let you know about a few other important considerations. This will help you pick the best adhesive for your plastic eyeglasses. Let's take a look!

Curing Time

Most of the glues that we have mentioned on our list are super quick to dry. So, when you fix the eyeglasses with them, you can go back to wearing them in a few minutes. 

However, be cautious about selecting a glue that does not dry up too fast. In case you have shaky fingers, this will become a problem as you will hardly get any time to adjust the pieces. If that's the case with you, consider going with UV light glues. 

Simplicity of Use

Unless you are a pro, handling difficult-to-use glues means only one thing- mess. And we are sure that you would not like that. 

In order to avoid messy situations, it is best that you find an adhesive that involves an easy application process. Unless it is easy to apply, the results can turn out blotchy too. In case there is no micro-applicator included in the package and if you are planning to fix the eyeglasses with it, we suggest that you get some from the market. 

Durability

What good is a product if it does not last long? And adhesives are no different. So, it is always best to look for glues whose bond will not deteriorate soon. There are a few adhesives whose bonds start to weaken within a few months. 

We strongly advise that you remain cautious and not buy a product that comes with a similar problem. It is essential to fix your eyewear correctly so that it does not keep troubling you time and often. So, glue that lasts for a long time should be your ideal choice. 

Can I use regular household glue to repair my plastic eyeglass frames?

No, regular household glue is not recommended for repairing plastic eyeglass frames because it may not provide the necessary strength or longevity. Instead, use adhesives specifically designed for plastic materials.

Are glues for plastic eyeglass frames safe to use around the lenses?

Yes, glues for plastic eyeglass frames are generally safe to use around lenses, as long as the lenses do not come into direct contact with the adhesive. It's recommended to remove the lenses before a repair, if possible, to avoid potential damage.

Will gluing my plastic eyeglass frames together be as strong as a professional repair?

Gluing plastic eyeglass frames together will not be as strong as a professional repair. Professional services use specific techniques and materials optimized for durability in eyewear repairs.

How can I ensure a clean and precise repair job?

To ensure a clean and precise job, carefully clean the surfaces to be glued using rubbing alcohol or a mild detergent. Apply a minimal amount of adhesive using a toothpick, needle, or fine applicator to ensure accuracy and prevent messes.

The Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler is an outdoor air conditioner capable of cooling a large outdoor space at an affordable rate. That said, other coolers like the VAGKRI Evaporative Cooler and Hessaire MC18M may also be preferable, depending on the user’s needs.

Outdoor cooling can be a troubling prospect, particularly during the summers when the heat just won’t let up. Fortunately, you can use outdoor air conditioners to cool your outdoor patio, deck, or porch. The selection of outdoor air conditioners on the market is huge, which makes choosing one that fits your needs perfectly difficult. What follows is a comprehensive look at the 14 best outdoor AC units that you can consider when looking for a new cooling device.

Listed below are the best outdoor air conditioners:

  • Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler: The Hessaire MC37M air cooler is excellent for large spaces with its ability to cool about 950 square feet and a high CFM rating of 3,100. Its high power may result in noticeable noise compared to Honeywell's portable evaporative cooler.
  • VAGKRI Evaporative Cooler: An air cooler boasting three cooling methods - water, air, and ice. Powerful cooling for up to 700 square feet. While its 8-gallon water tank allows for long-duration cooling, the instruction manual's clarity lags behind other models.
  • Honeywell Portable Evaporative Cooler: The Honeywell evaporative cooler has a compact design, ideal for medium-sized outdoor spaces. The smaller size and coverage area of only 350 square feet make it less effective for larger spaces compared to the Hessaire MC37M.
  • Hessaire MC18M Portable Evaporative Cooler:  The Hessaire MC18M is an affordable and lightweight option. It can cool medium to semi-large spaces, covering up to 500 square feet. This cooler has fewer secondary features, in comparison with the VAGKRI evaporative cooler.
  • Honeywell CO48PM Evaporative Cooler: Honeywell CO48PM is an evaporative cooler characterized by high-power cooling suitable for large areas and a hefty 10.6-gallon water tank for extended use. Mobility might become an issue due to its weight, unlike the lightweight Hessaire MC18M.

1. Best Overall: Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler

The Hessaire MC37M evaporative cooler is an air conditioner geared for outdoor usage with a low-weight build for easy mobility. It is designed to be compact yet has enough power to cool about 950 square feet of space with no issues.

This portable air conditioner comes with four heavy-duty locking casters, further leaning into the mobility aspect of the air conditioner. I found that I could move it around my patio without much trouble, even with a full tank. If it suits your fancy, you can take the cooler along on a camping trip, as it is light and mobile enough for RVs.

As for its cooling capacity, the MC37M has a high CFM rating of 3,100. The fan in this cooling unit has three speeds and oscillating louvers for even distribution, comfort, and coverage. Both of these components can be controlled separately, allowing you a degree of control over the intensity of cooling. That said, I did find the cooler to be a little louder than what would be ideal.

The three sides of the unit have high-density cooling pads that increase evaporative surface area and spread cooler air. Moreover, you can attach a garden hose to the float adapter to make use of the continuous fill option. With this, you needn’t worry about repeated refills, as the cooler will do it for you.

Coverage Area: 750 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 3,100 | Power Consumption: 250 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 10.3 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

2. Best Powerful Cooler for a Moderate Price Range: VAGKRI Evaporative Cooler

The VAGKRI evaporative cooler uses three cooling methods to provide you with cool air: water, air, and ice. It can reduce ambient temperature, add humidity, and act as a fan when using these modes.

As for its power, the VAGKRI portable swamp cooler can cover up to 700 square feet of area at the rate of 2,100 CFM, which makes for powerful cooling with decent area coverage.

Furthermore, it has an intake panel on three of its sides that allows quick cooling and delivery of cold air through a powerful motor. Additionally, it has an 8-gallon water tank large enough to provide sufficient cooling, and it can store ice in a compartment for a chilling effect. The water tank can be filled manually or by using the continuous fill option that keeps the cooler running for hours on end.

Lastly, the portable air conditioner features a digital display paired with an electronic control panel to keep the operation simple. For secondary features, the VAGKRI cooler has multiple fan speeds to choose from, a timer for auto-shutdown, and a fully functional remote control. I did find the instructions manual to be a little unclear about the functionalities of the swamp cooler, however.

Coverage Area: 700 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 2,100 | Power Consumption: 105 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 7.9 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

3. Best Compact Outdoor AC: Honeywell Portable Evaporative Cooler

For medium-sized outdoor spaces, the Honeywell Portable Evaporative Cooler may be an option to look into. It is constructed with three primary components: a fan, a pump, and a honeycomb-shaped absorbent panel.

Being geared for medium-sized spaces, the Honeywell portable air conditioner is appropriately small. Thus, it can be moved around with ease and placed anywhere you like, so long as it has access to a power outlet. And because of its smaller size, the cooler doesn’t cover as large an area.

Covering 350 square feet, the Honeywell portable air conditioner can provide a cool breeze for lounging on your patio on summer days. It comes with three humidity settings to keep you comfortable while it runs: fan, ice, and water.

The water tank on this cooler is detachable, allowing you to fill it up separately without having to move the whole unit. And much like the VAGKRI outdoor air conditioner before it, the Honeywell cooler features an ice compartment for cooler air distribution in hotter spaces.

For secondary features, the cooler comes with a remote control and a timer that is programmable for up to 7.5 hours.

Coverage Area: 350 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 806 | Power Consumption: 288 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 7.9 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

4. Best Affordable Outdoor AC: Hessaire MC18M Portable Evaporative Cooler

The Hessaire MC18M is an affordable option that is designed to cool spaces that are medium and semi-large. It functions as a humidifier in dry climates, using low electricity to increase condensation and air delivery.

At 16 pounds, the unit can be lifted up and moved around without any issues. It does include caster wheels to improve mobility when the water tank is full. And despite its small size, it is capable of covering a relatively large area of 500 square feet.

This model features knob-style controls that can be used to switch between two fan speeds. Moreover, you can combine high and low fan speeds with the pump to create the humidifying environment needed. 

Hessaire has included both the manual and continuous fill for water filling, much like the MC37M that I reviewed earlier. The cooler can run for about four hours on a single manual refill, which is a decent water tank capacity. That said, the lack of any additional features may be a point of contention for some.

Coverage Area: 500 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 1,300 | Power Consumption: 85 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 4.8 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 2

5. Best Weather-resistant Outdoor AC: Honeywell CO48PM Evaporative Cooler

The Honeywell CO48PM is a high-power evaporative controller intended to be used in large spaces. This tower-type outdoor air conditioner can be used in patios, garages, decks, backyards, and more.

It makes use of honeycomb pads on three of its four sides to maximize coverage. And combined with its powerful cooling, the CO48PM can be placed anywhere in a large area without sacrificing cool air.

To sustain this high cooling capacity, the Honeywell cooler comes with a large 10.6-gallon tank. Moreover, the tank can be connected to a garden hose for continuous refilling, enabling it to run for hours uninterrupted.

The body of this outdoor air conditioner is weatherproof as well as UV resistant, meaning it can withstand being outside for a good while. Its high build quality means that the unit will continue to function for a long time.

As for mobility, the CO48PM can’t be lifted without help, but it does come with caster wheels to help with it. Even so, it may be difficult to move around because of its weight. It also has a long electrical cord that allows you to move it without interrupting the airflow. Additionally, you can avoid messy tangles with the dedicated cord storage.

Coverage Area: 1037 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 1,702 | Power Consumption: 150 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 10.6 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

6. Best Battery-powered Outdoor AC: EEIEER Portable Air Conditioner

The EEIEER Portable Air Conditioner is a small and affordable cooling fan that can sit on a desk in an outdoor office. It is targeted towards personal use and so, its fan covers a relatively small area.

This model combines the functionalities of a table fan, an air cooler, a humidifier, and night lights for a complete home office cooling solution. It comes with three distinct wind speed functions in the form of natural, cold, and strong wind that cater to different needs.

Much like most other outdoor air conditioners on this list, the EEIEER cooler uses water evaporation for fast cooling. While it doesn’t have a dedicated ice storage compartment, you can add ice to the water tank to further speed up the cooling process.

But unlike most other electric outdoor air conditioners on this list, the EEIEER cooler runs on a 4,000 mAh battery. Combined with its lightweight and low power consumption, the desk cooler can be taken to summer camps and other travels as the primary cooling device. The small water tank also means that it can run out of water very quickly.

For secondary features, the EEIEER air conditioner comes with a remote controller that is fairly responsive, along with a 2/4 H timing setting.

Coverage Area: 120 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 700 | Power Consumption: 10 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 0.11 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

7. Best Humidifying Cooler: Paris Rhone Evaporative Cooler

If you want to maximize cooling in your outdoor space, you may look at the Paris Rhone cooler as an option. This is a swamp cooler that comes with four ice packs to spread moisturized and cool air across a wide area.

The Paris Rhone portable air conditioner is a 2,943 CFM outdoor air conditioner that features a maximum air velocity of 29.5 ft/s. This is paired with a large 11.9-gallon water tank that can keep the air conditioner going for up to 24 hours at low speed. It has a top-fill design for refilling, although I am not quite sold on its effectiveness.

You can use the Paris Rhone cooler as a humidifier as well which has a moisture output of 6 L/h for refreshing and humidified air. It comes with three wind speeds to choose from that spread air across the area with both auto and manual oscillation.

Despite the weight, the cooler can be moved around with the caster wheels. You can position the air conditioner in a manner that keeps it closer to the garden hose for the continuous fill feature.

And lastly, it has an easy-to-use remote control, along with a touch-operated panel. 

Coverage Area: 1470 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 2,943 | Power Consumption: 25 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 1.58 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

8. Best Build Quality: Uthfy Evaporative Cooler

The Uthfy Evaporative Cooler is a high-powered swamp cooler that comes with three ice boxes and a large water tank to facilitate cooling. Its body is made from sheet metal that is impact and corrosion-resistant and easy to clean.

It features a powerful fan with a high cooling capacity of 3531 CFM, which is combined with three fan speeds and auto side-to-side oscillation. The fan works in tandem with the three rigid high-density cooling pads that increase the evaporative surface area for spreading cooler air. And with the included ice boxes, the cooling effect increases even further.

The large 10.6-gallon water tank can be filled both manually and by using the continuous fill option. It can fit a standard garden hose with the water pipe joint included on the body. Additionally, it features a drainage port at the bottom to make cleaning and maintenance easy.

As for operation, the Uthfy air conditioner has four independent round buttons that control fan speed, from low to medium and high. The console also includes a built-in oscillation button that controls the side-to-side oscillation. For vertical adjustment, you can manually move the louvers up and down as required. These functions can also be accessed from the remote control.

It is a little heavier than most portable air conditioners, but it remains mobile with four heavy-duty caster wheels. Two of these feature brakes as well for easy maneuverability. 

Coverage Area: 1715 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 3,531 | Power Consumption: 200 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 10.6 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

9. Best Small Evaporative Cooler: Sharper Image Portable Evaporative Cooler

The Sharper Image Portable Evaporative Cooler is a small cooler geared towards relatively smaller spaces. It strives to maintain a comfortable space with an evaporative system both indoors and outdoors.

This model features three different speed settings to choose from, namely low, medium, and high. The Sharper Image cooler can be used as a humidifier as well to improve the air quality of your patio or room.

You can find the swing and oscillation features in this cooler, in addition to the built-in timer settings. The timer ranges from 0.5 hours to 9.5 hours, with an interval of 30 minutes between each set. Additionally, this cooler has an energy-saving mode to further reduce the amount of power it consumes during operation.

Featuring a detachable water tank capacity of 1.6 liters, the Sharper Image cooler can run for a few hours without interruption. That said, the tank capacity does leave a bit to be desired. You can view the water level on an LED display to get a better idea of when to refill it.

Lastly, it comes with a wireless remote control that allows you to control all of these functions from a distance.

Coverage Area: 250 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 750 | Power Consumption: 90 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 0.42 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

10. Best Premium Outdoor Air Conditioner: Big Ass Fans Cool Space 400

It is indeed a big fan with a high cooling capacity! The Big Ass Fans Cool Space 400 is a premium high-power portable air conditioner that covers a large floor area without much trouble. It makes use of a refrigerant to power its cooling even further.

Using its 36-inch fan, the Big Ass Fans cooler can cover an area of 3,600 square feet comfortably. Boasting a CFM rating that ranges from 6,400 to 9,700, the portable air conditioner is capable of cooling down air up to 33 degrees Fahrenheit.

It has a 46-gallon tank that can keep the fan running for up to 10 hours without needing a direct connection to a water source. That said, you can keep it connected to a garden hose to make use of the continuous fill function to keep it running endlessly.

The cooling media used by the Big Ass Fans cooler is 8 inches thick, long-lasting, chemically treated, and coated in a thermosetting resin. This makes it resistant to algae and dirt, which can reduce the effort needed to clean the media. Dirt and other particles cannot penetrate into the substrate, which can be convenient for maintenance.

As is the standard, the Cool Space 400 has variable speed controls that allow you to maintain the desired temperature. It comes with locking swivel casters, automatic low-water shutoff, and a drain plug for maintenance.

These features don’t come in an affordable price tag, though. This means that the Cool Space 400 may be priced too high for some users just looking for a moderately-sized cooler.

Coverage Area: 3,600 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 6,400 to 9,700 | Power Consumption: 515 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 46 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 10

11. Outdoor AC With Best Evaporation Rate: Portacool Cyclone 140

The Portacool Cyclone 140 is a portable outdoor cooler designed to be used in patios, garages, and outdoor spaces. It’s a portable air conditioner that sits in the premium price range, featuring many options to customize your cooling preferences.

Equipped with Kuul Comfort evaporative media, the Portacool Cyclone 140 has a high rate of water evaporation to provide cooling comfort. It is powerful enough to cool up to 900 square feet of area, along with a cooling capacity of 3,900. The lack of different fan speeds does leave a bit to be desired.

Facilitating this cooling is the large 40-gallon water reservoir, which comes with an LED water level indicator that pinpoints when you need to refill it. The reservoir can be filled manually or using the continuous fill option for continuous use.

Moreover, the Cyclone 140 can be moved around using the caster wheels without any issues. It can be placed where needed so long as it is within range of a power outlet. 

Coverage Area: 900 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 4,200 | Wattage: 480 | Reservoir Capacity: 40 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 2

12. Quietest Evaporative Cooler: MEPTY Evaporative Cooler

Designed to be fast and effective at cooling, the MEPTY evaporative cooler features three high-density cooling pads for maximum evaporative surface area. Combined with a high-powered fan, the MEPTY cooler is capable of quickly reducing the ambient temperature.

The 3,531 CFM portable air conditioner can cool outdoor areas and rooms up to 900 square feet while spreading 3,100 cubic feet per minute of cool air. Using a wide oscillation system, the cold breeze can be distributed throughout the personal space with no trouble.

Featuring a built-in 10.6-gallon water tank, the MEPTY cooler can keep working for several hours. The large water tank leans into the cooling aspect of the evaporative air conditioner, spreading even more cool wind. 

Besides, it has a top-refill design that ensures the water hits the cooling medium more effectively. Moreover, the water tank level will be visible to you as you refill it, giving you an idea of when to stop refilling. 

As for other features, the MEPTY portable air conditioner has four universal wheels with brakes on two for mobility. It can be moved around on a flat surface with relative ease in large spaces without needing help to lift it up. And for operation, the cooler has round buttons for fan speeds, as well as three switches for swing, cooling, and power options. Its remote battery compartment was surprisingly difficult to access, I must add.

Coverage Area: 900 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 3,531 | Power Consumption: 200 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 10.6 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

13. Best for Customizable Cooling: Yescom Evaporative Cooler

Sitting in the low-to-medium price range, the Yescom Evaporative Cooler is an option to look at as an outdoor air conditioner. It is geared towards efficient energy consumption, meaning that it consumes very little power to cool down a given area.

This is a portable remote control-operated cooler that can switch between fan and humidifier modes quickly. With its 17-liter water tank capacity, the cooler can keep going for several hours.

It comes with three fan speed options and a built-in timer to turn the machine on and off automatically. You can choose from 13.5 m/s on high, 10 m/s on medium, and 7.5 m/s on low for fan speeds. This can work with the timer, with the latter featuring a 1-8 hour customizable window, along with a 120-degree wind direction adjustment function.

The Yescom cooler has side handles on top, along with four caster wheels on the bottom for mobility. These features make the cooler highly mobile, requiring little effort to move around the space. Though its power may feel relatively low in comparison to other portable air conditioners.

Coverage Area: 650 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 525-729 | Power Consumption: 200 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 4.49 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

14. Best Low-priced Outdoor Table Fan: HIFRESH Small Evaporative Air Cooler

Designed for outdoor office usage, the HIFRESH evaporative air cooler is a small desk fan that can sit unobtrusively on your table. It is a small portable cooler that can be moved around easily and features 360-degree auto oscillation.

The HIFRESH cooler works using a 4,000 mAh battery that can be recharged using an ordinary USB-C type cable. You can charge it on the go in your car or from a power bank if needed, further adding to its portability. It can be operated with the LED touch panel that sits on top of the cover.

Its water tank can hold up to 16 fluid ounces of water, which is sufficient to keep the air conditioner going for some time. Additionally, you can add ice cubes to the tank to add a little oomph to the cooling. That said, it doesn’t have a particularly large coverage area.

The HIFRESH evaporative air cooler can also double as a humidifier by toggling the humidification mode on. It sprays a continuous mist to simulate humid climates that can help reduce nasal congestion, dry skin, and cough that a dry summer day can cause. 

Coverage Area: 300 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 700 | Power Consumption: 5 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 0.12 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

What is the Best Outdoor Air Conditioner?

If you're on the lookout for the best outdoor air conditioner, the table below displays specifications detailing the coverage area measured in square feet, the CFM rating, power consumption in wattage, reservoir capacity measured in gallons, and the number of fan speeds available.

Outdoor ACs Coverage Area CFM Rating Power Consumption Reservoir Capacity Number of Fan Speeds
Hessaire MC37M 750 Square Feet 3,100 250 Watts 10.3 Gallons 3
Vagkri Evaporative Cooler 700 square feet 2,100 105 Watts 7.9 Gallons 3
Honeywell Portable 350 square feet 806 288 watts 7.9 Gallons 3
Hessaire MC18M Portable 500 square feet 1300 85 watts 4.8 Gallons 2
Honeywell CO48PM 1037 square feet 1702 150 watts 10.6 Gallons 3
EEIEER Portable AC 120 square feet 700 10 watts 0.11 Gallons 3
Paris Rhone Evaporative Cooler 1470 square feet 2943 25 watts 1.58 Gallons 3
Uthfy Evaporative Cooler 1715 square feet 3531 200 Watts 10.6 Gallons 3
Sharper Image Portable 250 square feet 750 90 Watts 0.42 Gallons 3
Big Ass Fans Cool-Space 400 3600 square feet 6400 to 9700 515 watts 46 Gallons 10
Portacool PACCY140 Cyclone 140 900 square feet 4,200 480 watts 40 Gallons 2
MEPTY Evaporative Cooler 900 square feet 3,531 200 Watts 10.6 Gallons 3
Yescom Evaporative Cooler 650 square feet 525 to 729 200 Watts 4.49 Gallons 3
HIFRESH Small Evaporative Cooler 300 square feet 700 5 Watts 0.12 Gallons 3

Buying Guide for the Best Outdoor Air Conditioner

Unlike indoor Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) units, outdoor air conditioners make use of an evaporation system to cool air in a space. Since there are no walls to contain the cool air outdoors, these units have to function in a manner that is fundamentally different. 

Unlike a central air conditioner, the British Thermal Unit is not used to determine how capable an outdoor cooling unit is. A different unit, named “CFM” (short for cubic feet per meter), is used to gauge the cooling capabilities of an outdoor air conditioner.

Thus, picking the right air conditioner for your outdoor space is fundamentally different from picking one for your living room or bedroom. Here’s a comprehensive look at the factors that make for a good outdoor air conditioner.

Water Tank Size

Outdoor air conditioners make use of a water tank as a part of their evaporation system. The larger this tank is, the longer your air conditioning unit will be able to cool your room down.

Now, the water tank should only be as large as what is needed to consistently cool the required area. Any smaller, and you will need to refill it frequently to keep the air conditioner working well. And an oversized one will consume too much water and electricity, on top of potentially simulating humid climates.

Some models come with an autofill or continuous fill feature that requires the unit to be connected to a garden hose. The air conditioner will draw water from the exhaust hose when the tank goes below a certain water level, circumventing the need to refill it repeatedly. And, if you need quick fills, you may also find dual hose models on the market.

Air Conditioner Size

The size of an outdoor air conditioner directly affects its mobility, and units with large water tanks will be difficult to move around. Ideally, if you want the unit to not be a semi-permanent fixture in your patio, you will want it to be as light as possible. A tower-type air conditioner may also work here, provided that it is designed for outdoor use. This includes the weight of the water in its tank as well. 

Something that is of extreme importance to outdoor air conditioners is their ability to handle weather conditions. Some models can handle the sun when placed outside, but it’s generally a good idea to keep them away from direct exposure. You will need the air conditioner to be mobile enough to circumvent this issue.

CFM Rating

The CFM rating is a metric that determines how efficiently an air conditioner moves air in any given space. Outdoor conditioners with high CFM ratings are highly efficient at moving surrounding air in said space. Be sure to match your space with a unit that has the appropriate CFM rating.

Advanced Features

Secondary features add to the quality-of-life aspect of outdoor conditioners. These features are not strictly necessary for an outdoor AC to perform its task as necessary, but having them adds to their overall value. Some of them can be:

  • Fan oscillation
  • Fan speeds
  • Programmable timers
  • Auto-shutdown feature
  • Humidifier
  • Remote controls

A small caveat associated with air conditioners that come with these features is that they, too, require regular maintenance to function properly. Evaporators, condensers, and compressors are all vital parts of the air conditioner that must be taken care of properly every once in a while. Doing so will keep every part of your AC working properly for a long while.

Electronic and Mechanical Air Conditioners

Electronic air conditioners are the most common type of portable outdoor air conditioner. These include all the features mentioned earlier in order to perform their function in a convenient manner. But if you don’t want to commit to the relatively high maintenance needs of such devices, you could look into an alternative.

Mechanical air conditioners feature analog controls and mechanically controlled vents that work in a way similar to electronic portable air conditioners. The key difference here is that these are more affordable and simplified options that only require very occasional maintenance. Owing to their simplified nature, mechanical portable air conditioners can also be DIY-fixed, which is usually not possible with their electronic counterparts.

Moreover, these portable air conditioners have a mechanical air cleaner that uses a fibrous mesh that clears the air passing through them. It does so by trapping the particles onto the surface of the fibers, where they remain immobile.

You may also find mechanical outdoor air conditioners to be energy efficient, saving you some money on the electricity bill.

How long can I keep my evaporative cooler on?

Yes, you can keep your evaporative cooler on continuously for long periods if necessary, although it's essential to ensure adequate water supply. To prolong its lifespan and maintain efficiency it is advisable to turn it off when the desired temperature is reached or when not in use. Routine maintenance and inspections should also be carried out to ensure optimal operation.

How do I extend the lifespan of my outdoor air conditioner?

To extend the lifespan of your outdoor air conditioner, regular maintenance is crucial, including cleaning or replacing the filter, inspecting refrigerant levels, and ensuring the unit is clear of debris. Periodic professional servicing can catch small issues before they become bigger problems. Moreover, reducing the workload on the unit by using it judiciously and improving home insulation can also increase its lifespan.

Can I run an evaporative cooler without water?

While it is physically possible to run an evaporative cooler without water, it is not recommended. The primary function of an evaporative cooler, also known as a swamp cooler, is to cool the air through the evaporation of water. Running it without water will cause the unit to simply circulate air without cooling it, and continuous operation in this manner can potentially damage the system.

Are outdoor air conditioners environmentally friendly?

The environmental friendliness of outdoor air conditioners depends on factors such as the type of refrigerant they use and their energy efficiency. Traditional models that use HFC refrigerants can contribute to global warming if the refrigerant is released into the atmosphere. Newer models are becoming more energy-efficient and use environmentally friendly refrigerants, which can reduce their environmental impact.

For the simple fact that evaporative air coolers require more power to function correctly, gauging how powerful yours needs to be is a bit tricky. There is no shortage of options for a great portable air conditioner, after all.

During my testing, I found the Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler to be the best outdoor air conditioner. It offers everything that an evaporative fan needs at an affordable rate without consuming too much power.

That said, evaporative coolers from brands like VAGKRI and Honeywell are not far behind, offering something similar while trading out a feature or two. They serve slightly different needs, and they may just be what you need.

At the end of the day, there is no correct answer when it comes to the conundrum of choosing a portable outdoor air conditioner. As a customer, what you need out of the evaporative cooler is all that matters, after all.

Science fiction is that unique genre in any literary or artistic medium that brings the best out of an artist’s mind.  It juxtaposes whatever abstract thoughts the mind produces, forming the most extraordinary shapes and shadows and grotesque structures with a practical line of scientific thought and explanation.

This is interesting as although the scientific and rational mind strives to explain these strange figures to lessen their terrific effect on the psyche; ironically, it ends up pulling these fascinating thoughts to the verge of reality which intensifies the horror of the unreal!

And this is precisely why, humankind has always had a horrifying fascination with science fiction and fantastical interpretations, more in the area of visual renditions than in any other medium, driven by the inspirational effect it can have on an individual's imagination.

This is precisely why artists have turned towards sci-fi and fantasy art books time and again to be thrilled and to be inspired enough to be as thrilling in creativity as the mind that creates the most unbelievable of all unusual things.

Here's the list of the 21 best sci-fi art books for artists, curated to ignite the imagination and unleash the creative potential by exploring the captivating world of science fiction and fantastical interpretations through visual renditions.

1. The Art of Ian Miller - Best for Gothic Art

The ‘Art of Ian Miller’ is an extensive retrospective and analysis of Miller's unconventional artwork. Miller has been greatly influenced by the master storyteller and artist of gothic and fantastical fiction, HP Lovecraft himself which stunningly reflects in his creations.

Most of Miller’s grotesque, fantastical outlines and gothic imagery have been used on HP Lovecraft’s book covers and Games Workshop publications along with incorporating his signature style into the concept art used in films.

Miller’s mastery of the techniques of making the art of macabre seems to hold no hostage when it transforms his imagination into magnificent visual art forms. The book contains everything from some of his most disturbing and haunting depictions to enchanting Tolkien-esque characters and unnerving illustrations that may remind of the etching by Gustav Dore.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.29 x 0.73 x 12.5 inches | Weight: 2.62 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books

2. H.R Giger’s Necronomicon - Best for Sci-Fi Art

Published in the year 1977, ‘Necronomicon’ was the first significant compendium of images that were created by prestigious Swiss artist, H.R Giger. This book was subsequently given to Ridley Scott during the pre-production of his movie, Alien, after which he hired Giger to create the conceptual designs and artwork for the film. 

Sphinx Verlag first published the book. Thereafter, Morpheus International took it upon themselves to republish the book in the year 1993 along with a significant part of the designs produced by Giger for Alien.

A second collection of Giger’s images came out in print in 1985, known as the Necronomicon 2 which was published by Edition C in Switzerland.

Interestingly the title of Giger’s book is named after H.P Lovecraft’s fictional grimoire, “Necronomicon” which he invented and used as a “plot device” for his stories. Lovecraft’s “Necronomicon” is a compendium of “pre-human” lore enmeshed in Gothic elements of storytelling and depiction that was compiled by Arab Abdul Alhazred, a fictional mad Arab of Lovecraft’s creation, circa 700.

The fact Giger’s book of images has been republished and produced in numerous sci-fi art books makes it a unique and precious object for all lovers of the genre.

Length: 92 pages | Dimensions: 12.25 x 0.5 x 17 inches | Weight: 3.69 pounds | Publisher: Morpheus International

3. The Art of Chesley Bonestell by Ron Miller - Best for Space Art

Co-written with Frederick C. Durante with a forward from Sir Arthur C. Clarke, ‘The Art of Chesley Bonestell’ displays over 300 images by famed space artist and architect, Ron Miller.

These include drawings from the illustrations of the chief engineer’s plans for the Golden Gate Bridge for the benefit of investors. It also contains one of his favorite paintings from the ones that he had himself made, ‘The Engulfed Cathedral A Fantasy’ and his pre-space-travel lunar along with Martian landscapes created for magazines such as ‘Galaxy and Astounding.’

It can be safely remarked that if you aren’t an astronaut for real, then all your conceptions of how outer space might look have probably been formed by Chesley Bonestell's super-realistic paintings of the planetary scenes. And this was also the fact that caused a tremendous sensation when some of the images were published by ‘Life’ in 1944.

Length: 256 pages | Dimensions: 9.1 x 1.1 x 11.65 inches | Weight: 3.54 pounds | Publisher: Paper Tiger

4. The Art Of John Harris: Beyond The Horizon - Best for Science Fantasy Art

John Harris is unquestionably a name to reckon with when it comes to science fantasy fiction, and we could definitely tell why, as he grew up with books written by legends such as Arthur C Clarke, Isaac Asimov, and Alfred Bester. The influence of such writers on Harris has been profound, and the effect seen is unmistakable in his art books.

Harris is known as one of the most influential contributors to the sci-fi genre, creating a myriad of spectacular visual imagery in his books since the mid-’70s.

The Art Of John Harris: Beyond The Horizon stands to be a celebrated example of artwork that includes everything from vast and expansive landscapes and tower cities to ethereal, floating cities. This marvelous hardback consists of illustrations created by Harris over a span of four hefty decades that sound like an absolute treasure-house of imagery.

Although Harris worked mainly with watercolors taking them as his essential color medium for all sorts of illustrations, he was also known to experiment extensively with acrylics. He also has a  book containing illustrations in colored pencils that capture his surrealistic take on fantastic world scenery.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.35 x 0.7 x 12.5 inches | Weight: 2.59 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books

5. Middle-Earth Envisioned - Best for Tolkien-inspired Art

Few authors have been known to aspire and achieve the kind of creative grandeur that Tolkien had with his unbelievable portrayal of the magical Middle Earth in his equally mystical and unparalleled fantasy fiction, The Lord Of The Rings. 

This literary milestone has been impacting and influencing art for decades and continues to inspire spectacular visual adaptations.

‘Middle-Earth Envisioned’ captures the wide spectrum of Tolkien-inspired art from the first unauthorized Canadian broadcast in 1953, comic books, Peter Jackson, and letter-known adaptations such as one for Russian TV.

All in all, this is one book that all fans of Tolkien’s fan should have by means.

Length: 216 pages | Dimensions: 10.5 x 1 x 12.38 inches | Weight: 3.55 pounds | Publisher: Race Point Publishing

6. The Art of Jim Burns: Hyperluminal

Hyperluminal celebrates 40 years’ worth of Jim Burns’s works and stands to be one of the most precious sources of inspiration for all die-hards of the fantasy art genre. Burns is known for the covers that he has created for some of the most esteemed contributors to the fantasy-fiction genre such as Peter F Hamilton, Anne McCaffrey, and George RR Martin.

And if you find these to be some of the finest works of Burns, then do get yourself a copy of Hyperluminal right away. This is one book that will help widen your perspective of the fantasy world, helping you to understand how artists can draw distinct parallelism between it with the mundane world.

The art of Jim Burns shows all the proofs of having transitioned and transcended the traditional techniques of art, pervading and imbibing all the essentials of Photoshop and methods of digital illustration, truly establishing as a prolific artist in the field.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.3 x 0.7 x 12.5 inches | Weight: 1.25 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books

7. E338: The Art Of Loic Zimmermann

The cinematic art genius Loic Zimmerman is a celebrated and greatly sought-after visual artist for renowned filmmakers who have redefined cinematic art in itself! Zimmerman’s profound knowledge and incredibly deft handling of both 2D and 3D mediums has not only influenced other subgenres of fantasy in cinema substantially but has also earned him the reputation of having a “hotch-potch punk” attitude towards his work. This is because of the rebellious spirit that is often reflected in his works.

Zimmerman's own nature is not very different from the nature of his art itself. A unique and quirky character himself, Loic Zimmerman brings a new perspective to legendary pop culture icons that include names like Wolverine and Bob Dylan.

This reflects the extent of his imagination, his understanding of the subject, and his skills as an artist. E338, made from equal parts surrealism, eroticism, and nightmarish horror, stands to be magnificent proof of Zimmerman’s genius.

Length: 152 pages | Dimensions: 10 x 0.5 x 10 inches | Weight: 2.25 pounds | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing

8. Substrata: Open World Dark Fantasy

The game, Darksiders by Vigil Games had shot up high in fame owing to its stunning art and battle levels that were created and developed by the esteemed game illustrator, Paul Richards. After the eventual collapse of the game, Richards gathered over 80 artists who have previously created some of the top video games ever from all corners of the world, together compiling what is known as the book of “what-if” on the Darksiders 3 concept art.

In the absence of studio constraints, the genre of dark fantasy fiction saw the unrestrained flow of imagination and absolute creative genius of the artists’ minds which came together to give birth to some of the most beautifully gruesome characters that there could ever have been.

These included monsters, designs, vast open spaces and locations, monsters, and all that a video game fan can ever dream of seeing in print. Also, one of the best things about this book is that it provides you with precious insight into their WIPs and gives you an idea of the world of video game concept design.

Length: 240 pages | Dimensions: 9 x 1 x 12 inches | Weight: 2.56 pounds | Publisher: Udon Entertainment

9. The Art Of Greg Spalenka

Greg Spalenka is no short of being a legendary illustrator who has produced simply bewitching visual art in his career that spanned more than four decades in time. His level of expertise involved creating concept film art and illustrating boxing heroes as well as marvelous Polaroid photographs. There is simply no section in the field Spalenka has not been known to have experimented with.

The Art of Greg Spalenka chronicles and showcases almost all of the artworks that Spalenka has produced in his entire career up until the point where he gracefully transitions into the world of digital illustration.

The highlights of the book include all that we would want to have from Spalenka, including the spectacular vistas and characters from the Chronicles of Narnia: The Voyage of the Dawn Treader illustrations!

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.34 x 0.79 x 12.5 inches | Weight: 2.72 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books

10. Sci-Fi and Fantasy Oil Painting Techniques by Patrick Jones

Patrick Jones during his learning days had been influenced and inspired by prominent names in art such as Frank Frazetta and Boris Vallejo which compelled him to leave his native Ireland and settle in London where he pursued his artistic career.

Over time Jones developed a brilliant understanding of traditional methods of art including a steady focus on oils, eventually exploring the field of digital art mediums, with Corel Painter becoming his favorite software.

His profound understanding of both forms of art foregrounds some of the crucial rules for getting it just right in fantasy oil paintings. So, if you’re aspiring to learn more about the traditional art methods in the fantasy genre, then this is a book that you should use as a definitive guide and reference tool for the purpose.

Length: 192 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.9 x 11 inches | Weight: 2.13 pounds | Publisher: Korero Press

11. Spectrum 25 The Best in Contemporary Fantastical Art

The Spectrum 25 is almost hailed as essential for fantasy art as anything can ever be in the field itself for all ardent admirers of the sci-fi and fantasy art genre. The edition that was launched on the book’s 20th anniversary is also the last book that was written and compiled by its celebrated author and illustrator, Laurie Lee Brom. 

With the kind of magically beautiful visual art that the artist creates for the book, it would just be a mistake not to have a copy of it if you’re a fan of mystical and fantastical art. And this is precisely what makes Brom every bit a worthy recipient of the Grand Master Award along with the reputation of having been featured on the cover of every issue.

The book contains all that our imagination can spell out when it comes to fantasy art and all forms of it be it in comics, editorials, or even unpublished works. You will find a new, curious character on every page waiting for you to get to know the story of their origin.

Length: 304 pages | Dimensions: 9.35 x 1.25 x 12.25 inches | Weight: 1 pound | Publisher: Flesk Publications

12. Guillermo del Toro: Cabinet of Curiosities

Guillermo del Toro needs no introduction. The Mexican filmmaker has acquired enough accolades for the world to know of his brilliant works as a master storyteller and an artistic genius. And in this semi-autobiographical book, you will all of the works of del Toro that speak of his admiration and fascination with occult art.

The ‘Cabinet of Curiosities’ is replete with scribbled notes, sketches, doodles, storyboards, collections, and interestingly enough, “obsessions” that take us on a tour of del Toro’s enlightened, mystic mind from which he fashions a strategy of infusing all of his absolute masterpieces with the essence of the supernatural.

The book also gives us a visual slice of his sprawling mansion in LA that is considered almost like a museum containing oddities full of film memorabilia and original props, portraying del Toro’s larger-than-life imagination.

Length: 611 pages | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Publisher: Harper Design

13. Sexy Robot by Hajime Sorayama

‘Sexy Robot’ was that work that had extolled Hajime Sorayama’s genius as an artist and brought him global recognition. The author paints a very organic picture of robotic forms inspired by pin-up art, where the “feminoid” robots appear as chrome-plated gynoids striking suggestive poses.

His next science fiction book, ‘Pin-up’ also follows the same pattern. The works of the author seem to follow similar themes involving figures in suggestive poses with one that includes a substantially realistic depiction of leather and latex. Sorayama’s art is considered to be highly explicit and meant strictly for adults. The futuristic and erotic illustrations resonate loudly in the mind’s eye owing to their hyperrealistic nature, creating the kind of visual landscape that is impossible to achieve in photography alone.

Length: N/A | Dimensions: 9.25 x 0.25 x 11.5 inches | Weight: 1.5 pounds | Publisher: Books Nippan

14. Journeyman: The Art of Chris Moore and Stephen Gallagher

The illustrative book, ‘Journeyman’ was the first collection by Chris Moore, a globally recognized science fiction illustrator, that included a stunning range of paintings, complete with book covers, albums, and posters. These were hyper-realistically created fantastical depictions of simple as well as elaborated colored sketches that foregrounded the versatility of Chris Moore’s illustrative universe.

It is an absolute feast for the senses that is bestowed with the best of expressions penned by the critically acclaimed author of the thriller genre, Stephen Gallagher, through a series of conversations in the book.

These conversations tell the story of the modern-day journeyman and during the course of the story reveal interesting details about the process of creating art.

Length: 112 pages | Dimensions: 9 x 0.75 x 10.75 inches | Weight: 1.74 pounds | Publisher: Paper Tiger

15. Frank Kelly Freas: The Art of Science Fiction by Frank Kelly Freas

It is a belief amongst a section of the community that is formed of ardent lovers of sci-fi art and literature that Frank Kelly Freas could possibly be the best sci-fi artist to have ever lived. And we certainly have solid reasons to believe so, as everything ever created by Kelly Freas has lived to define an entire era of science fiction in itself. And this immense adoration and fascination with science fiction are lovingly represented in this sci-fi artbook. 

Freas’s work is unconventional and somewhat, way ahead of its time in its depiction of a state of being that celebrated an upliftment of emotions and humanity, connecting all of his illustrated characters whether human or otherwise with a much broader perspective on relationships and life. This grand scale of art could be seen in some of the earliest sci-fi covers that he had created for the likes of Algis Budrys’s work, ‘Who?’ and Tom Godwin’s ‘The Gulf Between.’

Length: 120 pages | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: 1 pound | Publisher: The Donning Company

16. Sci-Fi Art Now by John Freeman

John Freeman brings a refreshing mix of the finest sci-fi illustrations created by some of the most distinguished figures in the science fiction genre. These cutting-edge art forms and illustrations hail a revolutionizing impact on budding and aspiring artists everywhere through the spectacular images and concept designs it opens up for the world to see.

Freeman had been a former editor for official magazines for projects and franchises such as Babylon 5, Doctor Who, Star Trek, and Star Wars. The successive phases in his career saw him turning his outstanding takes and understanding of science fiction and everything related to magnificent pieces of art.

And this is precisely what you can expect from this ornately illustrated anthology to show you: the creative processes of speculative fiction’s latest and coolest upcoming stars. The book also celebrates some renowned creators who have continuously been breaking and creating new turf to expand the vividly colored and portrayed territories to great extents!

Length: 192 pages | Dimensions: 9.9 x 0.9 x 9.8 inches | Weight: 2.35 pounds | Publisher: Harper Design

17. The Art of John Berkey by Jane Frank

John Berkey was an immensely respected and inspiring space artist who was also considered one of the titans in the history of science fiction history who did have a prolific and richly productive career producing celestial fantasy art that began sometime in the 1950s. 

He had initially been one of the leading creative heads for concept art working for many different studios up till the point he got into Brown & Bigelow, the famed calendar-publishing company spending eight formatives mastering his definitive style under his mentors.

It was at this place and time in his life that he developed extensively his stunning landscape skills that were depicted in scenes of Americana and similar genres.

When he turned to freelance, he made complete use of his marvelously evocative neo-impressionist style in the area of science fiction which made him a revered figure for all in the community of science fiction.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.5 x 11.25 inches | Weight: 1.9 pounds | Publisher: Paper Tiger

18. The Mind’s Eye: The Art of Omni by PowerHouse Books

Omni had always been a gem among popular science magazines during 1978-1998. Magazines such as Science News, Scientific America, Discover, and Science Digest might have been favorites for armchair scientists, but Omni had been that innovative and masterful cutting edge of conventional science news and fiction that could stun and mesmerize all of its readers.

With just the perfect amount of flashy graphic design coupled with the images created by a generation of artists who were completely free from the restraints of general rules and principles with just a touch of sex, Omni topped quite a few charts when it came to sci-fi artwork.

It was created by the legendary artist Bob Guccione, the founder of Penthouse. Guccione handpicked all the illustrators and artists who eventually made Omni happen, turning it into a legacy, creating works ignited by intellect and passion which were two of Guccione’s principle ideas. ‘The Mind’s Eye: The Art of Omni’ extolls the spectacular work that has appeared throughout the history of publication.

Length: 180 pages | Dimensions: 12.38 x 1.23 x 11.29 inches | Weight: 4.67 pounds | Publisher: PowerHouse Books

19. Star Trek: The Art Of The Film By Mark Cotta Vaz

J.J. Abrams takes an entirely different approach to the greatest space adventure ever: Star Trek! It features a younger crew selected straight right out of the academy. Abrams has created a completely new rendition of Star Trek even while paying homage to those sci-fi storytellers who are known for their versions of the famous spaceship, The U.S.S.Enterprise of the 20th century. 

The film quickly became a critical as well as a commercial success across the world.

This visage of Abram’s new vision is stunningly portrayed in this brilliant sci-fi art book, which traces the evolution of the film’s productions through a spectacular collection of concept art and designs that the world had not seen previously.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.35 x 0.72 x 12.2 inches | Weight: 2.7 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books

20. The Art Of The Barbarian by Arthur Suydam

The image of the Barbarian reflects raw, elemental power, brute force, and the vicious spirit of survival. The “seductive” imagery from the genre in a way, romanticizes this raging and violent era in the history of human evolution.

Arthur Suydam is notable for his fascinating work in this genre that depicts primal clashes on the battlefield, vivid shades of carnelian, and the thunderous gnashing of the swords done with astonishingly precise details.

The vividness and vibrancy of the images make almost a tangible visual impact where one can almost smell the fear, blood, and rage prevailing in the very atmosphere of the time.

And all of these are wonderfully assembled for you to enjoy in the ‘The Art Of The Barbarian.’

About Arthur Suydam, it has been famously remarked that the artist has been known to explore his own opinions and approaches on the primeval character of the Barbarian that expertly renders in a style that belonged to the old Dutch Masters.

The book is a highly resonant and reflective masterpiece done in fabulous shades that foreground Suydam’s immense caliber and justifiable global recognition for his works on the characters of Tarzan and Conan.

It brings you an in-depth and extensive analysis of the creative genius and inspiration of the artist.

Length: 64 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.25 x 11 inches | Weight: 0.6 pounds | Publisher: Image Comics

21. Progressions: The Art Of John Foster by John Foster

John Foster is known and globally celebrated for his hauntingly beautiful imagery that reflects immense visual power. His works include the renowned Dark Horse Comics where the Star Wars covers created by him have become a “collectors’ favorites” item and the sensational images of ‘Dungeons and Dragons’ portrayed bewitchingly by his deft hand.

You get to see all of it in ‘The Art Of John Foster’ which is a transfixing, yet at times, quite unnerving, provocative compilation of his best works. It is not for nothing that they say that Foster indeed knows the ways to capture the soul with his art!

Length: 80 pages | Dimensions: 8.75 x 0.5 x 10.75 inches | Weight: 1.3 pounds | Publisher: Steve Jackson Games

What is the Best Sci-Fi Art Books for Artist?

This table provides an overview of various Sci-Fi Art Books, including information on page count, dimensions (in inches), weight (in pounds), and publisher details.

Product Length Dimensions Weight Publisher
The Art of Ian Miller 160 pages 9.29 x 0.73 x 12.5 inches 2.62 pounds Titan Books
H.R Giger’s Necronomicon 92 pages 12.25 x 0.5 x 17 inches 3.69 pounds Morpheus International
The Art of Chesley Bonestell by Ron Miller 256 pages 9.1 x 1.1 x 11.65 inches 3.54 pounds Paper Tiger
The Art Of John Harris: Beyond The Horizon 160 pages 9.35 x 0.7 x 12.5 inches 2.59 pounds Titan Books
Middle-Earth Envisioned 216 pages 10.5 x 1 x 12.38 inches 3.55 pounds Race Point Publishing
Hyperluminal: The Art Of Jim Burns 160 pages 9.3 x 0.7 x 12.5 inches 1.25 pounds Titan Books
E338: The Art Of Loic Zimmermann 152 pages 10 x 0.5 x 10 inches 2.25 pounds 3DTotal Publishing
Substrata: Open World Dark Fantasy 240 pages 9 x 1 x 12 inches 2.56 pounds Udon Entertainment
The Art Of Greg Spalenka 160 pages 9.34 x 0.79 x 12.5 inches 2.72 pounds Titan Books
Sci-Fi and Fantasy Oil Painting Techniques by Patrick Jones 192 pages 8.5 x 0.9 x 11 inches 2.13 pounds Korero Press
Spectrum 25 The Best in Contemporary Fantastical Art 304 pages 9.35 x 1.25 x 12.25 inches 1 pound Flesk Publications
Guillermo del Toro: Cabinet of Curiosities 611 pages N/A N/A Harper Design
Sexy Robot by Hajime Sorayama N/A 9.25 x 0.25 x 11.5 inches 1.5 pounds Books Nippan
Journeyman: The Art of Chris Moore and Stephen Gallagher 112 pages 9 x 0.75 x 10.75 inches 1.74 pounds Paper Tiger
Frank Kelly Freas: The Art of Science Fiction by Frank Kelly Freas 120 pages N/A 1 pound The Donning Company
Sci-Fi Art Now by John Freeman 192 pages 9.9 x 0.9 x 9.8 inches 2.35 pounds Harper Design
The Art of John Berkey by Jane Frank 160 pages 8.5 x 0.5 x 11.25 inches 1.9 pounds Paper Tiger
The Mind’s Eye: The Art of Omni by PowerHouse Books 180 pages 12.38 x 1.23 x 11.29 inches 4.67 pounds PowerHouse Books
Star Trek: The Art Of The Film By Mark Cotta Vaz 160 pages 9.35 x 0.72 x 12.2 inches 2.7 pounds Titan Books
The Art Of The Barbarian by Arthur Suydam 64 pages 8.5 x 0.25 x 11 inches 0.6 pounds Image Comics
Progressions: The Art Of John Foster by John Foster 80 pages 8.75 x 0.5 x 10.75 inches 1.3 pounds Steve Jackson Games

Buying Guide for the Best Sci-Fi Art Books for Artists

The best sci-fi art book for artists is subjective and depends on your personal preferences and artistic goals. Use this buying guide as a starting point to explore different options, and choose the book that resonates with you the most.

Content and Variety

Look for books that offer a diverse range of artwork, including illustrations, concept art, landscapes, character designs, and more. The book should showcase the artist's versatility and provide a comprehensive overview of their work. This variety can inspire you to explore different techniques and subjects within the sci-fi and fantasy art genres.

Book Length and Dimensions

Consider the length and dimensions of the book. Longer books with more pages often provide a more in-depth exploration of the artist's work. Larger dimensions can also enhance the visual impact of the artwork. However, keep in mind that larger books may be less portable and harder to handle.

Weight and Binding

Check the weight of the book, especially if you plan to carry it around or travel with it. Heavy books can be cumbersome and may not be suitable for frequent use or mobility. Additionally, consider the type of binding used. Hardcover books tend to be more durable and long-lasting, while softcover books may be more affordable.

Reviews and Recommendations

Read reviews and seek recommendations from fellow artists or art communities. Their insights can provide valuable information about the quality, content, and usefulness of the book. Consider the credibility of the sources and look for reviews that align with your specific interests and needs.

Price and Budget

Set a budget for your purchase and compare prices across different platforms and sellers. Keep in mind that high-quality art books with extensive content and premium features may come at a higher cost. Consider the value you will gain from the book and prioritize quality over affordability if possible.

What are the essential elements to consider when choosing a sci-fi art book?

When choosing a sci-fi art book, consider the content and variety of artwork, book length, and dimensions, weight and binding, reviews and recommendations, as well as the price and your budget.

What should I look for in terms of content and variety in a sci-fi art book?

Look for books that offer a diverse range of artwork, including illustrations, concept art, landscapes, character designs, and more. The book should showcase the artist’s versatility and provide a comprehensive overview of their work.

Does the length of a sci-fi art book matter?

The length of a sci-fi art book can influence the depth of exploration into the artist’s work. Longer books with more pages often provide a more extensive collection of artwork and insights. However, shorter books can still offer valuable inspiration and guidance.

How important is the weight and binding of a sci-fi art book?

The weight of a sci-fi art book is crucial, especially if you plan to carry it around or travel with it. Heavy books can be cumbersome and may not be suitable for frequent use or mobility. Additionally, consider the type of binding used – hardcover books tend to be more durable, while softcover books may be more affordable.

Should I prioritize quality over affordability when choosing a sci-fi art book?

If possible, it is advisable to prioritize quality over affordability when choosing a sci-fi art book. High-quality art books with extensive content and premium features may provide more inspiration and value in the long run. However, it’s essential to find a balance between your budget and the value you expect to gain from the book.

Introducing the top recommendations for sci-fi art books, we have explored a vast selection of titles that cater to different artistic preferences. After careful consideration and analysis, we present the three standout choices.

For artists seeking inspiration in gothic art, "The Art of Ian Miller" is an ideal option, showcasing Miller's unconventional and haunting creations influenced by HP Lovecraft. If you're looking for sci-fi art, "H.R Giger's Necronomicon" is a good choice, with its iconic images and conceptual designs from renowned artists. Finally, for those interested in space art, "The Art of Chesley Bonestell" is the right choice, featuring over 300 super-realistic images that have shaped our visions of outer space.

And with that, we come to the very end of this vast and extensive guide on some of the best sci-fi and fantasy art books that will tickle and enrich the imagination and soul of every artist in every corner of the world.

We hope you liked our endeavor as much as we loved making this effort for you.

Hope to see you soon! Till next time!

Glues are a must-have item in every household as they can be applied to repair broken things in a jiffy. 

However, with the availability of a ton of options on the market, zoning in on a single product can be quite challenging and time-consuming. That’s why we have tried to make the task easier for you by reviewing 2 products from the 2 best glue brands on the market.  

Furthermore, we have provided an in-depth comparison between the two packs of glue to help accelerate your decision-making. So, without further chit-chat, let’s jump in and find out which glue holds better.   

Read on to find out everything!

In this section, we’ll take a look at both the brands and their respective products in detail so that you can understand the fundamental difference between the two.  

1. JB WELD 8281

For over 40 years, JB Weld has been manufacturing glues that hold firmly to a range of surfaces such as metal, plastic, and concrete in even the harshest environmental conditions. And naturally, the 8281 Twin Pack of resin and hardener is no different.      

This two-part epoxy system was originally designed as an alternative to torch welding. So, it should come as no surprise that they offer extremely strong and lasting repairs to a wide variety of surfaces and produce a bond that’s even stronger than steel. Understandably, that makes it an ideal choice for craft, marine, DIY household, and automotive repair. 

Additionally, when the two-part epoxy is mixed together, it forms a glue that takes 24 hours to cure, which is pretty decent, given it's not super glue. And the best part? Once it’s cured, it can be further drilled, molded, sanded, filled, and tapped. In other words, you can do whatever you please with it after waiting overnight.

Apart from this, the JB Weld glue is steel-reinforced, offering a tensile strength of around 5,020 PSI. Long story short, it is extremely durable and can withstand temperatures up to 550 degrees Fahrenheit without breaking a sweat. Not to mention, it is waterproof and resistant to acid, chemicals, and petroleum.

Now, as far as the application is concerned, you can apply it to a wide range of materials, including fiberglass, metal, concrete, wood, ceramic, PVC, and tile. And that’s why both the product and the brand have earned a loyal following from DIYers, repair professionals, and mechanics alike. 

2. Gorilla Glue 5002801

This company has been manufacturing high-quality glues for over 2 decades, and the 5002801 Original Gorilla Glue is yet another prestigious addition to its wood glue repertoire. Over the years, it has built a name for itself in the industry, primarily because of its outstanding versatility and holding power. Let’s learn a bit more about it in the coming sections.    

Unlike other glues, this water-activated polyurethane expands into adhesive materials to create a strong bond that can adhere to virtually everything. Besides, it’s entirely waterproof and safe for use both outdoors and indoors. Rest assured, it can easily withstand the various weather elements quite conveniently. 

Once cured, you can stain it, paint it, and sand it as per your requirement and give the project a completely new and finished look, which is great. 

However, ensure that the surface is dampened and clean, tight-fitting, and dust-free before applying. And for shiny surfaces like glass, you need to sand the material a bit so that the glue holds onto it. 

Since it’s water-resistant, it doesn’t break down when it comes in contact with moisture, which is truly remarkable. Needless to say, it is heat-resistant and can therefore withstand temperature in tough conditions. 

Overall, this flexible glue is one of the top-rated and best gluing materials on the market. 

In-depth Comparison: JB Weld VS Gorilla Glue

Now that you know what both the products are all about, it’s time we made an in-depth comparison between the two of them. So, let’s jump right in. 

1. Cleanup

As far as cleanup is concerned, both products are known to give users a tough time. That is because both of them feature solid adhesive materials. Note that the Gorilla Glue doesn’t need to be mixed with 2 different materials before application. 

On the other hand, you have to mix different components of JBL Weld, which naturally makes it messy. So, we think it’s safe to say that the former is relatively easier to clean away than the latter.  

2. Strength

If you are looking for an option that provides unmatched strength, then the JB Weld could be your best bet as it has a higher tensile strength than Gorilla glue. On top of that, it’s way more resistant to weather elements, which is no less than a bonus in the books of those who intend to use glue outdoors.  

However, this doesn’t mean that the Gorilla glue is weaker or susceptible to cracking or shrinking; it’s just that it is not as durable as the two-part epoxy JB Weld. Additionally, the bond formed by the JB Weld is difficult to break regardless of where it has been applied or prevailing weather conditions. 

So, the winner here is JB Weld.  

3. Materials

The JB Weld two-part epoxy is highly versatile and can bond a wide range of surfaces together, such as jewelry, beads, metals, plastic, fabrics, and wood. DIY enthusiasts and loyal followers of JB Weld often claim that it can bond all materials. 

Gorilla Glue is a polyurethane-based glue, which means that it is mainly used to glue wood together. However, this wood glue can bond together with other materials, such as fabrics, paper, metals, and a few other materials.    

4. Health Concerns

The JB Weld features a non-toxic formula, which means it won’t kill you if you happen to accidentally eat it. On the contrary, the Gorilla Glue is extremely toxic and can cause death if ingested. So, in this regard, JB Weld is the winner.

5. Applications

Now, let’s see how each product performs in terms of applications. 

The JB Weld glue is mainly used for repairs because it has a tensile strength of over 5,000 PSI, which is a lot. On top of that, it is water-resistant, solvent-acid, and petroleum-proof, meaning it is an ideal choice for craft, marine, and automotive repairs. Additionally, it is temperature-resistant and can be sanded or painted as per requirements. 

As far as the Gorilla Glue is concerned, it is a polyurethane glue mainly used to bond wood. So, when it comes to wood repairs and carpentry, it can deliver unparalleled results without a hassle. 

That said, keep in mind that it can bond together with other materials; as such, you can use it for small repairs and arts and crafts projects.     

6. Cost

The JB Weld glue is more expensive than Gorilla Glue since its quality is a notch higher than its counterpart. However, in the long run, JB Weld can help you save a good amount of money as you can use it in place of a screw when you need two lighter materials to be held together. 

Speaking of Gorilla Glue, it is less expensive than JB Weld since it is not meant for heavy repairs. 

Quick Recap

Now, let’s do a quick recap on the basic differences between the two products. 

  • JB Weld cures to a grayish color, whereas the Gorilla Glue cures to a yellowish color
  • Gorilla Glue is polyurethane-based wood glue, while JBL Weld glue is a two-part epoxy 

What will the JB Weld glue not stick to?

It will not stick or bond to any surface that’s rubbery or flexible. This is because it is specifically made to provide incredibly durable and long-lasting repairs on solid surfaces such as cars, ships, etc.

How long do I have to wait for Gorilla Glue to dry?

Even though it doesn’t take too long to dry, we strongly recommend that you wait for at least 24 hours before you sand or paint it.

That was pretty much everything you needed to know about JB Weld and Gorilla Glue. 

Now, coming to the main question, which one is a better adhesive? For us, it has to be the JB Weld glue because it is more durable and safe to use than Gorilla Glue. And even though the price is a bit higher, this product can help you cut costs in the long run. 

That being said, it’s important to note that the Gorilla Glue is not a bad glue by any means. If you are looking for an adhesive for wooden materials, you can’t go wrong by choosing the polyurethane-based Gorilla Glue.   

So, that’s all for today; we hope this guide has helped you choose the right glue based on your requirements. Until next time, take care!

Retractable awnings are structures that provide protection from sun, wind, and rain. They come in various types and are usually made with aluminum frames that offer durability to the product. These awnings can be attached to your camper van and can be used wherever you need them. 

Why should one opt for the best retractable awnings? Camper vans are the most ideal outdoor space exploration vehicles out there, perfect for a van life. But their only drawback is a lack of space. 

This is where a retractable awning for a camper van comes into play. It is a great way to provide outdoor space with a “roof” shielding you from the elements. So, dive in to know about the 9 best van awnings right now. 

9 Best Retractable Awnings for Camper Van

1. Best Quality Fabric Camper Van Awning: Yescom Car Side Awning

The Yescom car side awning is an all-rounder product for van life. Its rooftop assembly provides 54 square feet of shade and protection from the sun, wind, and rain. 

Besides, it is made with high-quality 420D Oxford fabric and has a 2000mm PU coating and UV 50+ protection to prevent sun damage. This water-resistant awning is made with a stable aluminum alloy structure, which also makes it rust-resistant and sturdy enough to stand on any ground. 

Furthermore, the aluminum stands are telescoping legs with a twist lock design that can be extended or contracted easily. And I had no trouble setting it up and taking it down. The height of the awnings is adjustable from 59 inches to 85 inches (150 cm to 216 cm) 

All installation hardware that comes with the package is made from high-quality 304 stainless steel. 

An added bonus was the waterproof carry bag that I got along with the retractable campervan awning that allowed me to carry it on the vehicle rooftop without any hassle. However, the corner joints are easily bendable, which can be a problem in inclement weather conditions.

Material: Aluminum Alloy | Size: 6.6 x 8.2’ | Weight: 19.8 lbs | Fabric type: 420D Oxford fabric | Assembly Required: Yes

2. Best For Smaller Camper Vans: Danchel Outdoor Car Tent Awning

The Danchel Outdoor car tent awning is one of the most affordable awnings for a smaller campervan, providing 32.5 square feet of shade. 

Moreover, this camper van awning comes in various sizes that fit different camping vehicle roof rails. All of them are made of waterproof 420D Oxford fabric and are extremely portable, thanks to their sleek design. The frame is made of aluminum and has telescoping poles with a twist lock mechanism that locks the poles in place at a height ranging from 5.2 feet to 6.88 feet (160 cm to 210 cm). 

These poles are rust-resistant and are designed in a way that allows for the saving of living space. With two setup mechanisms, a taller setup for well-ventilated areas, and an angled setup for rain, these affordable awnings can be used for any camping trip.

 Another thing worth mentioning is the Danchel retractable awning was it's extension properties. The front slot and the side hooks of the camper van awning helped me attach an exterior canopy side wall for more shade and also protected me from the harsh winter winds.

Apart from that, the mounting process of this awning is fairly easy. It requires two people, and the awning comes with the required mounting parts such as stakes, guy lines or guy ropes, and a waterproof PVC carry bag. However, my roof rack needed more than the provided mounting tools, so I had to spend extra to purchase additional mounting tools.  

Material: Aluminum | Size: 4.9 x 6.5' | Weight: 17.06 lbs| Fabric type: Polyester | Assembly Required: Yes

3. Best Camper Van Awning Made With High-Quality Materials: All Top Vehicle Awning

The All-Top vehicle awning is made with various high-quality materials such as polyester, aluminum, polyurethane, and polyvinyl chloride. It provides an astounding 54 square feet of shade to shield from sun and rain. The awning is also extremely versatile, with various size options that fit most standard roof racks. Its entire assembly can be packaged into a heavy-duty PVC bag and stored away. 

This canopy awning is made up of 280 GSM polyester ripstop fabric with 10,000 mm PU coating UV50+ protection, and water-resistant materials. This retractable camper van awning offers aluminum poles that are coated with rust-preventive materials, which help the frame last longer and give it more operational life. 

The installation is fairly simple, with the anodized metal telescoping legs that allow easy installation and take down. This can largely be credited to the twist lock mechanism that provides a quick and easy setup. 

Furthermore, this retractable awning has an adjustable height ranging from 4 feet to 7 feet. It comes with all the necessary mounting tools from brackets, nails, nuts/bolts, winding or guy ropes, wrenches, a manual, and a storage bag. The installation process typically only takes a few minutes to complete. 

A noticeable downside is that the tighteners for the poles did not function optimally. Trying to tighten them only resulted in me keeping on spinning the tightener over and over. 

Material: Aluminum, Polyester, Polyurethane, Polyvinyl Chloride | Size: 6.6 x 8.2' | Weight: 22 lbs | Fabric type: Polyester | Assembly Required: Yes

4. Best For Large Shade: Danchel Outdoor Retractable Vehicle Awning

The best campervan awning that is a pretty good alternative to the ARB retractable awnings is the Danchel awning. This larger awning provides more shade (around 82 square feet) and comes in different sizes for multiple types of vehicles. The awning is very portable and is made with 420D Oxford waterproof fabric. 

Plus, the frame consists of aluminum telescopic legs with a twist lock mechanism and a height range from 5.2 feet to 6.8 feet (160 cm to 210 cm). Thanks to its sleek horizontal and vertical poles, the product takes up minimal space to add extra floor space on the outside. The awning can be made taller or angled in a certain way, allowing rainwater to flow down rather than be collected on the roof campervan canopy. 

As for the installation process, it’s pretty easy and can be done in less than 60 seconds, although it’s not really a one-person job. With a waterproof PVC bag, this can be the perfect awning to store and carry around. If spending quite a lot on an awning is not feasible for you, this particular awning can come to your rescue. 

A noticeable con of this awning is that the twist lock mechanism appears flimsy. I noticed that the legs would not lock in place properly, which added to the installation time and effort. 

Material: Aluminum | Size: 8.2 x 9.8' | Weight: 24.3 lbs | Fabric type: 420D Oxford fabric | Assembly Required: Yes

5. Best For Night-time Camping: ARB Retractable Awning

The ARB retractable campervan awnings fall under the category of "more expensive yet worth the splurge" products. These well-built, high-quality awnings come in different sizes and types, providing ample shade. Besides, the ARB awning has an LED light strip with 1200 lumens that runs across its perimeter and comes with a digital dimmer switch that makes it the perfect option for night-time use.

This switch allowed me to control the color and lighting modes. The dimmer switch is also waterproof, and the LED strip avoided attracting bugs or other pests, so I could enjoy a peaceful time while camping. 

The ARB awning is also waterproof and UV-protected, with durable and anti-wear points that set these campervan awnings above their competitors. It attaches to almost all vehicles and can be stored conveniently for easy use on arrival. 

Moreover, it has a tough PU-coated 300 mm polycotton ripstop canvas that makes the roof fully waterproof. Likewise, the aluminum poles come with nylon cuff joints and have included pegs and guide ropes. With adjustable height, this ARB awning took only 30 seconds to deploy fully, which is perfect for a hectic day or a busy night.

The only downside I faced with this product was very similar to the Rhino-Rack awnings. No mounting tools or materials were included, which resulted in me having to spend extra bucks to purchase them separately. It is also quite heavy when compared to other camper awnings. Considering this camper awning is quite expensive, mounting tools and materials could have been included.

Material: Aluminum, Plastic | Size: 8.2 x 8.2' | Weight: 41.9 lbs | Fabric type: Nylon | Assembly Required: Yes

6. Best For Frequent Camping: Rhino Rack Batwing Awning For Trucks, SUVs, Vans

The Rhino Rack batwing awning is by far the most durable one on our list. Since it is made with 210D ripstop polycotton canvas and 2000 mm PU coating, the water-resistant cover ensures optimum protection from direct sunlight and rain. This makes it a great option for frequent campers who camp in areas with dynamic weather conditions. 

It provides 55.4 square feet of shade and can be installed in just a couple of minutes. With UV50+ protection and water water-resistant roof, this camper van awning can be a great addition to a camper van.

This product is one of the few best retractable awnings for windy areas, thanks to its durability. The pole frames of Rhino Rack's batwing awning are also lightweight and are made with rust-proof aluminum that can last a long time. Furthermore, a heavy-duty PVC aluminum bag is provided with the product so as to store it away securely after use. 

The highlight of the product was that it's a one-person setup. I was able to set it up without any outside help or further instructions due to its relatively simple setup mechanism. But it doesn’t come with any mounting hardware.

Since this product lies on the steeper side of the price, it was a drawback that mounting tools were missing, and that I had to spend extra to purchase them separately.

Material: Aluminum | Size: 8.2 x 6.11' | Weight: 22 lbs | Fabric type: Polycotton canvas | Assembly Required: No 

7. Best For Easy Installation: Timber Ridge Retractable Vehicle Awning

The Timber Ridge Retractable awning is one of the easiest awnings in terms of installation. In fact, it took me less than half an hour to finish setting up the awning and taking it down. Plus, it came with all the mounting parts that were necessary for the installation, along with detailed instructions. 

It provides 53 square feet of instant shade and protects from sun and rain. Like the other awnings, the Timber Ridge awning also comes in a waterproof PVC bag. Its shade cloth is made with robust fabric that is ripstop combed cotton canvas. 

The aluminum frame is quite durable, with a waterproof silver coating that keeps rust at bay and extends its lifespan. 

An added feature is the adjustable height of 4 feet to 7 feet. It was also quite affordable and did not drain my pockets. However, a drawback is that the U-bolts accompanying the awning cannot be used to attach it to a round roof rack. Moreover, the awning is pretty heavy when compared to other vehicle awnings on the market. 

Material: Aluminum | Size: 6.5 x 8.2' | Weight: 26.4 lbs | Fabric type: Ripstop Combed Cotton | Assembly Required: No

8. Best For All Roof Racks: TangMiGe Vehicle Awning

The TangMiGe retractable vehicle awning is among the most versatile options on my list. This self-standing van awning fits most roof racks and roof bars, even a high roof van. So, I did not have to worry about it fitting on my car roof rack. 

These TangMiGe retractable awnings are made with 600D Oxford fabric with 10000 mm PU coating and UV50+ protection. They provide 54 square feet of shade and shields from sun and rain. The whole structure comes packed in a strong and durable PVC bag that is waterproof, ideal for van life. 

Besides, their aluminum alloy frames are coated with a rust-preventing material that elongates the product's life. These campervan awnings come with telescoping legs with a twist lock design that allows easy extension and contraction of the unit. With an adjustable height of 4 feet to 7 feet, these poles are specifically designed to provide extra room. 

The taller setups allow more air ventilation, while the angled panels allow the rainwater to fall down rather than be collected on the fabric.

This product comes with all the necessary mounting tools, including brackets, nails, nuts/bolts, winding ropes, wrenches, a manual, and a storage bag. However, I had to keep bringing down the awning as it couldn’t stand stronger winds.

Material: Aluminum | Size: 6.6 x 8.2’ | Weight: 22 lbs | Fabric type: 600D Oxford fabric | Assembly Required: Yes

9. Best Affordable Awning: Vevor Car Side Awning

The Vevor side door awning is a pretty good choice when it comes to retractable camper van awnings. This multifunction unit can easily be installed on most campervans, giving 53 square feet of shade. And the good news is it doesn’t burn a hole in your pocket, especially if you’ve budget constraints.

This sturdy water-resistant vehicle campervan awning offers considerable shade and sun protection. It is made with lightweight Oxford 420D fabric with a 2000 mm PU coating. Additionally, it has a UV-stabilized cover that offers sun protection of UV50+. 

The Vevor awning rooftop support frame is made with durable aluminum alloy telescopic poles that can be extended and contracted quite quickly through a twist lock design. It is also convenient to be carried around and can be stored in a heavy-duty waterproof carry bag that is provided with the package.

Besides, this awning comes with mounting brackets, covers, nuts/bolts, tie-down guy ropes, and ground nails. So, setting it up on my van’s roof racks didn’t take me a lot of time. 

However, I noticed that the awning can be quite shaky after installation, especially on uneven grounds or during heavy rain. 

Material: Aluminum | Size: 8.2 x 6.5’ | Weight: 18.3 lbs | Fabric type: Oxford fabric | Assembly Required: Yes

Best Retractable Awnings for Camper Vans Comparison Table

Product Material Size Weight Fabric type Assembly Required
Yescom Car Side Awning Aluminum Alloy 6.6 x 8.2’ 19.8 lbs 420D Oxford fabric Yes
Danchel Outdoor Car Tent Awning Aluminum 4.9 x 6.5' 17.06 lbs Polyester Yes
All Top Vehicle Awning Aluminum, Polyester, Polyurethane, Polyvinyl Chloride 6.6 x 8.2' 22 lbs Polyester Yes
Danchel Outdoor Retractable Vehicle Awning Aluminum 8.2 x 9.8' 24.3 lbs 420D Oxford fabric Yes
ARB Retractable Awning Aluminum, Plastic 8.2 x 8.2' 41.9 lbs Nylon Yes
Rhino Rack Batwing Awning For Trucks, SUVs, Vans Aluminum 8.2 x 6.11' 22 lbs Polycotton canvas No
Timber Ridge Retractable Vehicle Awning Aluminum 6.5 x 8.2' 26.4 lbs Ripstop Combed Cotton No
TangMiGe Vehicle Awning Aluminum 6.6 x 8.2' 22 lbs 600D Oxford fabric Yes
Vevor Car Side Awning Aluminum 8.2 x 6.5' 18.3 lbs Oxford fabric Yes

Retractable Awning for Camper Van Buying Guide

A. Size of the Awning 

Manufacturers make retractable camping van awnings in various sizes, so make sure you pick one that’s suitable for the roof rack of your vehicle. Apart from fitting right, consider the floor space it would account for in the outdoor space. 

Camper vans have various heights, so purchasing a non-adjustable retractable camper van awning was out of the question. Awnings with adjustable telescopic legs are the preferred type considering they can be adjusted to multiple heights depending on the van and the terrain on which they will be placed. 

Aside from that, there are drive-away awnings, which have a tent-like structure that is attached to the side doors of a camper van. They have an opening on one side, allowing easy passage from the van to the awning tents. 

Though these drive-away awnings are quite similar to a tent, they are more expensive but will add extra space, flexibility, and storage space to the vehicle. Moreover, they offer considerable protection from natural elements and are pretty sturdy in design. 

B. Mounting Process

Retractable awnings can be mounted in various ways, which is why the way I planned on mounting it was an important thing to consider. Certain camper van awnings can be permanently roof mounted on the roof rack of the van, whereas others are portable awnings and can be moved around. 

The retractable awnings that cannot be moved around need special adapters that can mount them onto the roof rack. However, most retractable awnings are made for convenient usage and are compatible with most roof racks with a no-tool setup. 

Since there are various types of vans and camper van awnings available on the market, each of them has unique installation properties. Generally, camper van awnings are mounted to the side of your vehicle on the roof racks on top of the roof rail system.

In the case of a van without a roof rack or roof rail, these attachments are easily available on the market and can be purchased and attached before installing a retractable awning. 

The attachment style will depend on what you need from the awnings. A more permanently mounted awning can be attached to the side of the vehicle if you don’t want the hassle of installing one for every trip. 

However, for people who prefer a temporary fitting, installing the retractable awnings on the roof rack or roof rail is a better idea as they can be removed or detached easily. 

An important thing to keep in mind is the use of space in the vehicle. Installing a retractable awning on the roof rack or roof rail often means that other things cannot be kept on these attachments. But fixing it to the side of the car allows the roof rack or roof rail to accommodate more items, such as solar panels, sporting equipment, and cargo boxes. 

C. Set Up Time

Camping can be an extremely fun activity but spending a great amount of time just fixing the camper van awning is often frustrating. I generally prefer awnings that take little to no effort to set up with minimal manual labor.

Ideally, you should opt for awnings that have an easy setup process and require just one person rather than two to three people to set it up efficiently. But again, you may choose a heavier design if you can spare the time and effort to get that extra space of shade.

D. Weather Protection 

I noticed that most high-quality retractable camper van awnings offer better weather protection properties, which is a crucial element in camper van awnings. UV protection and waterproofing were on top of my list. 

However, this feature is subjective. To camp in placid areas with fewer chances of weather problems, basic sun protection is all that is needed. For windy areas, on the other hand, I resorted to a more well-built, heavy-duty material that could withstand all the elements without an issue. Based on my weather protection requirements, I picked the right camper van awning for me. 

E. Budget

Camper van awnings can be quite expensive, with certain models costing up to thousands of dollars. However, you may well find a retractable awning that fits your camping vehicle without draining your pockets.

Most manufacturers have recently come up with various camper van awnings that are priced reasonably and still offer the same features as an expensive retractable camper van awning. 

F. Compatible Accessories with the Awning 

Though not a significant matter to consider, it still helps to elevate the awning. Some manufacturers enable the use of extra accessories like opaque walls, wind and water protection, and mosquito nets. Depending on the place I used the campervan awning, I got the necessary accessories to elevate my experience with the retractable camper van awning. 

Can I install a retractable awning myself?

Many retractable awnings come with installation instructions and can be installed by individuals with basic DIY skills. However, for more complex or larger awnings, professional installation may be recommended.

How do I clean and maintain a retractable awning?

Regularly brush off debris and hose down the fabric. Use a mild soap solution for more thorough cleaning. Avoid using harsh chemicals or abrasive cleaners, as they can damage the fabric.

Are retractable awnings suitable for all camper van models?

Retractable awnings come in various sizes, so it's important to choose one that matches the dimensions of your camper van. Some manufacturers offer awnings designed for specific models.

Can a retractable awning withstand strong winds?

While retractable awnings are designed to handle light winds, it's best to retract them during heavy wind conditions. Some models have wind sensors that automatically retract the awning in strong gusts.

Can I leave a retractable awning out in the rain?

While most retractable awnings are water-resistant, they are not designed to handle heavy rain or storms. It's recommended to retract the awning during inclement weather to prevent damage.

Conclusion

It should come as no surprise that the ARB retractable awning is one of my top recommendations. Made with high-quality, durable fabric, this camper van awning is an ideal choice for various campsites. 

Another product that I’d recommend is the Vevor car side awning. It is a more budget-friendly option that is easy to install and convenient to carry around. This awning also has long-lasting aluminum poles that are coated with rust-resistant materials. 

And with that, it’s time for me to wrap up this extensive guide. See you next time!

A retractable awning is a great addition to the outdoor living space, such as a front porch, RV, or trailer. It protects residents from harmful UV rays from sun exposure and high winds while maintaining a low indoor temperature. 

Living in a windy area has made me install retractable awnings to protect my outdoor furniture from high wind speeds. Thankfully, there are some brands manufacturing the best retractable awnings catering to windy locations.

Wind-resistant retractable awnings are very useful for both homes and businesses in case of storms or general bad weather. Moreover, awnings made from metal can withstand wind and protect the space from flying debris.

Retractable awnings protect your outdoor and indoor space from heat, heavy rain, high winds, and fading due to sun exposure. I researched and tested the best retractable awnings to determine how much current they can withstand. So, today, I’m going to review the best retractable awnings for windy areas… 

Best Retractable Awnings For Windy Areas

Here’s my list of the 8 best retractable awnings for windy areas:

1. AECOJOY Patio Awning Retractable Sun Shade - Best for UV Protection

Aecojoy is known for being America’s leading patio furniture brand, with over one million buyers. This brand’s 10'ⅹ 8' Patio Awning Retractable Sun Shade gives an elegant look to any outdoor space. I used this for a family gathering on my patio, and it delivered what it promised.

It is unique for its UV-resistant high-quality polyester fabric, which provides 50+ sun protection. I could easily use this for sunbathing in my backyard without worrying about getting sunburned or too tanned. This retractable patio awning also claims to be windproof and fade-resistant.

Moreover, it has a steel frame material with an aluminum alloy body which gives it better durability for both outdoor and indoor usage. I also checked the retracting system, which cranked quite well with its 59” long manual hand crank.

Each of these awnings comes fully assembled with a pre-set pitching angle that is universally convenient. However, adjusting the angle with a few manual steps was easy.  

This manual awning also has good customer service that guarantees free replacement in case of damage, as well as quick after-service. They also entertain questions regarding any mounting issue anytime.

Material: Aluminum, Alloy Steel | Available Sizes: 10' x 8', 8.2' x 6.5', 13' x 8', 13' x 10' | Dimensions: 5.1' Depth x 8.6', Projection Width x 7.8' Height | Color: Beige

2. ALEKO Manual Retractable Patio Awning - Best for Increased Air Flow

ALEKO Manual Retractable Patio Awning is another affordable outdoor deck and porch option. It is built with anti-rust steel material, a powder-coated aluminum frame, and anti-chip paint, giving this awning better longevity.

Besides providing UV protection, the canopy fabric reduces trapped heat and moisture, making it mildew-resistant. I noticed an increased air flow when put up, unlike other manual awnings that make the space a little stuffy. 

ALEKO’s retractable awning is compatible with different wall materials, such as concrete, brick walls, and wooden frames. However, installing it on wooden walls requires lag screws or carriage bolts. 

Moreover, it has an easy pitch system with a 6.5-foot maximum projection length. The retractable awning comes with a masonry screw box, fabric cords, and a detailed manual for quick and easy installation. 

Although it is durable enough, I had to retract it when the wind ran too high since there was a lot of pressure on the frame. However, this family-owned and operated company provides a 30-day money-back scheme, with good customer support, multi-package delivery, and quick tech support.

Material: Powder-coated steel, Aluminum, Polyester | Available Sizes: 10' x 8', 12' x 10', 13' x 10' | Dimensions: 9.4' x 8.2' (Awning Fabric), 9.8' x 8' (Frame)  | Color: Burgundy, Gray, Green, Red, Yellow, Sand

3. Best Choice Products Retractable Awning - Best for Large Canopy Area

Best Choice Products’ Retractable Awning is a family-friendly lightweight option for balconies, patios, windows, and doors. It is built with a durable, powder-coated aluminum frame that features a PU coating, making it water and corrosion-resistant.

This retractable awning claims to provide all-weather coverage and protection from UV rays. Well, it did provide shade sufficiently and give enough coverage during both heavy and light rain. 

It comes with an accessible 60-inch hand pole that smoothly extends and retracts the awning. Moreover, the mounting hardware is delivered along with the retractable awning that can be used for proper installation on vinyl, wood, stucco, or any other balcony or patio.

Lastly, the canopy is quite large, ranging up to 54 square feet when fully extended. And it can thrive with minimal support structures. If you have a big family or large occasion coming up, this might be the ideal retractable awning. 

However, it only comes in one elegant beige color. 

Material: Aluminum, Polyester | Available Sizes: 8.2' x 6.6' | Dimensions: 8.2' Fabric Length x 6.6' Fabric Width x 6.5' Flexible Height | Color: Beige

4. VEVOR Beige Retractable Awning - Best for Privacy Screen

VEVOR Beige Retractable Awning is a multi-purpose side awning that acts as a privacy screen for a patio, terrace, backyard, garden, office, studio, etc. 

It is built with an alloy aluminum frame that is lightweight and corrosion-resistant. The PU-coated canopy fabric is flame-retardant, breathable, and waterproof and offers complete protection from UV rays. 

I was quite impressed with this because it is an ideal awning for people who want more privacy and sun protection at the same time. I could use it as an umbrella, a sun shade, and a divider to block sight. 

This retractable awning features a screen handle, providing better stability since it is free-standing. For easy storage, it can be placed into the aluminum roller and stored in a dark place.  

Installing the privacy screen was super easy for me, especially with all the mounting accessories, including mounting brackets provided. All you need to do is fix the support post to the base plate and then mount the entire thing onto the concrete wall or wood deck.

Moreover, it has different size options for various walls and spaces.

Material: Aluminum Alloy, Polyester | Available Sizes: 5.2' x 9.8', 5.2' x 19.6', 5.9' x 9.8' | Dimensions: 5.2' Height x 9.8' Flexible Fabric Width | Color: Beige

5. MCombo Manual Retractable Awning - Best for Corrosion Resistance

MCombo Manual Retractable Awning has a solid structure made of an entirely corrosion-resistant aluminum frame and plastic steel hand crank that is easy to adjust. 

These wind-resistant awnings have a wind rating of resident Beauport scale 4. It has a lightweight steel frame with PU-coated fabric that is anti-UV rays and water resistant. Moreover, I tested this awning during high wind speeds, and it was sufficiently sturdy. Its 50+ sun protection is also impressive.

MCombo provides the product along with mounting brackets, an instruction manual, and other mounting hardware for the installation process. You will only need a power drill, tape, and wrench to complete the installation.

I could also adjust the height of the retractable brackets according to my needs. It is advisable, however, to install this awning on concrete walls, hard wooden or brickwork walls. If you need to install it on other materials, consider booking professional help. 

Overall, it is a high-quality retractable awning with a 100% money-back guarantee and a three-month warranty. It also comes in various colors, making color-coordinating your outdoor space easier. 

Material: Aluminum Alloy, Polyester Fabric, Steel Tube | Available Sizes: 12' x 10' | Dimensions: 9.8' Fabric Length x 11.6' Fabric Width x 8' Flexible Height | Color: Beige, Brick Red, Burgundy, Coffee Brown, Dark Blue, Green

6. STEELAID Manual Retractable Awning - Best Multi-Purpose Retractable Awning

The STEELAID Manual Retractable Awning is the perfect small-sized option for the occasional sun baths and small gatherings. The canopy is 100% polyester, which is water and UV-resistant. 

It is a unique pop-up canopy with a 46" coverage. Moreover, its easily adjustable hand crank allowed me to adjust the canopy even up to 122", which is quite impressive and higher than most retractable awnings.

This retractable awning decreases outdoor temperature, which I noticed since I put this up on a very sunny day. It is also comfortable to use and does not require too much effort to retract and extend. 

Furthermore, its adjustable poles can be attached to almost any surface, which is a plus. There’s no requirement for drilling holes in your walls, either!

The retailers send this awning in a compact package that saves more time during installation. Moreover, the awning canopy also has a decorated edging to offer an elegant look.

It is also convenient for RVs, trailers, and tents.

Material: Aluminum, Polyester | Available Sizes: 4.9', 6.5', 9.8', 11.5', 13' | Dimensions: 9.8' Hand Crank x 3.9' Fabric Width x 6.5' Canopy Length | Color: Gray

7. XtremepowerUS Patio Manual Retractable Awning - Best Design

The XtremepowerUS Retractable Awning has an overall secured coverage along with an elegant look. It is ideal for shading balconies, windows, and doors with better protection from bad weather and UV resistance.

It is built with a high-quality powder-coated aluminum frame which securely holds the canopy fabric made of 100% polyester to the front bar. The fabric also claims to be water and heat-resistant. 

I liked the superior quality steel hand crank they provide since it feels very strong and sturdy. Moreover, the extension and retraction process was also sufficiently smooth.

Since this retractable awning is closed off in its structure, it provides suitable resistance against high wind speeds and extreme heat. 

However, XtremepowerUS does not include any additional mounting hardware, so you have to buy them from a local store. If installing gets too difficult, consider booking a professional installation. But their installation manual got me through.

This is not a very affordable retractable awning for the average homeowner. But this can work wonders as a side awning for back porches and side patios of cafes and restaurants. This is because the structure of this awning can create a personal space that many customers might like.    

Material: Polyester, Aluminum, Steel | Available Sizes: 10' x 8', 8' x 6' | Dimensions: 7' Hand Crank x 9.8' Flexible Fabric Width x 7' Flexible Fabric Length | Color: Beige

8. Uyoyous Retractable Patio Side Awning - Best for Easy Installation

This retractable patio awning doubles as a privacy fence while blocking harmful sun rays and high wind speeds. It is very easy to install, given its cartridge wall-mounted design, which requires only a few steps to mount.

All I did to install the set-up was to stick the support post to the base plate first and then fix the entire thing on my wall. But remember that for better stability, installing it on cement, hardwood, or brick walls is advisable.

The canopy fabric is made of breathable and waterproof polyester. It is built with an aluminum frame and oxidized paint, making it rust-proof while giving it an elegant, sleek finish. It is also easy to clean.

The product description further promises advanced UV stabilization for better heat protection and a corrosion-resistant aluminum pole for retraction. 

I used this awning similarly to the previous privacy screen, and this one also had a smooth retraction system. Overall, it looks hardy and will last a long time.

The best way to use this retractable awning is for landscaping, home gardens, walkways, front yards, and patios.

Material: Alloy Steel, Aluminum, Polyester | Available Sizes: 9.8' x 5.9', 9.8' x 5.2'| Dimensions: 9.8' Fabric Length, 5.8' Flexible Height | Color: Creamy-White

Best Retractable Awning For Windy Areas Comparison Table

Product Material Available Sizes Dimensions Color
AECOJOY Patio Awning Aluminum, Alloy Steel 10' x 8', 8.2' x 6.5', 13' x 8', 13' x 10' 5.1' Depth x 8.6', Projection Width x 7.8' Height Beige
Outsunny Patio Retractable Awning Aluminum, Steel, Polyester Fabric 8' x 7' 7.5' Fabric Width, 6.6' Full Extension, 8.2' Case Width Brown, Green, Khaki, Red
ALEKO Retractable Patio Awning Powder-Coated Steel, Aluminum, Polyester 10' x 8', 12' x 10', 13' x 10' 9.4' x 8.2' (Awning Fabric), 9.8' x 8' (Frame) Burgundy, Gray, Green, Red, Yellow, Sand
Best Choice Products Retractable Awning Aluminum, Polyester 8.2' x 6.6' 8.2' Fabric Length x 6.6' Fabric Width x 6.5' Flexible Height Beige
VEVOR Beige Retractable Awning Aluminum Alloy, Polyester 5.2' x 9.8', 5.2' x 19.6', 5.9' x 9.8' 5.2' Height x 9.8' Flexible Fabric Width Beige
MCombo Manual Retractable Awning Aluminum Alloy, Polyester Fabric, Steel Tube 12' x 10' 9.8' Fabric Length x 11.6' Fabric Width x 8' Flexible Height Beige, Brick Red, Burgundy, Coffee Brown, Dark Blue, Green
Outsunny Retractable Awning Steel, Aluminum, Polyester 12' x 8' 8.2' Flexible Height x 11.8' Fabric Dimension x 4.8' Hand Crank Beige Stripes, Wine Red, Green, Tan, Brown
Tangkula Retractable Awning Aluminum, Fabric 8' x 6.6', 10' x 8.2', 8.2' x 6.5', 12' x 10', 13' x 8' 8' Length x 6.6' Fabric Width Beige, Brown
STEELAID Manual Retractable Awning Aluminum, Polyester 4.9', 6.5', 9.8', 11.5', 13' 9.8' Hand Crank x 3.9' Fabric Width x 6.5' Canopy Length Gray
XtremepowerUS Retractable Awning Polyester, Aluminum, Steel 10' x 8', 8' x 6' 7' Hand Crank x 9.8' Flexible Fabric Width x 7' Flexible Fabric Length Beige
Uyoyous Retractable Patio Side Awning Alloy Steel, Aluminum, Polyester 9.8' x 5.9', 9.8' x 5.2' 9.8' Fabric Length, 5.8' Flexible Height Creamy-White

Buying Guide For The Best Retractable Awning For Windy Areas

Besides the wide variety of options for purchase, choosing the right retractable awning may be challenging without knowing its basic properties. Different customers look for different features – while some may want better sun and heat protection, others may want one that is easy to install. For this reason, I have gathered a set of properties you may consider when purchasing a retractable awning for your home or business.

1. Types of Retractable Awnings

The two main kinds of retractable awnings are manual retractable awnings and motorized retractable awnings.

Manual retractable awnings have hand cranks for adjusting the height and angle. You can do this by rotating them clockwise or anti-clockwise for retraction and extension, respectively. Such awnings are convenient for places with frequent power outages or low electric ratings.

Motorized retractable awnings are expensive but very useful for high wind ratings. They can be easily rolled and extended with automated features like remote control and apps that help you adjust the settings of the awning. This might be the one for you if you’re looking for remote control operation.

2. Wind Resistance Classification

Retractable awnings that offer wind resistance are widely divided into four categories by manufacturers. These classes are based on how well they perform in a real situation with different wind speeds. 

  • Class 0 - These awnings are untested and offer no guarantee of wind resistance.
  • Class 1 - Awnings categorized in this group can withstand wind speeds of 12 mph with 15 mph gusts.
  • Class  2 - This category can sustain winds of 20 mph with 25 mph gust strength.
  • Class 3 - These awnings can sustain wind up to 30 mph with 38 mph.

I advise you to ask the salesperson or manufacturer about the classification of their products before purchase. I find that often campaign videos are misleading when they show retractable awnings withstanding hurricanes and extreme winds. No homeowner should leave their retractable awnings out during severe storms or hurricanes.

3. Size

Buying awnings that fit on the required wall or surface is essential. To ensure this, measure the dimensions of the wall where you want to install the retractable awnings before checking the products. For easy retracting and extending features, always go for extendable ones that provide more extensive coverage.

4. Material

The material of an awning determines its longevity and ease of use. Canopy fabrics of awnings are usually made with polyester, canvas, or acrylic with PA or PU coating for protection from the sun’s UV rays and heavy rainfall. 

The frames that support the canopies are made from either steel or aluminum, both of which are durable. Moreover, these fabrics are washable, with some featuring dirt-repellant and water-resistant fabric. They come in various textures, colors, and patterns.

5. Suitability For Home and Business

I highly recommend metal awnings that can withstand up to 80 mph wind for better wind resistance and protection. However, it is also important to know the types of fabric used in awnings if you prefer these.

The two kinds of retractable fabric awnings are loose-frame retractable awnings and permanently closed-frame awnings. Closed-frame ones have an aluminum or steel metal frame that covers the sides with vinyl siding or canvas and is attached with grommets. 

Closed-frame awnings do not offer good wind resistance since the fabric can get caught up in the wind and put pressure on the joints. Loose frame awnings are better suited because they are connected both at the residence and the front bar. 

After testing several retractable awnings, I have begun to prefer motorized retractable ones since they come with automatic wind sensors that retract the awnings when the wind speed is too high. 

Thus, it is a better fit for homeowners like me who need not worry about their awnings getting damaged even when they are absent. Moreover, a motorized awning makes the best retractable awning for camper vans. 

Meanwhile, business establishments like restaurants require slightly different features. Since the awnings cannot be closed during storms when customers are in the building, the retractable awning needs to be incredibly wind-resistant. 

I suggest using commercial motorized awnings with galvanized steel material and adhesive vinyl. This combination will make the motorized retractable awnings much sturdier than the residential ones. 

6. Weatherproofing Features

Whether your awning is weatherproof depends on the material and fabric of the canopy. Various fabrics provide different types of protection – some resist heat, while others can sustain high wind and rain. Look for awnings with materials that suit your local climate. While most of the awnings prevent heat build-up, wind-resistant awnings feature better weatherproofing.

7. Angle

A retractable awning can be used both as a flat canopy and a shade that drops at an angle. Awnings for balconies, patios, windows, or doors have different angle requirements based on their construction. While awnings have flexible installation and can be installed on every surface, some models aren’t compatible with wood and vinyl surfaces. If that’s your requirement, look for awnings specifically catering to those surfaces.

8. Price

Although manual awnings are affordable and easy to install, most of them cannot withstand extreme weather. They are good for light showers and heat protection, but you can find motorized awnings with better protection if you increase your budget. Electric and motorized awnings can sustain high winds with their wind sensors and other convenient features.

9. Customer Service And Online Support

Besides high-quality materials, it is always better to choose well-known brands with good customer service. Online customer support can help if anything goes wrong during the installation or if the product is damaged. Some brands also offer maintenance services and professional repairs.  

Maintaining A Retractable Awning

Purchasing a sturdy and convenient retractable awning alone will not help the product last for a long time. To maintain your retractable awning, there are certain methods to follow and additional equipment to add. Here’s what I do.

I always fully extend my awning when in use so that the fabric does not end up sagging in the long run. I also make sure to clean the metal frame, hand bar, and roller is also something I make sure to do. These parts also need oil or wax treatment annually for smoother extension and retraction. Spraying lubricant is also feasible. 

If your awning has been retracted for more than a week, clean the fabric with a water hose or washing machine before extending it to avoid dirt stains. Likewise, before storing it away, clean it with mild soap to prevent mildew or bad smell. Moreover, always store the awnings in breathable boxes or plastic bags, so they do not accumulate dust.

It is crucial for awnings close to plant beds and gardens like mine to keep plant and soil matter away from them. The acid present in most leaves can damage the canopy fabric and stain it. Ensure not to place awnings near trees and trim down vines before they can reach the awning. 

Although most retractable awnings offer weatherproofing and wind protection, I suggest not putting too much pressure on them. Extreme weather conditions like hail, thunderstorms, or cyclones can harm the fabric fibers and permanently damage the retraction system.

Remember that most warranties do not cover damages due to bad weather conditions!

How difficult is it to install a retractable awning in windy locations?

Installation of an awning can be somewhat challenging, due to the precautionary measures you ought to take for the wind. It’s often best to have a professional install the awning.

Does the fabric type affect the wind resistance of a retractable awning?

Indeed, the fabric’s thickness and material type can influence the wind resistance of the awning. Thicker and heavier fabrics tend to withstand stronger winds than lighter materials. However, the awning’s structural components also play a primary role in wind resistance.

Can you leave a retractable awning open in windy conditions?

It’s not recommended to leave your retractable awning extended during high winds or storms. Extreme wind can cause stress on the awning’s components and could lead to both fabric and mechanical damage.

Can retractable awnings withstand other adverse weather conditions as well?

While retractable awnings are designed for resilience against the elements, it’s advisable to retract them during heavy rain, snow, or hail. Prolonged exposure to harsh weather can shorten the lifespan of the awning.

Conclusion

According to my research, the best retractable awning on the market right now is AECOJOY Patio Awning Retractable Sun Shade. My preference is based on its high-quality fabric, solid build and design, multi-functionality, and excellent customer service. 

However, the other 8 products also made their mark, so I have listed them in order of preference–  they fit various needs for durability, easy installation, budget, and customer service.

My evaluation also included customer reviews, brand popularity, and product research to give you a more holistic idea of each product. I hope my guide helps you choose the perfect retractable awning for your needs!

If you like such reviews and guides, check out another one of my informative articles titled “How To Manually Retract Electric Awning.”

That said, I’ll be signing off now. Stay safe!

Concept art is about the illustration of an idea, that is later fleshed out to create characters, landscapes, buildings, etc.

Finding the right book to learn concept art can be tricky since this field is vast. You need to find guides that cover- the fundamentals of art, skills for technical painting, and conceptual ideas and give you a clear picture of the career prospects in the concept art industry.

You need to be well-armed with your skills in traditional art to use different painting software, create your portfolio, and build a professional network. These days concept art has a lot to do with workflow, speed, and accuracy, but the main focus lies in design.

It is essential to understand how things are designed. If you look at any of the animated movies, will you be able to describe what went into making that film roughly? Or at least guess the ideas behind the creation of each scene?

If you can answer them correctly, then you are on the right footing.

For a budding artist, it's challenging to create a masterpiece with an undeveloped set of art skills. When time is invested in learning the basics and practicing exercises given in the books, your skills will improve gradually.

Let's look into the list of different books that can help to build your base in concept art!

Best Concept Art Books for Artists

Here's the list of the 25 best concept art books for artists everywhere, encompassing essential guides that cover the fundamentals of art, technical painting skills, conceptual ideas, and valuable insights into the concept art industry.

Art Fundamentals

If you're an aspiring concept artist, it's essential to understand the fundamentals of art. For every piece that you create, you'll have to use the skills that you gain from the fundamentals. The skill set includes measuring, figure drawing, light and shadow, rendering, perspective, colors, forms, and several others.

1. Light for Visual Artists

The concepts of light and shadow can get a little tricky if you're new to the field of art. These concepts relate to value and how values are rendered in a painting or drawing. Light for Visual Artists will help you to understand the artistic techniques and raw scientific points of getting the benefits down correctly.

As you read through the given resources and tips, the concept of light will be crystal clear. However, you cannot expect to become an expert at rendering value or a master draftsman by just reading this book. Constant practice of the ideas that are given in this book will help you to improve your skills.

Lighting plays a massive role in every piece that you're trying to create. We advise you to get this book if you're having any problems with light in your artwork, the book explains the intricate details of this subject.

Length: 176 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.75 x 11 inches | Weight: 1.95 pounds | Publisher: Laurence King Publishing

2. How to Draw - Best for Perspective & Imagination

If you want to learn about perspective and drawing from the imagination, then this book by Scott Robertson will come of great use. He is an educator to digital artists and concept artists at the Art Center and also conducts various presentations all across the US. 

For a concept artist, it's essential to learn about imaginative drawing and realist life drawing as these concepts amalgamate to help you create any piece from your mind with realistic rendering.

The teaching style of the author is pretty detailed yet pristine at the same time. If you're a novice or an inexperienced artist, then it can get a little tricky to get your concepts clear from this book. However, if you're ready to put in an ample amount of practice, then the lessons will get easier to follow.

Length: 208 pages | Dimensions: 9.1 x 0.8 x 11.03 inches | Weight: 2.5 pounds | Publisher: Design Studio Press

3. Figure Drawing for Artists: Making Every Mark Count - Best for Foundation & Tips

When you focus on learning about figure drawing from a book, it's more like learning to cook from a book. You cannot gain these practical skills until you get hands-on practice with them.

Moreover, several books share different tricks and techniques of figure drawing that can be effectively applied while you practice this art. Figure Drawing for Artists by Steve Huston will help you get the basics right for every figure drawing that you create.

If you're a new artist facing trouble in analyzing the figure or rendering it correctly on paper, then this book will act as your guide. Steve has included his figure drawings in this book to give you a visual presentation of the techniques that he has employed.

But you cannot rely on just this book to improve your skills, because implying the techniques in the studio will be your most excellent teacher. However, we advise you to get this book if you want to know the foundational concepts or pick up a few tips on figure drawing.

Length: 192 pages | Dimensions: 8.63 x 0.75 x 10 inches | Weight: 1.5 pounds | Publisher: Rockport Publishers

4. Art Fundamentals: Color, Light, Composition, Anatomy, Perspective, and Depth

In this concise publication of 272 pages, the purpose was to introduce the reader to the fundamental topics. There is no in-depth information on the main fundamentals of art, like perspective, anatomy, or form.

The book will help you understand the different techniques and their importance to digital art. However, this book is suitable for beginners to get the basics right, but it cannot be used as a professional study guide.

Length: 272 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 1.25 x 12 inches | Weight: 2.55 pounds | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing

5. Human Anatomy for Artists: The Elements of Form - Best for Mastering Anatomy

The Human Anatomy for Artists by Eliot Goldfinger has everything you want to know about mastering the human figure. It is one of the most detailed books that you can find on human anatomy. 

If you want to draw something from your imagination, then focus on studying the general concepts of your subject- looks, behavior, and the way it operates. To gain explicit knowledge of human anatomy can be difficult, but for drawing a figure, it's vital to master every part of the anatomy.

As you have a good understanding of the muscles, facial features, and poses, then your figure drawing will turn out to be perfect. Human Anatomy for Artists is a scientific manual that gives all the lessons on muscles, bones, and tendons. Every professional artist has learned all these bits and pieces to become an expert in what they create.

Length: 368 pages | Dimensions: 12.32 x 9.32 x 1.11 inches | Weight: 3.79 pounds | Publisher: Oxford University Press

Digital Painting

As you complete the fundamentals of art, you'll gradually want to move into painting. Few artists will get into the traditional medium (oil paints), but if you're interested in concept art, then you should focus on digital painting.

The three aspects of digital painting are:

  • To gain an understanding of how the graphics tablet should be used.
  • To understand your choice of painting software.
  • Focus on your skillset and goal.

1. Digital Painting for the Complete Beginner

The book focuses on the process of transitioning from the traditional medium to digital painting. It will be of more value for artists who are into oil painting than for the ones who have experience in drawing with a pencil.

However, an aspiring digital artist having a base knowledge of the fundamentals and experience in the different mediums of traditional art should read this book. The methods and goals of painting are the same in a conventional and digital forum. This book will help you understand the change in techniques and medium when you're new to digital art.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.28 x 0.49 x 9.28 inches | Weight: 1.16 pounds | Publisher: Watson-Guptill

2. Beginner's Guide to Digital Painting in Photoshop

If you're starting with digital painting, then you should pick up Beginner's Guide to Digital Painting in Photoshop. The fundamentals of working with Photoshop in a creative studio have been covered in detail in this book.

Many artists prefer to select their software for painting, but animation studios and game studios mostly prefer Photoshop. The painting canvas and the brush panel are clearly explained in this book by 3DTotal.

The book has a few exercises that will help you understand the groundwork of painting in the Photoshop environment. If you're going to pick up this book, then you should have some artistic experience. Moreover, without the fundamentals, you will not understand much about painting from this book.

Length: 224 pages | Dimensions: 11.5 x 0.25 x 8 inches | Weight: 2.19 pounds | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing

3. Digital Painting with Krita 2.9

Photoshop comes with a big price tag, but everyone might not have that kind of budget. So, Krita, a free and open-source painting software, will be a good option that works on all operating systems.

If you want to start using this software, then Digital Painting with Krita 2.9 by Scott Petrovic will greatly help. The book begins with a clear description of the interface in Krita and gradually moves into the techniques for digital painting.

Once you cover the basics, the book moves into the shortcuts along with a few quick tips that will help to broaden your knowledge. The book appears more like a Krita software book and less like a book on digital painting.

The author also mentions the different techniques that can be used to improve your workflow in digital painting. We recommend this book for semi-experienced artists who have an idea to paint on a tablet, but it might not be of great help to beginners.

You need to know the proper use of a graphics tablet before you dive into this book. Scott has done an excellent job of presenting Krita, but do watch a few tutorials to understand if this software will come of use to you.

Length: 232 pages | Dimensions: 6 x 0.55 x 9 inches | Weight: 0.7 pounds | Publisher: Louvus Media

4. Digital Painting Techniques

The goal of this book is not to help you master the skills and techniques that you will require while painting digitally. This book of 288 pages is a gem that targets semi-experienced advanced artists. 

There is sufficient practical information given in this book to paint different objects and render them accurately. This book is from 3DTotal, and it's part of a more extensive series. You should start with this book, but we advise you to read the other books in this series too to understand the teaching style.

As you get your hands on the other volumes, you'll be able to learn a lot about the 3DTotal staff while the given exercises will enhance your painting skills.

Length: 286 pages | Dimensions: 10.9 x 8.5 x 0.6 inches | Weight: 2.35 pounds | Publisher: Routledge

5. Digital Painting Fundamentals with Corel Painter X3

If you're looking for another alternative to Adobe Photoshop for digital painting, then a quality substitute is Corel Painter. This book does an outstanding job introducing Corel Painter. The 256 pages in this book cover various fundamental topics like color theory, mixing of colors, balance, and composition.

You can probably learn the entire interface of Corel Painter, through the given practice exercises. Most of the projects focus on shortcuts and techniques in Painter to help you progress in this field.

For a beginner, this book will be of great use if they are ready to put in the required effort to learn about digital painting. The fundamental concepts are given a lot of focus throughout the book, which makes this piece great for any artist.

Length: 288 pages | Dimensions: 7.5 x 0.75 x 9.25 inches | Weight: 1.54 pounds | Publisher: Cengage Learning PTR

Concept Art

If you have an excellent foundational knowledge of art and you know how to paint, then it's all about practice. As you repeat the techniques that you have learned, you'll gain a clear insight which will lead to constant growth by fixing the gaps

Concept art act is the guideline, inspiration, and mood that is prevalent for film or game production. We have a list of a few concept art books you can use to construct new ideas and make a mark in this field. However, if you want to gain some excellent skills in concept art, then these books will be your guide.

1. The Art Of Mulan

In this book, you'll find that the main text has been broken down into four parts which have been detailed pretty well. This book gives a clear description of how this movie was created. Disney puts a significant emphasis on the story, and that is prevalent in this book. Some subtle and exquisite pieces of art are present in the first two sections of the book.

The research process that was followed by the artist is an exciting part of the book, as they visit China, and travel throughout the country. For a book from the nineties to have such details about the research trip will you keener towards following them on this journey. The artists explain the learning process and how they were inspired to create every different scene.

This large piece explains the philosophy and details that went into the story, art, and production of the film Mulan.

The design and layout of the book are fantastic as they connect well with the world of the film. If you're an ardent fan of animation, then we advise you to treat yourself to this book.

Length: 192 pages | Dimensions: 10.5 x 1 x 13.5 inches | Weight: 4.46 pounds | Publisher: Hyperion

2. The Art of Pixar: The Complete Color Scripts

When we think of a book by Pixar, it's pretty normal to expect some playful and funky concept art. Unlike the other books on concept art, this piece features an extensive collection of color scripts. 

Many of us got to know about color scripts only after Pixar books made this concept famous.

This book goes beyond the intricate details in the images and the artistic style used in each of the color scripts. The Art of Pixar: The Complete Color Scripts is a visual anthropology, which is made by the art directors from the most influential studio of filmmaking.

Length: 320 pages | Dimensions: 9.25 x 1.25 x 11.25 inches | Weight: 4.3 pounds | Publisher: Chronicle Books

3. Surf's Up: The Art and Making Of A True Story

This book is filled with sketches, concept art, movie stills, and 3D WIP imagery. You will find an adequate amount of character designs of penguins, along with the color keys and concepts of different sequences from the film. 

The various extracts from the film that are present in bits and pieces within the book make the book and the reader travel along with the film.

You are also given a small sneak peek into the character creation phase, where you'll get to see the different stages from 3D models to concept sketches.

On the whole, if you love animation, then this is a must-have book for your collection!

Length: 148 pages | Dimensions: 10.5 x 1.1 x 11.3 inches | Weight: 3.1 pounds | Publisher: Insight Editions

4. The Art Of Robots

This book is similar to any other art book by Pixar. As you take a glance at the images, you'll understand the amount of thought that was put into highlighting every intricate detail. 

The selection of art and the quality of the designs in this book is vast. There is a lot of sets and character design. Interestingly, you'll also find pages with photos of materials and characters that were used for texturing the 3D models.

If you're already a fan of the Art of Pixar books, then you'll enjoy this piece. This art book has some of the most amazing, talented, and awe-inspiring pieces of work.

Length: 144 pages | Dimensions: 9.2 x 0.8 x 11.4 inches | Weight: 2.38 pounds | Publisher: Chronicle Books

5. The Skillful Huntsman: Visual Development Of A Grimm Tale

The three artists Mike Yamada, Khang Le, and Felix Yoon share their experiences as students of the Art Center in Pasadena, CA. They explain their journey and the unique sketches that eventually paved their way into the entertainment industry. 

As you read this book, you'll realize how it feels more as though you're going through a student project or a  journal. Each of the concept artists has created the characters, props, environment, and other paintings for The Skillful Huntsman by following the Brothers Grimm story.

In this jam-packed book, you'll get a collection of design techniques and beautiful concept art. The book is filled with conceptual sketches, where you can see the process of an idea giving birth to an entire piece.

With this book, you'll be able to get a glimpse inside the minds of the three artists as they continue to develop their vision and create a well-known story.

Scott Robertson, who is a renowned teacher from the Art Center, leaves comments beneath each page where he critiques and gives an insight into the work. It's amusing to see how a teacher continues to critique the piece being created by his students.

The descriptions are brief enough and will not take your focus away from the designs. It is also exciting to read how the students of concept art create a piece that is based on an existing storyline.

If you love interpreting folklore and creating stories, then this book will be a gem in your collection.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 10.28 x 0.77 x 10.24 inches | Weight: 2.55 pounds | Publisher: Design Studio Press

6. The Art Of Star Wars Episode II: Attack Of The Clones

This part of the trilogy has more details about concept art than The Art Of Star Wars Episode I: The Phantom Menace. In this book, the pages are filled to the brim with environmental paintings, storyboards, character designs, ships, and sculptures.

The book shows how the different aspects- the weapons, the characters, the location, and the crafts had evolved in various stages before it came on screen.

Every page has captions given by the artists which describe the idea that they are trying to put across through every image. It is like the artist is providing you with behind-the-scenes details to present an artistic side to help you understand the movie-making process.

As usual, the sketches and character designs in this book appear larger than life, especially the environment paintings. Moreover, you'll get the entire script of the movie at the back of the book.

We recommend this book to Star Wars fans, concept artists, and sci-fi artists. You'll be amazed by the talent that was put into effect to create such a stunning piece of concept art.

Length: 224 pages | Dimensions: 9.5 x 0.88 x 12.25 inches | Weight: 2.95 pounds | Publisher: Del Rey

7. The Disney Archives Series: Design

The Design edition of The Disney Archives Series is one fantastic book that will take you through the complete visual development history of Disney Animation. The book also has a few excerpts from other abandoned projects. 

Try looking into The Disney Archives Series: Design, which is a concept art book that was written way further than the last decade. We advise you not to compromise on your creative potential, by just focusing on books from this decade.

Length: 256 pages | Dimensions: 13 x 11 inches | Weight: 5.4 pounds | Publisher: Disney Editions

8. The Art of How to Train Your Dragon

The character designs in this book are not over-rendered they have been well-balanced with some epic environments and high-resolution pieces. 

The book features around 350 pieces of development artwork, which includes concept paintings, story sketches, and character designs.

If you're looking to have reference material that will guide your sketching work, then getting this book will help you to a great extent.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 11.5 x 1 x 10.5 inches | Weight: 0.22 pounds | Publisher: Newmarket Press

9. The Art of Monsters, Inc.

The Art of Monsters, Inc. is filled with a ton of set drawings and character designs. Other than the credits and caption in this book, there is no other text that you can find. 

The various art concepts in this book are very colorful, and you'll enjoy every panel of the pastel drawing by Ralph Eggleston and Dominique Louis. With this book, you can get inspired as you observe the excellent quality of skills used in creating art.

This collection of concept art has been created by using different mediums, and it was made before digital painting came into the arena.

Length: 144 pages | Dimensions: 9.4 x 0.9 x 11.4 inches | Weight: 2.35 pounds | Publisher: Chronicle Books

10. The Nine Old Men & The Art of Animation

The Nine Old Men & The Art of Animation has some expert animation drawings, and it consists of the grandfathers who are part of the history of Disney's animation. 

Each chapter in this book talks about the projects and careers of each of the animators along with sequences that give you more explanation.

When we consider how rare, strong draftsmanship has become these days, we understand that such pieces of books are essential to set the standard in concept art.

Length: 310 pages | Dimensions: 9.25 x 1.25 x 12.25 inches | Weight: 4.86 pounds | Publisher: Disney Editions

11. Big Bad World of Concept Art for Video Games

If you're studying art and you choose to make your career in the field of concept art, then you'll love this book. In this book, the author Professor Eliott Lilly speaks about the student's work and his experience of teaching young minds who aspire to be artists.

The  Big Bad World of Concept Art for Video Games offers a few distinct tips for selecting the right classes, the right school, and the practice exercises to focus on, along with suggestions to help you improve your portfolio. There are also tips shared by the author on how a young artist wanting to make a career in the video game industry can get jobs.

The works of students and professionals are widespread in this book to help you understand the level of progress and quality skills of different artists. By following this book, you'll gain the required knowledge to prepare you for the competitive path in the life of a concept artist. This will, in return, help you to hone your skills as an artist.

The author is straightforward and transparent with his thoughts, which helps to make this piece a good read. It is going to inspire you to learn different techniques to improve in the field of concept art, or it will make you second guess your career choice.

Irrespective of the outcome, we believe that this book will be of great use for you to understand the field of concept art.

Length: 144 pages | Dimensions: 8.7 x 1 x 11.2 inches | Weight: 1.6 pounds | Publisher: Design Studio Press

12. Imaginative Realism: How to Paint What Doesn't Exist

If you're an aspiring concept artist, then you should read Imaginative Realism. The book will help you understand how you can paint the things that don't exist and gives you different tricks over 224 pages.

Every concept artist is paid to create designs of things and characters that don't exist in real life. You might find that the book is not written for concept artists, but only if you focus on the details hidden behind each page will it be helpful for you.

In this book, James Gurney shares different techniques for helping you render various concepts like humans, creatures, buildings, the environment, and more.

It's simple to have different imaginative ideas in your mind, but the real test comes when you have to render them correctly. With this book, you'll understand how to represent your ideas on paper.

Length: 224 pages | Dimensions: 9 x 0.6 x 10.5 inches | Weight: 2.01 pounds | Publisher: Andrews McMeel Publishing

13. Drawing Basics and Video Game Art

If you're into video game art and you want to use your skills with a purpose, then you should try to give this book a read. You'll understand how concept art is applied to the world of video games. 

The complex and rich history of gaming, along with a description of the different artistic styles have been covered in this book. A large portion of the book focuses on describing how video game art can be efficiently interwoven with fine art and how this concept has advanced over the past decades.

Many sections in this book talk about the different fundamentals of art like lighting, figures, composition, and general techniques used for sketching. This is an artist's book, even though it takes a dip into gaming.

Drawing Basics and Video Game Art has more to do with the history of game art and is not much of a drawing book.

Length: 240 pages | Dimensions: 8.49 x 0.67 x 10.02 inches | Weight: 1.97 pounds | Publisher: Watson-Guptill

14. How to Become a Video Game Artist

Sam R. Kennedy, who is a renowned game artist, has several years of experience and fellow workers who are employed in the gaming industry. The help that was rendered by his colleagues was put to productive use by the author in making How to Become a Video Game Artist. 

In every chapter, you'll find a description of the different jobs in the field of concept art- animators, environment art, character art, and GUI designers. Each of the chapters consists of stories from professionals who are employed in this industry and the advice given in this book helps to guide aspiring concept artists.

The book describes the skills, requirements, and demands of each job, which gives you a clear overview of the professions. The last chapter has tips by the author for aspiring concept artists to refine their portfolios and how they should be preparing themselves for the field of game art.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Publisher: Watson-Guptill

15. Beyond Art Fundamentals

When you have covered the basics of traditional art, you'll be left wondering how you can advance toward concept art from an ideal point of view. 

When you plan to design a piece, it should be technically creative along with it being philosophical to a certain extent. The topics that have been covered in  Beyond Art Fundamentals cannot be easily found in any other book.

In this book, you'll find several professional artists sharing their opinions and views gestures, moods, and emotions, and giving you ideas to create designs that will fit in perfectly with the storyline.

According to the view of professional artists, every image should have a specific emotion, purpose, and feeling associated with it. This book helps you to understand these subtle nuances that need to be incorporated into your artwork and the different approaches that you should use for creating every piece.

Length: 224 pages | Dimensions: 8.25 x 0.5 x 11.5 inches | Weight: 2.12 pounds | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing

What is the Best Concept Art Book?

This section provides an informative comparison of top-rated concept art books. The accompanying table highlights key specifications for each product, including their length, dimensions, weight, and publisher.

Product Length Dimensions Weight Publisher
Light for Visual Artists 176 pages 8.5 x 0.75 x 11 inches 1.95 pounds Laurence King Publishing
How to Draw 208 pages 9.1 x 0.8 x 11.03 inches 2.5 pounds Design Studio Press
Figure Drawing for Artists: Making Every Mark Count 192 pages 8.63 x 0.75 x 10 inches 1.5 pounds Rockport Publishers
Art Fundamentals: Color, Light, Composition, Anatomy, Perspective, and Depth 272 pages 8.5 x 1.25 x 12 inches 2.55 pounds 3DTotal Publishing
Human Anatomy for Artists: The Elements of Form 368 pages 12.32 x 9.32 x 1.11 inches 3.79 pounds Oxford University Press
Digital Painting for the Complete Beginner 160 pages 8.28 x 0.49 x 9.28 inches 1.16 pounds Watson-Guptill
Beginner’s Guide to Digital Painting in Photoshop 224 pages 11.5 x 0.25 x 8 inches 2.19 pounds 3DTotal Publishing
Digital Painting with Krita 2.9 232 pages 6 x 0.55 x 9 inches 0.7 pounds Louvus Media
Digital Painting Techniques 286 pages 10.9 x 8.5 x 0.6 inches 2.35 pounds Routledge
Digital Painting Fundamentals with Corel painter X3 288 pages 7.5 x 0.75 x 9.25 inches 1.54 pounds Cengage Learning PTR
The Art Of Mulan 192 pages 10.5 x 1 x 13.5 inches 4.46 pounds Hyperion
The Art of Pixar: The Complete Color Scripts 320 pages 9.25 x 1.25 x 11.25 inches 4.3 pounds Chronicle Books
Surf’s Up: The Art and Making Of A True Story 148 pages 10.5 x 1.1 x 11.3 inches 3.1 pounds Insight Editions
The Art Of Robots 144 pages 9.2 x 0.8 x 11.4 inches 2.38 pounds Chronicle Books
The Skillful Huntsman: Visual Development Of A Grimm Tale 160 pages 10.28 x 0.77 x 10.24 inches 2.55 pounds Design Studio Press
The Art Of Star Wars Episode II: Attack Of The Clones 224 pages 9.5 x 0.88 x 12.25 inches 2.95 pounds Del Rey
The Disney Archives Series: Design 256 pages 13 x 11 inches 5.4 pounds Disney Editions
The Art of How to Train Your Dragon 160 pages 11.5 x 1 x 10.5 inches 0.22 pounds Newmarket Press
The Art of Monsters, Inc. 144 pages 9.4 x 0.9 x 11.4 inches 2.35 pounds Chronicle Books
The Nine Old Men & The Art of Animation 310 pages 9.25 x 1.25 x 12.25 inches 4.86 pounds Disney Editions
Big Bad World of Concept Art for Video Games 144 pages 8.7 x 1 x 11.2 inches 1.6 pounds Design Studio Press
Imaginative Realism: How to Paint What Doesn’t Exist 224 pages 9 x 0.6 x 10.5 inches 2.01 pounds Andrews McMeel Publishing
Drawing Basics and Video Game Art 240 pages 8.49 x 0.67 x 10.02 inches 1.97 pounds Watson-Guptill
How to Become a Video Game Artist 160 pages N/A N/A Watson-Guptill
Beyond Art Fundamentals 224 pages 8.25 x 0.5 x 11.5 inches 2.12 pounds 3DTotal Publishing

What Is Concept Art?

Concept art is a form of illustration used to convey an idea for use in films, video games, animation, or comic books before it is put into the final product. It typically consists of sketches, paintings, and 3D models that help the creators visualize the world and characters of their stories.
Characters, places, stories, and entire worlds that do not exist are shaped as concept art through numerous iterations.
A concept is the first step in any design process.

Buying Guide for the Best Concept Art Books for Artists

When purchasing concept art books, it's crucial to consider several factors to ensure you make the right choice. The following comprehensive buying guide will help you navigate through the options and find the best concept art books for your needs.

Content and Focus

Look for books that cover the fundamentals of art, including figure drawing, perspective, color theory, composition, and rendering. Consider the specific focus of the book, whether it's character design, environment design, creature design, or general concept art techniques. Choose books that align with your interests and goals.

Author's Expertise and Reputation

Research the authors of the concept art books you're considering. Check their credentials, experience, and reputation within the industry. Look for books written by established concept artists or industry professionals who have worked on notable projects. Their insights and knowledge will be valuable.

Demonstrations and Step-by-Step Guides

Books that provide detailed demonstrations and step-by-step guides are highly beneficial for learning and practicing new techniques. Ensure the book includes clear explanations, visual examples, and exercises that allow you to apply the concepts and improve your skills.

Variety of Art Styles and Artists

Choose concept art books that showcase a range of art styles and feature different artists. Exposure to diverse styles will broaden your understanding and inspire creativity. Look for books that include interviews or profiles of successful concept artists, providing insights into their creative process and career paths.

Quality of Artwork Reproduction

Check the print quality and paper type of the book. High-quality reproductions of artwork will allow you to appreciate the details and nuances in the illustrations. Consider books with large, clear images that effectively showcase the artwork, making it easier to study and learn from.

Industry Relevance and Application

For aspiring concept artists, it's crucial to choose books that are relevant to the current industry trends and practices. Look for books that discuss digital painting techniques, software applications commonly used in the industry, and workflow processes for concept art production.

Reviews and Recommendations

Read reviews and seek recommendations from trusted sources, such as professional concept artists or reputable art communities. Consider joining online forums or communities where artists discuss and recommend concept art books based on their personal experiences.

Important Tip: Continual Practice and ApplicationWhile concept art books can provide valuable guidance and knowledge, remember that practice and application are crucial for skill development. Here's an important tip to keep in mind:

Regularly practice the techniques and exercises provided in the books to strengthen your foundation and improve your art skills. Apply what you've learned to personal projects and create your concept art to build a diverse portfolio that showcases your unique style and ideas. Seek feedback and critique from fellow artists or mentors to identify areas for improvement and refine your work.

Remember, concept art is a constantly evolving field, so keep learning, experimenting, and staying updated with the latest industry trends to excel in your journey as a concept artist.

What are some recommended concept art books for understanding light?
Light for Visual Artists” is a highly recommended book for understanding light in art. It provides insights into artistic techniques and the scientific aspects of rendering light and value in paintings or drawings.

Art Fundamentals: Color, Light, Composition, Anatomy, Perspective, and Depth” is a good book for beginner artists to grasp the basics of art. It covers various fundamental topics and techniques, providing a solid foundation for further study.

What book is suitable for beginners transitioning from traditional to digital painting?

Digital Painting for the Complete Beginner” is a book that focuses on helping artists transition from traditional to digital painting. It offers valuable insights and techniques for adapting to the digital medium.

What book is suitable for advanced artists looking to improve their digital painting skills?

Digital Painting Techniques” by 3DTotal is a book recommended for advanced artists looking to enhance their digital painting skills. It offers practical techniques and exercises for painting different objects.

Are there any books specifically about concept art?

Yes, there are several concept art books available. “The Art of Mulan,” “The Art of Pixar: The Complete Color Scripts,” “Surf’s Up: The Art and Making Of A True Story,” and “The Art Of Robots” are some examples of concept art books that provide insights into the creation of specific films and animation.

Conclusion

Use these books to your benefit to help you develop the fundamental skills of art, a professional network, and the right portfolio. These will pave the way for you to become a professional concept artist. There is no better way to learn than practicing religiously and following the experiences of other artists in this field.

From the above 25 best concept art books for artists, the top three expert recommendations are as follows: "Light for Visual Artists: Understanding & Using Light in Art" is an ideal option for comprehending light and shadow in artwork,

"How to Draw: drawing and sketching objects and environments" is a good choice for enhancing perspective and imagination, and "Figure Drawing for Artists: Making Every Mark Count" is the right selection for building a solid foundation and improving figure drawing skills.

These books provide valuable insights and practical tips to aid artists in their artistic journey and creative development.

Till next time keep exploring the field of art!

 

Top-freezer refrigerators are BUDGET-FRIENDLY options for moms, homeowners, and kitchen connoisseurs alike.

These refrigerators may not have the fanciest accessories and features. Yet, there are many reasons why people opt for this style.

Specifically, they're best for shoppers on a budget who want more fridge than freezer space. Additionally, it's a good choice for users with little space to spare at home.

If these three things resonate with you while searching for a new fridge, a top-freezer refrigerator could be your best bet!

To simplify your shopping experience, I've reviewed several brands and came up with the five top-freezer refrigerators of 2023.

A top-freezer refrigerator features a freezer compartment at the top of the unit and a fridge compartment at the bottom. 

Top freezer refrigerators are the most basic fridge models you can purchase. As mentioned, they don't have fancy attachments and features; most are very STRAIGHTFORWARD, yet some offer more spice to their fridge models. 

1. Whirlpool WRT518SZFG 18.2 cubic feet Top Freezer Refrigerator - Best Overall

This 18.2 cubic-foot, stainless steel top freezer from Whirlpool comes first on my list despite not having as many unique features and attachments as the other products listed.

While it lacks a deli drawer and only offers an optional ice maker model, I can say it's justifiable at its LOW PRICE of only $729.

It offers ample storage space for all your groceries, especially with the flexi-slide bins that quickly move side-to-side to make room for taller items.

Additionally, it has two crisper drawers with selectable humidity levels to keep fruits and veggies fresh, plus customizable door bins.

It also features a freezer temperature control that allows you to adjust the cold air in the freezer shelf. Hence, you can use it as an additional refrigerator compartment when you need more space.

The Whirlpool top-freezer also has an electronic temperature control, so you can set your fridge's coolness depending on the food you're storing.

Capacity: 18.2 cubic feet | Dimension: 67.13 x 28 inches (HxW) | Installation depth: Standard depth | Depth: 30.5 inches | Finish: Fingerprint-resistant, stainless steel coating

2. LG LRTLS2403S 20.2 Top-Freezer with Ice Maker - Best Value for Money

This stainless steel LG top-freezer fridge is pricier, but I assure you it's worth every dollar.

It offers a HUGE refrigerator capacity, featuring 24 cubic-foot storage for both the fridge and freezer spaces. It also has an ice maker plus an internal water dispenser — a rare find in most traditional models!

I also like the multi-flow air technology that maintains superior humidity and temperature levels to keep food fresh. Its linear compressor also REDUCES temperature fluctuations.

Food storage in this LG top-freezer model is also impressive. It features spill-proof shelves designed to contain spills in the fresh food section. These glass shelves are also height adjustable, so you can customize them to your liking.

Aside from the adjustable glass shelves, it also offers door-in-door bins, a folding shelving system to fit in taller items, and a 3-tier freezer space.

One major thing that sets it apart from other top-freezer models is its integration with the LG ThinQ app. Yes, it's SMART-ENABLED! This allows you to set the temperature using your smart devices.

Capacity: 23.8 cubic feet | Dimension: 68 x 33 inches (HxW) | Installation depth: Standard depth | Depth: 34 inches (excluding handles) | Finish: Fingerprint-resistant, stainless steel coating

3. LG LTCS20020S Top Freezer Refrigerator w/ Multi-Air Flow and Reversible Door - Best Energy-Efficient

This 20 cubic-foot stainless steel fridge from LG is your best bet if you want to go for ADDITIONAL STORAGE SPACE.

It has two crisper drawers with superior humidity and temperature controls, adjustable shelves, and 2-gallon door bins.

Additionally, its reversible door lets you decide if a left or right door swing fits your space and minimizes installation issues.

I can also say that this fridge is thoughtfully designed since it features contoured doors, hidden hinges, bright LED lighting, and other great internal features, which make it look and feel sophisticated. 

It is also equipped with a digital sensor and smart diagnosis to consistently monitor the conditions of the fridge, maintain its cool temperature, and even help you troubleshoot issues.

Capacity: 20.2 cubic feet | Dimension: 65.5 x 29.75 inches (HxW) | Installation depth: Standard depth | Depth: 33.8 inches (excluding handles) | Finish: Stainless steel

4. Frigidaire FFHT1425VV 13.9 cubic feet Top Freezer Refrigerator - Best for Small Spaces

If you live in a small home and don't need as much storage space, this 13-cubic-foot stainless steel fridge from Frigidaire is your best choice. 

For a $500 fridge, you get two full-width glass shelves, a half-width deli drawer to store your meat products, and humidity-controlled crisper drawers. 

It also has three full-width racks for door storage, a glass shelf for the freezer, and two freezer door racks to store all your frozen foods. 

The EvenTemp technology on this fridge also ensures that its airflow is evenly optimized for a consistent temperature. 

Capacity: 13.9 cubic-foot capacity (10.0 cu. ft. fridge and 3.9 cu. ft. frozen foods) | Dimension: 59.88 x 27.63 inches (H x W) | Installation depth: Standard depth | Depth: 31.25 inches | Finish: Stainless steel

5. GE GIE18GSNRSS 17.5 Cu. Ft. 28-Inch Top-Freezer Refrigerator - Best for Ice Maker Feature

This top-notch appliance stands out from the crowd with its functionality and convenience, setting a high standard in the refrigerator market. Let's delve into exploring the attributes, qualities, and benefits of this product.

GE GIE18GSNRSS defies the norms of top-freezer refrigerators by coming with a factory-installed ice maker. This automatic, energy-conscious system generates ice into a convenient storage bin, a feature often seen in appliances priced considerably higher.

The spaciousness of this model is undeniable, allocating 17.5 cubic feet of storage space in an intuitive design that maximizes utility. The lower section offers a hefty 13.49 cubic feet for fresh foods, with ample room in two crispers, a deli drawer, a butter keeper, and versatile shelves and door bins. The top section, designed for frozen goods, includes an adjustable wire shelf, allowing you to bifurcate the 4 cubic feet space to suit your needs.

Aesthetics are given due consideration with four available finishes; modern slate, as well as the more traditional black, white, and stainless steel. These choices allow for seamless integration with any kitchen décor.

To top it all off, this unit is Energy Star certified, marking it as an energy-efficient appliance designed to reduce environmental impact and save on utility bills.

Despite the numerous beneficial attributes, the GE GIE18GSNRSS Refrigerator is somewhat on the expensive side, which might deter a cost-conscious customer. Additionally, it would have added value if this model was designed to be garage-friendly, increasing the utility factor even more.

Capacity: 17.5 cubic feet | Dimension: 67.38 x 28 inches (HxW) | Installation depth: Standard depth | Depth: 30.5 inches (excluding handles) | Finish: Stainless steel

Which Top-Freezer Refrigerator Is Best for Your Needs?

The table below provides a comprehensive comparison of the best Top-Freezer Refrigerators for 2023. It outlines essential details, including capacity, dimensions, installation depth, depth (measured in inches), and finish, for each notable model.

Top-Freezer Refrigerators Capacity Dimension Installation Depth Depth Finish
Whirlpool WRT518SZFG 18.2 cubic feet 67.13 x 28 inches (HxW) Standard depth 30.5 inches Fingerprint-resistant, stainless steel coating
LG LRTLS2403S 23.8 cubic feet 68 x 33 inches (HxW) Standard depth 34 inches (excluding handles) Fingerprint-resistant, stainless steel coating
LG LTCS20020S 20.2 cubic feet 65.5 x 29.75 inches (HxW) Standard depth 33.8 inches (excluding handles) Stainless steel
Frigidaire FFHT1425VV 13.9 cubic feet 59.88 x 27.63 inches (H x W) Standard depth 31.25 inches Stainless steel
GE GIE18GSNRSS 17.5 cubic feet 67.38 x 28 inches (HxW) Standard depth 30.5 inches Stainless steel

What is a Top-Freezer Refrigerator?

As previously mentioned, top-freezer refrigerators feature a freezer compartment at the top of the unit and a fridge at the bottom — they're the most similar to traditional styles of refrigerators and come in counter-depth and standard sizes.

Top-freezer fridges are straightforward, simple, and budget-friendly. Most top-freezer models don't include as many attachments and special features as other options.

A top-freezer refrigerator offers adjustable shelves, compartments, storage bins, and LED lighting. It also offers MORE FRIDGE SPACE than freezer shelf space.

Benefits of Top-Freezer Refrigerators

Despite its straightforward design and functionality, many prefer purchasing a top-freezer model for their homes.

If you're looking for more reasons why you should go for top-freezer fridges, here are some of the benefits these models offer:

  • Cost-effective - given its simple and traditional style, top-freezer fridge manufacturers didn't spend too much time and resources to re-design these models, making them budget-friendly options for shoppers—most top-freezer refrigerators' costs range from $600 and $1000. You can already get a decent and highly functional fridge at this price point.
  • Simplistic design - although it doesn't have as many attachments and special features as other refrigerator styles, the simplistic design makes it easier for users to access the freezer and fridge of these models. They're not too complicated to use and don't require the user to bend over to access the fridge and freezer compartments. Additionally, these types of fridges are not difficult to clean and maintain. With fewer repairs and maintenance issues, you're also ensured that your fridge will last long.
  • Space-saving - most top freezer refrigerators are designed to be compact, plus there are counter-depth options to choose from. They are great for users living in small apartments with less room to spare. They're also not difficult to install, unlike other refrigerator styles on the market.
  • Extra storage capacity - if you're looking for a unit that offers ample storage space, a top-freezer fridge might be a good choice. The freezer in some models can even be converted and used as a fridge alone, which means it can provide adequate space to keep food cold and fresh and also makes it a good fit as a second fridge.

Factors to Consider When Choosing a Top-Freezer Refrigerator

At this point, you already know why you should (or shouldn't) consider buying a top-freezer fridge for your kitchen, plus great models to choose from, as provided in this list.

But it's still crucial that you know the factors and minute details you shouldn't miss when shopping for the best top freezer refrigerator.

This way, you can choose the model that would fit your and your family's needs. I suggest that you always look for these details to narrow down your choices:

Dimensions

Considering the size of the top freezer fridge is essential in ensuring it will fit your space. Should you get a counter-depth or standard-depth fridge?

While a larger fridge means greater storage capacity, you should note the maximum dimensions your place can cater to.

Hence, before shopping, measure the space where you plan to install your new fridge. Additionally, ensure that it can handle the width of an open-door swing.

Capacity

Top-freezer models are designed to be smaller and more compact compared to modern styles, such as French door models.

A top freezer has an average storage space of 16 cubic feet for your groceries, with the freezer occupying four cubic feet of this space. You can already picture that this is ideal for smaller family sizes or couples.

High-capacity top freezers offer up to 24 cubic feet and an adjustable shelving system to free up the fridge and provide more storage space. But we can't deny the fact that its capacity is generally limited.

Cost

You must also consider your budget when shopping for a new refrigerator. If you are looking for budget-friendly options, you've hit the jackpot; this is probably the best fridge you can get.

Plenty of top-freezer models you can choose from are HIGHLY FUNCTIONAL at a low price. But these don't come with modern features like the others.

The less sophisticated the fridge is, the lower the cost. But, if you're looking for additional attachments and features, like built-in ice makers and a sliding deli drawer, you should expect they'd cost a bit more.

Style

These traditional refrigerators aren't as impressive when it comes to style. Its color options are limited to black, stainless steel, and white. Other brands offer several colorways (black stainless steel, red, and bisque), yet rarely.

The style would also determine how to install the fridge in your home.

Others are meant to sit on your counter (like a counter-depth fridge), making it appear like it's built-in. This is contrary to the standard-depth fridge that needs to sit on the floor.

Energy Efficiency

One of the benefits of top-freezer fridges is energy efficiency because of their freezer placement.

You can also check if the fridge you're eyeing is Energy Star-certified to ensure that the fridge model is indeed energy-saving.

By saving energy, you're not only being eco-friendly. You're also cutting the cost of your utility bills!

Deli Drawer

If you don't know it yet, a deli drawer is used to store meat products to keep them fresh.

This is common in the side-by-side, French door, and bottom fridges but not in traditional models, so adding this to top-freezer models makes it a stand-out feature.

When integrated into top-freezer refrigerators, it mostly features a half-width deli drawer which might not be enough for some. So, try looking for a model that offers a full-width deli drawer.

Flexible Interior Storage System

Freezers are supposed to consistently have low temperatures to maintain the freezing point. Some models allow you to adjust the internal temperature to double as a refrigerator compartment and increase capacity.

From 0, you can crank it up to 32 degrees Fahrenheit, so it will be cool enough to store food and keep it fresh without freezing it completely.

Note

If your freezer refrigerator has this feature, make sure to give it enough time to adjust to the newly set temperature before stashing in fresh food, extra produce, or leftovers.

Ice Maker

An ice maker is a total giveaway for fridges. Many people like options with a built-in ice maker or those suitable for an ice maker kit. This is a great feature, especially when you like preparing drinks at home.

Having a built-in ice maker in your fridge eliminates the need for separate ice cube trays or the hassle of installing one separately.

Just a heads up; an automatic ice maker is NOT COMMON for top-freezer refrigerators. If you ever find one, you shouldn't be surprised it would cost more than the other top-freezer models.

Temperature Control and Cooling Performance

Temperature control and cooling performance are probably the most important criteria you shouldn't miss.

Obviously, if you're looking for the best top-freezer refrigerator, you should choose one with outstanding cooling performance since that's the primary purpose of a fridge.

Cooling performance is indicated by the EQUAL DISTRIBUTION of cold air in the fridge, compressor performance, and integrated cooling technology.

Warm spots in a fridge are a major red flag, and it's less likely to keep your food fresh for a long time.

Additionally, you should be able to control the temperature to adjust to seasonal temperature swings and maintain the performance of your fridge despite hot weather.

What are the Differences Between a Top Freezer Refrigerator and Bottom Freezer Models?

Top-freezer refrigerators feature a freezer shelf at the uppermost part of the unit, contrary to bottom-freezer refrigerators. However, aside from freezer placement, they also differ in energy consumption.

Top-freezer refrigerators use 10% to 25% LESS ENERGY, making them energy-efficient choices and cheaper to operate. But, if you’re looking for more freezer space, bottom-freezer fridges are the one to go for.

How Long Do Top Freezer Refrigerators Last?

Most freezer fridges are built to last between 10 and 15 years due to their lack of attachments and other features that need frequent maintenance. Compared to modern fridges that last 6 to 8 years, this is a great bargain.

How Much Does a Top Freezer Refrigerator Cost?

An average top freezer costs between $600 and $1000. Other brands and models are a bit cheaper, while the others are more expensive and can exceed $1000.

The price greatly depends on the brand, features, and technology integrated into the fridge.

Conclusion

That's a wrap! I hope you can find the best top freezer of your choice in this article. If not, it's your call! Just remember to consider the important factors when shopping for one.

Feel free to refer to this guide if you have more top-freezer concerns.

Happy shopping!

This feature is part of the "Things to Draw" Collection of drawings realized by Homesthetics Magazine in partnership with Designaissance Studio. The contents of the tutorial are copyright protected as it is the collection itself; if you are interested on sharing the drawings on your website or magazine please contact the magazine. Feel free to print or share the page for educative purposes as this is the definitory purpose of our mission with this collection.

It has been determined that drawing in the early stages of childhood can provide insightful knowledge into the crucial cognitive, physical, and emotional development of a child. The actual act of drawing is chosen by all young kids as a creative expressive manner of externalization and engaging the developing intellect and the entire body in general. If you ever opt to simply observe a little one drawing you can notice how his concentration is expressed with his entire body, the activity being extremely engaging and appealing to young and adults alike. With this idea in mind, Homesthetics in partnership with Designaissance has started the Cool Things To Draw Collection, a creative method of immersing into the colorful world of basic illustrations able to inspire and offer guidance in creative representations of the imaginative. Cast a glance and stay tuned for more creative, fun, and playful drawing guides!

1. Learn How to Draw a Deer- Deer Step-by-Step Tutorial

We felt it was only natural to start with a beloved childhood character: Bambi. Animals represent a great mediator between the natural environment and your little one, able to form relationships, and bonds and induce a sense of responsibility in the process of taking care of one another. They are also a good start for the representation phase your kid goes through in creative development when shapes become more realistic and tend to slip towards depicting the natural environment rather than the fairyland of fantasy. Start with basic shapes, followed by the setting of axes that will determine the essential anatomical parts of the deer, and end with adding a colorful natural scenery that will place the animal in the proper context. Use bright colors and be imaginative when it comes to vegetation.

Learn How to Draw a Deer - Cartoon Scene Step by Step Tutorial

2. Learn How to Doodle - Cartoon Scene Step-by-Step Tutorial

Doodling is a fun activity most of us undertake in hours of boredom. Nonetheless, the creative act is one of imagination, allowing to merging of different shapes, colors, and characters into unlikely scenes. You can start by expressing a simple fun character evolved from a basic primitive form like a circle and keep adding more and more elements to the painting. You can try and combine the characters in a fun fantastic imagery where color and details create a complex work of art. Teach your little one the importance of detail in art and life in general and admire and praise creativity and imagination. You can never go wrong with doodling.

Learn How to Doodle - Cartoon Scene Step by Step Tutorial

3. Learn How to Draw a Butterfly on a Flower - Butterfly Step-by-Step Tutorial

Butterflies and flowers are essential primal elements attempted to be depicted by kids in representations of the natural landscape. The delicacy and complex colorization of a butterfly might seem like a difficult job for a toddler but the idea is not of exact replication of the existent but rather the understanding of the shape, form, the abstraction of the idea of a butterfly. Flowers come easier to represent. Try and teach the rules of symmetry and proportions to such small elements that are perfect in their creation.

Learn How to Draw a Butterfly on a Flower - Cartoon Scene Step by Step Tutorial

4. Learn How to Draw a Sunflower and a Snail - Cartoon Scene Step-by-Step Tutorial

It is impressive how simple forms can be translated into complex natural elements that compose the surrounding world. No matter the scale, the natural replicates the same structure on and on, forming complex and intricate relations that generate the wonderful beauty of the natural. Below the miniature world of a snail has been cartooned to depict a fun perception of this small environment.

Learn How to Draw a Sunflower and a Snail- Cartoon Scene Step by Step Tutorial

5. Learn How to Draw an Owl- Easy Drawing Step-by-Step Animals

Owls are delicate majestic creatures frowned upon due to their preference for living in the cold night yet their perfect symmetry and beauty cannot be denied. Two circles intertwined start the base form of this drawing that transforms into a cute funny owl by adding more and more curved lines to form the impressive eyes and the feathers. Place it in a green environment and don't hesitate to add other fun characters to the scene. Color is an essential part of the end design and using vibrant rich colors will spark the interest of your little ones.

Learn How to Draw an Owl- Cartoon Scene Step by Step Tutorial

6. Learn How to Draw a Zebra - Easy Drawing Step-by-Step for Kids

Zebras are curious animals, representing the perfect duality between dark and light, night and day, white and black. The representation of such a character might be the right motif for teaching your kid the mentioned duality of life whilst keeping things casual and fun. The colorful environment surrounding and placing the zebra in its context will contrast beautifully with the main character. The below drawing depicts the zebra in a posture expressing human behavior as a creative parallel of understanding and comprehending the animal by comparison.

Learn How to Draw a Zebra - Cartoon Scene Step by Step Tutorial (2)

7. Learn How to Draw an Octopus - Cartoon Scene Step-by-Step Tutorial

You can immerse yourself and your kid in the unexplored mysterious underworld, filled with colorful interesting characters. A colorful octopus has been depicted in a lively environment associated with a better understanding of the miniature world of a fish tank in the vast immensity of an ocean and as a parallel to the importance of freedom for animals and their protection in their natural habitat. Reflect the vast world in a variety of tones and contrasts that will inspire and allow creativity to run free.

01 Learn How to Draw an Octopus - Cartoon Step by Step Tutorial

8. Learn How to Draw a Mouse - Mouse in Cat Clothing Step-by-Step Tutorial

The classical chase of cat and mouse of the beloved cartoon Tom and Jerry will remain a fond memory for most of us. We have tried to capture their complex and fun play in a single character that plays a double role, being placed in a homey mundane environment. The creation can be understood on a multitude of levels and explained to your kid depending on his age and understanding capacity. For the young toddler, the cartoon will represent a fun method of expressing his beloved characters in a colorful creation.

Learn How to Draw a Mouse - Cartoon Scene Step by Step Tutorial

9. Learn How to Draw a Seahorse - Cartoon Seahorse Step-by-Step Tutorial

Another cute creative character from the sea world has been brought to life in this marine-themed drawing. You can once again start from the basic circle and work your way around it to form and add complex colorful details to the creation. You could even merge the octopus with the below-featured creation if you feel adventurous enough to form a complex vast marine environment. Use the two characters to explain the concepts of friendship, closeness, and difference by determining your little one to add personality to each individual.

Learn How to Draw a Seahorse - Cartoon Scene Step by Step Tutorial

10. Learn How to Draw a Mushroom - Easy Drawing Step by Step for Beginners

We end our cartoon scenes with another natural environment captured in its various, complex essence, a miniature scale depicting the natural course of life at a different level. The intricate world of mushrooms and their internal logic of functioning and developing in the forest, along with the vital role they have to play in the environment will represent a wonderful lesson for your children. Dive into the natural world and you will capture their interest and attention whilst stimulating their creativity and imagination.

Learn How to Draw a Mushroom - Cartoon Scene Step by Step Tutorial

How Drawing Positively Influences a Child's Development

Further on we will go deeper into the intricate and complex roles drawing plays in a child's development.

Scribbling

The act of scribbling becomes a focus of attention for toddlers around 18 months, helping in muscle coordination, wrist and finger movement, coordination, and general physical development. The child will exercise his cognitive abilities and will interact socially, learning the meanings of shapes and marks. In time, his technique will improve, and the rhythm will take over and engage his entire being in the act of drawing. Full control of wrist movement will be achieved later on the evolution ladder but by scribbling, the toddler will learn how to grow from grasping a pen with his entire fist to holding it the proper healthy way. You must be aware of the fact that the end product of scribbling is important for the toddler as well as the process itself. Colors and lines spark their interest and later on, the shapes they have created will become their own signature. Later on, the act of scribbling represents autonomy, they have the ability to choose their own colors, lines, shapes, crayons, and paper, learning essential steps in the process of making rational decisions based on preferences and becoming independent.

Creating shapes

Between two and three a child has developed enough to create shapes, primitive circles, squares, and triangles, and by the age of three, the child puts together several shapes to form what Kellogg termed aggregates. These aggregates represent the first step in the reaching of realistic drawings which will usually be a primitive person, a tadpole formed out of a circle, and two lines that form the legs. The details may be placed or not on the circle, arms might not be used unless necessary. This should not be understood as a lack of understanding of the human body and its existence but rather as a conceptual interpretation of a persona, a personal manifest of apprehension, and a method of conveying a human being as a whole. Around age nine body proportions appear in the interpretation of human shapes, completing the concept begun as a toddler.

Conceptual drawing

The association is a technique used in language skills and arts alike. We tend to conceptualize items and ideas in order to better understand and comprehend their meaning and role in life, as well as associate them with certain memories and ideas. Around age three or four young children tend to create generic symbols for representing repeating elements in their drawings: trees, birds, the sun, the house, and people, beginning to show signs of realistic representation of the world as they perceive it. More often than not the impossibility of the world expressed such as representing both the inside and outside in the same picture is the key to challenging their mind and imagination and stimulating creativity.

Realistic depictions

Concrete operational thought manifests after the age of eight when kids tend to represent the world in a more realistic manner, leaving imagination and creativity behind. Perspective and proportions appear in the equation and the skill demonstrated at depicting them will encourage the little one to pursue arts in the future rather than giving up in an early stage. Confidence is key in creative development so the act of encouraging children, and offering them positive feedback along with guided technical drawing instruction in middle school years is essential for those who exude passion and intuition for creative arts.

How to encourage and promote drawing

As we have seen, drawing plays a vital role in the early years of development so let's decide on a few methods of encouraging and promoting drawing as art.

  1. Choosing and offering proper materials to young kids represents the first step
  1. Become the role model and influence your kids into drawing, present it as a fun creative activity
  2. Never allow an effort to go unnoticed. Applaud intent, colors, lines, and most of all, creativity
  1. Allow your kid to depict the story he is trying to convey
  2. Coloring books can exercise control but in the early stages creativity and an open free mind are far more important
  3. Offer high-quality examples later on
  1. Associate music with drawing- it stimulates the mind
  2. Always offer freedom of choice- in heme, color, pagination, and everything involved in the creative process

In conclusion, the simple act of drawing or scribbling at an early age will promote physical and cognitive development whilst encouraging social interaction, creativity, autonomy, and confidence. Admiration and early encouragement will help in forming a future great artist. Creativity and skill should be praised and understood as a wonderful asset and an incredible method of releasing stress, expressing emotions, and being free.

Related Articles

111 Best, Fun, and Cool Things to Draw

8 Best Cartooning Books For Artists Today

Drawing is much more than just putting pencil to paper and sketching what's in front of you. 

Professional artists will tell you that it's a medium for exploring human emotions and evoking real-life feelings in a 2D medium. So, you can understand the challenge that artists face and realize now why famous paintings sell for millions.

If you're a budding artist looking to make a name in the world of art, it would be best to read a few books about drawing concepts and techniques. To help you, we have narrowed down the 50 best drawing books for beginners that explore various ways of bringing art forms to life.

Best Drawing Books for Beginners

Here's the list of the 50 best drawing books for beginners, a comprehensive collection that will inspire and guide you on your artistic journey.

1. Keys To Drawing - Best for Beginners

To become proficient in different drawing techniques, it's important to practice, and that's where Bert Dodson's book comes in handy. It focuses on simple techniques so that you can create your own style.

All the techniques are easy to follow and suitable for new artists to help them apply clean strokes by controlling the movement of their hands and elbows. You'll find that the realistic drawing exercises have been divided into several lessons for quick understanding.

Number of Pages: 224 pages | Dimensions: 8.47 x 0.45 x 11 inches | Weight: 1.6 lbs | Publisher: North Light Books | Publication Date: August 15, 1990 | Book Format: Paperback

2. Drawing On The Right Side Of The Brain - Best for Realistic Drawing

This book acts as a portal to the world of professional artists, especially for budding painters who need to practice realistic drawing exercises. Published in 1979, it’s a bestseller in the USA and has been translated into several languages.

The author, Betty Edwards, taught at California State University and has provided essential tips and tricks to be a successful painter. There's even a section about using the left and right sides of the brain to good effect.

Number of Pages: 291 pages | Dimensions: 8 x 0.75 x 9.5 inches | Weight: 1.45 lbs | Publisher: Tarcher | Publication Date: August 30, 1999 | Book Format: Paperback

3. Drawing For The Absolute Beginner - Best for Easy Learning

Every famous artist was once a beginner, but you will have a slight advantage because they didn't have the luxury of reading this book. Written by Mary and Mark Willenbrik, it will help improve your drawing skills in short, effective strokes.

All the methods in this book are pretty straightforward, while the narrative tone is simple. We came across several useful tips that will help you grasp basic art forms and styles with ease.

Number of Pages: 128 pages | Dimensions: 8.51 x 0.37 x 10.86 inches | Weight: 0.22 lbs | Publisher: North Light Books | Publication Date: November 2, 2006 | Book Format: Paperback

4. Drawing For The Absolute And Utter Beginner - Best for Nature & Portrait Drawing

Novice artists who one day aspire to bring various art forms to life will love this book by Claire Watson Garcia. You can learn to draw nature, people, still life, objects, textures, and basic shapes. The best part is that it has a separate section on charcoal shading and graphite pencil sketches for drawing realistic portraits.

Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.4 x 11.1 inches | Weight: 1.31 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: October 1, 2003 | Book Format: Paperback

5. Light For Visual Artists - Best for Understanding Light & Shadow

To make your drawings stand out, it's essential to understand the interplay between light and shadow. We recommend studying the techniques in this book by Richard Yot but don't worry because it's not difficult to understand. The book isn't filled with complicated terminology despite talking about technical concepts.

It's perfect for creating detailed illustrations in visual art and proves to be a valuable resource for animators, photographers, novice artists, and professional painters.

Number of Pages: 176 pages | Dimensions: 8.8 x 0.75 x 11.2 inches | Weight: 1.59 lbs | Publisher: Laurence King Publishing | Publication Date: July 16, 2019 | Book Format: Paperback

6. Perspective Made Easy

At times, the best way to leave your mark as a painter is to look at things from a different perspective. To explore new drawing techniques, you can read this book about perspective drawing, which contains more than 250 line drawings related to the vanishing point and horizon.

Ernest R. Norlingod discusses the importance of seeing things at eye level to create shadows, shapes, objects, and figures to build your foundation as a painter.

Number of Pages: 224 pages | Dimensions: 5.39 x 0.47 x 8.46 inches | Weight: 0.58 lbs | Publisher: Dover Publications | Publication Date: January 19, 1999 | Book Format: Paperback

7. The Natural Way To Draw

Another bestseller for art study is this book about drawing objects and figures by taking inspiration from real life. If you're committed to gathering practical knowledge, then follow the exercises carefully crafted by the author, Kimon Nicolaides, from his experiences.

Having learned from stalwarts like Sloan, Bridgman, and Miller, he explores his passion for teaching art in this detailed book. We found that it's ideal for beginners and slightly advanced painters.

Number of Pages: 240 pages | Dimensions: 6.88 x 0.69 x 9.25 inches | Weight: 1.13 lbs | Publisher: Mariner Books | Publication Date: February 1, 1990 | Book Format: Paperback

8. Vilppu Drawing Manual

As far as figure drawing books go, the Vilppu Drawing Manual is one of the best and helps beginners make life drawings with ease. The author was employed at Disney for 15 years and passed on his knowledge by writing this comprehensive art course.

We found that the three main topics in this book are: gesture drawing, form construction, and hand action.

Number of Pages: 177 pages | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: 1.3 lbs | Publisher: Vilppu Studio | Publication Date: January 1, 1997 | Book Format: Spiral-bound

9. Figure Drawing For All It's Worth

As professional painters will tell you, there's no need to look far for inspiration because humans are some of the most interesting subjects. If you want to draw a life-like human figure, we recommend Andrew Loomis' book to make this seemingly difficult task easy.

He details the intermediary steps involved in the process so that you can draw figures by maintaining the correct proportions of different body parts. Even though the methods described might appear outdated, they are extremely useful.

Number of Pages: 208 pages | Dimensions: 9.2 x 1.02 x 12.3 inches | Weight: 2.8 lbs | Publisher: Titan Books | Publication Date: May 31, 2011 | Book Format: Hardcover

10. Traveling With Your Sketchbook

Serious art teachers will always encourage you to travel because there's so much to see and paint. But don't forget to carry this sketchbook to capture the emotions of different places and their people. Instead of taking photos, this old-school technique of recording memories will help you develop human connections.

Thanks to its unique combination of lessons, the book discusses the techniques for painting nature, the environment, and urban scenes.

Number of Pages: 200 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.5 x 11 inches | Weight: 1.01 lbs | Publisher: Butterfly Books | Publication Date: April 1, 1991 | Book Format: Paperback

11. How To Draw What You See

Suppose you chance upon an interesting scene while on a beach and want to paint it, but don't know how. It so happens that artists often fail to replicate the objects in front of them, so this book helps make that easier. We believe it's ideal for sketching objects in still life and explains how to add detail with each stroke.

Number of Pages: 303 pages | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: September 7, 2011 | Book Format: Kindle

12. A Foundation Course In Drawing

This book written by Terry Rosenberg and Peter Stanyer will be great reference material for serious art students. It extensively discusses drawing skills involving space, shape, light, and texture. 

Several fun exercises keep you engaged and prove most suitable for artists who have some proficiency. You'll especially love topics covering landscape, movement of figures, abstract subjects, and still life.

Number of Pages: 240 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.75 x 12 inches | Weight: 1.7 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: January 1, 2003 | Book Format: Paperback

13. Framed Ink

If you're a budding storyteller, this book will hold great value for your career. It's one of the rare books for graphic novelists who wish to engage with the audience through their illustrations. And, thanks to Marcos Mateu-Mestre, a comic artist himself, you'll get to know about composing engaging shots through single images.

Apart from art techniques, readers will have clarity about choosing a relevant topic and using light to depict day/night scenes.

Number of Pages: 128 pages | Dimensions: 8.56 x 0.55 x 10.95 inches | Weight: 1.45 lbs | Publisher: Design Studio Press | Publication Date: August 31, 2010 | Book Format: Paperback

14. Learn To Draw And Paint

The absolute beginner should know that drawing and painting are two different mediums, even though they share many similarities. To learn about them both, order your copy of this book today since it highlights how drawing and sketching can improve your painting skills.

You'll find hands-on lessons discussing charcoal and pencil sketches by drawing lines, scales, patterns, depths, contours, and perspective exercises. Best of all are the multiple color illustrations to describe art-making.

Number of Pages: 320 pages | Dimensions: 8 x 1 x 10.25 inches | Weight: 2.2 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: October 1, 2003 | Book Format: Paperback

15. How To Draw

Drawing doesn't simply mean sketching nature or still life; in fact, model building is one of the most interesting concepts covered in drawing fundamentals. You can read this book which focuses primarily on design and the various model processes of rotations, volumes, and ellipses.

We loved the images and video tutorials that made the different techniques easier to understand. 

Number of Pages: 208 pages | Dimensions: 9.1 x 0.8 x 11.03 inches | Weight: 2.5 lbs | Publisher: Design Studio Press | Publication Date: December 15, 2013 | Book Format: Paperback

16. Drawing The Head And Hands

This is another book by Andrew Loomis that discusses the artistic techniques of drawing different body parts. To be more precise, he talks about the skills needed for drawing heads and hands by developing your perspective through the topics covered in the book.

All the methods are pretty simple, and you'll get a clear idea of how to sketch a proportionate human being with heads and arms that don't seem out of place.

Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.2 x 0.8 x 12.3 inches | Weight: 2.19 lbs | Publisher: Titan Books | Publication Date: October 25, 2011 | Book Format: Hardcover

17. Figure Drawing

Although there are several books on figure drawing, very few tackle the subject from an anatomical standpoint. Michael Hampton understood this and believed that knowing about human anatomy would help people sketch life-like figures. The book discusses the mechanical techniques of sketching a human figure, and you can also transfer these techniques to other mediums.

It is divided into several sections for easy understanding and explores various skill sets for the benefit of budding artists.

Number of Pages: 235 pages | Dimensions: 10 x 7.5 x 1.2 inches | Weight: 1.89 lbs | Publisher: M. Hampton | Publication Date: December 27, 2009 | Book Format: Paperback

18. Figure Drawing For Artists

No, we aren't reviewing the same book twice - this is a different book by Steve Huston that explores figure drawing. You'll learn how to add detail to artwork, thanks to the author's instructions and advice to focus on the tiny things.

It's a comprehensive guide for intermediate and advanced artists discussing the importance of gesture, light, perspective, and structure. Most importantly, you'll find artworks by famous artists for inspiration.

Number of Pages: 192 pages | Dimensions: 8.63 x 0.75 x 10 inches | Weight: 1.5 lbs | Publisher: Rockport Publishers | Publication Date: June 1, 2016 | Book Format: Flexibound

19. Anatomy For The Artist

As we have discussed earlier, it's crucial to know the human anatomy for figure drawing, and this is another book that believes in that school of thought. There are diagrams and photos, including translucent overlays, to help you understand the skeletal structure.

Sara Simbet explores the various muscle groups and encourages artists to capture the balance, poise, and grace of the human form. And all the illustrations are pretty detailed to help you draw a model accurately.

Number of Pages: 255 pages | Dimensions: 10.25 x 1.25 x 12 inches | Weight: 3.65 lbs | Publisher: DK Publishing | Publication Date: October 1, 2001 | Book Format: Hardcover

20. Successful Drawing

Beginners can read Andrew Loomis' book - Successful Drawing, which explores a realistic and clean style so that you can master 3D drawing. He discusses some pretty advanced skills related to proportion, planes, perspective placement, and patterns in the book. 

We especially liked the emphasis on light and scale, the major components of three-dimensional drawings. After reading it, you should have a better idea about construction, character, contour, consistency, and conception.

Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.3 x 0.9 x 12.2 inches | Weight: 2.3 lbs | Publisher: Titan Books | Publication Date: May 8, 2012 | Book Format: Hardcover

21. Drawing People

Whenever we think of people, we think about adults, but Barbara Bradley teaches us that even babies and teenagers can be intriguing and fun subjects. The professional artist was a Director of Illustration in San Francisco for the Academy of Art College. So, you can trust her when she discusses how to realistically draw people and their clothing in this book.

Particularly interesting is the attention to detail, with regards to the folds on clothing and how they respond to the environment.

Number of Pages: 176 pages | Dimensions: 8.7 x 0.7 x 11.1 inches | Weight: 2.15 lbs | Publisher: F+W Media | Publication Date: October 27, 2003 | Book Format: Hardcover

22. Drawing The Living Figure

Circling round to anatomy again, this book talks about surface anatomy and how it's influenced by anatomical infrastructure. In short, Joseph Sheppard's book discusses figure drawing from the point of view of muscles and bones related to their position and movement.

It's pretty interesting, and artists get to examine the surface structure of live models. You can view a finished figure in two forms - its muscles and skeletons.

Number of Pages: 144 pages | Dimensions: 8.33 x 0.46 x 11.17 inches | Weight: 0.91 lbs | Publisher: Dover Publications | Publication Date: May 1, 1991 | Book Format: Paperback

23. Human Anatomy For Artists

Master artists need to be aware of their surroundings and how it holds their drawing together, believes Eliot Goldfinger in the book Human Anatomy For Artists. It's considered by many artists to be the definitive guide for drawing a human figure.

The author is a well-known sculptor and has experience drawing bones, muscles, and skeletons. This book analyzes the human form in detail and discusses all the essentials for drawing realistic figures. 

Number of Pages: 368 pages | Dimensions: 12.32 x 9.32 x 1.11 inches | Weight: 3.79 lbs | Publisher: Oxford University Press | Publication Date: November 7, 1991 | Book Format: Hardcover

24. A Handbook Of Anatomy For Art Students

Even though the title may sound complicated, this is not a scientific or medical-themed book. It's pretty easy to read, thanks to the life-like illustrations of models in different poses, coupled with the position of their muscles.

Like the previous book, you also get to understand the surface anatomy of the human figure through photos and illustrations. Arthur Thomson has years of art experience and knows how to convey a thought easily.

Number of Pages: 624 pages | Dimensions: 5.5 x 1.25 x 8.5 inches | Weight: 1.36 lbs | Publisher: Dover Publications | Publication Date: November 24, 2011 | Book Format: Paperback

25. Pen And Ink Drawing

An often unexplored technique is drawing with pens, as it delivers a vibrant appearance unmatched by most pencils. But a valid concern among artists is that they won't be able to erase the lines, which is where this book proves useful.

It provides an in-depth view of using pens and has several beautiful drawings to awaken the artist in you. We read the book and found it thoroughly entertaining due to the lucid language.

Number of Pages: 166 pages | Dimensions: 8 x 0.38 x 11 inches | Weight: 0.9 lbs | Publisher: Three Minds Press | Publication Date: December 11, 2015 | Book Format: Paperback

26. Draw Great Characters

To draw great characters, you need proper knowledge about body language, shape, facial expressions, and interactions between various elements. Beverly Johnson's book talks about all this by looking at a subject from different angles based on the setting. And there are plenty of practical exercises for much-needed practice.

Number of Pages: 144 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.5 x 11 inches | Weight: 1.42 lbs | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Publication Date: December 3, 2019 | Book Format: Paperback

27. Art Fundamentals

Understanding the fundamentals of art involves having a working knowledge of the various theories, concepts, and conventions. But don't worry, you can refer to this book to become a successful artist, owing to its diverse topics, such as the rule of thirds and divine proportions.

You'll also find discussions on subtle nuances for depicting human emotions.

Number of Pages: 288 pages | Dimensions: 8.19 x 0.94 x 11.57 inches | Weight: 2.8 lbs | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing | Publication Date: May 12, 2020 | Book Format: Paperback

28. Beginners Guide To Life Drawing

Life drawing involves accurate representations of the human body on paper, for which this 100-page book comes in handy. There are detailed instructions about tone, texture, position, line, and shade. Beginners will love the step-by-step depictions, especially since it doesn't have complicated terminology to overwhelm them.

Number of Pages: 96 pages | Dimensions: 8.56 x 0.27 x 11.06 inches | Weight: 0.94 lbs | Publisher: Search Press | Publication Date: June 4, 2019 | Book Format: Paperback

29. Sketching From The Imagination: Creatures And Monsters

We often get caught up with drawing a perfect landscape or a human face, but even drawing from imagination has its challenges. This book talks about sketching creatures and monsters and displays the work of 50 artists from across the world. You'll find the mechanical structures of dragons, fairies, etc., represented in black and white.

Number of Pages: 320 pages | Dimensions: 8 x 0.75 x 9 inches | Weight: 2.1 lbs | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing | Publication Date: June 25, 2019 | Book Format: Paperback

30. Pocket Art

Alongside figure drawings, one of the important techniques to learn for a serious artist is how to draw portraits. This book focuses on the essential steps of portrait drawing to make it easier for beginners by exploring different techniques and analyzing the subtleties of structure and facial expression. 

Number of Pages: 112 pages | Dimensions: 5.25 x 0.75 x 8.2 inches | Weight: 0.55 lbs | Publisher: Rockport Publishers | Publication Date: April 24, 2018 | Book Format: Flexibound

31. The Sketch Encyclopedia

Sometimes you need ideas for drawing practice, so this book has over 1,000 art projects to tingle the little gray cells in your brain. The primary concepts covered include sketching, line drawing, building up, and completing the finished figure. It also has topics discussing famous landmarks, buildings, vehicles, and nature.

Number of Pages: 504 pages | Dimensions: 9 x 1.5 x 11 inches | Weight: 4.14 lbs | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing | Publication Date: October 30, 2018 | Book Format: Hardcover

32. Drawn To Life

Once beginners have grasped the concept of still-life drawings, they can focus on the gesture drawing process to bring human emotions to life. You should note that the entire book is a compilation of lectures by Walt Stanchfield, the famous Disney animator. Rest assured, it will help you capture the moment through sketches.

Number of Pages: 403 pages | Dimensions: 10.8 x 8.4 x 1 inches | Weight: 2.99 lbs | Publisher: Routledge | Publication Date: March 23, 2009 | Book Format: Paperback

33. How To Draw Comics The Marvel Way

If you aren't interested in drawing, you will be now, thanks to this book that teaches artists to draw their favorite Marvel characters. To sketch the superheroes that Stan Lee conceptualized, you'll learn about shot selection, composition, character dynamics, and perspective. All of these useful traits are depicted through vibrant color illustrations.

Number of Pages: 192 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.4 x 11 inches | Weight: 0.85 lbs | Publisher: Atria Books | Publication Date: September 14, 1984 | Book Format: Paperback

34. Drawing The Head And Figure

Figure drawing isn't as easy as it seems, and you can refer to this book to learn about drawing the head and body in perfect proportion. There are tons of illustrations and a step-by-step guide, which many artists believe is easier to follow than Andrew Loomis' methods. You won't face any shortage of helpful tips.

Number of Pages: 128 pages | Dimensions: 8.2 x 0.3 x 10.8 inches | Weight: 0.65 lbs | Publisher: TarcherPerigee | Publication Date: January 15, 1982 | Book Format: Paperback

35. The Silver Way

Developing character traits is important to be well-known as an artist, and what better person to learn from than Stephen Silver, the designer of shows like Kim Impossible. This book details simple steps and explains the best drawing techniques for encouraging, guiding, and inspiring you to sketch a character.

Number of Pages: 248 pages | Dimensions: 12 x 1 x 9 inches | Weight: 3.1 lbs | Publisher: Design Studio Press | Publication Date: April 7, 2017 | Book Format: Paperback

36. Modern Cartooning

Cartooning as concept art is an intricate form, and Christopher Hart will help you tap into your real potential through his brilliant book. You'll find simple methods to design cartoons but especially pleasing is the attention to bodies, faces, and backdrops. All these bring any cartoon to life.

Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.51 x 0.44 x 10.87 inches | Weight: 1.42 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: March 26, 2013 | Book Format: Paperback

37. The Illusion Of Life: Disney Animation

For concept artists, one of the keys to drawing animations is to take inspiration from photos, storyboards, sketches, and paintings. This book by two well-known Disney animators, Frank Thomas, and Ollie Jonhston, talks about the 12 principles of animation while providing helpful tips to design your own characters.

Number of Pages: 576 pages | Dimensions: 10.66 x 1.4 x 11.39 inches | Weight: 6.28 lbs | Publisher: Disney Editions | Publication Date: October 19, 1995 | Book Format: Hardcover

38. Designing Creatures And Characters

To learn all the fundamentals of designing a graphic novel, you can read this book about sketching creatures and characters from your imagination. We found many projects and exercises that you can practice for drawing any creature to bring the novel to life.

You'll also like the beautiful illustrations and tips that the author offers from his own experience as an artist.

Number of Pages: 192 pages | Dimensions: 8 x 0.55 x 10.01 inches | Weight: 1.45 lbs | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Publication Date: October 12, 2016 | Book Format: Paperback

39. The Artist's Complete Guide To Figure Drawing

The best drawing books often talk about how to draw, but Anthony Ryder takes a different approach and discusses what you should draw. He builds on the idea of capturing what an artist sees rather than what they expect to see. You'll especially like the topics covering life, form, shape, and lines to create realistic drawings.

Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.25 x 0.39 x 10.79 inches | Weight: 0.95 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: June 1, 1999 | Book Format: Paperback

40. Force: Dynamic Life Drawing For Animators

To apply the fundamentals of figure drawing in real life, Mike Mattesi talks about sketching the human body in its purest form. But he also discusses how attention to clothes can elevate the artwork to another level. This book is the perfect guide for people to convey emotions through art.

Number of Pages: 211 pages | Dimensions: 8.4 x 0.6 x 10.9 inches | Weight: 1.84 lbs | Publisher: CRC Press | Publication Date: March 29, 2017 | Book Format: Paperback

41. A Foundation Course In Drawing

An important book for art study is A Foundation Course In Drawing, with university lecturers Terry Rosenberg and Peter Stanyer co-writing it. The book contains many realistic exercises to help students grasp the concept of different art forms and apply them to their projects. It's ideal for beginners to learn real-life applications of various drawing techniques.

Number of Pages: 408 pages | Dimensions: 7 x 1.5 x 9.5 inches | Weight: 2.15 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: October 1, 1999 | Book Format: Hardcover

42. The Skillful Huntsman

Any concept artist will find this book to their liking as it discusses visual development through various sketching techniques. It mostly deals with creating fantasy worlds comprising castles, forests, huntsmen, and monsters by encouraging artists to explore their creativity. However, some of the concepts about perspective might be a little complex.

Number of Pages: N/A | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Publisher: N/A | Publication Date: January 1, 2008 | Book Format: Hardcover

43. The Art Of Perspective

This is a fairly new book published in 2007 and focuses on atmospheric perspective to explain how values and colors can add depth to any artwork. There are topics covering one, two, and three-point perspectives, while the author also deals with unique perspective-related problems like wheels, reflections, and stairs.

Number of Pages: 208 pages | Dimensions: 8.53 x 0.55 x 11 inches | Weight: 1.81 lbs | Publisher: North Light Books | Publication Date: June 12, 2007 | Book Format: Paperback

44. The Master Guide To Drawing Anime

If you want to draw popular anime characters, you can't go wrong with this book. It's most suitable for beginners and will help you draw school girls and boys, villains, and fantasy characters. Most of all, it offers detailed insight into developing emotions and sketching accessories.

Number of Pages: 144 pages | Dimensions: 9 x 0.5 x 10 inches | Weight: 1.2 lbs | Publisher: Drawing with Christopher Hart | Publication Date: July 7, 2015 | Book Format: Paperback

45. Drawing Manga Animals, Chibis, And Other Adorable Creatures

This is another popular book for drawing Manga and other fictional creatures like Pokemon to help you capture figure poses quickly. The primary discussion revolves around accurately depicting their facial expressions, shapes, sizes, and unique character traits to leave a mark on the audience.

Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.48 x 9.99 inches | Weight: 1.35 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: November 17, 2009 | Book Format: Paperback

46. Mastering Manga

Both beginners and advanced Manga artists will enjoy the topics covered in this book, including character development and setting a scene. After reading it, you can expand your skill set and draw exquisite Manga characters, thanks to the detailed illustrations. 

Number of Pages: 128 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 5.43 x 0.3 inches | Weight: 1.1 lbs | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Publication Date: March 8, 2012 | Book Format: Paperback

47. Classic Human Anatomy

This is a classic drawing book for developing anatomical sense, thanks to the 800 illustrations depicting the movement of muscles and bones in the body. We found that it's divided into three sections - muscles and their actions, skeleton, and movement.

It's ideal for an intermediate artist, and the easy instructions make it convenient for you to quickly grasp the subject.

Number of Pages: 304 pages | Dimensions: 9.33 x 0.91 x 11.23 inches | Weight: 3.21 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: December 23, 2008 | Book Format: Hardcover

48. The Big Book Of Realistic Drawing Secrets

You can buy this comprehensive book when you aspire to draw realistic figures of animals, humans, inanimate objects, and the environment. Co-written by Rick and Carrie Stuart Parks, this book takes a deep dive into the basics of drawing.

You'll find topics on anatomy, form, and structure with several helpful tips to improve your drawing skills. And both advanced and novice artists will like the friendly narration.

Number of Pages: 224 pages | Dimensions: 8.51 x 0.5 x 10.84 inches | Weight: 1.99 lbs | Publisher: North Light Books | Publication Date: June 13, 2009 | Book Format: Paperback

49. An Illustrated Life

Out of all the books we have reviewed, this is one of the rare ones that only contains pictures of artistic inspiration. Various artists have shared their creations from their library, which makes An Illustrated Life unique.

As you can understand, it's not a tutorial on how to draw, even though there are certain helpful tips. This is down to the author's interviews with the artists, where they talk about their creative process.

Number of Pages: 272 pages | Dimensions: 10 x 0.6 x 8 inches | Weight: 2.2 lbs | Publisher: HOW Books | Publication Date: December 1, 2008 | Book Format: Paperback

50. The Artist's Complete Guide To Drawing The Head

Who knew that drawing the head could be so challenging? That's because William Maughan discusses Leonardo Da Vinci's chiaroscuro technique, which is the interplay between light and dark.

Artists will learn about using toned paper, and dark and white pencils to create shadow, light, and other interesting forms. There's even a detailed guide on drawing accurate facial features through soft pastels for visual awareness.

Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.31 x 0.4 x 10.99 inches | Weight: 1.26 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: January 1, 2004 | Book Format: Paperback

Best Drawing Books for Beginners Comparison Table

Product Number of Pages Dimensions Weight Publisher Publication Date Book Format
Keys To Drawing 224 pages 8.47 x 0.45 x 11 inches 1.6 lbs North Light Books August 15, 1990 Paperback
Drawing On The Right Side Of The Brain 291 pages 8 x 0.75 x 9.5 inches 1.45 lbs Tarcher August 30, 1999 Paperback
Drawing For The Absolute Beginner 128 pages 8.51 x 0.37 x 10.86 inches 0.22 lbs North Light Books November 2, 2006 Paperback
Drawing For The Absolute And Utter Beginner 160 pages 8.5 x 0.4 x 11.1 inches 1.31 lbs Watson-Guptill October 1, 2003 Paperback
Light For Visual Artists 176 pages 8.8 x 0.75 x 11.2 inches 1.59 lbs Laurence King Publishing July 16, 2019 Paperback
Perspective Made Easy 224 pages 5.39 x 0.47 x 8.46 inches 0.58 lbs Dover Publications January 19, 1999 Paperback
The Natural Way To Draw 240 pages 6.88 x 0.69 x 9.25 inches 1.13 lbs Mariner Books February 1, 1990 Paperback
Vilppu Drawing Manual 177 pages N/A 1.3 lbs Vilppu Studio January 1, 1997 Spiral-bound
Figure Drawing For All It's Worth 208 pages 9.2 x 1.02 x 12.3 inches 2.8 lbs Titan Books May 31, 2011 Hardcover
Traveling With Your Sketchbook 200 pages 8.5 x 0.5 x 11 inches 1.01 lbs Butterfly Books April 1, 1991 Paperback
How To Draw What You See 303 pages N/A N/A N/A Watson-Guptill September 7, 2011
A Foundation Course In Drawing 240 pages 8.5 x 0.75 x 12 inches 1.7 lbs Watson-Guptill January 1, 2003 Paperback
Framed Ink 128 pages 8.56 x 0.55 x 10.95 inches 1.45 lbs Design Studio Press August 31, 2010 Paperback
Learn To Draw And Paint 320 pages 8 x 1 x 10.25 inches 2.2 lbs Watson-Guptill October 1, 2003 Paperback
How To Draw 208 pages 9.1 x 0.8 x 11.03 inches 2.5 lbs Design Studio Press December 15, 2013 Paperback
Drawing The Head And Hands 160 pages 9.2 x 0.8 x 12.3 inches 2.19 lbs Titan Books October 25, 2011 Hardcover
Figure Drawing 235 pages 10 x 7.5 x 1.2 inches 1.89 lbs M. Hampton December 27, 2009 Paperback
Figure Drawing For Artists 192 pages 8.63 x 0.75 x 10 inches 1.5 lbs Rockport Publishers June 1, 2016 Flexibound
Anatomy For The Artist 255 pages 10.25 x 1.25 x 12 inches 3.65 lbs DK Publishing October 1, 2001 Hardcover
Successful Drawing 160 pages 9.3 x 0.9 x 12.2 inches 2.3 lbs Titan Books May 8, 2012 Hardcover
Drawing People 176 pages 8.7 x 0.7 x 11.1 inches 2.15 lbs F+W Media October 27, 2003 Hardcover
Drawing The Living Figure 144 pages 8.33 x 0.46 x 11.17 inches 0.91 lbs Dover Publications May 1, 1991 Paperback
Human Anatomy For Artists 368 pages 12.32 x 9.32 x 1.11 inches 3.79 lbs Oxford University Press November 7, 1991 Hardcover
A Handbook Of Anatomy For Art Students 624 pages 5.5 x 1.25 x 8.5 inches 1.36 lbs Dover Publications November 24, 2011 Paperback
Pen And Ink Drawing 166 pages 8 x 0.38 x 11 inches 0.9 lbs Three Minds Press December 11, 2015 Paperback
Draw Great Characters 144 pages 8.5 x 0.5 x 11 inches 1.42 lbs IMPACT Books December 3, 2019 Paperback
Art Fundamentals 288 pages 8.19 x 0.94 x 11.57 inches 2.8lbs 3DTotal Publishing May 12, 2020 Paperback
Beginners Guide To Life Drawing 96 pages 8.56 x 0.27 x 11.06 inches 0.94 lbs Search Press June 4, 2019 Paperback
Sketching From The Imagination: Creatures And Monsters 320 pages 8 x 0.75 x 9 inches 2.1 lbs 3DTotal Publishing June 25, 2019 Paperback
Pocket Art 112 pages 5.25 x 0.75 x 8.2 inches 0.55 lbs Rockport Publishers April 24, 2018 Flexibound
The Sketch Encyclopedia 504 pages 9 x 1.5 x 11 inches 4.14 lbs 3DTotal Publishing October 30, 2018 Hardcover
Drawn To Life 403 pages 10.8 x 8.4 x 1 inches 2.99 lbs Routledge March 23, 2009 Paperback
How To Draw Comics The Marvel Way 192 pages 8.5 x 0.4 x 11 inches 0.85 lbs Atria Books September 14, 1984 Paperback
Drawing The Head And Figure 128 pages 8.2 x 0.3 x 10.8 inches 0.65 lbs TarcherPerigee January 15, 1982 Paperback
The Silver Way 248 pages 12 x 1 x 9 inches 3.1 lbs Design Studio Press April 7, 2017 Paperback
Modern Cartooning 160 pages 8.51 x 0.44 x 10.87 inches 1.42 lbs Watson-Guptill March 26, 2013 Paperback
The Illusion Of Life: Disney Animation 576 pages 10.66 x 1.4 x 11.39 inches 6.28 lbs Disney Editions October 19, 1995 Hardcover
Designing Creatures And Characters 192 pages 8 x 0.55 x 10.01 inches 1.45 lbs IMPACT Books October 12, 2016 Paperback
The Artist's Complete Guide To Figure Drawing 160 pages 8.25 x 0.39 x 10.79 inches 0.95 lbs Watson-Guptill June 1, 1999 Paperback
Force: Dynamic Life Drawing For Animators 211 pages 8.4 x 0.6 x 10.9 inches 1.84 lbs CRC Press March 29, 2017 Paperback
A Foundation Course In Drawing 408 pages 7 x 1.5 x 9.5 inches 2.15 lbs Watson-Guptill October 1, 1999 Hardcover
The Skillful Huntsman N/A N/A N/A N/A January 1, 2008 Hardcover
The Art Of Perspective 208 pages 8.53 x 0.55 x 11 inches 1.81 lbs North Light Books June 12, 2007 Paperback
The Master Guide To Drawing Anime 144 pages 9 x 0.5 x 10 inches 1.2 lbs Drawing with Christopher Hart July 7, 2015 Paperback
Drawing Manga Animals, Chibis, And Other Adorable Creatures 160 pages 8.5 x 0.48 x 9.99 inches 1.35 lbs Watson-Guptill November 17, 2009 Paperback
Mastering Manga 128 pages 8.5 x 5.43 x 0.3 inches 1.1 lbs IMPACT Books March 8, 2012 Paperback
Classic Human Anatomy 304 pages 9.33 x 0.91 x 11.23 inches 3.21 lbs Watson-Guptill December 23, 2008 Hardcover
The Big Book Of Realistic Drawing Secrets 224 pages 8.51 x 0.5 x 10.84 inches 1.99 lbs North Light Books June 13, 2009 Paperback
An Illustrated Life 272 pages 10 x 0.6 x 8 inches 2.2 lbs HOW Books December 1, 2008 Paperback
The Artist's Complete Guide To Drawing The Head 160 pages 8.31 x 0.4 x 10.99 inches 1.26 lbs Watson-Guptill January 1, 2004 Paperback

Buying Guide for the Best Drawing Book for Beginners

Now let’s look at the factors that will help you choose the best drawing books for novice artists. But before that, here are the answers to a few common questions that budding artists usually have.

A. Easy to Understand

The best drawing books are easy to understand despite the complex concepts and structures of shape, light, and form. This will help beginners grasp the concepts quickly and apply them to their painting projects. 

It will help if you look for books that explain how to use different painting mediums to evoke subtle expressions. For instance, a slight tilt of the eyebrow can draw your attention to a person's face, which enhances their facial expressions.

B. Wide Range of Topics

To hold value for beginners, drawing books should cover a wide range of topics even when the book's primary focus is on a singular feature. You have seen in our reviews that many books deal with drawing the head or arms, but even then, they are pretty detailed.

They cover concepts of proportions, reflections, perspectives, etc., to bring your sketches to life. Moreover, search for books that discuss brush strokes, color gradients, and adding depth to the drawings.

C. Price

Although you would want to buy the best drawing books, we are not recommending that you spend a fortune on them. We understand that buying art accessories is pretty expensive, so you want to look for an affordable book.

Most of the books in our guide are reasonably priced, and books for the slightly advanced artist are priced higher. So, depending on your proficiency, you may have to spend a little extra to purchase a relevant book. 

What should a beginner first learn in drawing?

As a beginner, you must first learn about perspective to skillfully portray 3D objects on 2D paper. There are different perspective techniques that visual artists use for life drawing to make their work stand out.

What are the five basics of drawing?

The five basics of drawing that complete beginners should know about are:

  • Perspective
  • Color schemes
  • Proportions
  • Edges
  • Putting thought into action

What are some important drawing methods?

The four most crucial drawing methods are:

  • Hatching and cross-hatching
  • Rendering light
  • Shading and blending
  • Adding highlights

Conclusion

That's all the drawing books we had to cover for beginners; hopefully, now, you can choose one based on the skills you want to develop.

It's essential to keep innovating and pushing yourself to learn about the latest techniques and trends in the world of art, so reading the best drawing books will be worthwhile. You can take inspiration from the pictures and illustrations in many of them to incorporate them with your unique sketching style.

Also, don't forget to try out pencil, pen, and brush strokes, as each medium adds something new to a drawing. With that, we will leave you to brainstorm for your upcoming project, so take care and read this guide before purchasing drawing books.

Related Articles

111 Best, Fun and Cool Things to Draw

8 Best Cartooning Books

11 Best Perspective Books

21 Best Manga Drawing Books

5 Best Hand Drawing Reference

16 Best Maya Books

25 Best Concept Art Books

11 Best Adult Coloring Books

11 Best Color Theory Books

Best Watercolor Painting Books

Are you searching for an incredible way to create a unique space in your home that caters to your personality and interests? Look no further than your basement: an often overlooked area that has the potential to be transformed into an impressive and personalized bar. By turning your focus to basement bar ideas, you can make your house truly feel like home.

In planning your dream basement bar, it's crucial to consider available space and any necessary improvements. Ensure your basement is dry and safe, addressing waterproofing, ventilation, and insulation to create an inviting environment. Don't forget that soundproofing and acoustics, particularly for the basement ceiling, are key aspects in achieving a comfortable and functional space. Effective ceiling soundproofing will ensure the fun in the basement doesn't disturb the rest of the house and vice versa.

With proper planning and optimization, your basement can be more than just storage or technical space, its natural soundproofing qualities make it a perfect location for an enjoyable and relaxing retreat. Take inspiration from the 43 insanely cool basement bar ideas featured in this article and let your imagination run wild. Incorporate a game room, and you've got yourself a fantastic bachelor pad or entertainment hub for friends and family — all while maintaining a peaceful atmosphere for the rest of your home.

Cool Basement Bar Ideas for Your Home

1. Simple and cozy basement bar idea

 1. SIMPLE AND COZY BASEMENT BAR IDEA

2. Using light to make the bar more inviting

 2. USING LIGHT TO MAKE THE BAR MORE INVITING

3. Combining materials adds flavor

 3. COMBINING MATERIALS ADDS FLAVOR

4. A black bar is always striking

 4. A BLACK BAR IS ALWAYS STRIKING

The coolest basement bar ideas don't need to be big, but they all need to make justice to the space they occupy, they simply need to be capable of properly entertaining.

5. Space-efficient basement bar design

I love this idea because it makes use of a residual basement space that would otherwise be used as a simple storage space if not for nothing at all. A small bar opened in your basement will present new options, and it will lead to great opportunities when it comes to entertaining your friends and family.

 5. SPACE EFFICIENT BASEMENT BAR DESIGN

6. Stunning rustic basement bar

Old buildings were made primarily of bricks. If that's the case for your basement, simply paint it or leave it natural and complement the whole with a wooden bar, the brick and wood combination will make the place charming.

Basement bars are cool by default but with exposed brick, rustic wooden accents, and industrial stools, your basement will go to a whole other level.

 6. STUNNING RUSTIC BASEMENT BAR

7. Make the bar more visible by using warm light

 7. MAKE THE BAR MORE VISIBLE BY USING WARM LIGHT

8. Lovely wine storage wood structure

If your wine collection is something that you cherish then the storage solution deserves special attention. Common rectangular storage units will always do the job but to make the place special you need something that catches the eye and removes the ordinary attribute.

Here the bar shelf displays the liquor while the splendid geometric shelves differentiate wine types in a pattern that can even be called wine art by enthusiasts.

 8. LOVELY WINE STORAGE WOOD STRUCTURE

9. White always suggests elegance

It's not just the color though. The proportions, the wooden frames, and small details, here, the shape of the handles, contribute to turning this into a very stylish basement bar idea. Also, imagine how surprised your guests will be when you open the doors to what looks like a normal cabinet to reveal an extraordinary basement bar.

 9. WHITE ALWAYS SUGGEST ELEGANCE

Your entire bar and the bar shelves can be hidden in a cabinet to declutter your ambiance.

10. Choosing contrasting colors makes the bar stand out

 10. CHOOSING CONTRASTING COLORS MAKES THE BAR STAND OUT

While this home basement bar looks simple and neat do note that your bar shelf can have lights incorporated within. That not only enhances visibility but also puts great emphasis on the best bottles in your collection that might reside on these shelves.

11. Retro design is not something you see every day

11. A RETRO DESIGN IS NOT SOMETHING YOU SEE EVERYDAY

12. Space-conscious bar design idea

You don't need an entire room to fit the home bar that you've always dreamed of having. Even a small wall will do. It's the design that counts more and the way it connects to the rest of the room. By fitting it with a mirror, you'll make the space feel bigger and the bar more interesting.

12. SPACE CONSCIOUS BAR DESIGN IDEA

via The Creativity Exchange

13. An illuminated countertop is a must 

The upper cabinet was fitted with small lights that illuminate the countertop, it is where the magic happens and the bar comes to life. It doesn't only look good but it's also very practical, helping you prepare any drink you want.

13. AN ILLUMINATED COUNTER TOP  IS A MUST 

Storing different beverages efficiently might seem a difficult task in small spaces but with the right drawer, this changes rapidly, you`ll have all the drinks in sight, easily accessible, and the entire home bar in one place.

14. Small bar cart Ikea Hack

14. SMALL BAR CART IKEA HACK

15. The black bar - a courageous and remarkable setup

If the home bar itself isn't special enough, then you can make it even more alluring by going for an all-black design. It's still pretty uncommon and people generally don't opt for it because it's a slightly unusual thing to have. It's very subjective though, for example, Holland nestles many black designs that look great. If you're gonna do it, do it properly, choose something unique.

15. THE BLACK BAR - A COURAGEOUS AND REMARKABLE SETUP

via Summit Signature Homes, Inc. and Denise Hauser Design Co.

16. Epic bar built in Victorian-styled cabinet

16. EPIC BAR BUILT IN VICTORIAN STYLED CABINET

17. Trendy drink serving table

17. TRENDY DRINK SERVING TABLE

18. Gorgeous mini bar cabinet for small spaces

18. GORGEOUS MINI BAR CABINET FOR SMALL SPACES

19. Appealing built-in wall white bar

This great basement bar idea is perfect for adding a touch of style to your home. The confined space could have been a drawback but instead, it has led to a very clean and clear solution. The fact that the setup is contained just like a frame would constrain a picture makes the home bar look very intimate and inviting. It's the perfect example for supporting the idea that bigger isn't always better.

19. APPEALING BUILT IN WALL WHITE BAR

via Benjamin Moore Smoke Embers. & John K. Anderson Design

20. It's the surprise that counts - the great space-saving idea

And, on top of that, just look at it! It's so simple and yet fits so well in the room, making it so much more interesting. Every guest will be curious and intrigued by it. What makes this object look this good is the way the wood textures blend together, keeping the design looking unitary. The colors are different but don't vary much in tone and saturation. Too much contrast and you will lose the elegant, discreet effect.

20. IT'S THE SURPRISE THAT COUNTS - GREAT SPACE SAVING IDEA

21. Enhance the setup by  adding a contrasting background

What if the wall was white? Would the home bar look the same? Definitely not. The chalkboard wall now highlights a powerful contrast and by adding a respectable amount of light into the scene the designer created a very appealing basement bar.

21. ENHANCE THE SETUP BY  ADDING A CONTRASTING BACKGROUND

via Elle Decor

22. Get a smooth white cabinet for a discreet bar

22. GET A SMOOTH WHITE CABINET FOR A DISCREET BAR

23. Adding a stone pattern was never easier

23. ADDING A STONE PATTERN WAS NEVER EASIER

24. Polished drink trolley for great flexibility

24. POLISHED DRINK TROLLEY FOR GREAT FLEXIBILITY

25. Bar - pool table combination is a definite thrill

This one speaks for itself. All we can do is admire and dream of having a basement like this for ourselves. I know where I'd spent most of my time. Notice the difference in color and materials between the bar, the pool table, and the rest of the room and the way the bar is built into the wall, making it a special place in comparison to the rest of the room.

25. A BAR - POOL TABLE COMBINATION IS A DEFINITE THRILL

26. Wonderful all-black modern bar design

26. WONDERFUL ALL BLACK MODERN BAR DESIGN

via  KraftMaid

27. Applying a different texture makes the bar stand out

27. APPLYING A DIFFERENT TEXTURE MAKES THE BAR STAND OUT

28. Combine wood and marble for exquisite results

28. COMBINE WOOD AND MARBLE FOR EXQUISITE RESULTS

29. Add unique details for exceptional and personal designs

If you think about it, most people have access to the same materials and ideas as you. The designs can be very different of course but if you really want to personalize your bar you'll have to infuse your own personality. Something that was invented and, even better, created by you.

29. ADD UNIQUE DETAILS FOR EXCEPTIONAL AND PERSONAL DESIGNS

30. Amazing combination of wood, marble, metal, and light

This design is in a league of its own. Can it get better than this? Maybe yours will. The designer has definitely put a lot of thought into it by choosing the right materials and proportions for each element. Analyze it and be inspired.

30. AMAZING COMBINATION OF WOOD, MARBLE, METAL AND LIGHT 30. AMAZING COMBINATION OF WOOD, MARBLE, METAL AND LIGHT

31. Crafty wooden bar embedded in the kitchen cabinet

31. CRAFTY WOODEN BAR EMBEDDED IN THE KITCHEN CABINET

32. Fill that unused corner with a cozy bar

32. FILL THAT UNUSED CORNER WITH A COZY BAR

33. No better way of storing the fancy wine collection

33. NO BETTER WAY OF STORING THE FANCY WINE COLLECTION

34. Ingenious drink storage solution

34. INGENIOUS DRINK STORAGE SOLUTION

via heidipiron.com

35. An all-white classy design

35. AN ALL WHITE CLASSY DESIGN

36. Awesome pipe design for storing wine bottles

This is what we mean by one-of-a-kind ideas that can personalize your home bar and make it special. You might have to put a lot of thought into finding the right idea but your bar will be the only one fitted with it.

36. AWESOME PIPE DESIGN FOR STORING WINE BOTTLES

37. Fresh bar design idea for a great relaxed atmosphere

It's all about the atmosphere that you wish to create. After all, that's the part that the visitors feel, and experience the most. Not everybody will notice the details or the color matching match but everybody will remember the way it made them feel.

37. FRESH BAR DESIGN IDEA FOR A GREAT RELAXED ATMOSPHERE

via petitepassport.com

38. A secret bar for the spy in you

38. A SECRET BAR FOR THE SPY IN YOU

39. Add epic juicy-unique details

39. ADD EPIC JUICY-UNIQUE DETAILS

Your basement bar can have small epic details incorporated, unique details that will grant it authenticity and memory.

40. Build a frame for increased notability 

There are several aspects that make this example brilliant. First of all, there's a combination of materials. Not just the right types but the right kind. Perhaps using the same dark wood for the horizontal glass supports would have looked good as well but by adding a third texture, the material becomes so much more luminous and charming. Secondly, there's the way the bar was built, not in the middle of the wall but in a special area that marks its position and makes it more noticeable, important, and special. Thirdly, there's the lighting that makes the whole feel welcoming and inviting.

40. BUILD A FRAME FOR INCREASED NOTABILITY 

41. Add colored lights for great special effects

41. ADD COLORED LIGHTS FOR GREAT SPECIAL EFFECTS

42. Little details, big design

42. LITTLE DETAILS, BIG DESIGN

43. Add a darts board to your bar 

Sometimes a drink isn't enough and you ought to combine it with another activity like watching a football game or playing something. Add a little flavor to your room with a dedicated dartboard area for a better atmosphere.

43. ADD A DARTS BOARD TO YOUR BAR 

The designs above are covering an extraordinary range of designs, from small tricks to immense bars, they ought to inspire the individual to pursue the things that they love, things that they really like, from a good beer and a darts game up to a sophisticated cocktails, art venues, and classical music.

How are you using your space? We would love to hear from you!

Related Articles

8 Best Basement Cement Floor Paints

11 Best Paint For Concrete Walls In Basements 

11 Ideas for Basement Kitchens and Kitchenettes

43 Super Cool Bar Top Ideas to Realize

43 Insanely Cool Basement Bar Ideas for Your Home

The best way to soundproof a room is to use soundproofing materials and techniques along with sound absorbers like acoustic foam, acoustic panels, wall hangings, and furniture. Here it’s important to note that using sound absorbent materials alone is not enough, as they can’t guarantee actual soundproofing.

Getting time alone with your thoughts is a luxury that most people fail to enjoy because of unwanted outdoor noise. To avoid such situations and make your home a safe space to relax and reenergize, consider soundproofing the rooms in your house. 

Today's guide looks at some popular techniques for soundproofing a room to help you live comfortably. Most of these are DIY methods, and you won't need many resources. 

Cheapest Ways to Soundproof a Room

© Homesthetics - Sayok Das

Soundproofing Basics

Usually, people think that the best way to soundproof a room is to block sound waves, but an effective technique to cut out unwanted noise is to absorb sound. To absorb noise in your apartment, you can implement one or more of the following methods -

  • Hanging acoustic panels to soundproof walls
  • Sound absorbing foam
  • Soundproofing curtains
  • Sound-blocking blankets over the bedroom door and other entry points

For the best results, it's important to install the sound-absorbing materials directly in the path of the source to dampen noise. But for a detailed idea of how to soundproof a room from the inside, check out the following points:

© Homesthetics - Sayok Das

1. Source 

When thinking about how to soundproof a room, the most important consideration for absorbing sound waves is location. The reason it's recommended to soundproof a room from the inside is that it's easy. 

But you must determine whether you are trying to minimize sound coming from just one source, like a TV, or multiple locations. Once you identify the source, minimizing noise by diluting or muting it will be convenient.

2. Point Of Entry

Knowing the point of entry is essential to stop noise from entering the room in the first place. However, to block noise, you need to determine whether the incoming sound comes from adjacent rooms or through the existing walls. This is usually the case in shared apartments or condos having the same wall.

You must also soundproof exterior windows to prevent unwanted sounds from entering the room.

3. Reflection Point

Note that when the incoming sound enters the room, sound reflection occurs at an angle similar to the point of entry. That's why to cut out sound transmission, people sometimes opt for soundproofing walls at the end of the footboard and the entire wall of the headboard.

© Homesthetics - Sayok Das

When the angle of entry is a straight line, the sound waves will bounce between the headboard and footboard until they dissipate. Therefore, to absorb sound waves effectively, make sure to soundproof a room based on these 3 points.

How To Soundproof Different Parts Of A Room

For maximum sound reduction in your apartment, there's no need to opt for expensive construction work. I have listed some effective Do-It-Yourself techniques to help cut down on outside noise and enhance absorption (acoustics) within the room.

1. Commercial Acoustic Foam

While many people prefer using egg crate foam for sound absorption, it doesn't possess the required mass to do a good job. That's why I suggest using commercial acoustic foam, which looks similar but delivers better results to reduce noise pollution.

In a music recording studio, it's recommended to have a minimum foam thickness of 2 inches. So, anything less or similar to this should prove ideal for normal soundproofing. 

installing acoustic foam to increase soundproofing and noise reduction in a room
© Homesthetics - Sayok Das

Moreover, the pattern of the acoustic foam panels doesn't impact the effectiveness of acoustic treatment. You can shape the foam in multiple ways, such as egg crate, wavy, mushroom, wedges, and scored squares.

To choose the best soundproofing materials, you need to check the Noise Reduction Coefficient(NRC). It’s a scale between 0 and 1, with 1 being the best soundproofing. In some cases though, I’ve seen results showing higher than 1 for some materials.

This effectively says that the material absorbs more than 100% of the sound. However, these results are usually due to anomalies caused by sample size in the reverb chamber during the test (such as edge absorption). 

Depending on the purpose, such as soundproofing a room for watching movies or noise control for gaming, you should know that regular carpeting or foam doesn't absorb frequencies below 250 Hz. For such instances, it would be better to opt for a bass trap for lowering bass sounds, or you can install 4-inch foam.

2. Soundproofing Techniques For Windows

When you want to block sound from filtering into a room, I suggest cutting airborne noise by treating the windows first. Thanks to easy and cost-effective solutions, you can create a tight seal around windows to restrict sound coming from outside.

Although there are several options to choose from, thick curtains and drapes are ideal for soundproofing a room. It becomes easier to absorb sound when you hang heavy curtains with noise-canceling properties or opt for a blackout curtain. 

Most importantly, heavy curtains make it easier to trap energy and maintain a comfortable room temperature throughout the year. Some consumers further prefer weather-stripping and use adhesive plastic or rubber to form a tight seal around window borders.

The goal is to block gaps or holes, so air and sound do not get through. You can cut soundproof foam into the desired shape and thickness to fit it into the window frame.

3. Soundproofing Interior Doors

The easiest way to cut out the noise and absorb sound coming from adjacent rooms or outside is to install a soundproof door. But for more affordable solutions, there are several DIY methods you can try.

A. Hardwood Door Slab

You can fit the room with a slab door that's durable, thanks to the solid hardwood construction. There are also hollow units available on the market that are highly cost-effective, but they have poor noise reduction ability compared to hardwood, which is denser.

B. Door Sweep

Another popular method to soundproof wood doors is installing a door sweep made of plastic or rubber at the bottom of the door. This serves the dual purpose of reducing sound and providing insulation, or you can fit door jambs to dampen noise while improving energy efficiency.

C. Caulk

For stubborn sound, an extra layer of caulk around the door frame helps seal the crevasses and seams.

D. Door Seal

You can use weather-stripping to seal the edges around the door frame, so be careful to take accurate measurements and angle the edges where they meet the corners. Moreover, the seal won't cause obstructions when closing the door without compromising on the fit.

© Homesthetics - Sayok Das

Other than these techniques, you can install acoustic panels by following the steps mentioned below -

  • The first step is removing the hinges and doorknob
  • Install the foam panel with Impaler clips or an adhesive
  • Use a utility knife to trim the panels for sound masking
  • Check whether you can install the door hardware or trim further
  • Once you are satisfied, install the hardware
  • Check if the door opens and closes as usual

4. Soundproofing Floors

Are your downstairs neighbors complaining about a creaky floor or excessive noise? This might be because you have hardwood floors, so a simple technique would be to use commercial floor mats, underlayment, and liners to reduce impact noise.

Carpets and rugs also serve a similar purpose, but a better option is using natural rubber gym flooring, foam tiles, and mats. Such soundproofing methods are most common in home gyms and theaters, lowering disturbance for you and others.

Soundproofing Floors detailed layers for floors noise reduction
© Homesthetics - Sayok Das

Therefore, it proves convenient to dampen the low frequencies of a sound system or absorb vibration and noise coming from a treadmill. For enhanced soundproofing, you can even add a rug for the second layer of protection against impact noises.

The best part is that rugs and carpeting are budget options that don't require a lot of money or resources. All you need is to use them with a liner, for which soundproofing rug pads and carpet liners come in handy.

But for hard surfaces, installing an underlayment that matches the lamination, hardwood, or foam tiles would be best. However, installing them during a renovation or new construction work would be ideal.

5. Soundproofing Walls

One of the most important things to consider when blocking noise in a room is how to soundproof the existing wall. Compared to other soundproofing methods, absorbing noise through walls is more labor-intensive, especially when you have existing drywall.

But here are some easy methods you should know about -

A. Furniture

Make use of the existing furniture, such as a bookcase or large wardrobe, by pushing them against the wall after locating the source. Since sound absorption increases depending on the mass, using large furniture is ideal.

B. Sealant

A sealant proves useful for tackling minor noise problems, for which you can apply a water-based acoustic sealant to fill the gaps or cracks in walls. You must also use a product with a color similar to the wall to maintain the quality of the interior décor or choose a sealant that permits repainting.

C. Wallpaper

Most people may not be aware, but applying wallpaper is just as good as other soundproofing techniques. Several soundproofing wallpapers are available on the market made from sound-absorbent foam to minimize noise.

how to soundproof a room for free or cheaply with tapestry
© Homesthetics - Sayok Das

D. Tapestry

You can hang a decorative tapestry or rug on the walls like a thick blanket. This technique has been used since ancient times to soften impact noise, keep the interiors warm, and prevent echoes, it is a sure way to add sound absorption, soundproofing to a room cheaply, probably the only free way to soundproof a room.

E. Acoustic Panels

Acoustic panels and soundproofing go hand-in-hand, and they are easy to install, thanks to impaling clips or adhesives. But there are a few things you need to keep in mind before using wall panels -

  • Removing acoustic panels often requires repairing the wall
  • Adhesives can damage the drywall or paint, but the panels won't be affected
  • Impaling clips take longer to install but don't require much maintenance

hang acoustic panels to soundproof a room cheaply and easily
© Homesthetics - Sayok Das

I must mention that impaling clips are metal fasteners with a flat shape, accompanied by metal prongs to hold the foam and attach it to the wall. If needed, you can also apply foam to the screws sticking out of the walls.

Usually, using impaling clips means you must only patch holes in the walls. But prior to that, apply packing tape on the panels and walls to remove the foam before applying the adhesive again to the shiny surfaces.

Note that you may still face issues with noise pollution but using this installation technique will allow you to take down the panels hassle-free.

F. Insulation

One of the best ways to make a room soundproof is by adding insulation to the walls, which isn't as difficult as it may seem.

  • The first step is removing the drywall to expose the wall studs
  • You can then apply fiberglass insulation, cotton batt, or other material between the studs
  • The last step is replacing the drywall for sound insulation

G. Wall Frame

When you don't want to remove the drywall and reinstall it, you can add another drywall or wall frame to block the noise. This will make the room smaller but will provide a quality solution.

  • Fix the wall frame to the studs 
  • You can also add resilient channels or sound clips to the studs
  • Finally, apply a new layer of drywall over them.

For those who don't know, resilient channels are metal frames, providing greater control over sound absorption. 

6. Soundproofing Ceilings

Learning how to soundproof a room would be incomplete if you don't know how to treat the ceiling to reduce sound. But fixing ceilings is easier, thanks to insulation clouds and acoustic ceiling tiles available in multiple designs and colors to enhance the interior décor.

A. Acoustic Tiles

A simple yet highly functional solution for reducing noise is installing thick acoustic panels over the existing ceiling.

B. Cloud

A ceiling cloud is best suited for tall rooms, whereby the acoustic lining or canopy cuts out the excess noise. Moreover, given the shape of the hanging structure, it has the appearance of a cloud.

Given the multiple benefits of ceiling clouds, you will find them installed in recording studios. So, if professionals prefer to use them, you certainly can. However, once again, these will only absorb the sound, and not block it entirely from traveling across the walls.

C. Soundproofing During Construction

Most people don't think about soundproofing until later, but it never hurts to be proactive. Soundproofing during the construction stage is easier and reduces the hassle of making frequent alterations -

  • Before installing the ceiling, attach soundproofing material over the studs
  • Apply sealant to the gaps for maximum noise absorption
  • Install new drywall or patch the existing wall to cover the ceiling

7. Reducing Noise Reflection

Sometimes, the noise level increases in the entire room when you play music because it reflects off hard flooring and other surfaces. When sound bounces inside the room you need an absorbent material for sound masking the floor by reducing reflection. The thumb rule to go by is that for each doubling of absorption, the ambient sound levels will reduce by about 3dB.

So, cover the walls and ceilings with a soft material to muffle the sounds of barks, voices, or noise from a vacuum cleaner. This is where a shag rug for ceilings and rubber textile mats for the walls helps keep decibel levels down inside a room.

Most Affordable Ways To Soundproof A Room

Most Affordable Ways To Soundproof A Room

I have highlighted several ways how to soundproof a room, but here are some affordable solutions that you can consider.

1. Window Treatments And Curtains

Curtains provide privacy while blocking outside noise, for which thick drapery and hanging plush prove useful. Moreover, they further absorb ambient noise inside a room for greater comfort.

2. Area Rugs

Area rugs are especially useful in main living rooms and or when there is much noise in an apartment. You can also add a pad under thick rugs to mask the sound further without compromising the available space.

3. Upholstered Furniture

The more upholstered furniture you have, the higher the chances of a quiet room because there are more areas for sound absorption. I have seen that sound doesn't bounce much in such rooms, so make sure to add plush pillows and thick blankets.

4. Background Noise

Even though it may feel counterproductive, there is some logic to this madness. Background noises are highly effective and affordable in making a room soundproof.

If there's something else you can listen to, such as white noise or instrumental music, you can mute or drown out other annoying sounds. 

A. Sound Masking

Many people have sound machines that can produce various background noises, like rain, sounds of nature, or white noise; this is known as masking. But this is a temporary fix since such machines don't eliminate the noise entirely.

B. Air Purifier

Air purifiers help remove impurities from the air and produce enough noise to drown out surrounding sounds. You will need a medium-sized unit for the best results so that noise from the other room doesn't filter in.

C. Fans

Box fans, ceiling fans, and modular fans increase airflow and add white noise inside the room to dampen other sounds. Plus, you won't have to choose an expensive or fancy unit since the primary purpose is to generate more background noise.

How To Soundproof A Room Conclusion

How To Soundproof A Room Conclusion

After reading my guide, you can choose multiple techniques to soundproof a room effectively. 

But based on your living situation, everyone may not enjoy similar results. For instance, if you live in a rented apartment, it might be difficult to get permission for construction or changes to the interior makeup of the room.

You can still use fans or sound machines to cut out unwanted noise. However, if you want a more permanent solution, ask the building contractor to add insulation to the walls before installing the drywall.

So, take your pick and make your home sound free with any of these easy methods!

Tip

When soundproofing a room, don’t forget to install air vents since they guarantee comfort and safety when working for extended periods. To make room for ductwork, you will need to measure a 6-inch hole in the wall for quiet ventilation.

To wallpaper around windows, start by measuring the wall and cutting the wallpaper to fit, allowing extra for trimming. Clean and prime the wall, and mark guidelines with a plumb line. Apply the wallpaper, smooth it out, and let it overlap with the window’s edges. Make diagonal cuts at the corners and adhere the flaps to the window's sides, trimming any excess with a sharp knife. Use high-quality adhesive and be precise with placement to ensure a seamless look. Remove any residual adhesive immediately.

Wallpaper, a decorative material sold in rolls, is used to adorn the interior walls of various buildings and is adhered with wallpaper paste. It can serve as plain lining paper to prime walls for painting or to mask imperfections, offering a refined surface. Wallpaper may be textured, like Anaglypta, bear regular repeating patterns, or, more rarely, portray a unique design spanned across multiple sheets. The smallest tiling rectangle to complete the pattern is termed the pattern repeat. However, the application can become intricate around windows due to the presence of sills, overhangs, and reveals, requiring precision and care to ensure a seamless finish.

What is a Window Sill?

A window sill is the horizontal base of a window frame, integral to the window structure, projecting outward from the wall at the bottom of the window, often serving to hold objects and protect the building fabric from water penetration, thereby playing a crucial role in water management and structural integrity.

What is a Window Overhang?

A window overhang, an architectural element found inside or outside a window, serves dual purposes. Externally, it shields and diverts rain, protecting the structure. Internally, it blends utility and aesthetics, concealing fixtures or hosting lights, adding an artistic flair to functionality.

What is a Window Reveal?

A window reveal is a structural element, it's the side of the window aperture, a surface between the outer wall surface and the window frame, highlighting the thickness of the wall. It plays a crucial role in the aesthetic finish of the window, providing depth and shadow, and enhancing architectural detailing, and it often interacts with light to create varying visual effects, subtly merging functionality and visual appeal.

How to Hang Wallpaper Around Windows

Recessed Window

1. Position the wallpaper length above the window, allowing an overhang into the window recess. Affix and smooth it several inches above the window recess top.

2. Execute a horizontal cut above the window reveal's edge.

3. Make a corresponding cut below the window sill, folding the paper to conceal the reveal’s side.

4. Use a smoothing tool or brush to adhere and smooth the paper onto the reveal.

5. Utilize a utility knife and a guide to eliminate excess paper.

6. Measure, cut, and attach the subsequent wallpaper piece to address the overhang and above wall. Install another strip for the wall below the window.

7. On the window's opposite side, adapt the wallpaper around the other reveal, replicating procedures in steps 1-5.

8. For the unpapered upper corners of the window overhang, measure, cut, and align an 'off cut' piece with an extra 20mm at each end, ensuring pattern continuity.

9. Secure and streamline the paper above the window recess, overlapping existing paper, and ensuring pattern alignment. Execute a double cut, remove the underlying layer, fix the new strip, and fold it onto the overhang, trimming the excess.

10. Repeat for any other areas of overhang needing wallpaper, ensuring precise application and trimming around the window areas.

Wallpapering Around a Flush Window

Wallpapering around a flush window is notably a less complex procedure. This guide will walk you through the streamlined process:

1. Position your wallpaper strategically above the window, smoothing and securing it to the wall, ceasing just above the window frame.

2. Remove the majority of the surplus paper in front of the window, retaining 1-2 inches of wallpaper protruding over the frames at the top, bottom, and side of the window.

3. Align the wallpaper onto the frame and employ your finger to discern the outer corner of the frame.

4. Implement a 45° angled cut into this corner, facilitating the accommodation of the paper around the external edges of the frame.

5. Affix the paper firmly to the wall, nesting it where the frame and wall converge, using a smoothing brush or a plastic smoother.

6. Trim the peripheral wallpaper around the frame utilizing a wallpaper edge trimmer and a utility knife or alternatively, score the wallpaper in the intersection of the frame and wall with scissors, peel back, and discard the excess.

7. Adjust the edges of the wallpaper back into their designated positions.

8. Progress on all sides until the wallpaper application around the window is impeccably accomplished.

 Types of Wallpaper

Vinyl wallpapers, known for durability, are a top pick for kitchens and bathrooms, including variants like enduring solid vinyl and appealing vinyl-coated. Non-woven wallpapers are acclaimed for breathability and eco-friendliness, ideal for living areas and bedrooms due to their mold resistance and easy removal. Textile wallpapers imbue luxury with their fabric finish in low-traffic, dry areas, and traditional paper wallpapers, diverse and affordable, excel in environments with minimal moisture.

Diversity in wallpaper types extends to flocked wallpapers, offering velvety elegance; foil wallpapers, reflecting modern metallic brilliance; and bamboo wallpapers, infusing spaces with natural, sustainable charm. To further broaden the selection, there are also grasscloth wallpapers for those seeking a textured, organic appeal, and mural wallpapers that turn walls into visual narratives, each contributing to the expansive and varied world of wallpaper types, catering to a myriad of aesthetic and functional preferences.

Concluding, the variety in wallpaper types is extensive, each offering a unique blend of aesthetic and functional benefits, whether it’s for a bathroom, kitchen, or a cozy living room. So, what type of unique wallpaper are you considering? Whether your windows are recessed or flush, which wallpaper will you choose to breathe new life into your spaces today? We’d love to hear about your selections and experiences!

For those who are working professionally with tools or on a smaller scale as a home project, the rotary tool has now become a staple. 

With all the attachments that a rotary tool offers, no wonder they are favored as a multi-purpose tool. The compact machines pack a punch to overcome any challenge you may come across while working on a project. 

A well-known and respected brand for its rotary tools, Dremel offers two unique models of their Dremel rotary tool-the 4300 and 4000. Taking these model names at face value, it seems that one is just an upgraded version of the other. 

However, while both models have their similarities, there are also unique features to each that merit a closer look. These differences can make or break the choice between the 4300 and 4000, so which is the right option for you? Find out! 

Dremel 4300 Vs 4000

Dremel 4300

A rotary tool with a 1.8-amp motor that can move at speeds of 5,000-35,000 rpm, the 4300 is powerful and versatile. The kit is bundled with a number of attachments for the 3-jaw chuck attached to the Dremel. 

Using a 3-jaw chuck design has allowed the 4300 to have attachments without the need to use a collet. It is a new version of the previous collet lock designs, maintaining durability and ease in switching between attachments for the Dremel. 

Utilizing a 360-degree ergonomic design is a staple of the Dremel brand, and the 4300 is not lacking in this department. With an all-around comfortable grip, it places the controls at your fingertips in a comfortable spot. 

Now, when it comes to the kits available for this model, there are currently two in the market: the 9/64 and the 5/40. This means one kit has nine attachments with 64 accessories or five attachments with 40 accessories. 

The number of attachments and accessories in a kit may not always equate to a superior kit. So, it is essential to know what these attachments and accessories are and whether they would be helpful in your projects. 

Some useful accessories that the 4300 comes with are listed below. 

  1. Shield Attachment

This attachment protects you from any debris that may be thrown by the rotary drill. It is a great safety feature to have when working with dangerous materials that can cause harm. 

  1. High-Speed Cutter

A standard accessory when it comes to rotary drills - the high-speed cutter is a circular cutting wheel that can break down materials with minimal overheating. Additionally, the 4300 comes with cut-off wheels, a multi-purpose spiral cutting bit, and a lock-wood cutting wheel. 

  1. Cleaning Brush

An underrated accessory to have, a cleaning brush is helpful in cleaning the material being worked on. Be it rust removal or just a polishing finish; the cleaning brush accessories can bring a higher quality finish to your projects. 

  1. Sanding/Grinding Bit with Guide

Another common accessory, the sanding, and grinding bits make wearing away material a more accessible experience with a handheld machine like the rotary drill.

These bits are available in a range of various sizes to provide precision or a larger working area where it is needed. The range of bits included goes from ½” 60-grit sandpaper to a ⅜” aluminum oxide grinding stone. 

Additionally, Dremel has included a guide that will enhance the precision you have while sanding or grinding. Utilizing this with the speed-control of the 4300 and any material you have will be easy to mold and wear away. 

  1. Flexible Shaft and Detailer’s Grip

The 4300 has excellent flexibility right off the bat to work at different angles. To extend this flexibility even further, the shaft can be extended to reach tighter areas for detailed work. 

On the topic of detailing, the detailer’s grip will ease the comfort and stability when using the 4300 to have a steady hand. This is essential for the precise work required when detailing a piece. 

  1. Tool Sharpener

Having the ability to touch up the included bits in the kit is a helpful touch. By sharpening the bits, you can extend their lifespan and save money by replacing them when they get dull. What’s more, there is a specific sharpener accessory to touch up your gardening tools. 

  1. Pivot Light

Arguably the standout feature of the 4300, the included pivot light is a newer addition to rotary drills from Dremel. This light can illuminate darker areas to increase precision and navigate the drill better. 

Additionally, the light can rotate around the drill, so it never obstructs your view in tight spaces. It is built into the drill itself, so there is no need to attach or remove it; it is always ready to go.

Drawbacks of the 4300

While the Dremel 4300 has many great features, it is not without its share of drawbacks. They may be few, but they are still worth noting to ensure a more informed decision can be made on which model to pick up. 

One issue with the 4300 that some may have is the storage case provided for the drill and attachments. If compact storage space is a requisite for you, then this model may disappoint.

With a hard storage case, it does feel large when carrying around. This may not be a deal-breaker for many, but it can become a hassle to lug the bulky case around for those who need to move the drill regularly. However, it does offer the benefit of protection and more space to keep the bits and drill organized. 

Another aspect that may deter some from the 4300 is the price point it comes at. It is definitely an investment, similar to any tool purchase. While the price may be steep for some, the value that it brings in performance is worth the expense. 

Dremel 4000

The Dremel 4000 is admittedly an older model of the 4300, yet it still holds up in many ways to its newer counterpart.

It has many features that laid the foundation for the development of the 4300, such as the 5,000-35,000 variable speed RPM. On the other hand, some features are a slight step down from the 4300, for example, the 1.6 amps of power. 

Furthermore, the attachment set-up on the 4000 model is an older collet lock system. This collet lock is more than adequate and ensures the attached bits are locked into the drill securely. An EZ twist nose cap with this collet lock makes removing and attaching bits and accessories easier to access. 

Sporting an older system of attachment, the 4000 model offers a wider variety of bits and accessories. It comes with the standard attachments in the included kit, such as a right-angle attachment, shield guard, dust blower, and more. 

If there is a particular bit or attachment you need for a specific project or material you are working with, a number of different kits are available. A specialized kit for cutting may not have the same bits as the carving and engraving kit. 

These specialized kits may not have many attachments and bits. However, they have been curated by Dremel to provide all the necessary accessories you may need for a specific project or job.

Four kits are available for the Dremel 4000, with a varying number of attachments and specific catering to specific tasks for the rotary drill-a 2/30 kit, 3/34, 4/34, and a 6/50 kit are available. The first number being the number of attachments, and the second being how many accessories are included. 

There is a customized kit with the attachments you need to get the job done no matter the job. Otherwise, the all-purpose kit has a range of bits to cater to any general task you may have for the rotary drill. 

An ergonomic handle gives the 4000 rotary drills a comfortable fit in the hand even when used extensively or at various angles. The button layout has been made to keep the power and speed control separate. As a result, the adjustment of the drill’s speed can be made precisely and with little to no thought. 

Another great feature is the ability to replace the motor brushes. By replacing the worn-out brush in the drill with a new one, the life of the 4000 rotary drills can be extended for many years. 

Drawbacks of the 4000

As the Dremel 4000 is an older model than the 4300, there are bound to be a number of drawbacks that were improved upon in the newer model. 

One such drawback is the collet lock attachment system. While it is able to accommodate a wide variety of bits and attachments, the collet lock is of a fixed size. This indicates that smaller or larger bits may not be able to be securely attached. 

In order to fit bits of a different size than the collet lock, the entire lock must be removed and replaced with an adequately sized collet lock for the attachment. The whole process can be a hassle, especially when working with a number of differently-sized bits in succession. 

Another area that the 4000 model suffers in is the air circulation within the drill. When used for an extended period, there is a considerable heat spike. The temperature is not so high as to be uncomfortable when holding the drill, but it is significant enough to be worrisome. 

Of course, this rise in temperature occurs only if the drill is left running under strain for a more extended amount of time. For light users of the 4000 rotary drill, they should face no issues with overheating. 

Comparing Dremel 4300 Vs 4000

Looking at both these rotary drills side by side, they share many similarities. Dremel has kept features that worked well in the 4000 model in their newer 4300 model. Similarly, there are some features that were improved upon or entirely new added to the 4300. 

  1. Build

The saying “Don’t fix it if it isn’t broken” is very relevant in the case of the Dremel rotary drills. Both the 4000 and the 4300 have the same ergonomic design for a secure grip no matter how you hold the drill. 

Admittedly, the 4300 has a slightly thinner build than the 4000, but it is not a drastic change in design. This design choice makes the 4300 more comfortable to hold for extended periods of time. 

  1. Attachment System

An area where there is a drastic overhaul of the 4000 design in the 4300 is the attachment system design. With the traditional system of a collet lock, the 4000 was prone to regular dismantling to accommodate larger or smaller bits and accessories in the drill. 

What’s more, it became necessary to purchase a separate differently sized collet lock just to use some attachment. The extra expense, along with the specialized accessories, can be a hassle just for a unique task or job. 

Of course, switching out a collet lock for another size is not a regular occurrence but rather for specific tasks. Attaching and removing bits is made easy with the EZ twist nose cap system, giving fast transitions between different attachments while keeping them securely fixed.

Comparatively, the new three-jaw chuck design in the 4300 improved the collet lock system by removing the need for additional tools to change the attachments. There is no need to buy different-sized collets just to attach a specific bit to the drill with the 4300.

The three-jaw chuck design saves on not only money but also time and energy spent attaching certain bits. This can be especially useful for projects requiring different bits and accessories.

Furthermore, the strength and security that the three-jaw chuck design brings in securing attachments is on par with that of the collet lock system; easily a notable upgrade from the 4000.

  1. Diversity of Attachments

Moving from the attachment systems to the attachments themselves, there are differences in the kits available for each model. As the attachment systems were overhauled in the 4300, the bits had to be reconfigured to accommodate the three-jaw chuck design. 

Not only is the attachment design different, but the number of attachments in the kits has changed. In the 4000 model, the largest kit available is the 6/50 kit with 50 accessories and six attachments. 

Comparing this to the 4300’s largest kit available, the 9/64 kit with 64 accessories and nine attachments. When it comes to Dremel rotary drills, the more available attachments, the more versatile your drill will be. 

Of course, this is just an illustration as not everyone will be using every single attachment; you should get a kit that caters to the purpose you need the drill for. Any extra accessories included in the kit will become a safety net should you need them in future projects. 

  1. Power

Looking at the power of both models, there is not much of a difference on paper. The 4000 comes in at 1.6 amps, while the 4300 sports 1.8 amps. Despite the difference in power output, both models are capable of variable speeds from 5,000 to 35,000 rpm.  

This incremental difference may not seem like much, but there is a noticeable difference in performance when each is pushed to its limit. 

With a higher power output, the 4300 can operate at higher speeds for heavy-duty jobs for an extended amount of time. As opposed to the 4000 model, which is prone to overheat when used extensively for more extended amounts of time.

Due to the complex nature of the many jobs a rotary drill is used for, this slight difference in power between the 4300 and 4000 can make all the difference in getting a quality result. 

  1. Noise Level

A small difference that may be inconsequential to some is the noise level at which both models operate. If noise is a factor that you need to consider when deciding on a model, the 4300 is the better option. 

The older 4000 operates with average noise levels for a rotary drill, but the airflow is not as ideal as the 4300. This causes the drill to make more noise compared to the 4300, which is quieter and runs cooler.

  1. LED Swivel Light

Perhaps the most significant difference between both models is the built-in LED light in the 4300. This is a newer addition to the Dremel rotary drill design and brings an added level of efficiency when using the rotary drill. 

By illuminating dark areas, the LED light can help guide the drill through tight spaces. Furthermore, it is battery-powered, so even if the drill becomes unplugged, the light will still function. 

As it is built into the drill, the LED light can pivot around the tip to change the angle of the light on the piece being worked on. This is especially useful for close-up detailing work where the shadow of the rotary drill can obstruct the view. 

The rotation of the built-in light is a feature that is lacking in the 4000 model. While not a deal-breaker, it is still a helpful feature to have and is a standout feature for the 4300. 

  1. Value 

Pricing of each model is where the differences between features are made evident of whether it is worth it or not. The 4300, being a newer model, is priced higher than the older 4000; however, it does not require additional purchases of different collets to attach various sizes of accessories and bits. 

Depending on what task the rotary drill is being used for, the actual value for money varies. If all the features are utilized extensively, then the investment can be worth the money. However, it is not necessary to splurge if you are not going to use the unique features offered by the 4300. 

Choosing the Right Model for You

When choosing between the 4300 and 4000 models, there is little that sets them apart from each other. They both sport a six-foot cord and a comfortable ergonomic handle. Furthermore, the rotation speed is the same in both models. 

To ensure the most informed decision can be made, different aspects of where each rotary drill model shines or falls short must be considered. Other aspects such as price and convenience are a consideration to be taken into account. 

  1. Unique Features

Having certain features in your rotary drill can change the entire experience you have working with it. If these features are what you need to elevate the quality of work or just to ease convenience, then the newer 4300 model is the clear winner.

It has an in-built pivot LED light that can help to guide your bit while working in dark areas. Not only useful for dark spots, but it is also a helpful feature to have to keep a clear view of what you are working on.  Better visibility increases the performance capability.

Additionally, the newer three-chuck attachment system is an upgrade from the 4000’s collet lock system. It saves time and energy when using multiple bits by removing the need to constantly change collets to fit different-sized bits. 

  1. Power

For those who require more power from their rotary drill, the 4300 is the ideal choice. Having a 1.8 amp power output, this is only slightly higher than the 4000’s 1.6 amp power output.

Both rotary drills work at a speed of 5,000 to 35,000 rpm, so the performance of either model is dependent upon the power source. The slightly higher power output in the 4300 allows it to work at the maximum rpm for an extended period of time with no heating issues. 

As the 4000 model has a slightly weaker power output than the 4300, it struggles when performing high-speed jobs consistently. This draw on power causes the drill to heat up considerably. 

From this, it is evident just how far a little extra power goes in the performance of the drill. This extra power can go a long way when working with heavy-duty materials or for longer work sessions. 

  1. Attachments

Due to the multi-purpose nature of the rotary drill, any specialized tasks can be performed by the same tool, just with a different tip. The variety and number of attachments available can determine the range of tasks the drill is capable of. 

On one hand, the new three-chuck attachment system in the 4300 allows for a faster transition between attachments with no extra tools necessary. On the other hand, there are currently only two kits available. However, the largest kit has a wide range of accessories included, more so than the largest 4000 kits available.

As it is an older model, the 4000 uses the old collet lock attachment system, requiring additional purchases of different-sized collets to accommodate specific specialized attachments. However, with this older system, you do get a wider variety of bits and accessories to choose from. Although, the time and energy that is needed to switch between attachments are considerably more significant in the 4000 model. 

  1. Comfort and Convenience

Using a rotary drill for extended periods of time can be a strain on your hand. The build of both the 4300 and 4000 models is almost identical, save for a slightly slimmer body in the 4300. This can be less strain on yourself when working on a big project; however, this difference in size is not immediately apparent. 

Additionally, the attachments to aid in comfort and convenience, such as the detailer’s grip or the flex shaft, must be considered. These can negate any minor differences in the size of the actual rotary drill. The comfort of using the drill with either of these attachments can change the experience completely. 

  1. Pricing

The price tag of tools can be on the expensive side, so every purchase becomes an investment. As an investment, the value for money is a crucial aspect to be taken into consideration, especially for those on a budget.

Between the 4300 and the 4000, the 4300 is the more steeply-priced option of the two. Of course, this does not make the 4000 model inferior in any way. It is just a matter of whether or not you consider the added features of the 4300 worth the extra bit of cash or not.

  1. Safety Attachments

Included in the rotary drill kit is a basic set of safety attachments to protect you and the drill from injury. However, when working with certain materials, you may need to purchase additional attachments explicitly made for that material. 

It is important to take the necessary precautions to protect yourself from potential harm. Look into what safety attachments are available for a rotary drill model, and if it is suitable for the materials you are working with.

Which attachment kit should you buy?

Every rotary drill will have a general-purpose kit with a range of bits and accessories for every job you may need the tool for. As these are just the basic attachments, they are sufficient for the general public to use with no problems.

However, if you are working with a specific material or require a certain set of bits for a particular job, Dremel offers specialized kits. They are made with a particular task in mind. Be it cutting, sanding, engraving, or cleaning; there is a kit for every possible use of a rotary drill.

They include more detailed tools you would need to get the job done. It is a simple matter of finding the kit that relates to your specific task and attaching the bits to the drill.

Can the Dremel cut through metal, glass, and ceramic?

To answer this question briefly, yes, it is able to cut through these materials as both models have a motor capable of handling the strain.

However, special bits must be used in order to cut through glass and ceramic. Additionally, safety attachments must be used when working with glass and ceramic as they can cause injury or damage to the drill.

How do you use the collet lock to change attachments?

The standard collet lock mechanism can accommodate ⅛” shanks but sometimes falls short or is too large for certain bits and accessories. To remove the bit from the collet, simply twist the EZ nose and pull the bit free.

To replace the entire collet for holding a different sized attachment, press the button on the front of the rotary drill to release the EZ nose. Then, use a wrench to remove the entire collet and replace it with the appropriately sized collet and screw the nose back on.

Dremel 4300 Vs 4000 Conclusion - The Winner

After considering all the features that make each rotary drill model unique, what would be the best choice to get the most value for money?

Between the 4300 and the 4000 model from Dremel, the safe choice would be to go for the 4300 model. Although it has a higher price point, the unique features that it offers make up for the price tag.

That’s not all; the convenience of having the pivot light illuminate the surface, as well as the extra power, is what sets it apart from the 4000.

On the other hand, if a simple rotary drill with light use is what you require, or if you are on a budget, then the 4000 model is still a great option. It offers a more extensive selection of specialized accessories as it uses the older collet lock attachment system.

Both models do what they were designed to do. So, purchasing either will undoubtedly be a great decision to add to your workshop’s collection of tools.

After extensive testing, my top pick is the Frigidaire Window-Mounted Room Air Conditioner because of its ability to cool a 300 square feet room quickly and efficiently. Even the Midea AC and SereneLife AC are reliable options for cooling small to medium-sized spaces. 

The perfect air conditioner is energy efficient, operates quietly, has a high cooling capacity, and is affordably priced. 

But do all air conditioners on the market fit this description? Certainly not! And finding energy efficiency 8000 BTU (British Thermal Units) air conditioners among the zillions of AC units is tricky. 

To save you from investing in the wrong AC unit, I bring to you the 14 tried-and-tested 8000 BTU ACs. Dive in! 

Best 8000 BTU Air Conditioner Review

1. Frigidaire Window-Mounted Room Air Conditioner – Best With Multi-Speed Fan

Having been in the industry for more than a century, Frigidaire is known for pumping out premium-quality home electronic products. And its window-mounted room air conditioner is no exception. 

On this window air conditioner, you can adjust the fan speed to 3 different settings to cool the room quickly and efficiently. In addition to that is the programmable timer integrated into the air conditioning unit that allows homeowners to turn it on or off in half-hour intervals for energy savings. 

What’s more, this window AC unit maintains the preset temperature in every cycle, so you can rest assured that your space will remain comfortable. And if you like catnapping in the afternoon or catching forty winks during the evening, its “sleep” mode will help you sleep better. When set to “sleep” mode, the temperature slowly increases, allowing you to stay cool, no matter how hot it is outside. 

Like modern window AC units, this air conditioner, which doubles as a dehumidifier, is energy star-certified, meaning it will save on energy costs. 

As for adjusting the temperature, this 8000 BTU (British Thermal Unit) window air conditioner comes with a remote control, so you can increase or decrease the air temperature with ease. Using the remote, you can also adjust the fan speed from your comfort zone without having to get up. 

Besides, its adjustable side panels are extendable, meaning this efficient unit can be installed on all types of windows. Another thing that I like about this AC unit is that the filter is easy to clean, meaning you can wash it to clean dust from it.

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 55 dB

2. Midea EasyCool Window Air Conditioner – Best With Intuitive LED Display

Supplied in multiple options, the Midea EasyCool Window Air Conditioner claims to reduce energy consumption, and its energy star status testifies to the same. 

Unlike most window air conditioners, it comes with multiple custom settings that make it more energy efficient. Like, I found that this AC unit has an in-built EasyTimer that allows me to program my temperature preferences. And if someday I run the unit for long hours, I simply switch to EcoSave mode– as a result, the room is cooled without consuming too much electricity.  

Compared to traditional air conditioners, this unit doubles as a dehumidifier, and that’s what makes it an excellent option for humid spaces. To reduce humidity levels in any space, all I do is switch to dehumidifier mode, and it sucks up moisture from the indoor air. 

Unlike the Frigidaire air conditioner, the Midea unit has an intuitive LED display for switching between modes, adjusting temperatures and setting the time. But I like using the remote control that comes with the unit because of its convenience. 

Like most newer window air conditioners, the air filter of this unit is removable and reusable. So, whenever the “clean filter” warning is displayed, you can remove it and get rid of pet hairs and dust by washing it. 

I found that this AC isn’t easy to install; only people who are DIY experts will be able to mount it with ease. Installation instructions may appear simple, but they aren’t easy to follow. Although the brand sends all accessories with the unit, the screwdriver isn’t supplied. 

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 110 Volts | Noise Level: 55 dB

3. SereneLife Portable Air Conditioner – Best Space-Saving Unit For Small Spaces

For someone who has to keep changing his lodging, portable AC units like the SereneLife Portable Air Conditioner make for an excellent pick. 

With 900W-rated cooling power, this portable AC unit is efficient enough to cool 215+ square feet of space– that is why I prefer using it in my office space. Although it isn’t as energy efficient as window units, it has a 9.8 seasonal energy efficiency ratio, which is feasible. 

Like window ACs, it comes with 3 operating modes– cooling, dehumidifier, and fan. For maximum air circulation, it also features an automatic swing mode with a moving wind vent. At times when my office space becomes humid, I switch to dehumidifier mode, which helps reduce excessive humidity from the room. 

Despite being a floor-standing AC, it boasts a space-saving design, thanks to its sleek and lightweight body. Equipped with rolling wheels, it allows for easy portability and allows me to move this unit from the garage space to the living room with ease. 

Towards the top of the unit is a digital control panel with touch buttons for turning the unit on/off, setting the timer, and adjusting fan speed settings and temperature. For user convenience, remote control is supplied in the package, and you can adjust all the functions with the touch of a button. 

Since it’s a freestanding unit, installation won’t be much of a hassle– be sure to check the instruction manual after unboxing the unit. Although you can use it in your bedroom while sleeping, keep in mind it is noisier than most other units. 

Floor Area: 215+ square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 120 Volts | Noise Level: 55 dB

4. LG Window-Mounted Air Conditioner – Best With Auto Restart Function

The next entrant on my list is this window-mounted air conditioner from LG. This multinational South Korean electronics company has managed to earn loyal customers because of top-notch products. 

Starting with its simple yet innovative design, this air conditioning unit boasts a modern profile with air louvers placed towards the top. Besides that is a simple control panel that allows easy adjustment of the temperature and fan speed. 

Underneath the control panel and air louvers is the air filter that traps dust and pet hairs to keep your indoor air clean and fresh. Once in a while, I take it off and wash it because it is reusable, so you can also do the same. 

This LG window air conditioner comes with an installation kit and easy-to-follow instructions, so installation won’t be challenging. 

This Energy Star-certified air conditioning unit has 3 cooling and fan speeds, so you can customize the cooling experience. In addition, it has a 12.1 combined energy efficiency ratio, meaning you’ll save a lot despite running this unit. 

Among the various features, I like the 24-hour on/off timer that allows me to turn it on and off the AC as per my needs. And when in low mode, I noticed that the air conditioning unit barely made any noise. Another interesting feature is the Auto Restart which automatically turns the unit on after it has been shut because of a power outage.

Like other window air conditioners, it comes with a remote control that makes it easy to adjust the settings without leaving your couch or bed. 

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 53 dB

5. TOSOT Window Air Conditioner – Best With Adjustable Air Vents

Delivering unique and innovative products since 1991, Tosot is yet another brand that excels in air conditioners. 

What made me pick the Tosot window air conditioner was its quiet operation, as it has a maximum noise output of 42 dB and an improved drainage outlet. Although you may hear slight noises of fan flinging water, you can minimize that by removing the improved drain plug. 

Mounting this window air conditioner is fairly easy because everything from side panels and foam is included in the package. Also, no technical jargon is used in the instructions; in fact, they are written in simple language. 

Right after installation, when I turned the AC on, the room was filled with cold air within a few minutes. So, it’s safe to say that this window air conditioner is highly efficient and can be used in bedrooms, apartments, dorms, and living rooms that are approximately 350 square feet. 

Above the air filter sits slanted air louvers that can be adjusted to blow cool air up to 20 feet. I prefer keeping the louvers above the head to cool a room quickly.

This quietest air conditioner is also energy efficient as it has an energy efficiency ratio (EER) of 12.0 and is Energy Star-certified.

As a bonus, this window air conditioner comes with a few bonus features that you won’t find in other ACs. Like, the filter reminder will remind you to clean the filter after operating for 250 hours. Just keep the remote safe because the unit can only be fully controlled with the remote control. 

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 42 dB

6. TCL Home Series Window Air Conditioner – Best 8-Way Directional Cooling Unit

Designed with the latest technology, TCL aims to deliver meaningful experiences. And its Home Series Window Air Conditioner is one such offering from the brand that helps you stay cool no matter the weather. 

Although it is an 8000 BTU window air conditioner, it has robust cooling power. Sure, it may not be an ideal pick for cooling larger rooms, but it cools a 350 square feet space quickly and efficiently. Even then, to my surprise, the unit is comfortably quiet, so you can sleep, read or binge-watch your favorite shows without disturbance. 

With 3 fans, this window air conditioner features 4-way directional vents to adjust the direction of airflow as per your needs. The air conditioning engineers have thoughtfully designed the unit, as its 4-way directional vents have an 8-way cooling fan. 

In the package, you will find an easy-to-use installation kit that will come in handy for installing the unit. Following the steps mentioned in the instruction manual will ease the installation process, and you will be able to DIY install it. So, I highly recommend you go through them thoroughly before installing the unit. Since it runs on the power cord, install it on a window with a power cord nearby. 

Belonging to the line of energy-efficient ACs, this window air conditioner also consumes less energy, reducing electricity bills. The Energy Star rating testifies to its energy efficiency. 

Furthermore, you can switch to “eco” mode and “sleep” mode to save energy while running the AC. What I didn’t like about this AC is that it doesn’t come with a remote control. 

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 42 dB

7. Koldfront Window Air Conditioner – Best Through-The-Wall Unit

Equipped with R-32 refrigerant, the Koldfront Window Air Conditioner is one of those units that can cut down energy costs to a great extent compared to those with R-22. As for reducing energy consumption, this unit has a SEER of 12, so it consumes 10% less energy than a 10 SEER unit. Its claims of energy efficiency are testified by the Energy Star certification it has earned.  

This 8000 BTU window air conditioner has a temperature range between 62°F and 86°F, which makes it ideal for spaces up to 350 square feet. I like the fact that the air filter of this unit is easy to maintain– you need not call a professional to clean it. Simply take it off, wash it, and reinstall it on the unit, and that’s it! 

What makes it the best 8000 BTU air conditioner is that it’s equipped with an LED filter that blinks whenever the filter gets dirty. 

Next to the air filter is a digital display with touch controls that makes adjusting the temperature and other settings easily. And for those moments when I don’t want to leave my comfort zone, I use the remote control to change the settings from energy saver mode to sleep mode. 

Much like other energy-efficient units, this window air conditioner is integrated with 3 fan settings for convenience. Furthermore, its 4-way directional air louvers ensure even distribution of air, so no corner of your room will have hot air. 

With a dimension of 13.3H x 18.5W x 15.75D, this window air conditioner fits higher than 14”. 

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: Not measured

8. GE Window Air Conditioner – Best Wi-Fi Enabled Unit

Rated as the number 1 window air conditioner brand in the US, GE is committed to offering the best solutions to homeowners, and its window-mounted air conditioner proves the same. 

Before anything else, I would like to mention that this is an energy-efficient unit, meaning it offers comfort without racking up utility bills. Like most air conditioner units, it is Energy Star-certified, so there will be more energy savings and low electricity bills. 

With this AC, you can save more on energy bills if you switch to “eco” mode. On “eco” mode, the unit automatically turns off the compressor and fan, which cuts down energy consumption. 

From the get-go, what I liked about this unit is that it can be integrated with the SmartHQ app, through which this AC can be controlled. For instance, you can turn the unit on/off, adjust the temperature or keep tabs on its operation from anywhere in your home or the world. 

Moreover, this energy-efficient unit has 3 fan speeds and 3 cooling modes to customize the cooling experience, so you can stay comfortable. 

Coming with a fixed chassis, this air conditioner is easy to install, more so since it comes with an installation kit. Similar to other air conditioners, the filter is washable– for maximum efficiency, I suggest cleaning them every 30 days. 

Beneath the 2 air louvers sits a control panel from which speed, mode, and temperature can be adjusted. But that’s not the only way to adjust the settings of this air conditioner. You can use the remote control or smart assistants to make adjustments. 

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 58 dB

9. BLACK+DECKER Window Air Conditioner – Best With Adjustable Thermostat Control

If you are scouting for air conditioners for your workshop or a prefab guest house, the BLACK+DECKER Air Conditioner would be a sensible pick. That’s because its 8000 BTU cooling capacity cools rooms up to 350 square feet well. 

Integrated with 4 settings– auto, low, medium, and high, this air conditioner provides relief from the scorching heat, no matter the weather outside. Furthermore, its programmable thermostat adjusts the temperature automatically based on the settings you feed into the unit– that’s what adds to its versatility. 

On the fore part of the unit is a digital display that features all the settings from “check filter” to “energy saver” mode, so you can adjust them with ease. Or you can simply use the remote control to change the settings from time to time without getting up. 

Upon reading the product manual, I discovered that the air filter is made of nylon– which means you can detach it and wash it to circulate air (fresh and clean air). 

When needed, this air conditioner can reduce moisture from space by changing the mode to dehumidifier mode. Ideal for small to medium-sized rooms, this air conditioner weighs less than 50 lbs, so mounting it will be easy. 

As is expected, this unit is Energy Star-certified, like most air conditioners, so it will definitely help you save a few dollars on utility bills. Although it is integrated with R-32 refrigerant, it has a SEER of 5.2, which is very low. And that is why I suggest this for spaces where it won’t be used for too long. 

Floor Area: 300 to 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 59 dB

10. TURBRO Greenland Portable Air Conditioner – Best Affordable Alternative To A Central Air Conditioning System

For small spaces, the TURBRO Greenland Portable Air Conditioner will be the best bet because of its cooling capacity. This 8000 BTU air conditioner may appear simple, but it offers robust cooling and cools a 300 square feet room within a few minutes, thanks to the turbo mode. 

Unlike other portable air conditioners, it’s not just an AC; rather, it’s a multifunctional unit because it doubles as a fan and a dehumidifier. Whenever I have to remove moisture from my space, I simply switch to the dehumidifier mode. Meanwhile, the 2-speed fan mode generates a draft of fresh air.

As you’d expect with portable AC units, this one comes with 4 in-built wheels for easy movability. Therefore, moving it from the dining room to the bedroom wasn’t too much of a chore. 

With this portable air conditioner, you won’t have to break a sweat to install it because it’s easy to set up. Just make sure to place the unit upright for a minimum of 4 hours before powering it on. 

What’s more, this portable AC unit has a control panel, but even then, the brand supplies a remote control. Noteworthily, its remote control is integrated with a temperature sensor to detect the temperature of the corner where you’re sitting; hence, it cools the room accordingly. 

Although it isn’t Energy Star-rated, its programmable timer function turns the unit on/off automatically as per your schedule, saving money on energy bills. Compared to other portable air conditioners, it features dual drainage methods, allowing bucketless operation. Besides the washable filter, it is integrated with the “auto restart” function. 

Floor Area: 300 square feet | Number of Speeds: 2 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 52 dB

11. Dreo Inverter Window Air Conditioner – Best Unit With Power Inverter Compressor

Want to beat the heat by keeping your space cool but dread energy bills? The Dreo Inverter Air Conditioner will cool your space with its low-power operation, so you won’t have to spend hundreds on utility bills. 

This Energy Star-certified air conditioner has a 15.0 SEER rating, meaning it will save 35% on your energy bills compared to conventional compressors. Therefore, you can stay cool without worrying about electricity bills. 

When it comes to cooling an office or other space of 350 square feet, this variable-speed air conditioner works well and cools it efficiently. Over and above that, it’s equipped with directional louvers which can be positioned in any direction. 

I also appreciate the pre-assembled design of this air conditioner because of which installation doesn’t take too much time. The only thing you will have to do is slide the air conditioner inside an open window and fasten the screws to mount it securely. 

Besides cooling a space efficiently, I noticed that the air filter purifies the indoor air by catching dirt and dust. Later, you can detach it and wash it to remove impurities. 

Instead of 3 modes like most air conditioners, it comes with 5 modes– cool, circulate, dehumidify, auto, and sleep. Using the remote control, you can switch between modes and adjust the temperature between 61 and 88°F. 

And if you find it difficult to read the settings because of the small screen of the remote, the digital panel on the unit will come in handy. A 24-hour timer is also integrated into the air conditioner. 

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: Adjustable | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 42 dB

12. BLACK+DECKER Portable Air Conditioner – Best Floor-Standing Unit For Cabins And Campers

Operating at 58 dB, the BLACK+DECKER Portable Air Conditioner is a fairly quiet device; therefore, you can carry on your chores without getting disturbed due to loud noise. And if you prefer the quietest environment when sleeping, switching to “sleep” mode will do the trick and reduce further noise. 

Like other portable air conditioners, this one also is a floor-standing unit that cools a 150 square feet room quickly and efficiently. For this reason, I prefer using it in my cabin, although you can use it in the office, small bedrooms, and living rooms. 

This portable air conditioner, as one would expect, comes with built-in wheels that allow me to move it from one corner of my office space to another without difficulty. Even these built-in wheels make the installation process relatively simple– wheel it to whichever room you wish to install, position it near a window, and attach the hose.

When not in use, simply unhook and store it wherever you have storage space. 

Atop the unit is an LED display through which you can control the air temperature, mode, and other settings. Since the air filter traps dirt, dust, pet danders, and other particles, you will have to clean it twice a month to enhance its efficiency. 

This portable air conditioner combines 3 energy-efficient functions in 1, meaning you get a dehumidifier, a cooler, and a fan in one unit. Although it’s a floor-standing unit, it is a self-evaporating unit. Rest assured, your space will remain dry, cool, and clean. 

Lastly, you get a 5-year warranty on compressor parts and a 1-year warranty on other parts and labor. 

Floor Area: 150 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 54 dB

13. Keystone Window-Mounted Air Conditioner – Best For Travel Trailers

Do you often go on long voyages on your travel trailer? Well, in that case, the Keystone Window-Mounted Air Conditioner is worth every cent to keep your trailer cool during hot summer afternoons. 

Not just travel trailers, but this air conditioner is a reliable option for attics, home offices, small living rooms, bedrooms, and apartments.

Offering 3 fan speeds, this air conditioner allows you to customize the cooling experience as per your needs. With a built-in dehumidifier, this unit works well in humid spaces as it removes excess moisture from the indoor air. This way, it would prevent mold and mildew from thriving in the space. 

On the low setting, this air conditioning unit runs at 49 dB; however, it is quite loud if you run at a high setting– so keep that in mind. 

Furthermore, this small and compact air conditioning unit sports a digital display on the left-hand side. Using that, you can turn it on/off, switch between different modes, set a timer, or increase/decrease the temperature with ease. 

And if you’re too lethargic to leave your couch or bed, simply make use of the remote control that comes with the unit. What I like about the remote control is that it has a built-in remote thermostat, allowing you to set the temperature from any corner of the room. 

Keep in mind this unit isn’t Energy Star-rated, although the brand offers it in Energy Star style– so choose the style carefully. Still, if you go for the former option, you can turn on “energy saver” mode to save a few dollars on energy bills yearly. 

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 59 dB

14. PerfectAire Window Air Conditioner With Electric Heater – Best 2-In-1 AC With Built-in Electric Heater

Buying a separate air conditioner and a heating system is expensive for most of us. Instead of settling for either of the two, investing in the PerfectAire Air Conditioner will guarantee you comfort in all seasons. 

Radiating 3500 BTU of heat and 8000 BTU of cold, this 2-in-1 air conditioner is a versatile unit that you can get hold of. With the touch of a button on the remote, you can program your desired temperature and switch to “sleep” mode, “energy saver,” or “follow me” mode. 

And if it sits beside your office table, you can modify the settings using the control panel on the top left side of the unit. 

This corded electric unit is available in multiple styles, from 8000 BTU to 12000 BTU– therefore, you’re spoilt for choices. Furthermore, it features an “auto restart” option, because of which the unit restarts itself in case of power outages. 

However, unlike other air conditioners on this list, this unit isn’t Energy Star-certified, so definitely, it won’t cut down on energy costs. The brand, nevertheless, does offer an “energy saver” mode, so you can switch to that if your motive is to save money while running the unit. 

Top rail, accordion panels, foam, screws, brackets, and seals– the brand sends all the necessary supplies that will be needed to install this air conditioning unit. So, installing it yourself won’t be a hassle; however, calling for professionals would be a better bet if you’re not confident in your DIY skills. 

Professional installation is also recommended because the unit weighs about 71 pounds, which means it is too heavy. 

Floor Area: 300 to 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 58 dB

Best 8000 BTU Air Conditioners Comparison Table

8000 BTU ACs Floor Area Number of Speeds Voltage Noise Level
Frigidaire Window-Mounted Room AC 350 square feet 3 115 Volts 55 dB
Midea EasyCool Window AC 350 square feet 3 110 Volts 55 dB
SereneLife Portable AC 215+ square feet 3 120 Volts 55 dB
LG Window-Mounted AC 350 square feet 3 115 Volts 53 dB
TOSOT Window AC 350 square feet 3 115 Volts 42 dB
TCL Home Series Window AC 350 square feet 3 115 Volts 42 dB
Koldfront Window AC 350 square feet 3 115 Volts Not measured
GE Window AC 350 square feet 3 115 Volts 58 dB
BLACK+DECKER Window AC 300 to 350 square feet 3 115 Volts 59 dB
TURBRO Greenland Portable AC 300 square feet 2 115 Volts 52 dB
Dreo Inverter Window AC 350 square feet Adjustable 115 Volts 42 dB
BLACK+DECKER Portable AC 150 square feet 3 115 Volts 54 dB
Keystone Window-Mounted AC 350 square feet 3 115 Volts 59 dB
PerfectAire Window AC With Electric Heater 300 to 350 square feet 3 115 Volts 58 dB

Buying Guide for the Best 8000 BTU Air Conditioner

With so many options at your disposal, were you able to decide which one would be ideal for your needs? No? Well, I knew it, but you’re not alone– countless people get stuck in the decision-making process.

Knowing the pros and cons of the 14 best 8000 BTU air conditioners helps greatly, but choosing one remains a daunting task. That’s because there’s a lot to look for when buying an air conditioner for your home or office space other than the price.

So, if you’ve been looking for pointers on choosing the right air conditioner, this section will prove helpful. Ahead, I’ve discussed some important factors I’ve learned over the years that you must keep in mind while buying an 8000 BTU air conditioner. Let’s check them out!

Type of Air Conditioner

By now, you’ve learned that 8000 BTU air conditioners are of 2 types– window air conditioners and portable air conditioners. Out of the 2, which one you go for depends on your needs and requirements.

Window air conditioners are mounted on the windows, with a few of them mounted through the wall. Since they are immovable, they are considered a permanent cooling solution.

Furthermore, window ACs have a high cooling capacity and are larger and heavier than other air conditioners. An 8000 BTU window-mounted air conditioner makes for an excellent option for 300 to 350 square feet of space, like small to medium-sized living rooms, bedrooms, kitchens, and garages.

On the other hand, portable air conditioners are most popular when it comes to 8000 BTU air conditioners. That’s because they come with built-in wheels and can easily move from one space to another.

Instead of mounting them on the walls, you can simply place them in any corner of the room, plug the cord into the electrical outlet, and turn it on. It will start cooling your room. Nevertheless, you must keep in mind that they aren’t as powerful as portable ones.

Even when it comes to energy efficiency, window-mounted air conditioners have the edge over portable units.

Noise Level

Despite many manufacturers claiming that their AC units are the quietest, I’ve learned that not all of them live up to their claims.

For that reason, I highly recommend everyone check the noise level of whichever AC they are planning to buy. Deciding the noise level is especially difficult for first-time buyers, but don’t worry, for I’ll help you out.

Any air conditioner whose noise level falls between 44 and 56 dB (decibel) is considered less noisy or quiet. Go for a 40 dB air conditioner if you wish to have library-like silence in your home. Using an air conditioner that barely makes noise will help you sleep better and work better without distractions.

Remember that any air conditioning unit above 56 dB will be loud or noisy, which will make carrying out chores difficult, let alone sleeping.

Some ACs also come with a “sleep” mode and “eco” mode that further reduces noise levels, making them virtually silent. So, if you go for AC units whose noise levels are above 56 dB, look at whether they have these 2 modes or not.

Energy Efficiency Ratio

EER, or energy efficiency ratio, is the measurement of the efficiency of an HVAC (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning) system in terms of output vs. energy consumption.

When buying an air conditioner, you should always go for units whose EER ratings are high because the higher the ratings, the more energy-efficient the unit will be. That means you will save a lot of money annually on your energy bills.

Nevertheless, units with high EER come with an expensive price tag, but it’s a one-time expenditure.

Dehumidifier Mode

Today, almost all air conditioning units come with a dehumidifier mode that makes it easy for homeowners to remove excess humidity from the space. When you switch to this mode, your room will feel less humid or muggy and a more comfortable space.

So, I highly recommend you go for air conditioners that come with a dehumidifier, especially if you live in places with humid climates. By dehumidifying your room, you can even eliminate the problems of mold and mildew.

Wi-Fi Enabled

When you’re upgrading to a new air conditioning unit, it’s wise to go for models that are Wi-Fi enabled because of the convenience it offers.

A Wi-Fi-enabled AC can be paired with a smartphone, and you can control the settings from anywhere in the world. Such ACs are also compatible with smart assistants like Alexa and Google Assistant.

One of the perks of owning a Wi-Fi-enabled AC is that you can program daily cooling regimens to turn the unit on/off as needed. However, a smart AC would cost a lot more than a regular one. So, go for it only if you can afford to spend that much money; otherwise, a standard unit would be feasible.

Installation

Installation is another factor you must consider when buying an 8000 BTU air conditioner.

Generally, portable ACs have the edge over window AC units because you don’t have to do much to install them. After unboxing them, you only have to place them in the right spot near an electric outlet, attach the hose and turn it on.

On the other hand, window-mounted air conditioners aren’t easy to install. Only if you are a pro at DIY tasks should you attempt installing such ACs inside the window. Even a seasoned DIYer should refrain from installing such ACs because even the slightest mistake could damage the whole unit.

Price

From affordable units to luxury ones, 8000 BTU air conditioners are available in various price ranges. Therefore, I suggest you prepare a budget before shopping so that you don’t end up overspending.

Most people think that affordable units aren’t of good quality and expensive ones are of premium quality. However, that’s not the case– what I suggest is to weigh down the features of the unit against the price because that will help you make a sound decision.

How much space can an 8000 BTU air conditioner cool?

Ideal for small to medium-sized spaces, 8000 BTU air conditioners work well on spaces up to 350 square feet, equivalent to 1600 cubic feet.

Will more BTUs cool my small-sized room better than an 8000 BTU air conditioner?

No, adding a unit whose BTU exceeds 8000 in a small to medium-sized room won’t be a sensible decision. In regard to air conditioners, more isn’t always better. Although the higher BTU unit will cool the room quickly, remember the room will become overly humid.

At the same time, units with fewer BTUs won’t cool the room at all but consume a lot of power.

Does an 8000 BTU air conditioner consume a lot of electricity?

Mid-size 8000 BTU air conditioners use about 715 watts of energy. At times, it may even consume less than 715 watts, so your electric bills won’t be high.

Will an 8000 BTU air conditioner be ideal for cooling a living room?

This totally depends on the dimensions of your living room. As 8000 BTU air conditioners are among the smallest units, they are highly efficient in cooling spaces of 250 to 350 square feet.

So, if your living room is about 350 square feet, an 8000 BTU air conditioning unit will be an excellent addition. Meanwhile, you will have to look for other options if your living room is spacious.

What size inverter do I need to run an 8000 BTU air conditioner?

An inverter of 6000-watt DC to AC will be efficient for running 8000 BTU air conditioners. In fact, such inverters can also be used to run 15000 BTU air conditioners. However, before you go ahead to purchase an inverter, make sure to check with the manufacturer’s recommendation in the manual. As that will give you a clear picture of the inverter you will need to run your AC efficiently.

Conclusion

To survive hot days, an air conditioner is an absolute necessity because it makes your space cooler, making summers bearable. However, you can reap these benefits only if you choose the right unit for your space.

Still unable to decide which one should you pick? Let me ease your confusion by letting out my top picks.

Amongst all the options, the Frigidaire Window-Mounted Room Air Conditioner takes the crown because of its 3 adjustable fan speeds that allow users to customize the cooling experience. Other than its washable air filter, I like the fact that it is energy efficient and helps me save a few dollars every month on my electricity bill.

And if you’re looking for an air conditioner that comes with an intuitive LED display, you can never go wrong with the EasyCool Air Conditioner from the Midea Group. Besides being energy efficient, the unit is covered with a 1-year warranty on labor and parts.

On that note, I shall call the curtains for the day. Adios!

The Hoome window seal for portable air conditioners stands out because of its cheap cost, dual hose suitability, and universal fit. The next best is the Jeacent and Gulrear window seals, with their easy installation and durability. And if you have a casement window, the Airly window seal kit is the best option.

Portable air conditioners offer a practical and cheap cooling solution to the intense summer heat. But their efficiency is affected by their ventilation and the window gaps. To avoid hot air from the exhaust hose coming back inside, it is important to give the window an airtight seal.

Window seal kits are a temporary and cheap solution to this problem of a portable air conditioner. And today, I’ve curated a list of window seals to help you decide the best one for your portable AC unit.

Best Portable AC Window Seal Kits

Here is the list of the 5 best portable AC window seal kits that you can use to improve the efficiency of your portable air conditioner unit.

1. Hoome Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner - Best Overall

The Hoome portable air conditioner window seal helps keep a closed environment and prevents the warm air inside the AC hose from getting into your room. It seals around your window and then wraps around the nozzle of the hose, blocking the return flow of hot air. This protects the efficiency of your own mobile air conditioning unit. 

This window seal is pretty easy to install as well. You just need to apply the adhesive hook tape to the inside of your window frame and the window itself. Hence, installation is a piece of cake. It has two zippers, so it will work even if your portable air conditioner has two hoses.  

Additionally, the window seal is suitable for most portable air conditioners. They are also suitable for most windows, whether they open to the left or the right, whether it's a bottom-hung window or a skylight. Just note that the maximum allowed perimeter of the window is 400 cm or 157 inches. 

Type: Dual hose | Window Size: 157 inches | Window Type: Universal kit | Price: $21.99

2. Jeacent Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner - Best for Durability

The Jeacent window seal for a portable air conditioner is easy to install and comes with two different fixing methods. The product box includes most of the things you need for the installation, making it a quick and easy process. 

Its exclusive bottom panel joint leads to a seamless design, keeping all the hot air out and leaving no gaps. It uses durable and thick PVC to help you keep your room cool for longer, leading to savings on energy costs.

Additionally, since it helps to regulate the air exchange efficiently, it helps keep out dust and rain. So, not only does it keep the hot air out, but it also helps to keep the indoor air clean. 

Note that the seal supports hoses with an external diameter between 5.1 and 5.9 inches.

Type: Single hose | Window Size: 60 inches | Window Type: Sliding window | Price: $24.99

3. Gulrear Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner - Best for Easy Installation

The Gulrear window seal for portable air conditioners is pretty easy to install, with the panels being easily adjustable due to their slider nuts. It’s designed specifically for exhaust hoses with a diameter of 5 inches so it won’t be compatible with all AC units. 

The product box includes most of the tools you need for the installation, along with the user manual, making installation a breeze. The sealing tape is also provided and is posted at the connection between the sealing plate and the window. This helps to effectively avoid hot air coming in. 

This window kit is designed for sliding windows that open either horizontally or vertically. Additionally, it supports two hoses. So, you can easily use it with your dual hose portable air conditioner.  

Type: Dual hose | Window Size: 20 - 55 inches | Window Type: Sliding window | Price: $22.99

4. Airly Portable AC Window Seal Kit - Best for Casement Windows

Most of the window seal kits on this list support all kinds of windows, but casement windows are very different. This Airly seal is one of the best options for window seals if you have casement windows. 

Casement windows, though popular, don’t have a lot of options when it comes to window seals. So, this Airly window seal is specifically designed to fit any casement window. It is also very easy to install since all the tools you need are included in the product box. 

Just note that the window seal will support casement windows measuring less than 158 inches. So, measure the perimeter of your window before purchasing to make sure it’s compatible. 

Also, you don’t need to worry about bugs or insects creeping in. The sturdy zipper makes for easy hose access as well as keeping the insects and the hot air at bay. 

Type: Single hose | Window Size: 158 inches | Window Type: Casement windows | Price: $22.84

5. Sikadeer Portable AC Window Seal Kit - Best for Sliding Doors

The Sikadeer window seal for a portable air conditioner comes with an instruction manual and is very easy to install. It is suitable for sliding windows as well as sliding doors. The boards included in the seal kit allow you to adjust the size of the kit freely. Thus, it supports windows measuring between 17 and 60 inches.

Make sure the diameter of your hose is 5.1 inches before purchasing to ensure compatibility. The window seal kit is made using PVC material, making it high-temperature resistant, non-toxic, and pollution-free. 

The window seal can also be embedded in the window rails, leading to a tight sealing effect. This helps effectively prevent hot air from coming inside the room.

Type: Single hose | Window Size: 17 - 60 inches | Window Type: Sliding window/Sliding door | Price: $23.99

Comparison of Window Seat Kits for Portable ACs

Window Seal Kits For Portable ACs Type Window Size Window Type Price
Hoome Window Seal For Portable AC Dual hose 157 inches Universal kit $21.99
Jeacent Window Seal For Portable AC Single hose 60 inches Sliding window $24.99
Gulrear Window Seal For Portable AC Dual hose 20 - 55 inches Sliding window $22.99
Airly Portable AC Window Seal Kit Single hose 158 inches Casement windows $22.84
Sikadeer Portable AC Window Seal Kit Single hose 17 - 60 inches Sliding window/Sliding door $23.99

Buying Guide for the Best Portable AC Window Seal Kit

Any portable air conditioner is bound to send some hot air back inside the room, reducing the efficiency of your portable air conditioner and also hiking up your energy bills. Window seals are an effective solution to this problem.

Here are a few things you should remember to buy the perfect window seal to meet your needs. 

1. Types of Windows

You’ll obviously need to know what kind of window you have before you buy a window seal for it. Unfortunately, window seals don’t work with all kinds of windows. They only work with windows that slide or crank open, like:

  • Sliding windows

The most popular window style, sliding windows can be single or double-hung windows and might open horizontally or vertically. 

  • Sliding doors

Most window seals that are compatible with sliding windows will also be compatible with sliding doors as well. Just make sure to get the measurement right.

  • Casement windows

Casement windows are windows that crank open. And though they offer an unobstructed view of the nearby scenery, they are pretty difficult to seal completely. So, your best option with this window type is to buy mesh kits with zippers.

Thus, windows become very important for the effective functioning of a portable air conditioner. In case you don’t have windows available, through-the-wall window conditioners are also available, which don’t require any window to cool air.  

2. Window dimensions

Window dimensions are a significant measurement you need to keep in mind while purchasing a window seal. Measure all the sides of your window to get the perimeter, and then check the window dimensions for the window seal you are purchasing to make sure it is compatible. 

The perfect size match will ensure a tight seal and lead to the higher efficiency of your portable air conditioner. 

For sliding door seal kits, like the Sikadeer window seal for portable air conditioners, you don’t need the exact measurements. This is because you usually get a sliding door seal bracket to make the installation easier. 

3. Installation

The installation process of window seals mostly depends on the type of window you have, as well as your portable air conditioner. To make sure the instruction process is as hassle-free as possible, check whether the product box comes with everything you need. 

Adhesive tape, adhesive fasteners, and hose connectors are some of the things the product box absolutely needs to include. So, check the product details carefully before going all in. You can also look for installation instructions or user manuals.

For casement windows, mesh kits with zippers are the best option. You can find step-by-step instructions for the installation of this kit in the user manual or on videos online. 

Installing a window seal on a sliding window is even easier as long as your measurements are correct. You can also find step-by-step instructions or video tutorials for these online to make installation an easy process. 

The complete installation process of the window seal kit should not take more than 15 minutes. 

4. Style of Window Seal

Many portable air conditioners are dual-hose models. In case you have a dual hose model, make sure your window seal supports that particular portable air conditioner. On the other hand, most window seals are suitable for single-hose models. 

If you don’t want to go through the hassle of dual hoses, vents, and window seals, you can check out some window fans for another effective cooling solution. 

What is a portable air conditioner window seal kit?

A portable air conditioner is an effective solution to the intense summer heat. But it cannot perform at its maximum efficiency without proper ventilation. Hence, a window seal is a perfect temporary solution.

The window seal helps you to seal the gap created by the exhaust hose, helping to prevent hot air from coming back inside the room. Without a proper window seal, it is like you’re basically running a window air conditioner with the windows open. This really reduces the cooling of your portable air conditioner and also drives up your energy bills.

So, after checking the type and dimensions of your window, you should buy a window seal to make the window airtight.

How do I install a portable AC window seal?

The installation of window seals for a portable air conditioner is a pretty easy task. Most of the tools you need are already included in the product box. The user manual also contains instructions to make installation an easy process. You can also find video tutorials online if needed.

Just make sure to correctly measure your window before purchasing the window seal kit to ensure a smooth installation process.

Will using a portable air conditioner window seal affect my electricity bill?

Yes, it will. But it’s all good news! Because a window seal for portable ACs is meant to drive up the efficiency of your portable air conditioner. If the efficiency goes up, your room gets cooled at a much quicker rate. This means you will need to use the AC for lesser time, leading to savings on your energy bills.

Can I use a portable AC window seal with any brand of portable AC?

Yes, you can. You can use a portable air conditioner window seal with any brand of portable air conditioner. You just need to make sure the dimensions of the window and the type of window match the window seal you’re buying. Make the measurements and calculations beforehand to make sure there is compatibility.

Your portable air conditioner can also have two hoses, so make sure your window seal is dual-hose compatible if that’s the case.

Can I still open my window with a portable AC window seal installed?

For some window seal kits that don’t block the opening of the window, yes, you can open your windows. However, for some, you might have to remove the window seal before opening the windows. However, opening the window with the window seal installed would be quite counterproductive, given why you are installing it in the first place.

Can a portable AC window seal kit be used with sliding windows?

Yes, a portable air conditioner window seal kit can be used with sliding windows, whether they open horizontally or vertically. Just make sure you get the measurements of the window and the outlet hose right before making your purchase.

Conclusion

Having a portable AC window seal kit is an excellent accessory to keep your environment temperate and energy-efficient. These kits prevent the return flow of warm air, thereby augmenting the working of your air conditioner and saving on energy bills. However, not all kits bring the same quality, support, and adaptability.

From the above 5 best portable AC window seal kits, here are the top three expert recommendations:

The Hoome Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner, due to its versatile compatibility with various windows and easy-to-install design, emerges as the best overall and is an ideal option for those looking for maximized performance and value.

Next, for people looking for longevity, the Jeacent Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner stands out as the best for durability. Its robust and thick PVC design makes it a good option offering extended service and more bang for your buck.

Lastly, for easy installation and user-friendly adjustments, the Gulrear Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner takes the crown. If you happen to prioritize convenience and simplicity of setup, this product is the right choice.

To make the most out of these fantastic products, ensure you check out the specifications of each seal kit to match your window and hose sizes before making a purchase. Enjoy the comfort and energy savings that come with having the right seal kit for your portable AC unit.

Looking for the best cooler ice packs can be difficult as many options are available in the market.

Thankfully I’ll discuss various food and ice packs so you can make the best decision for your refrigerator and cooling needs.

This guide has gathered the best ice packs, and we will explain how each pack can be your best pick for your individual needs.

Best Ice Pack for Coolers Picks

Each one of these is available at Amazon, eBay, or any other online retail shop of your choice to choose your brand of ice pack manufacturers.

Note

You can even find the best place for fridges or mini-freezers on these sites.

Here are the top 10 picks for best ice packs from my own experience with each ice pack and how they performed for your future meal to stay cold.

1. Cooler Shock 3X Large Reusable Freeze Packs for 5 - Best Overall

There is no better way of keeping drinks cold than the Cooler Shock reusable ice packs 3X against heat.

One of these triple-insulated 12-ounce bags can keep their cooler cold for 20 hours with a very tight lid and can even replace 18 pounds of ice.

The five-pack of bags contains a non-hazardous coolant powder which you can unscrew and add water to turn the powder into a cooling gel mixture for a gel pack.

Afterward, you can make gel ice packs with the provided five bags by filling them with the mixture and placing each bag into the freezer for 12-14 hours at 18 degrees Fahrenheit.

These gel-based ice packs also act as reusable ice packs with high-performance, plastic exteriors that are fit for any food, preserving them long and cold.

These Cooler shock packs are also for large coolers, but in turn, these few ice packs take up a lot of room in the cooler but stay cold longer than my other ice packs, for twenty-two hours.

Here’s the BEST PART! It is affordable and perfect for keeping drinks ice cold for the many parties I hosted for close friends and family.

Price: $29.99 | Material: Plastic with polyethylene insulation | Freezing Point: 18 degrees Fahrenheit | Chamber Depth: 6.5 inches | Weight: 12 ounces

2. Arctic ICE Chillin' Brew Series - Best Value/Runner-Up

A flat ice pack, when frozen, expands into a bulbous mass, sometimes too large to fit onto small coolers, but this Arctic Ice Chillin' Brew pack has a pattern for keeping its shape intact.

The design of the Arctic Ice Chillin Brew also expands the overall surface area of the pack allowing you to keep more of your food cold, helping me keep my larders cool on the go.

The moded design of these ice packs also allows each pack to interlock and stock amongst themselves for maximizing keeping my food and drinks chilled.

Its low 28-degree Fahrenheit freezing point keeps drinks cold and meat fresh for any event or travel for eight hours

Note

This is fifty percent longer than using ice.

The flat shape and the six size options would have this small ice pack fit into most coolers and even have a handle for convenient removal.

The ice packs' sizes, from small to extra large, are designed with leakproof caps and UV-stabilized color containers for extended use and a melting point of 15 degrees Fahrenheit.

However, some of the larger ice packs were too large to fit into my cooler, and I need to use my 12 x 9-inch for one to barely fit, so keep this in mind as you use these ice packs.

Price: $16.13 | Material: Plastic | Freezing Point: 28 degrees Fahrenheit | Chamber Depth: 10.93 inches | Weight: 0.75-10 pounds

3. Nordic Ice No-Sweat Reusable Long-Lasting Gel Pack - Best Budget Pick

Rather than invest in ice packs, you would want more solid but expendable cooler packs; you should instead invest in Nordic Ice reusable gel packs.

The company is famed for its solid cooling technology in multiple industries, even for medicine shipping, and its cooling power is more than enough.

You can trust the gel pack to keep barbeque and beverages cold. 

This gel pack also keeps medicines cold and stops condensation due to the temperature-sensitive material.

This reusable cooler ice pack is insulated with multi-layered polymer plastics and a patented gel, encouraging multiple uses in the short term as they are sold as a set of three.

They even freeze quickly in about two hours and last about 12 hours while not taking too much space in a lunch box or a large cooler by their lightweight 7-by-3-inch design.

Price: $10.91 for 3 packs | Material: Polymer Plastic | Freezing Point: 32 degrees Fahrenheit | Chamber Depth: N/A | Weight: 1 pound

4. YETI ICE Reusable Ice Pack - Best for Durability

The hard plastic exterior of this Yeti ice pack can be considered one of the most scientifically developed ice packs out there due to its non-sweat, re-freezable, and reusable.

All the while keeping the cold all day long as the YETI ice pack also comes in different pound options, 1-4 pounds, while also being able to mix and match them.

These Yeti ice packs boast durability and convenience, with their rectangular donut shape making freezing easier than others.

Indeed, the superior durability makes this ice pack the best-suited option for camping and hiking trips to protect your food from any animals while not leaving any sweat.

Although these refreezable and reusable cooler ice packs are considered expensive and only sold individually, the benefits provided may justify the price and quantity.

Price: $15 | Material: High-density polyethylene, food-grade phase-change liquid | Freezing Point: 28 degrees Fahrenheit | Chamber Depth: 10 inches | Weight: 1.65 - 4 lbs

5. FlexiFreeze Reusable Ice Sheets 4 Packs - Best Flexible

The FlexiFreeze ice reusable packs are very flexible in various ways, from how you can cut the sheet to fit your needs and how flexible they are for insulating items.

The very ice sheets are water-based and chemical-free for the eco-minded, but also this translates into how you can twist the sheets to fit anywhere.

You can reuse these expensive ice packs to freeze yourself a fresh batch of 44 ice cubes overnight from your refrigerator with every ice cube creation like an icemaker.

However, due to their water-based construction, this ice sheet does not have the same refrigeration abilities as a gel pack despite being able to keep solid for a few hours.

One test during a 60-degree temperature day tested the sheet wherein refrigerated snacks kept their cool for three hours but melted in about eight hours.

Should the sheets be damaged, there will be barely any mess or toxicity exposure.

Overall, these sheets are perfect for any outing, from an afternoon picnic to a beach trip, as you can cut them for any container to keep.

Price: $19.99 for four packs | Material: Soft Ice Sheet | Freezing Point: 32 degrees Fahrenheit | Chamber Depth: N/A | Weight: 7 pounds

6. Igloo MaxCold

The LARGEST ice pack among the most popular ice packs for those looking to replace using regular ice cubes for their drinks.

Due to its sheer size, this high-quality ice pack produces a large bulge in the middle due to the moisture inside expanding as it freezes, but its structure remains intact.

Although it must be within large containers, you can reliably place it within hard or soft coolers to keep the chill at any temperature.

The large set also can keep frozen for twelve hours or more, even on a hot day, while being easy to carry due to its ridges.

However, this would cause the thicker ice packs to be difficult to stack on top of each other while also needing to be hand-washed instead of using a dishwasher to clean them.

Price: $16.99 | Material: Plastic | Freezing Point: 30 degrees Fahrenheit | Chamber Depth: 29.5 inches | Weight: 0.5-5 pounds

7. LotFancy Contoured Freezer Packs

As you store many cans and bottles, ice is paramount as it can easily sneak into any crevice and create more contact with your drinks, but ice can be messy.

To avoid this mess, this ice pack uses gel and has three grooves on each side to accommodate drinks of any size, and this is doubly so for providing four packs.

These four packs can also create multiple rows to hold your drinks while they keep cool for hours on end.

The extra weight won't break the hard shells because the polyethylene makes up the pack, resulting in thicker ice packs that won't deform.

Price: $13.99 for two packs | Material: High-density polyethylene | Freezing Point: N/A | Chamber Depth: 8.4 inches | Weight: 5 pounds

8. Polar Tech Ice Brix Viscous Cold Pack

A very budget-friendly ice pack with Polar Tech Ice Brix can keep their food cold at a lower temperature.

This gel results in a moisture-resistant and long-lasting ice pack, wherein you can keep your beverages chilled for up to 12 hours with a single pack.

This good ice pack is also made from leakproof plastic, preventing any melted ice or excess liquid from spilling.

Price: $12.94 for 12 packs | Material: Gel and Polymer | Freezing Point: 18 degrees Fahrenheit | Chamber Depth: N/A | Weight: 1 pound

9. Tourit Reusable Ice Packs

The Tourit ice packs act as a sleek cooling system as they are sold as packs of four, each weighing 0.5 pounds, and are small enough for smaller coolers or while traveling.

These freezer packs can remain frozen for eight to ten hours and can be mixed and matched for minimum or maximum cooling capacity.

They can also be mixed in with your food and beverages for even cooling and come with many ice packs to make your cooler colder.

They are suitable for outdoor trips due to their Bisphenol A (BPA)-free plastic durability.

Price: $11.99 for 2 packs | Material: BPA-free plastic | Freezing Point: 32 degrees Fahrenheit | Chamber Depth: N/A | Weight: 2 pounds

10. Fit & Fresh Cool Coolers Ice Packs

Are you packing a lunch bag or mini-cooler to store your fruit and sandwich snacks on the go? Then consider the compact Fit&Fresh ice packs to keep your snack cool.

The compact ice pack won't take up too much space within your cooler while having enough cooling power to keep things cold and your snacks cool in your lunch bags.

These slim ice packs can keep their cold temperatures for up to twelve hours and come with four ice packs.

For coolers with limited space, you can even stack the slim ice packs amongst themselves for larger coolers to keep the cooler chilled.

However, the small ice packs are not enough to keep food or even a beer bottle for 3 hours or in large containers with a single ice pack.

The packs don't last as long frozen as similar packs and would need multiple ice packs to stay cold.

Price: $7.99 for four ice packs | Material: BPA-free plastic | Freezing Point: 32 degrees Fahrenheit | Chamber Depth: N/A | Weight: 1 pound

Best Ice Pack for Coolers Picks Comparison Table

Top Cooler Ice Packs Price Material Freezing Point Chamber Depth Weight
Cooler Shock 3X Large Reusable Freeze Packs $29.99 Plastic with Polyethylene Insulation 18 ℉ 6.5 inches 0.75 lbs
Arctic ICE Chillin' Brew Series $16.13 Plastic 28 ℉ 10.93 inches 0.75-10 lbs
Nordic Ice No-Sweat Reusable Long-Lasting Gel Pack $10.91 for 3 packs Polymer Plastic 32 ℉ N/A 1 lb
YETI ICE Reusable Ice Pack $15 High-density Polyethylene 28 ℉ 10 inches 1.65-4 lbs
FlexiFreeze Reusable Ice Sheets $19.99 for 4 packs Soft Ice Sheet 32 ℉ N/A 7 lbs
Igloo MaxCold $16.99 Plastic 30 ℉ 29.5 inches 0.5-5 lbs
LotFancy Contoured Freezer Packs $13.99 for 2 packs High-density Polyethylene N/A 8.4 inches 5 lbs
Polar Tech Ice Brix Viscous Cold Pack $12.94 for 12 packs Gel and Polymer 18 ℉ N/A 1 lb
Tourit Reusable Ice Packs $11.99 for 2 packs BPA-free Plastic 32 ℉ N/A 2 lbs
Fit & Fresh Cool Coolers Ice Packs $7.99 for 4 packs BPA-free Plastic 32 ℉ N/A 1 lb

Buying Guide for the Best Ice Pack for Cooler

When choosing the best ice packs for coolers, there are still other factors to consider for what you want in your kitchen.

You might be inclined to ask the following questions:

  • How many ice packs did this brand give?
  • Is it dishwasher-safe?

There are also always online communities to check, such as DIY sites for repairs or how to move your appliance safely.

The top ice packs should ALWAYS have the following.

Size

Always consider the size of the pack s storage capacity is not the only factor, as you still would want space within your cooler for anything.

The type of container also counts as a pack and should be the same size as its container, which ranges from 5-by-5 to 10-by-13 inches.

Material

The typical price is $5-20 for the average ice pack, and the reason for such fluctuating prices is due to what the packs are made from.

The outer and inner materials for ice packs differ with the type of ice pack, such as how hard types are made of hard plastic while soft types are made of similar polymers.

Cleaning and Storage

Almost all ice packs are easy to clean and maintain, needing only a rinse to be cleaned with warm soapy water.

Although you must let the packs dry before freezing them to limit condensation and ice crystals.

Type

An ice pack can be divided into the following kinds;

  • Soft Packs: These kinds of packs can conform around items like a lunch box
  • Hard Packs: These kinds of packs are more rigid-shaped and fit easily into structured containers

Longevity

There is a strong correlation between size and how long-lasting an ice pack would be, as a five-pound pack can last up to two days.

Also, thicker packs would last significantly much longer than softer packs.

How do you discard ice packs?

The good thing about gel in ice is that they are capable of biodegradation and have no toxins, with the only issue being the plastic covering, which you can dispose of into a recycling center.

Why should you use an ice pack instead of regular ice?

Although packs and typical ice function the same, cooler ice packs work better as they freeze quicker and still keep their frozen elements contained than water-based ice

However, loose ice cubes can better surround items in a cooler than a single pack can.

Do ice packs go on the top or bottom of your cooler?

There is no official consensus; either answer depends on your current needs and concerns.

People recommend placing packs on the top as cold air sinks and extend the chill, while the bottom is convenient for getting items.

A Recap of the Top Picks

Among the best ice packs for coolers, here are the ones I personally like the most.

Best Budget Pick - Nordic Ice No-Sweat Reusable Long-Lasting Gel Pack

Nordic Ice is my pick for being the cheapest for being priced at $9 for three ice packs and being able to still do its job of cooling your food for 12 hours despite being fragile.

The biggest drawback is that the ice pack can be damaged easily due to its expendable design.

Best Value - Arctic Ice Chillin Brew

Arctic Ice earns this title as providing a wide yet sturdy frame to keep many of your consumables cool while being easily stackable for easy storage.

The only flaw is the ice pack being on the large side for smaller coolers and being pricey.

Best Overall - Cooler Shock 3X Large Reusable Freeze Packs For 5

Cooler Shock is considered the best overall because of the reusable nature of the ice pack while having excellent freezing power that lasts for 20 hours and being affordable.

However, the pack is rather bulky when traveling and needs some assembly by the customer.

Conclusion

The best ice packs for coolers are unique to each customer's circumstances.

Each can provide hours' worth of cooling for your food and beverages, but some are made of gel to contour to any size or are durable enough to prevent theft.

Although the Cooler Shock is our preferred choice, there are still other options for you to consider first.

The use of air conditioners for sliding/casement windows is increasing of late. Among the many models I checked out, the FRIGIDAIRE FFRS1022R1 is my top pick. However, the PERFECT AIRE 3PASC10000 and FRIGIDAIRE FFRE063WAE are also great options.

Looking for a window AC for your sliding or casement window? With so many options available, it can be overwhelming to decide where to begin.

But choosing the wrong casement window AC unit can lead to inefficient cooling, wasted energy, and unnecessary expense. Luckily, we've done the research for you and compiled a list of the best portable air conditioners. Keep reading to find the perfect AC unit to keep your home cool and comfortable.

Best Air Conditioners for Casement Windows

Here is the list of the 7 best air conditioners for casement windows that you can use to cool the atmosphere of your room quickly and efficiently.

1. FRIGIDAIRE FFRS1022R1: Perfect Cooling Solution for Small Spaces

The Frigidaire FFRS1022R1 is the perfect solution for those who have casement windows in their homes. With 10,000 BTUs of cooling power, it can quickly cool a room of up to 450 square feet. Plus, it comes with a dehumidifying function that removes up to 3.4 pints of moisture from the air per hour.

Installation is a breeze, as this window AC unit is designed specifically for casement or slider windows. The included installation kit has everything you need to get it up and running in no time.

And once it's installed, the electronic controls and full-function remote make it easy to set your desired temperature and fan speed. The unit also features auto cool, energy saver mode, quiet mode, 4-way air direction control, and a washable mesh filter with a check filter alert.

Overall, the Frigidaire FFRS1022R1 is an excellent choice for anyone needing reliable and efficient cooling. It may not have Energy Star certification, but its powerful performance and easy installation more than make up for it.

SEER: 10.4 | Cooling Power: 10,000 BTU | Energy Star: No | Floor Area: 450 sq. ft. | Special Feature: Remote control

2. PERFECT AIRE: Best for Cooling Rooms Sized Up to 450 sq. ft.

Looking for a casement air conditioner that can efficiently cool your space without making noise? The PerfectAire 10,000 BTU Slider Air Conditioner might be the perfect fit for you!

Best for rooms sized up to 450 square feet, this sliding window AC comes with a full range air direction control that ensures that the air reaches and cools every corner of the room. 

It is loaded with features that make it a convenient option for any user. The slide-out filter access makes it easy to clean and maintain. With just a simple slide, users can easily remove and clean the filter, ensuring that it operates at optimal performance. 

Moreover, this casement window AC unit comes with electronic controls. This feature enables users to adjust the temperature, fan speed, and mode from anywhere in the room, providing an added level of convenience and ease of use. While it might be a bit pricey, the energy-saving features and easy-to-use controls make it a worthwhile investment.

SEER: 13 | Cooling Power: 10,000 BTU | Energy Star: No | Floor Area: 450 sq. ft. | Special Feature: Remote control

3. FRIGIDAIRE FFRE063WAE: Best Multi-speed Fan & Programmable Timer

The Frigidaire Window-Mounted Room Casement Air Conditioner is an excellent option for anyone looking to cool down a small to medium-sized room. Its 6,000 BTUs of cooling power can quickly and effectively cool down the space. This casement window AC unit also boasts a multi-speed fan with three fan speeds, providing additional cooling flexibility.

It maintains the preset room temperature, ensuring that you are always comfortable. Additionally, this casement window AC unit has a Sleep Mode that gradually increases the temperature by a few degrees over the course of the evening, providing maximum comfort while also saving energy.

This sliding window AC is designed with an adjustable space-wise design that has optional side panels, which extend to best fit your window. It even has an easy-to-clean washable filter that captures dust from the air and ensures the dehumidifier operates efficiently.

What's more, this sliding window AC is ENERGY STAR Certified, which means that it consumes less energy than typical air conditioners, reducing energy usage and lowering utility bills. Additionally, the unit comes with a remote control, enabling you to adjust the temperature and fan speed from a distance.

SEER: 12.2 | Cooling Power: 6,000 BTU | Energy Star: Yes | Floor Area: 250 sq. ft. | Special Feature: Dehumidifier

4. GE: Best for No-Hassle Installation 

Introducing the GE Casement Window Air Conditioner 5000 BTU, a powerful cooling unit designed to cool smaller rooms up to 150 sq ft efficiently.

Equipped with a mechanical thermostat, this casement window AC unit provides two cooling modes and two fan speeds to offer flexible and optimal room temperature. The controls with ten temperature settings make it easy to adjust cooling to your comfort level. Plus, with the low-noise operation, you can keep the cool air flowing with minimal disruption, making it ideal for nighttime use in bedrooms.

Regular cleaning of the filter every 30 days helps ensure that your unit runs smoothly and efficiently. The fixed chassis design and included EZ Mount installation kit make it easy to install this unit in a double-hung window.

One thing to keep in mind is that this is a mechanical unit, meaning that it doesn't come with digital controls. However, this also means it's incredibly easy to use and set up.

SEER: 2.6 | Cooling Power: 5,000 BTU | Energy Star: No | Floor Area: 150 sq. ft. | Special Feature: Easy installation

5. LG: Best for Quiet Operation in Medium-Sized Rooms

LG Mounted 8,000 BTU Casement Window Air Conditioner is an excellent choice for those who want to cool their medium-sized rooms without spending a fortune on electricity bills. With its 8,000 BTU cooling power and a SEER rating of 13, this window AC is energy-efficient and can cool rooms up to 350 square feet. 

Its easy-to-use controls and full-function remote make it a convenient option, and its energy-saving capabilities make it an excellent long-term investment. With its low-noise performance, you can enjoy a calm and peaceful environment without any unnecessary noise.

One of the most notable features of this casement window AC unit is its energy-saving capabilities. This casement window air conditioner is Energy Star certified, which means it has met the high standards of the Energy Star program using energy-efficient technologies that translate into electricity savings.

SEER: 13 | Cooling Power: 8,000 BTU | Energy Star: Yes | Floor Area: 350 sq. ft. | Special Feature: Remote control and energy-saving capabilities

6. KEYSTONE: Affordable with Flexible Energy Star Options

If you're looking for an affordable and efficient air conditioning unit to cool a small room, the Keystone 6,000 BTU Window-Mounted Air Conditioner is an excellent choice. This energy Star-rated air conditioner has a SEER of 12.2, which can help you save money on power bills.

This air conditioning unit has electronic controls with an LED display and a temperature-sensing remote control that lets you conveniently set and maintain the room temperature from anywhere in the room. It also features a thermostat that signals the AC to cool the space based on where you are, ensuring an even temperature throughout the room.

With the ability to cool a room up to 250 square feet and a dehumidification rate of up to 1.5 pints per hour, this casement air conditioner is perfect for small rooms like apartments, bedrooms, and living rooms. It also has money-saving features like energy saver mode, sleep mode, and a programmable 24-hour timer.

SEER: 12.2 | Cooling Power: 6,000 BTU | Energy Star: Yes/No (both variants available) | Floor Area: 250 sq. ft. | Special Feature: Dehumidifier

7. MIDEA: Best for Wide Reach Cooling

The Midea 12,000 BTU EasyCool Window Air Conditioner is a great option for cooling and dehumidifying spaces up to 550 sq. ft. It has three modes - cooling, fan, and dehumidifier, to keep your house or office comfortable. 

With its Energy Star certification, you can save money on energy bills throughout the year. This window air conditioner has a 12 SEER rating, making it energy-efficient and eco-friendly.

The intuitive LED display and remote control make it easy to set time, temperature, and mode from across the room. You can program your temperature preferences for up to 24 hours with the built-in EasyTimer feature, making it even more energy-efficient. What’s more, the washable filter protects your family and living space from dust and pet hairs.

Overall, the Midea 12,000 BTU EasyCool Window Air Conditioner is a great option for those looking for an energy-efficient and customizable cooling solution. It is effortless to use due to its simple installation process and easy maintenance.

SEER: 12 | Cooling Power: 12,000 BTU | Energy Star: Yes | Floor Area: 550 sq. ft. | Special Feature: Remote control

Quick Comparison of AC for Sliding/Casement Windows

Casement Window ACs SEER Cooling Power Energy Star Floor Area Special Feature
Frigidaire 10.4 10,000 BTU No 450 sq. ft. Remote control
Perfect Aire 13 10,000 BTU No 450 sq. ft. Remote control
Frigidaire FFRE063WAE 12.2 6,000 BTU Yes 250 sq. ft. Dehumidifier
GE Window AC 2.6 5,000 BTU No 150 sq. ft. Easy installation
LG Mounted AC 13 8,000 BTU Yes 350 sq. ft. Remote control and energy-saving capabilities
Keystone 12.2 6,000 BTU Yes/No 250 sq. ft. Dehumidifier
Midea EasyCool 12 12,000 BTU Yes 550 sq. ft. Remote control

Buying Guide for the Best Air Conditioner for Casement Windows

If you have casement windows or sliding windows in your home, finding window AC units that fit can be challenging. Luckily, there are several casement air conditioners on the market that are specifically designed for these types of window units. Here are some factors to consider when choosing a portable unit for your sliding windows:

Cooling Power

Look for a casement air conditioner with enough cooling power to cool your space effectively. This tells you the amount of heat the AC can extract out of a room. It's crucial to choose the right BTU unit for your room size. For small to medium-sized rooms (150-300 sq. ft.), a lower BTU unit will be sufficient, while higher BTU units can cool larger rooms more efficiently.

A good rule of thumb is to choose an air conditioner with a cooling capacity of at least 8000 British Thermal Units (BTUs) for spaces up to 350 square feet and at least 10,000 BTUs for spaces up to 450 square feet. Airflow and humidity control are also important considerations for selecting an air conditioner, as they can impact the effectiveness of the unit.

Choosing a casement window AC unit that's too small for your room can result in poor cooling performance, as the unit will have to work harder to cool the area. This leads to higher energy bills and potentially decreased lifespan of the unit.

On the other hand, choosing a casement window air conditioner that's too large for your window frame can lead to unnecessary energy consumption and increased costs. So, it's essential to choose the right size air conditioner for your space to ensure efficient and effective cooling.

Special Features

When it comes to special features, it's essential to consider what will make your life easier and more comfortable. For example, a dehumidifier can be a useful addition to an air conditioner, especially if you live in a humid climate.

If you live in a humid climate, dehumidifying capacity is also an important consideration. This is the amount of moisture an AC can remove from the air. Higher dehumidifying capacity can improve indoor air quality and reduce the risk of mold and mildew growth. However, if you live in a drier climate, a lower dehumidifying capacity may be sufficient.

A programmable timer can be particularly helpful if you want to save energy by only running your air conditioner during certain times of the day or night. Some casement window air conditioners also come with washable or removable filters that can be easily removed and cleaned.

Consider additional features that can enhance your experience, such as remote control, programmable thermostat, air purifier, and quiet mode. These features may increase the unit's price, but they can also improve comfort and convenience. Units without additional features may be more affordable, but they lack convenience and comfort.

Ultimately, the special features you choose will depend on your personal preferences and needs. Consider how you will use your portable air conditioner and choose a model with features that will make your experience more comfortable and convenient.

Energy Efficiency

Air conditioners can use a lot of energy, so it's important to choose an energy-efficient model. The Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) measures the ratio of cooling power to energy consumption. Higher SEER means lower energy consumption. Higher EER units are generally more energy-efficient but may come with a higher price tag. Lower EER units may be more affordable, but they may consume more energy.

The best casement window air conditioners are Energy Star certified and are designed to use up to 10% less energy than a standard window air conditioner. Efficient energy use is an important factor to consider when selecting an air conditioner brand for your sliding or casement window, as it can help to reduce energy bills and conserve resources.

In addition to energy certification, there are other ways to improve your AC's energy efficiency. For example, keeping the filter clean and replacing it regularly can help your AC run more efficiently. You can also use a programmable thermostat to set your AC to turn on and off at specific times, which can help you save energy when you're not home.

Noise Level

The noise level of a casement window air conditioner can be a significant factor, especially if you're planning to use it in your bedroom or office. Look for air conditioners with noise levels of 60 dB or lower. To put that into perspective, a typical conversation is around 60 dB, while a vacuum cleaner is around 70 dB.

Quieter units are generally more expensive but can provide a more comfortable living environment. On the other hand, noisier units may be more affordable but can disrupt your daily activities. Some casement window air conditioners offer a "quiet mode" or "sleep mode" that can help reduce noise levels further, making them a better option for use in bedrooms or other quiet spaces.

Keep in mind that the noise level can also depend on the size and placement of your casement air conditioner. Slider and sash window dimensions should be measured to ensure a proper fit for your air conditioner. Amazon provides a vast selection of heating, ventilation, and air conditioning products. When selecting an HVAC unit, consider the dimensions of your space in inches, as well as the necessary hoses, brackets, and hinges.

The compressor and manufacturing quality should also be evaluated for optimal performance. Proper wall measurements and information on materials, such as Poly(methyl methacrylate), can also be important.

By considering these factors, you can choose a window air conditioner that is specifically designed for your sliding windows and that meets your cooling needs and preferences.

What is a sliding or casement window air conditioner?

A sliding or casement window air conditioner is an air conditioning unit specifically designed to fit into sliding or casement windows. These air conditioners are typically tall and narrow and are designed to be installed vertically.

What are the advantages of using a sliding window air conditioner?

The advantages of using a sliding window air conditioner are ease of installation, space-saving design, and energy efficiency.

It is recommended to choose a sliding window air conditioner with a cooling capacity of at least 8000 BTU for spaces up to 350 square feet and at least 10,000 BTU for spaces up to 450 square feet.

Can I install a casement window air conditioner myself, or do I need professional installation?

Yes, a casement window air conditioner can be installed by yourself, but professional installation is recommended for safety.

How do I clean and maintain my sliding window air conditioner?

To clean and maintain your sliding window air conditioner, regularly clean the filter and unit and schedule professional maintenance annually.

Can a sliding or casement window air conditioner be used in other types of windows?

They are designed specifically for sliding windows and may not fit other types of windows.

Can a sliding or casement window air conditioner be used in a room with high ceilings?

Sliding or casement window air conditioners can be used in rooms with high ceilings but may not effectively cool the entire room.

How noisy are casement window AC units and vertical window air conditioner units, and can they be made quieter?

Sliding and casement window air conditioners can vary in noise level, but some models have a sleep or quiet mode option to reduce noise.

How energy-efficient are sliding and casement window air conditioners compared to other types of air conditioners?

Sliding and casement window air conditioners can be energy-efficient when properly sized and maintained but may not be as efficient as other types of air conditioners, such as central air conditioning, ductless mini-split systems, or a traditional window unit.

Conclusion

Making a choice for the best air conditioner for casement windows can be challenging, considering the variety of features and specifications to look out for. However, this guide has focused on the best air conditioners that have been shown to deliver cooling efficiency, functionality, and convenience for casement windows.

From the above 7 best air conditioners for casement windows, here are the top three expert recommendations:

Firstly, the FRIGIDAIRE FFRS1022R1, with its dehumidifying function and multiple user-friendly features, is an ideal option for those with small spaces needing a cooling solution. Though lacking in Energy Star certification, it makes up for that with its 10,000 BTU of cooling power and easy installation.

The second pick, PERFECT AIRE, offers uniform air distribution with its full-range air direction control, making it a good option for cooling rooms up to 450 sq ft. The energy-saving features and handy filter slide-out access make it a practical and user-friendly choice.

Lastly, the FRIGIDAIRE FFRE063WAE with its Energy-star certification stands out as the right choice for energy-conscious users demanding a multi-speed fan and programmable timer. The inclusion of a sleep mode for added comfort, an easy-to-clean washable filter, and remote control for convenience are additional features that stand out.

Overall, all these air conditioners bring their own advantages, and the best casement window air conditioner choice ultimately depends on your specific needs and preferences. Don't forget to consider soundproofing as well, which can enhance your home's comfort. Learn more about this aspect by checking out our article How to Soundproof Windows: 13 Easy Methods That Work.

With that said, the models outlined above have all earned a strong reputation for their performance and convenience and are worthy of consideration for anyone in the market for a new air conditioner.

Buying an airgun is a cakewalk in the land of the brave; it’s just the subsequent maintenance that puts everyone in dire straits.

Any pneumatic tool demands frequent and top-class maintenance, and that’s why you shouldn’t settle for anything less than the most reliable air tool oils to maintain its performance and longevity. And that raises a very common question - how difficult can it be to buy air tools oil?

Well, it’s not easy, given how thousands of variants are launched in the market regularly. But don’t worry, we’ve personally handpicked 8 of the best oils for the buck so that you find the one that fits your needs precisely.

So, without beating around the bush, let’s get down to the biz!

Best Air Tool Oils

Here’s the list of the 8 best air tool oils to help you find the perfect maintenance solution for your pneumatic tools, ensuring optimal performance and longevity.

1. MARVEL MM080R 4-Oz. Air Tool Oil - Best for Budget Performance

The first and unarguably the editor’s pick on our list is the best-selling Marvel Mystery oil. This brand has already established a wide reputation with its leading innovations. The MM080R 4 oz. Air tool oil is said to deliver nothing but sheer quality under a bargain-basement price range. That said, let’s check out what’s all that buzz about!

It’s fair to say that this unit has been manufactured keeping customers in mind, provided how efficiently it caters to almost every consumer’s needs under a fair budget. It works best with piston-type air tools and line/rotary lubricators, and the credit goes to Marvel Mystery’s state-of-the-art technology behind its formulation. Not only that, but it’s also an appropriate supplement to eliminate rust formation, which defines total value for money.

Moving on, we’ve also found this oil to deliver positive lubrication, which comes quite handy in minimizing power outages. As a bonus, it also stands eligible to dissolve any gum/sludge formation that often hampers the tool's power and speed. So, if you’re looking for an oil that maximizes your tool performance without costing an arm and a leg, then the MM080R should be your go-to pick.

Not to forget, this product is also pretty appropriate for protecting hoses, as we found that it does not have any adverse reaction on rubber. Besides, it’s also suitable for dressing motor compartments, so that’s another win-win!

One of its most significant limitations is in the name itself, have you noticed? Yes, the size and quantity of the oil bottle are 4 oz, which is quite less. The price, on the other hand, is higher than most other recommendations, so that’s a bit upsetting.

Volume:‎ 4 fl oz | Dimensions: ‎7.2" x 5.8" x 5.4" | Weight: ‎4 oz | Water Dispersal: ‎Yes | Rust Protection: ‎Yes | Corrosion Protection: ‎No

2. Lucas Oil 10216 16-Ounce Air Tool Lubricant - Best for Water Dispersal

Next on our list, the Lucas Oil air tool lubricant is unarguably the one-stop solution to your professional tool maintenance needs. This product has been specially formulated to offer world-class performance, and its excellent ease of use makes it even better. That said, let’s check out its core specs and functions!

This product easily stands out to be a smart solution to double the efficiency of your pneumatic tools, as its brilliant formula enables the devices to have a longer lifespan. First and foremost, this tool comes off as an efficient rust-resistant oil, allowing you to protect the tools for a more extended period. Furthermore, the oil has been tested to be weatherproof, which is quite incredible for professionals that often work in extreme temperatures.

When it comes to metallic tools, water becomes a prevalent issue that threatens its longevity. Be it rust or just any other performance issue, water inevitably deteriorates the overall life of the tool in a jiffy. However, this oil also acts as an efficient water dispersal agent, which gives it a tremendous advantage over its critical alternatives in the same category. This feature prevents water jamming from extending the tool’s longevity. 

Furthermore, we’ve noticed that the oil also provides the utmost help in preventing the tools from facing a blowout. Air tools are frequently prone to blowouts when the insides get rough, which can be serious trouble in the long run. Last but not least, this product comes in a 16-ounce bottle, providing sufficient oil for long-term use.

Although the product is quite good at what it does, it’s disappointing that it fails to prevent corrosion. To be precise, oil might not be the best option to consider if your air tool is eroding due to acidic components.

Volume:‎ 16 fl oz | Dimensions: ‎9.38" x 2.47" x 2.47" | Weight: ‎15.7 oz | Water Dispersal: ‎Yes | Rust Protection: ‎Yes | Corrosion Protection: ‎No

3. Lucas Oil 10200 1 Quart Air Tool Lubricant - Best Value for Money

For those looking for a long-lasting solution to their frequent tool maintenance needs, the Lucas Oil 10200 1-quart air tool lubricant is a smart budget-friendly alternative. The oil has been specially formulated to deliver nothing less than top-notch performance and defines value for money at its finest. Let’s find out more!

This one is quite a smart solution featuring a unique formula to safeguard your pneumatic tools from early rusting. If you’re observing any damage due to rust in your devices, applying this oil will help in eliminating the risk of significantly extending its longevity. Like our previous pick, this tool is resistant to extreme weather, which allows you to use the device at any temperature without being damaged by heat.

We’ve also tested this product to be an excellent water dispersal agent, which appears to be a common Lucas oil feature at this point. This feature prevents any scope of water jamming in the tool, which lessens the chances of rusting by a fair deal. 

Not to forget, it also prevents the possibility of a blowout, which is very common amongst pneumatic tools while being used roughly. Consequently, you can enjoy a smooth and uninterrupted working session.

There isn’t much difference between the 10200 and the 10216 units, except its size and quantity. Likewise, this product isn’t also very efficient at handling damages caused by acidic components. But apart from corrosion prevention, it’s a best-value product to consider.

Volume:‎ 32 fl oz | Dimensions: ‎14" x 14" x 10" | Weight: 32.48 oz | Water Dispersal: ‎Yes | Rust Protection: ‎Yes | Corrosion Protection: ‎No

4. Sta-Lube SL2531 Automotive Accessories 15 Fl Oz. Lubricant

When it comes to premium automotive accessory protection, Sta-Lube is a brand that we can rely upon with our eyes closed. The SL2531 15 fl oz lubricant has everything you’d need from a professional air tool oil, and its sufficient size makes it a deal we can’t afford to miss. That said, let’s find out whether it suits your requirements.

First, this product redefines ultra-smooth performance with its excellent formula, which gives a significant advantage over its competition. It is quite efficient at lubricating the harshest and roughest of pneumatic tools, which makes it very suitable for heavy-duty commercial usage. For those who don’t mind spending a little extra for sheer quality, this product stands out to be a brilliant option to consider.

One thing about this oil that we’re in love with is its compliance with almost any pneumatic tool. This product can lubricate the machine with sheer precision, whether it’s an air motor, air ratchet, grinder, hammer, or drill. Not to forget, this product also prevents any scope of rust formation on the tool surface, enhancing its overall life by a considerable amount. 

Unlike most of our budget-friendly picks, this oil provides 100% protection from corrosion that occurs through acidic components. Last but not least, this product comes packed in a large 15 oz bottle, so be assured that it’ll last for a lifetime.

As you’ve guessed, this oil is a little more expensive than the standard alternatives, which may restrict some from making the purchase. We’ve also acknowledged that this oil isn’t VOC compliant in California, so that’s bad news for many.

Volume:‎ ‎15 fl oz | Dimensions: ‎1.63" x 3.75" x 9" | Weight: 16.16 oz | Water Dispersal: ‎Yes | Rust Protection: ‎Yes | Corrosion Protection: ‎Yes

5. Ingersoll Rand 10P Edge Series Premium Grade Air Tool Oil

If you have any experience in pneumatic tool maintenance, you’re most likely not a stranger to Ingersoll Rand. The brand has a rich history of developing brilliant innovations to stay one step ahead of the game. Its 10P Edge air tool oil has been recently making a buzz, so let’s find out whether it lives up to the hype!

The main reason this product never fails to be a fan favorite is that it’s extremely easy to use. We’ve faced zero viscosity while using this product on almost any tool category, which adds an advantage. You can use this oil with the utmost smoothness and absolutely no interruptions. It features a unique formula that is guaranteed to enhance your tool’s life through continuous use.

Moving on, the product also comes with a redcap for quick snipping, which makes it a lot easier to use. We are also impressed by its compatibility with hydraulic tools, which further enhances its versatility by a great deal. 

Not to forget, it manages to provide optimal protection against rusting, safeguarding the surfaces from early damage for longer life. Many users have further suggested that using it every 48 hours is ideal for the best results.

Coming to what’s in the box, you get a pack of four 1-pint oil bottles in this package. In other words, this product is assured to outlast every other recommendation on our list. Last but not least, this product can be availed at a very affordable price, which is pretty impressive.

Quite frankly, there isn’t much to complain about this product, as it’s pretty reliable and affordable. However, numerous users have frequently complained that although the nozzle can be snipped easily, it can be a little difficult to open it accurately and may cause spillage.

Volume:‎ 16 fl oz | Dimensions: ‎3.25" x 2" x 8.75" | Weight: 16 oz | Water Dispersal: ‎Yes | Rust Protection: ‎Yes | Corrosion Protection: No

6. BOSTITCH PREMOIL-20OZ Premium Pneumatic Tool Oil

BOSTITCH is a brand that thousands of American families trust blindly, as this brand has always changed the game with its world-class innovations. The PREMOIL 20 oz air tool oil defines premium efficiency at its best, and the credit goes to its ultra-high performance and beginner-stage ease of use. Let’s find out more!

For those who are looking for an oil that can restore industrial-grade strength in their tools, the PREMOIL unit is an efficient option to consider. This product works best with nail guns, and offers nothing less than optimal performance upgrade and extended longevity, once applied. This oil is also available at a very pocket-friendly budget, giving us another reason to buy it for maintenance. Also, the product is guaranteed to last for a lifetime.

For the price, you get a 20-ounce bottle that offers sufficient oil quantity for long-term usage. We’re also quite impressed by the fact that this oil is a non-detergent solution, which raises its value even higher. To put it simply, the product formula doesn’t involve any added chemicals and comprises 100% pure oil. The purity that it offers at such a reasonable price makes it a deal that can’t be missed at any cost. 

We’ve noticed that a prevalent issue among numerous air tool oils is being consolidated during colder temperatures. However, the BOSTITCH product is tested to be reasonably weatherproof, which saves it from any damage by cold temperatures. Last but not least, this product offers 100% protection from rust formation and acid corrosion.

Unfortunately, this product fails to dissolve any sludge formation inside the pneumatic tools, which gives it a significant disadvantage against our top picks on the list. Furthermore, we’ve also found it to be a subpar water dispersal agent, which further restricts its versatility.

Volume:‎ 20 fl oz | Dimensions: ‎4" x 2.3" x 7.9" | Weight: 8 oz | Water Dispersal: ‎No | Rust Protection: ‎Yes | Corrosion Protection: ‎Yes

7. Super Lube 12004 4 Oz. Air Tool Lubricant

The penultimate pick on our list is the Super Lube 12004 air tool lubricant, a product that has been making waves in the market with its versatile applications. Most importantly, this oil is recommended by professionals due to its incredible rust-protection qualities. Let’s have a more in-depth look at its core features!

First and foremost, this product is one of the best anti-rust agents that we’ve tested till now, so big ups for Super Lube. This product starts showing visible results against any sort of rust formation within its first few uses, which makes it a complete value-for-money product. This unique formula extends your product’s life by a great deal, which is incredible for its price.

Not to forget, the model also ranks very high in terms of user comfort and convenience. To break it down, you get a smart nozzle that makes handling a lot easier for the users. In this sense, the model ensures very low spillage and can be very handy for beginners with zero prior experience at tool maintenance. Also, we’ve noticed that the oil doesn’t lose efficiency under colder temperatures, enhancing its versatility a notch.

We’re fans of its brilliant formulation that eliminates any sort of sludge buildup inside the pneumatic tools. This way, using this tool can help in keeping the tool’s speed and performance intact for a more extended period. 

It’s a little upsetting that the model doesn’t offer sufficient size and quantity, as 4 ounces is too low for many. Furthermore, the product isn’t also very resistant to extreme heat, which makes it a little inconvenient to work with. Last but not least, the model fails to stop any scope of acid corrosion.

Volume:‎ 4 fl oz | Dimensions: 1.7" x 1.7" x 6.5" | Weight: 0.24 oz | Water Dispersal: ‎Yes | Rust Protection: ‎Yes | Corrosion Protection: ‎No

8. CLI-Syntec Premium 16 Fl. Oz. Industrial Pneumatic Tool Oil

We’re ending our list with an incredible treat to bargain hunters, as the CLI-Syntec premium air tool oil delivers nothing less than industrial-grade efficiency at a fraction of its cost. This product is also compatible with almost any pneumatic tool, which defines best values like nothing else. Let’s check out its core features!

When it comes to the best values, this product takes the cake, as it offers quite a lot for its price. First and foremost, it arrives in a 16-ounce bottle that contains sufficient oil to last for months of continuous usage. Furthermore, this unit features an incredible formula that helps in maintaining the tool’s longevity within its first few uses only. As a bonus, it offers optimal protection from heat and moisture.

This product takes the cake for out-of-the-box convenience with its elasticity preservation technology. Simply put, the oil can last for a considerably long time after it is applied to a tool, which defines value and efficiency at its best. 

You only need to use a few droplets at once, and you’d be good to go for months. It also helps in minimizing friction inside the tool that’s caused by jamming and drastically enhances the motor’s performance.

Although this product is pretty efficient at preventing rust formation, its ability to eliminate acid corrosion is utterly disappointing. We’re also upset about how this oil can get consolidated in colder temperatures, which is pretty disadvantageous compared to our other recommendations.

Volume:‎ 16 fl oz | Dimensions: 6.42" x 2.4" x 2.28" | Weight: 15.2 oz | Water Dispersal: ‎No | Rust Protection: ‎Yes | Corrosion Protection: No

Best Air Tool Oils Comparison Table

Product Volume Dimensions Weight Water Dispersal Rust Protection Corrosion Protection
MARVEL MM080R 4 Oz. Air Tool Oil 4 fl oz 7.2" x 5.8" x 5.4" 4 oz Yes Yes No
Lucas Oil 10216 16 Ounce Air Tool Lubricant 16 fl oz ‎9.38" x 2.47" x 2.47" 15.7 oz Yes Yes No
Lucas Oil 10200 1 Quart Air Tool Lubricant 32 fl oz 14" x 14" x 10" 32.48 oz Yes Yes No
Sta-Lube SL2531 Automotive Accessories 15 Fl Oz. Lubricant ‎15 fl oz 1.63" x 3.75" x 9" 16.16 oz Yes Yes Yes
Ingersoll Rand 10P Edge Series Premium Grade Air Tool Oil 16 fl oz 3.25" x 2" x 8.75" 16 oz Yes Yes No
BOSTITCH PREMOIL-20OZ Premium Pneumatic Tool Oil 20 fl oz 4" x 2.3" x 7.9" 8 oz No Yes Yes
Super Lube 12004 4 Oz. Air Tool Lubricant 4 fl oz 1.7" x 1.7" x 6.5" 0.24 oz Yes Yes No
CLI-Syntec Premium 16 Fl. Oz. Industrial Pneumatic Tool Oil 16 fl oz 6.42" x 2.4" x 2.28" 15.2 oz No Yes No

Buying Guide for the Best Air Tool Oil

Before we take your leave, here are the most important factors to keep in mind before putting your money in a pneumatic tool oil. As these products are selling like hotcakes, it’s best to be well informed to avoid being fooled into buying an unreliable one. That said, make sure to include these factors while shopping for an air tool oil.

Lubrication Quality

Let’s be practical here; it’s just oil, and its primary motive is to lubricate the tools. Let’s not forget that different tools come with distinctive mechanisms and not every oil can adhere to all of them. That’s why it’s imperative to make sure that the product comes with sufficient lubrication characteristics. For instance, thinner oil is always more appropriate for thorough lubrication.

Rust/Corrosion Resistance

Resistance to toxicity is a universal need, whether it’s your personal life or your workspace tools. That said, pneumatic tools are also popular as rust/corrosion-resistant agents, which broadens their versatility. However, not most of the products in the market offer optimal protection from corrosion developed due to acidic components. But then again, it can be availed if you’re willing to slide in a little extra cash for superb quality.

Heat/Cold Temperature Resistance

Most of the users are mostly frustrated because the oil turns out to be ineffective against moisture, or it becomes consolidated under colder temperatures. That said, if you’re looking for cheap oil for temporary fixes, neither of these should bother you. But, if you’re a professional looking for a reliable long-term solution, it’s vital to keep these factors in mind while choosing your oil.

Can I use any type of oil for my pneumatic tools?

It is recommended to use air tool oil specifically designed for pneumatic tools. Regular household oils or automotive oils may not provide adequate lubrication and could potentially damage the tools. Air tool oils have properties that make them suitable for the unique requirements of pneumatic tools.

How often should I apply air tool oil?

The frequency of oil application depends on the manufacturer’s recommendations for your specific tools. Some tools may require oiling before each use, while others may need it after a certain number of hours of operation. Refer to the tool’s user manual or the oil manufacturer’s instructions for the recommended oiling schedule.

Can air tool oil be used for other applications?

Air tool oil is formulated specifically for pneumatic tools and may not be suitable for other applications. It is designed to provide the necessary lubrication and protection required by pneumatic tools’ unique mechanisms. For other purposes, such as general lubrication or household applications, it’s best to use oils specifically intended for those purposes.

How should I store air tool oil?

Air tool oil should be stored in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and extreme temperatures. Ensure the container is tightly sealed to prevent moisture absorption and contamination. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for any specific storage requirements mentioned on the product label.

Can I mix different brands or types of air tool oil?

It is generally recommended to stick to one brand or type of air tool oil to maintain consistent performance and avoid potential compatibility issues. Mixing different brands or types of oil may affect the oil’s properties and performance, leading to inadequate lubrication or other problems. If you need to switch to a different oil, it’s best to thoroughly clean the tool and follow the manufacturer’s guidelines.

Can air tool oil improve the performance of my pneumatic tools?

Yes, using the right air tool oil can improve the performance of pneumatic tools. Proper lubrication helps reduce friction, heat, and wear, resulting in smoother operation and increased efficiency. Regular maintenance with high-quality air tool oil can extend the life of your tools and ensure optimal performance.

Conclusion

We’re hoping that you’ve enjoyed going through our extensive guide to the 8 best air tool oils in the market. Here’s a brief highlight of the few products that we personally found to be the best in the game:

The Marvel MM080R unit is our editor’s pick, as its overall performance is unparalleled. However, if you’re looking for a more budget-friendly option, then the Lucas Oils are a good enough choice. Last but not least, the Sta-Lube oil serves correctly to those who don’t mind spending more for professional-grade performance.

Have you found your pick yet? Let us know in the comments below. That said, we’ll see you soon with more interesting articles, so stay tuned!

Related Articles

13 Best Portable Air Compressors 

13 Best Air Compressors  

How To Refill Co2 Tank with Air Compressor?

13 Best Quiet Air Compressors for Your Home 

Best 60-Gallon Air Compressors to Use 

13 Best 10-Gallon Air Compressors for the Buck 

11 Best 4000+ PSI Pressure Washers of 2022

Refrigerators are essential for any kitchen.

It keeps your food fresh and prevents it from spoiling too early. Sometimes, you might also need it for food prep, especially if you need to keep something cool overnight.

Investing in a new refrigerator can be complicated and overwhelming, especially when you're not sure it'll be worth it. After all, they're not the cheapest appliance to have.

Here are the best refrigerators on the market to help you find the best one for your needs, budget, and preferences.

The 8 Best Refrigerators of 2023

Besides coming in different brands, refrigerators differ significantly in their styles and technologies. It can be overwhelming to look at and experiment with this type of technology.

Luckily, you don't have to do that anymore. I've tried and tested many to learn which are the best refrigerators.

I've considered the different features of these refrigerators, from configurations and styles to their capacity and notable features.

Here are the top 8 refrigerators you can consider for your home.

1. LG ‎LFCS27596S - Best Overall

When it comes to refrigerators, this 27-cubic foot refrigerator from LG has to be the best one. It's functional, aesthetic, and organized. It comes complete with shelves and crisper drawers for all your organizational needs.

It even features the Glide N' Serve, a drawer specifically designed to set different temperatures in certain sections.

It can form a specific compartment to be cooler than others, and these deli drawers are perfect for meat products and other kinds of produce.

It's also easy to see what's inside thanks to its InstaView Door-in-Door window on its right refrigerator door. You don't even have to open your fridge to see what's inside.

The refrigerator features a fingerprint-resistant stainless steel finish, giving it a sleek and stylish look that can easily fit your kitchen.

While it's not a smart refrigerator, it does have all the necessary features to do what a fridge should. I highly recommend this, especially for families who spend a lot on food and don't want that to go to waste.

Dimensions: 36 D x 38 W x 73 H inches | Style: French door | Total Capacity: 27 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice maker | Available Finishes: Stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes

2. Samsung RF27T5501SR - Best Value for Money

If you're looking for something that goes above and beyond what a typical refrigerator can do, this 27.7 cubic foot refrigerator from Samsung is for you.

It's high-tech and has ample storage space, which is excellent for families and large households. It also features a sleek stainless steel finish to match your other appliances.

Its Ice Max is one of the best ice makers on the market, storing up to 4.2 pounds of ice! It's great for gatherings and families who love to add plenty of cold drinks to their gatherings.

The best part about this smart refrigerator is how it can help you in the kitchen. It can create shopping lists, search for recipes online, and even play music while you work!

You can easily see the inside through the screen on the right door without opening the fridge door, letting cold air out.

It's one of the best smart fridges on the market, and worth the price. Not only will it keep your food fresh, but it even serves as an intuitive kitchen assistant.

Dimensions: 37.5 D x 72 W x 37.5 H inches | Style: French door style | Total Capacity: 27.7 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice and water dispenser | Available Finishes: Stainless steel and black stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes

3. Frigidaire FFHT1425VV - Best Budget Option

If you're looking for the most affordable refrigerator possible, this 13.9 cubic foot top freezer model from Frigidaire is one of the best options.

It features two adjustable glass shelves and a half-sized deli drawer, which can help you easily retrieve the contents of your refrigerator. You can easily access the food you need, depending on how you organize it.

On top of being affordable, it's also an energy saver. It's estimated to consume only about $40 of electricity annually. It lessens your carbon footprint and your bills.

Given its price, however, it has a smaller capacity than the other models on this list. It also lacks smart features and an ice/water dispenser, limiting it severely.

That said, it does excel in keeping your food fresh for a small price. It's an excellent choice for those who do little grocery shopping and only need minimal refrigerator size.

Dimensions: 28 D x 29.37 W x 59.87 H inches | Style: Top freezer | Total Capacity: 13.9 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice maker | Available Finishes: Black, white, brushed steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes

4. LG LFXS26973S - Best for French Door Refrigerators

This 21.8-cubic foot LG refrigerator has to be the best French door refrigerator on the market, thanks to its features and functions.

These include four adjustable glass shelves, including the Glide N' Serve. You also get a full-width shelf above the double crisper drawers for your vegetables and other fresh goods.

Its storage space and included shelves are exceptional for easy organization. You can even dedicate a tray for snacks, appetizers, and more.

It's Wi-Fi enabled, letting you control the fridge's temperature from the LG ThinQ App. However, it's not as high-tech as other similar refrigerators.

All these features make it one of the best French door refrigerators. They're worth adding to your kitchen if you want a sleek French-door refrigerator.

Dimensions: 30 D x 69 W x 36 H inches | Style: French door | Total Capacity: 21.8 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice and water dispenser | Available Finishes: Stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes

5. Bosch B36CT80SNS - Best for Counter-Depth Refrigerators

When it comes to counter-depth refrigerators, you might automatically think about their small capacities. However, this 20.8 cubic foot refrigerator from Bosch breaks that stereotype.

Despite being a counter-depth refrigerator, the upper part is filled with a deli drawer and compartments with an integrated FarmFresh System, keeping your food in tip-top shape.

It has a built-in ice maker known for creating unique pyramid-shaped ice. Personally, this is just an adorable feature that I enjoy. Since the ice/water dispenser is inside, it will keep your drinks cold.

Temperature can easily be tracked thanks to its Wi-Fi connectivity and the Bosch Home Connect App. You can control your refrigerator with a simple tap.

The downside of this refrigerator is that its freezer is smaller despite its large capacity. Its storage is half a typical French door fridge, making it more limited than expected.

If you're the type who needs more in the refrigerator department but doesn't want to sacrifice aesthetics, consider this reliable and sleek counter-depth refrigerator from Bosch.

Dimensions: 31.13 D x 35.63 W x 72 H inches | Style: French door | Total Capacity: 20.8 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice dispenser and water dispenser | Available Finishes: Stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes

6. SAMSUNG RS27T5200SR - Best for Side-by-Side Refrigerators

If you're looking for a reliable side-by-side refrigerator, try looking into this 27.4 cubic foot model from Samsung.

This refrigerator addresses the common issues faced by these types of fridges. Thanks to its multi-vent system, cold air is evenly distributed throughout the refrigerator.

Its built-in ice maker and water dispenser are accessed through the door, making it easier to get into the proper hydration routine of drinking eight glasses daily.

The best part about the ice/water dispenser is its child lock and safety features. You can also choose between having cubed or crushed ice.

It has a fingerprint-resistant stainless steel finish, making it easier to clean and maintain. This refrigerator is sure to stay sleek for a long time.

However, the biggest downside of this refrigerator is its lack of Energy Star certification. It might raise your energy bills slightly, depending on how you use it.

Dimensions: 76 D x 38 W x 36 H inches | Style: Side-by-side | Total Capacity: 27.4 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Water and ice dispensers | Available Finishes: Stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: No

7. LG LRDCS2603S - Best for Bottom Freezer Refrigerators

If you need a larger freezer compartment, check out LG's 26-cubic foot bottom freezer refrigerator. It provides more storage space designed explicitly for your freezing needs.

Besides storage, this bottom freezer refrigerator was designed to be durable with its industrial handles. It also has auto-closing hinges for safety and energy efficiency.

Its interior features tempered and spill-protected glass shelves, which are adjustable, depending on your preferences. The freezer drawer contains an ice maker that can be stocked with lots of ice.

While it's not a smart refrigerator, this bottom freezer refrigerator does the best to maintain freshness. It has an air filter that must be replaced every six months to keep the fridge clean and fresh.

It's pretty expensive for a bottom freezer. However, since it's Energy Star certified, you're sure it'll save you a lot of money in the long run.

This bottom freezer model is specially made for those who like to stock up on frozen goods.

Dimensions: 35 D x 38 W x 73 H inches | Style: Bottom freezer | Total Capacity: 26 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice maker | Available Finishes: Stainless steel and black stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes

8. Bosch 800 Series - Best for Luxury

If you're looking for a more luxurious and classic-looking refrigerator, this 20.5-cubic foot French door refrigerator from Bosch is a welcome addition to any stylish home.

It features a flexible configuration, allowing the owner to adjust temperatures according to their needs easily. It makes up for its major downside so that you can maximize the available storage space.

Its middle drawer is usually dedicated to wines and other drinks, keeping them cool when you need a drink. However, you can easily change it as required.

It has an ice/water dispenser located inside to maintain its sleek outward appearance. Since you'll get an internal water dispenser, it's more likely to keep everything cold.

However, the downside of this model is its storage space. Unlike the classic French door fridge, this is a counter-depth type, meaning it's not as efficient in the storage department.

If you're looking to invest in this French-door refrigerator, it's best to consider its positives and negatives.

Dimensions: 28.8 D x 35.6 W x 72 H inches | Style: French door | Total Capacity: 20.5 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice maker, water dispenser | Available Finishes: Stainless steel and black stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes

Comparison of Top Refrigerators

Top Refrigerators Dimensions Style Total Capacity Dispensers Available Finishes Energy Star Certified
LG ‎LFCS27596S 36 D x 38 W x 73 H inches French door 27 Cu. Ft Ice maker Stainless steel Yes
Samsung RF27T5501SR 37.5 D x 72 W x 37.5 H inches French door style 27.7 Cu. Ft Ice and water dispenser Stainless steel and black stainless steel Yes
Frigidaire FFHT1425VV 28 D x 29.37 W x 59.87 H inches Top freezer 13.9 Cu. Ft Ice maker Black, white, brushed steel Yes
LG LFXS26973S 30 D x 69 W x 36 H inches French door 21.8 Cu. Ft Ice and water dispenser Stainless steel Yes
Bosch B36CT80SNS 31.13 D x 35.63 W x 72 H inches French door 20.8 Cu. Ft Ice dispenser and water dispenser Stainless steel Yes
SAMSUNG RS27T5200SR 76 D x 38 W x 36 H inches Side-by-side 27.4 Cu. Ft Water and ice dispensers Stainless steel Yes
LG LRDCS2603S 35 D x 38 W x 73 H inches Bottom freezer 26 Cu. Ft Ice maker Stainless steel and black stainless steel Yes
Bosch 800 Series 28.8 D x 35.6 W x 72 H inches French door 20.5 Cu. Ft Ice maker, water dispenser Stainless steel and black stainless steel Yes

Types of Refrigerators

There's a reason for certain refrigerators to have more doors or shelves than others. There's also a reason for freezer compartments to be in various locations.

These configurations are what differentiate one type of refrigerator from another. They all have pros and cons, depending on their design and your needs as a customer.

Here is a comparison of the different types of refrigerators to know which would best fit your home.

French Door Refrigerator

The French door refrigerator is often known for its price. However, French door models also tend to be one of the most preferred by people.

Its top part is a two-door refrigerator compartment that features wide and adjustable shelves for your food. This feature makes it easier to see and get your food.

The freezer compartment is at the bottom. You can pull it out like a drawer, depending on the design of the refrigerator. You can even find a French door model with 4 or 5 doors for various cooling options.

They usually include an indoor ice and water dispenser. Some also have more smart features to help you adjust your refrigerator with a tap on a smart device.

They're known to be extremely spacious and aesthetically pleasing, making them the preferred choice, especially for those who can afford them.

However, its freezer space is often limited, and you'd have to adjust to the space given. Additional features can also raise the price.

Counter-Depth Refrigerator

Counter-depth refrigerators have front edges aligned with the kitchen's cabinets and countertop. It makes them look like they're specifically built for their spot in the kitchen.

Some people prefer a counter-depth refrigerator because they're more stylish and easily blend in with the rest of the appliances.

A counter-depth refrigerator isn't as deep as the other types on this list. On top of having a smaller structure, it also tends to be more expensive than a standard-sized refrigerator.

The counter-depth style is usually combined with other types as it focuses more on the depth of the refrigerator rather than the configuration of the two kinds of compartments.

Side-by-Side Refrigerator

A side-by-side refrigerator is less expensive than a French-door refrigerator. They're known as space savers and will help keep items within sight.

The left door is for the freezer, while the right is for the refrigerator. You wouldn't have to bend down to access one of these anymore.

Another positive is that you get more freezer space than the other types since you'll have a whole side dedicated to it.

Its fridge and freezer compartments are different in size, with the freezer being more narrow. As a result, it might not be easy to put pizza boxes and baking trays because of their width.

If you decide to get a side-by-side refrigerator, it's important NOT to overfill your freezer because it would be bad for the shelves. Your overall cooling system might also get overworked.

If you still need more freezer space, you might want to consider a chest freezer or an upright freezer, depending on how much space you need.

Top Freezer Refrigerator

The top freezer refrigerator features a freezer on top of a single-door fridge. It allows the freezer compartment to be at eye level, making it easier to access it.

The best top-freezer refrigerators are more efficient and affordable than others.

However, top freezer refrigerators have fewer features than the previous three. They also tend to have fewer aesthetics and can appear bulkier than the previous ones.

You would also have to bend down to get to the lower shelves of the refrigerator.

Bottom Freezer Refrigerator

The bottom freezer refrigerator is the opposite of the previous type, with the freezer compartment at the bottom.

It keeps your refrigerator at eye level while its freezer is at the bottom. The downside is you'd have to bend down to access this compartment.

Instead of a door, you get a freezer drawer that you pull out to access your freezer, much like a French door design. It does provide more storage space in this section.

These are best for people who rarely use freezers. That way, they don't have to worry about the occasional defrosting needed to maintain that compartment.

How to Find the Right Refrigerator for You

Nowadays, refrigerators come in different sizes and feature different technology. It can be overwhelming to look into these features, especially with how much can go on with one appliance.

It's best to narrow them down to help you know which features would help you daily.

You need to consider these factors to find the right refrigerator for you.

Type/Configuration

As previously mentioned, refrigerators come in different types and configurations. Some may have doors or freezers placed differently from others.

Some might prefer a French door model, while others might prefer a side-by-side. You might need a specific type of refrigerator because of what you buy and the number of people in your household.

These types vary in cost and features, affecting a person's preference. Some might have to settle for a specific type because of their budget.

It's best to know the type of refrigerator you want and what would best fit your lifestyle.

Size/Exterior Dimensions

When choosing a refrigerator, take note of its size, both inside and out.

You'd need to measure the space in advance, taking note of the height, depth, and width dedicated to the appliance.

Adding a few inches of clearance is best so your refrigerator won't be wedged into the space. The space also helps the fridge work better, letting heat dissipate as it works.

The interior space would also affect how much you put into it. You can dedicate a bigger space for groceries or adjust your purchases to get a smaller refrigerator.

Finish

The refrigerator's finish is another factor to consider since it will affect the appearance of your kitchen.

It can come in stainless steel, black, white, and other colors. You can choose one that best fits your other appliances and your kitchen's décor.

Some may even have a glass door option that lets you choose what to take out without opening the fridge. However, this may require you to organize your refrigerator more to keep everything nice and presentable.

Choosing the finish that best fits your kitchen is ideal, especially with the variety available. Refrigerators tend to have different finishes for one model.

Brand

Appliances come in different brands, including refrigerators. Some can specialize in certain types of refrigerators or can excel with their cooling technology compared to others.

The best refrigerator brands you can consider are LG, Bosch, GE, Whirlpool, Samsung, Frigidaire, and KitchenAid. They are the best in terms of functions, designs, and longevity.

These brands can also have smaller and more compact refrigerators for dormitories and apartments.

The brand you choose can affect the features you get. Some brands are more high-tech or high-end than others. It would also affect the cost as others tend to be more expensive.

Researching the specific brand of your refrigerator can affect how you choose your new appliance.

Refrigerator Space

This space can vary depending on the design and style you purchase. Those with a deeper and wider fridge would automatically have more space.

Normally, a fridge compartment can hold more cubic feet (cu. ft.) than a freezer. However, it can also depend on the model and the brand itself.

Different models can have their unique ways of keeping this space organized, from shelves to refrigerator drawers. There would even be compartments specifically for fresh food storage.

Check the build of the refrigerator shelves to see how much they can hold.

Its door shelves also tend to be affected by the price. Some can have a higher capacity than others.

Freezer Space

The size of your freezer tends to be affected by the refrigerator space and its model. Some freezers tend to be smaller than others

When getting a new refrigerator, it's best to consider how much space you'd need for the freezer. Check how many cubic feet (cu. ft.) it can hold and compare it to other similar styles if required.

You can also check the freezer door for any extra compartments you can use.

Ice Maker/Water Dispenser

Dispensers tend to be more of a luxury feature commonly found in a French door refrigerator or a side-by-side refrigerator.

Some people might find this feature necessary, while others can have separate appliances for them. The benefit of having an ice maker and water dispenser is that you have everything in one machine.

It's usually easier to forego the ice maker since you could always get an ice tray. It would take up more space in the freezer, but it's a lot cheaper.

Know your preference in advance. It's best to skip these features if you think you're not going to use them, especially since they do add to the cost.

Additional Features

Refrigerators can come with extra features besides dispensers. These can add to the things your refrigerator can do to make life easier or improve how you manage it.

These are some of the additional features you can get, depending on the kind of refrigerator you get:

  • Water Filtration System: Some built-in water dispensers can come with a filtration system to provide more refreshing water.
  • Flexible Compartment: If you notice that your refrigerator has an extra door or drawer, it can be used as extra storage space for fresh and frozen foods. Its temperature is easily adjusted to match the type of food you'll be putting in.
  • Smart Functions: These additional functions are usually what make refrigerators more high-tech. You can adjust and monitor your refrigerator from a phone or tablet using Wi-Fi connectivity.
  • Swiveling Door Bin: This feature is usually found in refrigerators with a door-in-door design, allowing access to some of the contents without opening the main doors
  • Inventory Trackers: Some of the smarter refrigerators can note if you're running low on certain items in your refrigerator to help you come up with a shopping list.
  • Through-the-Door Ice Dispensers: This type of ice maker makes it more convenient for you to get ice. Most through-the-door ice dispensers tend to be combined with the water dispenser for easier convenience.
  • Door-in-Door Shelves: This design allows you to easily access shelves without opening the whole door. Having a door-in-door would also limit the cool air escaping.

While these features may sound fantastic, it's best to ONLY get those you're sure to need daily. They can be the reason why your refrigerator is expensive.

Energy Star Ratings

Appliances are required to have their energy ratings listed, as these affect the environment and your electricity bill.

If you notice that a refrigerator is Energy Star Certified, they're sure to be energy-efficient, as tested by professionals.

It can lower your electricity bill and lessen your carbon footprint, making it an excellent investment in the long run.

Retailers

You can opt to purchase your refrigerator from the manufacturer itself or through a local retailer. It usually depends on what is more convenient for you.

If you're looking into retailers, comparing prices and the service they provide is best. Some retailers may offer more for a product at a more affordable price.

It's also best to go to retailers trusted by the manufacturer to ensure that you only get the best models. These would also include the warranties and accessories that normally come with buying from the manufacturer.

Price

While entry-level models would cost around $400, I recommend going for the more expensive basic models if you're looking for something cheap. These should be about $750.

The standard models can cost from $1,500 to $1,800. However, it can go up to $4,000, depending on the brand, design, and features.

Additional features tend to heavily contribute to the price of the refrigerator. Know which features are necessary for your daily activities.

It's best to set a specific budget so you'll know which refrigerators can be considered for your home. This will prevent you from overspending on the appliance.

Warranties

The usual warranty for a refrigerator is one year. However, it can also depend on the manufacturer.

It's best to look into the warranties provided, as this ensures the craftsmanship of your appliance. If something happens, warranties can cover damages as per terms and conditions.

Some manufacturers can offer expanded or extended warranties for an additional price. However, these tend to be more expensive than repairs or even replacing your refrigerator.

How long do refrigerators last?

On average, refrigerators usually last around 10 to 12 years.

Many factors can affect the longevity of your refrigerator. You’ll have to consider its make and quality, how well you maintain it, and how much you use it.

Its environment can also affect its longevity. Refrigerators that are moved a lot or are exposed to garages and environmental changes can easily break down.

To extend your refrigerator’s lifespan, it’s recommended to have the coils and compressor cleaned every six months. Do it more regularly if you have pets or lots of dust at home.

What is a standard-sized refrigerator?

A refrigerator’s size usually depends on the type of fridge you’re getting. You’ll also have to look into the model of the refrigerator.

In terms of width, a standard-sized refrigerator would usually fall between 24 to 40 inches. Of course, wider refrigerators won’t fit in smaller spaces.

The standard height of a refrigerator falls between 62 to 72 inches. Bottom freezer and top freezer models tend to be on the smaller end of the spectrum.

Depth for standard refrigerators tends to be between 24 to 40 inches. It can provide more space for your food, beverages, and other cold storage needs.

These are all relative and can change according to the model and style of your refrigerator.

My Top Picks

Now that you know more about choosing the best refrigerators based on what your kitchen needs, you might want to know the stand-out options on this list.

Here's a recap of my top picks for the best refrigerators in the market.

Best Budget Option - Frigidaire FFHT1425VV

If you're looking for something affordable that will save you space, you can check out this 13.9-Cu. Ft. refrigerator from Frigidaire.

Not only will it save you money, but it will also help you save energy and keep your food fresh.

Best Value for Money - Samsung RF27T5501SR

If you don't mind splurging a little for your refrigerator, I recommend this 27.7-Cu. Ft. smart refrigerator from Samsung.

It has many reliable features, like the ice dispenser, deli drawer, and more. On top of that is its ability to help you in the kitchen with its smart technology.

Whether it's to store food or search for a recipe online, this high-tech French door refrigerator is one of the best in the market.

Best Overall - LG ‎LFCS27596S

Suppose you're looking for the best refrigerator, this 27-Cu. Ft. French door fridge from LG is the one for you.

It has an internal ice/water dispenser, a door-in-door design, and all the needed accessories to keep your food fresh and ready to eat.

Conclusion

Finding the best refrigerator for your kitchen doesn't have to be tricky as long as you know your budget and the features your home will need.

Know which will be best for your household, especially with this large investment.

Cartooning is so much more than simply drawing a few figures - without good writing, the best of artwork has no value.

And similarly, if the cartooning characters aren't expressive enough, even the wittiest of one-liners and jokes fall flat.

Drawing cartoons isn't just about exaggerating a few facial features or comedic timing. Every artist has a style of their own, which they display in their stories and characters and their perspectives on the goings-on of the world around us.

Such a complicated craft requires a deft master and someone you can look to for advice. If you have to reach the top, you have to stand on the shoulders of giants first.

Without further ado, the best cartooning books follow!

Best Cartooning Books

Do you want to learn how to create your own cartoon characters and comics? Cartooning is a great way to express yourself creatively and tell stories. Here is the list of 8 best cartooning books to help you get started:

  1. Cartooning | Philosophy and Practice by Ivan Brunetti - Best for Personal Style Development

If you're new to the game and you don't know where to start, this is it. This book isn't exactly a step-by-step guidebook rather, it's about the art of cartooning itself and what it's all about.

This book takes an in-depth look at how storytelling works, what's most important when conceptualizing characters, and all the types of media and tools you can experiment with. But it also delivers solid knowledge of all the fundamental elements of comic book design.

This is the ideal book for forging your personal style and discovering your own design and virtual language. In the beginning, you'd be in dire need of some perspective, and there's no better person to learn from than Ivan Brunetti, who has been featured several times in the NY Times and the New Yorker.

Contents

Ivan Brunetti presents 15 distinct lessons on cartooning and its progression through the ages. All these lessons are very wittily worded and have a lot of detail on common terminology, popular techniques, helpful tools, and of course, theory.

Brunetti's own illustrations make this a very lively book -and you will start with spontaneous drawings and then move to single-panel strips and ultimately, complicated multi-page stories. Simple exercises and assignments will help you move past your fears and will help you become more confident in your skills.

Author: Ivan Brunetti | Publication Year: 2011 | Format: Paperback | Page Count: 128 | Target Audience: Adults, Art Students | Skill Level: Intermediate | Key Topics Covered: Cartooning concepts, exercises, history

  1. Cartoon Faces | How to Draw Heads, Features Expressions by Christopher Hart - Best for Beginner Facial Expressions

Everything about a cartoon begins at the face -all emotions are conveyed through the face, and the comic panel starts with a cartoon character's facial expressions.

This book focuses on all the elements of a cartoon character's face and how it can be painted to elicit specific emotions from the characters and the readers. Christopher Hart is one of the best in the business when it comes to writing art books, and this one is no exception.

If the last book on our list was about getting an overall perspective, this is the step-by-step guide.

Contents

This book is the ultimate tutorial on the head, face, and expressions. This book has detailed sections on the eyebrows, mouths, and eye shapes so that you can cover a wide spectrum of emotions.

If that's not enough, there are also chapters on both male and female faces, from newborn babies to adults, in differing shapes and sizes.

It's not enough to know just how to draw a face, you will also need to learn how to turn that face in different directions, all the while maintaining the visual integrity of the character. There is also a chapter on shading the face and a bonus chapter on how to draw body parts conforming to the face.

This book is geared towards absolute beginners who have no background in art but have a knack for coming up with comic situations and witty words.

Author: Christopher Hart | Publication Year: 2014 | Format: Paperback | Page Count: 160 | Target Audience: Teens, Adults, Art Students | Skill Level: Beginner/Intermediate | Key Topics Covered: Cartooning techniques, facial features, expressions

  1. The Mad Art of Caricature | A Serious Guide to Drawing Funny Faces by Tom Richmond - Best for Mastering Caricatures

The caricature is the only form of the comic which have real-life people as their inspirations. Most celebrities and world-renowned people have a unique set of facial characteristics, which are then exaggerated to comic effect.

It can be hard to teach someone to distort facial features while still keeping the rest of the features proportional. Thus it can only be taught by someone like the award-winning Tom Richmond, who draws on three decades of experience as a caricaturist, in various fields such as books, advertising, video games, film, television animation, and even MAD magazine.

Contents

Every chapter focuses on something different, and it will teach you how to notice subtle differences in everyone, and then you can decide on what to exaggerate.

You'll be taught how to observe faces and people and then what to exaggerate to make for a successful caricature. You'll learn about all the different types of caricatures depending on what you're drawing for.

Put simply, "The Mad Art of Caricature!" is the Holy Grail of the book drawing caricatures. It is the most comprehensive and complete book on the art of caricature to ever be published with over 500 illustrations, laid out in a very reader-friendly way.

Author: Tom Richmond | Publication Year: 2011 | Format: Paperback | Page Count: 224 | Target Audience: Teens, Adults, Art Students | Skill Level: Intermediate/Advanced | Key Topics Covered: Caricature techniques, exaggeration, composition

  1. Cartooning the Head and Figure by Jack Hamm

This book is regarded as one of the classic art books and is one of the most popular cartooning books available for sale online. If Cartoon Faces only covered the face, this book provides a more holistic and all-around approach to drawing cartoons.

This book is targeted to everyone regardless of age or artistic talent or experience. The only requirement is that you are a fan of doodling and you want to get better at it.

Contents

It's hard to find a book that simplifies things to a greater extent than this one. The whole human anatomy is broken down into a series of very easily realizable shapes. It has over 3000 illustrations,  to teach you how to draw everything from facial muscles to postures to motion.

The best feature about this book is that it is designed so that you can go at your own pace from one chapter to another. You can also very easily pick up where you left off, even if you took a months-long break.

However, the only drawback is that the painting style feels like the Sunday comics in a newspaper. It might feel a little dated and old-school, but it is still an excellent book for beginners.

Author: Jack Hamm | Publication Year: 1986 | Format: Paperback | Page Count: 160 | Target Audience: Teens, Adults, Art Students | Skill Level: Beginner/Intermediate | Key Topics Covered: Anatomy, perspective, proportions, shading

  1. The Cartoonist’s Big Book of Drawing Animals by Christopher Hart

This is the second book by Christopher Hart that's on our list.  Anthropomorphizing animals is nothing new and has been around since Tom and Jerry. Early MGM Studios and Disney did a lot to make animal cartoons popular.

This book regularly makes the top 50 Art Books lists and is super popular online, in no small measure due to its immense simplicity and the sheer number of different animals you will learn to draw with the help of this book.

Contents

This book is divided into chapters depending on the kind of animal you wish to draw. Each of these chapters has in-depth information on how to capture every different emotion and how to draw each body part of that animal like faces, paws, feet, wings, and tails. In total, this book numbers more than 200 pages.

All the popular animals are present - which includes cats, dogs, horses,  lions, penguins, bears, tigers, and elephants. Apart from that, you also have all the sidekick animals like pigs, kangaroos, giraffes, and turtles.

Simple, guided tutorials show you how to portray every emotion from cutesy-sweet with huge eyes to begging to scheme with malicious eyes. There are similar instructions for drawing animals that fit certain roles from baby animals to villains to completely clueless animals and much more.

Author: Christopher Hart | Publication Year: 2016 | Format: Paperback | Page Count: 256 | Target Audience: Teens, Adults, Art Students | Skill Level: Beginner/Intermediate | Key Topics Covered: Animal anatomy, expressions, movement, composition

  1. How to Draw Cool Stuff by Catherine V. Holmes

Leaving the generic title aside, this book does have a lot of cool stuff in it. At its heart, it is a very simple drawing book aimed at teachers and students. As a result, it's mostly suited for children and early beginners.

If you've got some amount of experience as an artist, it's better to buy a more advanced book. In fact, this is a series of books. If you want a more advanced book, you could consider purchasing the other, more focused installments in this series.

Contents

Each chapter of the book starts off with a small introduction to the technique, fundamentals, and how to start your paintings with an end goal in mind.

However, right after, it wastes no time diving right into step-by-step illustrations. This book teaches you the basic principles of illustration by showing you how to draw simple shapes that eventually turn into complex drawings.

The best feature of this book is that, at the end of every chapter, there is a series of fun and hands-on exercises. These exercises will help you look at an object or a figure as an artist would - as a series of interconnected lines, shapes, and other elements. Also, these exercises will ensure you retain whatever you learned in that chapter.

From hyperrealistic portraits to holiday themes and tropes to drawings of tattoos, How To Draw Cool Stuff makes everything a cakewalk and explains everything as you would to a 5-year-old, literally.

Author: Catherine V. Holmes | Publication Year: 2014 | Format: Paperback | Page Count: 253 | Target Audience: Kids, Teens, Adults, Art Students | Skill Level: Beginner/Intermediate | Key Topics Covered: Optical illusions, 3D shapes, shading, textures

  1. Modern Cartooning by Christoper Hart

This is the third book by the same author on our list and is one of his best-known titles. This one takes an in-depth look at character creation for illustrators.

Creating a likable and engaging character is the most important facet of creating a cartoon character. Before you get started with telling your stories, you first have to make up an enigmatic character.

Contents

This book takes away all the guesswork and uncertainty when it comes to creating a cartoon character by simply providing the reader with a very fresh and easy approach. This book is highly influenced by the most popular cartoon characters of our times and aims to show certain similarities among them.

It's s 160 pages long and is full of lively illustrations that provide a guided approach to conceiving and creating interesting characters. Chris's guides are super detailed, and he teaches the reader to observe a drawing and then improve upon it with their own ideas.

This book is chock-a-block full of useful tips and hints, and it will give you all the help you need to let your imagination run riot.

Author: Christopher Hart | Publication Year: 2013 | Format: Paperback | Page Count: 160 | Target Audience: Teens, Adults, Art Students | Skill Level: Beginner/Intermediate | Key Topics Covered: Cartooning styles, character design, storytelling

  1. Humongous Book of Cartooning by Chris Hart

All the other books on this list either focus on certain types of cartoons, like faces, people, animals, etc. or they are beginner's guides to getting started.

None of them are complete or all-around books, though, which cover every aspect of creating cartoons. This book aims to accomplish the hardest task of all - give the reader an artistic vision so they can give their cartoons their own distinct style and shape.

It's the most all-around cartooning book you can buy, which has a huge amount of depth and covers almost everything in today's world of cartoons, making it great value for money.

Contents

This book has over 200 pages and teaches you how to draw almost everything from fantasy characters to background designs to common pop icons.

This book has step-by-step guides on how to draw cartoon people and cartoon animals, retro-style "toons'," and even robots like Wall-E. These guides are detailed and complete in every respect from the design to the composition to explaining exactly what is appealing about the cartoon.

The Humongous Book of Cartooning isn't just big, it has a huge number of tips and hints that Chris is famous for. The eye-catching characters and extensive visuals pack with them more instructions and guidelines than any Chris Hart book before it. In short, if you want to buy one book that covers most of everything about drawing cartoons, this is it!

Author: Christopher Hart | Publication Year: 2011 | Format: Paperback | Page Count: 256 | Target Audience: Kids, Teens, Adults, Art Students | Skill Level: Beginner/Intermediate | Key Topics Covered: Cartooning techniques, character design, storytelling

Best Cartooning Books Comparison Table

Product Author Publication Year Format Page Count Target Audience Skill Level Key Topics Covered
Cartooning | Philosophy and Practice by Ivan Brunetti Ivan Brunetti 2011 Paperback 128 Adults, Art Students Intermediate Cartooning concepts, exercises, history
Cartoon Faces | How to Draw Heads, Features Expressions by Christopher Hart Christopher Hart 2014 Paperback 160 Teens, Adults, Art Students Beginner/Intermediate Cartooning techniques, facial features, expressions
The Mad Art of Caricature | A Serious Guide to Drawing Funny Faces by Tom Richmond Tom Richmond 2011 Paperback 224 Teens, Adults, Art Students Intermediate/Advanced Caricature techniques, exaggeration, composition
Cartooning the Head and Figure by Jack Hamm Jack Hamm 1986 Paperback 160 Teens, Adults, Art Students Beginner/Intermediate Anatomy, perspective, proportions, shading
The Cartoonist’s Big Book of Drawing Animals by Christopher Hart Christopher Hart 2016 Paperback 256 Teens, Adults, Art Students Beginner/Intermediate Animal anatomy, expressions, movement, composition
How to Draw Cool Stuff by Catherine V. Holmes Catherine V. Holmes 2014 Paperback 253 Kids, Teens, Adults, Art Students Beginner/Intermediate Optical illusions, 3D shapes, shading, textures
Modern Cartooning by Christoper Hart Christopher Hart 2013 Paperback 160 Teens, Adults, Art Students Beginner/Intermediate Cartooning styles, character design, storytelling
Humongous Book of Cartooning by Chris Hart Christopher Hart 2011 Paperback 256 Kids, Teens, Adults, Art Students Beginner/Intermediate Cartooning techniques, character design, storytelling

Are there any free online resources for learning cartooning?

Yes, there are many free online resources for learning cartooning, including tutorial videos on YouTube, blogs, and forums where artists share tips and advice. However, keep in mind that not all online resources are of equal quality, and it can be difficult to gauge the accuracy and reliability of information found online.

Can cartooning books help me develop my own style?

Yes, while cartooning books typically teach a specific style or approach to cartooning, they can also provide a foundation for you to develop your own unique style. By learning the fundamentals of character design, anatomy, and composition, you can experiment with different techniques and create your own cartooning style.

Do I need to have drawing experience to read cartoon books?

No, you don’t necessarily need to have drawing experience to read cartooning books. Many books are geared toward beginners and provide step-by-step instructions for drawing basic shapes, characters, and expressions. However, having some basic drawing skills and familiarity with art supplies can be helpful.

How long does it take to learn to cartoon?

The time it takes to learn cartooning can vary depending on your level of commitment and dedication, as well as your natural talent and artistic abilities. Some people may pick up the basics quickly and be able to create simple cartoons within a few weeks, while others may need months or even years of practice to develop their skills.

Are there cartoon books specifically for children?

Yes, cartooning books specifically designed for children use simple language and illustrations to teach basic cartooning skills. Some popular options include “Cartooning for Kids” by Mark Bergin, “How to Draw Cartoons for Kids” by Christopher Hart, and “The Kids’ Guide to Drawing Cartoons” by Mark Kistler.

Can cartooning books help me make a career as a cartoonist?

While reading cartooning books can certainly help you develop your skills as a cartoonist, there are many factors that go into building a successful career in this field. In addition to artistic talent and skill, you may also need to develop business skills, build a portfolio, network with other artists, and seek out professional opportunities in the industry.

Conclusion

Thank you for taking the time to read through our article on the best cartooning books! It's evident that there are several amazing choices out there, each addressing different aspects of the art. We hope that the insights provided in this article have fueled your excitement for cartooning and will assist you in taking your skills to new heights.

Out of these 8 best cartooning books, here are our top three recommendations:

Ivan Brunetti's Cartooning | Philosophy and Practice is an ideal option for those who want to forge their personal style and discover their design and visual language. With Brunetti's lively illustrations and engaging lessons, this book is perfect for intermediate artists who want to deepen their understanding of the cartoon world.

Cartoon Faces | How to Draw Heads, Features, and Expressions by Christopher Hart is a good option for absolute beginners or intermediate artists who want a step-by-step guide on drawing cartoon faces. The detailed sections on various facial features and the coverage of different age groups make this book an essential resource for mastering the ability to convey emotions through cartoon expressions.

The Mad Art of Caricature | A Serious Guide to Drawing Funny Faces by Tom Richmond is the right choice for those who are passionate about caricature art. This book offers a comprehensive guide to observing real-life people and their features, teaching you how to exaggerate them effectively for the perfect caricature. If you want to level up your skills in this specialized form of cartooning, this book is the one for you.

As you continue to explore and develop your cartooning skills, remember that practice is key. Keep experimenting with new techniques, learn from these excellent resources, and most importantly, let your imagination run wild. Stay passionate about your art and have fun on this exciting journey! Happy cartooning!

Related Articles

8 Best Cartooning Books For Artists

11 Best Perspective Books

21 Best Manga Drawing Books

16 Best Maya Books for Beginners & Professionals

25 Best Concept Art Books for Artists

22 Best Drawing Books for Beginners

11 Best Adult Coloring Books That Will Color Your Mood

11 Best Color Theory Books for Artists

Best Watercolor Painting Books Everywhere

Children from the 90s' and earlier times had a lot of fun watching those spectacular superhero movies and cartoon shows.

But to get an action figure inspired by their favorite hero, they had to wait till their parents took them to a toy store, that too a 'good' one.

All this now seems a thing of the distant past, as online toy stores have come into the picture. There are a plethora of such stores right now, each, in turn, having hundreds of options. It's just about logging on to a suitable store and choosing the toy. Then on, it's a matter of minutes, and your toy is booked!

Selecting the right store is the only difficulty you might face, with such a huge number of websites available. This lone task will also become easy for you, as we've picked the 33 best online toy stores from the unlimited choices available.

So, let’s get started, shall we?

Best Online Toy Stores

  1. Amazon

As one of the biggest online stores and perhaps the most obvious inclusion in the list, Amazon needs no introduction. It has a collection of millions of toys of a wide variety as well and hence is evidently the largest available online source of toys.

With great variety comes the difficulty in making the right choice, which is where several filters of Amazon can help you out. The site also lets you check best-sellers and new releases in separate sections, which are updated on a daily basis.

Amazon offers several perks, including free two-day shipping to those who have subscribed to Amazon Prime. For the rest who do not have a Prime subscription, a shipping fee is mostly applicable.

  1. Toy Wiz

For a child who loves to own new collectible toys such as fidget spinners, and special action figures, there is no better place than ToyWiz. You may even find those rare Pokemon cards available in their collection.

Besides, if your little one is waiting for a toy scheduled to release soon, you can book one of the first of the lots through a pre-order sale. There are lots of exciting pre-orders featured on the site.

The company has been in the e-commerce business for more than a decade and hence is a trustworthy name. It is also loved by buyers for the excellent customer service it offers. As for the shipping fees, the standard costs are $5.99 for a seven to ten-day delivery and $29 for a three to five-day one.

  1. Toy Universe

True to its name, this store is indeed a separate world of toys, with thousands of different items available on the website. Despite having started in Australia, it is now delivering orders in New Zealand and the United States as well.

Besides popular brands and new arrivals, you will also find a whole lot of creative and educational games and toys on this website. For instance, the range of art and craft games would help to instill creativity by fueling a child's imagination.

A uniform shipping charge of $9.95 is applicable for orders across Australia, excluding bulky ones. The international charge is calculated during the checkout of an item. It depends upon the location, the items in the order, and the delivery service you choose.

  1. Walmart

The renowned retail store chain in the United States also offers a large online collection of toys to its consumers. By browsing through the toys section of the website, you will discover a lot of offers applicable to many of the items.

This store has several interesting categories of toys available, which will appeal to any child who has that creative streak in him or her. For instance, the pretend-and-play section has toys that let children dress up to be their favorite cartoon or fairytale character.

The website offers free shipping facilities for orders of $35 or more. For purchases less than that amount, a flat fee of $5.99 is charged. But additional charges may be associated with products not bought and sold directly through Walmart.

  1. Toys R Us

An iconic name in the world of Toys, this store went through a tough time in the last few years due to the growth of online toy shopping sites.

Quite recently, it was revived by a partnership with another leading toy company. The Toys R Us website is currently alive and well and is much loved by consumers.

The large variety of toys offered by the store can give tough competition to the leading online e-commerce platforms. Besides, the website also brings you toys from the most sought-after brands such as Disney, Marvel, and Mattel.

Toys R Us has different websites dedicated to different delivery regions and ties to maintain a moderate shipping rate for consumers. The charge is calculated on the weight and dimensions of the items, the shipping method you choose, and the delivery location.

  1. Fish Pond

Another online e-commerce platform that offers an immense variety of toys to choose from is Fish Pond. It has dozens of categories for the toy section, with each category listing hundreds of thousands of options. So there remains little doubt about whether you will get what you are looking for.

Also, you can find the most interesting collectible toys on the website, including exclusive Hot Wheels models and rare DC collectible action figures. For the little Marvel and DC comic lovers, this site has quite a lot to offer!

The icing on the cake is that Fish Pond offers free shipping to its consumers worldwide, which is a rare phenomenon indeed! Thus, gifting a toy to that little cousin of yours who lives far away won't be expensive at all.

  1. Fat Brain Toys

The most interesting aspect of this store is that it specializes in toys that facilitate brain development in children. As such, Fat Brain Toys has carved its own niche in the toy business and is quite popular among consumers.

Each educational learning game and toy available in the store is designed to focus on the intellectual growth of a child. Also, the website has separate sections featuring its new releases and best-sellers, which cater to two different sets of consumers.

The store has a flat shipping rate for its consumers within the United States which is as low as $3.99. The items are shipped via UPS Ground. Whereas, international shipping costs include the standard shipping rate plus the customs fees for the destination country.

  1. Hamleys

One of the earliest names in the world of toys, this store started its journey as early as in the 1700s in London with the name 'Noa's Ark'. Without a doubt, it is one of the best in the business and never fails to impress its customers.

Besides a wide variety of toys, the online store offers innumerable options that come at quite affordable prices, making it all the more popular. Also, the store offers quite a convenient return policy if the toys fail to meet your expectations.

Till now, the online toy store delivers products to 27 regions within Europe. A shipping charge of £3.99 is applicable to items shipped within the UK, while a fee of £9 is charged for delivering to 27 destinations in Europe.

  1. Kohl's

A department store with a diverse and fun-filled toy corner, Kohl's online toy collection has an assortment of some of the finest games and toys available.

The particular categories of toys that impress Kohl's customers are its outdoor toys, children's bikes, wagons, and pools. Also, the filters available on the website are quite convenient, helping customers get just the toy they are looking for.

As for the shipping charges, orders above $75 are eligible for free standard shipping, whereby the product is delivered within 3-6 days. The store also offers a free ship-to-store option. For orders below that amount, a shipping fee of $8.95 is applicable. The 2-day shipping charge for products priced at below $100 is $19.95.

  1. Target

This is another online store that offers a variety of products, including toys, and is quite popular among customers. The affordable prices of all the goods sold here have played a major role in increasing its popularity.

The online store has a huge variety of toys which range from the newest in the market to the antique collectible ones. And all of these come at prices hard to believe!

Target offers free shipping for orders above $35, another factor that contributes to its popularity. Besides, with a Target Red Card, you are eligible for free two-day shipping on the majority of items on the website. The store allows consumers to pick up their orders from their nearest Target store.

  1. eBeanstalk

Are you looking to buy toys suitable for a child of a particular age? In that case, this store will be the right place to search in. There is also a great variety of toys in the store.

A great shopping tool on this site classifies the toys available according to the age and gender they are fit for. This is achieved with the help of experts in child psychology. Interestingly, this store has a collection of attractive furniture for children such as little cabinets, table and chair sets, and school house tents.

Ebeanstalk offers free shipping for orders above $49 and the delivery generally takes two to five days. The store also arranges overnight shipping or international expedited shipping for specific orders, which can be availed by calling on the toll-free number.

  1. The Toy Shop

This is another great online store based in the United Kingdom and belongs to the Entertainer, the largest independent retail company of the country. You can get any The updated stock of the latest toys offered ensures that you get any new arrival.

Besides, a unique present finder feature on the website helps consumers to come up with a perfect toy to gift for a special occasion. Furthermore, they can also sign up for free to an email newsletter on the latest toys and hottest deals available.

As for shipping within the UK, it is free for orders above 39.99£, while a fee of 3.99£ is charged for those below that amount. The Toy Shop also delivers its products worldwide, with shipping charges depending upon the location.

  1. Mattel Shop

The company to come up with world-famous toys such as Barbie and Hotwheels, Mattel can well be called a toy connoisseur. It is another trustworthy name in the business, which has had a steady loyal consumer base.

The online store consists of toys from reputed brands such as Jurassic World, BTS, and Disney's Toy Story. You can also find several rare collectible toys on the website, including action figures, animal figures, and classic playsets. In short, it is a wonderland for toys!

The standard shipping rate for the US is $9.95, while for Canada it is $10. The international shipping fee is as high as $60 for orders of less than $170. Signing up as a VIP member would make you eligible for free shipping offers, discounts on first orders, and many more rewards.

  1. Learning Resources

The online store based in the UK has as much as three decades of experience in toy production, a rare distinction indeed. As the name suggests, the website brings children toys designed to make learning a playful journey.

Categorized according to a child's age, the toys help to build the intellectual ability fit for that age. Each toy is interesting in its own way and would keep a child absorbed, in addition to the fun they would get out of it. Besides, the customers are also guaranteed that the toys are proven safe for the kids.

Apart from the UK, the online store delivers toys to 80 countries across Europe, Africa, Asia, and the Middle East. The shipping charge depends upon the location. For delivery within the UK, free shipping is applicable for products priced at more than 50£.

  1. Big Bad Toy Store

If your little one is a huge Marvel or DC fan, then this is the number one online store to browse through for toys. The store exclusively focuses on action figures inspired by the favorite comic superheroes across generations.

Interestingly, you can find a pre-order collection consisting of some of the best upcoming toys in the block. Among the currently featured toys are a Transformers 2.0 Starscream masterpiece and a statue of the popular Harry Potter character Rubeus Hagrid.

The website offers worldwide shipping, with the charges being calculated based on the product weight and dimensions. The international shipping rates do not include any taxes or customs fees that might be charged in the destination country.

  1. Overstock

This massive online retail store also features a vast collection of new toys and games at quite affordable prices. Over the years, it has become one of the most famous and well-performing online retail platforms.

There is also immense variety in the toys that the site offers. The collection includes some rare categories such as pretend and play and outdoor gaming equipment. You are sure to find some of the most exciting new arrivals as well.

The website offers standard free shipping daily on orders over $45 in 48 states of the US, excluding Alaska and Hawaii. For orders below $45, a charge of $4.95 is applicable.

The online store also delivers to 180 countries across the globe. The international shipping rates depend on the delivery service, the product type, weight and dimensions, and the destination postal code.

  1. Disney

Over the ages, Disney has won the hearts of children and adults alike through its legendary animated shows on t.v and grand big-screen ventures. Besides this, its online store has an ever-attractive collection of toys.

The online Disney store is heaven for kids in the true sense as it features all the legendary action figures from its television shows and animated films. It also includes toys, games, and other merchandise from popular franchises such as Marvel, National Geographic, and Star Wars.

The Disney store offers several attractive deals on toy prices, and the shipping rate varies according to the price range. As for international shipping, the charges depend upon the size of the product and the destination.

  1. John Deere Store

Though this online store is well known for its range of industrial products, it is also a dominant name in the toy business. There are various categories of toys and games on offer in the toy & collectibles section of the website.

The toy vehicles category particularly draws the attention of visitors to the website. This category offers plenty of amazing and rare options to choose from. Some examples are toy tractors of different types, wagons, and remote-controlled monster treads.

To date, the online store delivers products to all states within the US. You will be delighted to know that it offers free shipping for any order worth more than $50. The charge applicable for orders of $25 to $49 is $11, while a fee of $8.5 is charged for orders below $25.

  1. McFarlane Toys Store

The online store is named after the renowned comic creator Todd McFarlane who is also its founder. Hence, it goes without saying that the store features many toys based on some of the incredible characters from McFarlane comics.

The online site brings forth toys that would appeal to different age groups. For instance, while it has action figures of characters from the Batman comics, it also includes a collection of toys based on The Game of Thrones.

Currently, the McFarlane store is featured as a separate toy store on Amazon's website. It also sells its products through many other online e-commerce platforms. The shipping charges applicable for the toys would hence depend on the e-commerce site which you are using.

  1. Imagine Toys

This online toy store based in Michigan has gained a prominent place in the toy industry. It offers a fresh collection of toys to consumers, different from the bulk that is present in mass-market toy stores.

The store offers a vast range of toys that can be plenty of fun for kids and at the same time have great educational play value. Also, the toys have been tested with children of the appropriate age to ensure psychological and educational development.

Furthermore, the store offers a hundred percent guarantee to take back a product you are not pleased with. Currently, the store delivers toys to locations within the US only. The shipping costs are calculated in the weight and dimensions of the items ordered. Deliveries are mostly completed within the next business day.

  1. Fisher Price

A niche online store dealing exclusively in baby toys, Fisher-price is undoubtedly one of the best few out there. The variety of baby toys you will find in this subsidiary of Mattel is immense.

Ranging kick and play piano gyms for infants to play and crawl toys for toddlers, this store has it all. Moreover, the site categorizes its toys according to the age range in months. In this way, it can be all the more easy for you to select the right baby toy for a child.

As regards the shipping charges, Fisher-Price ships order worth more than $50 for free. This offer excludes orders to Puerto Rico, Alaska, and Canada. You can also sign up as a VIP member to be eligible for various offers.

  1. Kmart

Kmart is one of the biggest online retail stores in the US and has gained immense popularity over the last few years. Evidently, the toy collection is huge and encompasses all the toy categories that you can think of.

Every kid cannot like the same kind of toy, and that's something you must always remember while you are getting a toy as a gift. This is why Kmart offers you lots and lots of different types of toys for boys and girls.

Moreover, the online store offers free shipping on orders over $49. Items sold through third-party sellers may be excluded from the free shipping list, so make sure you check the finer details.

  1. LEGO

Another iconic company dating back to 1932, LEGO is one of the world's leading toy manufacturers. The automatic building brick or the LEGO brick, a basic unit of every building game available now, is their very own product.

Apart from the regular categories of product type, price, and popularity, the online store lets you shop by themes and interests as well. This makes the process of choosing the right toy a lot easier.

Also, LEGO often has special sales on the online store where toys are sold at slashed prices. Toys are available on the site even before they reach the shelves of the LEGO stores. Products are shipped all over North America, with standard free shipping on orders above $35.

  1. US Toys

This popular online store features several categories of attractive merchandise for children, including toys and games. The products sold on the site are all listed at affordable prices and hence suit the budgets of one and all.

Apart from having a variety of options for toys, the site also has a classification of party themes where customers can pick their preferred toys for a particular event. The different toys available for each theme can help children explore their creativity.

You can get free shipping for toy orders worth more than $35 at the US Toys online store. For purchases of less than $35, a handling charge of $4.99 is applicable which will automatically apply during checkout.

  1. Kiddlestix Toy Store

This leading toy store in the United States Oklahoma has a quite popular online shopping platform offering an appealing collection of toys.

Toys on this site help to foster the developmental growth of a child while encouraging them to have fun by engaging with the world. The cognitive and emotional well being of the child is also ensured in the process. Besides, there are toys available for several age groups including teens and young adults.

The site ensures a fast, fair, and efficient system of processing and shipping for you. The charges depend upon the shipping method you choose. Accordingly, the shipping cost is determined and the delivery rate is estimated during checkout.

  1. Timbuk Toys

The renowned toy store in Denver has an efficient and popular online store with all kinds of toys that you can think of. There is hardly any toy which you won't be able to find here.

Moreover, the online store offers quite pocket-friendly prices for the items sold here, which makes it hugely popular. Also if you are confused between the innumerable options while choosing a gist, the gift suggestions page is the perfect solution. It has gift certificates, play sets, and many more options featured.

The shipping rates for products on this online store vary with the items ordered and the shipping method chosen. Also, some products may be available through specific methods of shipping such as store pick up.

  1. Rogue Toys

In an age when online toy stores are flooded with new arrivals and pre-order collections, Rogue Toys brings you an assortment of collectible and vintage toys.

The look and feel of the website induce nostalgia, taking you back to the times when the Simpsons and Star Wars were a rage. Apart from iconic cartoon characters and television series, toys are inspired by superheroes and villains from timeless comic books as well.

The online store ships its orders via postal services such as USPS, UPS, and FedEx. You have to choose the service you prefer, and the charge varies accordingly. The shipping rate charged by such services depends upon the weight of the items ordered.

  1. Macy's

The iconic brand that started its journey back in 1858, is currently one of the biggest online fashion retailers. Its online store features a vast section of all sorts of toys available at quite affordable prices.

You will be able to narrow down your search for toys with the help of a number of filters such as age range, toy or game type, characters, and brands. Apart from this, there is also a section that features the top-rated toys by customers.

Macy's ships its products to as many as 100 countries across the world, allowing foreign customers to get hold of their amazing toys. For international shipping, it has partnered with global e-commerce company Borderfree which calculates the cost during checkout.

  1. Kidding Around Toys

Voted the best toys store in New City by the New York Magazine, this store has the perfect toys collection that any child will just love! The website of this store is equally amazing, with its user-friendly interface and the intact collection put forward online.

All the toys that you will find in the store are carefully chosen and organized for suiting a wide range of ages and preferences. Interestingly, the home page of the online store features the top toys on offer under the title "staff-picks".

Kidding Around ships its products within the United States via UPS or USPS. As such, the shipping costs for these postal service companies are applicable.

  1. OP Taylor

Labeled as one of the top toy stores in the world in an article by USA Today, this famous toy store offers toys of hundreds of different kinds. The online toy store can be accessed via Amazon.

OP Taylor has three toy stores at different locations in the United States. Interestingly, many of the toys sold are produced in its store located in downtown Brevard which covers an area of 6000 square feet. The website which is featured on Amazon includes most of the products available at the store.

Amazon's shipping charges and services are applicable for this store's orders. The shipping rate is dependent on the product weight and dimensions and the delivery location.

  1. Tantrum

This impressive online store for gifts and stationery also houses an attractive collection of handmade toys. A variety of colorful toys for different age groups are present in the store.

A unique aspect of Tantrum's toys is that they showcase a fusion of the classic and mid-century styles with the best of modern art. Also, all the toys are curated within the theme of a lively old-fashioned circus.

Any visitor to this online store would be transported to a time of nostalgic beauty and fun. Instances of toys sold on the website are French dolls, Danish mice, and a toy tea set designed in France by Djeco.

The online store ships its products to locations within the United States. The shipping charges vary with the toy being bought and the delivery location.

  1. Buy Buy Baby

A one-stop shop for all baby care products, this online store offers a wide range of toys as well. Its user-friendly interface makes the site easily navigable by anyone.

You shall also find a number of useful filters in the toy section, such as product type, price, ratings, brands, and book themes. Besides, the online store also has a provision for a "price match promise." Consumers are offered similar prices to other stores if they can show proof of getting a better price at another store.

As regards the shipping rate, the online store provides free standard shipping on orders above $30. For orders worth less than that amount, a fee of $5.99 is charged. Currently, the store ships products within the United States only.

  1. Miracle Mile Toy Hall

This online toy store based in Los Angeles has become a leading name in the business due to its rising popularity. Recently, it was voted the best alternative for Toys R Us in a poll conducted by LA Weekly.

You will find it all in this online store, whether it's a unique toddler toy, a building kit, or a dollhouse. There are even some great antique toys available on the website. Furthermore, the online store lets you sort the results based on a number of options such as popularity, price, rating, and the latest items.

Currently, the store delivers products within the United States only. The shipping method and subsequent costs are calculated before checkout based on the destination postal code.

Conclusion

With this, we come to the end of our comprehensive list of the 33 best online toy stores. We hope the task of choosing a suitable store will be much easier for you now.

Before we sign off, we would like to put forward the options we consider noteworthy among these online toy stores for their different useful features. Target will be a good website to log on to for someone on the lookout for pocket-friendly options.

Toy Universe offers a greater variety than many other options on the list, making sure that you find the one toy you are searching for. Niche toy stores such as Big Bad Toy Store and Fat Brain Toys will be ideal places if you are sure about the kind of toy you want.

Do let us know whether you agree with our choice in the comments section. Till next time!

Related Articles

17 Best Furniture Stores in Houston Today

40 Best Online Gardening Stores

21 Best Online Antique Stores

All 17 Online Craft Stores DIY Projects of Any Nature

15 Best Furniture Stores In Chicago Today

In every kitchen spices and salts are being used, they add flavor and taste in an unmistakable manner. Cooking is nothing without spices and most of us would love to have them at hand during the cooking process. Showcased below an organized creative kitchen storage idea has been envisioned to shelter your spices in line, at you grasp, ready to be used at any given time. The idea follows the same thread of thought as in "How to Build a Hidden Cabinet Knife Drawer Safe For Children ", article published a few days ago on Homesthetics.

Creative Kitchen Storage Idea-Under Cabinet Spice Rack

Creative Kitchen Storage Idea-Under Cabinet Spice Rack

In the search of incredible we have found under the cabinet spice racks that you can purchase directly if crafting is not an option, cast a glance over the items showcased below:

Hardwood Under Cabinet Organizer by Axis

Hardwood Under Cabinet Organizer1

Hardwood Under Cabinet Organizer2

The small simple solution uses natural wood, comes at a very affordable price, and uses no mechanisms, sacrificing comfort to boost resilience a great deal, you can easily nestle the item in your kitchen design by painting it.

Details here.

Handmade Hardwood Under Cabinet Mounted Spice Rack

Handmade Hardwood Under Cabinet Mounted Spice Rack (2)

Handmade Hardwood Under Cabinet Mounted Spice Rack (3)

Handmade Hardwood Under Cabinet Mounted Spice Rack (4)

A great ergonomic design defines this storage option. The rack is handmade and the materials used are of a very high quality. Mechanisms are making it very practical and comfortable to use throughout the day.

 

What do you think? Would you like to make these creative kitchen storage ideas your DIY project for this weekend or will you purchase custom storage solutions for your household? We would love to hear your opinion in the comment section below.

In order to not ruin your doors and walls to hang garlands, use adhesive hooks, ribbons, garland hangers, and twisty ties. You can also use fishing lines, zip ties, and floral wires to secure your garland in its place. 

Christmas décor is incomplete without a hanging garland around the front door. They help complete the look of the holiday season, like spring, fall, or Easter. It provides that cheery and merry feeling that makes a special occasion actually special. So, hanging a garland is one of my favorite things to do around Christmas. 

Yet, hanging a Christmas garland usually means drilling or hammering holes to put nails on the door frame, wall, or mantels. These permanent holes really ruin the look of your wall or door, and destroy its original look. Some people are also not so handy with the required tools. 

To avoid this exact problem, I have a few solutions here to help you hang a garland or a Christmas wreath without damaging your walls, doors, or mantels. 

Materials You Can Use

  • Adhesive hooks
  • Decorative ribbon
  • Garland hangers
  • Twisty ties
  • Nylon fishing line
  • Craft/Floral wire
  • Zip ties

How to Hang Garland Around Front Door

1. Using adhesive hooks

1. Using adhesive hooks

Adhesive hooks, or command hooks, are a great way to hang a Christmas garland or wreath. They come in different varieties of strength and hold up your garland without leaving any mark on the wall or door. There is no permanence of position either. You can move the hooks around to get the exact desired look.

You can use hooks for walls, doors, and staircases as well.

Hang garland on a door/wall using adhesive/command hooks

Follow the following instructions to get the perfect garland look on a wall.

  • Clean and dry the surface before applying the adhesive/command hooks
  • Apply the adhesive/command hooks at the desired positions
  • Hang garland on the hooks

Helpful Trick

Check the adhesive hook’s weight limit to make sure it can support your garland for extended periods of time.

Hang garland on a staircase using adhesive hooks

  • Clean and dry the surface of the staircase railing
  • Stick the adhesive hooks at the desired positions
  • Hang your garlands on the hooks
  • Add extra hooks in between to support the garland’s weight
  • Spread out the garland’s foliage to hide the hooks

Helpful Trick

Use clear wire or zip ties to organize your holiday garland further.

2. Using a decorative ribbon or twine

2. Using a decorative ribbon or twine

Decorative ribbons or twines add just the right amount of cheer to any holiday décor. So, they are the perfect option to help secure your garlands and wreaths.

Hang garland on a door/wall using decorative ribbons or twines

  • Tie the ribbon or twine to both ends of the garland
  • Tie the remaining ends of the ribbon or twine to a hook or any supportive place
  • Make the knot as elegant and crafty as possible to enhance the look

Hang garland on a staircase using decorative ribbons or twine

  • Wrap the garland around the staircase railing in the way you want
  • Now wrap the ribbon around it
  • Tie the ribbon or twine around the railing to secure the garland in place

Helpful Trick

Use a Christmas-themed ribbon to enhance the look of the holiday garland.

3. Using a garland hanger

3. Using a garland hanger

Hanging a garland is made so much easier by using a metallic garland hanger. Since it uses spring tension to secure the garland in place, there is no use in drilling or hammering holes. Garland hangers are available for both single and double doors.

How to hang a garland using a garland hanger

  • Mount the garland hanger and adjust it according to your door’s width
  • Loop the garland over the center and the corner of the hanger
  • Adjust and fluff the foliage of the garland to fit your doorframe

Helpful Trick

To know how much garland you need for your door, double the length of the door and add the door’s width to that.

4. Using twisty ties

4. Using twisty ties

Twisty ties are an easy and colorful way to secure your garland to your staircase railing. Give your hallways Christmas cheer using these.

How to hang a garland on a staircase using twisty ties

  • Wrap the garland around your staircase railing in the style you want
  • Place a twisty tie every two feet to secure the garland in place
  • Make sure the twisty ties are twisted enough to ensure extra support

5. Using a nylon fishing line

5. Using a nylon fishing line

Nylon fishing lines are an efficient way to tie a garland around the railing of your staircase since it helps to secure its place tightly.

Hanging garland on a staircase using a nylon fishing line

  • Start wrapping the garland around the railing from the bottom of the staircase
  • Wrap the nylon line around one end of the garland and the top of the banister
  • Tie a knot in the nylon line to make sure the garland stays in its place
  • Repeat the same method at the top of the staircase
  • Fluff the foliage of the garland to keep the nylon line out of view

Helpful Trick

Tie the center of the garland to the railing of your staircase to showcase a draping effect.

6. Using zip ties

6. Using zip ties

Using a zip tie is pretty similar to using floral wire.

Hanging garlands on a wall/door using zip ties

  • Tie loops onto the garland using zip ties
  • Hang the loop of the zip tie to existing hooks on your wall

Alternatives to garlands

Apart from a Christmas garland, you can also charm up the holiday season by hanging wreaths as well as ribbons. Christmas laser lights are also becoming extremely popular these days as Christmas and holiday décor.

You can follow the following step-by-step instructions to hang a wreath around your house this holiday season.

Hanging a wreath using adhesive hooks

  • Follow the same method as for the garland
  • Hang your wreath on the hooks in the desired position

Hanging a wreath using nylon fishing line

  • Place a hook on the inner side of your door frame, with the part with the hook facing downwards
  • Tie one end of the nylon line around the hook and make a knot to secure it in place
  • Make sure the nylon line can go over the top of the door and is long enough to hang your wreath from the desired height outside
  • Tie the other end of the nylon line tightly around the wreath
  • Now, suspend your wreath from the inside of your door

Hanging a wreath using ribbon/twine

  • Loop one end of the ribbon/twine through the center of your wreath
  • Secure the ribbon/twine in place by making a knot with the two ends
  • Find any hook in your desired location to hang the wreath using the ribbon

Helpful Trick

Bind the ribbon using an elegant knot to add a style element.

Hanging a wreath using craft/floral wire

  • Loop the craft/floral wire through the back of your wreath
  • Use the loop to hang the wreath from a hook or a peg
  • Twist the wire to secure it in place
  • Add some decorative ribbon to hide the craft wire

Hanging a wreath using an over-the-door wreath hanger

Most over-the-door wreath hangers are made to fit standard-size doors and are made using a metallic frame. Thus, they are an excellent option in case you wish to hang a heavy wreath on your front door.

  • Place your wreath hanger over your door
  • In case you have an adjustable wreath hanger, check the hanging height
  • Hang your wreath on the hanger
  • Fluff the foliage of the wreath to showcase the Christmas spirit

Helpful Trick

Use a level to ensure the wreath hanger is installed straight.

Hanging Christmas lights

Hanging Christmas lights is the best way to kickstart your holiday season. Whether you hang them from your Christmas tree or you hang them outdoors, they definitely add to the Christmas cheer. 

Hanging these lights around your staircase, on your front door, or around your Christmas tree mainly uses those same methods that any Christmas garland requires. But you need to remember to exercise safety and caution while hanging any garland since it can be very easy to hurt yourself. 

How do I determine the length of garland I need for my front door?

As already mentioned in a helpful trick above, you can determine the length of garland you need for your door easily. Just measure the length and width of your front door using a measuring tape. Now double the length and add it to the width of the door. This is the amount of garland you need to wrap around your door once. 

If you want to tie the garland around your front door more than once, adjust the length and width accordingly to get the needed length. 

Can I use suction cups to hang a wreath/garland around my front door?

Yes, you can. There are several suction cup hooks that are designed specifically to hang garlands and wreaths. Make sure to check the weight limit on the suction cup against the weight of your garland or wreath. After that, it’s pretty much the same as using an adhesive hook. 

Clean the area before attaching the suction cup. Give the cup a tug, and you are ready to attach your garland or wreath. 

How do I store the garland after the holiday season is over?

After the holiday season comes and goes, and the garland is done spreading its cheer, it is time to store it away safely. Follow these steps to store your garland securely. After all, you might require them during the next holiday season. 

  • Remove any of the added ornaments, ribbons, bells, etc. 
  • Lay the garland flat and fold it in half 
  • Gently align all the stems in the same direction 
  • Layer all of it in a large Sterilite bin 

The Sterilite bin helps to keep the bugs and the moisture away, protecting your precious garlands from getting ruined. It also helps to preserve the shape of the garland so that you can reuse it next year. 

Will the garland be secure if I use tape to hang it around my front door?

You can technically use a few pieces of scotch tape to hang a garland around your front door. But don’t expect it to stay in place for longer than a few hours. This is because the adhesive power of scotch tape is not powerful enough to secure the garland in place for a long time. 

Duct tape might be powerful enough to ensure longevity. But it will surely ruin the look of your perfect Christmas garland with its dull gray color. 

Can I reuse the materials I use to hang the garland next year?

It depends on what material you’re asking about. You can definitely store away the adhesive hooks, wreath hangers, garland hangers, and ribbons and use them for decoration next year as well. 

However, in the case of twine, floral wire, zip ties, nylon fishing line, and twisty ties, it is best to throw those away. Buy them afresh next year to make sure they perform their functions properly. 

How do I ensure that the garland hangs evenly around my front door?

You can use a leveler to ensure the garland hanger is secured in a straight line. You can also use a scale or ruler to ensure the adhesive hooks or the suction cups are attached in a straight line. Additionally, make sure the length of the garland is enough to be wrapped around your front door. All this will help ensure that the garland hangs evenly around your door. 

Conclusion

Who doesn’t like to add some Christmas cheer in the form of decorations? Plus, you don’t have to ruin your precious walls or doors to hang these decorations. Whether it’s a festive garland or a charming wreath, there is no need to ruin your freshly painted walls or your newly varnished doors.

Just use all these super easy methods to hang your garlands and wreaths without using nails. Save your walls and save your doors. And have a very Merry Christmas!

Homesthetics © 2025 DMCA.com Protection Status